source: https://www.powanjuan.

cc/tongren/18072

I started with a succubus physique, and I ruined the ninja world (1-145)

I started with a succubus physique, and I ruined the ninja world. Author: Writer
Shi Shuang
Introduction:
Hefeng traveled to the Naruto world and became Kakashi's younger brother. At the
same time, he was bound to the favorability system and awakened the succubus
physique! Whether it is the opposite sex or the same sex, the new attraction is
full! As long as you gain favorability, you will receive rewards.
At this point, the entire ninja world has changed its style of painting. Shimura
Danzo: Hatake Hefeng should be cultivated into the roots. He will become a big
killer with roots that penetrate other ninja villages.
Sarutobi Hiruzen: Hatake Hefeng has understood the perfect will of fire, and he
will be the strongest bond with Konoha. Xirihong: Hefeng, my family raises...
Chapter 1 The Hatake Twins
Konoha 37th year, September 15th.
Konoha Hospital.
Hatake Sakumo stood alone outside the door of the delivery room, pacing back and
forth.
At this moment, even though he was an elite jounin of Konoha, and the title of
'White Fang' frightened everyone in the ninja world, he could not remain calm.
Just because his wife was being treated in the operating room for massive bleeding.
"There must be nothing wrong with you." Listening to the voices in the operating
room getting quieter and quieter, Hatake Sakumo's whole heart seemed to be tightly
grasped by an invisible big hand.

gone
As the door to the operating room opened, a medical ninja with blood-stained hands
and several nurses walked out with their heads lowered. Two of the nurses were
pushing two strollers.
The leading medical ninja whispered: "I'm sorry, Lord White Fang, but during the
operation, the hidden injuries accumulated by your lady over the years broke
out..."
With the doctor's silence, Hatake Sakumo swallowed and didn't show anything. He
just looked at the stroller behind him.
He was a little uneasy and whispered: "What about our children?"
"They are twins. Their mother protected them very well."
"Is that so... Keiko did her best..."
---
Konoha 41st year, September 15th.
On Konoha Street.
"Nissan, what kind of birthday gift will our father give us today?"
The person who spoke was named Hatake Hefeng, and he was the second son of Hatake
Sakumo. The person accompanying him was naturally the famous chakra measuring unit
in later generations, Hatake Kakashi.
Hatake Hefeng and Kakashi look almost identical, but have completely different
temperaments.
Kakashi wears a half-covered mask, his silvery white hair looks particularly
strong, and his childish eyes seem to hide the unique sharpness of the 'White
Fang'.
Hatake Hefeng, on the other hand, did not cover his face at all. His delicate and
breakable face was paired with his long white hair. Although he was wearing men's
clothing, the first impression he gave people must be : This little girl is so
cute, you must protect her.
The reason for all this is naturally that Hatake Hefeng is a reincarnation. He died
of illness in a place called Earth and was reincarnated into the world of Naruto.
From the moment he was reincarnated, he was bound to a favorability system, and the
system's novice gift package included something called "The Ultimate Succubus
Physique."
I don’t know if He Feng has been blessed with this physique for fighting. After
all, he has never really fought with anyone yet. He just does the most basic
exercises every day according to Shuo Mao’s arrangements.
In addition to this physique, his favorability system can also issue rewards based
on everyone's favorability towards him.
The quality of rewards will be distinguished according to each person's strength.
For example, a passerby would only give He Feng one or two points of chakra, or a
little money.
So far, Hefeng has only received relatively good rewards from his father, Sakumo
Hatake, and his brother, Kakashi Hatake.
Among them are the "Top Sword Technique Talent", "Top Chakra Changing Talent", "Top
Taijutsu Talent" and some scattered "Chakra Upper Limit" from Hatake Sakumo
"Advanced thunder attribute chakra talent", "advanced sword skill talent" and "low-
level space ability talent" from Hatake Kakashi
It's not that Kakashi's favorable impression of He Feng is low. The main reason is
that Kakashi is currently too weak. He hasn't even gone to ninja school yet and has
only learned the most basic chakra extraction and some taijutsu.
"As for gifts, we will go to ninja school next year. I think my father may give us
some ninja tools and formally teach us Hatake swordsmanship."
Kakashi thought for a moment and then expressed his guess.
"Is that so? Brother, you can work hard to learn your father's sword skills so that
you can protect me in the future." He Feng said softly to Kakashi.
"Well, I will protect you." Kakashi looked at his younger brother firmly.
He has not seen his mother since he was born. The so-called eldest brother is like
father. Although he was only born a little earlier than He Feng, Kakashi still put
himself in the same position as his father when facing He Feng.
He wants to protect his younger brother.
At this moment, a strangely dressed peer appeared next to them.
The man gasped and said loudly: "Kakashi, you are not the only one who will protect
He Feng, I, Metkai, will also protect He Feng, my best friend in the future! This
is the only youth!" "
He is obviously four years old, but when Metky talks about youth, he doesn’t look
youthful at all.Violation.
He Feng also raised his eyes and looked at Metkai with a smile. He encouraged him
in his slightly feminine voice: "It's Kai. I believe you will do it. You have been
working so hard."
[Metkay’s favorability +1]
[Acquire Metkai physical skills talent (small)]
He Feng's system will not help him become stronger directly, but it will infinitely
raise his future ceiling, which is what He Feng is happy to see.
"Ah! Hefeng, you are indeed my best friend, and Kakashi, you must continue to work
hard!"
Metkai shouted loudly, "Double the training! Run fifty laps around Konoha Village
again!"
After saying that, he rushed away.
Watching Metkai's leaving figure, Kakashi was a little dissatisfied with the fact
that he was so familiar with him and looked at his brother with such strange eyes.
"Humph, you're an idiot who only knows taijutsu." Kakashi commented.
He Feng just smiled and did not refute Kakashi.
After all, he is his elder brother, and he can only help Kakashi withstand the kick
that Metkai prepared for him in the future.
Along the way, He Feng and Kakashi could always hear the undisguised praise and
appreciation of He Feng from passers-by.
Both He Feng and Kakashi are already immune to this. Sometimes Kakashi will wonder
why He Feng looks so cute even though they look the same.
When they returned home, the two of them smelled the fragrance coming from the
kitchen.
This is their father, Hatake Sakumo, cooking.
Over the years, Hatake Sakumo has become both a father and a mother, and his
cooking skills have become as good as his knife skills.
"I'm back." Kakashi said first.
"Me too." He Feng agreed.
In the kitchen, Hatake Sakumo also came out with a plate of grilled fish.
Hatake Sakumo can cook many things, but the one he is best at must be this
exclusive grilled fish.
At the dinner table, after the brothers finished eating, Sakumo also took out the
birthday gifts he had prepared for them.
"Kakashi, Hefeng, as your younger brother, is more talented than you. As an older
brother, you can't be left too far behind." Hatake Sakumo held a short sword in his
hand. Although it was not his White Fang, it was The color alone is no worse than
white teeth.
"I entrusted the knifesmith to design this knife specifically according to your
body type. You must practice hard in the future."

Chapter 2 Teaching, Flagwood Sword Technique

As the eldest brother, Kakashi has a short sword given by Sakumo, and He Feng is no
exception.
"He Feng, you told me before that you wanted to learn double swords. Father, I also
studied a little bit when I was free, and found a swordsmith to forge these two
short swords for you." Hatake Sakumo took out another sword. Two identical daggers
were handed to He Feng.
"Although there has never been a double sword in the history of our Hatake family's
swordsmanship, it is said that swordsmanship never changes without departing from
its sect. Kakashi is the same and you are the same. I believe that you can all walk
out of your own way in swordsmanship. After all, You are my sons, Konoha White
Fang, Hatake Sakumo."
At this time, Sakumo was very high-spirited. He himself had made great
contributions in the Second Ninja War. His reputation as Konoha White Fang was
known to everyone in the Ninja World, so White Fang also had his own reputation.
pride.
He stood up and said seriously: "Since you two brothers have taken over my sword,
it means that you are ready. This is the chakra extraction method. You can try to
extract chakra tonight, starting tomorrow. I will formally train you two."
"Yes! Father!" the two brothers said in unison.
Early the next morning, while the two brothers were still sleeping in bed, they
were hit by Sakumo Hatake, who was holding a wooden sword.
"The sun is almost shining on your buttocks, why don't you go to the morning
training? Whether you are practicing ninjutsu, swordsmanship or physical skills,
you cannot do without good physical fitness. Today you have only one goal, physical
training!"
Hatake Sakumo said sternly.
It is not easy for him to raise a child by himself. If he wants his son to grow up
healthily, in addition to being a loving mother, he must also play the role of a
strict father.
Looking at the serious expression on Hatake Sakumo's face, Hefeng and Kakashi
couldn't tell whether their father was really angry or fake, so they had no choice
but to get dressed, wash their faces and leave the house.
Coincidentally, as soon as they stepped out of the house, they saw Metkai running
away.
Sakumo stood behind the two of them, "What are you looking at? Why don't you catch
up?"
"yes!"
……
The thirtieth day.
He Feng's talent, which had been strengthened due to the system, had gradually been
revealed.
In just one month, his physical strength has surpassed that of Metkai, and his
chakra reserves have reached the level of an average chuunin.
Hatake Sakumo was also very surprised by this. Although he had expected it, he was
still shocked when He Feng's talent showed up.
"Ah! Today's content is finally finished! I'm so tired." He Feng took a long
stretch and waved his arms to relax.
Metkai on the side looked at He Feng who exuded such charm and swallowed
involuntarily. He Feng was getting cuter and cuter...
Metkai shook his head violently, and then saw Kakashi's murderous eyes. Metkai
responded with a look: He Feng is my best friend, so don't think too much about it.
[Metkay’s favorability +1]
【Trigger favorability critical hit】
[Obtain fragments of the Eight Gate Dunjia Formation (1/8)]
[Fragments of the Eight Doors Dunjia Formation: Collect them together to learn the
Eight Doors Dunjia Formation]
------------------xxxx----------(for more novels (185941)join:
https://discord.gg/SZxTKASsHq)----------

I started with a succubus physique, and I ruined the ninja world. Author: Writer
Shi Shuang
Introduction:
Hefeng traveled to the Naruto world and became Kakashi's younger brother. At the
same time, he was bound to the favorability system and awakened the succubus
physique! Whether it is the opposite sex or the same sex, the new attraction is
full! As long as you gain favorability, you will receive rewards.
At this point, the entire ninja world has changed its style of painting. Shimura
Danzo: Hatake Hefeng should be cultivated into the roots. He will become a big
killer with roots that penetrate other ninja villages.
Sarutobi Hiruzen: Hatake Hefeng has understood the perfect will of fire, and he
will be the strongest bond with Konoha. Xirihong: Hefeng, my family raises...
Chapter 1 The Hatake Twins
Konoha 37th year, September 15th.
Konoha Hospital.
Hatake Sakumo stood alone outside the door of the delivery room, pacing back and
forth.
At this moment, even though he was an elite jounin of Konoha, and the title of
'White Fang' frightened everyone in the ninja world, he could not remain calm.
Just because his wife was being treated in the operating room for massive bleeding.
"There must be nothing wrong with you." Listening to the voices in the operating
room getting quieter and quieter, Hatake Sakumo's whole heart seemed to be tightly
grasped by an invisible big hand.

gone
As the door to the operating room opened, a medical ninja with blood-stained hands
and several nurses walked out with their heads lowered. Two of the nurses were
pushing two strollers.
The leading medical ninja whispered: "I'm sorry, Lord White Fang, but during the
operation, the hidden injuries accumulated by your lady over the years broke
out..."
With the doctor's silence, Hatake Sakumo swallowed and didn't show anything. He
just looked at the stroller behind him.
He was a little uneasy and whispered: "What about our children?"
"They are twins. Their mother protected them very well."
"Is that so... Keiko did her best..."
---
Konoha 41st year, September 15th.
On Konoha Street.
"Nissan, what kind of birthday gift will our father give us today?"
The person who spoke was named Hatake Hefeng, and he was the second son of Hatake
Sakumo. The person accompanying him was naturally the famous chakra measuring unit
in later generations, Hatake Kakashi.
Hatake Hefeng and Kakashi look almost identical, but have completely different
temperaments.
Kakashi wears a half-covered mask, his silvery white hair looks particularly
strong, and his childish eyes seem to hide the unique sharpness of the 'White
Fang'.
Hatake Hefeng, on the other hand, did not cover his face at all. His delicate and
breakable face was paired with his long white hair. Although he was wearing men's
clothing, the first impression he gave people must be : This little girl is so
cute, you must protect her.
The reason for all this is naturally that Hatake Hefeng is a reincarnation. He died
of illness in a place called Earth and was reincarnated into the world of Naruto.
From the moment he was reincarnated, he was bound to a favorability system, and the
system's novice gift package included something called "The Ultimate Succubus
Physique."
I don’t know if He Feng has been blessed with this physique for fighting. After
all, he has never really fought with anyone yet. He just does the most basic
exercises every day according to Shuo Mao’s arrangements.
In addition to this physique, his favorability system can also issue rewards based
on everyone's favorability towards him.
The quality of rewards will be distinguished according to each person's strength.
For example, a passerby would only give He Feng one or two points of chakra, or a
little money.
So far, Hefeng has only received relatively good rewards from his father, Sakumo
Hatake, and his brother, Kakashi Hatake.
Among them are the "Top Sword Technique Talent", "Top Chakra Changing Talent", "Top
Taijutsu Talent" and some scattered "Chakra Upper Limit" from Hatake Sakumo
"Advanced thunder attribute chakra talent", "advanced sword skill talent" and "low-
level space ability talent" from Hatake Kakashi
It's not that Kakashi's favorable impression of He Feng is low. The main reason is
that Kakashi is currently too weak. He hasn't even gone to ninja school yet and has
only learned the most basic chakra extraction and some taijutsu.
"As for gifts, we will go to ninja school next year. I think my father may give us
some ninja tools and formally teach us Hatake swordsmanship."
Kakashi thought for a moment and then expressed his guess.
"Is that so? Brother, you can work hard to learn your father's sword skills so that
you can protect me in the future." He Feng said softly to Kakashi.
"Well, I will protect you." Kakashi looked at his younger brother firmly.
He has not seen his mother since he was born. The so-called eldest brother is like
father. Although he was only born a little earlier than He Feng, Kakashi still put
himself in the same position as his father when facing He Feng.
He wants to protect his younger brother.
At this moment, a strangely dressed peer appeared next to them.
The man gasped and said loudly: "Kakashi, you are not the only one who will protect
He Feng, I, Metkai, will also protect He Feng, my best friend in the future! This
is the only youth!" "
He is obviously four years old, but when Metkai calls him youth, it does not seem
inappropriate at all.
He Feng also raised his eyes and looked at Metkai with a smile. He encouraged him
in his slightly feminine voice: "It's Kai. I believe you will do it. You have been
working so hard."
[Metkay’s favorability +1]
[Acquire Metkai physical skills talent (small)]
Hefeng’s system will not help himAs he continues to become stronger, his future
ceiling will be infinitely raised, which is something He Feng is happy to see.
"Ah! Hefeng, you are indeed my best friend, and Kakashi, you must continue to work
hard!"
Metkai shouted loudly, "Double the training! Run fifty laps around Konoha Village
again!"
After saying that, he rushed away.
Watching Metkai's leaving figure, Kakashi was a little dissatisfied with the fact
that he was so familiar with him and looked at his brother with such strange eyes.
"Humph, you're an idiot who only knows taijutsu." Kakashi commented.
He Feng just smiled and did not refute Kakashi.
After all, he is his elder brother, and he can only help Kakashi withstand the kick
that Metkai prepared for him in the future.
Along the way, He Feng and Kakashi could always hear the undisguised praise and
appreciation of He Feng from passers-by.
Both He Feng and Kakashi are already immune to this. Sometimes Kakashi will wonder
why He Feng looks so cute even though they look the same.
When they returned home, the two of them smelled the fragrance coming from the
kitchen.
This is their father, Hatake Sakumo, cooking.
Over the years, Hatake Sakumo has become both a father and a mother, and his
cooking skills have become as good as his knife skills.
"I'm back." Kakashi said first.
"Me too." He Feng agreed.
In the kitchen, Hatake Sakumo also came out with a plate of grilled fish.
Hatake Sakumo can cook many things, but the one he is best at must be this
exclusive grilled fish.
At the dinner table, after the brothers finished eating, Sakumo also took out the
birthday gifts he had prepared for them.
"Kakashi, Hefeng, as your younger brother, is more talented than you. As an older
brother, you can't be left too far behind." Hatake Sakumo held a short sword in his
hand. Although it was not his White Fang, it was The color alone is no worse than
white teeth.
"I entrusted the knifesmith to design this knife specifically according to your
body type. You must practice hard in the future."

Chapter 2 Teaching, Flagwood Sword Technique

As the eldest brother, Kakashi has a short sword given by Sakumo, and He Feng is no
exception.
"He Feng, you told me before that you wanted to learn double swords. Father, I also
studied a little bit when I was free, and found a swordsmith to forge these two
short swords for you." Hatake Sakumo took out another sword. Two identical daggers
were handed to He Feng.
"Although there has never been a double sword in the history of our Hatake family's
swordsmanship, it is said that swordsmanship never changes without departing from
its sect. Kakashi is the same and you are the same. I believe that you can all walk
out of your own way in swordsmanship. After all, You are my sons, Konoha White
Fang, Hatake Sakumo."
At this time, Sakumo was very high-spirited. He himself had made great
contributions in the Second Ninja War. His reputation as Konoha White Fang was
known to everyone in the Ninja World, so White Fang also had his own reputation.
pride.
He stood up and said seriously: "Since you two brothers have taken over my sword,
it means that you are ready. This is the chakra extraction method. You can try to
extract chakra tonight, starting tomorrow. I will formally train you two."
"Yes! Father!" the two brothers said in unison.
Early the next morning, while the two brothers were still sleeping in bed, they
were hit by Sakumo Hatake, who was holding a wooden sword.
"The sun is almost shining on your buttocks, why don't you go to the morning
training? Whether you are practicing ninjutsu, swordsmanship or physical skills,
you cannot do without good physical fitness. Today you have only one goal, physical
training!"
Hatake Sakumo said sternly.
It is not easy for him to raise a child by himself. If he wants his son to grow up
healthily, in addition to being a loving mother, he must also play the role of a
strict father.
Looking at the serious expression on Hatake Sakumo's face, Hefeng and Kakashi
couldn't tell whether their father was really angry or fake, so they had no choice
but to get dressed, wash their faces and leave the house.
Coincidentally, as soon as they stepped out of the house, they saw Metkai running
away.
Sakumo stood behind the two of them, "What are you looking at? Why don't you catch
up?"
"yes!"
……
The thirtieth day.
He Feng's talent, which had been strengthened due to the system, had gradually been
revealed.
In just one month, his physical strength has surpassed that of Metkai, and his
chakra reserves have reached the level of an average chuunin.
Hatake Sakumo was also very surprised by this. Although he had expected it, he was
still shocked when He Feng's talent showed up.
"Ah! Today's content is finally finished! I'm so tired." He Feng took a long
stretch and waved his arms to relax.
Metkai on the side looked at He Feng who exuded such charm and swallowed
involuntarily. He Feng was getting cuter and cuter...
Metkai shook his head violently, and then saw Kakashi's murderous eyes. Metkai
responded with a look: He Feng is my best friend, so don't think too much about it.
[Metkay’s favorability +1]
【Trigger favorability critical hit】
[Obtain fragments of the Eight Gate Dunjia Formation (1/8)]
[Fragments of the Eight Doors Dunjia Formation: Collect them together to learn the
Eight Doors Dunjia Formation]
--------------------xxxx--------------------

He Feng's eyes lit up. The Eight-door Dunjia Formation was a good thing. If there
was a way to recover, it would be a sure-fire killer weapon that didn't use the
Eight Doors.
Thinking of this, Hefeng's eyes looked at Metkai much softer, and he said softly:
"Kai, you are such a good person."
Kakashi's eyes widened, before he could speak, he heard again: "Brother, too, I
happen to be passing by the meatball shop. Please wait for me while I go buy three-
color meatballs."
Matkai chuckled and said: "As expected of my best friend He Feng, this is youth."
Kakashi's face under the mask had turned black into a casserole. He said angrily:
"Kai, let's compete. Who can do more push-ups? The loser will give the other party
the meatballs bought by He Feng."
"Okay! I promised Kakashi, let's have a youth competition!"
……
Three months later.
Heavy snow was still falling in the sky at this time. Kakashi and Hefeng were
standing in the training ground of Hatake's house. They were only wearing the most
basic training clothes and were slashing with wooden swords over and over again.
The snowflakes did not stay on the two of them, but turned into sweat, inspiring
the brothers to work hard.
Hatake Sakumo stood aside and pointed out the shortcomings of each movement for the
two of them.
"Very good. You have mastered the basic skills very solidly in the past three
months. Next, I will demonstrate our flag wood sword technique for you two. You
will need to tell me your insights later."
After saying that, Hatake Sakumo pulled out the White Fang dagger from his back.
Under Hatake Sakumo's short sword, enemies seemed to be rushing towards him one
after another in front of him, and then they were all killed by them.
At this moment, Hatake Sakumo seems to have become synonymous with contradictions.
His movements are obviously very fast but seem slow. His sword skills are obviously
ordinary but a bit gorgeous. He is obviously just swinging a sword, but he is
wielding more than just a sword.
And the Hatake family’s indomitable spirit.
"Tell me what Hatake's swordsmanship looks like in your eyes." Sakumo stood in
front of the brothers, his figure looking so tall.
Kakashi's eyes were shining brightly, but he pretended to be mature and said: "It's
very sharp. My father is like an invincible spear. As long as my father waves the
White Fang in his hand, nothing can stop him."
Sakumo was very satisfied. He rubbed Kakashi's broken hair and praised: "Yes, the
swords of our Hatake family are the sharpest spears on the battlefield. No one will
have the courage to stop them on the battlefield." A man who knows how to use
flags, wood, swords and hair.”
After saying that, Hatake Sakumo looked at He Feng again, his second son, who was
both proud and troubled by this.
He was proud because He Feng's talent was the strongest he had ever seen, and even
he was far behind him. He was worried because this son didn't look like a son at
all.
On the contrary, she looks like a daughter, especially her increasingly pure and
lovely face, and the strange protective temperament that she exudes all the time.
If it weren't for Sakumao not having any blood-stained ninjas in his own ancestors,
he would have doubted He Feng's awakening. The blood lineage of our ancestors has
been limited.
Shaking his head, Sakumo didn't think too much about all this. After all, it was
good now. At least it looked like he had a son and a daughter, instead of two brats
in the family.
"What about you, He Feng, what do you think of our family's sword skills?"
He Feng recalled Hatake Sakumo's sword skills and replied: "Elegance, our sword
skills have the elegance of taking the enemy general's head out of a million
troops, and also the elegance of thousands of troops retreating from it, just like
Father, you did what you did during the Second Ninja War, and the people in
Sunagakure Village had no choice but to run away when they saw my father."
Hatake Sakumo was very satisfied with the answers given by his two sons, or he
would be satisfied no matter what they answered. After all, they were his pride.

Chapter 3 School starts, Obito finds true love

Konoha 42 years.
According to the original history, this was the year that Kakashi entered school,
the year that Kakashi graduated, and it was also the year that Hatake Sakumo
committed suicide due to rumors in the village.
However, because of Hatake Hefeng, Kakashi is deeply aware of his own shortcomings,
so he will not think of graduating early.
Hefeng was also able to detect the wind direction in the village in time, and
succumbed to the idea of his father, who was full of samurai spirit, to die to
prove his ambition.
At Hatake's house, Hatake Sakumo personally arranged the clothes for He Feng and
Kakashi. At the same time, he told them not to use their power to bully their
classmates in school. Their power was used to protect themselves, their families,
and Konoha. , rather than being used on companions in the same village.
Kakashi nodded repeatedly and said he understood, but He Feng did not.
In addition to protecting himself and his family, his power also gives color to
certain commanders who covet others.
After all, He Feng has been hearing some sounds from the system recently that make
people both love and hate him, such as [Favorability +1 from Danzo Shimura]
[Favorability +1 from Hiruzen Sarutobi].
After all, the power gained by gaining favorability is real, but one of them is
dead and the other is withered. Neither of them is a good thing. Being targeted by
these two people will not end well.
Seeing that He Feng didn't answer him but was thinking about other things, Hatake
Sakumo reached out and knocked He Feng on the head, causing He Feng to cover his
head with red eyes and said with a sigh: "I know."
This sound made Kakashi feel distressed.
He Feng was also helpless. This succubus's physique was truly extraordinary. He was
obviously a man, but he could do something like this that only a little green tea
could do without any burden.
Of course, He Feng would never admit that this was his nature.
Well, absolutely not.
Along the way, Hatake Sakumo led Hefeng and Kakashi. On the way, he saw other
familiar people greeting them warmly and proudly introducing his two sons to each
other.
Among the freshmen who entered the school, the most eye-catching one is undoubtedly
He Feng.
The freshmen, both male and female, were attracted to the two brothers with long
silver-white hair. The girls were whispering and discussing the cold Kakashi
mask.What kind of appearance is it?
The boys were already deeply fascinated by He Fengbai's thin appearance, and he
seemed to be determined not to marry anyone other than He Feng in this life. There
were even twos and threes of boys who were already arguing over who had He Feng's
right to choose a mate.
That is to say, He Feng didn't know about this situation, otherwise he would have
greatly admired the magic of the ninja world. After all, the thoughts of these
students at this time are tantamount to wanting to grasp love at an age when they
can't even control their urine.
While everyone was looking at He Feng, He Feng was also trying his best to find
familiar people and smile at them.
The first thing he saw was Yuhi Hong who was being held by Yuhi Zhenhong. At this
time, Yuhi Hong was the same age as He Feng, and her young face was filled with
expectations for life in the Ninja School.
Perhaps Xirihong noticed He Feng's gaze, and when she turned her head, their eyes
met.
"A good-looking boy." Yuhi Hong said to herself with a slight blush on her face.
She was not confused by He Feng's long hair and recognized He Feng's gender
immediately.
[Yuhihong favorability +1]
【Acquire primary illusion talent】
Perhaps because the succubus's physique showed its power, Yuhi Hong inevitably had
a crush on this boy she met for the first time.
Hefeng's attention did not stay on Yuhi Hong for too long. He saw Ebisu, Metkai,
Nohara Lin, Moonlight Hayate, Shiranui Genma and others one after another.
As for why Obito was not there, it was obvious that he was helping the old lady
cross the road again and was late.
The class students in the Ninja School are assigned to and the teachers in the
class are already determined the moment they sign up.
Soon, each Chuunin teacher led their students back to the class.
The only difference is probably that there are only three or two civilian students
in the class where the ninja students are, and there is not a single ninja student
in the class where the civilian students are.
The teacher who led Hefeng and others this time was from the Sarutobi clan, named
Sarutobi Shinta.
In the class, He Feng consciously sat in the last row, and Kakashi sat calmly next
to He Feng.
And the other vacant seat next to Hefeng became the target of everyone's
competition.
"That position is mine."
"It should be mine, young master!"
"Hmph, I'm from the Sarutobi clan. You guys should get out of my way. That
classmate should be next to me."
"The Sarutobi clan is so domineering. Could it be that I, the Shimura clan, are not
worth mentioning in your eyes?"
"Do you want to try my fist?"
"My sword is not bad at all!"
Seeing his classmates who were so jealous and even fighting over a position, He
Feng was speechless for a while. It was obvious that he still muttered about his
own charm.
Kakashi, on the other hand, had already stood up from his seat, placing one hand on
his back where the short sword was.
Of course, this short knife is made of wood.
No matter how enlightened Hatake Sakumo is, he will not let Kakashi and Hefeng
bring sharpened short swords to the ninja school.
"That's enough! Find a seat nearby for me! Otherwise, just go and stand outside!"
Sarutobi Shinda said loudly.
As a chuunin of the Sarutobi clan, he can still maintain his dignity when dealing
with a group of children.
The moment Sarutobi Shina finished speaking, the students who had been clamoring
for a fight to the death immediately found a seat nearby like eggplants beaten by
frost.
There was also a vacant seat next to He Feng.
"As a new reporter, I don't know you well, and I believe you don't know me either.
So from now on, everyone will come to the podium and introduce themselves."
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
"Let me start with you. My name is Sarutobi Shinta. I am a chuunin of Konoha and
your teacher at the ninja school for the next six years. My favorite food is the
Akimichi family's barbecue. What I hate is the nagging and dreams of the old man in
the family. It’s to become a Jonin, well that’s it, it’s up to you next.”
As Sarutobi Shinta said this, he stepped aside and gave up his position to the
eager students.
"It's so troublesome. My name is Nara Oval. I have no dreams, nothing I like,
nothing I hate, and no dreams."
"My name is Akimichi Shitou. I like to eat barbecued potato chips. I hate that I am
not allowed to eat barbecued potato chips. My dream is to have endless barbecued
potato chips."
The classmates who were introducing themselves said that there were also people He
Feng was familiar with.
"My name is Nohara Rin. I like reading and medical ninjutsu. I don't particularly
dislike anything. I admire Tsunade-sama very much. My dream is to become a medical
ninja like Tsunade-sama who can stand alone."
Several more students finished their introductions, and finally it was Kakashi’s
turn.
At this moment, the classroom door was pushed open with a bang, and an Uchiha man
with a hedgehog head and goggles with an Uchiha Uchiha fan pattern engraved on the
back ran in.
He ignored Sarutobi Shinta's angry eyes and walked straight to the podium and said
loudly.
"My name is Uchiha Obito. I come from the Uchiha clan. I like the food cooked by my
grandma and hate those arrogant clan members. My dream is to become a Hokage. I
want to make other ninja villages look at me with admiration and impress them.
Afraid of the reputation of the Sharingan, you will be frightened when you see my
statue on Hokage Rock!"
After saying that, Obito looked down the stage and happened to see the empty seat
next to He Feng, and was deeply attracted by He Feng.
At this moment, Obito found true love.
Chapter 4 Pure Blood
"I want to kill him." On the seat, Kakashi had quietly pulled out the short sword
from his back and looked at Obito with a gloomy expression.
This late bastard fucked himThere was nothing in the team, and he didn't care at
all, but he really couldn't accept the way Obito looked at He Feng at the end.
However, the big-hearted Obito completely ignored Kakashi who was eager to try next
to He Feng, and instead sat down next to He Feng.
"Classmate, what's your name?" Obito said with an infatuated look on his face.
Hefeng did not answer Obito immediately. Instead, he held Kakashi's hand and said,
"Nisan, it's time for you to introduce yourself. Your classmates and teachers are
waiting."
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Seeing He Feng stopping himself, Kakashi retracted his dagger and glared at Obito,
then nodded to He Feng.
"Brother and sister, that's good." Obito breathed a sigh of relief in his heart.
Just now he thought that his love was over before it even began.
"Obito, don't be so reckless next time. If you piss off my brother, he will really
do it."
At this time, Kakashi's strength is much higher than the original timeline. After
all, even one person working hard can't compare to two people getting involved with
each other.
"Tch, I'm from the Uchiha clan. Anyone under the Sharingan of our Uchiha clan can
only run away." Obito didn't care about He Feng's words. No matter when Obito faced
Kakashi They all maintain the same attitude, which is to be tough-talking.
He Feng did not expose Obito, but made an expression of admiration and
exaggeratedly said: "Hey, have you awakened the Sharingan just after school
started? It's so amazing!"
[Obito’s favorability +1]
[Obito’s favorability +1]
[Obito’s favorability +1]
【Acquire Obito's junior space ninjutsu talent】
In an instant, He Feng's favorability from Obito directly wavered.
After all, in every sense, He Feng was the first person of the opposite sex to
praise him, and he was the one who had a crush on him.
However, Obito did not continue to compile, but touched the back of his head with
some embarrassment, then adjusted his goggles and said firmly: "Of course not, but
as a genius of the Uchiha clan, I will awaken the Sharingan soon." Eyes."
Looking at such naive Obito, He Feng could not imagine that in the future timeline,
he would do something like that to deceive his master and destroy his ancestors.
It can only be said that he is worthy of being an Uchiha who is known as the clan
of love. No matter how deep the love is, it will become more extreme after losing
love.
Thinking of this, He Feng suddenly hesitated.
If he really builds a good relationship with Obito, Old Man Madara will not set his
sights on him in the future.
Although his talent is very good, he still has to have time to realize it. How can
his little arms and legs be stronger than that of the Ninja Shura?
Shaking his head, He Feng suppressed the worries in his heart. The soldiers came to
cover up the water and the earth, but he had better take the immediate benefits
first.
Even if the next three wars start, he still has his father.
After thinking clearly, He Feng showed a sweet smile to Obito, "Well, I believe
you."
【Trigger critical strike】
[Obito’s favorability +5]
【Acquire advanced space ninjutsu talent】
【A Shenwei Space Experience Card】
【Shenwei Space Experience Card: After use, you can enter and exit Shenwei Space
within thirty seconds without any consumption】
"My name is Hatake Kakashi. I like to exercise with my family, especially my
younger brother. I hate people who disturb me and my younger brother. My dream is
to become a strong man like my father and protect him with the knife in his hand.
My brother."
Listening to Kakashi's self-introduction on the stage, Obito's eyes widened, as if
something incredible had happened. He asked He Feng anxiously: "Then... that... do
you still have someone else?" Sister or sister."
Looking at Obito's expression, He Feng laughed a little darkly for a moment, and
explained in detail: "No, the younger brother Nissan mentioned is me."
Obito felt that his world had collapsed, but he raised his head again and stared at
He Feng's long silver-white hair, porcelain doll-like skin, and that face that
could be broken by blows.
"It seems like it's not impossible for boys." This sentence appeared in Obito's
mind.
"I'm going on stage." He Feng said to Obito, then stood up from his seat and walked
onto the podium.
At the same time, Kakashi sat expressionlessly where He Feng had just been.
"Hello everyone, you can call me Hatake Hefeng. Hatake Kakashi is my brother.
That's right. Although I look like a girl, I am actually a boy."
"If you like something... I like to eat grilled fish cooked by my father with my
brother the most. I hate weird and wretched uncles. My dream is... to work hard to
become stronger and protect everyone in the village."
He Feng thought for a moment and decided to let his dream become more like the will
of fire. After all, he was not sure whether the strange and wretched old man he
spoke of had seen him through a crystal ball.
As a teacher, Sarutobi Shinichi crossed his chest and nodded. After hearing so many
dreams, He Feng's dream was indeed the one that was most in line with the will of
fire.
"Very good! Now that all the students have introduced themselves, two of you will
come with me to get the book we are going to study next. The content we are
studying in this class is called Konoha's Will of Fire."
On the other side, inside the Hokage's office.
Sarutobi Hiruzen sat on his seat, with Hatake Sakumo and Shimura Danzo standing
beside him.
"How are our students this year? It seems that the teacher's Ninja School policy is
getting better and better every year. More and more little guys have realized the
true will of fire."
Sarutobi Hiruzen was very satisfied, he boasted to Danzo proudly, after all, he
personally supervised and compiled this edition of Will of Fire.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
"Sakumo, you have given birth to two good sons. They will be another pillar of
Konoha's new generation after Minato."
Hatake Sakumo was very modest: "Hokage-sama is joking. It's still early for these
two brats to become the pillars of the new generation. But Minato, the kid, is
getting better and better under Jiraiya's guidance."
Sarutobi Hiruzen smiled and said: "Yes, the relationship between Minato's child and
Kushina has been getting better and better recently. Maybe I will be able to hold
Minato's child in a few years."
Danzo Shimura snorted coldly, "I have long said that the Nine-Tails Jinchuuriki
should be handed over to me. Only in this way can the true power of the Nine-Tails
be unleashed. Now, we still have to clean up the mess of the Nine-Tails
Jinchuuriki."
"Hiruzhan, He Feng's child is very suitable for my root. He is naturally easy to
win the favor of others. Give him to my root. I will train him to become my most
elite spy in Konoha. He can definitely become a piercer." I think Hatake Sakumo
would also agree with the other ninja village nails.”
Sarutobi Hiruzen glared at Shimura Danzo, his meaning was obvious, "Don't even
think about it."
After all, Hatake Sakumo is still here, and he doesn’t want to discuss this matter
too much with Danzo.
"Danzo, Sakumo, I have to deal with official business." Sarutobi Hiruzen showed the
majesty of the Hokage, lowered his head and dealt with the piled up official
business.
"Yes, Hokage-sama." Hatake Sakumo nodded, and before leaving, he took a special
look at Danzo, the old god, and then left the Hokage building with a teleportation
technique.
As an old friend of Hiruzen, Danzo naturally knew that Hiruzen would not let go for
a while, so he opened the door and left, but before leaving, he still said harshly:
"Hiruzhan, you will regret it!"
"Danzo, I am the Hokage!" Sarutobi said coldly without even raising his head.
Bang——
What followed was the sound of Danzo slamming the door and leaving.

Chapter 5 He Feng, you are so kind

After leaving the Hokage Building, Hatake Sakumo did not return home immediately,
but wandered around the streets of Konoha wearing a mask.
"Have you heard that Konoha White Fang gave up his mission for his teammates,
causing the village to suffer great losses?"
"Yes, I heard about it. I seem to have lost thousands of taels because of this!"
"You obviously lost your thousands of taels to me in the gambling house. What do
you mean you lost because of this? You want me to say that I lost because of this!"
"Tsk, who said I didn't lose the money because of White Fang? I just lost the money
because I heard in the casino that White Fang gave up the mission for his
companions and caused great losses to Konoha. I lost the money because of White
Fang?! "
"I would say that White Fang is not qualified as a ninja. Anyone should know how to
choose for this kind of thing. Why doesn't he know how to choose even though he is
such a big man?"
"Yes, yes, that's what I mean too. Konoha's face was completely humiliated by White
Fang!"
Although Hatake Sakumo was dissatisfied when he heard the slander against him by a
group of civilians on the street who did not know the truth of the matter, he did
not care too much about it.
In his mind, although what he did led to the failure of the S-class mission, he
protected the lives of his teammates, and the long-term benefits of doing so were
higher than one mission.
But this is not the first time Hatake Sakumo has heard such rumors. In this week,
in addition to some unsightly humiliations, there will also be reproaches about why
he did not die to apologize.
Unknowingly, Hatake Sakumo had arrived at Konoha's cemetery.
The ninjas of Konoha are buried here, as well as Hatake Sakumo's wife.
He lowered his head and sat next to his wife's tombstone, placed a pure white
stamen in front of the tombstone, and then gently touched his wife's name on the
tombstone with his hand.
Without saying a word.
……
"As long as there are flying leaves, there will be fire burning. The shadow of the
fire will shine on the village, and then the new leaves will sprout again."
"The so-called will of fire is to protect the important people around you so that
they will not be harmed. Protecting our Konoha Ninja Village is our most important
task. Protecting the Konoha Ninja Village means protecting people and protecting
the people. Ninjas and kids.”
On the podium, Sarutobi Masashi was talking about the book "The Will of Fire".
Except for a few students below who were indifferent to it, most of them agreed
with it and unswervingly approved of this kind of fire. of will.
The person in the audience who admires the Will of Fire the most is naturally the
Uchiha alien Obito.
He said firmly to He Feng through Kakashi: "He Feng, I will definitely protect the
people in the village and gain everyone's approval to become Hokage. Of course, I
will also protect you."
"Obito, my brother doesn't need you to protect him."
"Nissan, Obito-san is kind-hearted after all. You should be more generous to your
classmates."
Nohara Lin, who paid attention here from time to time, also nodded with approval.
She felt that what Hefeng said was right, and what Obito and Kakashi said also made
sense.
But Classmate He Feng is really cute, I really want to hang out with Classmate He
Feng.
Some strange pictures suddenly appeared in Nohara Lin's mind, making her blush for
a moment.
"Ah, why have I become so strange?" Nohara Lin patted her face with her small hand
and muttered unsatisfactorily.
"Lin, what's wrong with you?"
Yuhi Kurenai on the side noticed Nohara Rin's red face and expressed concern.
"No, it's nothing, it's just a little hot, right! It's just a little hot. "
Yuhi Hong looked at Nohara Lin suspiciously, and then sighed: "But He Feng is
really cute, I don't know how good it feels to be rua."
Asma, who had been craning his neck to eavesdrop on the table at the back, suddenly
felt bad.
Could it be that Hong likes pretty boys like Hatake Hefeng instead of real men like
him?
"But it's a pity that He Feng is a boy. It would be nice if he was a girl." Asma
thought.
Sarutobi Shinta on the podium also closed his book at this time and said softly.
"That's it for this class. Next, you can eat the lunch you brought. In the
afternoon we will have shuriken throwing and physical training. Finally, we will
teach you how to refine chakra."
Although the vast majority of the students present have mastered the chakra
refining technique, there are still a few civilian students who do not. He also
said this to those civilian students.
After Sarutobi Shinta left, Obito rushed directly to the table.
"Kakashi, I want to challenge you!"
Obito adjusted his goggles and said loudly.
If this was the original Kakashi who faced Obito's challenge, he would definitely
have dismissed it. After all, the gap between the two was huge, but now Kakashi has
long wanted to teach Obito, a bastard who has been staring at his younger brother,
a lesson. .
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"It's better to go to the training ground here." Kakashi said calmly.

Obito snorted to express his disdain, and then said: "Just here, do you need to go
to the training ground to teach you a lesson?"
After saying that, Obito formed the Seal of Opposition towards Kakashi.
"Hurry up, make the seal first and then I will teach you a lesson." Obito urged.
Kakashi first formed the Seal of Opposition on Obito, and then appeared in front of
Obito in the next second, grabbing Obito's collar with one hand and pulling him off
the table before he could react.
When you come, remember to grab the ground with your head.
With a bang, Obito fell to the ground in the classroom, sprawled out, losing the
ability to continue shouting with Kakashi.
Seeing this, He Feng, who was proficient in brushing up favorability (green tea),
stepped forward and carefully helped Obito up, and wiped the wounds on Obito's face
with the handkerchief he carried.
He Feng said with concern: "Is everything okay, Obito."
Obito immediately grinned and said, "It's completely fine, it's just little
Kakashi."
Hefeng felt it was a bit funny, but he still deliberately said to Kakashi with a
straight face: "Nisan, you are serious, why are you a classmate? Why do you want to
be so harsh? If you have anything to say, just say no."
Kakashi knows his brother very well. He is always so gentle to everyone.
"Ang, I understand. If Obito provokes me next time, I will teach him a lesson."
Kakashi said proudly.
"He Feng, you are such a kind person." Obito was greatly moved and at the same time
brought considerable favorability to He Feng again.
【Obito favorability +1】
【Obito favorability +1】
【Obito favorability +1】
【Acquire mid-level inter-column cell adaptability】
[Acquire a small amount of chakra upper limit]
[Intermediate Pillar Cell Adaptability: It ensures that the host will be successful
when fusing Pillar Cells, and can maximize the power of the Tree Sea's birth. 】
"A Yamato." He Feng complained in his heart, "But Obito's favorability is really a
golden mountain waiting to be mined."

Chapter 6 Succubus physique? Moving spring!

In the training ground, the entire class stood side by side in four rows, and
Sarutobi Shinichi was at the front holding a roster and taking roll call.
"Very good, no one is late. This shows that as students, you are currently
qualified. If you can keep this habit, then your future career as a ninja will also
have a good start. After all, no one Bosses like subordinates who are late."
Sarutobi Shinta put away the roster and continued: "A qualified ninja needs to
master a variety of ninjutsu and adapt to various situations. This not only
requires you to have a smart brain, but also requires you to have a strong body.
physique."
"You brats, please run around the training ground for thirty minutes to warm up.
During this period, you are not allowed to stop under any circumstances. Even if
you crawl, you must complete the thirty minutes for me."
After Sarutobi finished speaking, the freshmen who were only five or six years old
began their long run.
Obito rushed to the front as if he had been given a shot of blood, shouting
something about the glory of Uchiha.
Hefeng, Kakashi and Metkai remained in the middle of the team.
As Sarutobi said, these thirty minutes are just a warm-up. If you use all your
physical strength at this time, you will really have to climb next.
At this time, Lin and Hong ran to Hefeng's echelon.
Lin looked worriedly at Obito, who had run a long way away, "Hefeng, if Obito keeps
running like this, he won't get hurt."
Lin had already met He Feng and others before school started. At that time, He Feng
had already become the favorite of the Konoha villagers by virtue of his special
physique.
As for why Obito only met Hefeng after school started, it was most likely because
he was an Uchiha. He usually stayed with his grandma outside the clan area and
rarely went out.
"Lin, although Obito is essentially a loser, he still has great potential." He
Feng's voice was neither fast nor slow, not at all what it should be like when
running.
"Classmate Hefeng seems to have body odor, it's so cute. I really want toStay next
to him. "Xi Rihong on the side did not speak, but deliberately moved closer to He
Feng.
I don’t know if it’s because of her psychology, but she always feels that she has
endless strength when she is by He Feng’s side.
Nohara Lin also felt the same way. She was still struggling with running. When she
got close to Hefeng and smelled his fragrance, she felt an inexplicable force
rising in her body, supporting her to continue running.
Thirty minutes passed very quickly, and Obito's position as number one only lasted
ten minutes. After that, he has been hanging at the back of the team.
In the end, it was only with the encouragement of He Feng and Lin that Obito
persisted in running for thirty minutes.
For this, the two received repeated thanks from Obito.
"What we are going to do next is the shuriken throwing exercise. I will demonstrate
it to you first, and then you will practice according to my movements."
Sarutobi Shinichi picked up the shuriken placed next to the shooting range, and
then fired it fiercely. The shuriken was inserted straight into the center of the
wooden rake at an extremely fast speed.
Kakashi has little interest in shuriken. He prefers daggers and shurikens to
shuriken.
He Feng imitated Sarutobi's true fighting movements and lost interest after
throwing twice.
The main reason is that Sarutobi's training is too simple, and the actual combat
value can be said to be almost zero.
Not to mention that in the later stages of the ninja battle, either the Buddha or
Susana was killed. He Feng really didn’t know what role a shuriken could play.
Should he use this thing to stab Susana?
That's something only people with funny brains would do.
But Obito is different. As a member of the Uchiha clan, it can be said that he has
no talent for shuriken throwing.
If you throw ten shuriken shots and only one hit the target, you are lucky, and the
only one that hits the target is not thrown at your own target.
Obito was not discouraged and kept practicing happily.
He Feng even doubted whether he needed to slap Obito in front of him before his
talent could be stimulated.
The more you get along with Obito, the more you can feel the difference between
Uchiha opening his eyes and not opening his eyes.
The afternoon training ended quickly. After Sarutobi Shinta announced that school
was over, the students dispersed and formed teams of twos and threes and rushed
home.
"Nissan, my father has something to do and doesn't have time to cook for us
tonight. Let's go to Ichiraku Ramen." Hefeng suddenly said on the way home.
Kakashi was stunned for a moment, then nodded.
"good."
"I want to go too! It just so happens that I can bring home a piece of Ichiraku
Ramen for grandma." Obito raised his hand to express his attitude.
"Where are Lin and Hong?"
Yes, Lin and Hong have been following He Feng since they experienced He Feng's
'wonderful effect' during the warm-up, even on the way home.
The two thought for a while, then shook their heads and said: "We won't go. There
should be food ready at home for us when we go back. Let's eat together next time."
When Obito saw that Lin was not going to eat, he quickly said: "Then next time I
come to treat you, you must come too, Lin."
Lin nodded sweetly, "Okay."
After the two girls left, He Feng and the other three came to Ilaku Ramen.
As for Metkai, he ran back home as soon as school was over. In his words: Youth has
no time to stop. His father is still at home waiting for him to come home for
dinner and training.
Inside Ichiraku Ramen.
At this time, Changpu was still a child the same age as Hefeng, and could only
follow Shouda beside him to hand over some ingredients that were not too heavy.
But this does not change its true role in Ichiraku Ramen - the smile of Acorus is
the best seasoning of 'Ichiraku Ramen'.
"Uncle Hand-made, I want a barbecued pork miso ramen with two eggs in it, and a
seafood ramen for a package." Obito is a regular customer of Ichiraku Ramen. The
first thing he did when he entered the room was to announce his name loudly. need.
He Feng and Kakashi said in unison: "Slap uncle with your hands, just like before,
no coriander."
"Okay, you little guys, sit down and wait for a while, the ramen will be out of the
pot soon!" While working on his hands, he didn't forget to tell his daughter,
"Calamus, go get a glass of water for your three brothers."
"Okay dad." Chang Pu stood on tiptoes and picked up the kettle, walked to the table
and poured a glass of water for the three of them.
As regular customers of Ichiraku Ramen, the three of them are naturally very
familiar with Iris, and they would happily say hello when they meet.
After a while, the steaming hot ramen was put on the table. Hefeng and the three of
them clasped their hands together in a tacit understanding and said in unison: "I'm
starting."
If He Feng scoffed at this kind of thing in his previous life, now he also
understands the meaning of this sentence.
The important thing is not the sentence I started, the important thing is the mood
when eating with friends and the respect for the food.

Chapter 7 Exposing the conspiracy, the enlightened Sakumo Hatake

About ten minutes later, He Feng and the other two finished the ramen in the bowl.
He Feng picked up a tissue nearby and wiped his mouth, then looked along the door
to the head of Sarutobi Hiruzen on the Hokage Rock in the distance.
"Nissan, there are some things that I need to deal with. You and Obito should go
home first. I will go back after I finish handling the matter." He Feng suddenly
said.
Kakashi was a little puzzled. He and his brother were almost inseparable. Why
didn't he know what He Feng would do?
However, Kakashi still chose to believe in his brother. He asked with concern: "Do
you need my help?"
Obito also nodded and said: "I can also help. Hefeng, if you need help, you can
talk to me and Kakashi."
He Feng shook his head and said: "You can't help, butNissan, you can pack a piece
of Ichiraku Ramen to take home. My father is probably still busy with work and
hasn’t eaten. "
"Then I'll get to work first."
After saying that, Hefeng left Ichiraku Ramen alone.
To be honest, the speed at which rumors spread is inherently proliferative, let
alone rumors related to personal 'interests'.
He Feng had a hunch that his father, Hatake Sakumo, might have started to lose his
mind. There were two main reasons why he didn't practice it.
First, he couldn't let go of him and Kakashi, and second, at this time, Sakumo
still firmly believed that the value of his companions was higher than the mission.
His choice was not wrong. No matter how many times that happened, he would choose
to save his teammates.
But Hatake Sakumo didn't know that all this was a trap set by Danzo and Hiruzen
together. Hiruzen wanted to suppress his reputation as the leader of the ANBU.
After all, he was not far away from abdicating his age. , but Hiruzen did not want
to give up the power of Hokage. He planned to cultivate a Hokage that he could
control so that he could continue to control the power.
And Hatake Sakumo was selected as a candidate for the Fourth Hokage by virtue of
his merit, strength and age, and Hatake Sakumo was obviously not the type to
control, so Sarutobi Hiruzen naturally had to weaken Hatake relatively. Sakumo's
competitiveness in the Hokage campaign.
Danzo was even simpler. Until his death, he believed that as long as he became
Hokage, he could lead Konoha to become the largest ninja village in the ninja
world. How could such a self-centered person accept that someone could run against
him for the fourth generation of Hokage?
It's a pity that Sakumo, who was in the middle of the game, couldn't see clearly
these two old swindlers who were corrupted by power. Coupled with his own samurai
spirit, he naturally decided to die to apologize for his crimes and to prove his
ambition.
Sarutobi Hiruzen and Shimura Danzo were also in disbelief about Hatake Sakumo's
death. They just wanted to weaken Hatake Sakumo's reputation and never wanted to
cause Konoha to lose a Kage-level combatant.
It can be said that the death of Hatake Sakumo is one of the biggest mistakes in
Konoha Village.
He Feng shook his head and stopped thinking about those two old guys. He was still
very worried about his father.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

In his previous life, he was abandoned by his parents due to illness and had to lie
in bed and receive donations from society to survive. In this life, he has a real
family, and he will not allow anyone to do anything to his family again.
He Feng walked for thirty minutes before arriving at the outskirts of Konoha
Village, where the Konoha Cemetery is located.
Because his mother was buried here, his father would take He Feng and Kakashi here
almost every week.
Therefore, He Feng judged that his father would have a heart-to-heart talk with his
mother here.
As expected, after entering the cemetery, He Feng saw the 'haggard' figure of
Hatake Sakumo.
Before this, he could not imagine Konoha's 'White Fang', a shadow-level expert who
was feared in the ninja world, showing such an expression.
It can only be said that this rumor has hurt Hatake Sakumo far more than He Feng
imagined.
"Father."
Hefeng looked at Hatake Sakumo with worried eyes, walked up and stood in front of
Hatake Sakumo.
"My mother won't be able to bear it if she sees you like this. Although the common
people in the village say it's too much, as long as you strengthen your tolerance
in your heart, it will be fine."
Hatake Sakumo raised his head and looked at his son who suddenly appeared here.
Listening to his still young son enlightening him about his sorrow, he sighed for a
while and felt that he was too fragile.
What does this sound like? There is nothing like Konoha White Fang about him like
this.
Thinking of this, Hatake Sakumo stood up from the ground. He placed his eyes gently
on He Feng and raised his hand to rub He Feng's long white hair.
"He Feng, you are right. My father was wrong. I pride myself on having a pair of
eyes that can see others clearly, but I cannot see clearly the haze that surrounds
me."
He Feng stared at his big watery eyes and said again in a childish voice: "Father,
I read a sentence in a book, and I think it is appropriate to use it at this time."
Hatake Sakumo said softly, "Oh, what are they?"
He Feng said firmly: "My heart and actions are as clear as a clear mirror, and
everything I do is righteous."
Hatake Sakumo was a little surprised, "You want to say that as long as my heart and
my behavior are as clear as a mirror, everything I do is to safeguard the justice
in my heart, and there is no need to consider what others say, right? ?”
Hatake Sakumo didn't know this sentence that his son read in the book, but he
thought it was very reasonable, and it was not an exaggeration to even regard it as
the way of ninja that should be implemented throughout his life.
At the same time, he also clearly understood that not everyone blamed him. His wife
and his two sons were still supporting him unswervingly.
However, what surprised Hatake Sakumo was that He Feng did not agree with what he
said, but shook his head and stated:
"Father, what I want to say is that as long as I think I am doing the right thing,
then I can do whatever I want."
"The Will of Fire protects companions and family, not Konoha. If there are no
companions and family, then Konoha will have no meaning of existence. We ninjas are
not tools to complete the mission."
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
Hearing He Feng's explanation on the other side, Hatake Sakumo immediately laughed
and praised: "Yes, you are right. He Feng, you are right."
"Hefeng, I will be the strongest support for you and Kakashi. As long as your
father is here, no one can hurt you. If you and Kakashi have any ideas, just
complete them firmly. All obstacles will be overcome. it's up to mebear. "
"Then father, will you leave me and Nissan behind?"
"never."
At this moment, Hatake Sakumo regained his life because of the advice of his
youngest son Hatake Hefeng.
He did not change his samurai spirit, but put his family before his samurai spirit.
On the way home, Hefeng lay on Hatake Sakumo's back, leaned into Hatake Sakumo's
ear and whispered: "Father, who is stronger between you and Shimura Danzo?"
Hatake Sakumo still remembered Danzo's eye on He Feng, so he immediately snorted
and said disdainfully: "My White Fang kills Danzo like a pig or a dog."
He Feng asked again: "What about the Third Generation Eye?"
There was no objection to the Sandaime Hatake Sakumo, and he just explained: "It's
about the same. After all, the Sandaime and I have never really fought, but I can
win if we fight on the battlefield."
He Feng continued: "What if these rumors about my father were all made by the
Sandaime and Danzo."
"After all, my father just failed a mission. No matter how great the loss is, can
it be compared to the achievements of Konoha White Fang? Moreover, this kind of
thing should not be spread among civilians."
"How could a civilian know about the mission my father performed."
Hatake Sakumo was shocked, and at the same time he had a clearer understanding of
his youngest son's mind.
He couldn't see this kind of thing at all, but He Feng pointed it out to the point.
Seeing this, He Feng continued: "Father, I dare to say that your teammates will
come to accuse you in the near future, in order to make you fall into deeper self-
blame, so as to hit you and make you lose your fourth generation competitiveness. "

Chapter 8 Growth
At night, He Feng lay on the bed, feeling more worried about the future
development.
These days, he had not carefully recalled the details in his memory because he was
worried about his father.
But when he was lying in bed reviewing the situation, he discovered something that
made him extremely uncomfortable.
It doesn’t match up, the timeline doesn’t match up at all!
In his memory, the time of his father's suicide was Konoha 44, but this year is
Konoha 42.
The timeline has been advanced by two years, which has a great impact on him.
Take the Third Ninja War as an example. If he had not appeared, according to the
original timeline, it would have been from Konoha 48 to Konoha 50. But now he only
knows that the Third Ninja War will inevitably happen. , but I don’t know the
specific time.
"It's a bit urgent." He Feng thought in his heart, "The basic skills of Taijutsu
and Swordsmanship have been polished. It's time to learn developable Ninjutsu.
Namikaze Minato's balls are actually a good Ninjutsu."
"After all, you don't need to form a seal. Raikiri is fine. If you have the chance,
you can also find a way to get the Raiton Chakra mode of Hidden Cloud Village. That
is also a Muyin Ninjutsu."
"..."
……
One month later, Hefeng used his subjective initiative as a student and
successfully led Kakashi to use the clone technique to escape class.
Hefeng may not be able to use some aggressive ninjutsu, but the most basic three-
body technique Hatake Sakumo handed over to Hefeng and Kakashi along with the
chakra refining technique from the beginning.
In the back mountain of Konoha, Hefeng and Kakashi stood opposite each other on the
creek, both holding the short swords given by Hatake Sakumo in their hands.
"He Feng, don't let yourself go, use all your strength to train with me." Kakashi
said coolly.
Although he didn't want to admit it, he really couldn't beat his brother one-on-
one.
He Feng seemed to be a master of tricks. No matter what he learned, he almost
learned it all over again. At the same time, his mastery of chakra was also
extremely delicate.
At this time, He Feng was able to conduct a small part of it into the dagger in his
hand to increase his attack power.
And although he can't do it yet, he will soon.
"I will, Nissan."
He Feng held two swords and rushed towards Kakashi at an extremely fast speed.
Kakashi also picked up the White Fang dagger to resist without any inferiority. At
the same time, he took advantage of the gap to form seals and used his clones to
interfere with He Feng.
Because He Feng has two swords, it is not very convenient to form seals in battle.
In addition, in the later battles, he claps his hands and shouts, so he does not
pay too much attention to these ninjutsu that require a lot of seals. superior.
The two of them had more and more confrontations. Kakashi quickly fell into a
disadvantage in the face of He Feng's intensive double-sword offensive. Those
clones used to interfere with He Feng could not withstand He Feng's casual sword
attacks.
Bang!
Plop——
With the sound of metal collision and the sound of water splashing, the short knife
in Kakashi's hand was knocked down by He Feng.
Just when Hefeng switched the back of his blade to do last-minute strikes,
Kakashi's figure instantly transformed into a wooden pile.
This is a substitute technique.
"Water Release: Water Formation Wall Technique!" After replacing his figure not far
away, Kakashi quickly formed a seal, then squatted down and placed both hands on
the stream.
He does not have much chakra, so every ninjutsu will use his chakra to the extreme.
A wall of water rose from bottom to top, separating the two people.
As the wall of water fell, Kakashi formed another seal.
"Fire Release, Big Fire Ball Technique!" A huge fireball suddenly appeared in front
of He Feng. It could be seen that Kakashi didn't hold back his younger brother at
all.
Hefeng did not surprise Kakashi. He saw thunder arcs flashing on his legs, and his
whole body appeared directly behind Kakashi.
"Lei Shunshen, Nissan, you lost again." He Feng put a short knife against Kakashi's
back and said gently.
Kakashi was a little surprised, "He Feng, you developed the Thunder Shun Shen? Just
yourselfOne without a father to teach? "
He Feng nodded. Some ninjutsu can be easily developed if you only need to
understand their essence.
For example, the essence of the teleportation technique is to move at an extremely
fast speed in an instant.
As for some techniques that are here one second and appear directly in other places
the next second, they are not called teleportation techniques, they are called
space ninjutsu.
The essence of Lei Shunshen is to use Leiton Chakra to stimulate the cells in the
legs, causing them to burst out at extremely strong speeds in a short period of
time.
This is nothing to a Jonin, but to a five-year-old child, it is not an exaggeration
to say it is a fantasy.
"Hey, He Feng, Kakashi, you two skipped class and didn't take me with you, do you
really think of me as a friend?"
Obito's voice suddenly sounded.
The two looked in the direction of the sound and saw Obito, Yuhi Kurenai and Nohara
Rin.
Kakashi glanced at Obito disdainfully, and said venomously: "Why don't you take me
with you? Don't you have any idea? It's not like you are a bastard who can't even
learn the cloning technique. It's funny."
Obito went crazy, "Ah ah ah, you bastard Kakashi, I really still hate you the most,
and He Feng and Lin are the gentlest."
As soon as Obito finished speaking, he saw Kurenai smiling at the side with his
peripheral vision, and quickly added: "Of course, Kurenai is also very gentle, not
like you bastard Kakashi."
"Besides, I'm just building up my skills. Even if I open my eyes ten times, you,
Kakashi, won't be able to beat me!"
Obito looked at He Feng and at the same time provoked Kakashi.
"You think so, He Feng."
With a smile on his face, He Feng took the towel and water handed over by Nohara
Lin and Hong respectively, wiped his long hair that had become wet due to the
stream water, and then unscrewed the bottle cap and took a sip of water.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
He handed the two things to Kakashi again, and then said with a smile: "Yes,
Nissan, don't underestimate Obito. I believe Obito has this potential."
"But there is something wrong with what Obito said. My brother is still very
gentle."
[Kakashi’s favorability +1]
【Obtain 0.5 karat Chakra upper limit】
--------------------xxxx--------------------

【Obito favorability +1】

【Trigger critical strike】
【Acquire advanced illusion resistance】
Looking at the Jaguar coming from the system, He Feng said that the day of
invincibility was just around the corner.
According to this posture, if it increases, let alone Uchiha Madara, even if
Otsutsuki Kaguya comes, he will have to slap him.
Don’t drift, take it step by step.
He Feng knows that he is a late-stage hero, and he needs to be as wretched as
possible in the early stage to ensure his development.
Hearing He Feng's words, Kakashi raised his head proudly, and his meaning was
obvious.
Did you see that my brother is very discerning, unlike you, Obito Uchiha, who has
only the weakest ability yet without any discernment.
Regarding the quarrel between the three of them, Nohara Rin and Yuhi Kurenai did
not interrupt, but watched quietly from the sidelines.
It’s not that they don’t have a good relationship and can’t get in the way, but
that such scenes happen almost every day, and they can’t be persuaded, and they
have long been accustomed to it.
"Kakashi, don't be proud. I have mastered the clone technique. I will also
participate in the special training in the future." Obito did not look at Kakashi
who was pretending to be cool, but looked at He Feng with interest. And Nohara Lin
showed off her clone technique.
"Clone Technique!"
Obito formed a seal with his hands and loudly shouted the name of the ninjutsu.
"Pfft--"
Yuhi Hong couldn't hold back her laughter.
Kakashi also held his forehead with his hand, a little speechless.
Nohara Lin didn't laugh. She was already gentle, and she was better at encouraging
than laughing at this time.
Naturally, He Feng would not laugh. His goal was to become Bai Yueguang in the
ninja world and increase the favorability of everyone in the ninja world.
After about a few seconds, as a cloud of smoke exploded, a clone that looked
exactly like Obito appeared next to him.
"Barely qualified." Kakashi said venomously.
"As expected of Obito." Yuhi Kurenai commented.
"Obito-kun is already very powerful." Nohara Lin encouraged Obito.
"I knew you could do it, Obito." He Feng crossed his chest and nodded, also giving
encouragement.
Obito chuckled and touched his head in embarrassment.
In fact, he is not proficient in the clone technique. His display of the clone
technique in public this time was a gamble, and it was obvious that he won the bet.
"Well, to celebrate Obito learning the clone technique, how about we go have
barbecue together."
He Feng put forward his opinion.
As soon as he heard the word "barbecue", Obito immediately forgot about his
embarrassment and immediately loudly agreed:
"I agree!"

Chapter 9 System Upgrade

Mountain cemetery.
"How about, is there anyone in the Uchiha clan who is suitable to be the agent of
the Eye of the Moon Project?"
The person who spoke was sitting in a wheelchair made of wood. There were several
pipes inserted into his back. These pipes were connected to the huge demon statue
behind. The pure life force was transmitted from the demon statue to the other
party along the pipes. inside the body.
"Madara-sama, there is a little guy named Obito who meets your expectations." White
Zetsu emerged from the ground and stood in front of Uchiha Madara and said
respectfully.
"That's right, that brat named Obito often talks about big things like wanting to
become Hokage." Another Bai Zetsu suddenly emerged from Madara's chair, and he was
not as respectful to Madara as the former.
Uchiha Madara glanced at the newly appearedBai Jue glanced at him and said in a
cold tone: "A Fei, if you don't know what respect is, you can go back to your old
ways and reinvent yourself."
Bai Jue can create many, but special individuals like A Fei who have both clear
spiritual strength and good abilities are still rare.
A Fei asked curiously: "What does it feel like to go back and rebuild?"
"Just die, idiot!" Another Bai Jue reminded.
"If you die, won't you never know what it feels like to have sex?! That's too
scary. I was wrong, Master Madara!" A Fei quickly gave up. He only has one dream in
his life, and that is to know about human beings. What does it feel like to have a
bowel movement?
Madara let out a long sigh of relief. After spending so many years with Bai Jue, he
already knew what kind of character Bai Jue was, so he would not care too much
about this kind of thing.
Even though he is old and trapped in a wheelchair, Uchiha Madara still has his
pride.
Too much communication with a guy who is full of selfish ideas will make Madara
feel contaminated.
"Tell me, Black Zetsu." Madara, who couldn't stand White Zetsu's out-of-the-box
thinking, finally thought of Black Zetsu, the chakra life form born from his will.
"Yes, Madara-sama." Black is very respectful to Madara. After all, it has been too
difficult to wait for a descendant of Uchiha who has opened the reincarnation eye
like Madara in the past thousand years.
"That Uchiha's name is Uchiha Obito. His performance in the ninja school is not
outstanding, it can even be said to be mediocre, but he has extremely rich
emotions."
"When walking on the road, I will help old humans when I meet them. I will stop to
watch the feeding of cute animals when I meet them. I am extremely yearning for the
position of Hokage. The reason is because I want to gain the recognition of
others."
"The most important thing is that he has established enough bonds in Konoha, has a
girl he loves, and a companion who has a good relationship. However, according to
my judgment, the girl he loves does not like him, but likes his companion."
Hei Jue talked a lot in one breath, even telling He Feng's own extremely high
talent, the son of the Hatake clan's "White Fang", and the opponent's strength
between genin and chunin.
In this regard, it can only be said that Bai Zetsu's penetration ability is
invincible. Without Kagura's inner eye or the ability to perceive good and evil
like Nine-Tails, it would be impossible to detect White Zetsu's penetration.
"Is this so..." Uchiha Madara fell into deep thought, "Our Uchiha clan's strength
before opening its eyes is not a reference. Any emotionally charged Uchiha clan
will gain leaps and bounds after opening the Mangekyo Sharingan. Strength
improvement."
"In this case, Uchiha Obito is a suitable candidate."
"Hei Jue, continue to stare at the other person, and then transmit back the
information about him and the people around him word for word."
Black Jue replied respectfully: "Yes, Madara-sama."
"And that brat from the Hatake family. It's up to you to judge his talent. If his
talent can still be maintained in the future, then include him in the Eye of the
Moon plan. One more person will make one more before I am resurrected. Sub-
insurance.”
Madara nodded with satisfaction, then leaned on the chair and slowly closed his
eyes.
Seeing that Madara Uchiha was beginning to rest, Black Zetsu also took A Fei away.
Uchiha Madara didn't want the Eye of the Moon plan to go wrong. He was also looking
forward to the day when the Eye of the Moon plan was completed.
"This ninja world belongs to my mother after all. That bastard Hagoromo betrayed my
mother, but I will let my mother return."
……
"He Feng, what do you think of this dress? Does it look good?" Xihihong picked up a
purple-red kimono and stood in front of He Feng. She adjusted the kimono in front
of her and asked a little shyly.
"He Fengjun, look at me, where is this one of mine?" Nohara Lin was holding a small
skirt. She was far less bold than Yuri Hong, and she already blushed just by asking
He Feng for his opinion.
He Feng held his chin with his hand and commented seriously: "Hong and Lin are both
cute. Even if Hong wears a kimono now, he will look more mature. Lin will look more
lively in comparison."
Hearing He Feng's comments, the two girls were very happy to go to the boss and
pay.
"The next one is the next one!" Yuhi Hong declared.
"I want to do enough shopping today." Nohara Lin said softly, but it was clearly
heard in He Feng's ears.
He Feng initially disagreed with the two's invitation to go shopping. After all, he
still had to practice.
But Hong and Lin proposed that if He Feng agreed to go shopping, they would tell He
Feng a secret.
He Feng naturally chose to agree to this, but he was not a pervert and could not do
anything to the little girl whose body was not yet mature, so He Feng chose to let
everything take its course.
It’s a peace of mind to gain favor with men and He Feng. However, if you can gain
favor with women and He Feng, try not to do so if you can.
But his physique is too strong, and some people are against him.
Just like a normal strong-blooded male cannot refuse a female succubus.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
In the world of Naruto, where everyone matures precociously, no woman can refuse a
male succubus, not to mention that this succubus spends time with them day and
night, exuding charm in every move she makes.
"By the way, you two are not tired from shopping yet, I am already tired." He Feng
was a little helpless. Did the woman focus all her physical strength on shopping?
There was obviously a big difference in strength, but at this time, he just didn't
have as much endurance as the other. .
"Of course I'm not tired!" "Why are you tired?" the two said in unison.
He Feng let out a long sigh.
"Okay, okay, let's continue shopping." He Feng's face showedLai's expression is
dull, and coupled with his long hair and Shota's face and height, the lethality
should not be too great.
For a moment, the sisters and aunts on the street stopped.
Once again, Hefeng's ears heard reminders of favorability from some unknown people.
The rewards given are only some money, and occasionally the chakra limit of a
mosquito leg will jump out, which can be said to be extremely useless.
"System, can you block all these useless favorability points and rewards? If you do
this a few more times, your host will be noisy to death."
He Feng finally couldn't stand it anymore and made another request to the system.
In the past few years, he has asked for shielding more than once, but the system
seemed to have no intelligence at all and ignored He Feng's words.
This time He Feng just complained and tried out of habit.
[It is detected that the total favorability value obtained by the host reaches one
thousand, and the system upgrade program has been triggered]
[The system is being upgraded...]
He Feng was shocked in his heart, but remained calm on the surface.
The system upgrade is very fast and is completed almost instantly.
[System panel has been unlocked]
[System functions have been optimized]
[Block useless information]
[The system mall has been opened]
He Feng first set his sights on the system panel.
He said silently in his mind: "Open the system panel."
A light curtain appeared in front of He Feng. On the left side of the light curtain
was He Feng's 3D image, and on the right side were columns of information.
【Name: Qimu Hefeng】
--------------------xxxx--------------------

for more novels (122415)join: https://discord.gg/SZxTKASsHq

【Sex: Male】
【Race: Human (Succubus)】
[Items: Seventeen million taels, one-time Kamui experience card, chakra double
sword]
[Level: Chuunin (Super Shadow)]
[Abilities: Hatake Swordsmanship, Five Escape Mastery, Illusion Mastery, Time and
Space Ninjutsu Mastery, Illusion Resistance]
The system panel allows Hefeng to clearly see the abilities he currently has, which
is relatively clear and streamlined.
He Feng turned his attention to the system mall again. You must know that as long
as you have money, the mall is the fastest way to improve your strength.
When he clicked on the mall, he saw some sky-high-priced goods, which consumed He
Feng's accumulated favorability points, which amounted to more than a thousand
points.
Even a little change is not enough for those sky-high-priced goods.
Hefeng changed the sorting of the mall to flashback by price. This time, Hefeng
could afford the things that appeared.
The cheapest thing is Bingliang Pills, which are worth a little favorability.
Relatively speaking, the more cost-effective one is the Magatama Sharingan with
10,000 favorability points.
The exchange of this Sharingan is equivalent to giving Hefeng the blood of Uchiha,
allowing him to evolve to the Eternal Kaleidoscope and even the Samsara Eye,
instead of being unable to control cheating like Kakashi originally did.
"There's still a long way to go." He Feng sighed.
At this time, Nohara Lin and Yuhi Kurenai were finally tired of shopping.
Xirihong put the things on a chair by the roadside, and then walked to Hefeng.
"He Feng, haven't you always wanted to know what secret Lin and I are going to tell
you? I'll tell you right now." After saying that, Xirihong directly covered He
Feng's eyes with her hands, and her lips were on He Feng's. The face is instantly
visible.
In an instant, Yuhi Hong felt the inexplicable power again, which allowed her body
to recover from the fatigue.
He Feng also felt the same way. The moment the delicate touch appeared, He Feng
felt the recovery of physical strength and a slight increase in chakra.
There are also prompts from the system.
【Yuhihong favorability +1】
【Yuhihong favorability +1】
【Yuhihong favorability +1】
【Acquire primary illusion resistance】
【……】
Nohara Lin's eyes widened and she looked at Hong in disbelief.
"Obviously I met He Feng first." Lin pouted, but did not step forward.
She is still a little timid at this time.
In the end, the girls still didn't tell what the secret was, but the shy
expressions on the other side gave it away.

Chapter 10 Set a trap for Danzo

Time passes very quickly in the ninja world. After having psychological
expectations, Hatake Sakumo can really ignore the rumors in the village.
Just as Hefeng said, a month later Hatake Sakumo was criticized by several
teammates he had rescued.
Hatake Sakumo didn't say anything about this, he just stared at the other person
with his sharp eyes.
Perhaps because of their guilty conscience for lying and their guilt towards Hatake
Sakumo, the two finally left in embarrassment in front of Hatake Sakumo.
After learning about this, Shimura Danzo and Sarutobi Hiruzen also knew that the
plan was almost done here, and if it continued, it would probably cause more bad
things.
Therefore, the day after Hatake Sakumo's teammates left, all the rumors in the
village disappeared. The villagers who usually enjoyed discussing it seemed to have
forgotten about it, and they were very taboo about it.
A little inquiry revealed that Hiruzen Sarutobi had given a hush-hush order. As the
Hokage, Hiruzen Sarutobi personally stated that what Hatake Sakumo did was in line
with the will of fire and that companions were important in Konoha Hidden Village.
Sex is superior to tasks.
Even Sarutobi Hiruzen saidThere is a wise saying: A ninja who cannot complete his
mission is a loser, but a ninja who abandons his companions is worse than a loser.
It can be said that the younger generation of ninjas in the village felt a rush of
blood when they heard these words, and deeply felt that this was the will of fire.
Among them, Metkai was the most affected, and even the amount of tasks he already
carried every day increased again.
As the initiator of everything, Hiruzen Sarutobi not only gained the reputation of
the wisest Hokage in history, but also gained the support of more people.
As a politician, this is a textbook approach, but as a conspirator, this is a
perfect conspiracy.
Danzo Shimura had something to say about this.
It was clear that he did everything, even the suggestions were made by him, but he
did not receive any fame or even benefit.
Danzo Shimura, who returned to his clan, became angrier and angrier as he thought
about it. In the end, he couldn't get over the hurdle in his heart and finally made
a decision.
"Hiruzen, you are all to blame for this. I just wanted to become the Fourth Hokage,
but you deliberately suppressed me."
Danzo waved his hand, and two root ninjas suddenly appeared in front of him.
"Go to the civilian homes in the village and take some children to Orochimaru.
Isn't there a shortage of test subjects for his wood escape experiment? Let's help
him solve it." Danzo Shimura said coldly, without any guilt at all.
"Orochimaru, no matter how you compete with me to become the Fourth Hokage, you
should just study wood escape in the laboratory for me."
In his opinion, those children were his help on the road to becoming Hokage.
Everything was for him to become Hokage, and they deserved their death.
"Yes, Lord Danzo!" A root nodded enthusiastically, and then used the teleportation
technique to leave.
"You are responsible for monitoring Hatake Hefeng. When does that little guy act
alone every day?" Danzo asked again.
"I'm reporting to Danzo-sama, Hatake Hefeng and Hatake Kakashi are inseparable
almost every day, but he will go for a walk with Yuhi Mahko's daughter and a ninja
school student on Saturday night. He is alone on this journey. of."
Danzo nodded, and he said with great satisfaction: "Very good, today will be the
date for Saturday, and you will lead the way. I will personally take it to the root
tonight."
"Since you won't ask for it, Hiruzen, I will come and get it myself. It would be
too much of a waste to leave a natural root seedling to you."
Shimura Danzo had noticed Hatake Hefeng a long time ago, but at the first glance,
he felt that he had a little more affection for the little guy.
As the Dark Ninja World, Danzo immediately considered the possibility of Hatake
Hefeng becoming a spy.
At night, Danzo and a group of ANBU appeared on Hatake Hefeng's only path.
As a person involved, Hatake Hefeng had already noticed the changes on the road.
After all, the reason why he walked alone for such a long time was to expose those
who were spying on him. To put it bluntly, he was here to fish.
Although Hatake Hefeng's combat power has not yet reached the level of a Jonin, who
allowed him to have the Kamui experience card exploded from Obito.
It can be said that as long as He Feng wants to leave, no one can stop him.
"Hatake Hefeng, join the roots. Studying in the Ninja School is no longer helpful
to you. With your current strength, you don't need to go to the Ninja School to
play house games." Shimura Danzo appeared with a gloomy face. In front of He Feng.
He carefully looked at Hatake Hefeng in front of him.
A flawless white face, arms that are like gelatin, a head of smooth white hair that
reaches past her shoulders, piercing eyes, a gentle smile that is almost always on
her face, and a temperament that makes people unable to help but feel pity.
The flag wood and the wind should enter his roots!
"Who are you?!" Although Hefeng knew that Guokage Danzo was such a person, he still
had to pretend, which could also effectively lower Danzo's alertness.
Hearing this, Danzo also showed a proud expression.
"I am the elder of Konoha, assistant to the Hokage, and leader of the Roots of
Konoha, Shimura Danzo."
Hefeng tilted his head and blinked, showing a puzzled look, and asked again: "What
department is the root department? Why haven't I heard of it? When did the Hokage
have assistants? Why haven't I seen it before?"
You haven’t heard that black lines appeared on Danzo’s forehead. Of course it’s
because Hiruzen is suppressing my reputation!
Although he was thinking this in his heart, Shimura Danzo did not say it out loud,
but polished it a bit: "The so-called roots are the roots that are deeply rooted
under the big tree of Konoha. We ninjas have no lives. There is no emotion,
everything you do is to provide nutrients for the big tree of Konoha so that it can
grow vigorously."
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
"It can also be said that Konoha's current strength is mostly due to the root
ninjas."
Shimura Danzo fully demonstrated the reality of what it means to have a mouth on me
and I can say whatever I want.
He didn’t know how many people had been brainwashed by this rhetoric.
"Of course, the root is also the training department of ANBU. After training in the
root, ninjas will eventually become ANBU, and even become the personal bodyguard of
Hokage."
In order to recruit Hefeng Danzo, it can be said that he did everything possible,
and even the banner of Sarutobi Hiruzen was withdrawn.
After all, many young people fall into this trap, and as soon as they hear that
they may become Hokage's personal bodyguard in the future, they get excited and
don't care about anything.
As everyone knows, this is all Shimura Danzo's routine. After all, once it reaches
the root, it's not what Danzo says.
Not to mention admiring Hiruzen Sarutobi, even if he is heterosexual, Danzo can be
brainwashed into homosexuality.As expected by Danzo, He Feng showed an expression
of interest after he said he would become the Hokage's personal bodyguard.
"It can be done!" Danzo was very happy and continued to fool around: "Then Hefeng,
do you want to join the Roots? As the Hokage's assistant, I will personally train
you."
He Feng was a little hesitant, and he hesitated: "Yes, yes, but Elder Danzo,
although I also want to graduate from the Ninja School early, my father does not
agree with my graduation. Can you help me tell my father, Ask him to promise me to
graduate early so that I can join the root."
Danzo was speechless. One second I told your father, the next second Hiruzen will
come to my door.
"Of course you can, little guy. I believe your father will give me, an elder of
Konoha, some respect. So do you want to follow me to visit the roots now?"
"Okay, Elder Danzo." He Feng smiled sweetly.
【Shimura Danzo's favorability +1】
[Acquire primary wood escape affinity]

Chapter 11 Danzo, you have crossed the line

After realizing that his son has far more wisdom than ordinary people, Hatake
Sakumo would also talk to He Feng when encountering certain things.
Of course, Kakashi, as a family member, was not concealed. Instead, He Feng
informed him of what Konoha's top brass had done to his father.
After getting affirmation from Hatake Sakumo, Kakashi said that this kind of thing
could not be left alone, and pulled He Feng to set a trap for Danzo, the mastermind
of the incident.
At this time, Hatake Sakumo was standing in front of the Hokage building wearing an
ANBU uniform and an animal mask.
Some Anbu standing guard would lower their heads and say respectfully after seeing
Hatake Sakumo: "Captain."
As the captain of the ANBU, Hatake Sakumo's prestige is only lower than that of the
Hokage.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"Well, I have something to see the Hokage-sama, please go and inform me." Hatake
Sakumo did not enter the Hokage building directly, but lowered his posture.
The ANBU was very strange. As the captain, Hatake Sakumo could come in and out
freely, so why did he have to report it himself?
But he didn't care that much, and instead came to the Hokage's office as requested
by Hatake Sakumo.
"Dong dong dong——"
The ANBU gently knocked on the door a few times.
"Come in." Sarutobi Hiruzen's voice came from inside the door.
The ANBU pushed the door open and entered, and saw Hiruzen Sarutobi sitting behind
his desk, smoking a cigarette and handling government affairs, and Orochimaru, who
stood beside him and looked slightly feminine.
"Lord Hokage, Lord Orochimaru."
Orochimaru nodded to the ANBU, while Sarutobi Hiruzen put down the pen of dealing
with government affairs and asked with some confusion: "What's wrong? What
happened?"
The ANBU replied: "The captain is asking for an audience outside the Hokage
Building."
Sarutobi Hiruzen was stunned, and even Orochimaru was a little surprised, with a
puzzled expression on his face.
He asked in a hoarse voice: "Is it White Fang?"
"Yes, Lord Orochimaru."
Sarutobi Hiruzen was a little puzzled: "It's strange, why did Sakumo ask you to
report if he wanted to see me? It would be better if he just came in."
The ANBU was speechless. He also wanted to know this, but he was not stupid enough
to express his thoughts directly.
"I don't understand, but the captain did say that."
"Okay, then just let him in, and I can ask him if he has any questions."
Sarutobi Hiruzen waved his hand, understanding that the other party would not be
able to understand such a thing.
"yes."
The ANBU conveyed Sarutobi Hiruzen's original words to Hatake Sakumo, and mentioned
the fact that Orochimaru was also there.
Hatake Sakumo was a little surprised to hear that Orochimaru was also there, but he
didn't care.
"Dong dong dong—" Hatake Sakumo knocked on the door.
"Enter."
As soon as he entered the room, Hatake Sakumo did not give Hiruzen Sarutobi a
chance to speak. Instead, he took off his mask preemptively and placed it on
Hiruzen Sarutobi's desk.
"Hokage-sama, after this period of consideration, I feel that I am not qualified
for the position of ANBU captain."
Hatake Sakumo took the initiative to resign, which immediately confused Sarutobi
Hiruzen.
He himself felt that Hatake Sakumo had too much power and reputation, and wanted to
suppress him.
Because he suppressed his reputation, he no longer wanted to be the captain of the
ANBU. Why did he resign personally now? Is this such a good thing?
"Teacher." Orochimaru reminded him at the right time to prevent his teacher from
being embarrassed.
"Ahem." Sarutobi Hiruzen realized that he was exaggerating, so he coughed twice to
hide his embarrassment.
He raised his head and looked at Hatake Sakumo. Although he was happy, he still
pretended to be worried and asked: "What happened? Sakumo, if you have anything to
do, you can tell me and there is no need to mention your resignation." Things, the
Anbu have done a great job under your leadership."
If it were said that Sakumo Hatake was deceived by Hiruzen Sarutobi, he would
probably have believed the hypocritical image he presented.
But things are different now. If you look at the person in front of you through the
Hokage filter on his body, you can see that the so-called Sarutobi Hiruzen is just
an old man whose ambition has gradually faded away and has been eroded by power.
When a person gets old, he will naturally do stupid things one after another.
Except for a period of sobriety before death, he will be confused the rest of the
time.
"I just feel a little useless." Hatake Sakumo sighed, feeling helpless and lonely.
For a moment, even Orochimaru couldn't help but look sideways.
As a fellowOrochimaru, who had also participated in the Second Ninja War, knew very
well how powerful the man in front of him was.
It is no exaggeration to say that Orochimaru now has no confidence that he can
defeat Hatake Sakumo.
What could make White Fang feel useless? Could it be a rumor spread in Konoha
before?
Hatake Sakumo continued: "A few months ago, I gave up the S-class mission of Konoha
Village in order to protect my teammates, which resulted in heavy losses in the
village. I know very well how useless I am."
"Now I am also powerless when faced with Elder Danzo's solicitation of my youngest
son. I know that I can't even refuse..." Hatake Sakumo said seriously: "I am so
useless."
Sarutobi Hiruzen was shocked and stood up from his chair.
He couldn't pretend he didn't hear this.
"Sakumo, you said Danzo went to recruit your son, is it He Feng?"
"Yes, my son and I have clearly stated that we will stay in the ninja school to
learn the will of fire until graduation, but Elder Danzo said that we can't learn
anything in the ninja school, so it is better to go to his roots to train, and took
me away by force. Son."
Just when Sarutobi Hiruzen wanted to say something, Orochimaru felt a little
strange and asked, "Hatake Sakumo, didn't you stop Danzo?"
What Orochimaru said was very direct and his meaning was obvious.
With your strength, how could Danzo take away your son without your consent.
Hatake Sakumo shook his head: "Danzo is an elder of Konoha and the Hokage's
assistant. How dare I take the initiative to do something to him? I just want to
step down and teach my two sons at home, rather than taking two The son became a
rebellious nin."
As an old friend of Danzo, after hearing this, Hiruzen Sarutobi had already figured
out the cause and effect of the matter.
It was simply that Danzo was dissatisfied because he rejected him, so he directly
passed over him and raised the banner, half threatening and half soliciting, to
pull He Feng into his roots.
To put it nicely, the Roots is the secret training institution of the Anbu. To put
it badly, if the outstanding seedlings go to the Roots, they will never come back.
How can Danzo be willing to return the good seedlings from the Roots? ANBU.
Thinking of this, Sarutobi Hiruzen sighed in his heart, "Danzo, you have crossed
the line after all."
"Sakumo, don't talk about resigning for a while. If possible, I hope you can
continue to succeed until the new generation grows up to the point where someone
can take over your position."
"As for now, let's go to the root together, and I'll make the decision for you
about Danzo."
"Orochimaru, please come with me."
Sarutobi Hiruzen waved his hand and led Hatake Sakumo, Orochimaru and a group of
Anbu to the root.

Chapter 12 Dealing with Hiruzen Sarutobi

In the root training ground, the root reservists are fighting each other. Because
of Danzo's cultivation method of cultivating gu, these root ninjas do not
understand what it means to keep their hands at all during training.
At this time, their training was more like two strangers fighting on the
battlefield, rather than teammates who got along day and night.
Each of them thinks of Danzo's thoughts and regards Danzo's ideas as his ideals.
These root ninjas are more loyal to Danzo than to Konoha.
"Everyone assemble." Danzo glanced at the root reservists who were training, and
said coldly:
"Go out from the 1st to the 10th.
Hatake Hefeng, all ten of them are Chuunin. It is up to you to choose your
opponent. I will watch your battle and customize a training plan specifically for
you.
If anyone among the ten of you can defeat Hatake Hefeng, I will give him a name and
allow him to officially join the root and become the root that protects Konoha. "
Hearing Danzo's words, the eyes of those cold-faced teenagers sparkled with light.
In the eyes of these young people who have been brainwashed before their values
have matured, it is not an exaggeration to say that Danzo is a god.
For these fanatical believers like Danzo, formally joining the Roots means entering
the Kingdom of God.
Seeing the expressions of the ten people who were eager to try it out and even
started to fantasize about it, He Feng was speechless.
Before that, he knew more about Danzo from forums in his previous life. After
coming to this world, he personally experienced Danzo's conspiracy. His general
impression of him was that he was a scheming, blind and arrogant old wall lamp.
But now combined with what I saw and heard on the way to the root, it is not an
exaggeration to say that Danzo should go to hell and die ten thousand times.
"No need to choose." He Feng sighed.
Danzo frowned, a little unhappy.
He felt that Hatake Hefeng had not positioned himself correctly.
"Do you think they are too strong and how invincible are you?
Flag wood and wind. "
Danzo has already made a plan. If He Feng is timid at this time, it will be of no
value.
A worthless ninja is not wanted at all.
It just so happened that Orochimaru's wooden escape experiment was full of ordinary
people, and there were very few ninjas from the ninja clan. It was not a good
choice to send Hatake Hefeng to Orochimaru.
"What I mean is that the ten of them are a bit rubbish. It'll be fine if they come
together." He Feng said in his immature voice an answer that shocked even Danzo.
"Are you serious?" Danzo still didn't believe it. He didn't think that a student
who had just studied at the Ninja School for less than a year could fight ten
Chunin who were trained from the root.
Although this student is Hatake Sakumo's son, Hatake Hefeng.
"Of course." Hatake Hefeng nodded. He was still thinking about how to gain more
favorability from Danzo.
After Danzo received He Feng's affirmative answer, he waved to the ten people.
"kill! "After getting Danzo's signal, all ten people used their own abilities to
attack He Feng.
"Earth Escape·Earth Spear!"
"Konoha whirlwind!"
"Art fire escape ho fireball!"
"Wind Escape·Big Breakthrough!"
"Shuriken technique."
Faced with the storm of ninjutsu attacks, Hefeng did not panic, but used his own
speed advantage to quickly distance himself.
Then he drew out the short knife from his back.
Zila Zila——
Thunder attribute chakra covers the dagger, giving the dagger the ability to
paralyze the enemy for a short period of time.
Susu!
He Feng used the back of his knife to hit one of the taijutsu ninjas in the back,
and combined with his thunder escape ability, he knocked him down directly.
"The art of shadow clone." During the gap, He Feng used 10% of his own chakra to
separate into two shadow clones.
The first time the two shadow clones appeared, they formed seals and released
ninjutsu.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"Art fire escape ho fireball!"

"Wind Escape: Great Breakthrough Technique!"
A combined ninjutsu plan was launched, giving the original C-level ninjutsu the
power of a B-level or even an A-level ninjutsu.
"A quick fight." He Feng said to the two shadow clones beside him.
"Okay." The shadow clone nodded in reply, and then used the lightning flash to
appear next to the chunin who was not far away and was constantly releasing
ninjutsu.
"Steel Fist!" the shadow clones said in unison, knocking down the two chuunin at
the same time.
The battle was still going on, and the ten chuunin had no ability to fight back
against He Feng, who had not yet graduated. This ability impressed Danzo Shimura
who was watching the battle.
At the same time, Danzo became increasingly satisfied with He Feng.
[Danzo’s favorability +5]
【Trigger critical strike】
[Reward sealing technique: Four-image seal]
Hefeng was so happy that he gave up the idea of a quick victory and started to
perform hard. Anyway, due to his talent, his strength was getting better every day,
and he was not afraid of others seeing through his background.
Danzo also gave up the idea of training He Feng into a spy. The value of his
affinity for strangers was far less than the value of his own talent.
"How to cultivate He Feng..." Just as Danzo was thinking in his heart, a scolding
voice suddenly came from not far away.
"Danzo, that's enough!" Hiruzen Sarutobi appeared next to Danzo with Orochimaru and
Sakumo Hatake, and at the same time focused on He Feng, who was one against ten.
"Stop it quickly!" Even though He Feng was in the upper hand at this time, Sarutobi
Hiruzen felt distressed when he saw He Feng's exhaustion.
This is the seedling that inherits the will of fire.
However, in the face of the orders issued by Sarutobi Hiruzen, the Hokage, those
basic ninjas completely ignored them.
Sarutobi Hiruzen became even more angry. He looked at Danzo angrily, his whole face
gloomy like a mountain fire, as if it was about to explode at any time.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
Danzo, as an old friend of Sarutobi Hiruzen, could tell at a glance that the other
party was really angry, and immediately ordered the root ninjas: "Stop all of
them."
After receiving Danzo's order, those people stopped what they were doing and
retreated with unwillingness on their faces.
Hatake Sakumo also came to He Feng's side in an instant and helped He Feng, who was
about to fall due to lack of strength.
"Hokage-sama, He Feng is injured. I want to take him to Konoha Hospital. Please
forgive me for being with you."
Hearing that Hefeng was injured, Sarutobi Hiruzen and Shimura Danzo both tightened
their hearts. Hatake Hefeng's talent was obvious to all, and he was Konoha's
treasure.
"Go quickly, He Feng is just growing up, so we can't let the injuries affect him."
Sarutobi Hiruzen said with concern.
Hatake Sakumo nodded and took He Feng away.
Orochimaru stared at Hatake Hefeng without blinking, thinking about the opponent's
performance just now, and said at the same time:
"I'll go with you too. Tsunade happens to be in Konoha too. If anything happens, I
can call Tsunade."
Orochimaru's voice was very hoarse, and there was some inexplicable meaning in it.
"That's fine." Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded, and then continued to confront Danzo.
Just after a few people left, Danzo also waved to the root ninja behind him.
"You should also step back. I have something to discuss with the Hokage."
The root ninjas nodded and then respectfully stepped back.
Seeing that there were no two people present, Hiruzen Sarutobi did not pretend to
be a disguise and scolded Danzo plainly.
"Danzo, you are too presumptuous. I don't remember that I allowed you to recruit
Hatake Hefeng privately, let alone bring it to the root.
Do you think I don’t know your little calculation?
And your root, do you think you don't take me as the Hokage seriously, or do you
think that in the eyes of those in your root, you, the leader of the root, are the
real Hokage! "
Listening to Sarutobi Hiruzen's question, Shimura Danzo felt like there was a big
stone in his heart. He wanted to prove that he was the most suitable person to be
the Hokage. If he hadn't been so late, this Hokage wouldn't have been able to do
so. Until he, Sarutobi Hiruzen comes.
Of course, he couldn't say these words.
If he said it, he, the leader of the ANBU, would be unworthy.
Not to mention running for the fourth generation.
Looking at Danzo Shimura who was silent in front of him, Hiruzen Sarutobi's anger
also decreased a lot, but he still said with a cold face: "I don't know when the
ninjas you trained for my ANBU began to become mixed. Come to think of it, The
roots don’t play much of a role anymore.Let's do this, your basic funding will be
reduced by 25%, and all funding considerations need to be made into a form and sent
to the Hokage's office. It can only be implemented if I, the Hokage, approve it. "
"!" Danzo was shocked. Just as he was about to speak, he was interrupted by
Sarutobi Hiruzen.
"Hmph, this is the result you deserve. You have to remember that I am the Hokage.
You can only do what I allow you to do. You can't do it if I don't allow you to do
it.
Take care of yourself, Danzo. "
As Sarutobi Hiruzen left, Danzo Shimura's teeth were almost broken by him.
"Damn it! Damn it! Damn it!"
"Sarutobi Hiruzen, how am I inferior to you! Why did the teacher choose you to be
Hokage back then!
Let's see, I will one day become the Hokage and lead Konoha to regain the glory of
the First Daime era. "

Chapter 13 Apprenticeship to Orochimaru

Inside Konoha Hospital.
After a series of examinations by doctors, a conclusion was finally reached.
Hatake Hefeng's body didn't have any problems except for some skin injuries. Even
his chakra was abundant, unlike that of a five-year-old child.
Orochimaru, who was accompanying him all the way, looked at Hatake Sakumo with a
knowing smile when he heard the medical ninja's answer.
People who can become scientists in the ninja world are not stupid at all, not to
mention that this scientist is Orochimaru.
He had already figured it out when he was at the root base, and now this result
directly convinced him of his judgment.
As if he didn't see Orochimaru's smile, Hatake Sakumo said to the medical ninja:
"Let's open a ward. Even if there is no serious injury, you still need to rest for
a while."
Although the medical ninja was puzzled, he still nodded to show his understanding.
"Father, you'd better go home as soon as possible and tell Nissan my news. I'm
afraid he will worry too much about me.
You don’t need to worry about me here. There will be no problem with Orochimaru-
sama taking care of me. "
As he said that, Hatake Hefeng glanced at Orochimaru and asked with a smile:
"Really, Lord Orochimaru."
Orochimaru chuckled: "It's really interesting.
That’s right, Captain Shuomao, I won’t let anyone hurt He Feng. "
Due to the status of the Sannin, the Hokage could not take him on a mission, so
this arduous task fell to Hatake Sakumo.
Now that Orochimaru mentioned this, he also expressed his position.
Hatake Sakumo nodded, "Then I'll trouble you, Orochimaru."
In the ward, Hatake Hefeng sat on the bed, and Orochimaru sat on the chair beside
him.
Orochimaru first licked his lips with his tongue and asked with a half-smile: "He
Feng, was this planned by you or your father?
I think it should be you. Although I have been staying in the laboratory during
this period, I still heard some rumors about your father.
The famous Konoha White Fang was rumored to have failed in a mission, and everyone
in the village knew about it, hehehe. "
At this time, Orochimaru has almost clearly seen the true face of the Hokage line
or Sarutobi Hiruzen line, and his obsession with competing for the position of the
Fourth Hokage is not deep in his heart. The reason why he competes is just to give
the original An answer for myself, and a decision for my future self.
The conversation with Hatake Hefeng at this time was more like the result of
Orochimaru's whim after seeing something interesting.
He Feng did not answer Orochimaru immediately.
"I have imposed a barrier here. The old man's crystal ball cannot see through."
After hearing Orochimaru's reply, He Feng said: "Yes, I planned all of this. Danzo
plotted against my father. Naturally, we can't just let it go."
"Interesting kid." Orochimaru commented: "How did you learn about Danzo? Even now,
not many people in the village know Danzo."
"As White Fang's son, wouldn't it be extremely incompetent if he couldn't judge
such a simple thing?"
Orochimaru said again: "White Fang's son... then you should have an older brother.
Has he noticed this?"
"No."
Orochimaru saw that Hefeng had the ability to fight ten chuunin alone at the age of
five, and he also fell in love with the talent.
After all, many of his experiments cannot be completed by one person. He usually
conducts experiments through shadow clones, but shadow clones always have a
drawback, that is, he can only hear his voice.
After all, experiments often require a flash of inspiration.
[Orochimaru favorability +1]
[Orochimaru favorability +1]
【Obtain Orochimaru's primary scientific research talent】
【Obtain Orochimaru's primary scientific research talent】
He Feng felt happy and suddenly felt that Orochimaru was much closer.
As long as anyone can bring him favor, they are He Feng's beloved relatives,
friends, brothers and sisters.
"Do you want to be my disciple? He Feng." Orochimaru extended an invitation to He
Feng.
Hearing Orochimaru's invitation, He Feng replied without any hesitation: "If
possible, please let me become Master Orochimaru's disciple."
If He Feng is most satisfied with the candidate of Hokage's apprenticeship, it is
undoubtedly Orochimaru.
The benefits of becoming a disciple of Orochimaru are simply not too many.
First of all, Orochimaru is the apprentice of Sarutobi Hiruzen, and he is a member
of the Hokage line. The benefits of the Hokage line are that he can apply for
banned books on the Sealed Book at will.
He Feng has been coveting the flying thunder god technique for a long time,
especially after receiving the talent of time and space ninjutsu from Obito.
He Feng won't compete with his brother for the position in the Shuimen class.
ThatAt this time, Orochimaru mastered a variety of biotechnologies, including but
not limited to: Sharingan eye transplantation surgery, Hashirama cell
transplantation surgery, human cloning technology, Xianjutsu sealing technology,
etc.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Although there are some techniques that Orochimaru has not yet mastered, he is
definitely the greatest potential stock in the ninja world.
Finally, and most importantly, Orochimaru never hides anything from his disciples.
I teach him whatever I know. How much you can learn depends on your ability.
But He Feng is not worried about this. The increase in his talent limit will also
enhance his learning ability.
"Very good, Hefeng, I see that your chakra capacity is far higher than that of your
peers. I believe this ninjutsu will be a great help to you. This will be my first
gift as your teacher."
By the way, let me see how long it will take for your talent to master an A-level
ninjutsu that you have never experienced before. "
Hefeng took the ninjutsu scroll thrown by Orochimaru and opened it.
What comes into view are seven big characters.
The art of multiple shadow clones.
It is also the ninjutsu that the Crown Prince of Konoha uses from beginning to end.
He Feng happily browsed the chakra circulation technique of the multiple shadow
clone technique.
About thirty seconds later, He Feng closed the ninjutsu scroll and got off the
hospital bed.
I saw He Feng forming a seal with his hands, "The art of multiple shadow clones!"
The next second, more than twenty He Feng filled the ward, and Orochimaru was
caught in the middle of He Feng.
[Favorability from Orochimaru +3]
【Obtain Orochimaru's intermediate scientific research talent】
The plan is successful!
He Feng didn't believe that someone who was so close to him would not provide him
with favorability points.
Don’t say you are Orochimaru, even if Chiyo comes, you still have to gain his
favorability!

Chapter 14 The wind blowing to the ninja world

Ever since Hefeng became a disciple of Orochimaru, the seemingly invisible prying
eyes around him had completely disappeared.
I think it was because of the cooperative relationship between Orochimaru and Danzo
that Danzo was unable to refuse Orochimaru's request to a certain extent.
In Orochimaru's laboratory.
After a year of study, He Feng was now proficient in using all the equipment in the
laboratory. Even the cultivation of Hashirama's cells was assigned to He Feng by
Orochimaru.
During this year, He Feng also used his own advantages to solve many biotechnology
problems for Orochimaru.
"Teacher, after a hundred sets of controlled experiments, it has been verified that
the ones that are obviously insufficient in resistance to Hashirama cells include
earth attribute chakra and water attribute chakra. These two attribute chakras are
almost the first to face Hashirama cells. Time will be absorbed and assimilated by
it.
Relatively speaking, the three attributes of fire, wind and thunder chakra are
relatively strong, but they are only slightly stronger. Facing the erosion of
Hashirama cells, they are still quickly assimilated.
Although the positive chakra extracted from the volunteers of the Senju clan is
homologous to Hashirama cells to a certain extent, it can only suppress it for a
period of time.
But the good news is that the Yin-type chakra from the Uchiha clan's "volunteers"
can very well suppress Hashirama cells. "
He Feng held a form in his hand and repeated the experimental information above to
Orochimaru, who was cloning his own cells.
At this time, Orochimaru had already had the idea of developing immortal
reincarnation and transferring his soul to others in order to achieve immortality.
He Feng, who was well aware of the disadvantages of immortal reincarnation, could
not let his teacher go astray. Later, his soul would be damaged due to too many
reincarnations, and the Uchiha would be defeated by a single illusion.
So, He Feng inadvertently came up with an idea: Instead of looking for a
reincarnation with powerful talents, why not use the technology at his disposal to
create one that satisfies him.
So Orochimaru came up with the idea of cloning himself.
"Uchiha..."
Listening to the results of the Hefeng experiment, Orochimaru fell into deep
thought. During the Warring States Period, Uchiha Madara and Senju Hashirama were
no weaker than each other in a fierce battle. Senju Hashirama, who had been dead
for so many years, was like this just because of his remaining cells. Power, what
about Uchiha Madara? What about the Uchiha clan?
"Is it the Sharingan?" Orochimaru had already made a guess in his mind, and planned
to use this as the next step in the experiment.
If it succeeds, it is very likely that Mu Dun will be born in his hands.
Just thinking about Orochimaru makes me feel wonderful. Isn't the reason why he
pursues immortality because he feels that there are too many mysteries in the world
and the time is too short to explore them all.
Orochimaru looked at He Feng who continued to dive into research after reporting
the progress of the experiment, with a lot of thoughts in his mind.
"Jiraiya, I don't know where the son of the prophecy you are looking for is, and I
also don't understand why you have tied yourself up for half your life for a vague
prophecy.
But now I have a hunch, I seem to see the wind. This is a wind that blows the ninja
world. It can change the stagnant water of the ninja world on its own. After all,
his talent is not weaker than that of the first generation Me Senju. Hashirama. "
[Orochimaru’s favorability +5]
【Trigger critical strike】
[Reward Orochimaru for his understanding of ninjutsu]
[Reward Jonin Chakra Upper Limit]
Seeing the sudden favorability prompt in front of him, Hefeng felt puzzled and
couldn't help but put down what he was doing and looked back at Orochimaru.
Facing He Feng's gaze, Orochimaru smiled, then took out a ninjutsu scroll and
handed it to He Feng.
"This is the flying thunder god technique I asked for from the old man. Hefeng, you
have the bonus of the flag wood sword technique."Mochi is a genuine taijutsu ninja.
If you can fuse the Hatake Sword Technique with the Flying Thunder God Technique,
your strength will reach a new level.
In addition, please don’t come to see me in the laboratory within this month. You
have been staying with me for a long time, and it’s time for you to have a holiday.
Go back to the ninja school to meet your friends, the one from Yuhihi Mako's family
and the little girl named Nohara Lin often come to see you, but you reject them. "
He Feng was stunned for a moment, then took the Flying Thunder God Technique from
Orochimaru, and felt warm in his heart.
Apart from anything else, Orochimaru had been really good to him this year, so good
that it didn't match the Orochimaru in He Feng's impression at all.
After a year of getting along with him, He Feng did not see labels such as
careerist, cruel, and self-centered in Orochimaru.
He Feng had suspected that Orochimaru wanted to seize him later, but at this time,
Orochimaru had provided him with the idea of developing immortal reincarnation.
Therefore, Hefeng can only think that Orochimaru is not bad in nature. The reason
why he became what he was like during Nazuo was not only witnessing the death of
his best friend (Kato Dan) and his apprentice (Nasaki), but also the infection from
Shimura Danzo and the monkey. Flying Hiruzen's rejection and abandonment.
Of course, there is another possibility that the succubus's physique is getting
stronger as he grows up, and he can already influence the people around him subtly.
"I understand, teacher.
Not just me, teacher, you should also pay attention to rest. There is still a long
way to pursue the truth.
In addition, the teacher remembers to be careful with Danzo. Although the teacher
has a cooperative relationship with Danzo, I can see that he is the kind of person
who will backstab the teacher at any time. "
Faced with the concern of his students, Orochimaru first licked his lips and showed
a feminine smile. His voice was hoarse and gentle: "I understand."
After He Feng left, Orochimaru also packed up the experimental equipment.
What He Feng said is right, there is no need to rush in pursuing the truth.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
"He Feng is six years old this year, and his body is still in the stage of rapid
growth. It is too early to be exposed to immortal arts now. What should I teach He
Feng after he masters the flying thunder god technique?"
Orochimaru did not doubt whether He Feng could learn the Flying Thunder God. Since
he exchanged his own military exploits for He Feng to acquire the Flying Thunder
God, he had naturally confirmed He Feng's talent in the space ninjutsu.
"In terms of physical skills, He Feng has the Hatake Sword Technique, and in terms
of ninjutsu, He Feng has learned almost all of my skills in this year. Not to
mention the celestial arts, it seems that there are only sealing techniques or
medical ninjutsu.
"Oh yes, there are also those forbidden arts..."
Orochimaru shook his head. The old man of forbidden arts in the book of seals paid
close attention to them, especially some of the forbidden arts invented by the
second generation Hokage. There was an extra seal in the book of seals. Even he
wanted to see None of it is easy.
"I remember there is a forbidden technique called Reincarnation in the Pure Land,
which can summon the dead from the Pure Land to the present world. I can try to see
if I can get it next time."
While walking, Orochimaru came to the Senju Clan. Now there are very few Senju
Ninjas in the Senju Clan, leaving only a few people with poor qualifications who
still retain the Senju surname.
The rest of the Senju tribe either died on the battlefield, or gave up their Senju
surnames and merged into the Fire Country.
At this time, in the Thousand Hands Clan, a bold woman with long light yellow hair,
a blue-purple mark on her forehead, wearing a tea-green gown, a sleeveless loose
top, and dark blue cropped pants was sitting cross-legged. In the courtyard in the
center of the clan land.
She drank the strong wine from the wine cup one mouthful at a time, and her whole
face had a faint blush due to the alcohol.
The most eye-catching thing is its magnificent chest muscles.
This person is Tsunade Hime, the granddaughter of the First Hokage and one of the
Sannin.
"Ah! So cool!"
Tsunade poured a sip of strong wine into her mouth and sighed.
"Tsunade-sama, don't drink anymore. This is the second cup you've drank today."
Shizune looked worried.
As soon as she comes back here, Tsunade-sama will get herself drunk, and no one can
persuade her.
"Tsunade." Orochimaru sat silently in front of Tsunade, with no emotion on his
feminine face.
Tsunade raised her head and realized that the person who came was Orochimaru. She
didn't pay much attention to it and just drank to herself.
"I have accepted another disciple." Orochimaru continued.
Tsunade was stunned for a moment, then raised her head and looked at Orochimaru,
her eyes seemed to be complaining, self-blame, and unconcealable exhaustion.
Orochimaru also noticed Tsunade's mood and continued: "I will bring him over in a
while. I believe it will make you feel a lot better."
Tsunade was silent for a while, then raised the wine bottle and poured a glass of
wine for Orochimaru.
"No need, I will leave Konoha with Shizune after a while. There is nothing left to
miss in this village.
Orochimaru, come and have a few drinks with me. "

Chapter 15 Meeting Jiraiya by chance

In Konoha Village, after Yuhi Hong and Nohara Lin learned that He Feng was given a
month's leave by Orochimaru, they directly chose to use the clone technique to go
to class, and their true bodies stuck to He Feng all day long.
Because of He Feng's physique, He Feng didn't even need to do anything. Just being
by He Feng's side would make the two of them feel comfortable, let alone being
close to He Feng.
It is a relaxing way to empty your head directly and relieve all fatigue.
If the family didn't allow it, the second daughter would even want to stay with He
Feng 24 hours a day.
He Feng also felt helpless about this. He didn't want to be surrounded by little
girls at all.He likes a big sister like Tsunade-hime who can wrap his whole body.
As for Kakashi and Obito, they are training even harder.
After all, the two of them together are not enough for He Feng to fight alone. As
the elder brother, Kakashi cannot accept this result, and Obito, as the Uchiha
clan, cannot accept this result even more.
This also caused the bond between Kakashi and Obito to become deeper and deeper.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Although Kakashi still mocked Obito's status as a crane tail with a venomous
tongue, he himself had already recognized Obito, and even in every day's training,
he would wait for Obito to finish helping the old lady.
While the two girls were shopping with He Feng in their arms, bursts of obscene
laughter suddenly came from the hot spring next to the street.
"Hehe~~hehehehe~~~"
After hearing the laughter, He Feng knew who it was at the location where the
combination appeared, without even thinking.
So he said to Yuhi Hong and Nohara Lin: "Don't move around here, wait for me for a
while."
"Yeah." The two women nodded at the same time.
Seeing this, He Feng walked directly in the direction where the laughter came from.
As expected, he saw a tall man with white hair, wearing wooden clogs, and a lewd
expression beside a row of wooden fences.
"There is someone peeping here! Is there anyone there? Someone is peeping on the
woman taking a bath!" He Feng shouted loudly using chakra blessing.
With He Feng's voice, people within a hundred meters can hear clearly.
"Ah!!!" All the women in the bathhouse screamed, picking up bath towels and
wrapping them around their bodies.
Some of the tougher old ladies even wrapped themselves in bath towels and rushed
out as soon as possible.
"Not good!" Jiraiya was extremely experienced. He immediately realized that there
were too many people coming, and it was too late to run away. He saw his hands
forming seals, and in an instant they turned into stones on the roadside. It looked
like there were no A sense of dissonance.
Yuhi Kurenai and Nohara Lin, who came after hearing the sound, also saw this scene.
"Kid, you were the one who shouted just now, can you tell my mother-in-law where
the peeping person ran?" An old woman walked out of the bathroom aggressively and
asked He Feng directly.
Perhaps because of He Feng’s physique and appearance, the other party’s attitude
towards He Feng was very gentle.
"Oops, he saw him when he was transforming." Jiraiya was shocked and could only
pray that the other party didn't know that he was using a transformation technique.
However, Jiraiya's idea was shattered in the next second.
He Feng pointed to a stone on the side of the road and said, "It's right there. The
man who peeped just now was a ninja who turned into a stone and hid there."
"Okay, if you dare to peek at me, you are still a ninja. See if I don't take off
your eyeballs."
"Who is peeping? Where is the peeping person?"
"My wife is taking a bath, who is spying on my wife?"
When Jiraiya saw more and more people, he simply stopped hiding and used his
transformation technique to transform into a completely unfamiliar person. He
jumped onto the roof and ran away.
Even if there were ninjas present, they couldn't catch up with Jiraiya's speed.
Seeing Jiraiya leaving, Hefeng also gave up the idea of watching the excitement and
left with the two girls, Yuhi Kureno and Harin.
"He Feng, do you know the pervert who was peeping just now?" Xi Rihong asked with
some confusion.
She only felt that the man was somewhat familiar, but she clearly remembered that
she had never seen him before.
"That's right..."
Before He Feng could finish speaking, a voice that sounded like a smile but not a
smile appeared from the side.
"That's me, Jiraiya, the Toad Sage of Mount Myoboku!" Jiraiya proudly introduced
himself, completely ignoring the repulsive looks in Yuhi Kurenai's and Nohara Rin's
eyes.
No woman can remain expressionless when a voyeur appears in front of her.
He Feng looked at Jiraiya and said calmly:
"Jiraiya-sama, please don't continue to spy on Konoha in the future. If you
continue like this, neither I nor the people around me will be able to give you the
respect you deserve.
After all, Jiraiya-sama doesn’t want his future wife to be peeped while taking a
shower one day. "
Jiraiya was about to retort that what he just did was not voyeurism but collecting
information, when he noticed the look in the two women's eyes, and his heart became
tense for a moment.
Jiraiya, the Toad Sage of Mt. Myoboku, was actually spurned by a little girl.
For a moment, Jiraiya stopped arguing, and responded honestly: "I promise you, I
will not collect materials from Konoha again in the future."
Hefeng noticed the flaw in Jiraiya's words, but he did not expose Jiraiya.
For Jiraiya, this is not something that can be changed just by talking. It is
beyond He Feng's expectation that Jiraiya can win and stop using Konoha.
"I know that you, Hatake Hefeng, are the disciples that Orochimaru accepted a year
ago. You can already participate in Orochimaru's experiments at a young age. I
don't know what your strength is. Do you want me, Jiraiya-sama? Let me teach you
some powerful ninjutsu."
As Jiraiya spoke, he suddenly felt like he was being compared to Orochimaru. After
all, before this, no matter what he compared with Orochimaru, he couldn't compare
with him.
Now, his disciple Minato has outdone Orochimaru's disciples.
As if He Feng saw what Jiraiya was thinking, He Feng immediately stretched out his
right hand to show him the only S-level ninjutsu Raikiri he currently mastered.
"This is the S-level ninjutsu Raikiri that I developed independently under the
guidance of Orochimaru-sensei.He should be able to fall under Jiraiya-sama's
discernment. "
Facing the S-level ninjutsu displayed by Hatake Hefeng, Jiraiya's eyes widened.
If his information is correct, Hatake Hefeng should be only six years old this
year!
At the age of six, he developed S-level ninjutsu under the guidance of others. The
key is that he can still use it? ! ! !
What were you doing when you were six years old?
Jiraiya thought about what happened when he was six years old. It seemed like he
was digging a bird's nest in a tree.
As for Ninjutsu... I should have mastered the Three Body Technique... Probably.
For a moment, Jiraiya had some doubts about life. Is this a genius?
Orochimaru is a genius, and even his disciples are geniuses.
But his disciples are not weak either. Minato mastered the Flying Thunder God
Technique at a young age, Nagato has the Sage Eyes, Konan developed the secret
technique of shikizhi, and Yahiko is good in all abilities.
"Hahaha, it seems that Orochimaru is treating you well.
How about it, do you want to go have a barbecue, I'll treat you. "

Chapter 16 Minato and Kushina

After He Feng agreed to Jiraiya's treat, Jiraiya took He Feng and others to the
largest and most famous barbecue holy place in Konoha.
Inside the BBQ Q owned by the Akimichi family.
Of course, since Jiraiya is inviting guests, it is impossible to just invite He
Feng and others.
In addition to Hefeng Yuhi, Kurono Hararin and others, Namikaze Minato and Uzumaki
Kushina were also invited by Jiraiya.
At this time, Namikaze Minato had graduated a few years ago and had reached the
level of jounin. He had already developed the future famous A-level ninjutsu
Rasengan by virtue of his excellent talent.
Uzumaki Kushina also inherited the Nine-Tails from Uzumaki Mito and became the
Nine-Tails Jinchuuriki in Konoha. With Uzumaki Kushina's talent, although she
cannot communicate with the Nine-Tails, she can freely use it. Kyuubi's chakra can
still do it.
He Feng calmly looked at the loving couple in front of him, and the idea of getting
acquainted arose in his heart.
In addition to wanting to get favorability rewards, Namikaze Minato and Uzumaki
Kushina's own attitude towards the people around them is also very worthy of He
Feng's friendship.
But even though He Feng thought so, the Shuimen and his wife opposite him didn't
think so.
The two of them can be said to be Konoha's model ninjas. They usually spend half of
their time completing tasks and the other half of their time falling in love.
Although they know that Konoha's White Fang-senpai has two sons, they have not met
yet. Pass.
Therefore, He Feng’s identity was not known, and Jiraiya did not introduce him
immediately.
"Ah, what a cute little kid, let me touch you." Kushina has a bold personality. The
first time she saw He Feng, she was attracted by the exquisite 'little girl' in
front of her.
It is said that beautiful things attract each other, and obviously He Feng did it.
Kushina directly wrapped He Feng's face with both hands, and rubbed it back and
forth quickly until He Feng's little face turned red.
The sixteen-year-old Kushina was a dimension-reducing blow to He Feng. For a while,
he couldn't resist even if he wanted to, and had no choice but to be rua.
Of course, He Feng did not suffer this humiliation in vain.
He was in pain and happy.
[Uzumaki Kushina’s favorability +1]
[Uzumaki Kushina’s favorability +1]
【Trigger critical strike】
[Uzumaki Kushina’s favorability +5]
【Acquire the talent of learning the sealing technique of the Uzumaki clan】
[Acquire special talent: Kagura Heart Eye]
This harvest is undoubtedly a good harvest for He Feng. Compared with the rewards
he has received, there is nothing wrong with letting Kushina rua for a while.
"Kushina, He Feng is a boy~" Just when Kushina was obsessed with He Feng's soft
face, Jiraiya had already introduced He Feng to Minato.
Therefore, Minato also knew the identity of He Feng and White Fang's son.
"Eh?!" Kushina was stunned for a moment, then looked at He Feng in disbelief.
She first played with He Feng's long shawl hair, then tugged at He Feng's baby-fat
face, then grabbed He Feng's little hand and poked He Feng's jade-white arm.
"Boy? It's incredible that such a cute boy is a boy." Because of her surprise,
Kushina revealed her oral habit while speaking.
"Hey, Master Kushina, please stop touching her. He Feng is very troubled." Nohara
Lin walked out and stood in front of He Feng, blocking Kushina's sinful little hand
like a little lioness. go back.
No, don't stop!
He Feng complained in his heart, and then said righteously: "I am indeed a male.
I'm really sorry for being so cute."
"Hahaha, I rarely see such a cute boy." After saying that, Kushina pulled Minato
next to her in front of her.
"My name is Uzumaki Kushina. He is Namikaze Minato and a disciple of Master
Jiraiya." Kushina demonstrated her embarrassment by introducing herself very well.
"Hatake Hefeng is a disciple of Master Orochimaru."
"Kushina-senpai, Minato-senpai, my name is Yuhi Kurenai." Kurenai introduced
generously.
"Minato-senpai, Kushina-senpai, my name is Nohara Rin." Rin changed her attitude of
protecting the little lioness in front of He Feng and became a little reserved.
"You two are also very cute, come on!" Kushina put her hands on Lin and Hong's
heads again, and patted them.
Perhaps it was because Kushina was both a girl, so if she continued with her
tactics,The two girls' hairstyles were not messy at all.
"Hahahaha, I'm already hungry, so let's eat first." Jiraiya looked at the warm
scene in front of him and laughed.
"That's right, let's eat first. If you have any questions, we can chat while we
eat. Akimichi's barbecue is delicious." Minato also smiled and took the menu from
the waiter, "I'll order whatever you want to eat. "
At this time, He Feng really wanted to make a joke about "I don't eat beef", but
considering that no one would understand him if he said it, and the other party
would take him seriously, he gave up the idea.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

After all, beef is really delicious.

Several people reported what they wanted to eat in turn. There was absolutely no
thought of saving money for Jiraiya.
You must know that although Jiraiya does not look very serious, the books he
published have become popular throughout the Fire Country.
The royalties alone are almost as much as the small treasury in the Hefeng system,
making him a real rich man.
For a book like Kissing Heaven, even if He Feng has not read it, he can still know
what is written in it.
"In the future, if my brother reads Intimate Heaven, I will definitely break his
legs. A handsome young man will be useless if he reads two ninjutsu every day." He
Feng thought in his heart.
This meal of barbecued meat Hefeng was very good, and Jiraiya was also very sore
when he paid the bill.
Although he had a lot of money, he couldn't resist the fact that Akimichi's
barbecue was very expensive, and Hefeng and Kushina ate a lot.
Kushina understands that the Nine-Tails Jinchuuriki will eat more because of the
Nine-Tails in his body, but why does He Feng!
Isn’t he just six years old? The total food he eats is bigger than He Feng’s head.
Where did he eat?
Of course, despite the physical pain, Jiraiya still did not refuse.
Before parting, Minato handed He Feng and the others a note and said kindly: "This
is my home address. If you three little guys have any questions about ninjutsu or
taijutsu, you can come to me." , I will answer it for you."
Kushina also said happily: "If you miss me, you can come to me. I will cook for
you. My cooking skills are very good!"
Although Minato Kushina was not married at this time, they had already purchased
their own small home with the rewards from these years of missions.
Hefeng took the note and showed the expression that a qualified shota succubus
should have and said: "I know sister Kushina and brother Minato. If I have time, I
will take Hong and Lin there."

Chapter 17 Ask Minato for help and learn to fly Thunder God
After returning home, the first thing He Feng did was to test the Kagura Heart Eye
revealed by Kushina.
As the most powerful bloodstain of the Uzumaki clan besides the King Kong Blockade,
and one of the most difficult to awaken, the strength of Kagura's Heart Eye is
self-evident.
Kagura's Heart Eye allows He Feng to accurately detect chakra signals within a
radius of more than ten kilometers. It is not an exaggeration to say that it is the
strongest sensory ninjutsu in the entire ninja world.
However, the use of sensory ninjutsu will always reveal some of one's own
intelligence. In order not to discover his own specialness before he grows up,
Hefeng did not choose to try to use Kagura's Heart Eye, but began to study
Orochimaru and gave it to him. The art of Flying Thunder God.
As the fastest ninjutsu in the ninja world, Flying Thunder God Jutsu is extremely
difficult to learn.
A total of three key points are needed to learn the art of Flying Thunder God.
First, one can skillfully sense the hidden spatial coordinates in the ninja world.
The second is to be proficient in and skillfully use a variety of sealing
techniques, and even mark and seal the spatial coordinates perceived by oneself.
Third, you need a huge amount of chakra to support you to complete space
teleportation.
With this in mind, He Feng also began to learn the art of Flying Thunder God.
If he can learn the Flying Thunder God Technique, then he will have the ability to
protect himself in the ninja world, and he will be able to escape unharmed even if
he encounters someone who cannot be defeated.
……
Learning the art of Flying Thunder God did not go as smoothly as He Feng expected.
The relationship between understanding and mastering is very subtle.
It's like eating Tang Monk's meat. You just need to put Tang Monk's meat in your
mouth.
But the difficulty lies in the process of putting Tang Monk's meat into your mouth.
In this process, Sun Wukong and Monk Zhu Bajiesha need to be solved. After solving
these three, we must also solve the gods and Buddhas. Even if the first two are
solved, we still need to face the greatest suffering Tathagata.
Now the Flying Thunder God's technique is to He Feng what Tang Monk's meat is to
the little demon.
Time flies and half a month passes.
During this period, Hefeng used many methods but was unable to accurately capture
the spatial coordinates.
Although his time and space ninjutsu talent has been greatly improved, it is not
enough to support a six-year-old boy like him to complete the steps from 0 to 1
alone.
"By the way, there is also Namikaze Minato. As the yellow flash of the future, he
must know how to capture the space coordinates." He Feng suddenly remembered that
Namikaze Minato had told him half a month ago, if you have anything you don't
understand, you can ask him. .
He Feng's mobility has always been full, and he will do it as soon as he decides on
anything.
Soon, He Feng brought the notes he had remembered this month to the location where
Namikaze Minato told He Feng.
He Feng stepped forward and rang the doorbell.
"Here we come, wait a minute." Uzumaki Kushina's voice sounded from inside the
house.
When the door opened, He Feng saw Kushina wearing an apron and holding a spatula.
"Ah, it's Hefeng, come on, come on, come on!Come on, my sister is about to cook,
and it’s just time for you to taste her cooking skills. "Kushina enthusiastically
welcomed Hefeng into the house.
"Where's Brother Minato?" Hefeng was pushed down on the chair by Kushina, and a
variety of snacks were placed in front of him.
"Minato is studying ninjutsu in the study. Some time ago, he exchanged an S-level
ninjutsu called Flying Thunder God from the Hokage." Kushina pointed to the study
not far away and said.
"Sure enough." He Feng understood. It seemed that his trip was not in vain.
Although Brother Minato had not yet mastered the Flying Thunder God, he would not
doubt that Minato could not master the Flying Thunder God.
"Sister Kushina, I have something to ask Brother Minato."
"Oh, then go ahead and don't worry about disturbing him. He won't have a clue in a
short time."
He Feng nodded, knocked on the door and entered the study.
As soon as he entered the study, He Feng saw Namikaze Minato holding a brush and
dipping ink on a piece of paper writing incomprehensible spells.
He Feng knew that this was the Flying Thunder Divine Technique.
The second generation's Flying Thunder God Technique is a pattern, while Minato's
Flying Thunder God Technique is words.
Looking at it this way, Namikaze Minato doesn't have a clue. He has even developed
the writing technique. It is obvious that it will not be long before he can
completely master the Flying Thunder God.
"Brother Shuimen, are you also learning to fly the Thunder God?" He Feng asked at
the right time.
After Minato Namikaze finished the last stroke, he looked up at He Feng and
accurately captured the word "ye" in He Feng's words.
"He Feng, are you saying that you are also learning the art of Flying Thunder God?"
Namikaze Minato was a little curious. In order to exchange for this Flying Thunder
God, he could say that he had used up all the achievements he had accumulated from
doing missions in the past few years.
What about He Feng? Did Sakumo-senpai change it for him? Or Orochimaru-senpai?
"Well, my teacher gave this to me and asked me to practice, but I didn't have any
clue after studying it for half a month, so I came to see Brother Shuimen." He Feng
took out the notes he remembered and handed them to Bo. Feng shui gate.
Minato opened his notes and carefully read some of He Feng's experience and key
points of practice. Then he pondered for a moment and explained to He Feng:
"Hefeng, there is nothing wrong with your idea. If we continue to try according to
your idea, we will find the spatial coordinates one day, but this time will be
relatively longer.
The reason why I was able to capture the spatial coordinates in a short period of
time is not only because I have more experience in learning ninjutsu than you do,
but also because of the help of Kushina. Kushina is very good at sealing
techniques, so I used his help. The sealing technique 'pauses' the space around it
that is constantly moving around, and only then can it find the spatial
coordinates.
Since you came to me for help, I will help you find the spatial coordinates this
time. As long as you find the spatial coordinates, it will be much easier to learn
the art of Flying Thunder God. "
With that said, Minato began to form seals.
"Seal and space restriction."
The sealing technique performed by Minato is an unheralded secret of the Uzumaki
clan. It has the ability to seal time and space ninjutsu in a certain space.
However, it requires a huge amount of chakra, and the use of many seals is time-
consuming, labor-intensive, and has a very limited range. Due to his small age, the
Uzumaki clan gradually declined.
If Uzumaki Mito, the 'living fossil' during the Warring States Period, had not
taught Ninjutsu to Kushina, this almost useless space restriction sealing technique
would have been lost.
After Shuimen sealed the space in front of He Feng, He Feng closed his eyes again
and tried to sense the spatial coordinates.
As expected, this time He Feng clearly perceived the spatial coordinates.
The static space is extremely stable, and He Feng does not need to worry about
sudden changes in spatial coordinates that will prevent him from recording in time.
"Now Hefeng, use your sealing technique to record this spatial coordinate, and
continuously release chakra to this coordinate until a vague technique appears in
your mind.
This vague spell is the Flying Thunder God spell that you need to remember and use
skillfully in the future. "

Chapter 18 Preliminary Mastery of Flying Thunder God

Facts have proved that if you want to master something quickly, it is very
necessary to have a teacher to teach you with personal experience. With Shuimen's
explanation and help and his own summary of half a month, He Feng only used After
half an hour, he completed the seal on the discovered space coordinates, and drew
his own unique mark of the Flying Thunder God in his mind.
Maybe He Feng used the same method as Minato. Although He Feng's and Minato's
Flying Thunder God Marks were different in details, they were both written
techniques in general.
And what is needed to express the written spells on the ninja tools cannot be done
in a short while.
This requires Hefeng to keep trying in the future until he masters it.
Generally speaking, He Feng's purpose of meeting Shuimen this time has been
achieved.
"Brother Minato, thank you very much. Without you, I don't know how long it would
take to learn the Flying Thunder God Technique." He Feng was very grateful to
Minato.
Looking at He Feng's chubby little face, Minato felt warm in his heart. He couldn't
help but dream about whether his and Kushina's children in the future would be as
cute as He Feng.
【Namikaze Minato's favorability +1】
【Namikaze Minato's favorability +1】
【Acquire some insights into Namikaze Minato's Flying Thunder God Technique】
At this moment, Hefeng's understanding of the Flying Thunder God's technique became
more profound, and the areas that were still somewhat confusing were cleared up.
If before, he was confident that he could truly master the Flying Thunder God
Technique within three months, then with Namikaze Minato's understanding of the
Flying Thunder God Technique, Hefeng was confident that he could truly master it
within a month., and imprinted the spell on his own swords.
"Minato, Hefeng, it's time to eat!" Outside the study, Kushina had already put the
delicious food she had carefully prepared on the table.
"Okay, here we come." Minato responded happily.
"He Feng, Kushina's cooking skills are very good. When you come here, she will cook
something that she wouldn't normally cook. It will be a blessing for both of us."
Minato smiled mysteriously at He Feng and led He Feng Came to the dining table.
He Feng was also delighted when he looked at the food on the table. These days, he
has been immersed in practicing the Flying Thunder God Technique. What he usually
eats is the meatballs or ramen brought back by Kakashi. Although they are
delicious, they are also a bit boring. .
"I'm gonna start now!"
At the dinner table, the three of them clasped their hands and said in unison.
"How about it? It's delicious." Kushina held the dishes for Minato and He Feng with
a happy smile on her face.
The scene in front of her reminded her of a family of three, and the idea of having
a child suddenly arose in her heart.
"That's great." Kushina thought sweetly in her heart.
She originally came to Konoha alone and was very frustrated. Although she had the
protection of Mito-sama, Mito-sama was already old.
At that time, Kushina was confused and desperate about the future. After all, she
knew that her future was to become the demon fox, the Jinchuuriki of the Nine-
Tails.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Who would want to seal an evil Nine-Tails inside their body if they could?
But she met Minato, who was a ray of light shining into her gloomy future.
Inside Kushina's body, Kurama looked at the warm scene in front of him with gloomy
eyes. If possible, he would like to blast the other person into the sky with a
Tailed Beast Jade.
"Damn Uchiha Madara, Senju Hashirama, damn Uzumaki Mito, damn Uzumaki Kushina!
Damn, hate, hate, hate!" Kyuubi yelled with both grievance and anger.
……
After dinner at Minato's house, Hefeng declined Minato and Kushina's request to
stay overnight. Hefeng didn't like to listen to the couple doing that kind of thing
at night.
And he is only six years old now. He is at an age where he has more than enough
ambition but not enough strength. How could he suffer such a crime?
"Time passes so slowly, when will I grow up! I may be the worst succubus ever." He
Feng roared in his heart. Although he did not admit his identity as a succubus in
words, no matter in reality Neither the system nor the system could refute the fact
that he was a succubus.
Back home, Hefeng saw Hatake Sakumo and Hatake Kakashi sitting on the tatami.
"Brother, father, what are you doing?" He Feng tilted his head and asked in
confusion.
"He Feng (younger brother) is getting cuter and cuter." The father and son thought
at the same time as they looked at He Feng who tilted his head.
"Ahem." The two coughed slightly at the same time, and then looked at each other.
Kakashi broke the embarrassment and said: "I want to graduate early. With my
strength, I can't learn much in the ninja school. I usually use shadow clones to
replace my classes like He Feng."
Hatake Sakumo did not express his own opinion, and he would not make decisions for
his son without authorization.
"What about father's thoughts?" He Feng looked at Hatake Sakumo again.
"I think there is nothing wrong with Kakashi thinking this way. Hefeng, you were
accepted as a disciple by Orochimaru. With Orochimaru's teachings every day, your
strength has improved by leaps and bounds. Although I sometimes make time to teach
Kakashi, after all, I don’t have a lot of time.”
The Third Ninja War took place from the 49th year of Konoha to the 50th year of
Konoha. Although the specific time of the influence of the butterfly Hefeng cannot
be determined, the major events will not change.
Since the past two years, conflicts in the entire ninja world have become more
frequent.
This can be regarded as an inevitable phenomenon. After all, war never ends
overnight, but continues to expand from one small conflict to another, until it
affects one country, two countries, and even the entire ninja world.
"What about He Feng?" Hatake Sakumo and Kakashi looked at He Feng at the same time.
Hefeng pondered for a while, thinking about Kakashi's original direction.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
"I don't think it's necessary for my brother to graduate so early. After all, a
person's power is limited after all. Doesn't he also have his own bond in the ninja
school? If he wants to graduate early, it's better to bring Obito and Lin's
Increase your strength together, so you can form a team.
That way I don’t have to worry about my brother. "
Kakashi was stunned and a little puzzled: "Obito and Lin? What about He Feng? Even
if you graduate early, you and I should be in the same team."
Hefeng was a little afraid of Obito. Originally, he wanted to establish enough
bonds with Obito so that he could increase his favorability.
Therefore, as long as He Feng used what Lin said to Obito in the original timeline,
it also caused Obito to look at He Feng in an increasingly wrong way.
When no one was around, Obito would even mutter something like: It would be nice if
Hefeng was a girl.
There is no place for Lin in Obito's heart right now, all he pretends to be is He
Feng!
Hefeng even suspected that Obito would be deceived by Madara Uchiha in the future,
and his shouting was no longer about "I want to create a world with Lin", but
instead: "I want to create a world where Hefeng is a girl."
Just thinking about this kind of thing is scary.
"I will follow Orochimaru-sensei and continue to improve. Brother, you have to work
hard, otherwise you will have to wait.I had already become a Jonin when my brother
graduated. After all, Orochimaru-sensei had arranged for me to graduate early. "
After saying that, He Feng also took out the genin forehead protector that he had
never worn before from his pocket.
Hatake Sakumo was a little surprised. He didn't expect Hefeng to suddenly become a
genin quietly.
"!" Kakashi's eyes widened, he was completely outclassed by his younger brother.
But Kakashi’s competitive spirit was also completely aroused.
"I understand! I will give Obito special training starting tomorrow. I can't let
that guy Obito slow me down."
Although Kakashi disliked Obito, he recognized Obito as a teammate from the bottom
of his heart.
He Feng also smiled and nodded, "I will also tell Teacher Orochimaru about Lin.
Lin's chakra manipulation is very sophisticated, and her talent as a medical ninja
is still very strong."

Chapter 19 Meet Tsunade and get a reward

The next day, He Feng felt something licking his cheek before he woke up.
He opened his eyes and saw a small snake less than twenty centimeters long
appearing beside the pillow.
He Feng sat up from the bed and asked with some confusion: "Does Teacher Orochimaru
have anything to do with me?"
The little snake hissed, and then a familiar sound came from it as it opened and
closed.
"He Feng, come to me in the laboratory and I will take you to a place."
Hearing this, He Feng immediately stood up and looked for clothes, "Okay, Teacher
Orochimaru, I'll be there soon."
[Orochimaru’s favorability +1]
【Acquire primary natural energy perception】
Another treasure dropped, and it was still natural energy perception. He Feng was
very excited.
The difficulty of learning senjutsu is so high that even Orochimaru cannot master
senjutsu. Even if Jiraiya masters senjutsu, he cannot enter sage mode alone.
And He Feng will one day become an immortal with the help of the system.
After washing up, He Feng left home in a hurry without even having time to eat
breakfast.
The father and son who were having breakfast looked at me and I looked at you,
feeling a little helpless in their hearts.
Soon, He Feng came to Orochimaru's laboratory and saw Orochimaru wearing a white
coat.
"Teacher Orochimaru, I'm here."
Orochimaru nodded, looked at He Feng's expression up and down, and then nodded with
satisfaction: "Not bad, very energetic. Come with me and I will take you to meet
someone."
Orochimaru walked in front of He Feng with a smile on his face.
"Teacher, where are we going?" He Feng asked a little confused.
"The land of Thousand Hands Clan."
He Feng was stunned, why are you going to the Thousand Hands Clan? If the
experiment requires volunteers from the Senju clan, they can be recruited to the
laboratory. Anyway, it is just to draw some blood and will not have any impact on
the Senju people. Why do you need Teacher Orochimaru to go with you?
Meeting someone? See who still needs him.
Perhaps Orochimaru, who was walking in front, noticed He Feng's silence, and gave
He Feng an explanation that was not an explanation, "You will know when you get
there. Be sweeter then, and you will benefit from it."
He Feng was silent and had some guesses in his mind, but he didn't say them out.
Outside the Thousand Hands Clan, He Feng stopped there and looked calmly at the
deserted Thousand Hands Clan land in front of him.
Following Orochimaru's footsteps, He Feng came to a room in the center of the
Thousand Hands Clan.
"As expected, I came to see Tsunade. At present, Tsunade is the only one among the
Senju clan worthy of Orochimaru's personal trip." He Feng understood, and then
stood beside Orochimaru openly.
The little one looks very cute.
"Orochimaru, this little girl is your disciple. She is indeed a bit cuter. It is
difficult for you to deal with her." Tsunade put down the wine glass in her hand,
maybe in a better mood, and even made a joke about Orochimaru.
Orochimaru didn't care, he just smiled and said to He Feng, "You stay here to drink
with Tsunade today. If Tsunade is happy, maybe I can teach you some ninjutsu that I
don't know."
As for explaining He Feng's gender, just kidding, Tsunade has slandered herself so
much, so she shouldn't be embarrassed.
Hefeng looked at Tsunade in disbelief, then looked at Orochimaru, pointing at
himself without saying anything.
Although He Feng said nothing, the three people present understood what He Feng
meant.
"Drinking? Me? Are you serious?"
"Pfft~" Shizune, who was sitting next to Tsunade, couldn't help laughing. Facing He
Feng's actions, Shizune's whole heart seemed to be cute. That is, Tsunade-sama and
Orochimaru-sama were beside her. Otherwise, she must step forward and suck this
cute little girl hard.
"I'm not asking you to drink. Just listen to Tsunade for whatever I need you to
do." After Orochimaru finished speaking, he disappeared from the spot with a bang.
Obviously, the Senju clan who brought Hefeng here was just a shadow clone of
Orochimaru.
Orochimaru, who was far away in the Konoha laboratory, also smiled knowingly after
receiving the memory sent back by the shadow clone.
Since taking in He Feng as a disciple, he felt that he was gradually being healed.
"Should I accept a disciple..." Orochimaru murmured to himself, seemingly thinking,
but in fact he had already made a decision in his heart.
On the other side, the moment He Feng sat down on the other side of Tsunade,
Tsunade smelled the fragrance like gardenia coming from He Feng's body, and her
energy, which was a little dazed due to alcohol, suddenly recovered. A lot.
As a medical ninja, Tsunade noticed this clearly.
"He Feng, sit over a little bit." Tsunade said toHe Feng waved, motioning He Feng
to get closer to him.
"Sister Tsunade, isn't this good?" He Feng whispered. He was very aware of the
lethality of his succubus physique to the opposite sex. Didn't he see that the weak
Shizune couldn't even move his eyes away?
If he sat closer to Tsunade, he would be afraid that he would be pushed back by
Tsunade.
Although he can’t do anything right now.
"What's the matter? It's because the girls are so close." Tsunade waved her hand
nonchalantly, and then directly took He Feng into her arms, regardless of whether
He Feng wanted to or not.
Feeling the mountains touching his face, He Feng's entire face began to turn red.
He whispered: "But I am a boy, Sister Tsunade..."
Tsunade was stunned for a moment and subconsciously wanted to push He Feng away,
but the next second she realized what Orochimaru said to her.
"What's the matter? What's wrong with my sister and my brother being more
intimate?" Unknowingly, He Feng's figure overlapped with the Rope Tree in Tsunade's
eyes. Although Tsunade understood that He Feng was not the Rope Tree, she couldn't
push He Feng away. .
"Since you called me sister, then I will recognize you as my younger brother. If
anyone bullies you in the future, just tell your sister and she will help you
educate him." Tsunade hugged He Feng and said softly.
She said this to He Feng, why not to Shengshu.
"Yes, I will, Sister Tsunade." He Feng said softly, and did not continue to refuse
Tsunade's intimacy.
【Trigger critical strike】
[Favorability from Tsunade +5]
[Favorability from Tsunade +5]
【Acquire advanced natural energy affinity】
[Obtain the primary immortal body]
--------------------xxxx--------------------

At this moment, He Feng suddenly felt that there were some substances in the air
that he had never felt before.
He Feng knew that this was natural energy.
There is also the Immortal Human Body. The price of this thing in the system mall
is at the same level as the Sharingan. You can make money with your blood!
It is not an exaggeration to say that this day is a lucky day for He Feng.
First, he gained the primary natural energy perception, and then he gained the
high-level natural energy affinity, and became human with the primary immortal
body.
Of course, in He Feng's eyes, these rewards are not as good as they are now.
The succubus physique not only works on the opposite sex he clings to, but also
works on him.
While Tsunade was benefiting from the succubus's physique, Hefeng was also enjoying
the benefits.
Well, in every sense.

Chapter 20 Staying Overnight

"He Feng, is Orochimaru good to you? If not, tell your sister and she will help you
teach him a lesson."
Tsunade put down the wine glass in her hand and gently used her hands to comb He
Feng's hair, which was a little messy due to getting up early.
On the side, Shizune blinked her big eyes, envious of Tsunade-sama for being able
to touch such a cute little brother He Feng so casually.
She wants to try it too.
Facing Tsunade, it was impossible for Sushou Hefeng not to be nervous. At this
time, his little heart was beating loudly.
In addition, Hefeng can also feel the pleasure signals from his body.
This is the first time that He Feng, a shameful succubus, has had such close
contact with a woman.
This is completely different from the previous contact with Nohara Lin, Yuhi
Kurenai and the others. In the former, Hefeng could be said to be at a loss for
words and even wanted to run away, while the latter was Tsunade!
"Lord Orochimaru didn't bully me. He was very kind to me. He not only gave me
various ninjutsu scrolls, but also patiently taught me about scientific
experiments."
Perhaps the succubus's physique was taking effect again, He Feng's voice actually
became a bit milky, which made Tsunade's heart melt.
Tsunade buried He Feng deeply in her chest, put her nose on He Feng's head and took
a deep breath.
"Hefeng, although Orochimaru asked you to accompany me, I can't do nothing. If you
have any wishes, you can tell your sister, and she will satisfy you." Tsunade waved
her hand and said boldly.
She is not lying when she says this. As Konoha's Tsunade-hime, even if He Feng says
he wants to be Hokage, Tsunade has the ability to recommend He Feng to become a
Hokage in the future.
Of course, the prerequisite for becoming Hokage is that He Feng is strong enough.
She does not want to reach the level of her eldest grandfather and second
grandfather, but is at least better than the old man Sandaime.
"I'm already happy that Sister Tsunade can stay with me. I don't need any other
wishes." He Feng retreated in order to advance, raised his head and blinked at
Tsunade.
Tsunade's face felt a little hot, and she didn't know if it was the alcohol or He
Feng's problem. Due to the embarrassment, Tsunade could only pick up the wine glass
and drink again.
"Then, there is no reason to take back what I, Tsunade, said. If you have any wish,
Hefeng, just say it. Even if it means asking Sister Moon in the sky to pick it off
for you." Some of the top Tsunade no longer knew. What are you talking about?
At this time, she was like a scumbag who was frantically painting cakes in front of
the goddess he was pursuing, just to win the goddess's heart.
After Tsunade had said this, He Feng no longer refused. If he continued to refuse,
He Feng was afraid that Tsunade would say that even if you want Uchiha Madara's
head, I will give it to you.
"I have a friend who is a fan of Sister Tsunade. Her dream is to become Sister
Tsunade's apprentice. I wonder if Sister Tsunade can give her a chance. If Sister
Tsunade thinks she is not qualified enough, it's okay to refuse directly."
Hearing this, Tsunade agreed without thinking, "ThisI agreed to the wish, but since
you haven’t said it to death, Xiao He Feng, it doesn’t count as a wish. You can
mention one more. "
"???" There was a big question mark on He Feng's small face.
Okay, Sister Tsunade has become her own djinn. Don’t let the second wish end and
there will be a third wish.
"Then if possible, I would like to learn Sister Tsunade's ninjutsu. Orochimaru-
sensei has taught me all the ninjutsu he can teach me so far."
Tsunade was stunned, but she didn't expect He Feng to make such a wish.
But what's the matter with Orochimaru? Don't you know the truth of biting off more
than you can chew? Why is he so unscrupulous in teaching students? Who is a good
teacher who doesn't know how to proceed step by step, but teaches all his ninjutsu
in one go? go out.
I remember Orochimaru told her before that He Feng is a real genius. Currently, the
only things that can limit He Feng's learning are his age and the amount of chakra.
Thinking of this, Tsunade also became interested.
She pinched He Feng's cheek again, and then stood up from the tatami.
"Xiao Hefeng, the yard here is big. Show me the ninjutsu you have mastered so far
so that I can be sure what to teach you." Tsunade pinched her waist and showed off
her proud figure.
Seeing He Feng being let go by Tsunade-sama, Shizune also quietly came behind He
Feng at this time, and pinched He Feng's jade-white arm while no one was paying
attention.
"As expected, it's so soft and smells so good." Shizune was very satisfied. She had
been by Tsunade-sama's side since she could remember, and she rarely had the chance
to meet people of her own age, let alone the opposite sex.
As the first person of the same age that she came into contact with, Hefeng could
be said to have aroused Shizune's curiosity.
Of course, Shizune still knew that He Feng was special.
Although she has never had contact with the opposite sex, it is not that she has
never seen the opposite sex.
Except for He Feng, all the boys are naughty and noisy. They are either making
trouble or making trouble on the way every day.
Tsunade naturally noticed Shizune's little movements, but she didn't pay attention.
When He Feng came to the yard, it was impossible to show off all the ninjutsu he
knew. Although He Feng's exposed strength was very strong, it was only a part of
him that was deliberately exposed.
He Feng still knows how to hide some real bug abilities.
After thinking about how to shock Tsunade to the greatest extent, He Feng took a
stance.
He first formed the seal of the shadow clone technique.
"The art of multiple shadow clones."
The next second, the originally empty courtyard was filled with He Feng's figure.
Tsunade was shocked. She couldn't imagine how happy she would be if there were so
many He Feng around her all the time.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
"Art fire escape ho fireball."
"Wind Escape·Great Breakthrough."
"Earth escape·Earth flow wall."
"Water Escape·Water Formation Wall."
"Thunder Escape·Raikiri."
He Feng's five shadow clones each used five different ninjutsus. In addition to B-
level and C-level ninjutsu, there was also S-level thunder escape ninjutsu.
It can be said that at the age of six, He Feng's current achievements can be said
to be unprecedented and almost unprecedented.
Before Tsunade had time to be surprised, she saw He Feng holding a big one for him.
"Sealing Technique·Four Purple Flame Formation!"
A large sealing technique composed of He Feng's four shadow clones standing at the
four corners enveloped the courtyard of the Thousand Hands Clan.
For a moment, he was directly attracted to the ANBU patrolling in secret.
The ANBU rushed towards the Senju Clan as soon as they saw the sealing technique
rising.
Soon, He Feng withdrew the sealing technique and released all the shadow clones.
"How about Sister Tsunade, I'm awesome."
Looking at He Feng, who was a little weak but still smiled at her, Tsunade also
laughed.
"It's amazing, Xiao Hefeng, you are the most talented genius I have ever seen."
Tsunade praised from the bottom of her heart.
She is happy to see He Feng's talent is very high. Only in this way can He Feng be
able to protect himself when he encounters danger in the future.
"Tsunade-sama, what was the sealing circle just now?" An ANBU used the
teleportation technique to appear next to Tsunade. He informed her respectfully and
then asked.
"I was studying the sealing technique just now. If nothing happens, you can leave."
Tsunade said without any emotion.
"yes."
After the ANBU left, Tsunade smiled again. She walked forward and used medical
ninjutsu to check He Feng's body. After confirming that there was nothing abnormal,
she relaxed and said:
"Xiao Hefeng, I see that you have five chakra attributes. Normally Orochimaru will
teach you if you want to learn it, so I will teach you medical ninjutsu.
In this way, if you suffer any injuries during training in the future, you can be
cured as soon as possible, and you can also deal with some special situations. "
"Thank you sister Tsunade, I will learn medical ninjutsu." He Feng is very
interested in medical ninjutsu.
Although he is also greedy for the Yin seal and the art of creating and
regenerating hundreds of heroes, he understands that it is not something he can
master now.
To put it bluntly, he is still a bit young.
"Medical Ninjutsu is not easy to learn. Xiao Hefeng, don't underestimate the
difficulty of learning Medical Ninjutsu. If you don't have an extremely fine level
of chakra control, you won't be able to learn Medical Ninjutsu." Tsunade said with
a smile.
There is one thing she didn't say, that is, although medical ninjutsu is difficult
to learn, it depends on who teaches it.
As the undoubted number one medical ninja in the ninja world, Tsunade's
understanding of medical ninjutsu is not an exaggeration..
"Shizune, go to the pond and catch a fish. I want it alive."
"Okay, Tsunade-sama." Shizune nodded and quickly caught a fish for Tsunade.
Tsunade herself placed the table where she had been drinking just in the yard.
"Xiao Hefeng, let me first demonstrate to you what medical ninjutsu is."
With that said, Tsunade controlled her strength and slapped the fish with her palm.
He Feng could even hear the clicking sound coming from the fish's head.
Even the bones were broken.
The next second, chakra threads appeared in Tsunade's hands. These chakra threads
penetrated into the fish's body and repaired it in detail.
Less than a minute later, the motionless fish started to struggle again.
"Learning medical ninjutsu does not happen overnight. Hefeng, you stay here and
practice with Shizune today. I will tell you if there are any mistakes."
"Then Sister Tsunade, don't I need to go home at night?" He Feng asked doubtfully.
Tsunade waved her hand, "No, I will ask someone to tell your father. You can stay
here with your sister at night and warm her bed."
"..."
Perhaps because of Tsunade's bed-warming reward, Hefeng felt inexplicably that the
day passed very slowly, so slowly that he even learned medical ninjutsu much more
slowly.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

At night, He Feng was lying in bed and was held in Tsunade's arms. Even though
there were pajamas between him and Tsunade, He Feng still had a clear perception of
Tsunade's proud figure.
Although He Feng's body was not strong enough to support his lust, the charming
atmosphere alone was enough to keep He Feng awake all night.
Compared with He Feng, Tsunade's sleep quality can no longer be described as good.
Smelling the fragrance of He Feng's body, Tsunade fell into a deep sleep for the
first time in so many years, having a good sleep instead of being woken up by
nightmares in the middle of the night.
……
Time flies, the sun and the moon fly by.
A year always flies by.
Konoha 44th year, September 15th.
"Nissan, this is a gift from Lin and Obito. Open it yourself and don't let me open
it. I've already opened enough." He Feng threw the two gift boxes at Kakashi
irritably.
"He Feng, you are so popular. It's normal to have so many gifts here every year."
Kakashi accurately caught the two gift boxes thrown by He Feng, and at the same
time picked up a box next to him and threw it to He Feng. go.
"This is given to you by Lord Orochimaru."
He Feng reached out and took it, then opened it.
There is a note inside, which contains some words that Orochimaru said to He Feng.
In addition, there is a ninjutsu scroll.
"He Feng, happy birthday. There is a ninjutsu I gave you in the box. I believe you
can master it well with your qualifications."
"Lord Orochimaru is still so concise and concise, He Feng, please see what ninjutsu
it is." Kakashi appeared behind He Feng at some point, urging He Feng to open the
scroll.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
He Feng himself was very curious and opened the scroll.
"It turns out to be a psychic scroll!" Kakashi was shocked, "Lord Orochimaru
actually gave this kind of thing to you, He Feng, as a birthday gift."
The Hatake clan has their own psychic ninja dog, so they naturally know how
valuable the psychic scroll is.
"There are also matching psychic skills." He Feng said softly.
Opening the psychic scroll, He Feng could see the name written on the last line of
the scroll.
Orochimaru.
Obviously this is the psychic scroll from Longdi Cave.
Hefeng, who knew exactly where Longdi Cave was, did not sign his name excitedly,
but quietly put away the psychic scroll.
He planned to go to Ryūchi Cave with Master Orochimaru to learn the Sage Mode after
his strength improved a bit in the future, instead of signing his name on the
scroll alone now.
Compared with Teacher Orochimaru's Ten Thousand Snakes, He Feng is more like
subduing a psychic snake by himself.
"He Feng, why don't you write your name?" Kakashi was a little confused.
"I still plan to sign my name under the witness of Teacher Orochimaru." He Feng
explained.
Kakashi nodded, not planning to say anything more.
"Oh, by the way, Obito and I have both submitted applications for early graduation.
Tomorrow is our graduation assessment. Hefeng, do you want to come and take a
look?" Kakashi said suddenly while helping Hefeng open his gifts.
"Of course I want to go. How could I not go to Nissan's graduation exam?" He Feng
said without any hesitation: "However, there have been a lot of conflicts in the
ninja world recently. If Nissan becomes a genin, he will take over the task."
Kakashi can hear He Feng's worry, but his current strength has long surpassed that
of ordinary chuunin.
Although Kakashi did not enter ANBU training this time, his strength was no weaker
than that of his original timeline, having been taught by Hatake Sakumo since he
was a child.
"He Feng, don't worry about me. Although my strength is not as strong as yours, I'm
not weak." Kakashi said coolly.
Hefeng shook his head, "Nisan, I mean I'm worried about you, so I told sister
Tsunade after she accepted Lin as her disciple. I will be in the same team with you
in the future. It just so happened that I also learned medical ninja." Technique, I
am responsible for your safety."
――――――
Why did Tsunade react like this?
The reason is very simple. Although He Feng is a succubus, he is still a succubus.
Check your heartAsk yourself, who can handle being in close contact with a
succubus?
Chapter 21 The fight for the bell is in progress
The next day, early morning.
"Nisan, do you think Obito will be late this time?" Hefeng and Kakashi went
together in order to go to the Konoha training ground early and see their leading
jounin complete the early graduation assessment.
"Well..." He Feng responded with a long silence.
To be honest, Kakashi is really not sure whether that kid Obito will be late.
Logically speaking, helping an old lady cross the street should be a quick matter,
but Obito is surprised that he can help different old ladies even half a mile. .
According to common sense, this kind of thing is a good thing for good people.
Kakashi cannot force Obito not to do it. He can only tell Obito to have the most
basic sense of time when helping others.
But what Obito said to Kakashi could be said to go in one ear and out the other,
and he couldn't hear it at all.
"I hope Obito won't be late, otherwise I will make him look good." Kakashi said in
a cold voice. If his graduation exam was delayed because of Obito, then he would
kill him.
Soon, the two brothers arrived at Konoha's training ground and saw a young man
wearing goggles asking questions around a man with long blond hair. Occasionally,
he showed approval and recognition. An envious look.
"Obito?!" Kakashi was shocked.
He had arrived ten minutes early for the eight o'clock meeting time, but he didn't
expect Obito to come earlier than him.
"Incredible." He Feng also sighed.
This may be the first time since he met Obito that he was not late.
At this time, Obito also noticed He Feng and Kakashi standing not far away. He
immediately waved to them and said excitedly:
"He Feng! Kakashi! You are here. Let me tell you that Minato-sensei has just
recognized my dream of becoming Hokage and is very supportive of me becoming
Hokage!" Obito was extremely excited.
For the first time, his dream was recognized by a jounin, who was also his teacher.
"Then you have to work hard and don't let Teacher Minato down." He Feng said with a
gentle smile.
Obito nodded excitedly: "That's necessary!"
Kakashi turned his head away and said, "You can't become Hokage at the end of the
crane. I'll tell you when I win."
Obito gritted his teeth: "Bastard Kakashi, I will trample you under my feet when I
awaken my Sharingan!"
Kakashi glared at Obito: "What did you say?!"
Just when the two were about to argue, Minato Namikaze stepped forward and said,
"Although Sakumo-sama asked me to be your leading jounin, you also need to pass the
assessment. If you can't even pass my assessment, You still need to go back to
Ninja School to retake your studies, so don’t be too happy too early.”
Minato took out two bells from his pocket with a serious expression. Although the
assessment of grabbing the bells is traditional, it is the test that best reflects
whether a ninja is qualified.
If you want to grab the bell from a jounin, both personal strength and teamwork are
indispensable, even if the jonin will give in accordingly.
"The content of this assessment is the pair of bells in my hand. You need to take
these pair of bells away from me within an hour.
Okay, now the three of you have one minute to communicate. Once the time is up, the
assessment will officially begin. "
After saying that, Namikaze Minato used a teleportation technique to arrive a
hundred meters away.
He Feng spoke very quickly: "Teacher Minato has mastered the art of Flying Thunder
God. No one of us here can match his speed. Therefore, we need to win by surprise,
in a way that Teacher Minato didn't expect."
"Our plan is like this..."
One minute passed very quickly, but He Feng and others did not immediately grab the
bell in Minato Namikaze's hand.
In terms of speed, they are not as good as Namikaze Minato. In terms of physical
strength, they are also not as good as Namikaze Minato, who is already an elite
jounin. As for chakra, not to mention, even the current Hefeng cannot compare with
the current Minato.
He has potential, not strength.
It can also be said that He Feng has strength, but not enough strength.
Therefore, what the three He Feng and the others wanted to do to grab the bell in
Namikaze Minato's hand was a short burst.
After discussing the plan, He Feng pulled out his two swords from his back and
slowly walked towards Namikaze Minato.
"Teacher Shuimen, I will come to meet you first." He Feng said with fighting
spirit.
Although his strength is not as strong as Namikaze Minato, he can still easily win
against some ordinary jounin.
"Xiao Hefeng should be proficient in Flying Thunder God by now. In that case, I
won't bully you too much." Minato said with a smile.
He Feng did not respond to Namikaze Minato, but quickly threw one of his short
swords.
Minato Namikaze had excellent dynamic vision, and he immediately noticed the Flying
Thunder Divine Technique engraved on the handle of the short sword thrown by He
Feng.
After retreating away for the first time, Hefeng threw the second dagger in the
direction of Minato Namikaze's retreat, then activated the Flying Thunder God
Technique to reach the position of the first dagger and retract it.
"Thunder Flash!" He Feng used the Thunder Chakra to stimulate the cells in his
legs, activated the Thunder Flash and ran towards Namikaze Minato again.
And at Hefeng's feet, a flying thunder divine technique appeared silently.
"White Fang Slash!" He Feng waved the White Fang dagger in his hand, suppressing
Namikaze Minato.
Of course, this was also the reason why Namikaze Minato didn't fight back. He also
wanted to see how far Little Hefeng could grow after this year.
There is more than one person who has the same idea as Namikaze Minato.
In the distance, a big snakeMaru and Tsunade were sitting on the top of the Hokage
Rock. Their excellent eyesight allowed them to easily see everything happening in
the training ground.
"Little Hefeng is already so powerful." Tsunade sighed with emotion. This year
Hefeng went to see her every now and then. Every time she heard the name Tsunade
sister from Hefeng's mouth, Tsunade couldn't help but stay with Hefeng. Warm the
bed.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
As time passed, Tsunade couldn't sleep well at night without He Feng by her side,
but Tsunade could only sleep with Shizune as He Feng's substitute.
"Yes, compared to He Feng, Hong Dou is like a child who has not grown up. I wish
she would stop letting me worry so much." Orochimaru also smiled helplessly. He had
accepted another disciple on a whim before.
Orochimaru originally thought that the new disciples would save him as much worry
as He Feng, but he never expected that the new disciples would not be following him
every day and shouting, Orochimaru-sensei, this one is delicious, that one is
delicious, Orochimaru-sensei, come on. Have a taste.
As a result, Orochimaru's time for conducting experiments was reduced accordingly
in order to take care of the child.
"Orochimaru, you have changed." Tsunade stared at He Feng and couldn't help but
sigh at the changes in Orochimaru.
There was a time when Orochimaru almost wanted to spend time in the laboratory
every day. Even if he had no expression on his face, it would make people feel
sinister and cunning.
But now Tsunade can even see the brilliance of motherhood in Orochimaru. This kind
of thing is simply incredible!
"You too." Orochimaru did not refute Tsunade. He could also feel the change in his
mentality, but he did not reject this change.
"Tsunade, when was the last time you drank, do you still remember?" Orochimaru
asked.
Tsunade was stunned, and then thought about it seriously: "It seemed like half a
year ago. It's hard to imagine that I didn't drink for half a year."
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Orochimaru said again: "Yes, we have all been changed by the child He Feng. I
believe that Tsunade, your hemophobia has been cured without knowing it. Sometimes
I really think about one thing.
Has the son of prophecy that Jiraiya has been searching for so hard been accepted
as my disciple? "
Hearing this, Tsunade covered her mouth and laughed, "Hahaha, Orochimaru, if
Jiraiya hears what you said, he won't let you go, but if the child of prophecy
really exists, it can only be a small child. The wind is blowing."

Chapter 22 Watergate Class, established

Tsunade and Orochimaru were not the only people watching this bell-grabbing exam.
In the Hokage's office.
Sarutobi Hiruzen sat on the office chair, and opposite him stood Shimura Danzo.
Both of their eyes were attracted by the picture in the crystal ball on the desk.
"Unknowingly, that little guy He Feng has become so powerful that he can fight
Minato back and forth." Sarutobi Hiruzen did not hide his appreciation for He Feng.
In his opinion, He Feng is the perfect successor to the Will of Fire, and it is not
impossible for him to become Hokage in the future.
"Hmph, if He Feng was at my root back then, I could have cultivated He Feng to be
even stronger, instead of like what he is now." Danzo said harshly.
In his view, only by doing it yourself can you do your best. No matter how well
others do it, they are not as good as him.
Sarutobi Hiruzen just smiled at this and did not argue with Danzo.
Swish (transition sound effect)
Seeing that Minato Namikaze was getting closer and closer to the trap he had set
for him, He Feng stopped demonstrating and immediately retracted his swords.
I saw a huge force gathering in He Feng's hands.
"Strange power fist!" He Feng suddenly punched Namikaze Minato. The power of this
punch made Namikaze Minato look sideways.
This punch must not be received forcefully!
With alarm bells ringing in his heart, Minato Namikaze once again moved towards a
place that was not marked by the He Feng Flying Thunder God Technique.
"Now!" He Feng reminded loudly.
"I know! Watch the move!" As a puff of smoke dispersed, Obito released his
transformation technique and appeared directly in front of Namikaze Minato.
"The Great Fireball Technique!" Obito used the fastest seal speed in his life, and
a huge fireball was spit out from his mouth.
Kakashi, who was hiding aside and did not appear, said in his heart: "Idiot." Then
he appeared directly and launched a surprise attack on Namikaze Minato.
"Raikiri!" Kakashi gathered almost half of his body's chakra and used this S-level
ninjutsu.
Although Kakashi did not invent the Raikiri in this life, Kakashi still learned
this ninjutsu with He Feng personally teaching him.
Facing Obito and Kakashi who suddenly appeared to attack him, Namikaze Minato did
not panic.
"Guide me here step by step. It is indeed a good tactic, but it is not enough for
me to sneak attack the flying thunder god." Namikaze Minato commented unhurriedly,
and then the whole figure appeared again disappear.
Obito and Kakashi took out kunai as soon as Namikaze Minato flashed and threw them
at him.
"Minato-sensei! Since I know you can fly the Thunder God Jutsu, how could you make
such a simple arrangement." He Feng chuckled, and saw one of the kunai flying
towards Minato Namikaze turned into Obito look.
The original Obito turned into smoke and dissipated.
"Minato-sensei, don't underestimate us."
"It turned out to be a shadow clone." Namikaze Minato was already a little
surprised. Such a tactical arrangement was indeed a bit subtle.
This time he didn’t use the Flying Thunder God Technique when facing Obito.The
intention is to leave, but to start directly and cause attrition.
"Obito, thank you for your hard work."
At this moment, the flying thunder god technique flashed on Obito's arm, and He
Feng's figure appeared in mid-air.
"Minato-sensei, I will accept this pair of bells." He Feng waved the short sword in
his hand and directly chopped off the bells tied to Minato Namikaze's waist.
Below, Kakashi accurately caught the falling bell.
"Minato-sensei, we have passed this assessment, right." Kakashi shook a pair of
bells in his hand. Although he was wearing a mask, the smile in his eyes could
still be seen.
"Bastard Kakashi, you caught it well!" Obito also happily patted Kakashi on the
shoulder.
Faced with Obito's actions, Kakashi did not resist, but said softly: "It's all the
result of He Feng."
"Yes, yes, He Feng, you are so great, you are simply my best brother." With that
said, Obito opened his arms to give He Feng a big hug.
Before He Feng could react, Kakashi stood between the two of them and looked at
Obito with an unkind look.
The meaning is obvious, you can touch me, but you can’t touch my brother!
"Ah, bastard Kakashi!" Obito roared, and then he tried his best to attack Kakashi.
"Ahem." Namikaze Minato suddenly appeared in front of Obito, startling Obito.
"Although you have grabbed the bell, it does not mean that you have passed the
test. The last item of the test is waiting for you now."
Obito was stunned for a moment, then boasted: "Let alone one test, our team can
pass even one hundred, one thousand tests."
Kakashi rarely refuted Obito's bragging. It was obvious that he also thought so.
But Hefeng was simply too lazy to refute. He could even think of what Namikaze
Minato would say next with his knees.
He Feng complained in his heart: "I only have two bells here, which means that only
two of the three of you can pass the test."
Namikaze Minato said calmly: "I only have two bells here, which means that only two
of you three can pass the test."
He Feng showed a true expression and continued to say in his heart: "Now the
decision is in your hands. Who passes and who is eliminated is decided by the three
of you."
Namikaze Minato looked at the eyes of the three of them and said with some anxiety:
"Now the decision is in your hands. It is up to you three to decide who passes and
who is eliminated."
Upon hearing this, Obito's eyes widened with disbelief on his face.
Kakashi was also stunned, and began to weigh the pros and cons in his mind. If only
two people passed, it would be He Feng and I. But if it was He Feng, how would he
choose?
No, He Feng will never choose. He is not the kind of person who can give up his
companions.
Just when Kakashi was about to refuse the choice, Obito waved his hand and said
firmly:
"You want me, Master Obito, to give up my companions? Don't even think about it!
Since we are a team, we are companions who can sacrifice our lives for!
In the ninja world, those who don’t follow the rules are trash, but those who don’t
cherish their companions are worse than trash! "
"If you don't pass, you don't pass. The worst I can do is go back to the ninja
school and take the exam again. Unfortunately, I thought you were the best teacher,
Minato-sensei!"
Hearing Obito's angry words, Kakashi felt a little ashamed and at the same time
looked at Obito carefully.
Namikaze Minato smiled knowingly.
He smiled and looked at He Feng and Kakashi: "Do you two think so too?"
Kakashi, who noticed Namikaze Minato's expression, also realized that the last
question was a test, but he already agreed with Obito's words.
The two brothers looked at each other and said in unison: "Of course."
Namikaze Minato clapped his hands, "Congratulations to the three of you for passing
the exam. The seventh Minato class has been officially established!"
Obito: "Huh?!!!"

Chapter 23 B-level mission

Although the members of Minato's squad are very powerful, including He Feng who can
fight with Jonin without falling behind, they still cannot avoid the transition
stage of low-level tasks.
Tasks such as helping the old lady weed, finding a cat for the old lady, and
playing chess with the old lady are tasks that anyone can do, but it was Obito's
turn.
Obito didn't shirk this, and he was very happy doing it.
Every day Hefeng could see Obito and the elderly mingling together, as if they were
sharing their grandchildren.
In addition, the task of cleaning the room, such as cleaning up the garbage, fell
to Kakashi. It would not be an exaggeration to say that he was taken care of by
Kakashi.
The two of them are very efficient and can complete at least ten tasks of the same
type a day in order to receive higher-level tasks faster.
As for what He Feng is doing...
He was responsible for standing aside and shouting cheers to add motivation to the
two of them.
Neither Obito nor Kakashi thought there was anything wrong with this, and instead
enjoyed it.
The happiest thing for Obito every day, besides doing tasks, is hearing He Feng’s
words to Obito, “You are the best, I knew you could do it.”
No, half a month has passed. The amount of low-level tasks in Minato's class has
reached the standard, and they can take on some C-level or even B-level tasks.
Of course, this is just the process for an ordinary genin team. If Namikaze Minato
is willing, he can take on A-level missions.
However, considering that He Feng and others were still in the stage of
accumulating experience and that He Feng and he both mastered the Flying Thunder
God technique, Namikaze Minato accepted a more difficult B-level mission.
[Investigating the traces of suspected Kumogakure ninjas in Tian no Country]As a
mission that may directly conflict with the ninjas of other villages, it is not an
exaggeration to be marked as a B-level mission by Konoha's intelligence department.
Also because it was an investigation mission, Minato Namikaze had the confidence to
send He Feng and others away after they were discovered by other villages.
At the gate of Konoha Village, Obito shouted in excitement after learning that
Minato had accepted a B-level mission for their team.
"Okay! Finally, I no longer have to do D-level missions! This is Obito's first
appearance in the ninja world!"
Kakashi mocked: "Obviously you are the one who is most active in doing D-level
tasks."
Obito retorted: "I didn't do it just to take on some high-level tasks faster, and
it sounds like you have done fewer D-level tasks than me."
Kakashi didn't refute Obito, and he didn't know whether he was too lazy to pay
attention to Obito or was taken by Obito's words.
Minato appeared from behind the two of them and put his hands on their heads: "You
two can just argue now. Don't argue again when you are on your mission."
The two said in unison: "Who will quarrel with him?"
"..."
As a small country without a ninja village, Tian Country can only accept the ninjas
from various countries and hope that the other party will be merciful.
As one of the buffer zones between Cloud Hidden Village and Konoha Hidden Village,
Tian Country's situation is not good.
In addition to the ninjas from various countries who will set up secret sentries
here, there are also black markets stationed here.
In a small town in Tianzhi Country.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Namikaze Minato appeared here with He Feng and three others.

All four of them had disguised themselves to a certain extent.
Namikaze Minato plays the role of the noble lady's guard, while Kakashi and Obito
play the role of the noble lady's servants and playmates.
As for He Feng, she naturally plays the role of a noble lady from the Kingdom of
Tian.
He Feng doesn't even need to put on makeup when he puts on women's clothes. His
appearance is already a dimensionality-reducing blow to ordinary people, not to
mention the elegance that comes with every move he makes. It can be said that
Minato Namikaze and others played the role The guards and servants may be seen
through.
But even a real nobleman from the ninja world wouldn't be able to see through the
disguise He Feng put on.
"I want to eat that, go and buy it for me." He Feng pointed to the store not far
away with a clear voice.
Kakashi was about to speak when he heard Obito reply at a very fast speed: "Okay,
Miss, I will buy it for you right now."
With that said, Obito came to the meatball shop that Hefeng pointed to in a
trotting posture like an ordinary person.
After Obito left, Hefeng asked softly: "Teacher Minato, is there no one else
following and monitoring us except some wandering ninjas?"
Minato nodded, "Well, they are just some ordinary wandering ninjas. One of them is
at the chuunin level, and the others are probably at the genin level. There are
more fish still under the water that have not come out."
"You haven't come out yet? It seems that a young lady who comes from the Kingdom of
Fire to visit the Kingdom of Tian is not worthy of being exposed by Yunyin." He
Feng sighed lightly.
After using Kagura's Heart Eye again to confirm that there were chakras from other
Jonin except Minato, he decided to continue to add some chips to his identity.
After all, whatever identity you have while walking outside is given to you by
yourself.
"Miss, I brought back the meatballs you asked for." Obito held a small paper tube,
which contained three-color meatballs of various flavors.
He Feng took the paper tube from Obito, took out one of the meatballs and took a
bite.
The taste is far worse than the meatball shops in Konoha, not delicious at all.
The next second, He Feng dropped the paper tube in his hand on the ground in a
rather arrogant manner, and said with an unhappy expression: "It's not delicious at
all, it's not half as delicious as what Uncle Saito's chef made! "
Because He Feng's voice was very loud, this sentence was heard by many people.
Most people may not think there is anything wrong when they hear it, but the
whistle in Yunyin Village in the dark heard another meaning in these words.
"Is the Saito that the little girl said is Awada Saito? If I remember correctly,
Awada Saito should be the famous name of the Land of Fire."
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
"That's right, in the Fire Country, only the Daiming's family has the surname
Gantian. They can eat meatballs at the Daiming's house and call them uncle. It
seems that we have met a big fish this time."
"Could it be a trap? Our whereabouts are not hidden. Konoha will most likely send
ninjas to detect us."
"Probably not. We have one Jonin and two Chuunin. Even if Konoha wants to come and
explore us, there will be no children involved, let alone three children."
While speaking, the Kumogakure ninja's eyes kept scanning He Feng and Namikaze
Minato beside him.
It seemed like they were confirming whether the two of them were ninjas.
While he was sizing up Minato, Minato also felt something.
"I took the bait." Minato said softly to He Feng.
"If they take action, if they are jounin, you can retreat with Kakashi and Obito.
If they are chunin, try to avoid fighting alone. Try to get the three of you to
surround one person. If you lose, you can send me a signal. I will Will arrive as
soon as possible."
Namikaze Minato said it very seriously, but He Feng thought it was nothing.
According to his perception, only the Jonin had some strength, but his chakra was
still crushed by Namikaze Minato. As for the two Chuunin...
It’s perfect for opening Obito’s eyes..
He was very much looking forward to seeing Obito being stabbed with a kunai and
whether he would turn into a kaleidoscope of anger.
"Boss, what are they talking about? We won't be discovered, right?" One of the
chunin was a little worried when he saw He Feng and others whispering.
The jounin's eyes narrowed, "Don't worry, let those wandering ninjas take action
first. If those wandering ninjas win, we can reap the benefits. If those wandering
ninjas are defeated, we can also do something to the opponent's combat strength."
Make an estimate.”
"It's so boring, I want to go home!" He Feng said to Namikaze Minato who was
driving the horse in the carriage.
"Okay, miss." Namikaze Minato replied with a smile, then picked up the whip and
drove the carriage towards the outside of the village.
Kakashi and Obito also got into the carriage.
――――――
I couldn’t find the name of the Fire Nation’s famous person when I checked the
information, so I had to make it up myself.

Chapter 24 Attack, Wandering Ninja and Cloud Ninja

After the carriage drove some distance away from the town, five wandering ninjas
jumped out and stopped in the middle of the road.
"Hey! That coachman, if you want to live, please hand over the little girl in the
car to me quickly, otherwise..."
The leader of the wandering ninja did not finish his words, but looking at the
reflective kunai in his hand, he knew what he was thinking.
"Damn it! There's an attack!" Minato Namikaze dutifully pretended to be a young
lady's guard, and shouted loudly in the face of the sudden attack of wandering
ninjas.
Kakashi and Obito in the carriage heard this and jumped out.
The kunai and short swords in their hands all told these wandering ninjas the
identity of the two ninjas.
"Who are you? How dare you rob the relatives of the Daimyo of the Land of Fire? Are
you willing to die?" Minato Namikaze said in a deep voice, "I won't be polite if
you move forward."
"Tsk. She is indeed a daimyo's woman. She can bring ninjas as escorts when
traveling. Damn it." The chuunin seemed to have a different grudge against the
daimyo. He actually stopped talking to Minato and started to form seals directly.
"Fire Escape and Fireball Technique!"
The opponent's seal formation speed is not fast, and there is not much chakra. Even
the ninjutsu released is a bit weak, and it looks very small.
"Look at how powerful your grandpa Toobi is!" Obito jumped out and formed seals
very quickly, "Fire Release: The Great Fireball Technique!"
The next second, a larger fireball swallowed up the previous small fireball, and
attacked the wandering ninjas more fiercely.
"Damn it!" That kind of person gritted his teeth and dodged.
"You guys hold the three of them, and I'll catch that woman." With that said, the
chuunin crossed Namikaze Minato and rushed into the carriage.
Namikaze Minato did not intercept, but looked at the remaining four genin.
"Toobi, come with me to deal with the four of them, Sisika, go and protect the
eldest lady." Namikaze Minato gave the order, and then took out his sword of love.
At this time, Namikaze Minato had not yet become famous, and he was not the yellow
flash that everyone later became known for, so even if he took out the Sword of
Ninja Love, the ninjas of Kumogakure Village did not see anything.
"Copy that!" Obito and Kakashi both responded in unison.
Facing the Chuunin attacking him, Kakashi did not panic.
He saw everything that just happened. This chuunin was not even as powerful as
Obito in terms of ninjutsu alone, so he didn't need to worry too much.
What's more, the He Feng he was protecting behind him was not some frail noble
lady.
Soon, all five wandering ninjas were eliminated.
Although it was the first time for Kakashi and Obito to go on a mission and see
blood for the first time, the two of them wielded their swords with air ninjutsu
without any hesitation.
The only thing worth noting is that Kakashi was too careless and was scratched in
the lower abdomen by the wandering chunin with a kunai. Although the injury was not
serious, it still had a certain impact.
Obito walked towards Kakashi carelessly, first handed a pill to stop bleeding to
Kakashi, and then mocked: "Hahaha, bastard Sisika, you are so weak, you are injured
even though Uncle Obito was not hurt."
While Kakashi was silent, he sighed in his heart: "Sometimes it's good to be a fool
like Obito, at least he's worry-free."
Just when he was finishing off the chunin, He Feng had already told him that they
were being targeted by the Kumogakure ninja.
And Hefeng proposed to him a plan for the awakening of Obito's Sharingan. Although
Kakashi felt sorry for Hefeng who needed to make sacrifices for the bastard Obito,
he still agreed to the plan.
After all, they are companions.
In the distance, after watching how the three of them dealt with the wandering
ninjas, the Kumogakure ninjas finally felt relieved.
"I will deal with that jounin. One of you is responsible for the two genin, and one
of you is responsible for subduing the noble lady in the car. Try to resolve the
battle as quickly as possible." Kumogakure jounin Kamui ordered.
Since the end of the Second Ninja World War and a period of recuperation, they,
Kumogakure, have been constantly trying various ways to strengthen Kumogakure. A
few years ago, they, Kumogakure, tried to kidnap Konoha's Nine-Tails Jinchuuriki
candidate. , compared to kidnapping a daimyo’s family is nothing.
"receive."
The next second, thunder arcs flashed all over Kamui's body, and he rushed towards
Namikaze Minato at an extremely fast speed.
Although he has not yet mastered Kumogakure's secret Thunder Chakra mode, he has
learned the rudiments of the Thunder Chakra mode through his own efforts.
In this case, it is more than enough to face an ordinary jounin.
"It's finally here." Minato said slightly.Laughed, and then threw the Sword of
Ninja Love at Kamui.
Kamui seemed fearless towards the special kunai flying towards him, he just knocked
the kunai away with a casual blow.
Namikaze Minato didn't care, he just relied on his extremely fast movements to keep
dealing with Kamui.
It's not so much a battle as it is that Namikaze Minato is playing ninja games with
Kamui.
If Namikaze Minato wanted to, he could completely harvest Kamui's life in an
instant with the completed flying thunder god kunai.
However, Namikaze Minato did not do this, and the reason was He Feng's suggestion.
"If Minato-sensei seems to be able to face that Jonin with ease, please try to
maintain an even battle. Minato-sensei doesn't have to worry about me. Kakashi and
I will find ways to help Obito open his eyes to improve Obito's strength. "
As a teacher, how could Minato Namikaze miss the opportunity to improve his
students' strength.
On the other side, because Kakashi was "injured", the two of them were at a
disadvantage when facing the chuunin's attack. Perhaps it was because Kakashi
charged too hard with the short sword in his hand that his injuries actually became
worse. Come more and more.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
"Bastard Kakashi! Don't always rush to the front. Do you think Obito is a child who
needs to be protected by you!" Obito saw more and more wounds on Kakashi's body,
and he looked particularly anxious. Time has even forgotten the pseudonym.
"You bastard, I'll attack your uncle Obito first if you can!"
The chuunin ignored Obito's words and still concentrated his firepower on Kakashi.
For him, it was the best decision to reduce the number of people as soon as
possible. There is no reason to be equally affected in a life-and-death fight.
Inside the carriage, a chuunin named Yumui got into the carriage quietly.
He felt a little uneasy when he looked at the pitiful figure in the carriage.
Youmuyi's tone was surprisingly soft: "Don't make any noise. As long as you are
honest, I won't do anything to you. If you understand, just nod."
He squeezed out two tears from He Feng's watery eyes. The way he nodded while
gritting his teeth to prevent himself from making a sound directly penetrated Youmu
Yi's heart.
"I really want to marry her home." Such thoughts came to Yumuyi's mind.
Yunyin is the most martial hidden village. Most of the female ninjas in the village
are very exaggerated. They are all tall and muscular, and only a few people have
the figure of an ordinary woman. How has he ever seen He Feng? Smaller ones.
It is not an exaggeration to say that she has a delicate body and is easy to push
down. Just seeing those tearful eyes made Yumui feel protective.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"Very good, now turn your back. I need to tie you up. This is a necessary step.
Don't struggle, okay." Youmuyi tried his best to sound majestic, but unexpectedly,
his tone changed when he spoke. .
"But...can you...not tie me up...I'm scared." Hefeng's voice was soft and waxy, and
Youmuyi immediately lost his ability to think. He subconsciously replied: "It's
okay, but you absolutely You can't run away, only in this way can I protect your
safety."
Hefeng nodded and said in a soft voice: "You are so kind. Can I ask your name? My
name is Fenghua, and I am Uncle Saito's niece."
"My name is Yumui, and I am a ninja from Kumogakure."
Inexplicably, Youmu Yi seemed to smell the body fragrance emanating from He Feng.

Chapter 25 I want to create a world with He Feng

At this moment, Youmuyi was like a poor boy who wanted to please the goddess. He
could give Hefeng anything except money.
"Um...can I ask you why Yunyin appears here." He Feng continued to inquire for
information.
But it was obvious that as a chuunin, the information Yumui could know was very
limited.
"I don't know either. Raikage just issued a mission for us to hide in a place and
gather as much information as possible. Most of the time we act according to
circumstances."
Hefeng asked some other questions about Yunyin Village. Although Yumuyi's heart is
to capture Fenghua's heart, he is still very strict about some truly confidential
matters. In short, he just doesn't know. .
Hefeng shook his head. After realizing that he could not get more information from
Youmuyi, he stopped pretending.
I saw He Feng clumsily forming seals, and muttering: "You Yunyin people, I will
never surrender under any circumstances."
"!" Seeing this, Youmuyi immediately woke up, and he still looked like he was
charmed just now.
"Are you a ninja?! Damn it!" Yumui gritted his teeth and took out the kunai from
the ninja bag. Although he was very reluctant to let go of the poor man in front of
him, he still did what a ninja should do.
I saw Yumuyi stabbing a kunai into Hefeng's belly viciously, without any
sloppiness.
"Cough!" He Feng coughed up a mouthful of blood and grimaced in pain.
He was still muttering in his mouth: "It hurts so much. What a huge loss. Obito,
just remember this for the rest of your life."
During the conversation, Hefeng endured the pain in his abdomen and reached out to
pick up the short knife beside him, and then killed Youmuyi at an extremely fast
speed.
After finishing off Youmu Yi, He Feng found a more comfortable position and sat on
the ground, and disguised the scene, making it look like the two of them died
together, while He Feng placed his little hand on the wound on his abdomen. also
flashesThere was a green shimmer.
He Feng said with some worry: "Obito, the battle on your side must end soon. If it
comes later, my wound will be healed."
Outside the carriage, Kakashi was finally defeated because he was too seriously
injured. He was once again defeated by the enemy Chuunin and fell to the ground.
"Kakashi!" Obito's eyes widened, and his originally exhausted strength suddenly
exploded again.
"Ah!" Obito roared and rushed towards the chuunin.
The man also held on for a while to resist.
Although Kakashi was trying his best to act, he still tried his best to make the
acting more realistic. Therefore, the chuunin who could 'severely injure' Kakashi
in a one-on-two situation was considered powerful.
"I want you to die!" Obito angrily stabbed the kunai into the chuunin's neck.
He——
The chuunin still wanted to speak, but his voice was soaked with blood, and he
could only fall down unwillingly.
"Kakashi, how are you? I have pills to stop bleeding. You take them first. He Feng
knows medical ninjutsu. I will go find him to treat you now." Obito knelt down next
to Kakashi worriedly. , took out a pill from the ninja bag and put it into
Kakashi's mouth.
Kakashi opened his eyes with difficulty and said feebly: "He... He Feng, there are
people... He Feng..."
After Kakashi finished speaking intermittently, he closed his eyes and fell to the
ground. No matter how Obito shook, he showed no intention of getting up.
At this time, Obito's eyes had already gathered a large amount of Yin Escape
chakra, and his originally ordinary eyes became blood red, and a magatama emerged
from the blood red eyes.
"Yes, He Feng! There are enemies there in He Feng too!" Obito stood up
staggeringly, picked up the kunai beside him and walked towards the carriage,
without even noticing that he had opened his eyes.
"He Feng will be fine. He can fight as well as Teacher Minato. As long as He Feng
comes out of Makakashi, he will be fine."
Obito held the kunai tightly in his hand and opened the curtain of the carriage
while talking to himself.
"!!!" Obito's eyes widened, and a huge negative emotion enveloped Obito's whole
person. A large amount of Yin Escape Chakra converged on his eyes. The original one
magatama reached the level of three magatama at this moment. .
"I don't accept it, I absolutely don't accept it, I don't accept this result!"
Obito knelt on the ground in pain, the sounds of his teammates dying were all in
his mind, and he could no longer hear what was happening around him.
"Where is Minato-sensei?! Can't he fly Thunder God?? Why didn't he show up!! I
absolutely do not accept this result.
He Feng, Kakashi, why why! "
At this moment, Obito fell into a kind of obsession, and he felt that his whole
body was beginning to break.
"I don't accept a world without He Feng and Kakashi! I definitely don't accept such
a world!
I want to create a world where He Feng and Kakashi accompany me! "
With that said, Obito stood up directly, with blood and tears still on his face,
and his three magatama sharingan looked extremely monstrous.
"Obito, I won't pretend that I didn't hear what you just said." Kakashi hugged his
chest. Although his body was messy, his breath was very stable.
"I will never accept anything you say. You want to create a world with He Feng and
me. And I seem to hear you resenting Teacher Minato. Why do you have this idea?"
Hefeng also appeared next to Obito, unleashing his palm magic on Obito, his tone
seemed to be reproachful and concerned: "Obito, can you open your eyes because of
me and Kakashi-san? Kakashi and I are very different." I'm happy, but what you
thought after opening your eyes was very sad for me, Kakashi-nii, and Minato-
sensei.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
Let’s never think like this again, okay? "
Obito didn't speak, just stared at Hefeng and Kakashi, the tears that kept flowing
out of his eyes revealed his mood at this time.
"Obito, although this is the future to help you open your eyes, the teacher still
wants to say sorry to you, the teacher did not appear by your side when you needed
the teacher."
Minato appeared next to Obito, rubbing Obito's hair with his hands while looking
apologetic and remorseful.
It can also be seen from the incident of Namikaze Minato that while Obito values
his companions, there is also a darkness hidden in his heart.
Hefeng and Kakashi are the seals that suppress this darkness. If one day this seal
disappears, the darkness in Obito's heart will sweep through the ninja world like a
scourge.
After all, one can imagine the talent of a seven-year-old Uchiha with three
magatama.
Therefore, Namikaze Minato felt that it was necessary and necessary to heal Obito's
inner darkness as a teacher.
"Obito, these are the goggles you just dropped. Didn't you say that your grandma
gave them to you? You should take them and don't throw them away again." Namikaze
Minato placed the damaged goggles on Obito. In his hand, he spoke in a gentle tone.
Obito took the goggles handed to him by Minato Namikaze in a daze, his painful
expression filled with self-blame, as if he was blaming himself for why he missed
Minato-sensei so much just now.
Hefeng struck while the iron was hot: "Obito, I also want to say I'm sorry to you.
It was my plan to use my life and Kakashi's life and the experience of Mikumogakure
to act out this drama to open the Sharingan for you. I only noticed that I helped
you open the Sharingan to improve your strength, but I didn’t notice what you were
thinking."
Kakashi first looked to the left at He Feng, then to the right at Namikaze Minato,
and finally said slowly: "Obito, I'm sorry this time for not telling you in
advance."
FeelingSeeing his own strength after opening the Three Magatama Sharingan, and
listening to the people around him apologizing to him, Obito still choked with sobs
even though he still felt aggrieved:
"This...I will forgive you this time. Next time...next time you must tell me in
advance and don't hide it from me anymore.
I just...I thought you were really dead just now...I was so scared. "
When Obito thought about it, he was really frightened by the negative emotions in
his heart just now. He couldn't imagine what it would be like in the future without
Hefeng and Kakashi.
Just thinking about this kind of thing in his mind makes Obito feel breathless.
"Well, if there is a next time, I will definitely tell you." He Feng stepped
forward, not caring about the blood stains on Obito's body, and gave Obito a big
hug.
【Trigger critical strike】
[Obito’s favorability +10]
【Trace amount of Indra Chakra (unconscious)】
――――
The golden finger for gaining favorability is always in effect. It’s just that if a
small thing occasionally adds +1 favorability, it would be too messy and watery to
write, so it will be omitted to a certain extent.

Chapter 26 I’ll warm the bed for Tsunade-san

In the mountain cemetery, Uchiha Madara was sitting in a wheelchair, listening to
Bai Zetsu explaining to him the eye-opening process of the boy they had been
observing - Uchiha Obito. He was surprised but also a little more interested.
Uchiha Madara showed a smile after a long absence, "Wonderful, so wonderful. Not
only did an Uchiha open the three magatama sharingan at the age of seven, but he
also completely bound him to that Uchiha."
As the former patriarch of the Uchiha clan, Uchiha Madara knows the Uchiha clan
very well.
This clan is called the Love clan, and it is the most emotional clan in the entire
ninja world.
If the Uchiha clan wants to open the Sharingan, they need to be stimulated by
strong emotions such as unwillingness, love, and hatred.
It is precisely because of this rich emotion that the ninjas of the Uchiha clan
will change their mood drastically after experiencing eye opening.
What He Feng did was to help an Uchiha open his eyes at a minimal cost, and
strengthen the connection between the two during the period of emotional
vulnerability after the eyes were opened, becoming the anchor point of the other
party.
It is precisely because he understands the Uchiha clan that Madara knows that from
this moment on, if he wants to really use Obito for his own use, he must get rid of
the Hatake brothers, remove the anchor in Obito's heart, and then use Infinite
Tsukuyomi seduces the opponent.
"Hei Zetsu, haven't there been some minor conflicts between Iwagakure Village and
Kumogakure Village recently? You go add some spice to those minor conflicts and
make this ninja world more chaotic. Only in this way will it be convenient for my
next actions." Uchiha Madara said calmly.
For him now, it is very simple to start a war between ninja villages and ninja
villages. As for the ninja Madara who died in the war, he doesn't care.
He will give those ninjas a new lease of life in the world of infinite Tsukuyomi.
"The Third Ninja War...Hatake Hefeng, I want to see how you can perform in a Ninja
War. I hope you can protect the people around you." Uchiha Madara murmured. He
murmured, his thoughts gradually drifting back to the Warring States period.
After all, he is an old man who likes to recall the past.
Looking at the twilight Uchiha Madara in front of him, Black Zetsu was very
satisfied.
As the closest person to resurrecting his mother in a thousand years, Kuro was
extremely attentive to what Uchiha Madara ordered.
……
The Uchiha clan will receive feedback after opening the Sharingan, and they will
receive a qualitative improvement in strength, nerve reaction speed, and chakra
amount.
After opening the three magatama sharingan, Obito's strength suddenly surpassed
Kakashi. After opening the three magatama sharingan, he can completely suppress
Kakashi with just physical skills. If Obito adds ninjutsu, If so, you can
completely crush Kakashi.
It's not that the Hatake family's sword skills are not as powerful as the
Sharingan, but Kakashi's current speed cannot get rid of the Sharingan's dynamic
capture, which results in Obito being able to perfectly predict Kakashi's next
move.
Of course, even Obito with the three magatama activated couldn't defeat He Feng. He
Feng just used the Flying Thunder God Technique and Obito was already unable to
parry.
On the way back to the village, Minato was thinking about whether to submit He Feng
and the others for the Chuunin Exam. If they did, would the three of them be
bullying the ninjas of the same period too much?
After all, the three genin, Hefeng Kakashi and Obito, are each more terrifying than
the last.
Participating in the Chunin Exam alone is considered a dimensionality reduction
attack, let alone forming a team of three.
"It's better to apply and become a chuunin sooner." Minato made a decision.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Behind him, Obito was still showing off his three-magatama Sharingan, and kept
saying things like "bastard Kakashi was finally stepped on by me".
He Feng was also helpless. If it was still like this when he returned to the
village with Tu Tu, he would doubt whether those eyes would be taken off by Danzo.
"Obito, you must not expose the fact that you activated the Three Magatama
Sharingan when you return to the village. It is best not to even use it." He Feng
said very seriously.
Obito was a little confused and asked, "Huh? Why, Hefeng, I still want to go home
and tell grandma."
Minato also slowed down, he was also a little confused.
Obviously at this time, Minato has not noticed Uchiha's embarrassing position in
Konoha Village.
If a three-magatama genius who is only seven years old appears, the eagle elders in
the Uchiha clan will definitely go crazy.In order to train Obito in general, he
hopes that one day Obito can open the Mangekyō Sharingan and use the divine power
like the former patriarch Uchiha Madara to launch a coup and seek the position of
Hokage.
This kind of thing is obviously not something that a mind like Obito can
participate in.
Therefore it is very important not to expose your own talents.
After clarifying his thoughts, Hefeng informed Obito of all the pros and cons of
whether the Sharingan was exposed or not.
Hearing this made Obito panic inside.
For a moment, he even had the idea that it would be better not to open the
Sharingan.
Namikaze Minato was also surprised that the relationship between the village and
Uchiha was so tense, which he had never noticed before.
Hefeng didn't know what Namikaze Minato was thinking. If he knew, he would
definitely complain: Isn't this normal? If you know more about it and become the
fourth generation Sarutobi, how can the old man continue to enjoy his rights?
A few days later, a group of four people returned to Konoha Village.
Namikaze Minato went to the Hokage Building to report on this mission.
Taketo went home to visit his grandma.
Hefeng and Kakashi returned home together.
As soon as they entered the house, the two saw Hatake Sakumo standing at the door
waiting for them to go home.
Seeing that his two sons had arrived home safe and sound, Hatake Sakumo opened his
arms and expressed concern: "Welcome home. Did the mission go well this time?"
Kakashi stood there with a grown-up expression on his face, and said coolly: "Ang,
it went smoothly. Two chuunin and one jounin were eliminated."
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
Hefeng was different from Kakashi. He rushed over as soon as Sakumo opened his arms
and threw himself directly into Sakumo's arms. "Father, these Kumogakure ninjas
bullied me this time. Next time, you can help me." I teach them a lesson."
Upon hearing this, Hatake Sakumo nodded quickly: "Okay, next time my father sees
Kumogakure's ninjas, he will help you teach them a lesson. If you dare to bully my
son, Hatake Sakumo, you are very courageous."
Hatake Sakumo was not joking when he said this. In the future Third Ninja War, the
Kumogakure ninjas in the Kumogakure battlefield are most afraid of hearing two
surnames.
The first is Namikaze, and the second is Hatake.
Hefeng and Kakashi discussed a lot with Hatake Sakumo, including the relationship
between Konoha and Uchiha, Obito's three magatama, the noteworthy strong men within
Uchiha, etc.
In the evening, He Feng left home and came to the Thousand Hands Clan.
Only children who love crying get candy. Hefeng was bullied outside and naturally
wanted to seek revenge from his parents.
And He Feng’s ‘parent’ is not just Hatake Sakumo.
"Sister Tsunade, I've missed you since I haven't seen you for a few days." As soon
as he entered the Thousand Hands Clan, He Feng went straight to Tsunade's
residence, and the first words he said when he saw Tsunade was to express his
longing for her.
Tsunade was originally a little depressed because she couldn't see He Feng for
several days, but she saw He Feng coming to see her in the clan, not to mention how
happy she was.
He stepped forward and gave He Feng a loving hug, causing He Feng to pat Tsunade's
arm.
"Tsunade-sister...Tsunade-sensei...I can't breathe!"
"!" After realizing that she had held He Feng back, Tsunade reluctantly let go of
He Feng, but she still did not let go of He Feng's little hand.
"You didn't go back to Konoha to see your teacher, why did you think of me?"
Tsunade also noticed that her behavior was a bit ambiguous just now, so she
pretended to be reserved and said.
After more than a year of warming the bed and getting along with each other, He
Feng has already understood Tsunade's character, "Of course it's because Sister
Tsunade is the most important in my heart. I came to see Sister Tsunade as soon as
I returned to the village."
Tsunade felt very happy when she heard this, "Xiao Hefeng, please don't go back
tonight. My sister will treat you and Shizune to hot pot."
"Okay, I will definitely warm Sister Tsunade's bed." He Feng volunteered.

Chapter 27 Chunin Examination

In the Hokage's office, Hiruzen Sarutobi felt a splitting headache as he looked at
the information compiled by the ANBU for him.
"Whether it's Kumogakure, Iwagakure or Kirigakure, even Sunagakure has begun to
become active, and small conflicts are becoming more and more continuous. If this
continues, it will develop into a great ninja war in a few years. "
Sarutobi Hiruzen took a long puff of dry cigarette, then closed his eyes and began
to think.
Although Konoha Village did not have conflicts like the other four major ninja
villages, if the other four major ninja villages started to fight, they would
definitely find a way to drag Konoha into trouble.
Especially Kumogakure Village, the Raikage has been coveting the title of Konoha's
largest village in the ninja world since the Second Ninja War.
The third generation Raikage Ai, who inherited the will of the second generation
Raikage, will definitely not let Konoha stay out of the matter.
Sarutobi Hiruzen continued to flip through the documents on the table, and soon
noticed an application.
That was the submission application for the Chunin Examination.
If the genin of Konoha Village want to be promoted to chunin, they first need to
complete a certain number of tasks. Then the leading genin submits an application
for the chunin exam to the Hokage, and then the Hokage approves it before they are
eligible to take the chunin exam. .
"Those two little guys He Feng and Kakashi." Looking at the contents of the
document, Sarutobi Hiruzen couldn't help but think of Hatake Sakumo.
Since the last time something like that happened in Roots, although Hatake Sakumo
has not resigned from the position of ANBU captain, many times Hatake Sakumo will
not participate except for some necessary tasks. More often, his choice is Stay at
home and fade away your presence in the eyes of others.
Now many people in Konoha only remember the title of White Fang but not the name of
Hatake Sakumo.
Although the process was very bumpy, it was the same goal that Hiruzen Sarutobi
wanted to achieve, so Hiruzen Sarutobi did not target it anymore.Hatake Sakumo.
Sarutobi Hiruzen wrote the word "passed" on the application submitted by Namikaze
Minato, and stamped it with the Hokage's exclusive seal.
……
Konoha's Chunin exam rules have not changed since its inception. First there is a
written test, then there is a battle for the scrolls of heaven and earth, and
finally there is a one-on-one battle. If such a process is completed, you can
become a Chunin without any accidents. .
If you encounter a joint exam, it will be more difficult to be promoted to chuunin.
After all, there are more people watching the battle at that time. If you want to
make your own ninja village chief look good, you must perform better, so during the
joint chunin exam, some Ninja Village will let chunin disguise themselves to
participate in the battle.
The chunin exam for He Feng and others was just an ordinary exam.
During the competition, He Feng, Kakashi and Obito sat very close to each other.
As a person who can conduct scientific experiments with Orochimaru, Hefeng's basic
literacy goes without saying. For Hefeng, these Chunin Exam questions are no
different from one plus one.
It was the last big question that made He Feng spend some time. It was not because
it was difficult, but because it was an open question.
The topic is: [As a Konoha ninja, talk about your understanding of the will of
fire]
He Feng could tell who asked this question even if he thought about it on his
knees.
He Feng easily filled up a large piece of paper.
Although Kakashi didn't answer as easily as He Feng, he still did it.
Compared to He Feng and Kakashi, Obito on the side was a little scratching his
head.
These written test questions have never been his strong point. He almost failed the
written test during the Ninja School graduation exam, let alone now.
"No way!" Obito covered his face in pain.
Minato-sensei told him that no matter how strong he was, he would not be able to
become a chuunin if he failed the written examination.
At this moment, a piece of paper swished under Obito's paper.
Obito raised his head and saw He Feng with an encouraging look on his face.
"Thank you so much, He Feng!" Obito clasped his hands together. Although he didn't
say a word, he seemed to have said everything.
Soon, Obito handed over the note to He Feng and answered all the previous
questions.
After seeing the last question, Obito also wrote vigorously, filling up his
understanding of the will of fire.
He Feng's movements were not perfect. Both the Jonin who was proctoring the exam at
the front and Hiruzen Sarutobi who was secretly peeping with a crystal ball saw it,
but no one pointed it out.
After all, in addition to testing the genin's basic knowledge, this written test
also tests the genin's ability to transmit information.
He Feng's movements were very secretive. Except for the jounin at the front, none
of the other chuunin who invigilated the exam noticed.
This is also the basis of "cheating". If "cheating" is discovered by those Chuunin,
it means elimination.
The written exam ended soon. Of course, some passed and some failed, but no one
would care about those genin who failed except themselves and their families.
The location of the second exam is the Forest of Death.
There are large beasts, poisonous insects, poisonous weeds and various traps here.
Only those who can safely pass through here and reach the central tower can take
the third exam.
The examiner in the second session stood at a high place and announced the
examination rules:
"You will be assigned a scroll of heaven (and earth). What you need to do is to
grab another scroll from others within five days and go to the central tower.
Everything except killing is allowed in the Forest of Death. You can use all means
to pass the exam.
So now...the exam begins! "
(Because the exam is conducted within Konoha Village, the candidates are all Konoha
ninjas, so they will not be allowed to kill.)
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
After saying that, the fence gate of the Death Forest was opened, and one after
another Konoha genin received their scrolls and entered the Death Forest in batches
according to their first test scores.
Because Hefeng and others got first place in the first exam, they were the first to
receive their scrolls and enter the forest of death.
"We are the Scroll of Heaven. As long as we get the Scroll of Earth, we can pass
this exam."
Kakashi handed the Scroll of Heaven to Obito.
"How about we wait for people at the entrance, otherwise it will be too troublesome
to find them when they enter the Death Forest." Obito suggested.
Obito is very confident in his own strength. He can deal with any of those genin
without the help of He Feng and Kakashi.
"Then let's do this. If possible, we'd better enter the tower today. Teacher Minato
said that there are various ingredients in the central tower, and you can even make
hot pot."
Obito's eyes lit up when he heard the word hot pot. Besides barbecue, his favorite
food was hot pot.
Since they entered in batches and there was more than one entrance to the Death
Forest, He Feng and others waited for a full half an hour before waiting for the
first group.
"Stop! What kind of scroll are you holding in your hands?" Obito stood up and
pointed at the three of them and asked loudly.
When the three people saw someone blocking the door, they immediately got into a
fighting stance.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"Want to steal our scroll? There is no way!" The three of them were just ordinary
civilian ninjas and did not recognize the standard white hair of the Hatake family,
so their tone was very rude."Since you don't want to speak, let me, Mr. Uchiha
Obito, hit you until you do!"
"wait......"
When Obito reported his name, the captain of the three had already planned to admit
defeat. Even though the three people in front of him looked much smaller than him,
he still didn't want to fight the Uchiha clan.
This is the fear that civilian ninjas have for the Uchiha clan.
However, how could Obito, who was full of fighting spirit, listen to what the other
party said.
"Look at Uncle Obito's powerful fireball technique!" Obito jumped high and quickly
formed seals in the air.
A huge fireball technique erupted from his mouth.
Obito, who no longer lacked chakra, began to use ninjutsu unscrupulously.
"Idiot." He Feng and Kakashi said in unison.
Although the powerful fireball jutsu is called a ninjutsu that cannot burn anyone
to death, He Feng wanted to bet on whether Obito's powerful fireball could not burn
these three genin to death.
The three genin were so frightened by the huge fire ball in front of them that they
could not walk. They even felt like they were dying under the huge fire ball.
The next second, He Feng and Kakashi both appeared in front of the three genin.
He Feng relied on the Flying Thunder God on Obito's arm to reach Obito's side,
pressed his hands on Obito's shoulders, and cut off Obito's chakra supply to the Go
Fire Ball Technique.
Kakashi used the instant body technique to come to the front of the fire ball
technique, "Water Release: Water Formation Wall!"
A wall of water appeared out of thin air, blocking Obito's powerful fireball
technique.
After stopping the Go Fireball, Kakashi looked at the three frightened genin and
said calmly: "What is your scroll? Hand it over."
Obito also realized that his strength was far beyond that of ordinary genin, and at
the same time he was a little scared.
He couldn't imagine the scene where the powerful fireball technique hit three
people just now.
"Earth...the Earth Scroll, here it is for you." A person tremblingly handed the
Earth Scroll in his hand to Kakashi.
"I am no longer a ninja. I want to quit. My mother will be sad if I die!" One of
the genin said with a look of fear.
Even though the powerful fireball was blocked, it appeared in his heart and became
a nightmare that he could not get rid of for a short time.
Someone said to quit, and the other two followed the other person back the same way
and exited the forest of death.
"Now the scrolls are all here, no need to wait, let's go."

Chapter 28 Sinful Thoughts

Time passed quickly, and the three members of Minato's class spent a satisfying
five days in the Tower of Death.
The day of the third exam came in the blink of an eye.
If the team that passed through the Death Forest includes He Feng and others, there
will be a total of six teams with eighteen people.
Among these fifteen people, no one was at the same time as He Feng.
At this time, Lin was learning medical ninjutsu from Tsunade. Like Shizune, she had
no time or energy to take the chunin exam. Although Kurenai also wanted to graduate
early, she was not strong enough to graduate early because she was a genjutsu-type
ninja.
Metkai's talent for learning Ninjutsu is so poor that even with He Feng's
encouragement, he cannot change this reality. He is still learning the Three Body
Jutsu. For example, although Asuma is strong enough to graduate, he is not defeated
by Sarutobi Hiruzen. allowed.
After all, graduating early means having to participate in a mission, and
participating in a mission is life-threatening as long as you leave the village no
matter how difficult it is. Hiruzen Sarutobi didn't want Asuma to be exposed to
danger so early.
The third exam was based on a lottery system, and there was no internal fighting,
so there was no suspense about the outcome of the exam.
Minato's class easily won the third exam. After Sarutobi Hiruzen evaluated their
performance in the exam, the three of them were easily promoted to Chuunin.
After the three of them were successfully promoted to chuunin, Namikaze Minato
gradually became busy. The missions he took were either A-level or S-level, so he
rarely took the three of them on missions.
However, when nothing happens, Namikaze Minato will still invite the three of them
to his home for dinner, in order to maintain the relationship and ensure that
Obito's psychological problem is not a problem.
And He Feng once again devoted himself to the experiment with Orochimaru.
Because with the help of He Feng, Orochimaru did not conduct unscrupulous human
experiments as in the original timeline. Even if human experiments were to be
conducted, they were conducted under the premise of sufficient preparation and
sufficient data.
And He Feng, who has the attribute of prophet, will naturally guide Orochimaru to
focus on Yamato in the wood escape experiment.
Therefore, without any surprise, Yamato once again obtained the Wood Release from
Orochimaru.
This time Orochimaru did not hand over Yamato to Danzo, but secretly trained him
himself.
And the name Yamato was given by He Feng himself.
"Yamato, help me call He Feng." Orochimaru calmly prepared the Hashirama cells in
the culture dish and said to Yamato next to him.
"Okay, Orochimaru-sama." Yamato, who was only three years old, responded to
Orochimaru in a childish voice, and left the laboratory with his calves.
"Brother Hefeng is coming? I'm going too!" Four-year-old Hongdou couldn't help
Orochimaru. At this time, she was more like the mascot in the laboratory, and the
mascot immediately heard Hefeng's name. Little stars appeared in his eyes.
Her first favorite here is Brother Hefeng, and her second favorite is Teacher
Orochimaru.
"Go, don't fall." Orochimaru warned.
"I understand, teacher." Hongdou waved his hand without looking back, then tripped
over the threshold and fell to the ground with a thud.
"..." Orochimaru was speechless. He once again doubted whether he was a little
impulsive when he accepted this disciple.
Soon, He Feng led a Yamato with his left hand and an Anko with his right hand to
Orochimaru's laboratory..
Orochimaru raised his head and looked at this scene with an expressionless face,
and a lot of doubts arose in his heart: "Is this an orphanage or a laboratory?"
Seven-year-old He Feng still has not left the concept of a child.
"Teacher Orochimaru, do you have any business with me?" He Feng asked.
Orochimaru looked at the Hashirama cells in the culture dish again. At this time,
the Hashirama cells had completely engulfed other cells in the culture dish, and
there were signs of sprouting and greening.
He spoke first: "Yamato, take Anko and go out first. Come back in when I call you."
Yamato nodded: "Okay, Lord Orochimaru."
Anko wanted to refuse, but she was a little scared when she thought of Orochimaru-
sensei getting angry. In the end, she could only be pulled out by Yamato, who was
one year younger than her.
After the two left the laboratory, Orochimaru spoke to He Feng about his purpose.
"The experiment has reached a bottleneck. Even with a successful case like Yamato,
it will inevitably reach a bottleneck. I am thinking about whether to deepen
cooperation with Danzo in order to obtain the Sharingan to support the continuation
of the experiment. What are you doing, Hefeng? look?"
The cooperation between Orochimaru and Danzo became vague a year ago. The reason
was that Danzo wanted to exchange Hefeng from Orochimaru on the condition of
providing Orochimaru with more experimental subjects.
Orochimaru naturally would not agree, and secretly made a note of Danzo, planning
to trick Danzo once in the future.
And He Feng was startled when he heard Orochimaru's words, and subconsciously
thought of someone in his mind.
"Teacher Orochimaru, if you need people from the Uchiha clan to continue the
experiment, my teammate Uchiha Obito should be very willing to be a volunteer."
Hefeng has no psychological burden for recommending Obito to Orochimaru, and he
will not take his eyes. Instead, it will help Obito's strength further. I believe
Obito is also very willing.
"Your teammate? That's okay. If there is a living Uchiha volunteer, future
experiments will be much smoother.
If this experiment confirms that the Sharingan does have the effect of suppressing
Hashirama's will in Hashirama's cells, then many difficulties will be solved. "
When Orochimaru said this, he seemed to have thought of something again. He put
down the reagent in his hand and said, "By the way, Hefeng, the cloning technology
you proposed to me before has matured. Come and have a look with me."
With that said, Orochimaru took Hefeng to the secret room deep in the laboratory.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
There are more sophisticated instruments here for biotechnology research, and in a
huge storage tube, a naked female figure is placed in a light green life solution.
And this figure has a face very similar to Orochimaru.
"Isn't this what Orochimaru looked like during Boruto!" He Feng was shocked. During
Boruto, Orochimaru transformed his body into a woman and created Mitsuki and 'log'
through artificial human technology.
At that time, Orochimaru could be said to be the real Aunt Snake, and every move
she made was filled with maternal glory.
He Feng did not expect that Orochimaru had evolved in this direction to such a
level at this time.
This made a ghost story suddenly appear in He Feng's mind.
"Could it be that Mr. Orochimaru wants to turn into a female body and push me
back????"
He Feng shook his head violently, shaking off the sinful thoughts in his heart.
How could Teacher Orochimaru be that kind of person?
"Teacher Orochimaru, is this the immortal reincarnation receptor you prepared for
yourself?" He Feng asked.
Orochimaru nodded, and said with some regret: "Yes, but this body is too weak. I
plan to wait until I fully master Hashirama's cells and awaken the Wood Release
before reincarnating him."
"Then I would like to congratulate Teacher Orochimaru in advance. If he awakens the
Wood Release, Teacher Orochimaru's strength will definitely rise to the next
level."
Orochimaru gently rubbed Hefeng's smooth white hair with his hands, "Hefeng, the
teacher will not become stronger by himself. What the teacher masters now is what
you will learn in the future."
――――
Orochimaru is just a teacher, don’t think too much about it.

Chapter 29 Mastering the Yin Seal

Konoha 45, this year He Feng is eight years old.
During this year, Obito would go to Orochimaru's laboratory with Hefeng every week
to draw blood for Orochimaru to study the blood relationship between the Uchiha
clan and the Senju clan.
Orochimaru also fulfills his role as a life mentor. While Obito provides him with
research data, he also guides Obito on how to use ninjutsu and Sharingan to better
fight the enemy in formal battles.
It was precisely with the help of a Sanmagatama Uchiha like Obito that Orochimaru
discovered that Uchiha's bloodline could obviously suppress Hashirama's will in
Hashirama's cells.
Even if Obito's still weak cell energy is used to combine with Hashirama cells, he
will not be swallowed by Hashirama cells.
This has accelerated the progress of Orochimaru's Hashirama cell research again.
Within five years, Orochimaru would be able to use genetic modification technology
to enable non-Uchiha individuals to gain the power of Wood Release.
Even though the power of this Wood Release is no different from Yamato, the Wood
Release has an extraordinary significance in Konoha.
He Feng also told Tsunade the good news.
Tsunade, who was originally angry at Orochimaru for studying her grandfather's
cells without permission, had no choice but to turn her anger towards Sarutobi
Hiruzen, who had originally proposed the Wood Release experiment.
At this point, the relationship between Tsunade and Sarutobi Hiruzen has diminished
again and again.
---------------------xxxx--------------------

In the same year, Kakashi officially accepted Minato as his disciple.

Although Kakashi cannot master the Flying Thunder God Jutsu with his talent,
Kakashi, who has five chakra attributes, can learn other Ninjutsu of Namikaze
Minato very well.
As the master's wife, Kushina Uzumaki was not stingy with Kakashi. Some sealing
techniques from the Uzumaki clan were personally taught by Kushina Uzumaki to
Kakashi.
At this time, the strength of Obito and Kakashi has far exceeded the original
timeline of the same period.
He Feng spent more time at Tsunade's place, working with Tsunade to develop and
learn the Yin seal, the prerequisite for creating the art of regenerating hundreds
of heroes.
As a Yin Seal that can only be mastered by women, even with Tsunade's help,
developing it is still the same as starting from scratch.
Nohara Lin also made rapid progress under the guidance of Tsunade. After mastering
the Palm Senjutsu, she was already able to become a master in medical ninjutsu, but
after seeing the strength of He Feng and others, she said that she still needed to
further her studies.
The quarrels within the Uchiha clan are still ongoing, and the conflict between the
hawks and the doves is gradually deepening. As the clan leader, Uchiha Fugaku has
always maintained a neutral attitude, looking at the conflicts within the Uchiha
clan and feeling worried but helpless.
Hatake Sakumo began to become busy. No matter how hard he tried, he could not stay
at home for too long. As the captain of the ANBU, he had the obligation to lead a
group of ANBU to remove the sharp thorns that coveted Konoha all around.
Konoha Year 46, summer, this year He Feng is nine years old.
Within the Thousand Hands Clan.
He Feng sat on the futon attentively. Tsunade, Shizune, Nohara Lin and others
looked at He Feng with a mixture of expectation and worry.
If there are people from the Hyuga clan present, they will see that He Feng's body
is filled with an extremely large amount of chakra, and that chakra is slowly
gathering towards his forehead.
A dim diamond-shaped mark gradually emerged from He Feng's forehead.
The same mark as Uzumaki Mito and Tsunade appears.
"The Yin seal is completed." He Feng opened his eyes, his neutral voice revealing
excitement.
In He Feng's career of learning ninjutsu in the past few years, the difficulty of
mastering the Yin Seal can definitely be ranked first, followed by the Flying
Thunder God Technique.
"Great! We finally succeeded!" Tsunade's performance was even more exaggerated than
He Feng's.
She held He Feng tightly in her arms for a while, and then reluctantly let go after
He Feng's face turned red.
I don’t know if it was Tsunade’s illusion, but she always felt that her brother was
becoming more and more attractive.
Unknowingly, Tsunade's feelings for He Feng had deteriorated.
"He Feng, do you want to learn the magic of immortality?" Tsunade suddenly asked
such a question.
She tried to learn immortality from Slug Immortal, but her talent was obviously not
suitable for learning immortality.
After seeing that He Feng's talent was almost as good as that of his great
grandfather, Tsunade also had the idea of letting He Feng learn the magic of
immortality.
Of course, Tsunade didn't know that Orochimaru had long planned to take He Feng to
see the Great Immortal White Snake, but it was only delayed because of He Feng's
age.
He Feng also maintains a great interest in Xianjutsu. After all, he has a stronger
affinity with natural energy than Zhongwu, and his perception of the surrounding
natural energy is very strong. It is not an exaggeration to say that learning
Xianjutsu is easy.
He Feng nodded, "Of course I do. Sister Tsunade, are you going to teach me the
magic of immortality?"
Tsunade shook her head. Although she wanted to teach Hefeng Immortal Technique step
by step, she didn't know how to do it.
Tsunade first formed a seal to channel the contract scroll, and then opened the
contract scroll.
In addition to Tsunade's name on the contract scroll, He Feng can also see the
names of Kato Shizune and Nohara Lin.
As a disciple of Tsunade, he would naturally sign a contract with the Great Slug
Master.
Tsunade handed He Feng a pen, and then said: "Little He Feng, please sign your name
first, and I will take you to see the Great Immortal Slug later."
Hefeng nodded. Last year, he signed the psychic contract in Ryūchi Cave under the
watchful eye of Orochimaru. Although he did not go to Ryūchi Cave to look for the
directional psychic snake, he could still channel the snakes as long as he
wanted. .
Now he has to sign the psychic contract of Shigu Forest. If Jiraiya slaps the
psychic contract of Miaomu Mountain on the ground again and asks He Feng to sign
it, He Feng will slap the ground with one hand and summon all the big snakes, slugs
and toads during a fight. , that would be an exaggeration.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
After He Feng signed the psychic contract, Tsunade nodded with satisfaction, then
bit her finger to form a seal and said: "Psychic technique."
The next second, a mini version of the slug appeared in Tsunade's hand.
A feminine and light voice came from the slug: "Tsunade-sama, what happened?"
The sound of a live slug is sweet. If you only listen to the sound, no one would
think that the other person is a slug.
"Lord Huoji, this is my brother Hatake Hefeng. I want to take him to Shigu Forest
to learn the magic of immortality."
The living creature was a little surprised, "Ah, it's Master Hefeng. Master Tsunade
often mentions you to me, and you are indeed as cute as Master Tsunade said."
He Feng didn't refute what Huo Li said. He had already adapted to others praising
him for being cute. After all, he felt the same way himself.
"Sir, you should call me He Feng. Sir, it's too exaggerated."
"As long as anyone who signs a psychic contract with Shigulin, I will call them
"sir." This is normal."
He Feng wanted to say that this was not normal at all, but heIt's not good to
refute the other party.
After all, this guy’s age alone is already in four figures.
Tsunade seemed to notice He Feng's embarrassment, so she began to persuade him:
"Master Huo Jiao, don't you think the title of Little He Feng is more
affectionate?"
The living creature said, "That's true. Then I'll call you Xiao He Feng."
He Feng:......
Is there a possibility that he is not young?
In the end, He Feng did not say this.
After confirming the title, the living snake immediately said: "If you want to
learn immortality, it is more suitable to be in Shigu Forest. Tsunade-sama, I will
reverse channel you to Shigu Forest."
After saying that, the living dragon lifted the psychic spell on its own and turned
into a cloud of smoke and dissipated.
Seeing this, Tsunade said to Shizune and Nohara Lin, "You two little guys are
waiting for my return at home. Immortal magic cannot be learned in a short while. I
will be back soon."
"Ziyin, Lin, bye..." He Feng waved his hands to Zhiyin and Lin, but the counter-
spiritual technique did not wait for He Feng to finish speaking.
The next second, He Feng and Tsunade appeared in Shigu Forest.
The scene of Shigu Forest is just like its name. He Feng can hear the sound of
"click" just by taking a step.
When you look down, you can see the bones that have been trampled into two pieces.
You can't tell what kind of creature this is just by looking at it.
A slug as big as one person fell from the tree next to He Feng and Tsunade.
"Xiao Hefeng, Master Tsunade, I will take you to the main body." A lively voice
sounded.
Tsunade also explained to He Feng: "All the slugs in the entire wet bone forest are
part of Lord Living Slug. Because Lord Living Slug is too huge, he can only move by
splitting part of his body."
He Feng nodded, indicating that he understood.
Huo Li took Hefeng and Tsunade for about half an hour before arriving at the
destination of their trip, the Great Immortal Huo Li.

Chapter 30 Immortal magic, the potential to surpass Hashirama

Although He Feng had some guesses about the size of the Great Slug Immortal, after
actually seeing it, he still lamented that his guess was a bit too conservative.
If he could channel the true form of the Great Slug Immortal, Payne might not even
have to let go of Shinra Tenzheng, and Konoha would be collapsed by the living
Great Immortal Slug.
The process of learning Immortal Mode in Shigulin is different from the other two
immortal lands.
If you want to learn magic in Mt. Myoboku, you need to apply toad oil on your body
to feel and absorb the magic of Mt. Myoboku. If you fail, you will turn into a toad
statue.
In Ryūchi Cave, the Great Immortal White Snake directly injected a large amount of
celestial chakra into his body, forcing his body to adapt to the celestial chakra
of Ryūchi Cave. After failure, there was only one result - becoming the ration of
Immortal White Snake.
In comparison, learning the magic of Shigulin is kinder and more difficult.
The natural energy content in the Shiggy Bone Forest is much higher than the
outside world and the other two immortal lands.
To learn magic in Shigu Forest, you need to empty your mind first, slowly introduce
natural energy into your body, and then use subtle chakra control techniques to
fuse natural energy and chakra while keeping your mind empty.
What is needed to master Xianjutsu is to keep the natural energy, spiritual energy
and chakra in the body in balance without independent control.
As for the consequences of failure, it is also very simple, just turning into a
slug and being absorbed by a living slug.
"Xiao Hefeng, I have told you how to learn the Immortal Technique of Shigu Forest.
You can try to master the Immortal Technique. If something goes wrong, I will
interrupt you." Huo Li said with some expectation.
In the past thousand years, no one except Qianju Zhujian has learned the Immortal
Technique of Shigu Forest. She is also looking forward to whether He Feng can
become the second person to master the Immortal Technique of Shigu Forest after
Senju Hashirama.
He Feng nodded seriously. Although Huobi's explanation on how to learn the magic of
immortality was very rough, he understood.
He Feng sat down cross-legged and closed his eyes.
The next second, the surrounding natural energy seemed to have found something
good, and began to circle around Hefeng happily.
Occasionally, some natural energy wants to penetrate into Hefeng's body, but it
seems to have hit a wall and cannot enter.
Feeling the active natural energy around He Feng, Huo Ping said in surprise:
"Tsunade-sama, Xiao He Feng's talent is very good. If nothing else happens, Xiao He
Feng will be the second person to master Shigu Forest after Hashirama. A magical
person."
Tsunade was also very surprised. She just brought He Feng here to try her luck.
After Jiraiya learned the magic and his strength greatly increased, she also tried
to learn the magic, but the difficulty of learning the magic persuaded her to give
up.
Tsunade came to the conclusion that this is not something that ordinary people can
learn.
"How old was Grandpa when he mastered senjutsu?" Tsunade said to herself.
Although she didn’t know exactly how old her uncle was when he mastered the magic
of immortality, she was pretty sure that he was already an adult at that time.
"Little Hefeng is only nine years old this year." Tsunade said with emotion.
"Sir, He Feng, I would like to ask you to help take care of some of them, and I
will go back to Konoha first." Tsunade said to the live snake on the side.
The living beetle responded: "Okay, Tsunade-sama, don't worry."
Tsunade nodded, and then the living dragon lifted the reverse psychic spell and
sent Tsunade back to Konoha.
"..."
Time passed slowly, and He Feng sat motionless for seven days in a row, and the
live snake just kept watching He Feng.
During this period, the natural energy in He Feng's body showed signs of going wild
several times, but before the live snake could take action, He Feng used his own
sophisticated chakra manipulation technology to suppress it.
Gradually, the natural energy in He Feng’s bodyWhen it became quiet, He Feng's body
seemed to turn on an invisible switch.
The natural energy that originally required He Feng to expend energy to guide it
into the body flows into He Feng's body all the time, and is independently balanced
with He Feng's own chakra.
The next second, the same red eye shadow as Naruto appeared in the corner of He
Feng's eyes, and a red mark like a flame appeared from He Feng's cheek to the
corner of his eyes.
He Feng stood up and looked happily at the live dragon beside him.
He Feng's perception ability is very good. Even without Kagura's inner eye, he can
still sense the gaze from the living snake on the side.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

And the living dragon performed her duties perfectly, not even taking her eyes off
He Feng during these seven days.
"Congratulations to you, Little Hefeng. It took Lord Zhujian ten days to master the
Immortal Mode, but you were faster than him. It only took seven days." The living
beetle was also excited for Hefeng.
He Feng nodded, and then the fairy-mode facial makeup gradually faded away.
Not everyone can enter the sage mode by clapping their hands like Hashirama did.
Naruto needs his shadow clone to accumulate natural energy in advance, Jiraiya
needs the help of two sages, Fukasaku Shima, and even Namikaze Minato needs time to
gather natural energy before he can enter sage mode.
He Feng was also curious about how long it would take for him to enter immortal
mode.
I saw He Feng imitating Senju Hashirama's movements and clapping his hands, and
chakra began to flow in his body.
The next second, the immortal mask appeared, and He Feng successfully entered the
immortal mode.
"Perfect." He Feng was very satisfied. It seemed that he could enter the immortal
mode in seconds like Senju Hashirama.
"Master Huoli, can I test the power of Ninjutsu here?" He Feng looked at the clone
of Huoli who was a head bigger than him and asked.
"Yes, Shigu Forest is very big and I am the only one. Xiao Hefeng can try any
ninjutsu he wants." The living snake agreed to Hefeng's request.
For her, no matter how many ninjutsu Hefeng tests, the damage caused to Shigulin
will not be as big as her turning over, so the living dragon doesn't care at all.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
He Feng nodded, feeling the natural energy in his body begin to form seals.
At present, he is not yet able to clap his hands and shout, but he is not far away
from this goal.
"Immortal magic, super large jade spiral pill!"
A huge chakra sphere condensed in He Feng's hand, and then was smashed by He Feng
towards the giant tree beside him under the watchful eyes of the living beast.
Boom——
There was only a loud noise, and smoke and dust were everywhere. The ninjutsu
blessed by the magic chakra showed its extremely destructive power.
In the current ninja world, there are few ninjutsus that can be more destructive
than He Feng's move when the Tailed Beast Jade is not available.
He Feng tried many fairy versions of Ninjutsu, and the power of Ninjutsu that was
blessed by Xianjutsu was greatly improved.
Even an ordinary fire ball can reach B-level or even A-level power.
In addition, the perception range of Hefeng Kagura's Heart Eye has also been
increased, and the original radius of ten kilometers has been increased to a radius
of fifteen kilometers.
This five-kilometer blessing can completely prevent one party from having any
secrets in the eyes of the wind in a war.
"Now I should be able to protect myself when facing jounin." He Feng sighed with
emotion. At only nine years old, he felt so insecure that he had no choice but to
keep strengthening his strength.
The living beast on the side couldn't help but laugh when he heard He Feng's words.
As Tsunade's psychic, she had participated in various battles and had some
understanding of the strength of the ninjas in each village.
"Xiao Hefeng's strength is already very strong. If you cooperate with the immortal
mode, even if Tsunade-sama wants to defeat Xiao Hefeng in a short time, it will be
impossible."
He Feng was not relieved after hearing the explanation from the living snake:
"That means Sister Tsunade can still beat me. The fact that Sister Tsunade can beat
me means that there are many people in the ninja world who can beat me. If anyone
beats me, drag me into a small dark room to warm the bed. I have no power to fight
back.
It seems that I have to continue to become stronger! "
He Feng sighed like this.
The living creature didn't refute again. It's okay for Xiao Hefeng to be happy.
She's just a psychic beast. What can she do?
"Sir, I won't be out for a long time. Please help me get back to Konoha."

Chapter 31 Konoha? Iwagakure? I want to fight them all!

Yunyin Village.
The third generation Raikage Ai received the latest updated information from the
ANBU.
Most of the content comes from ninjas sent out by Yunyin Village.
Every time he read a piece of information, the Third Raikage Ai felt his anger grow
stronger.
"Damn Konoha and Iwagakure, how dare you kill all the ninjas of Kumogakure like
this!"
After reading all the information, the Third Raikage Ai clenched his fist and
smashed it on the table angrily.
The information on his desk and the table was immediately turned into dust due to
the large amount of Thunder Chakra.
As the strongest and largest fighting sect in Kumoyin Village, the Third Raikage Ai
has always had a goal, which is to elevate Kumoyin Village to the largest village
in the ninja world.
In his opinion, Konoha without Senju Tobirama is no longer something to be afraid
of.
Since Konoha dares to offend Kumogakure in this way, it must be prepared to receive
Kumogakure's fist.
"Tudai, Konoha has offended me like this, Kumogakure, how do you think we should
respond." The third generation Raikage Ai is not an irritable character, but he has
the characteristics of Raikage.They have a common characteristic - they are not
willing to use their brains, so they know how to listen to other people's opinions.
As the third-generation Raikage Ai's most trusted assistant and think tank, Tutai
came into play at this time.
Todai was already accustomed to his own Raikage's behavior of demolishing homes. He
just pondered for a moment and then gave his own advice:
"Lord Raikage, although Konoha provokes me, Kumogakure, we cannot directly send
troops to Konoha.
One is because we, Kumogakure, are still far away from Konoha, and there are
several small countries in between. Although these countries dare not offend our
majesty, Kumogakure, there are also spies from other countries among them. Once the
news of the gathering of our Kumogakure army is revealed by other countries, Access
is a big obstacle for us.
After all, prepared Konoha and unprepared Konoha are two completely different
situations.
Secondly, we have had a grudge with Iwagakure for a long time. In terms of hatred
alone, it is deeper than Konoha. Once we, Kumogakure and Konoha go to war, we will
not only face Konoha, but also Iwagakure.
And Iwagakure can completely attack me, Kumogakure, all the way by sea. It is not
an exaggeration to say that it is impossible to guard against it.
Therefore, I suggest that the Raikage-sama leads the troops to face Iwagakure
directly, while the Konoha side can engage in small-scale battles to gradually
figure it out. If necessary, we can also send tailed beasts for sneak attacks. "
Tudai analyzed a lot for the Third Raikage Ai in one breath. After listening to
Tudai's explanation, the Third Raikage Ai also suddenly understood.
Those old boys in Iwagakure are the dirtiest, and they are indeed capable of such
shameless things as sneak attacks.
"Okay! This general direction is good, a more detailed plan will be decided at the
meeting!" The third generation Raikage clapped his hands and made the decision.
He must defeat Konoha, and Iwagakure cannot be left alone.
Speaking of this, the Third Raikage seemed to have thought of something again,
"Where has that boy Ye Yue gone? Why haven't I seen him recently!"
Tutai replied: "Master Yeyue and Master Bi are undergoing special training in
Thunder Valley. Do I need to call them over?"
The Third Raikage nodded and stood up from the chair, hugging his chest.
"I'll call them two myself. You go and call the other senior people over." After
saying that, Raikage smashed the glass of Raikage Building with his head and jumped
down from the building.
Seeing the Third Raikage leaving like this, Tudai raised his forehead helplessly,
"When will the Raikage-sama be able to walk through the door? Otherwise, this glass
should not be repaired at all. Anyway, the Raikage-sama will break it every time."
But complaining is all about complaining, Dodai still followed the Raikage's
instructions and went to ask Kumogakure's senior management to go to the Raikage's
office for a meeting.
Valley of Thunder.
The place is filled with clouds and mist, with huge thunder echoing all the time,
and occasionally a bolt of lightning will strike. People without any strength even
dare not go deep into the Valley of Thunder.
And in this dangerous terrain, a very strong man with pale skin and light yellow
hair was bare-chested, with lightning flashing all over his body, fighting hand-to-
hand with a monster with a bull's head and eight tails.
"Bi! Look at my heavy flow storm!" Yeyue gathered most of her thunder escape chakra
at her right elbow, and then rushed towards the eight tails at a speed that was
almost invisible to the naked eye.
"Oh~ Big brother's fist~ is not as good as my fingers~ Baga Yalu~ Kou Nong Yalu~"
Bi, who transformed into the eight tails, muttered his own original rap. Although
his mouth was mocking, his whole state must be serious.
Bang——
Boom——
Yeyue's elbow collided with Eight-Tails' fist, making a huge roar. Coupled with the
thunder and lightning that kept exploding on the side, it was not unreasonable to
say that it was two ferocious beasts fighting.
"Bi, how dare you look down on your big brother, just watch the punch!" Yeyue, who
was blessed with the thunder escape chakra mode, moved very quickly, and combined
with her flexible and violent physical skills, she was able to fight better than
others for a while.
"Brother bastard, big brother idiot!" Bi covered his head, which was slightly dizzy
after being hit by Ye Yue, and quickly retreated. After pulling some distance away,
Bi suddenly stopped.
"Look at my move!" As he spoke, a large amount of chakra gathered in the Eight-
Tails' mouth.
In the mental space, Niu Gui asked with some uncertainty: "Bi, are you sure you
want to use Tailed Beast Jade?"
Kirabi kept covering his head with his hands and said confidently: "If you bastard
brother dares to hit me on the head, I will make him suffer a little."
Yes, in Kirabi's opinion, his tailed beast jade can only make Yeyue suffer a little
bit. After all, his eldest brother is the future fourth generation Raikage.
"Bastard!" Yeyue said through gritted teeth as she watched the tailed beast jade
that was dark and filled with a huge amount of chakra gather in the eight-tailed
mouth.
Kirabi, this bastard, suddenly started flipping the table while he was beating. The
Tailed Beast Jade is not a small ninjutsu. Although he cannot use the full power of
the eight tails now, he should not be underestimated, even if he has mastered the
thunder escape. In carat mode, he also had to avoid the edge for a while.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
In Yeyue's view, the only person who can completely block the eight-tailed beast
jade is his father's armor known as the strongest shield, Leiton.
The Third Raikage, who was watching the fight between the two, did not intervene
immediately. He only muttered something to the side that it was nonsense and then
continued to watch the battle.
In his opinion, the current fighting can only be regarded as children's play, and
he will not interfere until the Eight-Tails goes berserk.
"Tailed beast jade!" The rich voices of Eight Tails and Kirabi sounded.
At the same time, Yeyue also noticed her father watching the battle not far away,
and immediately gritted her teeth.
"Damn it! You can't retreat from this move!"
"Leighton's Armor!" Yeyue roared angrily, her pale yellow hair standing on end as
she activated the Thunder Escape Chakra Mode with all her strength.
"Hell Thrust·Three Pen Hands!" Yeyue used the most powerful weapon she currently
has.Although his attack methods are far less consistent than his father's, they
still have some appearance.
Boom——
Yeyue and Tailed Beast Jade collided together, and a huge explosion sounded from
the center.
Lei Shunshen, the third-generation Raikage user, appeared at the scene and raised
his hand to easily catch Ye Yue, who was knocked away by the explosion.
"Dad." Yeyue was covered in wounds, and blood was still flowing from his forehead.
Even with the Thunder Escape Armor turned on, he still couldn't block the Tailed
Beast Jade's explosion damage.
The Third Raikage did not reprimand the other party for not having the brains to
take over the Tailed Beast Tamade, but said happily: "Well done, you are worthy of
being my son."
After two words of praise, the Third Raikage also gave two words of guidance to
Yeyue: "Continue to strengthen Raiton's armor, and try to use the second sword next
time."
Although Yeyue is arrogant, he admires his father from the bottom of his heart, so
he can't help but behave well: "I understand."
At this time, Kirabi also released his complete tailed beast transformation and
trotted to the side of the Third Raikage and Yeyue.
The Third Raikage grinned and touched Kirabi's chest with his fist, "Boy, you did a
good job! It looks like you had a good conversation with the Eight-Tails."
"My partner ~ Hachi is very good ~" Kirabi responded to the Third Raikage with a
unique rap.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"Okay, come back with me. You two have done very well in special training and can
already lead the troops to participate in the war."
"Dad, is the war finally going to start? Will it be with Konoha or Iwagakure?"
"Konoha? Iwagakure? I will fight them all!"
――――
There is no specific introduction to the surname and name of the Raikage of Cloud
Hidden Village, Kishimoto. In this book, the contemporary Raikage is named Ai, and
his successor has a surname and no name and is called Yezuki.

Chapter 32 Rasa succeeds as the fourth generation and starts the war!
Sand Hidden Village.
Because the Third Kazekage disappeared, Sunagakure Village almost mobilized the
entire village to search for him, and the search lasted half a year.
In the past six months, Sunagakure Village can be said to be leaderless. Although
there are advisors and elders such as Chiyo and Ebizo presiding over the overall
situation, it still seems a bit powerless.
Some people with ulterior motives in the Kingdom of Wind also started an internal
war in the Kingdom of Wind after noticing the disappearance of the third generation
of Kazekage. This internal war in the Kingdom of Wind made the already barren
Kingdom of Wind even more barren.
The daimyo of the Land of Wind has stopped the financial allocation of Sunagakure
Village for a long time.
Coupled with the war in the country, the ninjas in Sunagakure Village had no tasks
to take on even if they wanted to make money, and there were more and more voices
of dissatisfaction in the village.
"Sister, this is not the way to go. If the internal war problem in the Kingdom of
Wind is not solved, the daimyo will not allocate funds to Sunagakure Village. Even
if our Sunagakure Village has Rasa's placer gold for emergency relief, it is not a
long-term solution." Ebizo paced back and forth. Step, I was very anxious.
Chiyo sat on the chair without saying a word, constantly thinking about how to
break the situation.
"Elder Qiandai, Elder Ebizo, this is today's placer gold."
At this moment, Luo Sha, who had gone out to pan for gold, returned and used
magnetic escape to control the gold found in the sand to fall on the table.
Chiyo raised his head and looked at Luo Sha. At this time, Luo Sha was still very
young, but there was lingering fatigue on his face.
Obviously, the day after day of gold mining made Luo Sha feel a little depressed.
After all, using ninjutsu consumes chakra. If a person loses chakra for a long
time, his condition will naturally not be good.
It was at this moment that Chiyo made a decision.
She stood up from the chair with a solemn look, held up Luo Sa's hands, and said
seriously: "Luo Sa, come and become the fourth generation.
It has been half a year since the Sandaime disappeared. The Third Kazekage probably
encountered an accident when he went out, and Sunagakure Village can no longer
withstand the turmoil of Kazekage.
Look at the turmoil in the Kingdom of Wind. Those wandering ninjas seem to think
that as long as there is no Kazekage in Sand Hidden Village, they can replace it.
In the end, all that is consumed is our own national power. "
Ebizo was also inspired by Chiyo's suggestion. He suddenly said: "Foreign war! We
need a foreign war! The internal conflicts in the Kingdom of Wind cannot be stopped
by ordinary means, except to turn the internal conflicts into external conflicts!
We in the Country of Wind are too poor, and those rebels can’t gain much even if
they win, so why don’t we set their sights on other countries! As long as Yuluo Sha
leads those people and defeats the surrounding small countries, the problem of our
Country of Wind's fiscal deficit can be well solved. "
Luo Sha on the side listened in confusion, but he still understood part of it. Both
elders supported him to become the fourth generation Kazekage, and he needed to
lead the people of the Kingdom of Wind to wage war outside.
Chiyo continued: "Luo Sha, if we start a war, which country do you think we should
target?"
After hearing Chiyo’s question, Luo Sha immediately started thinking:
"Our Sunagakure Village has three neighboring countries, namely the Country of
Birds, the Country of Rain, and the Country of Kawa. First, the option of the
Country of Rain was eliminated. During the second Shinobi War, the leader of the
Country of Rain, Sanho Uo Hanzo, had already Use his strength to prove that the
Kingdom of Rain is not easy to bully.
The current Sunagakure Village and the Country of Rain cannot benefit from the
collision. The second thing that needs to be eliminated is the Country of Birds.
Compared with Konoha and Iwagakure, it is obvious that Konoha is easier to talk to.
If we are right A war launched by the Kingdom of Birds is likely to cause the full
involvement of Iwagakure Village.
And once the people of Iwagakure get involved in the war, they will
definitelyTrying to plot the territory of my country of wind.
In contrast, Konoha in the Country of Fire will not be like this. Even if Konoha
will intervene in our war with the Country of Sichuan, it will not have the idea of
plotting against our Country of Wind.
Therefore, my suggestion is to launch a war against the Kingdom of Sichuan. "
Chiyo and Ebizo nodded. They also felt that Luo Sha's analysis was good.
Chiyo said categorically: "Then it's decided to be the country of Kawawa. Rasa,
please make preparations. Tomorrow morning, I and all the senior elders of
Sunagakure Village will announce your successor as the fourth generation head in
the square."
Luo Sha nodded, agreeing.
"..."
Kucha (transition sound effect)
Konoha Year 47, January 1st.
The army of Sunagakure gathered in secret and quickly launched a surprise attack on
the neighboring country of Kawa without anyone in the ninja world expecting it.
Overnight, the Kingdom of Sichuan lost more than a quarter of its territory.
After realizing the wolf ambition of the Wind Country, Konoha took the lead in
sending a Jonin team stationed in the Kawa Country to investigate.
However, the red-eyed Sunagakure had long forgotten Kazekage Rasa's order not to
have any conflict with Konoha, and completely annihilated Konoha's squadron
stationed in Sichuan Province.
This incident aroused the anger of the third generation Hokage Sarutobi Hiruzen.
Sarutobi Hiruzen immediately issued an order, and most of the Konoha ninjas
accepted the mission and went to support the country of Kawakawa.
The war between Konoha and Sand Hidden Village is about to break out.
"Asshole! Didn't Rasa succeed the fourth generation Kazekage and not recognize his
last name? How dare you kill me, the Konoha ninja!" Sarutobi Hiruzen looked angry,
he was very sad about the death of a Jonin team. .
"This matter must not be let go like this!" Mito Kadoyan was also very angry.
"We, Konoha, are the largest ninja village in the ninja world. The majesty of
Konoha cannot be ignored. Damn Sunagakure must pay the price for their actions."
Koharu said coldly as he went to bed.
As the disciple of the Second Hokage Senju Tobirama, she often fought against the
Sunagakure Village during the Second Ninja War. In her opinion, the Sunagakure
Village was nothing more than that.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
Danzo had a sullen face, and his basic ninjas also suffered losses in the country
of Kawakawa.
"The hatred between Sunagakure Village and us can only be repaid with blood. I will
personally lead the Konoha ninja to counterattack Sunagakure Village." Danzo
immediately decided to participate in the war personally.
He wants to compete for the fourth generation Hokage, in which reputation is also
essential in addition to military exploits. However, Danzo knows that Sarutobi
Hiruzen has always deliberately suppressed his reputation, so this time the war
with Sunagakure Village is the beginning of his Shimura Danzo. A good opportunity
to hide your famous name.
Sarutobi Hiruzen glanced at Shimura Danzo in surprise, and then seemed to think of
something.
But this time he didn't stop the other party.
"Okay, then Elder Danzo will serve as the main commander of the war with Sunagakure
Village... In addition, I will inform Ichiban Orochimaru that he will serve as the
deputy commander of the war with Sunagakure Village."
Although Sarutobi Hiruzen was a little dazed at ordinary times at this time, during
the real war, he still looked like a shinobi hero in the past. If he were not the
Hokage, he would definitely participate in this war as soon as possible.
"Well... let me inform Sakumo that the ANBU can issue some war missions
appropriately. When necessary, Sakumo can judge whether ANBU support is needed."
At this time, Konoha Village is like a war machine, guided by the core of Naruto
and starting to operate continuously.
The ninjas of each ninja clan will send some ninjas to participate in the army that
conquers Sunagakure.
Among them, the one who contributed the most was the Uchiha clan.
Although the top leaders of the Uchiha clan are at odds with the top leaders of
Konoha, the Uchiha clan still hopes that this war will start and improve Uchiha's
reputation in Konoha.
Only in this way can they better pursue the position of Hokage.
……
At the same time as the war between Sunagakure Village and Konoha began.
Yunyin Village, Yanyin Village and Wuyin Village received the news at the same
time.
The three major ninja villages that have developed peacefully for ten years are no
longer satisfied with the status quo. They have all begun to mobilize before the
war and are ready to attack at any time.
However, compared to Iwagakure and Kirigakure, Kumogakure clearly planned this war
more carefully.
On a dark and windy night, Yeyue, the son of the Third Raikage Ai, and his partner
Kirabi led ten ANBU jounin to secretly leave the Cloud Hidden Village.
The goal of their trip is the current largest village in the ninja world, Konoha
Hidden Village!

Chapter 33 Battle! Yellow Flash and AB Brothers!

"The war has come, what do you think?"
He Feng and others sat side by side in front of the creek, their voices sounded
melancholy and emotional.
"Of course I will carry out my youth and fight to protect Konoha and protect
everyone!" Metkai stood up from the ground, waving his fist and said passionately.
"Those ninja villages dare to launch a war against Konoha, then let them see the
power of Uchiha!" Obito crossed his chest and imitated Kakashi with a cold face.
Kakashi raised his head and looked at the two of them, muttering idiots in his
mouth, and stood up as well:
"Although war is cruel, our goal is to protect, to protect our friends and everyone
in the village."
Nohara Lin held He Feng's arm worriedly. Although she had a gentle and easy-going
personality, she had her own persistence.
"My medical ninjutsu has been recognized by Tsunade-sama, and I have learned a lot.
I will also make my contribution."
Seeing everyone making declarations one after another, Xirihong felt infected in
her heart. She released her hold on Hefeng's arm and stood up.
"In this caseI also want to show those people the strength of Konoha genin! "
Asuma also stood up when he saw this. Although he had only had unrequited love for
Kurenai, he was still willing to accompany Kurenai to participate in the war, even
though his Hokage father would not allow it.
"Konoha is our common home. As a Konoha ninja, I will participate in the war."
He Feng also agreed with the declaration made by everyone, even though he was
reincarnated into this ninja world and Konoha with his memories.
But this does not make He Feng lack recognition for Konoha Village.
Whether it was his father who raised him and Kakashi alone, or the mother who gave
him and Kakashi life and never met him, or his teacher Orochimaru, his sister
Tsunade, and everyone present He wants to protect them all.
The problems in the big family of Konoha are only a few individuals, and this will
not affect Hefeng's feelings for Konoha.
He Feng was the last one to stand up. He raised his right hand, and a sky-blue
spiral pill appeared. "I like eating meatballs very much. I believe those who come
to invade Konoha will also like to eat what I prepare for them." meatballs."
……
The next morning.
Hefeng, Kakashi and Obito completed their assembly at the gate of Konoha. Although
everyone made a declaration together yesterday, war has never been a child's play.
He Feng knew the strength of Kakashi and Obito, and ordinary jounin would have to
die when faced with them, so He Feng was not too worried.
However, Hefeng would not take someone like Nohara Rin and Kurenai Yuhi. Although
Rin knew medical ninjutsu, his own strength was still weak. With Tsunade by his
side, he could avoid being captured and used as a jinchuriki by Kirigakure, but on
the battlefield Everything is uncertain.
Not to mention Yuhi Kurenai, when she went home and told her father, Yuhihi
Kurenai, that she wanted to join the war, she was directly knocked down by Yuhihi
Kurenai's illusion and fell asleep.
"Why are you still late, Minato-sensei? He was the one who told us to gather."
Obito said with some confusion as his eyes kept looking around.
Kakashi was also surprised. Logically speaking, Minato-sensei should be the most
punctual.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"There's no need to look for it. Teacher Minato has arrived a long time ago. Maybe
he left because of something." He Feng looked at the Flying Thunder God's technique
engraved next to the pillar of Konoha's gate.
The last time he saw this technique, he didn't see it. Now that it appeared here,
it meant that Namikaze Minato had already been here.
Sure enough, after waiting for two or three minutes, Namikaze Minato's figure
appeared out of thin air beside the goalpost.
Namikaze Minato said quickly: "Originally, I planned to take you to take over the
war mission on the battlefield of Kawa no Kuni, but the Anbu discovered the figure
of Kumogakure Anbu on the border between the Land of Fire and the Land of Ta. This
time we are going A surprise attack on Kumogakure Anbu.
Watergate class! "
"Arrived!" He Feng and others suddenly responded in unison.
"This mission is S-level. I may not have time to take care of you, so don't hold
anything back.
Set off! "
Most of the terrain in the Land of Fire is jungle. Minato, He Feng and the three of
them jumped over tree after tree, quickly heading towards the border of the Fire
Field.
On the other side, the timeline is a little further forward, on the border of
Huotian.
Yeyue frowned slightly as she looked at the corpses of several Anbu on the ground.
The purpose of their trip was to sneak into Konoha as much as possible and abduct
Konoha's bloody ninjas. If exposed, Yeyue and Kirabi would be protected by the
lives of Kumogakure Anbu. The two entered Konoha Village and robbed it.
Now, although they had killed most of the ANBU, one ANBU still escaped.
"Damn it, let that ANBU run away and be exposed before he even gets close to
Konoha."
It's good now. They didn't expect that Konoha's intelligence system was so
developed and they were discovered before they even entered the Land of Fire.
"All enemies~beat them all~big brother and I~no one can stop~" Qilabi responded to
Yeyue with his non-rhyming rap.
"Hahaha, you are right! No matter how many people Konoha sends, it will be useless.
My fist will tell the weak Konoha ninja what strength is."
"who!"
At this moment, Ye Yue suddenly looked into the distance, and he suddenly felt a
sense of crisis coming from the distance.
"Kumogakure, during the war, you entered the territory of the Fire Country without
permission and killed the Konoha ninjas. Do you know the consequences of your
actions?" Minato Namikaze asked in a low voice, holding the sword of Ninja Love in
his hand.
There were eleven people present on the other side, but there were only himself and
three students on his side.
Although each of his three students has the strength to fight a Jonin alone, the
gap in numbers between the two sides is quite large.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
However, Namikaze Minato was not too worried. Only those who have mastered the art
of Flying Thunder God will know how powerful Flying Thunder God is.
"What are the consequences? Of course it's a war! Soon you will hear Kumogakure's
declaration of war on Konoha. After this war, Konoha will no longer exist.
As for you, the yellow flash of Konoha, your arrogance will be buried here. Yeyue
took a step forward and activated the Thunder Chakra mode at the same time, "I
doubt that the Anbu who ran back has told you clearly about the situation, and what
kind of confidence allowed you to take your child to fight with me." "
Kirabi followed in the footsteps of his elder brother, and at the same time
complained: "Brother, if you die, you won't hear the declaration of war."
"Shut up, I know you won't be able to hear a declaration of war if you die."
Namikaze Minato also smiled when he saw that the other party despised his three
students so much.Come out: "What is confidence? You will know it after playing!"
While speaking, Namikaze Minato threw several swords of Ninja Love at lightning
speed!
Yeyue also has information about Namikaze Minato, so she naturally knows that the
other party masters the ninjutsu of Flying Thunder God.
Therefore, he never relaxed his vigilance towards Namikaze Minato.
"Bi and I will deal with the yellow flash first! You go and kill those three
brats!" Yeyue roared and ordered to the ANBU behind him.
Then he punched his side with his fist.
The next second, a bloodstain appeared on Yeyue's arm, and Namikaze Minato appeared
behind Kirabi.
"Rasengan!" The blue Rasengan fell on Kirabi, making the Eight-Tails Jinchuuriki
very uncomfortable.
"Yellow fleas~ It's annoying~ Baga Yalu~ Kou Nong Yalu~" Kirabi used the eight-
tailed chakra to recover from his injuries, and kept rapping at the same time.
"Leitou Ninja spits out his sword when he encounters it!" Ye Yue turned his arm
into a sword and attacked Namikaze Minato again.
Namikaze Minato reacted quickly and disappeared again when Yeyue's big arm was only
a punch away from him.
"Damn yellow flash!" Yeyue gritted her teeth. The speed she was so proud of was
directly defeated by Namikaze Minato, and she couldn't catch him at all.
Not to mention Kirabi, he didn't even have a good way to get close to Namikaze
Minato so far.
As for the complete transformation into a tailed beast, Kirabi has never thought
about it, but Hachi's speed can't even keep up with his elder brother, so how can
he keep up with the yellow flash.
That would definitely make it more bulky.
"The sons of the Third Raikage and the Eight-Tailed Jinchuuriki, let's see if we
can leave one behind." Namikaze Minato whispered softly while keeping the Flying
Thunder God moving at high speed.
He still has a lot of chakra, but it will always be exhausted, so Namikaze Minato
can only try to leave one person behind.

Chapter 34 Invincible! The bloody dancer of Konoha!

On the other side, He Feng and others faced nine jonin from Kumogakure's ANBU.
There were originally ten ANBU who accompanied Yeyue to attack Konoha, but one of
them was killed by Konoha's ANBU when they entered the border of Fire Country.
Facing the nine jounin in front of them, both Hefeng Kakashi and Obito felt their
hands and feet trembling and their hearts beating faster.
This is the fighting gene that belongs to the Uchiha and Hatake clan.
"Fire Release: Great Fire Extinguishment!" Obito immediately activated his three
magatama and quickly formed a seal to launch a large-scale fire escape.
With the cover of Fire Release, Hefeng and Kakashi both took out their short
swords.
For He Feng, Ninjutsu is only an indispensable means of self-defense. What he
really likes is his own Hatake Swordsmanship.
Of course, if sword skills cannot defeat the enemy in a short period of time, he
would not mind entering the immortal mode and using the Yin seal on his forehead to
have a simple and happy round of unlimited firepower.
"Arashi Release, Light Fang!" A ray composed of Thunder Release and Water Release
passed through Fire Release and shot towards where Obito was standing.
Obito, who has three magatama, has excellent dynamic vision and dodges immediately.
"This Uchiha from Konoha asked me not to come and help. They say they will retreat
immediately when they see Uchiha's three magatama. I want to see how much that kid
weighs." A Kumogakure ninja He looked arrogant, as if 1V1 with Obito was a normal
behavior for him in his twenties.
Kakashi used a teleportation technique to approach another blood successor ninja,
waving the short sword in his hand to kill the opponent while he was forming a
seal.
"Don't think about it!" At this moment, three jounin noticed Kakashi's movements,
and they all attacked Kakashi who was in the air.
Kakashi turned a blind eye to this and insisted on wielding the short sword in his
hand.
Swish——
The next second, He Feng's figure appeared next to Kakashi. He was holding a sword
flower in his hand. The sound of ping-pong metal collision was heard, and all the
shurikens around were shot down by He Feng.
And Kakashi's sword easily passed through the neck of the jounin who looked
surprised.
Obviously, this blood-stained jounin could not imagine why he would be killed by an
imp while being protected by eight people.
"Thunder Release, Thunder Sword!"
He Feng injected Thunder Chakra into the short knife and threw it at another Jōnin
who was forming seals.
Because the dagger is infused with Thunder Chakra, it not only flies at a much
faster speed than usual, but also makes a crisp crackling sound.
"Kid, don't underestimate us." The jounin who was targeted by He Feng used the
thunder chakra to cover the kunai in his hand, and knocked down the dagger beside
him with a casual blow.
He didn't care if his colleagues were killed by Konoha Anbu. This was the fate of
the Kumogakure ninjas, and he would also have such a day one day.
But being killed by these brats was an insult to him.
A smile appeared on the corner of He Feng's mouth, and he chuckled: "Idiot."
The next second, He Feng's figure appeared next to the downed dagger and quickly
swung it at the opponent's neck with another dagger.
Bah--
For a moment, a head was thrown high, and blood splattered on the broken neck.
The blood dyed the knife in He Feng's hand red, as well as his long white hair.
"!" The remaining people's eyes widened, "Fly...Flying Thunder God!!"
As the time and space ninjutsu developed by the second generation Hokage,
Kumogakure is the ninja village that has suffered the most from this ninjutsu. Not
to mention that everyone knows the Flying Thunder God, but at the level of jonin,
absolutely 99% of the people You can recognize it the first time you see it.
"Second yellow flash!" oneThe jounin said with a shocked expression.
"No, this is not a yellow flash, this is Konoha's Blood Maiden!" Another Kumogakure
ANBU sighed while also thinking of retreating.
"Trash, a mere Jonin dares to go 1V1 with Uncle Obito. Uncle Obito will beat you
ten times!" Obito on the side also solved the Jonin who wanted to challenge him in
a duel.
Although the opponent is fast, Obito is also not inferior. With three magatama,
Obito can completely see through the opponent's movements. If even this can't kill
the opponent, Obito can take off his eyes and give them to Kakashi.
"The opponent is only about ten years old. We can't just retreat. If we let this
bloody dancer really grow up, we will have another big enemy."
"That's right, don't worry about the other two. The five of us are surrounding the
Scarlet Dancer. Don't think about surviving, we must kill her!"
The remaining five jounin of Kumogakure quickly made their decision, and everyone
attacked He Feng together with expressions of shared death.
"Obito, come and help!" Kakashi said loudly, and then quickly formed seals.
"Thunder Release, Thunder Beast Chasing Fang!" A small wolf made of thunder and
lightning appeared out of thin air and bit a jounin.
"If you want to attack He Feng, you must first pass me!" Kakashi stopped a jounin,
waving his short sword constantly, and the jounin who was suppressed with a series
of attacks had no time to care about other people. .
"Genjutsu: The Jutsu of Darkness!" Obito activated his Sharingan with all his
strength and used the A-level illusion he had learned from Orochimaru, briefly
depriving the jounin of their vision.
After using this illusion, Obito's eye power was quickly depleted.
Although Sanmagatama will not cause blindness due to excessive consumption of pupil
power, it will cause severe pain due to loss of pupil power.
Obito endured the severe pain in his eyes and joined the battlefield again.
He said that if he can protect Hefeng, he will definitely protect the other party,
no matter what happens!
As a party involved, He Feng was not nervous. In this unfair battle, he showed only
half of his strength, and even more methods were hidden by him.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
Under the premise of giving up the thought of survival and going all out to kill
just one person, the five remaining jounin showed amazing qualities. Even if they
were deprived of their vision, Kakashi and Obito were exhausted.
Of course, this is also due to the fact that the two of them were in poor condition
due to the long battle.
Obito's age and amount of chakra are ultimately flaws. When chakra is consumed at
high power, the Dark Art will automatically dissipate.
Faced with the siege of three people, He Feng, who was holding two swords, seemed
to be at ease, dodging the three people's attacks like an elf.
Every time He Feng dodges, he can find the right opportunity to cut each of the
three people with a knife. The knife is not deep and has no other effects except
that it will continue to bleed.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

But no matter how shallow the wounds were, they couldn't stand up to the large
number. After just a dozen rounds, the three jounin had turned into bloody men.
After realizing that he and others could not kill He Feng, one of the jounin
immediately focused his remaining chakra on his throat.
He just heard him shouting loudly: "Lord Yeyue! The Blood Maiden of Konoha is less
than ten years old and is also a user of Flying Thunder God! We are defeated and
cannot return to Kumogakure with you! But please can lead Kumogakure Yin becomes
the largest village in the ninja world!"
On the other side, Yeyue, Kirabi and Namikaze Minato heard the shouts clearly.
"Blood Dancer?!" Yeyue was shocked, and at the same time she was very unwilling,
"Why is Konoha always rich in geniuses!"
In the past, there was Namikaze Minato who could fight on a par with him and Yubi,
and in the back there was a man who fought alone against the Nine-Life Jounin and
the Scarlet Maiden who was less than ten years old! How could Yeyue be reconciled
to this!
Yes, Yeyue directly attributed the achievements of Kakashi and Obito to He Feng.
After all, He Feng is a user of Flying Thunder God. This is not an exaggeration.
"Brother, we are about to retreat!" Kirabi approached Yeyue solemnly and stopped
singing.
If that bloody dancer joins the battle, things will not be good.
As for the opponent's age, it is no longer a problem at this time. Even adding one
gram of weight to the balanced scale will cause one side to tilt.
"Damn it! The mission my father gave me has failed like this. I'm really not
willing to retreat like this!" Yeyue looked at He Feng in the distance, whose hair
was dyed red with blood.
"Bi, it's best to kill her with that move. If we can't kill her, we'll retreat."
Yeyue and Qilabi looked at each other, then nodded.
Namikaze Minato noticed that the two of them were focusing on He Feng, and while
his heart tightened, he launched another attack.
"Flying Thunder God Slash!"
Kirabi used Ushiuki's tail to block Namikaze Minato's attack for Yeyue, and then
rushed towards Hefeng with Yeyue.

Chapter 35: Suffer a loss, take action with all your strength!
Although Ye Yue has an impatient personality and usually doesn't like to use her
brain to think, being impatient does not mean that Ye Yue is stupid. If we really
want to study his character carefully, Yeyue is completely wise and foolish.
On the contrary, Yeyue's character will also create her decisive attitude at
certain times.
Although he had never seen the Konoha Blood Dancer that the ANBU talked about,
Yeyue would think of countermeasures if an ANBU risked his own life to deliver the
message.
And Yeyue's countermeasures were also very simple.
The Scarlet Dancer is still young, and she relies on the flying thunder god's
technique to fight against nine jounin alone.The letter definitely doesn't retain
much chakra.
In the case of a sudden attack by him and Kirabi, the other party would most likely
not be able to react.
And the ninjas of Kumogakure often pay attention to killing with one strike.
"Bi!" Yeyue shouted.
"Brother!" Kirabi echoed, and at the same time, an orange-red tailed beast coat
emerged from his body.
The two have grown up, lived and practiced together as brothers for many years, and
have long been able to judge what the other wants to do from each other's words and
deeds.
The two of them are very fast, especially Yeyue, who is a speed ninja in the
physical arts category.
After truly becoming murderous, the two of them arrived in front of He Feng almost
in the blink of an eye.
"He Feng!" Kakashi and Obito were a little anxious. With their strength, how could
they stop Kumogakure's AB combination.
"He Feng." Namikaze Minato was not late. He tried to intercept Ye Yue the first
moment he stared at He Feng, and the next moment he came to He Feng's side and
wanted to take He Feng away.
"Minato-san, don't worry, I'll take Kakashi with me." He Feng also said softly to
Namikaze Minato.
Namikaze Minato stared into He Feng's eyes. Although He Feng's body was stained
with blood, those eyes were still bright and firm.
"Okay, Xiao Hefeng, I believe you." Namikaze Minato nodded, disappeared again, and
then appeared next to Kakashi and Obito.
"I don't have much chakra left. If I continue with the AB combination, I won't have
time to take care of you two. I'll take you two away first. He Feng will be fine
with the Flying Thunder God there."
Hearing Minato's explanation, Kakashi and Obito lowered their heads, feeling a
sense of powerlessness surrounding them at this moment.
They felt so weak that they couldn't even be by He Feng's side to protect him at
the critical moment.
On the other side, Yeyue and Kirabi also arrived at their respective locations.
The hair on Yeyue's body stood up, and the Thunder Chakra mode was fully activated.
No matter whether this attack was successful or not, he would retreat with Kirabi.
Kirabi was wrapped in an orange-red tailed beast coat. At this time, his mood was
disturbed by the tailed beast coat and he became particularly violent.
Even though he successfully had a heart-to-heart talk with Ushiki and gained the
ability to fully transform into a tailed beast, he was inevitably affected by
Ukiki's own dark emotions.
Yeyue: "Thunder Escape!"
Kirabi: "Thunder Escape!"
The two shouted in unison: "Jue Niu Thunder Plow Hot Knife!"
The moment the voice fell, the two of them had already arrived in front of He Feng.
The two men's thick arms were even bigger than He Feng's head. In order to kill He
Feng with one blow, the two deliberately lowered their bodies.
Kisame Kisaki, who is a direct taker of this move, is 195cm tall, while Yozuki and
Kirabi are also 198cm and 192cm tall.
Compared with a few people, it is not an exaggeration to say that He Feng is a
potato. After all, He Feng is only 140cm now.
Looking at the bloody dancer close at hand, Yeyue and Kirabi subconsciously showed
a bit of unbearable expressions on their faces.
It seemed like something was causing trouble, making them unable to bear to hurt
the small, exquisite, cute little girl in front of them.
However, Kumo Gakuin's reckless man is Kumo Gakuin's reckless man after all, and
they will not be affected by such inexplicable emotions.
As a party involved, He Feng also felt doubly unhappy.
In terms of nerve reaction speed alone, He Feng is not as good as Minato. This is
also due to his young age.
In addition, Hefeng subconsciously believed that he would not overturn due to his
abilities such as Flying Thunder God, Yin Seal, Psychic Technique, and Immortal
Mode.
Not to mention the Jue Niu Thunder Plow Hot Knife, even He Feng in Ye Kai dared to
jump in front of it.
After all, the worst case scenario is to fly away like a thunder god.
Therefore, Hefeng was in crisis at this time.
"It's over, I'm going to die." He Feng thought subconsciously, "I hope I can be
reincarnated into a good family in my next life."
However, what He Feng expected did not happen. The moment Yeyue and Qilabi came
into contact with He Feng, He Feng's figure became illusory, and the two
successfully missed He Feng.
【Emergency survival function activated. 】
[Props: One-time Kamui experience card (30 seconds) for automatic use]
He Feng's eyes widened, he didn't expect the system to have this function.
At the same time, He Feng was a little scared, and he almost lost himself.
The emotion of fear came and went quickly. After the emotion dissipated, He Feng
felt angry in his heart.
He has absorbed this lesson and will not waste it again in the future, but the gap
has also been forged.
"Bi, we have to retreat!" Seeing that the attack failed, Ye Yue gave up the idea of
continuing the pursuit. Instead, she pulled Kirabi and retreated quickly.
"You want to run away without leaving anything behind?" He Feng was very angry.
He clapped his hands together, and a blood-red fairy mask appeared on his face.
"Immortal mode!"
Maybe he felt that the immortal mode was not enough, so He Feng formed another
seal.
"Yin seal, solution!"
A chakra comparable to that of the Immortal Mode emerged from He Feng's body.
This is the chakra that Hefeng has accumulated since he learned the Yin Seal. This
time he plans to use it all on these two Yunyin reckless men.
With the blessing of Immortal Mode and Yin Seal, He Feng quickly caught up with the
Yunyin AB combination that escaped.
After seeing the Yunyin AB combination again, He Feng was no longer polite, and all
kinds of magical skills were released by them as if they had no need for chakra.
"Immortal Technique·Dayama Rasengan!"
"Immortal Technique: Triple Fire Dragon Technique!"
"The Immortal Technique·Water Dragon Bullet Technique!"
"Immortal Technique: Tanto Raikiri!"
Facing the unexpectedNinjutsu bombardment, Ye Yue turned around to resist.
"Brother, let me do it!" Kirabi completed the complete tailed beast transformation
at this moment, turning into an eight-tailed bull ghost and intercepting all He
Feng's magic with his body.
"It hurts!" In the mental space, Niu Gui felt a headache.
It would be fine if it were ordinary ninjutsu, but these ninjutsu were all added
with senjutsu chakra, which made him unbearably painful.
Senjutsu Chakra is a six-path special attack, and naturally it is also a tailed
beast's special attack.
"Xiaoba, are you okay?" Kirabi was a little worried.
Even when fighting with Big Brother, Xiaoba never cried out in pain, but this time
Xiaoba's voice was very painful.
"Bi, I'm better. You have to be careful with celestial beings. We tailed beasts are
restrained by celestial beings." Niugui reminded Kirabi.
"Don't worry, I understand."

Chapter 36 Broken arm! Broken horn!

"What's going on!" Yeyue was doubly surprised. If He Feng just now was a new star
that was about to rise in Konoha in his eyes, then in his eyes He Feng now was a
tailless beast belonging to Konoha.
This huge amount of chakra gave him the same feeling as when facing the rampaging
Eight-Tails.
The pressure is a bit too much.
At this time, Yeyue felt like she had been deceived.
He even wanted to pull the ANBU who told him that Scarlet Dancer was ten years old,
out of the Pure Land, point at his nose and ask him: Can you tell me this is the
amount of chakra that a ten-year-old should have? He would believe you if you said
she was Tsunade, an old woman with a perineal seal who pretends to be young!
"Bi, you retreat first, I will cover you!" Yeyue made the decision to take a
fighting stance again.
"Brother Bastard~Brother Stupid~" Kirabi said his mantra while gathering a large
amount of chakra in his mouth.
"Tailed Beast Jade!" A powerful Tailed Beast Jade shot out of the Eight-Tailed
Mouth.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Boom——
He Feng dodged easily, and the tailed beast jade exploded in the forest behind,
making a violent sound.
Qilabi did not give He Feng a chance to breathe. His elder brother was by his side
now and he did not need to worry about accidentally injuring the other party.
So Kirabi raised his head high, and the chakra gathered again to form the Tailed
Beast Jade.
Phew——
Phew——
Phew——
In a short period of time, He Feng was unable to break through the eight-tailed
saturation attack.
He was not stupid enough to use his body to resist the Tailed Beast Jade.
At this moment, Minato also came to support.
Minato's target has been on Yeyue from beginning to end.
"Damn it!" Yeyue gritted her teeth and started fighting Minato again.
"Brother!"
At the moment when Kirabi was stunned, He Feng directly broke through Kirabi's
attack frequency and teleported to Kirabi's head.
The dagger in his hand was filled with violent thunder attribute chakra and magical
chakra. The powerful power caused cracks to appear on the dagger.
"Go to hell!" He Feng stabbed Kirabi, or Eight-Tails, in the forehead with his
short knife.
In fact, although tailed beasts are chakra aggregates, they will still die after
being shot in the head by physical means.
Seeing this, Kirabi quickly dodged. He had no doubt whether this knife could break
through Xiaoba's defense.
Cheng!
In desperation, Kirabi couldn't react very effectively, which resulted in He Feng's
knife, although not fatal, cutting off another corner of the Eight-Tails, and He
Feng's dagger was shattered as a result. .
"Roar!!!" Ushiki roared. As a tailed beast, both of his front horns were cut off.
It was impossible to say he was not angry.
"Xiaoba!" Kirabi called Niugui worriedly.
However, Niu Gui did not respond, but punched He Feng vigorously.
At the same time, he used his eight tails to attack He Feng.
After Yi Dao failed to understand the eight-tailed life, He Feng had already begun
to form seals on his hands.
"The art of multiple shadow clones!"
He Feng didn't invest too much chakra in Shadow Branch.
The next second, He Feng and all the shadow clones rolled up the balls.
"Immortal magic, super large jade spiral pill!"
"Immortal Technique・Super Large Jade Spiral Multi-Ren Pill"
For a time, the sky was full of meatballs, which directly blocked the view above
Niu Gui's head.
In the original timeline, the Nine-Tailed Nine Lamas couldn't resist Naruto's move,
and now the Eight-Tailed Gyuuki naturally can't resist He Feng's move.
Countless balls exploded on Ushiuki's body, and the light they emitted was not
inferior to that of the tailed beast jade.
"Bi!" Yeyue was very anxious when she saw this. She even ignored Namikaze Minato
and ran towards Kirabi's position.
After the light dissipated, Kirabi lay unconscious on the ground covered with
injuries.
Yeyue quickly picked up Kirabi on the ground and left the place without looking
back.
"Don't underestimate me!" Namikaze Minato pursued with the Sword of Ninja Love.
At this time, Yeyue did not have the strength that she would have more than ten
years later. The defensive power of the Thunder Release Chakra could only be
regarded as excellent, and she could not ignore Namikaze Minato's attack.
Therefore, Yeyue's injuries became more and more serious.
At this moment, He Feng suddenly pulled out his only remaining dagger from behind
and injected a large amount of chakra into it, causing the dagger to make an
explosive sound.
"Immortal Technique·Thunder Thousand Birds Sword!"
Hefeng pointed his dagger at Yeyue, who was tired of running for his life. Seeing
this, Minato Namikaze cooperated to intercept Yeyue.
"!" Yeyue felt the alarm bell ringing in her heart. Unable to look back and see
where the attack came from, she could only follow instinct and dodge.
After an instant, most of Yeyue's leftThe arm was cut off directly by He Feng's
dagger.
Ye Yue used Thunder Release to stop the bleeding while escaping.
As for the arm that fell to the ground, he couldn't pick it up.
"Okay He Feng, no need to chase anymore." Minato Namikaze stretched out his hand to
stop He Feng who wanted to pursue.
He Feng looked at Namikaze Minato with some confusion.
Namikaze Minato explained: "We have overfulfilled our mission, not only killing all
Kumogakure's Anbu, but also severely damaging Kumogakure's son of the Third Raikage
and the Eight-Tailed Jinchuuriki. This is enough.
If we continue to chase him, we may not be able to kill him. Even if we do kill
him, Konoha will later face the Third Raikage who has lost his mind. "
As he spoke, Namikaze Minato seemed to have thought of something, with a solemn
expression on his face: "The Third Raikage is a real monster. If Kumogakure
launches a war against Konoha, there is nothing to be afraid of, but if the Third
Raikage appears on the battlefield If so, that would be bad.
If you have to describe it, Hefeng how easy it is for you to kill those genin and
chunin, how easy it is for the Third Raikage to kill ordinary jounin. "
Hefeng nodded. He had never doubted the strength of the third-generation Raikage Ai
who could fight ten thousand rock ninjas for three days and three nights without
being injured, and finally died of exhaustion.
That kind of monster is not something he can defeat now.
"I understand, Teacher Minato." He Feng said as he picked up Ye Yue's severed arm
from the ground, "But this time we have completely become enemies with Yunyin
Village. They should probably declare war on us."
Namikaze Minato nodded. As the future fourth generation Hokage, Namikaze Minato
naturally has a good view of the overall situation.
"It's nothing. The enmity between Kumogakure and our Konoha is not something that
happened in just one day or two. Kumogakure has been coveting our Konoha territory
a long time ago." Speaking of this, Namikaze Minato remembered a few years ago.
Former Kumogakure's behavior.
From the moment Kumogakure kidnapped Kushina, the relationship between him and
Kumogakure was no longer easy to resolve.
Hefeng nodded, and then used the psychic technique to channel a blank scroll, and
then used the sealing technique to seal Ye Yue's severed arm.
After sealing Ye Yue's severed arm, He Feng turned his attention to the giant horn
that fell aside.
"With the power of the blood of the Third Raikage and the horns of the Eight-Tails,
I believe Master Orochimaru will like this gift I gave him." He Feng thought
happily.
"By the way, Mr. Minato, let me give you some treatment. I also have some knowledge
of palm magic."

Chapter 37 Harvest, exchange for Uchiha bloodline

Although Namikaze Minato is very fast, his chakra is not infinite. Not all attacks
he will use Flying Thunder God to dodge, so it is inevitable that there will be
wounds on his body.
Before Minato Namikaze could respond, He Feng stepped forward and placed his hand
on Minato Namikaze's injured area.
The green fluorescence unique to Palm Senjutsu lit up, and a soft chakra was
exported into Namikaze Minato's body by the wind. In just a few breaths, Namikaze
Minato could feel the itching of the wounds on his body.
This is a sign that the wound is healing.
For the wounds caused in these battles, they can be healed quickly as long as they
do not count the palm magic in the eyes.
After about a minute, He Feng stopped what he was doing.
The obvious stab wound on Namikaze Minato's body caused by Kirabi recovered as
before.
Hefeng nodded and said with satisfaction: "Teacher Minato, you're fine. Let's go
see my brother and Obito."
He Feng did not use Palm Immortal Technique to treat himself, because there were
almost no injuries on his body. In addition, He Feng had the immortal body that had
exploded from Tsunade in the past few years, and his self-healing ability was far
beyond that of ordinary people.
With this in mind, He Feng also opened and checked his system panel.
Although the system panel is very simple, it can be very intuitive to see what
status you are currently in.
【Name: Qimu Hefeng】
【Sex: Male】
[Age: 10 years old]
【Race: Human (Succubus)】
[Items: Wu Yi Lu Qian Jiu Hundred Thousand Liang, Fragments of the Eight Gate
Dunjia Formation (5/8)]
[Level: Shadow (Super Shadow)]
[Abilities: Hatake Sword Technique, Five Escape Mastery, Illusion Mastery, Time and
Space Ninjutsu Mastery, Illusion Resistance, Shiky Bone Forest Immortal Art,
Psychic Art, Intermediate Immortal Body (78%)]
【Favorability:】
He Feng was a little surprised. He hadn't paid special attention to his
favorability for a long time. He would usually turn off the system's favorability
reminder.
Now it seems that He Feng has saved enough for a small goal.
With this in mind, He Feng once again used his mind to control the system and
opened the system mall.
Then Hefeng clicked on the sub-page named [Collection] in the system mall.
[Item: One Magatama Sharingan (with Uchiha bloodline)]
[Price: Favorability]
He Feng was in a good mood and bought a Magatama Sharingan worth 10,000
favorability points.
Watching his good feelings evaporate, Du Hefeng didn't pay too much attention to
it. Saving this thing was nothing more than time-consuming.
Moreover, the favorability has changed from a string of numbers to one's own
strength, which makes He Feng feel more at ease.
Immediately, He Feng felt a warm feeling appear in his eyes, and at the same time,
there was an instinct in his mind, like opening and closing his eyes.
He Feng knew that this controlled the Sharingan switch.
Only people with Uchiha bloodline can open and close the Sharingan at will. If a
non-Uchiha family obtains the Sharingan, they can only keep the eye open
permanently and the Sharingan will always absorb chakra.
In this regard, the mostThe most famous one is Kakashi in the original timeline. He
was originally a genius but was dragged down by the Sharingan to become a copy
ninja.
Soon, Namikaze Minato led Hefeng and Kakashi Obito to meet.
"He Feng!" Kakashi and Obito were very happy after seeing He Feng.
As long as nothing happens to He Feng, everything else is secondary.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

for more novels (166717)join: https://discord.gg/SZxTKASsHq

He Feng also stepped forward and used the Palm Immortal Technique to treat the two
of them one after another.
Both of them were seriously injured. The meaning of killing the Jonin alone cannot
be described in words.
The time He Feng spent treating the two of them was far longer than the time he
spent treating Namikaze Minato.
About half an hour passed before He Feng took back his hands.
"Well, the palm senjutsu is only for treating wounds. Nissan and Obito still need
to take a good rest for a while. Only in this way can they recover as before."
The two nodded, taking He Feng's words very seriously.
"Let's go back to the village quickly. The information on this mission needs to be
reported to the Hokage as soon as possible. Kumogakure has suffered a big loss this
time. Even the future Yondaime has lost an arm. They will not let it go." Minato
Namikaze snapped. He clapped his hands and rushed to the village with the four of
them.
……
The battlefield of the Kingdom of Sichuan.
Konoha camp, command room.
Danzo frowned and sat on the chair. Orochimaru beside him was filled with various
reagents, most of which were antidotes to various toxins.
However, Orochimaru was not a medical ninja after all. As soon as he developed an
antidote, another toxin from Sunagakure had already been developed.
The Konoha ninja also suffered heavy losses due to Sunagakure's poison.
"Orochimaru, how is the research on the antidote this time? If it continues, our
battlefield will need reinforcements from Konoha." Danzo looked gloomy.
In addition to protecting Konoha, the most important thing he came to participate
in the war this time was the reputation of winning the war.
But let alone his good reputation now, it would be nice if those people didn't
scold Danzo behind his back.
Orochimaru slowly put down the prepared reagents in his hands, and first said to
the waiting medical ninjas: "This is the antidote formula for Suna Cryptotoxin. You
can take other medical ninjas to distribute it."
"Okay, Orochimaru-sama." The medical ninja took the formula and nodded, then
quickly left.
"Duanzo, I don't want to question your decision-making during the war. After all,
you are the main commander, but your decision-making is too reckless. Sunagakure
Village is not a small village. They and Konoha belong to the five great ninja
villages. Without you It's so easy to solve." Orochimaru was rude to Danzo.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
Danzo was even more angry when he heard this, but he did not burst out. He just
asked stiffly: "So, if Deputy Commander Orochimaru has any good ideas, just tell me
if you have any."
Orochimaru did not go to see Danzo, but began to form seals.
"Psychic technique." A small white snake was summoned by Orochimaru's psychic
technique.
"Go back to Konoha and tell the old man that Tsunade's support is needed on the
Kawanoguni battlefield. Only she can prepare an antidote to Sunagakure toxin in the
first place."
The little white snake nodded to Orochimaru, and then left at an extremely fast
speed.
As a psychic snake used for reconnaissance to deliver messages, its speed is much
faster than sending ninjas to deliver messages.
Not all Ninja Villages have the Heavenly Sending Technique of Cloud Hidden Village,
which can transmit long-distance information in an instant.
Although Konoha's Flying Thunder Gods all belong to the space-time ninjutsu, long-
distance transmission consumes a huge amount of chakra. Basically, the chakra is
bottomed out after one transmission.
Moreover, the difficulty of learning the art of Flying Thunder God is not something
that ordinary people can learn.
After explaining his method, Orochimaru looked back at Danzo.
"Commander Danzo, we need a wave of victories to boost our morale. Our team has
been defeated and defeated these days, and our morale is almost at the bottom."
"Hmph! We Konoha didn't win, but that doesn't mean those Sunagakure people won.
There was no time when they used poison on me, Konoha ninja, that they didn't
suffer heavy losses."
Danzo snorted and did not agree with Orochimaru's words about repeated defeats and
repeated battles.
In his opinion, it was just a stalemate between the two sides.
Orochimaru was not a coward, he just smiled and said: "Commander Danzo, the lives
of our Konoha ninjas are more valuable than Sunagakure's gold."
"I'm too lazy to argue with you, Orochimaru, no matter what method you use and how
great your victory is, the task of winning the first victory for Konoha is left to
you!"

Chapter 38 Iwagakure is about to enter the game and the furious Kumogakure
Yanyin Village.
Old God Ohnoki was sitting in the office, leisurely browsing the information sent
to him by the ANBU.
"That kid Rasa is a talent. It would be great if the bloodstains like Sand Gold
were Iwagakure's, but he is really young when he dares to attack Konoha as soon as
he becomes Kazekage.
Be motivated! "
Ohnoki kept flipping through the information. Most of the information was about the
war between Konoha and Sunagakure.
But soon, Onoki saw the news that made his eyes widen.
[Reward, Konoha’s Bloody Dancer! ]
The reward list is written by YunyinThe village announced that it had spread
through underground gold exchanges in various countries, and the reward amount was
as high as 300 million taels.
At the bottom of the bounty list are the historical achievements and specific
information of the Scarlet Dancer.
[It is reported that the Scarlet Dancer is a student of the Yellow Flash Wave Feng
Shuimen. She mastered the flying thunder god technique at the age of ten. She once
fought alone against Ye Yue, the son of the Third Raikage of Kumogakure, and
Kirabi, the Eight-Tailed Jinchuuriki, in a 1v2 situation. A corner of the eight
tails cuts off an arm of the night moon]
Ohnoki looked at the hand-painted portrait on the reward list and was filled with
emotion.
Konoha is indeed the cradle of geniuses. In the early years, the Ninja God Senju
Hashirama and the Ninja Shura Uchiha Madara were in charge, suppressing the other
four major Ninja villages.
Later, the God of the Ninja World and the Ninja World Shura broke up. The four
major ninja villages thought they could win the throne of the largest village in
the Ninja World and launched war against Konoha.
Even so, Konoha won with one enemy and many.
This is extremely exaggerated in Ohnoki's opinion.
Today, Konoha's genius has grown again. Whether it is Namikaze Minato or this newly
faked Scarlet Dancer, they are far from being invincible to ordinary people.
Just talking about the art of Flying Thunder God has already put the two of them in
an invincible position.
"Three hundred million taels, Yunyin is really generous, but you have to have the
strength to get these three hundred million taels." Onoki smiled and shook his
head. Yunyin's information may be exaggerated or hidden, but this has nothing to do
with him. what is the relationship.
"That guy, the Third Raikage, is very protective of his shortcomings." Ohnoki
sighed with emotion.
He didn't believe that the Third Raikage would not take revenge against the guy who
chopped off his son's arm.
"In this case, we can attack Kumogakure once. Without the Third Raikage, Kumogakure
can't stop me from dust escape."
"Huangtu, go and inform all the Iwa ninjas to be ready for war and to join the war
anytime and anywhere." Onoki said to Huangtu beside him.
He is determined to train Loess to become the next generation of Tsuchikage, but
his son is too dull. He often has no opinion and will only carry out the tasks
assigned to him.
"Okay father, I'll make arrangements right away." Huang Tu nodded, and then left
Tsuchikage's office.
……
In Yunyin Village.
The Third Raikage Ai looked at Yeyue and Kirabi who fell to the ground and fell
into a coma, and fell into a state of disbelief.
A large amount of chakra burst out from the third generation Raikage Ai's body, and
countless thunder and lightning wrapped around the third generation Raikage Ai's
body, as if telling the third generation Raikage Ai's anger.
"Where are the people in the medical class!" Ai, the third generation Raikage,
suppressed his anger and said in a deep voice.
"The people from the medical team are on their way, and they will be here soon,
Raikage-sama." The third-generation Raikage Ai's confidant said softly from the
side.
"Give way! Give way, everyone!" A rushing voice came from the side, urging the
Kumogakure ninjas who were gathering around.
Almost instantly, the Kumogakure ninjas gave way to a path.
Several medical ninjas carrying stretchers came forward.
After they said respectfully to Lord Raikage, they lowered their heads and moved
Yeyue and Kirabi to the stretcher.
"Master Yeyue and Master Kirabi are seriously injured and need to go to the
hospital for treatment. On the way to the hospital, I will use medical ninjutsu to
help Master Yeyue and Master Kirabi stabilize their injuries." The leading medical
ninja spoke quickly .
At the same time, crystal green light emitted from his hand.
The Third Raikage Ai nodded and did not embarrass the other party.
After the medical ninja left with Yeyue and Kirabi, the Third Raikage Ai ordered
Todai beside him: "Inform the jounin and chuunin in the village to prepare, I will
launch a war against Konoha! Blood debt It must be repaid with blood!”
Although the Third Raikage Ai looks rude and irritable, he usually treats others
very gently, but even gentle people can have bad tempers sometimes.
Dodai knew the Third Raikage very well and knew that once the other party made up
his mind, no one could persuade him, but he still dutifully advised: "Master Ai, if
we attack Konoha with a large army at this time, Iwagakure Village will definitely
be destroyed." They will launch a sneak attack on us."
The Third Raikage Ai also understood this truth in his heart, but he could not
remain indifferent.
"Toutai, you don't need to persuade me anymore. I will not change my goal this
time. The ninjas of Konoha must pay the price for what he has done."
Tudai also knew that he could not persuade the Third Raikage, so he could only
change his words, "Then Raikage-sama might as well wait a little longer, wait until
Yeyue and Kirabi wake up, and learn from them who did it." Wouldn’t it be better?”
This time, the Third Raikage did not refuse, but nodded and said, "Then I'll listen
to you, wait until Yeyue and Kirabi wake up."
……
Mountain cemetery.
The place where Uchiha Madara is.
Listening to the information coming from Black Zetsu, Uchiha Madara nodded with
satisfaction, whether it was the war between Sunagakure and Konoha, Kumogakure's
hatred for Konoha, or the next actions of Iwagakure and Kirigakure. It's all part
of Uchiha Madara's plan.
After all, the jounin team in Konoha was killed by Black Zetsu in the first place,
and had nothing to do with Sunagakure.
However, Madara Uchiha's frame-up of Sunagakure is like mud that fell into his
crotch, which cannot be washed or washed off.
"Sage mode, flying thunder god, and huge chakra that can be compared with tailed
beasts, is that kid Hatake Hefeng only ten years old?" Uchiha Madara was really
shocked by Hatake Hefeng.
Although he has never seen Hatake Hefeng with his own eyes, under his plan he
almost grew up watching Hatake Hefeng. His understanding of Hatake Hefeng even
exceeds that of many people around Hatake Hefeng. ."Ten years old, does Hashirama
have such strength at the age of ten?" Uchiha Madara clearly remembers that he only
opened his eyes when he was twelve years old. When he was ten years old, he was
probably still competing with Hashirama to see who could lose the money. Floating
far away.
"It seems I have to start as soon as possible. If Hatake Hefeng continues to grow,
it will definitely affect my plans in the future."
Uchiha Madara made a decision. He planned to give He Feng a perfect exit in this
ninja war, so as to activate Obito's Mangekyō Sharingan and trick Obito into
contributing to his Eye of the Moon plan.

Chapter 39 New S-level mission

He Feng and others did not rest after returning to Konoha, but followed Namikaze
Minato to the Hokage Building.
Although the specific details of the mission will come to Hiruzen Sarutobi's desk
in writing soon, the information obtained from this mission cannot tolerate any
delay.
Knock knock——
--------------------xxxx--------------------

In the office, Sarutobi Hiruzen was listening to the information sent to him by
Orochimaru's psychic beast. He was about to send someone to notify Tsunade when he
heard a knock on the door.
"Please come in." Hiruzen Sarutobi said calmly.
Namikaze Minato pushed the door open with the three members of the Minato class.
"Hokage-sama, Minato-san has lived up to his mission." Namikaze Minato was the
first to speak.
Sarutobi Hiruzen also stood up after hearing this, "Very good, Minato, Hefeng,
Kakashi and Obito, you are worthy of being my favorite juniors, you have done a
good job.
But Minato, you shouldn’t come to me just because you completed an S mission. Tell
me, what happened during the mission. "
Namikaze Minato organized a conversation, and then Yiwuyishi told Sarutobi Hiruzen
the process of this S-class mission.
Of course, Namikaze Minato was not honest enough to reveal all the information
about Hefeng Obito.
For example, the Rasengan used by He Feng to defeat the Eight-Tails was hidden by
Minato Namikaze. God knows how he felt when he saw that He Feng had created so many
shadow clones and could still roll out pills all over the sky.
It is no exaggeration to say that if Minato had the amount of chakra He Feng had at
that time, he would be able to retain Kumogakure's AB combination alone.
He also briefly described how to cut off one arm of Minato, son of the Third
Raikage.
Even so, Sarutobi Hiruzen was still shocked by the results of Namikaze Minato's
victory.
Each major ninja village has a certain number of spies in other villages, and they
all have a certain degree of understanding of the jounin in the corresponding
village.
Naturally, he knew that the strength of the son of the Third Raikage had exceeded
that of ordinary elite jounin.
"Minato, you gave me a big surprise this time." Sarutobi Hiruzen sighed.
Namikaze Minato said modestly: "Hokage-sama, this is nothing. I can only do it with
the help of He Feng and the others."
"No, this is exactly what should be praised. Minato, you have successfully
demonstrated the strength of Konoha and the will of fire of Konoha."
Namikaze Minato couldn't find anything to say to refute for a moment, so he could
only smile.
Sarutobi Hiruzen added: "But if this happens, the old guy, the Third Raikage, will
not give up. We in Konoha may be facing the situation of the Second Ninja World War
again..."
After Sarutobi Hiruzen said this, there was a long silence.
He Feng just stood aside and watched.
To be honest, he has always had a bad impression of Hiruzen Sarutobi. This includes
his understanding of Hiruzen Sarutobi's actions in his previous life and the
analysis of others, as well as Hiruzen Sarutobi's actions in this life. .
"I hope Sarutobi Hiruzen will not make the decision to hand over the murderer to
keep him safe." He Feng thought silently in his heart.
If Sarutobi Hiruzen really did something stupid, although he would not do anything
to Sarutobi Hiruzen, the ending of Sarutobi Hiruzen would definitely not be good.
After a while, Sarutobi Hiruzen said in a deep voice: "Come here, help me call
Hatake Sakumo and Nara Shikaku."
An ANBU appeared out of thin air, nodded to Hiruzen Sarutobi and then disappeared
again.
Not long after, Hatake Sakumo and Nara Shikaku arrived at the Hokage's office one
after another.
"According to reliable information, Kumogakure Village is eyeing our Konoha and
will launch an attack on Konoha soon. Hatake Sakumo will be appointed as the chief
commander of Konoha's war against Kumogakure, and Nara Shikaku will assist Hatake
Sakumo. Shigeru is the deputy commander of Konoha's war against Kumogakure.
As the main commander during the war, Hatake Sakumo had the right to execute all
decisions. There was no need to inform me of any decision, and he only needed to
submit a report in writing after the end. "
Hearing Sarutobi Hiruzen's words, Hatake Sakumo and Nara Shikaku had no time to be
surprised, and immediately responded respectfully: "Roger that, Hokage-sama!"
Seeing the two of them taking over the duties assigned by him, Sarutobi Hiruzen
looked at Namikaze Minato and others again.
"Minato squad listens to the order! Due to Orochimaru's request for help, an S-
class war mission is now released. A support team composed of Namikaze Minato,
Hefeng, Obito, Kakashi and Tsunade will support the Chikawa River where Konoha and
Sunagakure are fighting. country to support.
Because Team Minato had just completed an S-level mission and needed to rest, they
set off with Tsunade to the battlefield of Kawa no Kuni a few days ago. Due to the
war mission, the contribution and remuneration were calculated at 1.5 times and
were settled together after the war.
"
At this moment, in He Feng's eyes, Hiruzen Sarutobi was standing upright with a
somewhat stooped body. He Feng also somewhat understood why Hiruzen Sarutobi was
appointed as the third generation head of Konoha by Senju Tobirama.
Just this courage to leadThe courage of Konoha Village to engage in multi-front
wars with other countries is worthy of the name of Shinobu Hero.
"Minato's squad is ordered!" Namikaze Minato responded.
Hatake Sakumo on the side looked at his two sons behind Namikaze Minato with
indescribable pride in his heart.
Konoha is his home, and his two sons grew up in Konoha.
No matter what his emotions were, Hatake Sakumo had no hesitation in protecting
Konoha.
"Okay, you can go home and rest, and recharge your batteries so you can complete
the mission better."
Namikaze Minato nodded and was about to leave the Hokage's office with Hefeng and
others.
"He Feng, Kakashi." At this time, Hatake Sakumo stopped a few people.
Several people turned around.
"well done."
Hearing his father's praise, both He Feng and Kakashi felt happy in their hearts.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
Obito on the side felt depressed for a moment, but he recovered in the next second.
He thought of his grandma. If Obito went home and told grandma the news that he had
completed the S-level mission, grandma would definitely praise him.
At this time, Hatake Sakumo also called Obito with a smile: "Obito, you too, I am
relieved that Hefeng and Kakashi can be your teammates."
Hearing this, Obito quickly patted his chest and said, "Don't worry, Uncle Sakumo!
As long as I, Uchiha Obito, are here, no one can hurt Hefeng and Kakashi!"
Hatake Sakumo nodded: "I believe in you, Uchiha's little genius."
After speaking, Hatake Sakumo looked at Namikaze Minato again. He had always
noticed this junior, Hatake Sakumo, who was not weaker than him in strength:
"Minato, Hefeng and Kakashi leave it to you. .”
Namikaze Minato nodded, "Don't worry, I will bring the three of them back safely,
but Sakumo-senpai and Shikaku should be more careful. The Third Raikage will most
likely join the battle in person."
After leaving the Hokage Building, Namikaze Minato briefly explained to the three
of them and then returned home.
After seeing the tragic situation of the Eight-Tails, Namikaze Minato made up his
mind that he must do his best to intercept all enemies outside the Leaf Village.
Only in this way can Kushina avoid fighting like Kirabi.
Hefeng took Kakashi to the Senju Clan land. Since he and Sister Tsunade were going
to the battlefield of the Kingdom of Kawa tomorrow, it wouldn't be a big deal to go
directly to the Senju Clan land to find him.
As for Obito, he returned to the Uchiha clan to meet his grandmother.
He may not be able to return to Konoha for a long time on this mission. He doesn't
want the elderly at home to worry too much about him.

Chapter 40 Tsunade’s restraint, He Feng is still young

After Hefeng arrived at the Qianju tribe, he saw Qianju teaching Shizune and Lin
physical skills.
In many cases, especially on the battlefield, medical ninjas are the first targets
that ninjas from other countries target.
For ninjas from other countries, killing ten chunin on the battlefield is not as
good as killing one medical ninja.
Medical ninjas often have little ability to protect themselves after being targeted
and left alone. This is also a major drawback of medical ninjas.
Among the known medical ninjas, only Tsunade was alone and no one dared to do
anything to her.
All these reasons are attributed to Tsunade's strong strength.
With the blessing of strange power and the art of hundreds of heroes, Tsunade has
the strength to be invincible against the Third Raikage in a short period of time.
Now, Tsunade is planning to pass on the strange power she possesses to her only
disciple.
As for how much Tsunade the other party can learn, I don’t know, but it’s better to
know a little bit than nothing.
"Although strange power is called the ability of the Senju clan, its principle is
nothing more than precise control of chakra." Tsunade guided the two while giving a
demonstration for them.
"Every medical ninja has precise chakra control ability, why can't those people
learn strange powers?"
While speaking, Tsunade spread her fingers, and with a little force, she easily dug
her fingers into the stone and lifted it up.
"Because they don't regard themselves as ninjas. Apart from the medical ninjutsu
they master, those people's combat effectiveness is not even as good as a genin.
So while I’m teaching you medical ninjutsu, I’ll also ask you to practice physical
skills. I don’t expect you two to have He Feng’s combat prowess, but a certain
amount of self-protection ability is definitely needed. "
After finishing her words, Tsunade gently threw the stone into the sky. After it
fell, she simply waved her fist, and the big stone exploded.
"Sister Tsunade, I'm back." He Feng's voice was not loud, but it fell clearly into
Tsunade's ears.
Hearing this, Tsunade turned her head suddenly and saw the cute and cute He Feng.
She stepped forward and rubbed He Feng's smooth white hair with her hands, pinched
He Feng's jade-like face, and finally checked around He Feng for any injuries
before nodding with satisfaction, "Not bad." , Xiao Hefeng, you protect yourself
very well."
All the ninjutsu that Tsunade taught He Feng was to improve He Feng's life-saving
ability. Only in this way could she feel at ease.
"Sister Tsunade, I am already a grown-up child." He Feng muttered, as if he was
protesting against Tsunade's behavior.
It would be okay if there were no other people, but now Kakashi, Lin and Shizune
were all nearby. Tsunade's inspection would inevitably make He Feng a little
ashamed.
No one would put their hands inside their clothes to check for wounds!
That is to say, He Feng is still young now. If he were a year or two older, he
really wouldn't be able to withstand Tsunade's inspection.
Tsunade was not annoyed, she just smiled and pinched He Feng's little face: "You
and your TsunadeMy sister also told me that I should remember to warm my bed at
night. "
He Feng had nothing to say and could only change the topic.
As for continuing to protest and saying that I don't warm the bed, Hefeng really
can't do it.
Tsunade likes He Feng, and He Feng doesn't like Tsunade.
As a succubus, He Feng still likes to stick to Tsunade.
"Sister Tsunade, Mr. Orochimaru has sent a request for support on the front line.
Our Minato class and you are now arranged by the Hokage to go to the battlefield of
Kawa no Kuni for support. We will leave early tomorrow morning."
Tsunade was stunned for a moment, then seemed to be thinking about something, and
said softly: "The battlefield of Kawanoguni... If you need my support, it should be
the poison of Sunagakure Village, right? Has the poison of that old woman Chiyo
become so powerful? Not even Orochimaru can solve it.
Isn’t it just a support mission? What I will say tomorrow morning is, Tsunade-san,
I miss you very much. "
While speaking, Tsunade suddenly noticed Kakashi standing beside him with his arms
crossed.
Tsunade knew that He Feng had an older brother, but for various reasons it was not
until now that Tsunade met Kakashi for the first time.
However, there is a big difference between He Feng and He Feng. He has short white
hair and a black mask... Well, he also likes to pretend to be cool. It seems that
he will attract many young girls in the future. Maybe he is very flirtatious. My
Xiaohefeng is better.
Looks so cute.
With that said, Tsunade rubbed He Feng's head again.
"Kakashi, right? As Xiao Hefeng's brother, you can't be too weak. Do you have any
ninjutsu you want to learn? I happen to be teaching Shizune and Lin. I can teach
you by the way."
Kakashi was a little surprised when he heard this. He didn't believe that Tsunade,
one of the three ninjas of Konoha, would teach him ninjutsu for no reason. It
seemed that he was taking advantage of his younger brother again.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Kakashi thought well, but the next second he stopped thinking so.
"But I also have conditions." Tsunade smiled mysteriously, "But it won't be too
much. Anyway, if you agree to my conditions, I will teach you a ninjutsu, how about
it?"
Kakashi said with some confusion: "Tsunade-sama, I don't know what the conditions
are."
"Take off your mask and let me take a look."
Kakashi: "!!!"
To be honest, Kakashi refused when he first heard this condition. Growing up, he
would only take off his mask when sleeping at home at night, and he would wear it
even when eating. It can be said that the mask is Kakashi's bottom line.
But after seeing the expectant look in He Feng's eyes, Kakashi gave up.
After Kakashi took off his mask, both Tsunade, Shizune and Nohara Rin all showed
expressions of disbelief.
They looked at He Feng blankly, and then at Kakashi.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
"Eh!!!" Shizune and Nohara Rin exclaimed.
Tsunade was also a little surprised: "They look exactly the same, but their
temperaments are completely different. It's amazing. It's amazing."
"Okay, I just happen to be teaching Shizune and Lin how to master strange powers.
Kakashi, you should follow suit. This is something He Feng has already mastered."
"Okay, Tsunade-sama!"
Since he had just completed the task, Kakashi did not participate in the learning
of strange powers immediately, but was exercising his chakra control on the side.
He Feng sat obediently on Tsunade's lap, letting Tsunade handle it easily.
The place where Tsunade lives is her great-grandfather's home. As the patriarch of
the Senju clan, the house naturally has more than one bedroom.
Kakashi was arranged by Tsunade in a secondary bedroom in the house.
Because He Feng had returned, Shizune and Lin did not sleep with Tsunade, but slept
in another secondary bedroom.
In the master bedroom, He Feng fully fulfilled his obligation to warm the bed.
Feeling Tsunade's hot body temperature, Hefeng's heart was filled with waves.
At this time, Tsunade suddenly said in surprise: "Ah, He Feng has really become a
big boy!"
He Feng suddenly felt ashamed, bit his lip and said shyly: "Sister Tsunade."
Tsunade laughed and said, "Okay, I won't tease you anymore. It's late at night and
I have a mission tomorrow. Go to sleep."
He Feng nodded slightly, hummed softly, then suppressed the turmoil in his heart
and slowly fell asleep.
He Feng fell asleep quickly, but Tsunade had some insomnia.
"How could I have thoughts about Xiao Hefeng? He is me..." Tsunade murmured in her
heart.
To Tsunade, He Feng is like a ripe peach, tempting Tsunade, the 'Sun Wukong', to
pick it every moment.
Tsunade didn't know when she could control her impulse, so she could only keep
hinting to herself: "He Feng is still young..."

Chapter 41 Departing from the Country of Sichuan

Early the next morning, Hefeng slowly woke up in Tsunade's soft embrace.
He carefully got out of it, and then woke up Kakashi, Nohara, and Shizune one after
another.
Although Sarutobi Hiruzen did not arrange for Nohara Rin and Shizune to participate
in this mission that day, as Tsunade's disciples, the two would naturally not stay
in Konoha.
After waking everyone up, He Feng returned to the room.
"Sister Tsunade, it's time to gather, it's time to get up." He Feng shook Tsunade
back and forth with his hands.
In response, Tsunade just closed her eyes and waved her hands, as if she hadn't
slept enough.
Of course, it’s not Tsunade’s fault, after all, what happened to her last nightIt
was like a psychological and physical war for Tsunade.
If Tsunade wins the war physically, He Feng will inevitably be 'eaten'.
Obviously, Tsunade won.
The price paid is of course insomnia.
Looking at Tsunade who was lying in bed in front of him, He Feng took a deep
breath, and then said softly in a soft tone:
"Sister Tsunade, if we can't afford it anymore, we will go by ourselves. Sister
Tsunade doesn't want to see me go to the battlefield of Kawa no Kuni alone. I heard
that the battlefields of ninjas are all meat grinders, so I can just use ninjutsu.
A lot of people could die, and I don’t know if I, with my small body, can come
back.”
As expected, after hearing He Feng's words, Tsunade suddenly sat up from the bed,
then quickly finished washing and put on her clothes.
After Tsunade put on her clothes, she patted He Feng's back with her hand, "It's
time to go, little He Feng, what are you waiting for?"
He Feng's face was speechless, but there was some warmth in his heart.
The more Tsunade was like this, the higher He Hefeng's status in her heart was, and
the more he cared about him.
"Minato-sensei has just arrived, let's go." He Feng had already sensed Namikaze
Minato's chakra outside the door, and immediately said to Tsunade.
Hearing this, Tsunade arranged her clothes again and led He Feng out of the door.
"Tsunade-senpai." Namikaze Minato nodded to Tsunade.
As Jiraiya's apprentice, there is nothing wrong with Namikaze Minato calling
Tsunade "senpai".
Tsunade nodded, and took out the authority of the Sannin and glanced at everyone
present, "Okay, let's set off now."
……
Within the Kingdom of Rain.
Danzo led a group of root ninjas to secretly enter the Country of Rain. After a
long journey, they finally arrived at the Ninja Village of the Rain Country,
Amegakure Village.
Danzo is very conceited. He does not trust Orochimaru and Tsunade who will come to
support him.
Therefore, Danzo decided to go out to find allies, and the ally he was looking for
was none other than Sansho Hanzo, who was famous as a demigod during the Second
Ninja War.
Danzo, Hanzo's old rival, believes that there is no permanent hatred between
people. Although during the Second Ninja World War, the major ninja villages used
the land of the Land of Rain as their battlefield, many people from the Land of
Rain died as a result. But Danzo believes that he can still form an alliance with
Hanzo as long as there are enough benefits.
"Who is it! This is the Hidden Rain Village, and no one else is allowed to enter!"
An Rain ninja appeared in front of Danzo, looking at him warily.
Especially after noticing the Konoha forehead protectors on the heads of several
people around Danzo, I felt even more vigilant.
"I'm Nogiha's Hokage advisor Shimura Danzo, go and tell Hanzo Sanshouyu that Danzo
is here." Danzo looked at the rain ninja with an unhappy face and said coldly.
The rain ninja naturally noticed Danzo's expression, but he didn't pay too much
attention to it.
"Then you stay here and don't leave. If you enter the Amegakure Village without
permission, you will be regarded as an enemy by Amegakure!" The Amegakure reminded
Danzo and left directly.
While leaving, he was also very proud in his heart.
"Hmph, what's so great about Konoha's Hokage advisor? In our Amegakure Village, we
still have to abide by the rules of Amegakure Village."
"..."
Soon, the Rain Ninja came to the tallest tower in Yunyin Village.
Hanzo was working there, handling various affairs in Yuyin Village.
"Lord Hanzo, there is a group of people outside Amegakure Village who claim to be
Konoha's Hokage Advisor Shimura Danzo and want to see Lord Hanzo." The Amegakure
knelt down on one knee, his expression full of respect and admiration.
Hanzo put down his pen and raised his head with interest.
"Oh? Shimura Danzo of Konoha? How could he have time to come to my Amegakure
Village if he doesn't go to command the war with Sunagakure Village." Hanzo
murmured softly, with a rough guess in his mind.
"Very well, just go and bring Danzo here to see me."
"Yes! Master Hanzo!" The rain ninja nodded and then left the central tower.
"..."
Danzo frowned slightly, as if he was not satisfied with Hanzo's arrogance.
What does Hanzo mean? Let yourself go to see him? Rather than him coming to find
himself? I, Konoha's Hokage advisor, don't have as much dignity as him, the leader
of Amegakure Village who is not even worthy of being called a Kage?
Although Danzo was unhappy, he still nodded.
"Okay, then you can take me to meet Sanshouyu Hanzo."
With that said, Danzo was about to lead the roots behind him.
The rain ninja did not move. He focused his gaze on the root ninja behind Danzo and
said calmly: "Master Hanzo only asked me to take Master Danzo alone. The others did
not obtain Master Hanzo's permission."
"You!" Danzo was furious, what happened to this person? Can't you see how easily
every one of us here could kill you? The reason why I don't kill you is just to
give face to that old guy Hanzo, who do you think you are!
"That's all, you guys just wait for me in the Rain Hidden Village." Danzo waved his
hand and secretly remembered this Rain Ninja in his heart.
The rain ninja still didn't move.
"If you want to say that my subordinates can't even enter the Amegakure Village,
then Hanzo and I have nothing to talk about. You Amegakure Village should be
prepared to face the wrath of Konoha!" Danzo was serious this time. Angry.
If this rain ninja nodded, Danzo would ask his subordinates to remove the
opponent's head in the next second.
With Danzo's leader, it would be a big fight to attack Sunagakure Village! What's
the harm in hitting another Yuyin Village!
"No, please come with me, Danzo-sama." The rain ninja still didn't push forward,
turned around and led Danzo toIn the central tower.
As for the few roots, they found a hidden place to stay next to the central tower.
In the central tower.
Hanzo stopped what he was doing and raised his head to look at Danzo, who had a
sharp gaze in front of him.
Although Danzo suffered some injuries in the early years, he had not been
transformed by Orochimaru's Hashirama cells. Even the Sharingan only had one in the
right eye that was wrapped in a bandage.
Danzo does have some Sharingan inventory, but due to the gradual estrangement
between Danzo and Orochimaru, it is of little use.
He would not use the Sharingan he had worked so hard to obtain for research by
Orochimaru who no longer cooperated with him.
"Danzo, if you don't fight your Sunagakure, why did you come to mine my Amagakure?"

Chapter 42 Orochimaru’s cold joke

"Hanzo, join me and send troops to Sunagakure Village. With your poison and
Konoha's army, you and I can completely wipe out Sunagakure Village together.
Your Amegakure Village is short of land, but our Konoha land is rich. After
attacking Sunagakure Village, I, Konoha, can take nothing from the land of
Sunagakure Village, but you Amegakure only need to pay me Konoha a certain amount
of money every year.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

No matter what, this is a sure-profit deal no matter what. I believe that Sanshouyu
Hanzo, as the demigod of the ninja world, also has the intention to expand the
territory of Hidden Rain Village and even the Kingdom of Rain. "
Danzo said emphatically that he did not believe that Hanzo would disagree with the
conditions he proposed.
"Oh? You Konoha can't defeat Sunagakure alone, so you want me, Amegakure, to go
with you to deal with that puppet old woman? What you Danzo says now sounds nice.
If you really attack Sunagakure, you won't have this tone. Well, who doesn’t know
your reputation as Danzo’s Darkness in the Ninja World?”
Although Hanzo was very moved by Danzo's proposal, he still had his concerns. Even
if he cooperated with Danzo, he would not be able to devote himself wholeheartedly
to the war, not to mention that Danzo was a very sinister person.
Hanzo would not believe that a pie would fall from the sky out of thin air.
If Danzo could convince him with just a few words, his life would have been in vain
all these years.
"There is no need for me, Danzo, to explain to others what I do. As for the name
"Darkness of the Ninja World", it is just a slander from some people with ulterior
motives." Danzo waved his hand, looking righteous and awe-inspiring.
"Hanzo, I believe that as a demigod, you definitely have the ambition to expand
outward, and I also need the victory and even the occupation of Sunagakure Village
this time to support me in becoming the Fourth Hokage of Konoha. Your cooperation
with me will only lead to You have to make a profit, not a loss.”
In order to cooperate with Hanzo, Danzo made a bet and revealed the biggest purpose
of his trip.
Compared with becoming Hokage, defeating Sunagakure and protecting Konoha can only
be ranked second in Danzo's heart.
When Hanzo heard this, he also pondered for a moment.
He also agreed with Danzo's words. If it weren't for the emerging force in
Amegakure Village, he might actually have brought Amegakure Village into the war.
Danzo can be said to be a mature man, and his life has not been in vain for so many
years. Looking at Hanzo's expression, he knows that the other party already has
some intentions for his proposal.
He immediately asked: "Hanzo, if you, Yuyin, have anything to do, you can tell me.
As our ally, I am naturally obligated to help you solve some problems."
Hanzo sighed and said slowly to Danzo: "There are indeed some things going on in
Yuyin Village. This matter started a few years ago..."
In this way, Hanzo told Danzo about the emergence and fame of the Akatsuki
organization.
To this day, the Akatsuki organization has achieved certain results in persuading
the Kingdom of Rain and the surrounding small countries to fight internal wars.
More and more people agree with the aspirations of the leader of the Akatsuki
organization, Yahiko, and choose to join the Akatsuki organization.
Seeing the Akatsuki organization growing bigger and bigger in Yuyin Village, Hanzo
also noticed the other party. After some understanding, Hanzo was surprised by the
purity of the Akatsuki organization and saw the shadow of his young self in the
Akatsuki organization.
Therefore, Hanzo did not take the initiative to stop the development of the
Akatsuki organization. On the contrary, he showed favor to several leaders of the
Akatsuki organization.
But as time went by, Hanzo gradually became worried. He was worried about whether
the Akatsuki organization would stick to its original idea. He was worried about
whether the Akatsuki organization would point the finger at him, the demigod of the
ninja world. He was also worried about what he was currently doing. The
achievements were stolen by the Akatsuki organization.
Of course, Hanzo is just worried at the moment, and he has no intention of killing
the Akatsuki organization.
If possible, he would prefer that everyone in the Akatsuki organization join him
instead of being independent from Yuyin Village.
Only in this way can he feel at ease.
Danzo snorted coldly as he listened to Hanzo's story about the Akatsuki
organization.
He said with a look of disdain: "Hanzo, ask yourself, does anyone really believe
that communication between people can build a bridge to peace? Do you really
believe that people can understand each other and see true peace?
Don't be fooled by the appearance of the Akatsuki organization. It is precisely
because of your kindness to them and your yearning for true peace that they
fabricated such lies to confuse you and lower your vigilance.
Look at the current Akatsuki organization. How many people in the entire Amegakure
Village are truly loyal to you, and how many people have joined the Akatsuki
organization and are loyal to Yahiko, the leader of the Akatsuki organization.
You still can’t understand, Hanzo! "
Danzo walked to the window and pointed at the buildings below while tempting Hanzo.
"This is your Amegakure Village, the Amegakure Village that you protected during
the Second Ninja War. You really hope that Amegakure Village will fall intoAt the
hands of a group of conspirators? "
Hanzo stood up from his desk and unconsciously came to Danzo's side, overlooking
the Amegakure Village with Danzo.
Looking at the buildings in front of him, Hanzo suddenly remembered the scene
during the Second Ninja War.
"Maybe what you said is right, Danzo." Hanzo's voice sounded faintly.
He didn't want to think about this before, because both he and Yahiko, the leader
of the Akatsuki organization, were from Yuyin Village, and the leader of the
Akatsuki organization behaved in front of him to his satisfaction.
But now that Danzo said this, Hanzo began to murmur in his heart.
"I will help you solve the hidden danger of the Xiao Organization, and it will not
be too late to start our cooperation in the future."
Hanzo shook his head, "No, I will give the Akatsuki organization a chance. As long
as they agree to join me, I will not touch the Akatsuki organization.
Danzo, please go back first. I will contact you after I finish solving the problem
with the Akatsuki organization. "
Hearing this, Danzo wanted to subconsciously reply: Hanzo, you will regret it, but
in the next second Danzo realized that Hanzo Hanzo was not Hiruzen Sarutobi, so he
could only keep these words in his heart.
He nodded and said: "Yes, Hanzo, if there is any inconvenience for you to come
forward, you can send someone to contact me and I will help you solve it.
Of course, the cooperation between you and me is time-limited, otherwise it would
be a bit redundant for you to come to support me after I lead the Konoha army to
defeat Sunagakure. "
Hanzo was not angry when he heard Danzo's merciless reminder, "I know, you don't
need to remind me about this kind of thing. I will solve the Akatsuki
organization's affairs as soon as possible."
……
"Orochimaru, it's not like you to be beaten so badly by Sunagakure!" Tsunade looked
at Orochimaru who was sitting on the chair, looking up and down his body.
She was very surprised at the slightly tired Orochimaru Tsunade in front of her.
"Teacher, thank you for your hard work." He Feng appeared behind Orochimaru and
massaged Orochimaru's shoulders with his hands to relax him.
Orochimaru was very pleased with He Feng's massage. Even though he was a little
tired, he rarely started joking with Tsunade.
"There is no way, Commander-in-Chief Danzo has put in too much effort, so naturally
I have to work harder."

Chapter 43: Detoxify and double your favorability

After a brief chat with Orochimaru, Tsunade stopped chatting and picked up the
various reagents on Orochimaru's desk.
"Orochimaru, tell me the current stage of the poison you are researching on that
old woman Chiyo.
Hefeng, Lin, and Zhenyin, the three of you go to see the wounded who were sent off
from the battlefield. If you encounter any injuries that cannot be solved, try your
best to treat them. I will be there later. "
Since Tsunade brought Lin and Shizune to the battlefield, she didn't intend to let
them stay like this.
There is always a time for young eagles to fly. Lin and Shizune have been learning
by her side for so many years but have not yet mastered it. Now is a good
opportunity.
Hefeng and the other three nodded, and then under the guidance of the Konoha
ninjas, they went to where the wounded were.
"Minato-sensei, what are we going to do?" Kakashi looked at Namikaze Minato aside.
He also wanted to contribute to Konoha, instead of staying at the headquarters
doing nothing.
Orochimaru licked his lips and said with a smile: "You two just need to adapt to
the environment first. The war is one wave after another, and it does not stop when
it starts. When Sunagakure's attack starts again, you two The little guy can help.”
The two nodded, still respecting Orochimaru, the Sannin of Konoha and He Feng's
teacher.
The medical department was placed at the very back of the battlefield because it
was filled with wounded and medical ninjas.
Following the guidance of the Konoha ninjas, He Feng and the other three arrived
here quickly.
Opening the curtain, what came into view were Konoha ninjas with various injuries,
sitting or lying down, and medical ninjas who never stopped and still couldn't take
care of anything.
Some people could see deep signs of poisoning at a glance. If Orochimaru hadn't
been researching the antidote, the number of these wounded might have been reduced
by half.
Although Konoha has specially trained medical ninjas because of Tsunade's proposal,
the time and money required to train a medical ninja are far more than ordinary
ninjas, so the number of medical ninjas has not been able to increase.
In addition, the war with Sunagakure Village is only in the Kingdom of Kawa, not
even the Kingdom of Fire, so Konoha's resource investment will naturally not be too
much.
This also leads to the shortage of medical ninjas.
"Tsunade-sama has arrived for support and is researching a new antidote for
everyone. We are Tsunade-sama's disciples. Don't worry, your injuries will be cured
soon." He Feng stood at the door and gathered a little in his throat. Chakra,
although the sound was not loud, it was clearly transmitted to everyone's ears.
Hearing this, the wounded man who was already a little numb and desperate also had
a light in his eyes.
"Lin, Zhenyin, you will be busy next time." He Feng said to the two girls beside
him.
The two nodded one after another, glanced at everyone present, and then joined this
war without gunpowder in accordance with the principle of first rescuing the
emergency and then rescuing the injured.
He Feng was also unambiguous. He bit his fingers and formed seals with his hands.
"Psychic art!"
A live dragon the size of two people was channeled.
"Sir, I'm sorry to trouble you."
"It doesn't matter, Xiao Hefeng."
As he said that, the living dragon began to split, and one landed on He Feng's
shoulder and absorbed He Feng's chakra.
The remaining clones more or less landed on each wounded person, passing on He
Feng's chakra.
"Please don't worry, Mr. Lively will help you."Treat and stabilize the injury. "He
Feng's voice is soft and calm, making people feel at ease just by listening to it.
While He Feng was transmitting chakra through the living dragon, he was not idle
either.
He quickly came to a ninja who had lost one leg and one arm.
"Please don't worry, I'm here to help you." He Feng's hand lit up with green
fluorescence and placed it on the injured area.
The man looked at He Feng in front of him, and the uneasiness and hesitation in his
heart seemed to have subsided a bit.
"Is this an angel..." He murmured in his heart, He Feng's young and determined face
seemed to be silently encouraging him.
【Trigger critical strike! 】
[Favorability from Yamanaka Ishino +10]
【Acquire advanced mental strength enhancement】
After the critical hit was triggered by his favorability, He Feng immediately felt
the increase in mental power on him.
At this time, the original one-magatama Sharingan showed faint signs of evolving
into a second-magatama.
When Uchiha people lose a loved one, or feel pain due to their own disappointment,
a special chakra will surge out of their brains, acting on the optic nerve, causing
changes in the eyes, thereby making the Sharingan move higher. Evolution occurs at
level one.
This is one way for the Sharingan to evolve, but it's not the only way.
For the Sharingan, long-term cultivation with a large amount of mental power can
also evolve the Sharingan, and such evolution is also beneficial.
Compared to the former, after the Sharingan evolves, the whole person's temperament
will change drastically due to strong emotional stimulation. The latter will be
relatively peaceful, and the effect on improving eye power will be significantly
stronger than the former.
"There is such a good thing." He Feng sighed in his heart, and at the same time,
the movements of his hands became more agile.
"Okay, you're fine now. Thank you for your contribution to protecting Konoha." He
Feng gently stroked the other party's injured area and thanked him from the bottom
of his heart.
He has long regarded Konoha as his home for so many years, and he also has a sense
of identification with Konoha in his heart. He naturally respects these ninjas who
participated in the war to protect Konoha from invasion by other countries.
"Konoha is also my home, and this is what I should do." Yamanaka Ishino smiled from
the bottom of his heart. He heard what he wanted to hear most - thanks from the
juniors in the same village.
"Yeah." He Feng nodded, and then came to another more seriously injured ninja
again.
The other party had a very serious stab wound on his body. The skin near the wound
had begun to turn black and his whole body was weak. This was an obvious sign of
poisoning.
"This is Tsunade-sama's special detoxification pill. It can delay the spread of
toxins in your body. I will help you eat it and you will feel better." He Feng took
out an antidote pill from his ninja bag and said Pass it to the mouth of the
wounded man in front of you.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

He Feng's safety has always been Tsunade's biggest worry, so Tsunade will teach He
Feng some life-saving ninjutsu whenever possible, such as Yin seals, the art of
creating and regenerating hundreds of heroes, and fairy arts, etc. Tsunade Hands
are never hidden.
In addition, Tsunade will also use her long-term medical ninja experience to
prepare special detoxification pills, military food pills and other emergency
supplies for He Feng.
This time, the things Tsunade prepared for He Feng came in handy.
"Next, I will remove the necrotic flesh and blood from the wound and remove some of
the organs in your body that have been eroded by toxins. But you don't need to
worry. After the debridement, I will use the Palm Immortal Technique to help you
recover." He Feng said softly. explained.
"I understand, please feel free to do it boldly, I believe you." Akimichi Takuma
said extremely weakly.
After he finished saying this, he passed out.
【Trigger critical strike! 】
[Favorability +10 from Takuma Akimichi]
【Acquire advanced Yang attribute chakra control】

Chapter 44 Uchiha Madara takes action

Akimichi Takuma, Yamanaka Ishino and Nara Tsunemaru have been teammates since they
graduated from the ninja school. The combination of Ino Shikacho allows them, who
were originally in the lower reaches of the jounin, to face the elite jounin, but
they often walk by the river without getting wet shoes.
This time they stumbled when faced with Sunagakure's elite Jonin puppet master and
several Chuunin.
Nara Tsunemaru died, Yamanaka Ishino had his legs and arms broken, and even
Akimichi Takuma was stabbed in the back by a poisonous puppet for covering the
retreat of his teammates.
If He Feng hadn't arrived in time, Akimichi Takuma wouldn't have been able to
persist in Tsunade's research on the new antidote.
He Feng is very serious about Qiu Daotaku's healing.
He first used a chakra hand knife to carefully cut off the eroded and blackened
flesh and blood on Akimichi Takuma's back. At the same time, the living snake was
constantly transmitting He Feng's chakra to maintain his vital signs.
"This can't continue like this. His internal organs have also begun to become
necrotic due to the erosion of toxins." He Feng looked solemn, "Although I haven't
fully mastered it yet, this is the only way I can do it."
With that said, Hefeng calmed down and began to gather the natural energy around
him, and the immortal facial makeup also appeared.
"The art of extracting minor troubles!" He Feng stretched out his right hand, and
five threads composed of chakra sank into Akimichi Takuma's internal organs.
This move was learned by He Feng from the many ninjutsu scrolls given to him by
Tsunade, but he only learned a little bit about it. Without the Sage Mode's bonus
to all attributes of He Feng, He Feng would not be able to use this move. .
That is to say, after He Feng entered the immortal mode, the chakra absorbed and
transmitted to everyone through the living snake also included some magical chakra.
"It feels so warm and soft." All treated by He FengAnyone who has recovered can
feel the energy contained in this magical chakra, and their hearts are filled with
gratitude to He Feng.
For a moment, He Feng's system panel showed a flash of favorability.
Rewards are triggered one after another, expanding He Feng's potential. Although it
requires a qualitative leap like the Ten-tails to advance from the super shadow
level of Senju Hashirama Uchiha Madara to the six levels, but after the super
shadow level There are also gaps between them.
Just like Uchiha Madara can never defeat Senju Hashirama.
The rewards He Feng received all increased He Feng's upper limit. If He Feng was
allowed to continue to grow, even the Susanata Buddha would be impossible.
"Okay, all the toxins in the body have been extracted." He Feng stopped the art of
extracting minor diseases in his hand, and turned into the palm celestial art to
repair Akimichi Takuma's wounds.
Under He Feng's powerful medical ninjutsu, Akimichi Takuma quickly turned the
corner.
While He Feng was busy, Tsunade finally analyzed the toxin developed by Chiyo and
quickly prepared the corresponding antidote.
"Orochimaru, this is the antidote. Please tell me to go down. I'm going to the
medical department to have a look." Tsunade stood up from the chair and gave up her
position to Orochimaru.
Orochimaru licked his lips and said with a smile: "Go, Tsunade. With you here, we
can also prepare to counterattack Sunagakure."
Tsunade nodded and then strode away.
Arriving at the medical department, Tsunade saw two disciples, He Feng and Nohara
Lin Shizune, who were busy in front of the wounded.
She did not warn the three of them out loud, but signaled them to be silent while
she walked to the wounded who had been treated by the three to check.
"Unconsciously, the medical ninjutsu of the three little guys has become so
powerful. It's just that Shizune and Lin are still young and don't have enough
chakra, otherwise they can be taught the Yin seal." Tsunade murmured in her heart.
"Sister Tsunade, you're here." He Feng stopped what he was doing. With the help of
the live snake, he had stabilized the injuries of all the wounded present and
provided first aid to all the seriously injured.
Therefore, his work is considered done.
The gains from this trip were huge for He Feng, whether it was the experience in
using medical ninjutsu or the acquisition of favorability.
"Tsunade-sama." Lin and Shizune came to Tsunade.
"Well, you can still do well even without me, very good." Tsunade nodded with
satisfaction and said happily.
"We still have a lot to learn from Tsunade-san."
Tsunade smiled and rubbed He Feng's hair with her hands.
"Thank you Tsunade and several young doctors for your help. Without you, we would
definitely be too busy. In that case, many people would not be able to receive
treatment." The medical ninjas from the medical department came to Tsunade and
faced her. Shou and He Feng bowed.
He Feng said quickly: "No, no, we are both Konoha ninjas, this is what we should
do."
At this moment, a figure from the medical department rushed over quickly and
stopped suddenly at the feet of He Feng.
"Parker, why are you here? Did something happen?" He Feng was a little surprised.
He Feng naturally knew Parker as Kakashi's psychic beast.
If nothing happened, Kakashi would not ask Parker to come to him.
"Hefeng, Kakashi and Obito were attacked by Sunagakure. Namikaze Minato was not
with Kakashi and Obito because he was chasing the unknown wood escape ninja.
Kakashi is in danger now!" Parker spoke quickly, It was also worried about
Kakashi's safety.
"What!" He Feng was shocked. He Feng had an idea when he heard Parker talking about
the unknown Wood Escape Ninja.
Currently, there are only four Mudun ninjas known to Hefeng, and two of them are
not even human beings.
One is Yamato who is still in Konoha Village, but the current Yamato is not worthy
of letting Namikaze Minato pursue it himself.
Except for Yamato, there are Uchiha Madara, Black Zetsu and all the White Zetsu.
At this time, there is still a long time before the Battle of Kannabi Bridge in the
original timeline. After all, Iwagakure has not even declared war on Konoha at this
time, but the appearance of the unknown Konoha ninja is undoubtedly Uchiha Madara's
attack on Uchiha Obito. sign.
"Obito opened his eyes because of me and Kakashi-san, so this time Lin will not be
Uchiha Madara's target. Then Uchiha Madara's target will be me and Kakashi-san."
Hefeng analyzed in his mind With.
"If Uchiha Madara's target is Kakashi-nii, based on Uchiha Madara's plan, Parker
will never have the chance to notify me to go to support...
In other words, Uchiha Madara's target is actually me or Kakashi-nii and I. He
wants to use my and Kakashi-nii's names to open the Mangekyō Sharingan for Obito,
but if this is the case, Obito cannot Will agree with Uchiha Madara..."
For a moment, He Feng felt that he had a headache. He had to go, but how to go
became He Feng's current headache.
Suddenly, He Feng suddenly thought of the Sharingan he had opened, and an
inexplicable idea arose in He Feng's heart.
"Can I replace Obito as the agent of the Eye of the Moon Project? It will
definitely be fun to increase Uchiha Madara's favorability..."

Chapter 45 Entering the game personally

Parker didn't pay attention to the people around him when he spoke, and everything
about the attack on Kakashi and Obito reached Tsunade's ears.
"He Feng, I will go with you to rescue Kakashi, Shizune Lin, and you two will tell
Orochimaru to prepare for a war with Sunagakure." Tsunade made a decision with a
wave of her hand.
If she hadn’t heard and didn’t know, she would stillOkay, but now that she has
heard the news about Kakashi and Obito being attacked, she will not let He Feng
face the danger alone under any circumstances.
Tsunade's idea is very simple, that is, she must protect He Feng no matter what the
cost.
He Feng was very touched by this. Tsunade's love for him is almost all-round.
Tsunade will not restrain He Feng because of this love. She will only worry about
He Feng while teaching He Feng as much as possible to become more powerful. power
to protect your own safety.
He Feng is not a stone, so he can naturally feel it.
But the more this happened, the less He Feng would let Tsunade go to rescue Kakashi
with him.
He himself has the symbols of Uchiha ninjas, the Flying Thunder God and the
Sharingan. It is impossible to say that there is no possibility that Uchiha Madara
will kill him, but Hefeng can rely on his own physique and smooth way of doing
things to avoid this. possible.
In Madara's eyes, Hefeng, who is not an Uchiha, is just a pawn for Obito to fall.
Hefeng is an Uchiha and has a Sharingan, so he is likely to become a more useful
chess piece for Madara than Obito.
But Tsunade is different. In Uchiha Madara's eyes, Tsunade has no other value
except for her status as Hashirama's granddaughter. He Feng doesn't think Uchiha
Madara would care about the life of a worthless person.
The only thing Uchiha Madara can do for Tsunade is to give Tsunade a good ending in
the infinite Tsukuyomi world.
"Sister Tsunade, I'd better go by myself." He Feng said softly.
"millet……"
"Tsunade-sister, listen to me first."
Just as Tsunade was about to refuse, she was interrupted by He Feng.
He continued: "I have the Flying Thunder God technique mastered by your second
grandfather, Sister Tsunade. There is no one in this ninja world who can stop the
user of the Flying Thunder God, right?"
Tsunade couldn't refute, so she could only nodded and signaled He Feng to continue.
This alone cannot convince her.
Hefeng also knew Tsunade's stubbornness, so he continued: "Parker also said just
now that Teacher Minato was led away by an unknown Wooden ninja and has been
chasing that Wooden ninja.
Tsunade-san, don't you think it's strange? Minato-sensei is a new generation of
ninjas with the fastest speed in the world. If a wood-type ninja can match Minato-
sensei's speed, what will happen? "
Tsunade was shocked and in disbelief: "Their target is Namikaze Minato!"
He Feng nodded affirmatively: "Yes, Teacher Minato is in danger, and his life is in
danger. In order to lure Teacher Minato, the other party did not hesitate to expose
his identity as a Wooden ninja. This shows that the other party is confident that
he will kill Teacher Minato.
Compared to the yellow flash of Konoha, Kakashi-nii and Obito must not have
received much attention there, which is why I don’t want Tsunade-san to go with me.
"
Tsunade looked like this. She had been persuaded by He Feng's analysis, and she
also recognized He Feng's words in her heart.
Tsunade felt relieved and said resolutely: "Then let Xiao Hefeng act on your own.
With the same immortal mode and flying thunder god as Grandpa, ordinary ninjas will
not be your opponent.
Shizune, Lin, you two come with me to see Orochimaru. I need to talk to Orochimaru
about this matter.
Hefeng, you must come back safely. "
Seeing that Tsunade was about to leave, He Feng hesitated for a moment and then
suddenly said: "Sister Tsunade."
Tsunade turned around and asked doubtfully: "What's wrong, Xiao Hefeng?"
Hefeng channeled a storage scroll and gave it to Tsunade.
"Sister Tsunade, help me give this to Mr. Orochimaru. Just say that this is my
previous trophy and it will be of great use to the progress of his freshman plan."
Tsunade took the scroll and didn't think much about it.
"Um,"
After Tsunade left, He Feng looked at Parker who looked anxious.
"Parker, can you still find where Brother Kakashi is?" He Feng lowered his head and
asked.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Parker nodded, "Yes, let's set off now. Kakashi and Obito are in very bad
condition, so we need to go as soon as possible."
"Well, let's go."
As soon as He Feng finished speaking, Parker rushed out on four short legs. As a
psychic ninja dog, Parker's speed was faster than that of ordinary chuunin, but it
didn't matter to He Feng.
In this way, one person and one dog kept shuttling through the woods, just to
provide support faster.
Pants, pants (transition sound effect)
"Kakashi, if you can't hold it anymore, tell your brother Obito, I'm not at the
point where I can't move yet."
Kakashi jumped from tree to tree very quickly, with Obito being carried on his
back.
"Shut up, don't be brave. I've asked Parker to call for backup. What we have to do
now is to hold on for as long as we can for one second." Kakashi reprimanded
mercilessly.
But he didn't mean to dislike Obito being injured at all.
After all, Obito was attacked because he was protecting him from a sneak attack by
Sunagakure.
"Hmph. If I hadn't injured those Sunagakures, I would have knocked them all down
with just one look!" Obito looked disdainful.
In fact, Obito's words are not an exaggeration. You must know that in the original
timeline, Obito was able to use illusions with a single-eyed kaleidoscope to
control the fourth-generation Mizukage Gotachibana, who was a perfect jinchūriki.
Even if there is kaleidoscope's blessing for illusion, it cannot conceal Obito's
talent for illusion.
"Okay, okay, you're right." Kakashi said perfunctorily while dodging Sunagakure who
was chasing behind him."This is not the way to go. Obito, can you still use
genjutsu now?"
Obito's face was full of determination and he affirmed: "Yes, but they need to see
my eyes."
After hearing this, Kakashi no longer only focused on escaping. It is not Kakashi's
character not to fight back when being beaten.
"Genjutsu Sharingan!" Obito did not use a specific illusion attack, but instead
used the pupil power of the Sharingan, which is also the simplest and most
effective attack method.
"No! It's Uchiha, don't look into his eyes."
The illusion of the Sharingan is an instant hypnosis. When the Sunagakure ninja
consciously dodges, the prerequisites for the illusion to be activated have been
triggered.
"Well done, Obito." Kakashi felt happy in his heart, and when he saw Sunagakure,
who was in hot pursuit, stopping, his originally tense nerves relaxed a little.
"Hey, I've been waiting for you for a long time."
At this moment, a figure with green hair, white skin, and white spikes on his body
emerged from the tree where Kakashi was staying.
The White Zetsu did not attack Kakashi, but grabbed Kakashi's ankle with his hand
one second before Kakashi jumped up.
"No!" Kakashi was shocked. Since he was carrying Obito, he couldn't use the
Substitute Technique. He could only adjust his posture to reduce the fall damage
caused by falling to the ground.

Chapter 46 Rescue and Revealing the Sharingan

After Bai Zetsu stopped Kakashi's progress, he used the Mayfly Technique again and
drilled into the tree, as if he had never appeared before.
Those Sunagakure who had been affected by Obito's genjutsu had this opportunity to
catch up with the two of them.
"Catch these two brats!"
"We can't just let it go! They killed so many of us!"
"That's right! Bring them both back to the village and make sure to pry out
Konoha's information from their mouths!"
"If you want me, just take one back and kill the rest directly to vent my hatred!"
"I agree, why not just kill one of them."
The ninjas of Sunagakure surrounded Kakashi and Obito, discussing how to deal with
them, and the malice in their eyes was undisguised.
There is no mutual understanding between ninjas, and there are irreconcilable
conflicts between ninjas in the same village, let alone between countries and
villages.
Yesterday, Konoha killed ten people in Sunagakure. Today, Sunagakure killed five
people in Konoha for revenge. The old hatred was resolved and the new hatred was
born again.
Just like what’s happening now.
Under the guidance of Uchiha Madara, Sunagakure's people launched a sneak attack on
Kakashi Obito, and Kakashi and Obito killed him.
"Let me do it. I still have the poison that Elder Chiyo gave me but it's useless.
Let this Konoha brat taste the poison of my Sunagakure!"
The speaker was a puppet master from Hidden Suna Village. As a master of poison, he
knew what would happen if a person was not cured after being poisoned.
"That Uchiha is a three-magatama, leave that Uchiha behind, and operate on the
remaining white-haired brat!"
While speaking, the puppet master controlled the puppet and approached Kakashi.
Kakashi was originally preparing to attack suddenly and pull up a back, but he was
a little desperate when he saw that the other party was so cautious that he did not
dare to move forward even if both of his sides were injured.
Bang! ! !
At this moment, a white light flashed, and He Feng's figure appeared next to Obito,
holding the same sword of Ninja Love of Minato Namikaze in his hand.
Both of his swords were broken into pieces, and it would take time to find suitable
ninja tools. He Feng could only use some of Namikaze Minato's swords of ninja love
that had not yet been engraved with the Flying Thunder God's mark as replacements.
"He Feng!" A joyful expression appeared on Obito's face. He quickly opened his
sleeves with a grin on his face. In addition to the hideous wound, there was also a
mark of the Flying Thunder God on his arm.
This is the Flying Thunder God's mark that He Feng had engraved on during the
previous assessment of the Minato class. Now it has saved his and Kakashi's lives.
Regarding the matter of carving a mark on himself so that He Feng could come to him
anytime and anywhere, Obito didn't refuse or reject it at all.
In Obito's words, He Feng was able to teleport to me because he has a good
relationship with me. Why would he carve thunder gods into other people's bodies if
he had nothing to do?
"Sorry, I'm late." He Feng apologized, and then looked at the Sunagakure ninjas
with unkind eyes.
"She's the Blood Maiden of Konoha, do you still want to fight? The intelligence
says she can fly the Thunder God Technique!" A Sunagakure said hesitantly.
Hearing what Sha Yin said, He Feng felt speechless.
No, do you people in the ninja world like to give people names so much? Minato-
sensei is a yellow flash, but now I am a bloody dancer? !
He Feng really wanted to emphasize that he was actually a man and he was carrying a
handle. The word "dancing girl" was not very appropriate, but then he thought about
it, these Sunagakures wouldn't live long, and they were all dead after all, so
stressing this to them It's no use.
"Retreat!" The captain of the group was very decisive. After seeing He Feng, he
gave the order to retreat.
The average elite jounin would have the confidence to give it a try, but the user
of the Flying Thunder God had to forget it, even though the user of the Flying
Thunder God was only ten years old and still a child.
He Feng didn't say anything more. In line with the principle that people don't
speak much when they are cruel, He Feng directly threw out all the Swords of
Endurance and Love that he currently possessed.
He Feng's shuriken skills are very strong. After the Sword of Ren's Love was thrown
by He Feng, it seemed to be following Sunagakure's movements with autonomous
consciousness.
The next second, He Feng's figure disappeared and appeared behind a sand invisible
figure.
This Sunagakure is the puppet master who just planned to poison Kakashi.
He Feng didn't hold back either, the chakra in his hand lit upThe scalpel sliced
across the opponent's neck without any hesitation.
A head with a ferocious and fearful face was thrown high due to inertia, while the
puppet master's body fell to the ground.
The blood splashed onto He Feng's body, easily dyeing He Feng's long white hair
red.
"Is this the Bloody Maiden..." A Sunagakure stopped, his legs trembling with
intense fear, "Move, move quickly, move."
Sunagakure's tears and snot flowed out unsatisfactorily, and his hands frantically
slapped his already weak legs.
He was just a chuunin, and the person who was killed by He Feng just now was a
jounin in their village.
"In the next life, I will be reborn with a good child, and I will brighten my eyes
by the way." He Feng murmured softly, harvesting Sunagakure's life mercilessly.
Both Obito and Kakashi breathed a sigh of relief.
They did not feel that He Feng was cruel. After all, if He Feng had not arrived in
time, Kakashi would not be sitting here relaxing but would be waiting for these
Sunagakure in the Pure Land.
After a while, He Feng used the Sword of Endurance to kill the last Sunagakure.
At this time, He Feng was like an angel walking out of hell. The blood bathing his
body made He Feng not look dirty, but bright and coquettish.
At this moment, Hefeng was worthy of the title of Bloody Dancer.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
"Nissan, Obito, it's great that you are okay. I am worried about you." Hefeng
turned around and stared at Kakashi and Obito with his scarlet eyes.
"Sharingan!" The two men's eyes widened. Both Kakashi and Obito felt like they had
been hit in the head with a stick.
"What happened? Why did He Feng awaken his Sharingan?" The two of them thought
together in their hearts.
Kakashi: What's going on? Why did Hefeng awaken the Sharingan? Could it be that
Hefeng and Obito are from the Uchiha clan, right? He Feng is my younger brother. We
both look the same. Could it be that dad is from the Uchiha clan?
No, no, no, dad is from the Hatake clan, could it be that mom is from the Uchiha
clan? Both He Feng and I have unawakened Uchiha blood hidden in our bodies?
Obito: I’ll wipe it! He Feng and I are both from the Uchiha clan? Is there such a
good thing? Is this a bit of a big blow to Kakashi? I hope Kakashi is okay.
But Hefeng only has a second magatama, and I have a third magatama. Doesn’t this
mean that my talent in Sharingan is stronger than that of Hefeng? Hahahaha, let’s
see who will say that I am the last person this time!
The two of them each had their own ideas, but this was exactly what He Feng wanted.
His Sharingan cannot be hidden for a lifetime, so now is the time to show it.
"I don't know why I awakened the Sharingan, or maybe our mother is from the Uchiha
clan." He Feng touched his eye sockets and said softly.
This sentence not only fell into the ears of Obito and Kakashi, but also fell into
the ears of Black Jue who had been eavesdropping.
――――――
This month, due to lack of perfect attendance, there will be two updates a day,
which is about 4,500 words. From next month, there will be three updates a day,
about 6,000 words.
Book friends who see this can give Ah Shuang some five-star praise. I thank you on
my knees!
＿○／|＿

Chapter 47 Thinking about what Ban has never thought about, doing what Ban wants to
do
After seeing He Feng reveal his Sharingan, Hei Zetsu's mind became active.
With thousands of years of planning, Hei Jue has long been accustomed to taking all
emergencies into consideration.
Over the years, he has been sending Bai to monitor He Feng. He himself also goes to
Konoha to observe Obito and He Feng when he has nothing to do.
Therefore, Black Zetsu knew clearly that Hefeng's Sharingan was definitely not
transplanted like Danzo in Konoha.
Madara's idea all along was to use He Feng and Kakashi's life to make Obito realize
the cruelty of the ninja world, in order to seduce Obito to become the agent of the
Eye of the Moon plan during the period of Madara's death.
Although Obito's performance is very good now, full of emotion and talent, it still
depends on who he is competing with.
--------------------xxxx--------------------
Just compare Obito and Hefeng, and the difference between them is obvious.
Black Zetsu knew without even thinking that if Madara knew that He Feng opened his
eyes, he would definitely turn his attention from Obito to He Feng.
After all, Madara is very conceited. He is confident that neither Obito nor Hefeng
can escape his grasp.
And Black Zetsu, as ‘Madara’s consciousness’, also helped Uchiha Madara take this
into consideration.
This is the experience accumulated by Hei Jue for thousands of years. Think about
what you have not thought about and do what you want to do.
Only in this way can the other party's will be perfectly acted out.
After all, Black Zetsu had already done what Uchiha Madara wanted to do. In this
case, how could Uchiha Madara question whether Black Zetsu had his own will?
"Hefeng, how did you feel after opening the Sharingan? Did you feel that your
strength suddenly improved a lot?" Obito was about to stand up in excitement, but
before he could stand up, his wound appeared. Being affected again.
"Hiss—" Obito stood up with a grin on his face and pretended to be calm: "It's just
a minor injury, it's not serious."
He Feng rolled his eyes at Obito, walked up and put his hand on Obito's injured
area: "Really, Obito, you always force yourself and don't care about your body at
all."
While He Feng blamed Obito, he used the Palm Immortal Technique to heal Obito's
injuries.
Obito heheAs soon as he smiled, an inexplicable feeling of happiness surged into
his heart. He Feng always cared so much about him.
After treating Obito, Hefeng treated Kakashi again.
"He Feng, is our mother really an Uchiha? Why has my father never said whether I
can also awaken the Sharingan?" Kakashi asked with some confusion.
After Obito awakened the three Magatama Sharingan, the battle between Kakashi and
Obito was about losing more and winning less.
If possible, Kakashi would also like a Sharingan.
He Feng shook his head, "I don't know, but our father must not be from the Uchiha
clan, then only our mother or mother's ancestors are."
Kakashi nodded and did not go into details. After all, Hatake Sakumo had never told
them about their mother.
He Feng also breathed a sigh of relief. He had not considered the disadvantages of
this statement, but this was already the best solution at present.
If he said that his Sharingan was the product of Orochimaru's experiment, the
radicals of the current Uchiha clan would definitely explode.
At the very least, they might collectively submit a letter asking the Third
Generation to shut down Orochimaru's laboratory; at worst, they might just come to
fight with Orochimaru.
After all, not all Uchiha are called Uchiha Obito.
If his Sharingan is the bloodline left over from his mother or his mother's
ancestors, then it wouldn't be a big problem. After all, Uchiha has inherited it
for thousands of years. Who can guarantee that there are no tribesmen or foreigners
in Uchiha who have not opened their eyes in the past thousand years? Combine it.
"Obito, when you are ready, prepare to return. If the Sunagakure army comes, it
will be difficult to evacuate." Kakashi said still vigilantly.
Black Jue on the side was also a little anxious. Why didn't White Jue bring
Sunagakure's large army? He could dig into He Feng's heart behind his back, but he
would not compete with He Feng head-on.
The main question whether he can successfully bring He Feng back is Bai Jue, who
can use the art of disguise to sneak into Sunagakure's troops.
"Damn it, that bastard A Fei is studying how to poop. He hasn't brought Sunagakure
yet!" Black Zetsu thought fiercely.
If this operation is delayed because of that bastard A Fei, he must tell Madara
Uchiha when he goes back that he recast A Fei as a heretic demon.
"Sunagakure is here, we are surrounded." At this time, Hefeng's Kagura Heart Eye
suddenly detected hundreds of chakra signal sources appearing around him.
Among them, there are nearly thirty jounin alone.
He Feng was very suspicious that Sha Yin had called everyone from their hometown
over.
Excluding the ninjas trained by secret departments such as ANBU, there are less
than a hundred jounin in a village.
Coupled with the losses of the long war, this time Sunagakure was able to send at
least a hundred people and at least 30 people with jounin chakra to pursue him.
This shows how much Sunagakure had invested in this operation.
Facing so many people, even He Feng felt a little frightened.
He was not worried about whether he could survive the siege of hundreds of people.
The main concern was Obito and Kakashi.
"Then what are you waiting for? Let's go together, Hefeng!" Obito said as he pulled
Hefeng and Kakashi away.
He Feng did not move. He said solemnly: "Nissan, Obito, if we go together, we will
be surrounded and unable to escape. You retreat in that direction first, and I will
stop them." He Feng pointed his finger. A direction with the least amount of sand
hidden.
"He Feng, this is the second time that you asked me and Obito to leave you alone."
Kakashi said with some distress: "Obito and I are not cowards who are timid before
fighting, how can we look at you? Always covering for us.”
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
Kakashi really didn't want to retreat with Obito this time. Maybe it was because of
his fellow brothers. When He Feng said that he came to stop Sunagakure, Kakashi
felt as if he was about to lose something.
"Yes, He Feng, we are teammates! We are going to share life and death together, so
it doesn't matter if I leave you alone and run away!"
Obito also protested.
He wants to protect He Feng, not let He Feng protect him.
He Feng smiled and did not speak to refute the two of them.
In the next second, invisible natural energy gathered around him, and the blood-red
fairy facial makeup appeared on He Feng's face.
He Feng's powerful, substantive chakra spurted out, as if forming an invisible
pressure.
At this moment, even Kakashi and Obito, who had no sense of ninjutsu, could feel
the power of He Feng.
Unconsciously, the gap between the three of them has become wider and wider.
"Is He Feng already so strong?" Kakashi was somewhat conflicted. On the one hand,
he was happy that He Feng was strong, but on the other hand, he blamed himself for
being weak.
If he also learned how to fly the Thunder God, he wouldn't have to leave He Feng
alone to cut off the rear.
The same is true for Obito. When facing He Feng, Obito's pride of belonging to the
Uchiha clan was crushed by He Feng again and again. Although he was willing to do
so, his feeling of having to be protected by others in such a crisis was as big as
A hammer struck Obito's heart.
At this moment, Obito's desire to become stronger increased again.
"Nissan, Obito, you don't have to worry about me..." Hefeng still had something to
say, but Kakashi and Obito already understood.
It would not be a good thing for He Feng if the two of them stayed. In that case,
He Feng would even have to devote his time to taking care of the two of them.
"He Feng, we must come back safely." Kakashi and Obito gritted their teeth and said
with complicated emotions.
"Yeah, definitely." He Feng smiled and nodded.The voice is still so gentle.

Chapter 48 Black Jue appears and is taken away by White Jue

After Kakashi and others left, Hefeng did not directly conflict with many
Sunagakures, but used roundabout tactics to attract their attention, and kept
relying on his speed advantage to hang on to the Sunagakure people who came to
pursue them.
For him at this time, although he did not have the power of Senju Hashirama to
bring down the tree world with one hand, these Sunagakure ninjas were still not
enough to look at in front of him.
In the ninja world, a world of pure blood theory, a palm of the Buddha can kill an
entire ninja village in an instant, and Susana's sword can kill the opponent's
shadow. The lives of ordinary ninjas and even jounin can be determined by the
shadow level or even the super shadow power. In the eyes of the reader, it can be
easily taken.
Even Hefeng at this time had a large-scale destructive ninjutsu like the Super Jade
Rasengan that he could use.
To be fair, those Sunagakure Hefeng chasing from behind could have been killed if
they wanted to.
But the purpose of his trip was not to kill those Sunagakures.
After all, just now, He Feng's favorability system captured a particularly critical
piece of information for He Feng.
【Favorability +1 from Hei Ze】
【Acquire primary mental will strengthening】
It was precisely because of this favorability reminder that He Feng decided to let
Kakashi and Obito retreat first.
Although he said that he was delivering the courier to Madara himself this time, if
possible, Hefeng still hoped that he could lie on Tsunade's bed instead of Madara's
graveyard.
"The Immortal Technique·The Technique of the Fire Dragon."
Time gradually passed, and He Feng's physical strength gradually became exhausted.
He hid in a cave and used Earth Escape to seal the entrance of the cave.
"These Shayin are so annoying. It's like they always know where I am. I can't get
rid of them no matter what." He Feng leaned on the stone and complained while
breathing heavily.
"How about fighting those Sunagakures? No, no, then I won't have enough chakra to
use the Flying Thunder God to retreat. But if I want to use the Flying Thunder God
to retreat, I don't have a mark close enough. Damn it."
The sound of He Feng's complaints echoed in the silent cave.
And all these words fell into Hei Jue’s ears.
"Let A Fei lead those Sunagakure here. The small place of Sunagakure is very poor.
The bounty of 300 million taels is enough to feed their whole village for a while."
Hei Jing said to Bai Jue beside him.
The Bai Jue nodded, used the art of mayfly to come to Ah Fei, and told Ah Fei the
arrangements of the Black Jue.
And A Fei, this special Bai Jue, also guided the Sand Hidden people to the entrance
of the cave where He Feng was hiding.
"That brat is right here. He killed so many of us Sunagakure. This revenge must be
avenged! There is also a bounty for that brat, which is a full 300 million taels!"
A Fei, playing the role of a Sunagakure jounin, guided loudly. The Sunagakures
behind them.
"Puppet manipulation, iron fist attack!" A group of puppet masters from Sunagakure
Village controlled their puppets and launched an attack on the big stone blocking
the entrance of the cave.
In a matter of seconds, the boulder made by Tudun shattered to pieces.
"Wind Release・Dayama Rasengan!"
The moment the boulder was shattered, He Feng's figure appeared from the cave, with
a huge spiral pill condensed in his hand.
The Rasengan immediately landed on the puppets of the Sunagakure puppet masters.
Those puppets received countless forces from different directions in an instant,
and turned into fragments all over the sky while everyone was stunned.
Those Sunagakure were dumbfounded. You must know that the puppets of their
Sunagakure Village are the hard work of every puppet master. They usually spend
countless hours repairing and maintaining them. Even ordinary Jonin would not dare
to meet the puppets of their Sunagakure Village. Go head-to-head with it.
When did it become so weak?
He Feng's attack did not stop. His expression was extremely solemn, as if he had
made the decision to die together.
Seeing He Feng with such an expression, even Sunagakure from the opposite camp felt
unbearable for a moment, not to mention Hei Zetsu who already had a good impression
of He Feng.
As long as a person has a certain favorable impression of He Feng, then under the
influence of He Feng's succubus physique, this favorable impression will begin to
increase out of control.
In the end, it can even make people remember it.
This is what is said to be what you think about during the day and what you dream
about at night.
Now, as He Feng grows older, his physique, which can also be said to be the ability
of the succubus, is also gradually increasing.
Hei Jie He Feng is like a big girl falling in love with a handsome guy, the more
she looks at him, the more satisfied she becomes.
So much so that when Hei Jue, a thousand-year-old silver coin, considered He Feng's
matter, he automatically ignored some situations that were not too reasonable.
Seeing He Feng's physical strength and chakra gradually decreasing until he fell to
the ground due to exhaustion, Hei Jue knew that his chance had come.
He first fused with a more powerful Bai Jue and appeared next to He Feng in the
image of Yin and Yang's Black and White Jue.
No matter what he does, Hei Zetsu prioritizes life-saving. He does not have any
power. Compared with others, Hei Zetsu only has the advantage of lifespan. If he
wants to resurrect Kaguya Otsutsuki, Hei Zetsu needs to be cautious and cautious.
At least you can't let yourself be caught and sealed by others because of your
strength.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"Wood Release: Cutting Technique!" Black Zetsu's attack fell into the body of a
Sunagakure jounin. In an instant, dozens of sharp branches penetrated from his
body. The Sunagakure jounin suddenly vomited a mouthful of blood. He fell to the
ground before he could even say anything.
"It's Wooden Release! Wooden Release Ninja!" Sunagakure's eyes widened, as if they
had seen something incredible.Wooden Release has extraordinary significance to
Konoha, and for other ninja villages, Wooden Release is their nightmare.
Although the first Hokage Senju Hashirama advocated peace and rarely took the
initiative to attack, Senju Hashirama's wood escape was deeply rooted in the hearts
of the people. Even after the death of the first Hokage Senju Hashirama for many
years, the remaining power of Konoha is still remembered by others.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
"What should I do? Should I fight?" someone asked.
"What's the point of chasing after this? The first thing to do is to pass the news
about the Wooden Ninja back to the village."
Seeing Sunagakure retreating, Black and White Jue stood there and observed He
Feng's condition. After confirming that He Feng was really exhausted and
unconscious, he separated from Bai Jue.
"You take him back to Madara-sama, I will go back and report first." Black Jue
ordered White Jue, and then used the Mayfly Technique to move in the land.
Bai Jue sighed: "Really, I have to do all the hard work. It's so annoying. If I had
known, if I changed with Ah Fei, his work would be easy and fun."
With that said, Bai Jue walked up to He Feng, wrapped He Feng tightly like a soft
body, and then sank into the soil at his feet.
The main reason why He Feng dared to do this without fear of Hei Jue's secret
attack was because of the system mall's guarantee.
[Item: Sleep Talisman]
[Function: Put the user into a coma immediately, and wake the user up when the user
is about to be harmed]
[Introduction: A talisman made by a Taoist priest suffering from insomnia,
specially designed to treat insomnia]
After using this talisman, He Feng fell to the ground as if in a coma. This was how
he was able to deceive Hei Jue.
In addition, Hefeng also considered that Uchiha Madara might touch him while he was
sleeping - burying the ban.
In this regard, Hefeng also found a countermeasure from the system mall.
【Sealing Technique·Anatomy】
【Function: One-time curse-removing ninjutsu】
[Introduction: It can remove most of the sealing techniques, restrictions, curses,
etc. used on the host itself.
Including but not limited to: Tsukuyomi, Other Gods, Infinite Tsukuyomi]
[Price: Favorability]
Although this sealing technique is a bit expensive, the effect is as good as one
against one.
After all, there is a saying that if you are reluctant to let go of your children,
you will not catch the wolf.
With ten thousand favorability points and the treasure on Uchiha Madara waiting for
He Feng to develop, He Feng naturally knew which one to choose.

Chapter 49 Orochimaru’s determination, Tsunade’s love

Sichuan Country Headquarters.
Danzo looked at the information in front of him, his brows almost twisted into the
character "Chuan".
The information came from Konoha.
Three lines of large characters are clearly written on the front page.
Cloud Hidden Village has officially declared war on Konoha Hidden Village.
Currently, Cloud Hidden Army has reached the territory of Tian Country.
Kirigakure Village has officially declared war on Konoha Hidden Village. Kirigakure
Village currently occupies the ruins of the Country of Whirlpool and is about to
land in the coastal areas of the Country of Fire.
Iwagakure Village officially declared war on Konoha Hidden Village. Onoki of
Iwagakure Village said that he had reached a strategic alliance with the Third
Raikage of Kumogakure Village and would not invade each other until they captured
Konoha.
At this moment, Danzo once again had a sense of déjà vu in the Second Ninja War. In
the Second Ninja War, his teacher Senju Tobirama led the major ninja clans in
Konoha to defeat the four major ninja villages in one against four.
Now, can he lead Konoha to victory from the Third Ninja War?
"I am the future fourth generation Hokage of Konoha! I will definitely achieve what
my teacher achieved back then!" Danzo suddenly stood up from his chair, his eyes
became determined. At this time, he felt a bit like his first time in the ninja
world. The style that followed Senju Tobirama during the war.
Inexplicably, a figure appeared in Danzo's mind.
Originally, Danzo had given up coveting He Feng and instead focused on the genius
of the Uchiha clan.
But since recently, He Feng has often appeared in Danzo's mind, causing Danzo to
subconsciously think: It would have been great if He Feng had entered his roots.
"It's time for us to retreat. Konoha has too few manpower that can be used for
supply transportation due to multi-front operations, and our supply route in
Kawanoguni is too long. If other ninja villages attack the supply line, our front
line will be Going to collapse.”
Orochimaru looked at the map on the table expressionlessly and said extremely
calmly.
"Retreat?! We have defeated Sunagakure steadily. In less than half a month, we will
be able to penetrate into the Kingdom of Wind and defeat Sunagakure in one fell
swoop. Sunagakure will also become our third time in Konoha's ninja war. The first
ninja village to be defeated in the World War, you told me to retreat?!!"
Danzo was very angry. He knew what Orochimaru said about the supply line being too
long and easy to be attacked by sneak attacks, but Danzo was unwilling to accept
it.
The fruits of victory were right in front of him, and he was unwilling to retreat.
Bang! ! !
Orochimaru slammed the table, no longer coddling Danzo, and angrily shouted:
"Commander Danzo! You want to use the lives of Konoha ninjas to accumulate your
achievements, so that you can get what you want and become the No. 1 The Fourth
Hokage!!!
Let me tell you, Hefeng once recommended me to compete for the Fourth Hokage, but I
refused, because in my opinion, I would not have time to do experiments after
becoming Hokage, but now I want to tell you, this Fourth Hokage, I am Orochi Maru
will also compete!
Now, as the deputy commander, I have officially ordered that all Konoha ninjas
withdraw their troops! Return to the Land of Fire! "
Orochimaru's voice was sonorous and powerful. At this moment, he was doing his duty
for the lives of Konoha ninjas and for the lives that He Feng had healed with his
own hands. At this time, Orochimaru was no longer gloomy.
"Hmph! Big snakeMaru, take care of yourself! " Danzo snorted coldly. He didn't know
whether he was ignoring Orochimaru's words or was suppressed by Orochimaru's words.
He didn't refute Orochimaru anymore, but left the command room angrily.
After Danzo left, Orochimaru also sat helplessly on the chair, and he channeled a
scroll.
Orochimaru had not opened the scroll given to him by Hefeng Drag Tsunade because of
the war, but now Orochimaru opened the scroll because of longing and worry.
Yeyue's arm and a corner of the Eight-Tails fell to the ground.
"This..." Orochimaru felt deeply powerless. He leaned on the chair, stared at the
items on the ground, and murmured softly: "He Feng, why didn't you tell the teacher
where you were? It's harming you." The teacher is so worried about you.
The teacher will punish you next time you meet...
"But what should be the punishment..."
Medical Department.
Tsunade was treating the injuries of the wounded who came off the battlefield one
after another.
Because of He Feng, Tsunade's anemia has long been cured.
Although Tsunade was always distracted during treatment, she relied on her
instinctive medical ninjutsu to heal all the wounded without fail.
After completing the day's treatment and receiving the withdrawal notice from the
headquarters, Tsunade subconsciously took out the necklace she was wearing around
her neck.
Tsunade's thoughts seemed to go back to the day He Feng persuaded herself and
Orochimaru to rescue Minato.
That day, she felt that He Feng's analysis was very reasonable. She ignored many
details of He Feng because she was worried that Shuimen would be ambushed and did
something wrong.
However, when Tsunade and Orochimaru finished telling what happened and planned to
rescue Minato with Orochimaru, they bumped into Minato who was returning.
Tsunade and Orochimaru were surprised and asked Minato what happened.
Namikaze Minato also replied helplessly to the two of them: "At that time, we were
investigating the whereabouts of Sunagakure, and suddenly a gray-haired ninja who
used wood escape appeared and attacked us. So I asked Kakashi and Obito to retreat
first, I'll go after the Wood Release Ninja myself."
Orochimaru asked with some confusion: "What about Kakashi and Obito?"
Namikaze Minato said matter-of-factly: "Isn't this right here?" As he said that,
Namikaze Minato turned his head and looked behind him.
Tsunade felt something was wrong and immediately asked: "Minato, there is nothing
behind you, don't tell me that you are under a genjutsu?"
However, Namikaze Minato shook his head violently, "No! It's not a genjutsu, it
should be a secret technique! They don't know when they lured Kakashi and Obito
away from me, and sent them with chakra and personality. Identical clone to confuse
me.”
Tsunade woke up suddenly and said quickly: "There is danger over there at Xiao He
Feng! They are going towards Xiao He Feng!"
Namikaze Minato and Orochimaru also reacted, and quickly searched for Kakashi and
Obito with Tsunade.
After finding Kakashi and Obito, the two took Tsunade and the other three to
support He Feng.
However, when the five people arrived at the place where He Feng was attacked by
Sha Yin, there was no one around. Even after the five people searched for a long
time, they could not find any trace of He Feng.
To this day, although Tsunade looks very strong on the surface, she feels the
malice from the world again in her heart, "Xiao Hefeng, what on earth did you do?
Why didn't you tell sister Tsunade."
At the same time, Tsunade also truly realized that her feelings for He Feng were no
ordinary sibling.
She seems to have fallen in love with this younger brother who is much younger than
her and looks cute.
However, when Tsunade really realized this, it seemed to be too late.
―――――
Ah Shuang feels everyone's enthusiasm. Two updates a day is indeed not enough.
Now there are three updates a day. I hope all book friends will support me.
＜(?????)＞

Chapter 50 Situation
Konoha year 48, spring.
At this time, Hefeng, Kakashi, Obito and others were eleven years old.
It has been more than a few months since He Feng disappeared.
Obito and Kakashi cheered up again after a long period of decadence.
At this time, the war between the major hidden villages and the Hidden Leaves
Village has gradually entered the territory of the Country of Fire. Both Obito and
Kakashi are active on the battlefield of the Sand Hidden Village in the west of the
Country of Fire.
Perhaps it was because He Feng disappeared because of Sunagakure. Kakashi and Obito
never spared Sunagakure when they met him. Once targeted by the two, Sunagakure
could rarely survive their joint efforts.
Therefore, the reputation of Kakashi and Obito gradually spread.
On the battlefield, Kakashi was called Konoha's second-generation White Fang, and
because his attacks were too ruthless, he was called Konoha's White Death by the
Sunagakure ninjas.
Although this title is exaggerated, and the divine character is not consistent with
Kakashi's current strength, it is consistent with Kakashi's achievements.
Not to mention Obito.
The obsessive Uchiha Obito can do things like deceive his master and destroy his
ancestors. Although Obito at this time is not as crazy as before, he is no less
willing to give in.
Relying on the affirmation in his heart that He Feng was just missing rather than
dead, and the mediation of the people around him, Obito still maintained his own
anchor point, and the three Magatama Sharingan did not evolve into a kaleidoscope
due to extreme pain.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

But even if the strong negative emotions did not cause Obito's three magatama to
evolve into a kaleidoscope, it greatly enhanced Obito's eye power.
At this time, Obito's eyes were only one step away from the kaleidoscope.
Because ObitoWhen fighting Sunagakure, he never cares about his own injuries and
only wants to take the opponent's life. Obito is called a red-eyed devil by
Sunagakure.
It exactly corresponds to the characteristics of the Sharingan of the Obito Uchiha
clan.
In order to find He Feng, the two of them had already abandoned all unimportant
matters and focused solely on improving their strength.
Obito returned to the Uchiha Clan, accepted the invitation of the clan leader
Uchiha Fugaku, and became one of the subjects specially trained by the Uchiha Clan
with a large amount of resources.
Before Obito, there was another person who was also trained by the Uchiha clan in
the same way, and that person was called Shunshen Shisui.
Faced with the teachings of seniors from the same race who had opened the Three
Magatama Sharingan early, Obito's strength improved again.
At present, the only thing that can affect Obito is his age, which prevents him
from continuing to increase his chakra capacity.
Due to the heavy losses in the Sunagakure battlefield, they have temporarily made a
truce with Konoha. Although they have not withdrawn from the battlefield, they will
not take the initiative to attack.
Since Kakashi had no one to continue teaching him, he did not stay in Konoha most
of the time like Obito. Instead, he went to the battlefield of the Kingdom of
Thunder, joined his father Hatake Sakumo, and continued to fight.
On the other side, Shizune, Nohara Lin, Yuhi Hong, Metkai and other He Feng's
friends also received the news of He Feng's disappearance.
Although the former was heartbroken, he had no choice due to his own strength. The
two could only follow He Feng's dream of protecting Konoha and go to different
battlefields to treat the wounded.
The latter has been training for a year and has reached the level of chunin after
passing the chunin exam.
At this time, Konoha is facing a shortage of frontline combat power in multi-front
operations. As long as the chuunin have just graduated, they will be sent to the
frontline battlefield.
Of course, Konoha's genin don't just stay in the village.
Ten thousand-year-old genin like Kosuke Maruboshi and Matt Dai would go to the
battlefield to provide support even if Konoha did not ask.
Kurenai Yuhi followed her father to the Iwagakure battlefield, while Metkai went to
the Kirigakure battlefield with her father.
He Feng's disappearance made many people in Konoha feel sad, but everyone did not
become decadent because of this, but instead exploded with greater potential.
……
Mountain cemetery.
Uchiha Madara sat in a wheelchair made of wood, staring intently at the boy lying
on the stone bed.
The young man seemed to be asleep, his chest rising and falling with each breath,
his delicate little face had been cleaned spotlessly, and his long silver hair was
spread out, adding a soft feeling to the young man.
Uchiha Madara was amazed.
Although he has learned about Hatake Hefeng countless times from Bai Jue's
information, this is the first time he has met Hatake Hefeng.
Before meeting Hatake Hefeng, Uchiha Madara had also thought about what a person
looked like, so that Bai Zetsu could subconsciously say good things to him, but now
Uchiha Madara seemed to understand a little bit.
He has never married a wife in his life, and his state of mind has long reached the
point where there is no woman in his heart to draw the sword from the gods of
nature. For Uchiha Madara, a person's beauty or ugliness is not important. After a
hundred years, a beautiful woman will be nothing more than a pink skeleton.
But now, Hatake Hefeng made his mood change just by his appearance.
Originally, Uchiha Madara was a little anxious because he was short of life but
could not find a successor, but now he has become calmer.
"Hashirama, I really didn't think there was such a magical thing in this world."
Uchiha Madara touched his left chest with his hand and said to himself.
Once people get older, they begin to like memories, just like Uchiha Madara at this
time. He has not left the mountain cemetery for many years. In addition to planning
the layout of the ninja world, what he has done most over the years is to recall
himself and his family. Hashirama's past.
Except for his younger brother Izuna, the only person in the world who could care
about him so much was Senju Hashirama.
"Where am I?" At this moment, He Feng, who was lying on the stone bed, faintly woke
up.
He sat up, scanning the unfamiliar environment around him, and then landed on
Uchiha Madara.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
"Grandpa, who are you? Where am I?" He Feng's voice was as light and soft as a
lark, making Uchiha Madara's spirit calmer.
【Favorability +1 from Uchiha Madara】
[Acquire advanced fire escape proficiency]
He Feng was shocked.
What the hell? ! ! !
If other people only gave a little favorability, the reward would be a low-level
reward. How could Madara Uchiha give him a high-level favorability just by giving
him a little favorability.
Should I say that he is worthy of being a Shura in the ninja world?
At this moment, He Feng began to expect what the favorability of Senju Hashirama,
the god of the ninja world, would reveal to him.
Why don't we wait until Orochimaru-sensei reincarnates both the first and second
generation Hokages?
Since they were staying in the Pure Land anyway, they might as well go back to
Konoha to do some work. At least Senju Hashirama could watch that Uchiha could not
be forced by Danzo to make a coup and end up being exterminated.
"I am Uchiha Madara. It should be considered a taboo in Konoha. You may have never
heard of my name." Uchiha Madara looked arrogant. Before he could continue, He Feng
nodded.
"I have heard that he is the founder of Konoha Hidden Village along with Lord
Hashirama Senju, the first generation. He is known as Shura in the shinobi world by
the world. He has the power to single-handedly quell the troubled times of the
Warring States Period. He is on par with Lord Hashirama. .”
He Feng praised Madara Uchiha with admiration.
【Favorability +1 from Uchiha Madara】
【Acquire mastery of chakra properties change】
"But I think Madara-sama is more powerful.
Our Hatake clan has a book dedicated to recording history. I saw Madara-sama’s
philosophy from that book and was deeply inspired by it. "He Feng made a positive
expression.
【Trigger critical strike! 】
【Favorability +5 from Uchiha Madara】
【Acquire a small amount of Indra Chakra (unconscious)】

Chapter 51 Struggle to realize Madara’s ideals

This is indeed what He Feng thought.
Before he was reincarnated, He Feng had been researching Madara Uchiha.
Uchiha Madara is a gentle, sensitive and pessimistic idealist. As long as it is
what he believes in, few people can stop it.
Although the true face of the Moon Eye Project is to liberate Otsutsuki Kaguya and
gather chakra scattered in the ninja world, Uchiha Madara does not know this.
Uchiha Madara has been working hard from beginning to end to create a dreamy and
beautiful world of harmony where no one will die due to fighting.
If you think about Konoha from Uchiha Madara's perspective, you will find that
there is actually nothing wrong with what Uchiha Madara did.
Originally, it was the dream of Uchiha Madara and Senju Hashirama to build a
village to protect their respective tribesmen. Senju Hashirama even made a decision
in advance to let Uchiha Madara be the village chief. But the village had just been
established, Senju Hashirama. His younger brother Tobirama started to make small
moves.
After some kind of democratic election, whoever wins the most support from the
people can become the village chief.
This was nothing. Uchiha Madara didn't even care too much. He always believed that
his own ideas were the most correct, and he would not lose even if there was a
democratic election.
But Senju Tobirama often slanders Uchiha Madara and even Uchiha's reputation behind
his back.
Speaking of an inherently evil Uchiha, no matter who hears these words every day,
his heart will not be shaken.
One is the dovish Senju Hashirama, and the other is the hawkish Uchiha Madara. The
former will lead Konoha into a peaceful life, and the latter will lead Konoha to
continue to conquer other major countries.
How could the civilians who were already tired of war and the ninjas of the major
ninja clans vote for Uchiha Madara.
Therefore, Senju Hashirama successfully became the Hokage of Konoha.
The conflict of ideas between the two intensified. Madara wanted to lead his tribe
to leave Konoha, but unexpectedly, as the leader of the tribe, he was betrayed by
his own tribe, and in the end he could only leave alone.
Judging from the current development of things, Madara's decision at the time was
undoubtedly correct, but Hashirama can no longer see this kind of thing, and Madara
has no interest in focusing on Ichimura anymore.
Therefore, He Feng has already made a judgment on Madara's character, which is why
he has the confidence to increase the favorability of this ninja Shura.
In a sense, Uchiha Madara's character is very similar to that of his brother
Kakashi.
He is arrogant and tough-tongued with his friends, but gentle and delicate with his
family and younger brother.
"Hahahahaha, I didn't expect that people would still remember my name, Madara
Uchiha." After hearing He Feng's explanation, Madara let out a long-lost laugh.
He hadn’t smiled like this for a long time after opening the Samsara Eye.
"That's right, Hashirama is just a blind eye!
The Leaf Village covered his eyes, preventing him from seeing clearly the
development of the ninja world. There was no difference between villages and clans.
The war would not stop with the establishment of the village, it would only
continue to grow. Back then Hashirama didn't agree with my philosophy, but it's a
pity that now he can't see the Konoha he wants to protect even if he attacks me!
How many members of the Senju clan are left in Konoha?
He Feng, I have been paying attention to you for a long time. Since you were a
child, you have shown talent and wisdom far beyond others. This is why I asked Hei
Jue to rescue you here. "
Although Uchiha Madara is in a wheelchair due to his age, and usually needs a
heretic demon to deliver his life force to stay alive, it does not affect his
temperament.
At this moment, Uchiha Madara didn't have the stagnation that an old man should
have at all, and the light bursting out of his eyes was like that of a young man
who was working hard and full of hope.
"Thank you Madara-sama for saving my life. At that time, I was besieged by
Sunagakure and my chakra was almost exhausted. If it weren't for Madara-sama, I
might never see my brother again.
I don’t know what happened to my father and brother. "
He Feng let out a long sigh of relief, his eyes filled with joy for the rest of his
life and worry for his family and brother.
Madara Uchiha looked at He Feng in front of him, and inexplicably thought of his
younger brother Quan Nai. Although He Feng and Quan Nai didn't look alike, they
looked exactly the same when they were worried about their brother.
Uchiha Madara can even recall Izuna's expression when he returned to his family
every time after completing a mission, he was both worried and happy.
Suddenly, Uchiha Madara changed the subject. The murderous intention of Shura from
the ninja world and the faint pressure from the heretic demon not far away
enveloped He Feng. He said almost word by word:
"He Feng, aren't you curious why I saved you when you should have died in history?
Or do you already know about me and came to me on purpose?"
Uchiha Madara is actually still suspicious. Although he doesn't know He Feng's full
strength, in his opinion, how is it possible for a person who has mastered the wet
bone forest senjutsu like Hashirama and learned the bastard Tobirama's Flying
Thunder God? He would be exhausted from hundreds of ninjas.
Even if this person is only ten years old, it is completely unreasonable.
Despite Uchiha Madara's killing intent, He Feng was greatly shocked. As a ninja who
had fought through the Warring States Period and survived to this day, Uchiha
Madara had more lives on his hands than He Feng could have imagined.
How could such a person be easily fooled by a child?past.
Although Uchiha Madara has a good impression of He Feng, he is not the kind of
person who will be affected by emotions.
However, what Uchiha Madara didn't expect was that He Feng made a strong expression
under this power. When he opened his mouth and was about to speak, his eyes rolled
up and he fainted on the stone bed again.
Of course, it's not that He Feng can't bear it, but that he can't let himself bear
it.
Sometimes, being too sharp will be counterproductive. Appropriately showing the
attitude of a ten-year-old child can also effectively reduce Uchiha Madara's
wariness.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
Looking at He Feng who fainted again, Madara Uchiha was stunned for a moment, and
then felt a little funny.
"Shura from the ninja world unleashed murderous intent on a ten-year-old child. If
Hashirama knew about this, he would kowtow and accuse me of doing something wrong.
Don't do it again in the future."
Madara Uchiha muttered to himself, stepped forward to test whether He Feng was
pretending to be unconscious, and then did nothing more.
Since you've fainted, then just faint and wait until you wake up before continuing
the conversation.
Unknowingly, Uchiha Madara's vigilance towards He Feng had disappeared because of
He Feng's coma again.
However, out of caution, Madara Uchiha still released a silent barrier on the stone
bed where He Feng was.
He didn't want his plan to be delayed because He Feng woke up and heard some
unacceptable words.
"Hei Zetsu, Hatake Hefeng, you arrested him on your own initiative. How do you
think I should treat Hefeng." Uchiha said slowly with a straight face.
The arrogant Uchiha Madara would not give a good look even when faced with his own
will.
Hei Jue showed a flattering smile, "Master Madara, it is precisely because I am
your will that I brought He Feng to you instead of Obito.
Hatake Hefeng has a gentle personality, acts decisively, and shows no mercy to his
enemies in battle.
He is very talented, and the blood of Uchiha also flows in his body. Even if the
Sharingan is opened due to stimulation, his personality does not change much.
If the plan to guide Obito is used to guide Hefeng, it may be counterproductive.
After all, Hefeng has little experience and is full of illusions about the ninja
world, and cannot understand the loftiness of Madara-sama's Eye of the Moon plan. "
Uchiha nodded, acknowledging Black Zetsu's words.
Uchiha Madara is very satisfied with Black Zetsu as his will. Black Zetsu can
always express his thoughts at the first time.
"So I think we should modify the Eye of the Moon and teach it Madara-sama's ideas.
If Hatake Hefeng agrees with Madara from a conceptual point of view, then his
future will only be to realize Madara-sama's ideas. .”

Chapter 52 Uchiha Madara: Ah, yes, yes, yes

A week passed in a flash.
During this week, Hefeng had been staying in the mountain cemetery. Madara Uchiha
was not in a hurry to teach Hefeng ninjutsu, transplant Hashirama cells, or plant
restrictions.
He is more like He Feng's teacher in terms of concepts and values. He dutifully
explains to He Feng the history of the development of the ninja world, and his own
views on the development of the ninja world from the Warring States Period to the
establishment of Konoha Village over the years.
Similarly, Uchiha Madara is also conveying his desire for peace, as well as all
kinds of anguish that he has never told others.
In this week, the identities between the two have changed again and again.
At the beginning, it was an unequal meeting between Shura from the ninja world and
Konoha Chuunin.
Later, there was a teacher who liked to dance with radical ideas and a lovable
student who listened carefully.
Until the end, he turned into a proud and tough-tongued grandfather and a petite,
cute and occasionally naughty grandson.
During this period, He Feng did not take the initiative to return to the village,
and Uchiha Madara seemed to have forgotten the matter and never mentioned it.
Uchiha Madara's love for He Feng has achieved qualitative leaps again and again.
This is incredible for Uchiha Madara. It took a lot of time to get to know each
other and trust each other with his best friend Hashirama back then.
The reason for this is Hefeng's grasp of Uchiha Madara's character, and also the
influence of the succubus's physique on Uchiha Madara.
I don’t know since when, the influence of succubus physique on others is not
limited to the opposite sex.
If the succubus physique can make the opposite sex unconsciously like He Feng, then
for the same sex, it can minimize the other's wariness and stimulate their desire
for protection.
"He Feng, Master Ban wants to see you for something in the underground base, come
with me." Hei Jue emerged from the ground, looked at He Feng who was exercising in
the open space, and said slowly.
Hefeng nodded, "Okay Ah Jue, I understand Ah Jue."
The next second, He Feng used the Flying Thunder God technique to arrive at the
underground base of the mountain cemetery.
Hei Jue felt a little depressed when he saw He Feng disappearing.
He was not targeting He Feng, but he still wanted to complain about why Senju
Tobirama invented such a disgusting ninjutsu. A ninja who learned this ninjutsu was
as disgusting as a loach, even more disgusting than his mayfly technique.
The underground base was almost completely hollowed out. The Heretic Golem was
sitting cross-legged on the open ground. Uchiha Madara was sitting next to the
Heretic Golem, stroking the Heretic Golem that brought him hope.
"He Feng, I have transmitted all my ideas to you in the past seven days. I think it
is time to tell you the reason and purpose of my survival so far." Uchiha Madara
said lightly, looking at He Feng with an extra look in his eyes. Hidden
kindness.Uchiha Madara has been thinking about what he will do after completing the
Moon Eye Project and bringing permanent peace to the ninja world, but now he
understands.
There was no need for him to do anything. From the beginning, his purpose was to
protect children like Xiang Hefeng from the suffering of war.
"Grandpa Madara..."
As soon as He Feng opened his mouth, he was interrupted by Uchiha Madara.
"He Feng, if you have anything to say, please listen to me first."
He Feng nodded and stood there honestly as if waiting for an adult's instruction.
Seeing such actions, Hefeng Uchiha Madara also fell into a brief silence.
After about half a minute, Uchiha Madara coughed twice, hit his shoulders with his
hand, and murmured to himself: "His~ It's a bit sore."
Seeing this, Hefeng smiled. He walked behind Uchiha Madara and massaged Uchiha
Madara's shoulders skillfully with his little hands.
"Grandpa Madara, let me give you a massage to relax."
Feeling the force coming from Hefeng's little hand on his shoulder, Madara Uchiha
also laughed, and he said slowly:
"Thousands of years ago, the Sage of Six Paths created the world and passed on the
power of chakra to the world. People established the Ninja Sect and the Ninja World
was initially established.
Therefore, the ninja world also ushered in a period of peaceful development.
However, as long as they are human beings, they will have a limit on their
lifespan, and the Immortal of Six Paths is no exception.
After the death of Sage of Six Paths, the people of the Ninja Sect gradually split
up, and one Ninja clan began to develop one after another. If a Ninja clan wants to
develop for a long time, it cannot do without resources. The resources of a region
are always limited. In order to develop your own ninja clan, you have to plunder
other ninja clans.
The war is coming. "
Uchiha Madara sighed and continued:
"The outer demon is the outer shell of the Ten-Tails. As long as the nine tailed
beasts are sealed into the outer demon, and the outer demon is sealed into the body
like other tailed beast jinchuriki, it can become the ten-tailed jinchuriki, which
is the third Two immortals of six paths.
My dream in this life is to become the second Sage of Six Paths, conquer all the
countries in the ninja world with absolute power, and complete the unification of
the ninja world just like the Sage of Six Paths did at the beginning. As long as
everyone is a ninja of the same country, then there will be no war. It's over. "
With that said, Uchiha Madara signaled He Feng to stop massaging his little hands.
He turned the wheelchair and turned to look at He Feng, staring into He Feng's
eyes.
"He Feng, I only have two years left in my life. I have been fighting for this goal
all my life, but I am still doing nothing. Are you willing to inherit my dream and
fight to make the ninja world no longer have wars?"
What Uchiha Madara said was sincere. For a moment, he was moved by the story he
made up. He even considered whether his Eye of the Moon plan was correct for a
moment, but the next second, Uchiha Madara was determined again. target.
Sage of Six Paths is a loser. His ninja sect did not bring long-term peace to the
ninja world.
He will not follow in the footsteps of the Sage of Six Paths. He will bring
permanent peace to the ninja world through the Eye of the Moon.
Hearing what Madara Uchiha said, Hefeng was also shocked.
What's going on, is Madara enlightened?
Isn’t this a plan to unify the ninja world?
If we really follow the plan mentioned by Madara, then we can completely establish
the initial empire in the ninja world. Without considering the threat of Otsutsuki
in the future, the empire established by the power of the Ten-Tails cannot be
overthrown. .
Coupled with the prototypes of various systems in Hefeng's head, and the brains of
the Nara clan, this is no more than ten thousand times better than the Eye of the
Moon plan.
At this moment, He Feng couldn't even tell whether Old Bantou really thought that
way or if he was just making up a story to fool himself.
But He Feng didn’t think too much about it.
Just agree first and then talk!
"I know what Grandpa Madara means. As long as Grandpa Madara unifies the ninja
world and creates a unique country. In this country, Grandpa Madara is the person
with the most power and can speak the truth. Then if resource problems arise again,
those people will take the lead. Report it to Grandpa Madara instead of starting it
on your own."
Listening to He Feng's supplements to his plan, Ban was a little surprised and
could only pretend to understand and nodded: "Ah, yes, yes."
――――
Today the third update has been delivered, totaling nearly 7,000 words.
Ah Shuang once again thanks the book friends for their reminders and gifts.
I hope all book friends will support me and help He Feng’s story go further.
(〃'��'〃)

Chapter 53 I never trust anyone

Ban also reached out his hand and gently rubbed He Feng's head just like he did to
his younger brother.
"He Feng, you have been here with me for a while, why didn't you let Bai Jue tell
the people in Konoha about your safety?" Madara asked calmly.
At this time, his mentality was no longer the questioning when he first met He
Feng, but the doubts and concerns coming from an old man.
Ban is very ambitious and will not give up on his plan even if his life is about to
end. He Feng is just his chosen representative to fill the gap in the years after
his death and prevent the plan from being stagnant for too long and causing
mistakes.
But he doesn't mind living in another way in his last few years.
He Feng shook his head: "Since no one in this ninja world knows the news that
Grandpa Madara is still alive, it means that Grandpa Madara doesn't want others to
know. If I tell everyone in Konoha the news that I am here, they will definitely If
they come to me, Grandpa Madara will be at risk of being exposed."
There is one thing He Feng has not said yet, and that is that after he was brought
here and 'disappeared' by Ban, everyone's favorability seems to have exceeded a
threshold.The sky began to rise.
Even his elder brother Kakashi, who had not given him a favorable impression for
several years, began to see pictures of his favorability rising.
Therefore, He Feng gave up the idea of reporting safety. As the saying goes, a
short farewell is better than a wedding. He Feng really wanted to see other
people's expressions when he returned to Konoha, and the favorable impressions on
the screen.
After all, this is about He Feng's potential, and it can only be said that Kakashi
and the others are suffering.
Madara smiled, "It doesn't matter, Hefeng, you just need to say that you are safe,
but it will take some time before you can return to Konoha."
Ban is very tolerant of He Feng, which has something to do with the fact that He
Feng makes him feel at peace by his side.
"I was thinking of giving Brother Kakashi, Sister Tsunade and the others a surprise
when I go back later." He Feng said in a low voice.
After hearing this, Uchiha Madara no longer dwelled on the matter and continued to
speak to He Feng.
"He Feng, since you don't want to return to Konoha for the time being, I will give
you a task.
There is an organization in Amegakure Village called Akatsuki. Uzumaki Nagato in
the Akatsuki organization inherited my eyes. He is the guarantee for my future
resurrection. I hope you can help me plan Nagato's future path and let him work for
us. Work together with a unified plan instead of clinging to the house games
organized by Akatsuki. "
With that said, Madara Uchiha waved his hand: "Hei Zetsu, hand over the information
about Yuyin Village and Akatsuki Organization to He Feng."
--------------------xxxx--------------------
Hei Jue disappeared from the spot with a smile on his face, and soon he came to He
Feng with a booklet in his hand.
"He Feng, this is all the information about Yuyin Village, including information
about all the ninjas in Yuyin Village."
Hefeng nodded and said to Madara: "Okay, Grandpa Madara, I will guide Nagato well."
After saying that, He Feng opened the book in his hand. The contents recorded on it
were very detailed, ranging from how many ninjas there were in Yuyin Village
including the Akatsuki organization, to what each ninja's name and strength were. .
Obviously, Madara specially ordered Bai Jue to investigate. It is possible that
Madara had already had the idea of letting He Feng guide Nagato.
After He Feng flipped through the book and roughly wrote down the contents, he
handed it back to Hei Jue.
"Grandpa Ban, should I leave now?" He Feng asked.
Uchiha nodded, stretched out his hand to He Feng and then activated Wood Release.
Immediately afterwards, a whirlpool mask made of wood appeared in Uchiha Madara's
hands.
"Hefeng, just put on this mask and act as Uchiha. I hope I can see your three
magatama and even your Mangekyō Sharingan next time I see you."
Hefeng took the mask from Ban's hand again and put it on his face.
There was no discomfort after wearing the mask, and the field of view was very
clear. It was obvious that the spots were made according to He Feng's face shape.
"It's too slow to walk on foot. Let Bai Jue come and see you off."
He Feng nodded, and then a flying thunder god left the underground base.
After He Feng left, Ban looked at Hei Jue and said, "Hei Jue, what do you think of
He Feng now?"
Hei Jue was stunned and didn't think much about it, "He Feng performed very well. I
think he can be trusted. He will well implement the unification plan explained to
him by Master Ban. I believe that with He Feng's strength, Ban will succeed in the
future." After the master is resurrected, the collection of tailed beasts is almost
done."
Madara closed his eyes, "No, for the perfect success of the Eye of the Moon plan, I
will not trust anyone, even if this person is Hashirama..."
Looking at Uchiha Madara Black Zetsu who fell into silence, he was also a little
panicked.
"It's over. I seem to be in trouble this time. Uchiha Madara won't doubt me,
right?" If Uchiha Madara is really suspicious of me, it will be difficult.
"Hei Jue, do you think I can trust you?"
Hei Jue looked at Madara sharply and spoke quickly: "I am Lord Madara's will, and
Lord Madara's thoughts are my thoughts."
"Go and ask Bai Jue to keep an eye on He Feng for me and report everything he did
to me. Then you can stay with me."
Uchiha Madara's tone left no room for doubt. Even if Black Zetsu had other
thoughts, he could only respond honestly: "I understand, Madara-sama."
……
While He Feng took the Bai Jue underground train to Yuyin Village, the conflict
between Yuyin Village and the Xiao organization also intensified.
As the Akatsuki organization continues to grow, Shimura Danzo's reminder that day
lingers in Sanho Hanzo's ears.
"Hey... Yahiko, I originally admired you very much. Why do you insist on being
attached to the Akatsuki organization? You just need to merge under my command."
Sanshouyu Hanzo spoke slowly, having already made a certain decision in his heart.
kind of decision.
"..."
Within the Xiao organization.
With a happy smile on his face, Yahiko ran quickly inside the Akatsuki
organization's base.
"Chief Yahiko is going to find Deputy Chief Nagato again."
"right."
"Leader Yahiko, you are still so handsome today!"
"Haha, thank you, you are handsome too."
"Brother Yahiko, I have mastered the Water Release Ninjutsu you taught me before.
When will you teach me the next one?"
"You are so powerful, then I will teach you the next ninjutsu when I have time."
Along the way, members of the Akatsuki organization greeted Yahiko warmly.
Yahiko also responded to each other's enthusiasm one by one.
Everyone in the Akatsuki organization is full of vigor, has the same ambition, and
works hard for the companions. They sincerely recognize the three leaders and
support each other unswervingly.
Soon, Yahiko came to Nagato and Konanthe place where it is located.
The two are practicing ninjutsu at this time. After all, the development of any
road requires the support of strength. If Yahiko, Nagato, and Konan are not strong
enough to defeat genin, others must consider the leader's ability before joining
the Akatsuki organization. No longer can you protect yourself in critical moments.
"Nagato, Konan, good news, good news, good news!!" Yahiko said panting with his
hands on his knees.
Xiaonan smiled softly and said, "Don't be anxious, just say it slowly if you have
anything to say."

Chapter 54 Rescue Nagato

"Yahiko, just speak slowly, we are listening." Nagato stopped practicing his
ninjutsu and looked at Yahiko with concern.
The three of them, Nagato Yahiko and Konan, have been dependent on each other since
childhood, so the relationship between them naturally goes without saying.
Yahiko calmed down for a while, and then said with excitement: "Hanzo-sama has
agreed to cooperate with our Akatsuki organization. Hanzo-sama said that he will
lead our Akatsuki organization to negotiate with other great ninjas to persuade
them to stop the war.
With the help of Hanzo-sama, our Akatsuki organization's goal will be successfully
achieved!
I really want to see the day when countries and villages can achieve peace through
mutual exchanges and understanding. "
Although Yahiko lost his family due to the war, he did not hate others and still
maintained his desire for peace.
Konan and Nagato also support Yahiko unconditionally, and sincerely believe that
Yahiko's dream and the dream of the Akatsuki organization will one day come true.
"Then let's set off as soon as possible. If Hanzo-sama helps, even the shadows of
the five great ninja villages will give him face. Hanzo-sama is called a demigod."
Nagato was a little emotional. Although Master Jiraiya said that he had the eyes of
a god and was responsible for bringing new changes to the ninja world, Nagato was
still not confident and would try his best to cover his eyes with his hair. stand
up.
For Nagato, as long as he can help Yahiko realize his dream from behind, it will be
fine. After all, Yahiko's dream is his dream.
Looking at Nagato's expression, which was even more excited than his own, Yahiko
hesitated to speak.
Konan glanced at Yahiko, and then asked: "Hanzo-sama should be very busy as the
leader of Amegakure Village. Does he need us to do anything?"
Yahiko nodded, "Hanzo-sama hopes to talk to the three of us in person."
Nagato was stunned for a moment, then nodded: "That's right. Talking to the Kage of
the Great Ninja Village requires a long-term plan. So when should we set off?"
Yahiko said without any hesitation, "Let's go now."
"..."
Outside Yuyin Village, the petite He Feng stood on the trunk of a big tree, looking
at Yuyin Village with a large number of tower-shaped buildings.
The industrial facilities in Amegakure Village are very developed, especially the
underground drainage system which is much more developed than Konoha.
This is also related to the almost never-ending heavy rain in the Rain Country.
"A Fei, do you know what kind of person Nagato is? What do you think of the mission
that Grandpa Madara gave me?" He Feng turned his head and looked at Bai Jue
standing next to him and asked.
Bai Jue A Fei held an umbrella made of wood for He Feng, and was a little
distracted by He Feng's question: "I didn't do Nagato's surveillance mission, and I
don't know very well. I also don't know what Madara-sama thinks. .”
He Feng had a headache and said, "Then what do you know?"
Ah Fei replied: "I know that humans all have the urge to defecate but Bai Jue does
not. Hefeng, do you know what the urge to defecate feels like?"
He Feng was completely speechless and jumped down from the tree without bothering
to communicate with A Fei.
A Fei also quickly followed He Feng's footsteps, holding an umbrella for He Feng
dutifully to ensure that He Feng would not get wet from the rain.
At this time, White Zetsu, who was lurking in the Land of Rain and was responsible
for monitoring Nagato, emerged from the ground.
"Lord He Feng, Hei Jue has told me his plan. I will lead the way for you."
Bai Jue visited almost all of Yuyin Village. He knew that it was easy to enter
without being detected by the ninjas of Yuyin Village.
At this time, Yuyin Village was not yet in the period of Payne's administration,
and Payne had not used his Yuhu Free Technique to envelope Yuyin Village, so
Hefeng's actions in Yuyin Village could be said to be indifferent.
Those Yu Ren could not detect He Feng at all.
Just like that, He Feng wore a mask and walked calmly on the road to Yuyin Village
with both hands. A Fei followed He Feng holding an umbrella.
The place where Hanzo asked Yahiko and the three to negotiate was not in the office
in the central tower, but in an empty open space outside Amegakure Village.
Out of respect for Hanzo, the three of Yahiko did not doubt each other too much.
The three of them wore raincoats and arrived at the location requested by Hanzo as
promised. They saw a man on the hillside holding his chest and wearing a respirator
mask. He was not wearing a raincoat or other clothing to cover up.
The heavy rain from the sky fell on Hanzo, but Hanzo didn't care.
"You are here, Yahiko, Nagato, and Konan." Sansho Hanzo looked at the three of them
proudly. It was these three who attracted almost 40% of the young ninjas in
Amegakure Village to join the Akatsuki organization.
Although the three of them are still young and are not ninjas who are based on
combat prowess, Hanzo still cautiously brought a dozen Amegakure village jounin and
nearly a hundred chuunin genin. These jounin are all his rotating bodyguards and
can be regarded as Hanzo's confidants. .
One part stood beside Hanzo and protected Hanzo, while the other part launched an
attack on the three of them with the chuunin and genin.
"Hanzo-sama, I..."
After seeing Hanzo, Yahiko spoke first, but was directly interrupted by Hanzo.
"No need to say any more, there is no way I can agree to what you said.
Yahiko, it would be better to try in vain to persuade me to agree to your false and
empty words.Instead of using a plan, it is better to think about how you three
leaders of the Akatsuki organization can return to the base of your Akatsuki
organization alive. "
Hanzo waved his hand directly and said coldly: "Do it."
As Hanzo finished speaking, nearly a hundred cold-faced ninjas suddenly appeared
around him.
These people don't care whether what Yahiko and others do is considered a good
thing. They only know that these people in front of them will be detrimental to
their beloved Hanzo-sama.
"This! Hanzo..." Yahiko's eyes widened, and he couldn't believe it for a moment. He
raised his head and looked at the figure on the hillside.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
"No! Yahiko Konan, get out of the way!" As a member of the Uzumaki clan, Nagato has
an innate sense of chakra. It's okay to say that a spell has not been activated,
but before it is activated, Nagato can sense its weak chakra. carat.
As expected, Hanzo suddenly began to form seals on the hillside
"Fire Release: Explosive Flame Formation!" As Hanzo completed the seal, the
detonating talisman buried under the feet of Nagato and others was triggered.
"Wind Release, Gale Palm!" Nagato formed the seal quickly. He was proficient in
almost all mainstream ninjutsu. Although he was usually taciturn, he was the
quickest to judge a crisis among the three.
With the release of Nagato's ninjutsu, Yahiko and Konan felt a strong wind
pressure, and this wind pressure blew towards the two of them, directly blowing
them out of the range of the detonating flame formation.
After fighting for Yahiko and Konan's life in desperation, Nagato did not give up,
but formed the seal again.
"Thunder Escape..."
--------------------xxxx--------------------

After all, Nagato's hand seal was not just a matter of clapping his hands and
shouting. On the way to use the second thunder escape ninjutsu to smash the
detonating talisman covering his legs, the detonating talisman also completed its
activation and exploded.
At this time, Nagato was not good at using the Rinnegan, and would often use the
more skilled Chakra Escape Technique to deal with the enemy.
"Nagato!" After Yahiko and Konan reacted, they also saw the scene where Nagato was
in the center of the detonating symbol and was swallowed up by the explosion.
The two of them rushed towards the place where Nagato was with great heartache,
ignoring the flames caused by the detonating talisman.
"Shinra Tensei..." Nagato's weak voice came from the center of the detonating
talisman.
An invisible repulsive force appeared from the center of the detonating talisman.
Nagato's hair was disheveled, his body was covered with burn marks, and there were
weak flames burning in his legs.
Konan and Yahiko were knocked away by the Shinra Tensei released by Nagato. After
landing, they looked at Nagato who was still alive and breathed a sigh of relief
despite being heartbroken.
But with just this breath, the two of them were successfully captured alive by the
ninja jonin of Yuyin Village.
Konan and Yahiko, whom Nagato saved at the cost of serious injuries, were captured
alive, but he was helpless and felt a twinge of pain in his heart.
He looked at Hanzo the Sanshouyu who was halfway up the slope with eyes filled with
hatred and murderous intent.
Hanzo, even as a demigod, was intimidated by Nagato's eyes, "This!"
Hanzo had also heard the legend of the Sage of Six Paths. In addition, people from
the Akatsuki organization always said that their deputy leader was the
reincarnation of the Sage of Six Paths, which also made Hanzo fearful.
"Kill them for me." Hanzo continued to order, but he still watched from a distance
and did not take action.
As Hanzo finished speaking, the Jonin who captured Konan and Yahiko raised his
kunai and was about to kill them.
"No! Damn it!!!" Nagato let out a heart-wrenching cry, and then his heart was
filled with an emotion called anger.
"Necromantic Technique: Heretic Golem!" Nagato did not form any seals, but just
slapped the ground with one hand.
A huge figure appeared behind Nagato. It had a humanoid body and nine closed eyes.
Its color and body were like dead wood, and there were ten pillars protruding from
its back.
The next second, a total of twelve black chakra rods shot out from the body of the
outside demon, inserted directly into Nagato's back, pierced into Nagato's internal
organs, and absorbed the abundant chakra in Nagato's body. .
Although Nagato looked very weak at this time, he looked murderous.
"Ahhhhhh!!!" Nagato controlled the heretic golem, and instead of looking in the
direction of Yahiko and Konan, he turned to attack Sansho Hanzo on the hillside.
After all, some time had passed since Hanzo gave the order to kill the two. Nagato
could not accept the pain of losing Yahiko and Konan, so he could only turn his
attention to Hanzo the Sanshouyu.
After seeing the heretic demon channeled by Nagato, Hanzo already understood that
his trip had failed and his life was even in danger.
Hanzo is already old, and with Nagato's appearance, Hanzo doesn't think Nagato can
live much longer. He doesn't want to confront Nagato head-on.
"Sansho Hanzo, I want you to be in the same pain as me!" Nagato roared, and then
controlled the outsider demon to use the ability of the human world.
Nagato wanted to seal Hanzo's soul into the heretic demon. No matter how severe his
pain was, he wanted to make Hanzo experience a pain that was a thousand times
greater than his.
However, even though Hanzo is old, his accumulated experience is far beyond what
Nagato can achieve.
At the critical moment, Hanzo used a water avatar to leave an identical version of
himself on the spot. After the Nine Phantom Dragon Seals fell, Hanzo quickly used
water to teleport away from this place of right and wrong.
Seeing Hanzo escape, the unwilling Nagato turned his attention to the other ninjas.
These people are all guilty of participating in the killing of Yahiko KonanThe
culprit.
"Let's all die!"
To deal with these ninjas, Nagato did not intend to seal them, but directly used
Chakra Dragon to harvest their lives as easily as cutting rice.
After seeing everyone on the field fall to the ground and he was the only one
standing there, Nagato also closed his eyes in pain, and then fell heavily to the
ground.
The heretic demon statue just stood there like a demon, and the chakra rod
continued to absorb Nagato's chakra.
"Senior, please save Nagato. If you can save Konan and I in an instant, you will
definitely be able to cure Nagato. Please!" Yahiko knelt on the ground in a soil
seat position and buried his head deeply in the sun. The ground begged the
mysterious man in front of him.
Just now, it was the other party who saved him and Xiaonan in an instant. He must
also have a way to save Nagato.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
Yahiko kept praying in his heart. Just now, he watched from a distance as Nagato
was in hell but unable to go to help.
And all this is because of his useless plan that Sanshouyu Hanzo calls fake empty.
At this moment, Yahiko's inner pain was not weaker than Nagato's.
Seeing this, Xiao Nan also knelt down to beg He Feng, but He Feng held him up with
his hands.
"There is a reason why I didn't let you go to help just now. Even if Nagato in that
state could recognize you two, he might not be able to hold on to you.
There is a price to pay for using power far beyond your own strength. "
He Feng's voice was plain, so naturally he had to use different methods to increase
his favorability with different identities.
"You two, come with me. Twenty percent of Nagato's injuries at this time are due to
the detonating talisman, and the other eighty percent are due to the heretic demon
that he channeled."
With that said, Hefeng took the lead and walked towards the place where Changmen
fell.
Ah Fei still acts as a tool man, holding an umbrella for He Feng.
He Feng also asked Ah Fei about this, and Ah Fei's answer was simple: "Because Hei
Jue asked me to take good care of you, and I like to be by your side and take care
of you."
He Feng could only let A Fei do his best.
After arriving at Nagato's side, even the well-informed He Feng couldn't help but
take a breath for Nagato's injury.
Nagato is now lying on the ground in a coma, his back is filled with chakra rods
connected to the heretic demons.
He Feng touched the black rod with his hand and immediately felt his chakra drain
away.
"You two help me hold down the Nagato door, and don't make any sound for a while."
He Fengtou said to Yahiko and Xiaonan without even looking back.
"Okay senior, we will definitely hold Nagato down." The two said in unison.
He Feng nodded, and then stretched out his hand.
The next second, huge thunder escape chakra and fairy magic chakra appeared from He
Feng's hand.
"Senfa Raikiri."
Hefeng didn't say anything, he waved his hand and cut off all the black sticks
behind Nagato.
The black rod's absorption of chakra to Nagato came to an abrupt end.
He Feng withdrew the thunder cutter, and then quickly pulled out the black rods one
after another.
After these black chakra rods were pulled out, the ground was covered with blood
flowing from Nagato's body.
With this amount of bleeding, no one from the Uzumaki clan would be able to
survive.
He Feng squatted down and his hands lit up with green fluorescence.
After being strengthened by senjutsu, the healing ability of palm senjutsu has been
improved again, and Nagato is slowly recovering from wounds on his internal organs
and body surface.
Seeing this, Yahiko Xiaonan, who was a little nervous, breathed a sigh of relief.
――――
There are only two chapters today, but this chapter is 4,000 words long. Readers
who have read it can remind me to update it. All the data in a book are very
important to Ashuang.
If there are typos, you can mark them in the comment section, and A Shuang will
read all comments.

Chapter 55 New Vest: Uchiha Wind

Inside the Akatsuki organization base.
Nagato lay quietly on the wooden bed.
Yahiko and Konan were a little nervous. They were like this after Nagato turned the
corner. They lowered their heads and did not dare to look at the mysterious man
wearing the Uzumaki mask in front of them. They felt like they had done something
wrong and been discovered by their parents.
For the two of them, the mysterious man in front of them is their and Nagato's
savior, a benefactor who needs to spend their entire lives to thank them.
As for the identity and purpose of the other party, they don't care.
After experiencing Hanzo's backstab, both Nagato, who was lying in bed and had not
yet woken up, and Yahiko Konan, who was nervous with his head lowered, have grown
up. They are no longer as childish as they were at the beginning. They understand.
There are some things you can't do just by talking.
"Xiaonan, Yahiko, it's been such a long time. How are you thinking? Do you have
anything to say?" He Feng's voice was cold, and he was trying to make his voice
more dignified.
After all, He Feng has not yet reached the stage of changing his voice, and his
voice is still more feminine. In addition, his own voice is very soft. If he speaks
in a normal posture, it is very likely that the words originally meant to be
scolded will come out of He Feng's mouth. It's changed.
"Senior, I was too naive. I didn't realize that Hanzo had wanted to kill us
Akatsuki for a long time. Nagato had to pay such a heavy price to protect Konan and
me." Yahiko looked over unconsciously when he spoke. Nagato's eyes were full of
guilt that could not be concealed.
"It's because Yahiko and I were too weak. We didn't even react to the sudden
attack. In the end, Nagato had to pay the price to protect Yahiko and me." Xiaonan
could see clearly that Hanzo was definitely the reason why Nagato was seriously
injured and dying. backstab.
But this is also inseparable from her and Yahiko's weakness.Open a relationship.
Ming Ming studied with Mr. Jiraiya in the early years, but Nagato was able to
master all escape techniques and ninjutsu, while she could only learn very few
ninjutsus. In the end, she could only find another way to use the origami she was
good at to develop techniques. Paper secrets.
"That's right, it's all my fault for being too weak. I actually naively thought
that the first factor in achieving Akatsuki's ideals is not strength, but that
illusory belief."
Looking at the two people in front of him who were extremely self-blaming, He Feng
also understood that his goal had been achieved.
"I am very satisfied that you can clearly realize your own shortcomings. I have
been observing your Akatsuki organization for a long time. Akatsuki's goal is
great, but some things cannot be achieved just by having a great goal. of.
I have some connection with Jiraiya. Jiraiya taught you how to use ninjutsu and how
to protect yourself in the war-torn ninja world, but he did not teach you what
faith is and what is human heart. Faith can change over time. It can change, and so
can the human heart.
Since you guys have already started calling me senior, I will naturally do
something that seniors should do.
I will stay in Yuyin Village for a while, and during this period I will guide you
on how to lead the Akatsuki organization in the longer term, and what is the true
path to peace.
If you have anything you don’t understand or want to know, you can ask me. "
Having said this, He Feng under the mask looked at Ya Yan.
"Yahiko, I hope you can let me see a different Akatsuki organization."
"I will do it! Senior!" Yahiko was a little excited. He longed for the true peace
that senior said. This was his dream all along. Even though this incident made him
realize his naivety, Yahiko still did not put his dream into practice. give up.
Or in other words, if Yahiko gives up his ideal of realizing world peace, then he
will no longer be Yahiko.
"Senior, how should we call you?" Xiaonan asked timidly.
Xiao Nan is four years older than He Feng, but she is as shy as a child in front of
He Feng.
In other words, the fourteen-year-old Xiaonan is just a child. It is this unhealthy
ninja world that makes fourteen-year-old boys and girls work hard for peace every
day.
"My name is Uchiha Feng. What you call me is your own business." He Feng, who was
wearing a mask, told lies one after another without any psychological burden at
all.
After all, he is wearing a vest now. What does what Uchiha Feng does have to do
with Hatake Hefeng?
Although He Feng's tone was cold, Xiao Nan was not as timid as she was at first
after getting He Feng's vest name. She looked at He Feng with her big watery eyes.
"Teacher Feng, please give me your advice in the future." Xiaonan's voice was soft,
and the gentle wind mixed in it was only heard from Tsunade.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

For a moment, He Feng felt like he was being teased.

Damn it! This succubus physique is acting without permission again!
"Senior Feng, thank you again for saving the lives of the three of us." Mi Yan
solemnly bowed to He Feng with a ninety-degree bow.
"Well..." At this moment, Nagato, who was lying on the wooden bed, murmured softly,
and then faintly woke up.
After waking up, Nagato's eyes were full of confusion, "Yahiko... Konan..."
Nagato didn't get up, he just stared at the ceiling blankly and opened his mouth.
The pain of losing his best friend even prevented him from noticing where he was
and the changes in his body.
"Nagato! You finally woke up." Yahiko and Konan were very happy and quickly came to
the bed and looked at each other with concern.
Nagato looked at the two of them in confusion, and understood something in his
heart.
"Ah, am I dead too? This is the kingdom of heaven..." Nagato sighed, then looked at
the two of them with a smile on his lips: "Yahiko, Konan, long time no see."
Looking at Nagato's strange expression, Xiaonan couldn't hold it in any longer.
"Pfft--" Xiaonan covered her mouth and laughed.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
"Nagato, you are not dead, and neither are Konan and I. It was Feng-senpai who
saved us, and your injury was also cured by Feng-senpai." Yahiko patiently
explained to Nagato what happened during this period. .
【Trigger critical strike】
[Favorability from Nagato +10]
【Acquire advanced mental strength enhancement】
[Obtain the primary immortal body]
After Nagato's favorability level exploded, Hefeng felt that his mental power was
improving again. The second magatama sharingan, which had been cultivated to the
limit and was just one step away, also evolved into a third magatama at this
moment. Sharingan.
He Feng's immortal body has also been improved to a certain extent, and he is only
one step away from being promoted to a high-level immortal body.
He Feng called out his system panel.
【Name: Qimu Hefeng】
【Sex: Male】
[Age: 10 years old]
【Race: Human (Succubus)】
[Item: 600 million taels, fragments of the Eight Gate Dunjia Formation (5/8)]
[Level: Shadow (Super Shadow)]
[Abilities: Hatake Sword Technique, Five Escape Mastery, Illusion Mastery, Time and
Space Ninjutsu Mastery, Illusion Resistance, Shikkotsu Senjutsu, Psychic Technique,
Intermediate Immortal Body (90%), Three Magatama Sharingan, Indra Rochakra]
At this time, He Feng has gathered some of the necessary conditions for the ninja
world to become a six-path powerhouse.
The Sharingan has been further evolved, waiting for Naruto to be born or the dirt
to come out to brush Hashirama's favorability and gain Asura Chakra, and waiting
for Orochimaru's teacher toHashirama's cells have been thoroughly studied to unlock
the power of Wood Release.
At that time, He Feng can fully rely on the various elements he has accumulated to
open his own reincarnation eye.
He Feng is not too anxious about this. What he has achieved now is already dazzling
enough, far exceeding what he should have achieved at the age of ten.
Therefore, He Feng is not greedy. He can wait for a long time.
Yahiko and Xiaonan repeated what He Feng had just said to Nagato. Nagato, who knew
that his situation was dangerous, got off the bed with Yahiko's help.
Although Nagato received effective treatment, he was still a little weak.
He staggered to He Feng and said, "I am very grateful to Senior Feng for saving my
life! I hope Senior Feng can help me clear up my doubts."
Looking at Nagato, who still had hatred and pain in his eyes, Hefeng nodded and
said slowly: "Okay, tell me the doubts in your heart, Nagato."
"Senior Feng, why would Hanzo attack us? Is it because he has not experienced the
pain that members of our Akatsuki organization have experienced? If he had
experienced the same pain as us, would he have agreed with our Akatsuki proposal?"
At this time, Nagato had already shown signs of insisting on resisting rice. Hefeng
knew that if he did not enlighten Nagato well, he would definitely turn into Kami
and resist rice into Konoha in the future.
After organizing some words in his mind, He Fengyu explained to Nagato with great
sincerity: "Nagato, before asking me this question, you first ask yourself what you
think in your heart. If time comes over again, How will you handle this incident?"
Because He Feng was the savior of the three of them, even if Nagato had the idea of
resisting rice at this time, he could still listen to what He Feng said.
After some thought, Nagato said firmly: "I will let Hanzo feel the pain of loss in
advance and let him know that peace is hard-won. I believe that Hanzo, who has
experienced pain, will definitely understand our Akatsuki philosophy."
He Feng nodded and asked: "Then why don't you just let the Kage from the Five Ninja
Villages feel the pain of loss? In that case, will the Kage from the Five Ninja
Villages also agree with your ideas."
Nagato was startled. He felt that what Senior Feng said made sense. The reason why
they wanted to cooperate with Hanzo was because Hanzo's influence could directly
see the influence of the five major countries. In addition, they planned to use
conversation to make the five major ninja villages Give up war and have no idea of
using violence at all.
But things are different now. After he channeled the heretic demon, although the
load on his body increased and he almost died, he became more comfortable in using
the Samsara Eye.
He also knew that his eyes contained the power to destroy a ninja village with one
blow.
Nagato felt that he had discovered a blind spot, and immediately said excitedly:
"Senior Feng, you are right, I should go to the five major countries to let them
understand the pain. With the five major ninja villages as an example, the Akatsuki
organization can achieve the goal of world peace. Achieved."
He Feng: "..."
He Feng did not reply, but glanced at A Fei, who was squatting aside and doing
something unknown.
As if sensing something, Ah Fei jumped to He Feng's side and handed the umbrella
made of wood to He Feng.
Hefeng took the umbrella and knocked Nagato on the head.
It's not that he doesn't want to knock with his hands, it's mainly because Nagato
is now about 1.65 meters tall, while He Feng is 1.4 meters tall and can knock on
his toes with his hands.
"Idiot, if pain can really make people realize peace, then the five ninja villages
that have experienced war will understand what pain is better than anyone else."

Chapter 56 Teacher Feng, I miss you so much

Nagato touched the place where He Feng had just knocked with his hand.
Point by point, the favorability level rose from the top of Nagato's head, which
made He Feng wonder if Nagato had awakened to some strange hobby.
Shaking away the bad thoughts in his mind, Hefeng said seriously again: "Nagato
people can never understand each other."
Nagato was surprisingly stubborn about He Feng's words. He didn't believe that
people couldn't understand each other. After all, Yahiko and Xiaonan could
understand each other.
He Feng asked: "Then do you understand what I am thinking now?"
Nagato shook his head. He wanted to say that we haven’t known each other for a long
time. If we were familiar, I could guess it even if you didn’t tell me, Senior
Feng.
"Then if I am the murderer of Yahiko and Konan, can you still understand me and
forgive me? After all, only if you forgive me can peace be achieved. If you kill
me, then my 'relatives' will hold grudges for it. You, thereby finding you and
wanting to kill you.
At what point will you kill my ‘relatives’?
Become a ‘saint’ who leads peace and let the bonds of hatred end in your hands.
It is better to kill to stop killing and let hatred continue from generation to
generation. "
Hefeng's words not only made Nagato fall into deep thought, but also Yahiko and
Xiaonan.
They are seriously thinking about whether they can forgive those people if someone
really kills Nagato (Yahiko) (Konan).
However, the truth is cruel. Even if they have been working hard to achieve peace,
they cannot become the saints He Feng said.
"I seem to understand, Senior Feng." Yahiko sighed, and he understood his naivety
again.
Xiao Nan said nothing, but her expression betrayed him.
She cannot forgive the enemy who killed her best friend.
He Feng was not surprised by this. It is human nature to be unable to forgive.
People like Naruto beginThose who are ultimately in the romantic ideal state are
the minority among the minority.
"You understand this time, Nagato. It is impossible to fundamentally cut off
hatred, and it is also impossible to make people give up hatred with greater pain.
There is only one direction to achieve true peace, and that is It’s great unity.”
Nagato suddenly raised his head. Although he didn't know what the great unity He
Feng was talking about was, it struck him as thunderous.
"Senior Feng! Please tell me what the great unity is." Nagato said excitedly.
Under the mask, He Feng smiled. His smile was just like Madara Uchiha's smile when
he taught He Feng not long ago.
"In the following time, I will slowly teach you what the Great Unification is and
how to lead Akatsuki to achieve world peace."
"..."
Time passed slowly, and in the blink of an eye Hefeng stayed in Yuyin Village for a
while.
During this period of time, He Feng also asked Bai Jue to go to the battlefield of
Konoha Village to investigate the current situation of the war.
Although he has no plans to return to Konoha for the time being, if something
happens to Konoha or Kakashi Obito, he will still go back to help.
What reassures He Feng is that the four major ninja villages have now entered a
cooling-off period of the war. They need to face the trouble of transporting
supplies for long-term operations, but Konoha does not.
As long as Konoha cuts off the opponent's supply line, the opponent's attack will
be greatly slowed down.
"In this case, I won't need to return to Konoha in a short time." He Feng waved his
hand to Bai Jue, who was investigating information for him, to step back.
咚咚——
There was a knock on the door.
"Come in." He Feng maintained a cold tone.
Opening the door, Xiao Nan had a bun and was wearing tight purple trousers and a
zippered backless top. She was wearing a black cloak with white edges and red
clouds.
Hefeng looked up and saw the lip stud at the bottom of Xiaonan's lips and the small
ring on her belly button.
During this period of time, Xiao Nan has changed tremendously. Almost in the blink
of an eye, she has changed from a quiet and gentle girl to a ruthless and proud
angel.
"Teacher Feng, why didn't you go to class with us today? I miss you so much." Xiao
Nan walked to He Feng's bed, squatted down and laid her face on He Feng's lap.
Since experiencing Hanzo's misfortune, only in Hefeng can Xiaonan experience the
feeling of peace of mind again. Although Xiaonan is calm and composed, she is
particularly bold in relationships and never hides her love for Hefeng.
At this time, Xiao Nan was already 1.69 meters tall, nearly thirty centimeters
taller than He Feng. When the two of them stood together, He Feng was like a small
potato.
"Xiaonan, you are the White Tiger of Xiaonan. It is nothing for the Angel of Xiao
to act coquettishly with the teacher. If outsiders see it, they will still laugh to
death." He Feng helplessly rubbed Xiaonan's head. His technique was extremely good
and Didn't mess up Konan's hair.
To be honest, this experience is new to He Feng. After all, he has always played
the role of Xiao Nan before this, and the person sitting here should be Tsunade.
"I don't care, I just like to stay with Teacher Feng, and for building an empire,
Nagato and Yahiko are enough. Nagato is currently very busy collecting information
on Pain's Six Paths.
Yahiko is also practicing the Water Release Ninjutsu given to him by his teacher.
If nothing happens to me, then of course I will accompany my teacher. "
Xiao Nan smiled, she felt that the smell of Teacher Feng was getting better and
better.
"Okay, I understand, let me get up first." He Feng patted Xiao Nan on the shoulder
and stopped pretending to be cold.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

After hearing this, Xiaonan stood up and looked at He Feng's whirlpool mask.
"Teacher Feng wears a mask all the time and doesn't even take it off when sleeping.
What does it look like under the mask?" Xiaonan couldn't help but think in her
heart.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
She wanted to step forward and take off Teacher Feng's mask, but out of respect for
Teacher Feng and fear that Teacher Feng would be angry and ignore her, Xiaonan did
not choose to take action.
Hefeng seemed not to notice Xiaonan's little thoughts and said slowly:
"Xonan, use your paper crane to inform Nagato Yahiko, hasn't he been looking for
someone strong enough to become a puppet of Heaven? I think Sansho Hanzo is quite
suitable."
Hearing this, Xiaonan's eyes lit up. The teacher was going to take revenge on
Sansho Hanzo for her!
Although Xiaonan didn't like Sansho Hanzo's face, considering the opponent's
strength, he was still qualified to be Nagato's puppet of heaven.
"Okay, Teacher Feng, I'll notify Nagato and Yahiko right away."
With that said, Konan formed seals and released ninjutsu.
Two pieces of paper floated out from her hands that turned into paper, and then
automatically folded into the shape of a paper crane in the sky. The next second,
the paper crane flapped its wings and flew out of the open window.
It was still raining in Yuyin Village at this time, but Xiaonan's paper had been
specially treated and was not afraid of rain erosion.
After Zhihe left, Xiaonan separated a piece of paper in a corner where Hefeng
couldn't see.
This time she did not use ninjutsu, but quickly folded a white gardenia with her
hands.
"Teacher Feng gave it to you." Xiao Nan handed the flower to He Feng and said
sweetly, "Teacher Feng smells very similar to this flower."
Hefeng took the paper flowers and pinned them on his clothes under Xiaonan's gaze.
"Thank you, I like it very much."
"As long as Teacher Feng likes it."
Soon, get a smallThe two people who heard the news returned to the Akatsuki
organization base.
"Yahiko, Nagato, here." Konan waved to the two of them.
Because girls develop faster than boys, Xiaonan's height at this time is one or two
centimeters taller than the two of them. Coupled with Xiaonan's round head, the
difference is obvious.
The two of them were also wearing red cloud windbreakers with white edges and black
bottom designed by He Feng.
"Senior Feng, Xiaonan." The two greeted each other.
He Feng nodded and said nothing.
Xiao Nan repeated what He Feng said just now to the two of them.
"!" The two of them were very excited and almost couldn't wait to attack Hanzo.
He Feng said calmly: "The establishment of a huge empire always starts with a small
goal, and now I have set a small goal for the three of you.
That is to seize the political power of Amegakure Village from Hanzo and become the
real leader of Amegakure Village. As for whether to designate Hanzo as the
candidate for Heaven's Way, it depends on Nagato's own judgment. "
The two nodded firmly and responded: "I understand, Senior Feng! We will definitely
accomplish this goal."
Xiaonan also followed suit: "I will try my best to help."
"Very good, then let's go. I will go with you, so don't worry about anything. This
battle will be the best of Akatsuki."
"Yes! Senior Feng (teacher)."
……
Nagato and others did not hide their plans, and came to the outside of Yuyin
Village openly and openly.
The border guard ninjas of Amegakure discovered the three of them immediately. As
ninjas of Amegakure, they naturally knew that the Akatsuki organization also knew
the Nagato trio.
Precisely because they know each other, they also know that they are no match for
each other.
"You go inform Hanzo-sama, and I will stop him." A Jōnin from Yugakure said calmly.
In his opinion, even if he was defeated, he should be able to hold on for a while.
"Stop! This is the territory of Yuyin Village, you can't enter!" The jounin said
coldly.
After Hanzo fled back to Amegakure Village in embarrassment, he unilaterally
announced the news that Nagato and others had become Amegakure rebels.
Although there were no scratches on the forehead protectors of Nagato and others at
this time, they were already regarded as traitors by Amegakure, who supported
Hanzo.
"Hmph." Nagato snorted coldly, with invisible pressure in Samsara's eyes.
"All things Tenyin." Nagato stretched out his hand to the jounin.
The next second, the invisible gravity enveloped the jounin.
"What's going on! What kind of ninjutsu is this!" The jounin wanted to resist, but
found that he couldn't resist at all under this inexplicable force.
"Shiki no Jutsu: Seal." Xiaonan waved his hand gently, and countless specially
processed shikihi wrapped the jounin and quickly sealed him.
"Senior Feng said that if we want to unify all the villages in the ninja world and
establish an empire, population resources are indispensable. The combat power of a
jounin will still be helpful to the establishment of the empire." Yahiko looked at
the sealed one The jounin said.
――――
Today there are still two chapters updated, each chapter has 3,000 words.
Everyone can give Ah Shuang some free gifts for love to support Ah Shuang.

Chapter 57 The End of Demigod

Yuyin Village, in the central tower.
After Hanzo received the news from his subordinates about Nagato knocking on the
door, he kept walking in front of the window.
Hanzo thought that Nagato was close to death with that look, and the heretic demon
statue put too much pressure on Hanzo, so he did not return to finish the attack.
Unexpectedly, just one week later, the Xiao organization became active again, and
its behavior changed greatly.
The reactivated Akatsuki organization no longer tries to persuade ninjas to fight
when they see them. Instead, they use their own strength to intervene in the
battle, and the two ninjas who fight forcefully no longer fight.
As for being unable to defeat them, it happens from time to time. After all, in the
current Akatsuki organization, except for Nagato Yahiko and Konan, there is no one
who can be called a strong person.
"Damn Nagato." Hanzo gritted his teeth. He was debating whether he should retreat
or fight Nagato.
"That monster can't be channeled casually." Hanzo murmured to himself, as if he was
looking for his lost pride and ambition.
"Hanzo-sama! Nagato of the Akatsuki organization has already entered Amegakure
Village. Our ninjas are no match for the three of them." Another Amegakure came to
Hanzo. He knelt on the ground and said loudly:
"Hanzo-sama, it's time for Nagato of the Akatsuki organization to see the power of
a demigod. Hanzo-sama is invincible."
Hanzo nodded and no longer hesitated.
He is a demigod. This is not a self-proclaimed title, but a title he earned with
his own strength in the Second Ninja War. Even the three ninjas of Konoha retained
their title because of his retention. Life.
"Well, the kid Nagato is indeed too arrogant, let me take action to give him a
lesson." Hanzo said slowly, and then walked slowly towards where Nagato was.
On the other side, Nagato, Yahiko, and Konan, who were using the power of the
Rinnegan Eye, were in a deserted place in the Amegakure Village. It was okay for
those Amegakure to show their faces and not make any moves. Nagato didn't bother to
pay attention to them, but as long as he made a move to greet them His is a set of
small combos of all-encompassing heavenly guidance and sealing techniques.
Of course, using sealing techniques to deal with those rain ninjas is only a
relatively mild method. Even Nagato knows those Hanzo's true loyalists, and Nagato
has no intention of holding back.
"All things are attracted by heaven." Nagato waved his hand, and the rain ninja who
was monitoring Nagato's whereabouts from a distance was directly pulled over by the
inexplicable gravity, and in the blink of an eye, Nagato grabbed his neck.
"killI, Hanzo-sama, will not let you go, you bastards. "Even at this time, the
rain ninja still believed in Sanshouyu Hanzo and had no intention of begging for
mercy.
Xiaonan showed murderous intent on his face, and raised his hand to take away the
opponent's life with the art of paper shiki.
"Let Nagato come." Yahiko stretched out a hand to stop Konan.
Xiaonan was stunned for a moment, then nodded.
Nagato looked at the rain ninja with his samsara eyes without a trace of emotion,
as if the rain ninja was just a cow or sheep waiting to be slaughtered in Nagato's
eyes.
"The Way of the World." Nagato put his other hand on the opponent's abdomen. With
the use of the power of the Way of the World, the lavender soul was pulled out by
Nagato almost instantly.
The speed at which the human world extracts souls is determined by the chakra
strength and soul toughness of both parties.
It was obvious that Nagato's strength was more than that of the rain ninja.
After the rain ninja's soul was extracted, Nagato also obtained the other party's
memory based on the soul.
"Hanzo is still in the central tower, let's go." Nagato said calmly.
Nagato, who has experienced transformation and He Feng's teachings, has already
understood the sacrifices necessary on the road to reform.
If we want to usher in true peace, it is impossible without bloodshed, and so-
called sacrifices are inevitable.
Although this will bring about rounds of hatred, Nagato is already prepared to
accept this hatred.
"There's no need to leave, I'm already here."
At this moment, a figure appeared from the shadow of the tower.
"God's Style Paper·Flying Feathers in the Sky." Konan did not give Hanzo a chance
to continue.
A pair of white wings made of paper appeared on her back.
Konan flapped her wings and slowly rose into the sky like an angel, and then
countless sharp and tough paper feathers shot towards Hanzo's direction.
Seeing this, Hanzo also quickly dodges.
Most of the ninjas in the ninja world have high skills and low defense. Ninjas like
the Third Raikage who have made themselves into iron barrels are almost impossible
to copy.
While Hanzo was dodging, Nagato and Yahiko did not intervene.
With Nagato and He Feng in the dark, Hanzo is more like a fish to be slaughtered
than a demigod in the ninja world.
Konan released chakra wantonly. Under its intensive offensive, Hanzo could only
focus on dodging for a while.
Soon, Xiaonan's chakra bottomed out.
Her eyes suddenly looked at the figure on a high tower, "Teacher Feng!"
Xiao Nan happily waved her wings and arrived at the top of the tower, landing next
to He Feng.
"Teacher Feng, you are here. I haven't seen you for a long time. I miss you so
much." Xiao Nan retracted her paper wings and stood next to He Feng with an
obedient expression.
"We haven't seen each other for a while." He Feng said helplessly.
"A little while is a long time." Xiaonan didn't think there was anything wrong with
what she said.
Hefeng sighed in his heart, he could already foresee Xiaonan's future.
Go against the master and rebel against the disciples! Charge the master and rebel
against the disciples!
Below.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Both Nagato Yahiko and Hanzo noticed someone standing on the top of the tower
above.
Nagato and Yahiko were very relieved. Whether they could deal with Hanzo was one
thing, but whether Feng-senpai could help them was another.
Hanzo was a little puzzled. He felt that Nagato and others were very concerned
about the masked man on the tower.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
But Hanzo didn’t have time to think about the masked man. Nagato alone already made
Hanzo feel even more stressed.
If even Nagato can't solve it, then no matter how many more people come out to take
over, it won't matter.
During this gap, Hanzo also found an opportunity. He gently slid his hand over the
wound injured by Konan's attack just now, and started to draw it with the blood on
it.
"Spiritualism・Sansho Yuibushi."
A huge psychic beast appeared at Hanzo's feet.
"Water Release, Water Continuous Bullet!" Hanzo stood above Ibushi, releasing the
Water Release Ninjutsu that he was good at.
Hanzo waved his arms, and with each wave he would release water cannons like
bullets. These attacks were fired at Nagato, who was standing there without any
movement.
"Hungry Ghost Path: Sealing Technique Absorption Seal." Chang stood in place,
forming a transparent shield around him.
After Hanzo's water bombs hit the shield formed by the Hungry Ghost Path ability,
they were all absorbed by it.
"Yahiko, leave this to me. You go organize Akatsuki members to prepare to take over
Amegakure Village."
Yahiko on the side nodded and patted Nagato's shoulder gently, "Then I'll go, be
careful and don't be attacked by Hanzo's poison."
"Don't worry, I won't let him get close to me."
Although Nagato is very confident in his own power, he still maintains the due
vigilance when facing Hanzo.
After all, Senior Feng told him that a lion can fight a rabbit with all his
strength.
"Can it absorb ninjutsu? Is the amount of ninjutsu absorbed by this jutsu limited,
or is there an interval?" Hanzo calmly analyzed the ability displayed by Nagato.
There is no information about Nagato's Hanzo, who has the same eyes as the Sage of
Six Paths, and his abilities can only be scrutinized bit by bit.
And he became famous in the ninja world in the early years, which was not good for
Hanzo.
"Water Release: Great Waterfall Technique!" Hanzo continued to form seals, and the
water attribute chakra condensed at Hanzo's throat.
The next second, a huge stream of water spit out from Hanzo's mouth and impacted
the barrier around Nagato.
As a shadow-level powerhouseHis own amount of chakra is enough to allow him to use
ninjutsu to test little by little in battle.
Since Yahiko's side still needs some time to complete the assembly, Nagato is also
willing to 'spar' with Hanzo for a while.
It would not be possible to directly use super-standard ninjutsu to kill Hanzo
directly.
The water release ninjutsu released by Hanzo was completely absorbed again after
contacting the barrier around Nagato.
Seeing this, Hanzo released a few more Water Release Ninjutsu to test, and all of
them were undoubtedly absorbed.
At this moment, Hanzo also realized that his use of ninjutsu could only consume his
own chakra and could not pose a threat to Nagato.
"Ibushi, what's wrong?" Hanzo jumped off Ibushi, patted Ibushi's body and asked.
Ibushi nodded up and down to signal Hanzo.
Hanzo suddenly stepped back after receiving the signal from Sansho Uoibushi.
Sansho Uoibushi opened his mouth wide in the direction of Nagato.
The next moment, a large amount of dark purple poisonous mist was sprayed out of
Ibushi's mouth.
Even Hanzo, who had the Sansho fish poison antibody, couldn't resist it, let alone
Nagato.
This is also one of Hanzo's trump cards against the enemy. The detoxification
method in the ninja world is actually very simple. Most ninjas can only take the
most basic antidote pills to detoxify when faced with toxins.
"Shinra Tenzheng." Nagato stretched out his hand, and invisible repulsive force
gathered from Nagato's body.
The poisonous mist spewed from the Sansho Fish Well Bushi and its mouth flew
backwards due to the huge power of Shinra Tenzheng.
At this time, the ability of the Samsara Eye is no longer something that normal
ninjas can handle.
After all, Jiraiya, who was at the peak of his strength in the original timeline,
didn't even have a chance to escape from the Six Paths Puppet after he turned on
Sage Mode.
Not to mention Hanzo, whose temperament and strength have declined due to age at
this time.
If Nagato hadn't knocked on his doorstep, Hanzo would most likely have gone
directly to Danzo for support.
"The way of animals and the art of channeling."
Under Nagato's reincarnation eye psychic technique, psychic techniques such as hell
dogs, Yata birds, and chameleons appeared out of thin air.
Those psychic beasts knew what Nagato was thinking without Nagato giving an order,
and they immediately launched an attack on Sanshou Yujingbushi without fear of
death.
Ibushi seemed helpless against the attacks of many psychic beasts. Even if he
breathed poisonous mist to kill these psychic beasts, more psychic beasts would
immediately appear to besiege him.
Hanzo himself was also feeling uncomfortable. The ninjutsu he was good at had no
effect on Nagato. The psychic beast he relied on, Sansho Uoibushi, could not
protect himself. He saw that his injuries were getting worse and he was about to
have to release his psychic.
"I can only use hammer and sickle."
Chapter 58 Teacher Feng, I like you
Hanzo originally did not intend to get close to Nagato. For him, the heretic demon
that Nagato channeled at that time is still vivid in his mind to this day.
In Hanzo's opinion, it is a more terrifying existence than the tailed beast, far
beyond what human beings can contend with.
To be honest, Hanzo was a little unsure even in close combat. He also saw the scene
where Ibushi and Ibushi's poisonous mist were knocked away by Shinra Tenzheng.
Hanzo would not think that the power that could easily knock Ibushi away would have
no effect on him.
But now Hanzo is no longer looking back.
There is no way to retreat even if you want to, so I can only bite the bullet and
go forward.
Hanzo's weapon is a sickle, with a chain and a hammer attached to the end of the
sickle.
Hanzo was holding a scythe in his hand, and the gas mask on his face had also been
taken off.
It would be good for Hanzo to have some influence on Nagato. Maybe Nagato will
expose his flaw in order to prevent the toxins he breathes.
Hanzo stepped forward suddenly, first throwing the chain he held in his left hand,
and then using the force of the chain to attack Nagato.
"Shenluo Tianzheng."
Nagato stretched out his hands, and the powerful repulsion appeared again.
Hanzo felt as if he had been hit hard, blood welled up in his throat, and was then
spat out.
"Ahem!" Hanzo was a little dumbfounded. As a demigod in the ninja world, his
strength was undoubted. Even Hanzo was confident in facing the shadows of major
villages, but he felt deeply powerless when facing Nagato.
However, Nagato did not give Hanzo a chance to breathe. After the five-second
cooldown of Shinra Tenzheng ended, Nagato launched his second attack again.
"All things are guided by heaven."
"Shenluo Tianzheng."
The gravity and repulsion kept pulling on Hanzo's body, making Hanzo feel like he
was about to be torn apart.
"Nagato, it's okay." At this time, Yahiko also brought all members of the Akatsuki
organization to Amegakure Village.
Nagato nodded, no longer planning to continue playing with Hanzo.
Hanzo was like a chicken in his hand, which made Nagato feel like he was being
cheated.
The demigod of the ninja world seems to be nothing more than that, not as much
pressure as Teacher Feng puts on him.
With this thought in mind, Nagato reached out his hand again.
"All things are guided by heaven."
Hanzo was pulled in front of him by Nagato.
When he realized that Nagato had no intention of knocking him away, Hanzo
immediately made his final death struggle.
He silently formed the Water Escape Seal.
The next second, a black rod made of Yin Yang Dun was produced in Nagato's hand.
With just a 'pop' sound, the black rod in Nagato's hand pierced Hanzo's body and
nailed Hanzo to the ground.
"I respected you so much in the past, but now it's time for you to come to an end.
The Rain Hidden Village will be the starting point for the Akatsuki organization to
unify the world, and you will continue to appear as the leader of the Rain Hidden
Village."Nagato just looked at Hanzo who fell on the ground.
The black rod appeared in his hand again, this time Nagato aimed at Hanzo's heart.
"Water Release, Water Breaking Wave!" Hanzo suddenly raised his head, and a rapid
ultra-high-pressure water column shot out of Hanzo's mouth, aiming at Nagato's
head.
As long as he hits this ninjutsu, he can turn defeat into victory. This Amegakure
Village is still his Hanzo territory.
But the next second, the white shield appeared again, absorbing all Hanzo's last
hope.
"!"
Nagato didn't give Hanzo any chance to speak, and the black rod in his hand pierced
Hanzo's heart directly.
"Xiao Nan, let's go down too." He Feng stretched out his hand to Xiao Nan.
Xiao Nan happily held He Feng's little hand.
The next second, the two figures came to Nagato's side.
What He Feng used was not the Flying Thunder God, but the instant body technique.
At this time, He Feng's proficiency in ninjutsu was no worse than that of Nagato,
who had the Samsara Eye. Ninjutsu such as the teleportation technique was easily
mastered by He Feng.
"Shiki paper seal." Xiaonan reached out and sealed Hanzo's body again.
The Six Paths of Pain that Nagato wanted to make took time, so Konan put Hanzo's
body away.
"Yahiko, what happens next is up to you." Nagato stepped aside and said to Yahiko.
For Nagato, Yahiko will always be the leader of the Akatsuki organization. In these
days, Yahiko is also the person who asks He Feng the most questions. How capable he
is of doing great things, it is appropriate for Yahiko to be the leader of the
Akatsuki organization.
Yahiko nodded and said, "Well, leave it to me, Nagato."
After saying that, Yahiko led the ninjas of the Akatsuki organization into the
Amegakure Village.
During this period, all those who resisted were defeated and surrendered by these
members of the Akatsuki organization. Occasionally, Hanzo's die-hard loyalists were
still unwilling to surrender after receiving the news that Hanzo was dead. To deal
with such people, Yahiko personally sent them to see Hanzo.
"..."
--------------------xxxx--------------------

It only took Yahiko a week from the occupation of Amegakure Village to the complete
consolidation of the Akatsuki organization's dominance in Amegakure Village.
During this week, there will be intermittent resistance from the ninjas of
Amegakure Village, but in the end they all subsided under Yahiko's words.
In an era of frequent wars, it is not an exaggeration to say that Yahiko's mouth
escape is inferior to that of Naruto alone.
In the central tower.
This place has been transformed from Sansho Hanzo's office into the base of the
Akatsuki organization, and the highest level has been transformed by Nagato into a
place where the Six Paths of Pain are placed.
And Tiandao, the first of Pain's Six Paths, has also completed its production.
"Nagato, how do you feel about controlling the way of heaven? Will there be a delay
in the release of chakra transmission ninjutsu?" He Feng asked with interest.
He decided to make the reincarnation eye into one in the future, but he was still a
little hesitant about whether to make He Feng for a puppet like Pain's Six Paths.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
After all, with his strength, there is no need to get six puppets to distract him
during the battle.
Nagato shook his head and said: "There is no delay. As long as I want to, Tiandao
will respond immediately."
During the conversation, Nagato controlled Tiandao to perform some basic
activities.
"Very good, this is a good start. It is now during the Third Ninja War. The five
major countries are busy fighting each other. No one has the energy to focus on the
Country of Rain and the Country of Grass. On small countries.
Nagato, your next task is to control the daimyo of the small countries near the
Land of Rain.
Yahiko is responsible for leading the Akatsuki organization to declare war on
Xiaonin Village, and strive to include all the ninjas from the daimyo government to
Xiaonin Village into the territory of our Rain Country.
Remember, it’s not the Akatsuki Organization but the Country of Rain. "
He Feng simply arranged the general direction of the next action.
After all, he can't stay in Yuyin Village forever, so he can just give him the
general direction.
Xiao Nan tugged on He Feng's sleeve and asked, "What about me, Teacher Feng, do I
have any tasks?"
Hefeng thought about it for a while. During this period, Xiaonan has been clinging
to him and rarely contributed. When he was thinking about the future development of
the Xiao organization, he forgot about Xiaonan, one of the founders of the Xiao
organization.
"Penn is the god of the Akatsuki organization, and he will not show up easily.
Since gods cannot show up, angels will naturally be needed to show up.
If Yahiko is the apparent leader of the Akatsuki organization...then you, Konan,
should lead Amegakure Village.
Well, that’s it, congratulations Xiaonan, the position of the First Generation Rain
Shadow is yours. "
Xiaonan's eyes widened. She thought Teacher Feng would arrange something familiar
to her.
Unexpectedly, she turned into a shadow in the next second.
Xiaonan didn't have much confidence in how to be a village's shadow. After all, she
had never done it before, and a small village like Yuyin Village had always only
had a leader but no shadow.
"Don't worry about not doing well, just like when you usually manage the Xiao
organization, the teacher believes in you."
Hefeng knew that Xiaonan had a calm and calm personality. Although he lacked
experience in this area, as long as he was willing to learn hard, nothing would be
a problem.
With He Feng's encouragement, Xiao Nan stopped making excuses and nodded seriously:
"Leave it to me, Teacher Feng, I will definitely do a good job."
"Well, the three of you have grown up very quickly, and I'm very satisfied, no
matter whatWhether it is the Amegakure Village or the Akatsuki organization, they
will surely prosper under your leadership, and it will not be too far away from
realizing the unification of the ninja world and achieving true peace. "He Feng was
a little emotional.
Yahiko is serious and studious, and once he decides on something, he will boldly
and firmly carry it out. After experiencing the Hanzo incident, Yahiko's kindness,
which is almost as good as Naruto's, has also changed. At least he understands that
some people are not worthy.
Nagato was a little naive, and even a little weak before he was attacked by Hanzo,
but now he has transformed to the point where he can stand alone. In terms of
strength, few people in the ninja world can beat Nagato.
(Actually, there are quite a lot of people, He Feng, Shui Men, Third Generation
Lei, Lao Bantou...)
Xiaonan is calm and calm, gentle and kind to others. Although after the Hanzo
incident, he seems to be very cold and ruthless towards everyone except Hefeng
Nagato Yahiko, but it doesn't hurt.
At least it has nothing to do with He Feng. After all, judging from the extent of
Xiao Nan's obsession with He Feng, He Feng can always ask Xiao Nan to warm his bed
if he wants.
In this regard, He Feng could only lament why he, a succubus, was not yet an adult.
(The river crab master is so awesome)
"Senior Feng, are you leaving?" Nagato noticed the change in He Feng and asked with
some anxiety.
He Feng nodded. He had been here for a while, and Bai Jue had been reporting to him
on the war situation in Konoha in the Land of Fire.
It was also time for him to go back and see his father, and ask him if his father
had lied to him.
For outsiders, it is impossible for outsiders to verify that the Sharingan came
from my mother.
But for Hatake Sakumo, he could see through it easily.
For this, Hefeng could only place his hope in the tacit understanding between
himself and Hatake Sakumo.
"Yes, it's time for me to leave. After all, you all know that I come from the
Uchiha clan and am not from Yuyin Village. I can't stay here longer." He Feng
nodded, expressing his doubts about Nagato. affim.
At this moment, Xiao Nan suddenly rushed forward and hugged He Feng tightly into
his arms. The height difference between the two meant that Xiao Nan had to squat
down to do so.
"Teacher Feng, I like you so much, please don't leave. I don't want to leave you."
――――
It’s time to return to Konoha, and it’s time to fill in the Sharingan hole.
Many people felt that Hefeng felt bad about the fact that the Sharingan came from
his mother's generation, but that was the only way to say that at that time.
After all, it is not easy for Hei Zetsu to check other people's household
registrations, but it is still very easy to check Orochimaru's scientific research
progress.

Chapter 59 Separation is for a better reunion

He Feng is not a stone, he also has his own feelings.
Naturally, He Feng couldn't be at peace with Xiao Nan's sudden show of love.
But at this time, he was unable to respond clearly to Xiaonan's emotions.
He Feng took his hand out of Xiao Nan's arms. He touched Xiao Nan's silky hair and
said sincerely:
"Xiaonan..."
Before He Feng could continue, Xiao Nan immediately said: "Teacher Feng, even if
you ignore me, don't reject me..."
Xiaonan understands that her feelings for Teacher Feng are too abrupt and she feels
inferior, but feelings are always like this.
She has been with Nagato Yahiko for so many years, and she has never had any
special feelings for them. To Konan, the two are relatives who depend on each other
for life, rather than lovers who have been entrusted to their lives.
But He Feng was different. After He Feng rescued himself and Ya Yan that day,
Xiaonan had already developed feelings for He Feng.
(As for why Konan doesn’t like Nagato after Nagato also saved her life...it’s like
her brother saved her life, so she can’t turn around and go to the orthopedics
department.)
It is also because He Feng has been wearing a mask and has not even revealed his
true face, which makes Xiao Nan feel that there is always an invisible veil between
herself and He Feng. This makes Xiao Nan have a feeling for He Feng even though she
can see it. It’s a feeling that can be touched but cannot be retained.
This is also the reason why Xiao Nan has been clinging to He Feng, and she will
express her longing for He Feng just after not seeing him for a while.
She was really afraid that her teacher Feng would suddenly disappear and she would
never find him again.
"Xiao Nan, this separation is for a better reunion. I have taught you my dreams and
ideas, how could I disappear completely." He Feng guided the girl in front of him
with a gentle voice.
Xiao Nan is not much older than He Feng. Even if she appears to be overly mature,
she is just a child who has not yet reached adulthood.
At least that’s how it looks in He Feng’s eyes.
"Does Teacher Feng like me too?" Xiaonan let go of her hand and looked at He Feng
with tearful eyes, asking with some uncertainty.
He Feng nodded with a smile, "I like it. How could I not like Xiao Nan when she's
so cute?"
Hearing this, Xiaonan burst into tears and smiled. She got the answer she wanted
most.
As long as Teacher Feng has her in his heart, Xiao Nan will no longer ask for
anything else.
"Teacher Feng, I will work hard. Next time we meet, Nagato Yahiko and I will
definitely call out the name of Amegakure Village, and I will also work hard to be
a good rain shadow!"
"Well, I believe you."
"Teacher Feng, then...can you let me see what you look like before you leave? I'm
afraid I won't recognize Teacher Feng when we meet in the future."
"Haha, no, if you don't recognize me at first sight when we meet in the future,
then it's my problem."
He Feng chatted with the three of them for a while before using the Flying Thunder
God to leave.
The three of them looked at where He Feng was standing just now.Empty.
"Nagato, Xiaonan, we can't live up to Feng-senpai's expectations!" Yahiko said with
excitement.
"Yes, Senior Feng's dream is also our dream." Nagato agreed with his face.
"I will try my best." Xiao Nan still had He Feng's figure and those bright eyes in
his mind.
……
After leaving Yuyin Village, He Feng did not return to Konoha immediately, but took
the A Fei underground train to the mountain cemetery again.
Before returning to Konoha, he still had to take care of Madara Uchiha, the empty
nester.
No matter how you say it, you can't let Uchiha Madara's life in his later years be
too bad. After all, he is called grandpa, and He Feng naturally has to bear this
affection.
As for the old man in the family who has a bad mind and has to fix things in the
future, it doesn't matter. After all, the things He Feng wants to fix are not much
smaller than the old man Uchiha Madara.
Madara Uchiha made up a grand unification plan to deceive He Feng, which probably
spoke to He Feng's heart.
Not long after, He Feng returned to the mountain cemetery.
At this time, in the underground base of the mountain cemetery, the heretic demon
statue has been channeled by Nagato, and is still being kept by Nagato in Yuyin
Village.
After losing the life supply of the Heretic Golem, Uchiha Madara also began to age
visibly to the naked eye.
Originally, with the help of the heretic golem, he could live for another two
years, but now, in He Feng's opinion, he could live for another three months at
most...
"Hashirama, we will meet soon." Uchiha Madara sat in his wheelchair and looked at
the ceiling of the underground base, falling into memories again.
"At first you advised me to get a wife and have children, saying that only in this
way can I experience the true joy of peace. I didn't take it seriously at first,
but now I understand a little bit."
Uchiha Madara murmured to himself, it was not just because of his age that he did
not discover He Feng who had returned at the first time.
"It's been two months since He Feng's child left Yuyin. In a while it will be
another New Year. I miss him a little bit..."
At this moment, Hefeng also appeared behind Uchiha Madara. He put his small hands
on Uchiha Madara's shoulders and massaged him to relax in a very natural way.
"Really, Grandpa Ban wants Bai Jue to tell me what I want to say. There's no point
in talking about it here alone." He Feng's worried tone contained a hint of blame.
If this was said by someone else, even if it was Hei Daban, Madara would have to
use Susano to beat that person to death, but if it were said by He Feng, the
arrogant old Bantou would even feel a little panic in his heart.
This reminded Madara of the scene when he was playing with Hashirama when he was a
child and was caught by Izuna. At that time, Izuna had the same tone.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
However, Ban's arrogance did not make him submissive. Ban pretended to be unruly
and said: "He Feng, you stinky boy, you're still trying to discipline me. Hei Jue,
come and catch He Feng. I want to see what's wrong with you." He Feng, you brat,
you have so much courage." After saying that, Ban got up and went to teach He Feng
a lesson.
The reason why he is sitting in a wheelchair is because it saves effort, not
because he is lame and cannot stand up.
Hearing Uchiha Madara's words, Black Zetsu was in a dilemma.
His thousand years of life have not been in vain. With Uchiha Madara's tone, if he
really grabs He Feng, Uchiha Madara will be able to point the finger at him in the
next second, but if he doesn't move, what will happen? It's even bigger.
You are my consciousness and you don’t even listen to what I say? Do you want to
rebel?
Thinking of this, Hei Zetsu felt like crying. He could only curse Otsutsuki
Hagoromo in his heart for sealing his mother away, as a bastard.
"Ah! Grandpa Ban is going to attack me, Hei Jue, come and help me!" He Feng did not
use the Flying Thunder God to leave, but swooped behind Hei Jue.
Hei Jue: "???"
Please, can you two not bring me along when you are fighting? Madara is already
suspicious of me. I just want to keep a low profile before he dies.
At this time, Hei Jue was on the verge of crying. He felt like God was playing a
trick on him.
Although Ban said he would teach He Feng a lesson, he did not take it seriously. At
this time, Ban seemed more like he was playing around with He Feng.
After the two chased each other for a while, Madara sat back in the wheelchair with
a tired look on his face.
He Feng also returned to Ban's back in time to massage him again.
"Grandpa Ban, I won't leave during this period. I will leave after you leave." He
Feng said with a smile.
Whether it is Madara or him, death will never be the end. Whether it is
reincarnation or reincarnation, it has the ability to bring the dead back to the
present world.
"Hmph, you still have some intentions, you brat." Madara snorted coldly and said no
more words.
Just chasing him for a while will also consume Madara's vitality and shorten
Madara's lifespan.
At this time, Madara is like a burned out candle, which may be extinguished at any
time due to unknown factors.

Chapter 60 Return to Konoha

Three months passed in a blink of an eye.
This time, because He Feng was by his side, Ban did not make any additional
arrangements before his death, nor did he plant any restrictions in He Feng's body.
During this period, Konoha did not stop looking for themselves. Tsunade and
Orochimaru also tried to find themselves through counter-psychic techniques.
However, both psychic techniques and counter-psychic techniques are ninjutsu that
require the consent of both parties.
He Feng just told the two of them that he had something to deal with, nothing
more.Will return after a long time.
After receiving the news that He Feng was safe and sound, the two of them were
completely relieved, and a big stone weighing on their hearts was relieved.
On this day, He Feng was woken up by Bai Jue A Fei before he woke up.
"He Feng He Feng, Master Ban is dying. Go and have a look." A Fei pushed He Feng's
arm and said quickly in a jumpy voice.
Hearing this, He Feng woke up immediately. He didn't care about A Fei who stayed
where he was, and flew directly to the room where Ban was in the underground base
with a flying thunder god.
Looking at Ban in the wheelchair who had more air coming out and less air coming
in, even though He Feng knew in his heart that he would be resurrected in the
future, he was still a little sad.
"Grandpa Ban..." He Feng grabbed Ban's old hand and said softly.
"Ah...it's He Feng...you...come here with your ears..." Ban's words were a bit
choppy, and it was obvious that he was holding on for breath waiting for He Feng to
come over.
He Feng obediently put his ear to it.
"After I...die...preserve...my body...be careful of the black...Ze..." Madara spoke
almost word for word, and closed his mouth after explaining his last words with
difficulty. eyes.
Although Madara, who has He Feng's influence this time, is arrogant, he does not
have any reservations about Black Zetsu like in the original timeline. He doubts
that this kind of thing will not rise unless it rises a little. Unable to contain.
Ever since Madara felt something was wrong with Hei Zetsu, he kept observing Hei
Zetsu. Although Hei Zetsu didn't reveal any flaws, Madara still had a sense of
caution in his heart.
"Don't worry, Grandpa Madara. As a chuunin of Konoha, I still have some strength."
He Feng spoke softly while using the sealing technique, placing Madara's body into
the wooden escape coffin he prepared, and applied a Layer sealing technique.
After storing Ban's coffin, He Feng came to the top of the mountain cemetery.
At this time, snowflakes were still falling in the sky, and He Feng had already
turned eleven. If nothing unexpected happened, the Third Ninja World War would end
this year.
Hefeng had been away from Konoha for a little over half a year, and it was time to
return.
……
The Kingdom of Fire, the battlefield of fire and thunder.
Because the Fire Sand Battlefield was already semi-victory, Orochimaru, as the
deputy commander, was withdrawn by Sarutobi Hiruzen and sent to the most intense
Fire Thunder Battlefield.
Although Hatake Sakumo, a shadow-level powerhouse, is guarding this place, the
barbarians in Kumogakure Village are very unreasonable. Other villages treat tailed
beasts as treasures and stay in the village to guard them. Only Kumogakure Village
doesn't care at all. .
The Eight-Tails and Two-Tails are both active in the Fire and Thunder Battlefield.
Perhaps it is because there is no time for a real decisive battle, and Kumogakure
has no intention of angering Konoha. The Eight-Tails and Two-Tails Jinchūriki have
not fully transformed into Tailed Beasts so far. Konoha unleashes a massive
ninjutsu.
Because of the heavy snow, the two sides also temporarily suspended the fighting to
rest.
On this day, Orochimaru found Hatake Sakumo when he was alone.
"Commander Sakumo, I have a question about He Feng, I don't know where to tell it."
Orochimaru spoke first.
Hatake Sakumo was also startled when he heard that it was his two people. In
addition, it was He Feng's teacher who asked the question. Hatake Sakumo also let
down his guard: "Deputy Commander Orochimaru, there is nothing inconvenient, He
Feng But I respect you very much, just ask if you have any questions."
"It's not a big deal, it's just about opening He Feng's eyes. I believe Kakashi has
already told Commander Sakumo about this."
Hatake Sakumo nodded, and this was indeed the question in his mind.
However, Hatake Sakumo still had doubts in his heart. Hefeng's mother Keiko was not
from the Uchiha lineage, and there were no relatives related to Uchiha in the
counting list. Kakashi told him at first that Hefeng had opened his eyes. It also
shocked him.
Hatake Sakumo thought that Hefeng and Orochimaru's experiments had made further
progress and could help people master the power of the Sharingan. It seems that
this is not the case.
Out of trust in his son, Hatake Sakumo immediately said: "You have also seen
Hefeng's mother. Although Keiko is not a member of the Uchiha clan, Keiko's mother
is a commoner of the Uchiha clan. Because she did not open her eyes. Married to
Keiko’s father, Hefeng’s Sharingan may have been inherited from his maternal
grandmother.”
After receiving Hatake Sakumo's explanation, Orochimaru also suddenly realized that
although the bloodline is far away, the awakening of something like the bloodline
limit depends purely on talent and has little to do with the distance of the
bloodline.
Furthermore, the phenomenon of bloodline reversion can greatly increase the
strength of blood-stained ninjas, so Orochimaru did not have too much doubts.
"Haha, I didn't expect that He Feng also had Uchiha's bloodline. In this case,
little He Feng would have a chance to awaken the wood escape." Orochimaru laughed.
He was looking forward to the scene where He Feng awakened from Mu Escape.
After hearing the word Wood Release, Hatake Sakumo narrowed his eyes and said,
"Orochimaru, can you tell me about Wood Release in detail?"
Orochimaru licked his lips and responded happily: "Of course."
……
Konoha Hidden Village, the land of the Uchiha clan.
"Brother Shisui, what is the war like? Some clan members go to the war and I can no
longer see them. Are they dead?" Itachi, who was only two years old, stood next to
Uchiha Shisui and asked Brother Shisui, whom he respected the most, asked.
Uchiha Shisui was stunned, never expecting that Itachi, who was only two years old,
would ask such a question.
What is war like?
Shisui recalled the details of his participation in the war.
The ninjas did not hesitate to plunder the lives of others, and were killed by
others in the same way. Once the war started, they were like a ruthless machine on
the battlefield.The meat grinder arbitrarily harvested the lives of the ninjas
present.
War is like a line, connecting ninjas who don't know each other one after another.
Countless blood will dye this line red, and then the newcomers will follow this red
line to find their enemies and use the blood of their enemies to kill them. The
white threads on his body continued to turn red.
"War is very cruel, Itachi. If possible, I hope you will never participate in a
war."
――――
That’s all for today. My mind is a bit messy and I need to sort out my next
thoughts.

Chapter 61 Meeting Shisui by chance

After Uchiha Madara's death, Black Zetsu disappeared as if he had disappeared, and
He Feng had no intention of looking for Black Zetsu.
After all, Hei Jue can live for more than a thousand years and has a lot of means
to save his life. Coupled with the pure loach ninjutsu like the Mayfly Technique,
He Feng does not feel that he can catch Hei Jue while he is wary.
Although Hei Jue ran away, Bai Jue led by A Fei was still used by He Feng.
In Ah Fei’s words, he felt very comfortable and interesting when following He Feng,
so he kept following.
This is not to blame for Ah Fei's rebellion. As He Feng grows older, the ability of
the succubus body can even affect Uchiha Madara invisibly. How can Ah Fei and other
individuals created by the heretic demons resist it? .
Although Black Zetsu was also affected, it was born from Kaguya's will. No matter
what happens, Black Zetsu will take unblocking his mother Kaguya as the first
criterion of action. At most, Black Zetsu is subconsciously unwilling when thinking
about the plan. Harm He Feng's life.
And He Feng himself took the A Fei underground train all the way back to Konoha.
Above the Konoha Hokage Rock, Hefeng emerged from the earth, and the vortex shell
tightly wrapped around his body gradually split.
After He Feng's figure walked out of it, the split A Fei reunited.
"Ah! Is this Konoha? It's such a big ninja village. It's my first time to visit
here." A Fei looked down from the Hokage Rock and expressed his remarks in a jumpy
tone.
He Feng just stood aside and complained: "A Fei, do you know where my home is?"
"Of course it's at No. XX, X Street, X Road, Konoha. This question is so simple. Is
there a more difficult question?" A Fei told the location of the Hatake clan's
mansion without even thinking about it.
"You even know where my home is so well, A Fei, and you still said it was your
first time to Konoha." He Feng was a little helpless.
"Ah, whoops, I spilled the beans."
Ah Fei is good at everything, but his personality is too out-of-touch. He usually
says three sentences about peeing and five sentences about shit. In other words, Ah
Fei doesn't know how to catch shit with his hands, otherwise He Feng would not let
Ah Fei take him on the road anyway.
At this moment, He Feng's Kagura Heart Eye suddenly sensed a stream of chakra
moving rapidly where he was.
He looked at Ah Fei, who was squatting next to him, and kicked him, "A Fei, someone
is coming, please hide first."
"okay."
As A Fei finished his words, he had already used the mayfly technique to get into
the ground.
"Who?!" Zhishui was very fast. With his extremely skilled teleportation technique,
Zhishui quickly came to Hefeng and saw Hefeng standing on the Hokage Rock wearing a
whirlpool mask.
"Have your parents ever told you that you should state your identity first when
asking other people's identities? Or are Uchiha people so rude?"
Of course, he knew Shisui Hefeng, and he also understood how strange the brain
circuit of Uchiha Shisui was.
With Wang Zha in his hand, it is not an exaggeration to say that he is the face of
the Flying Dragon Rider. Just this kind of Tianhu's opening can make him collapse.
Shisui's political sense is not keen, plus he has an inexplicable admiration for
the Will of Fire and Sarutobi Hiruzen Shimura Danzo, so the ending is not
unexpected.
But Shisui's mistake was that he transferred his own strange values to Uchiha
Itachi. The village is composed of ninjas and civilian ninjas. None of them can be
missing, but in Shisui's view, they have to give up. one.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Itachi, who has been following Shisui all year round, will naturally move in this
direction when he grows up and thinks about problems.
Therefore, Hefeng's attitude towards Zhishui is not good, and he also has the idea
of correcting Zhishui's thoughts.
At least you can’t let this kid be so sincere anymore. Just treat him like a god
and just throw him at Danzo. Then there won’t be so many things happening later.
Shisui was startled when he heard Hefeng's unkind tone. As the Konoha police force,
he has the responsibility to patrol the security in Konoha. Now that it is a war,
he must be on guard. Therefore, after discovering the abnormality, Shisui rushed
there as soon as possible. come over.
Out of vigilance against He Feng, Zhisui took out his small sword, his dark pupils
began to rotate, and the three Magatama Sharingan was opened by Zhisui.
As a genius of the Uchiha clan, there is no doubt about Shisui's strength.
Otherwise, he would not have gained the reputation of Shunshen Shisui in the Third
Ninja War.
"Uchiha clan, Shisui instantly!" Shisui's three magatama stared at He Feng
intently, and he would attack as soon as He Feng made any move.
"Hatake clan, Hatake Hefeng, I wonder if you have heard of this name." Hefeng
stretched out his hand and took off his mask. His fair face looked a little
childish, but his aura at this time was different from that one. The childish face
doesn't match it at all.
Shisui had only seen this kind of temperament in one person. That person was the
fourth generation of Kirigakure Village.Eye water shadow wolfberry yakura.
However, he had seen Hatake Hefeng's name and photo, so he could naturally
recognize that the person in front of him was not pretending.
According to Shisui's knowledge, Hatake Hefeng became famous on the eve of the
Third Ninja War. He had the ability to fight against the third generation Raikage's
son Yozuki and the Eight-Tails Jinchūriki without falling behind, and with the help
of the yellow flash Namikaze Minato And the dazzling record of victory.
After that, Hatake Hefeng was given the title of Konoha's Blood Dancer by the Third
Raikage Ai, and a sky-high reward was issued.
This is the news about Hatake Hefeng that Shisui learned from writing.
In addition to writing, Shisui also knew something about Hatake Hefeng from his
senior Uchiha Obito. Although Hatake Hefeng was apparently sent by the Hokage to
perform a special mission, he knew Hatake He Feng has been missing for more than
half a year.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
"Is it really Senior Hefeng?" Zhishui was a little excited.
Obito has a very good character. After his strength was completely exposed, Obito
had more and more contacts with the Uchiha clan.
As good old guys, the relationship between Shisui and Obito is naturally not bad.
Therefore, after getting the news that Hatake Hefeng returned to Konoha, he was
very excited for Obito.
"Uchiha Shisui, I heard Obito mention you before. The genius of the Uchiha clan
opened the three Magatama Sharingan at a young age." Hefeng nodded, and did not
deny Shisui's words. Instead, he said Water leads to another topic.
"I still have a lot to work on, and it's not as good as Senior Obito said." Zhisui
touched his hair and felt a little shy for a moment when He Feng looked at him.
"I can see that you are still a little confused now. It just so happens that I have
experienced a lot during the six months I have been away. If you have any
unanswered questions, you can come to me and I will be happy to help you."
Hefeng didn't immediately tell Zhishui about the will of fire.
In that case, Shisui might not be able to listen. It would be better to cut the
flesh with a blunt knife and slowly guide Uchiha Shisui. Maybe there would be a
chance to teach Uchiha Itachi, a problem child.
"Remember what I said, I won't tell you more." After He Feng finished speaking, he
left the Huoying Rock as a flying thunder god.
After returning to Konoha, Hefeng felt as if he had returned to the base camp.
There were signs of the Flying Thunder God hidden everywhere. With Hefeng's current
chakra, he could meet basic life needs in Konoha without even walking. .
Hefeng didn't intend to care about A Fei's words. As long as he didn't dig out
Konoha's toilet, he could just go and have fun with him.
After leaving Hefeng, Shisui quickly retracted his sword and closed his Sharingan.
"Senior Hefeng is back, I have to tell Senior Obito the news quickly!" Shisui used
the teleportation technique to leave the top of the Hokage Rock and rushed towards
the Uchiha clan.
"..."
At the same time, within the Uchiha clan.
"Obito, you are the pride of my Uchiha clan, and my Uchiha clan is also proud of
you. This is the ninjutsu experience of our former clan leader Uchiha Madara in the
early years. It has been treasured in my Uchiha since clan leader Madara left. The
ancestral hall of the Uchiha clan, I will hand it over to you now, hoping that you
will become famous in the Uchiha clan in the future."
Setsuna Uchiha held Obito with his old hand, and taught Obito his ideas with
sincere words.
He saw in Obito the shadow of a real Uchiha genius - paranoia. In Setsuna's
opinion, Obito might lead Uchiha to launch a coup in the future and become the
Hokage from the Uchiha clan.
Therefore, Uchiha Setsuna often provided assistance to Obito, whether it was
ninjutsu, ninja tools, or medicinal baths needed after practicing physical
training.
It can be said that under Uchiha Setsuna's dedicated training, Obito's strength is
increasing day by day, and the title of red-eyed devil is not limited to the fire
and sand battlefield.
"I understand Elder Setsuna, don't worry." Obito said with a look of approval, his
tone was very sincere.
Setsuna smiled and nodded. The more he looked at Obito, the more satisfied he
became, "Good boy, good boy."
With that said, he left the training ground in an instant.
After Uchiha Setsuna left, the current Uchiha clan leader Uchiha Fugaku also came
to the training ground.
The reason why Uchiha Fugaku came here is naturally because of Uchiha Setsuna. As
the leader of the Uchiha clan, he needs to ensure that the Uchiha clan can continue
forever, rather than launch a coup for the sake of the position of Hokage and lead
the Uchiha clan into the abyss.
Fugaku and Minato are close friends. The two have teamed up to complete S-level
missions many times, so Fugaku understands how strong Minato is, not to mention
that there are still Kage-level strongmen such as Sannin and White Fang in Konoha
at this time. By.
Let alone the Uchiha clan, even if the Uchiha clan was given the Kyuubi, Fugaku
would not think that the Uchiha clan could win the coup.
Therefore, as a talented young man that Uchiha Setsuna is paying attention to,
Fugaku naturally cannot sit idly by.
"Obito, you..." Fugaku was about to speak when he saw Uchiha Shisui not far away,
rushing towards the training ground here.
He admired Shisui Fugaku very much. He believed that Shisui would be a bridge
between the improvement of the village and the Uchiha clan.
Now during the war, the village will not impose too many restrictions on the Uchiha
clan. After all, Konoha still relies on the power of the Uchiha clan, but once this
war is won, Konoha's top brass will never let Uchiha continue to grow.
"Shisui, what do you have..."
When Fugaku turned to speak to Shisui, Shisui also spoke quickly: "Hello, clan
leader, Senior Obito! I just saw Senior He Feng over at Huoying Rock! Senior He
Feng is back! "
"Huh?" Fugue was stunned and remembered who He Feng was.
He Feng had seen it before. White Fang's youngest son was also very powerful.
The next second, Obito's figure disappeared without waiting for Fugaku to react.
――――――
The original work does not explain Zhishui's age. After checking various
information, it says that Zhishui is ten years old, and Wan Hefeng was born in the
same year.

Chapter 62 Meeting Tsunade, He Feng’s reflections

After being separated from Zhishui, Hefeng returned home following his mark of the
Flying Thunder God.
Although Hatake Sakumo and Kakashi were not at home, the entire house was cleaned.
Hefeng knew that his father and brother were at the Fire and Thunder Battlefield.
The reason why he didn't go directly to the Fire and Thunder Battlefield was
because he didn't know how to face them.
Hefeng was really afraid that Kakashi would think that he could open his eyes after
seeing him open his Sharingan, and he would do nothing every day from now on and
just study to open his eyes.
He Feng also wondered how to explain the origin of his Sharingan. After all, it was
well known that the Sharingan transplanted by foreign ninjas could not be opened
and closed, and He Feng's Sharingan could be opened and closed freely.
Besides, the people He Feng dared not see the most were Sister Tsunade and Teacher
Orochimaru.
The former can be seen from the daily favorability log. Hefeng's favorability log
in the past six months is like Tsunade's work check-in point.
It has to rise a little every day, and it will never stop.
If there was a perfect attendance award, it would be Tsunade.
The latter would give He Feng a big blow from time to time, either not increasing
his favorability at all, or directly delivering a critical hit, which made He
Feng's heart tremble.
For He Feng, Orochimaru is now just an ordinary master-disciple relationship, but
Orochimaru has the idea of cloning a female individual for himself. Later, He Feng
really couldn't guarantee it.
"Hey, it's so hard." He Feng sighed. He felt that he really shouldn't be greedy for
the soaring favorability during this period. Why not just report that he was safe?
Now you have to reap the consequences.
In addition, Obito's contribution to Hefeng's favorability is also not low, and
Hefeng is even more afraid of Obito.
He Feng is an innocent straight man, and he is really afraid that something bad
will happen to Obitu.
After all, Obito has already left the inherent impression of being unreliable and
explosive at critical moments in Hefeng over the years.
Sure enough, just when He Feng was thinking, the door of his house was pushed open.
Obito walked through the entrance hall and came inside, and saw He Feng sitting on
the sofa with a look of despair.
"You bastard He Feng!" Obito did not ask for men on top of men as He Feng thought,
but gritted his teeth and stared at He Feng with anger and worry.
"What have you been doing for the past six months! Why don't you tell me and
everyone else, Kakashi, Kai, Lin, Kurenai, Tsunade-sama, Orochimaru-sama, Sakumo
and many, many others are worried about you, why are you He left without saying a
word.
We are teammates! Is there something you can’t tell Kakashi and I? Do you think
Kakashi and I are the kind of people who would shrink away from danger?
You bastard! "
Obito said a lot in one breath, his face was filled with tears and snot, and at the
same time, he was also suffering in his heart.
In Obito's opinion, the reason why He Feng disappeared was because of his lack of
strength. If he had been stronger and could have separated from He Feng at that
time, then He Feng would not have been unable to return to Konoha due to other
things.
"Idiot." He Feng couldn't bear it. He never thought that what he did would make
Obito feel this way. He took out a tissue from the side and walked forward to wipe
the tears and snot from Obito's face. The voice is soft.
"If Obito had not been injured and was stronger, I believe that Obito would have
stayed behind without hesitation. I am just some distance ahead of Obito. I believe
that I can catch up with Obito's talent."
Listening to He Feng's encouragement, Obito stretched out his sleeves and wiped the
remaining tears on his face.
"He Feng! Let's go to the Fire and Thunder Battlefield. Kakashi, Uncle Sakumo and
Orochimaru are all at the Fire and Thunder Battlefield now. They will be very happy
to see you." Obito said excitedly.
He Feng actually wanted to follow Obito to the Fire and Thunder Battlefield, after
all, that way he could stay away from the Senju clan of Konoha again.
Although Mr. Orochimaru is terrifying, it all depends on who he is compared to.
If Mr. Orochimaru is compared with Sister Tsunade, He Feng is naturally afraid that
Sister Tsunade will get more.
Obito saw that Hefeng was a little confused, and immediately reacted: "That's
right! Lord Tsunade is still in Konoha Village. Hefeng has been away for half a
year. If you come back this time, you have to meet Lord Tsunade first. Anyway,
There won't be a fight on the Fire and Thunder battlefield for a while, but I'm not
that anxious."
He Feng opened his mouth, but couldn't say a word. In the end, he could only nod:
"Yes, I want to see Sister Tsunade. If I don't go, Sister Tsunade will kill me."
Obito didn't notice the confusion on Hefeng's face, and just laughed and said:
"Hefeng, how could Master Tsunade do anything to you? You don't know how much
Sister Tsunade has missed you in the six months since you disappeared."
I know, I don’t dare to see her just because I know!
He Feng roared crazily in his heart, but did not show it on his face: "Yes, how
could Sister Tsunade do something to me."
Obito patted He Feng on the shoulder again. In the past half year, he alsoHe has
grown up a lot, but he will not be the same as an immature child like before.
"He Feng, go see Sister Tsunade. I won't stop you from meeting Lady Tsunade. Chief
Fugaku has something waiting for me."
He Feng nodded and watched Obito leave.
After Obito left, He Feng sat back on the sofa without getting up, but looked at
the clock aside motionlessly.
Time passed by slowly, and it was night in the blink of an eye.
Crunch——
With the sound of the door opening, two sisters, Lin and Hong, wearing aprons, came
into the house.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
Due to their strength and parents' reasons, the two did not go to the front line,
but stayed in Konoha to treat the wounded who were unable to continue fighting
after being evacuated.
Because there was no one in Hefeng's house, the two sisters started cleaning for a
long time with Shuomao's permission.
"He Feng!" The two of them widened their eyes, and then rubbed their eyes in
disbelief.
"He Feng, it's really you! You're back!" The two girls were very excited and
quickly stepped forward to surround He Feng.
"He Feng, let me see if you are injured anywhere. I miss you so much during this
time." Nohara Lin's voice was soft and gentle.
"He Feng, it's great that you're okay." Xihihong was much quieter, mainly because
she was not a medical ninja, otherwise she would have checked He Feng with Lin to
see if he was injured.
He Feng also stopped dazing and looked at the two of them: "Lin, Hong, thank you."
"You're welcome, this is what we should do." Hong was a little embarrassed. She did
this from the bottom of her heart, rather than trying to win He Feng's favor.
"These are some medical and illusion ninjutsu scrolls. They contain some insights.
I believe they will be helpful to you two.
I still have some things to deal with, so I’ll excuse you now. I’ll treat you to
dinner later. "
After saying that, He Feng left the house like a flying thunder god, leaving Lin
and Hong behind.
Looking at the place where He Feng disappeared, Lin sighed: "He Feng must have gone
to find Teacher Tsunade. Teacher Tsunade is so cunning. It was obviously me who
came first."
Hong was also a little helpless, but she quickly cheered up, "Lin, let's clean the
house first. We already did it yesterday and now it will be done quickly."
――――
This chapter is a bit tangled in writing. It seems that He Feng’s charm is too
high, which is not a good thing. He owes a lot of beauty debt.
Of course, the charm will continue to increase, after all, this is what I wrote.
Chapter 63 Promise, I also like Sister Tsunade
Within the Senju Clan, Tsunade did not drink alcohol, but exercised in the yard.
Once her strength reaches her level, it cannot be achieved overnight if she wants
to take a step further.
The last time Namikaze Minato met the Wood Release ninja, Tsunade also took this
opportunity to learn from Orochimaru the extent of his Wood Release experiment.
Therefore, Tsunade also had the idea of awakening Wood Release through Orochimaru's
experiment.
She felt that she was still a little weak. If she could suppress the four great
ninja villages by herself like her uncle, He Feng could stay by her side without
any danger.
As the sun gradually set, Tsunade also stopped exercising and returned to the house
to take a shower.
Tsunade, wearing a yukata, sat on the tatami at the door of the Senju Mansion, with
a pot of shochu on the small table beside her.
Tsunade picked up the wine bottle and poured herself a glass, feeling an emotion
called longing welling up in her heart.
"I don't know when that bastard will come back." She muttered to herself, her
cheeks turning a little rosy from the alcohol intake.
Tsunade's appearance was originally excellent, but her expression coupled with her
foul figure at this moment made people fascinated.
"Shizune should be back from Konoha Hospital, why aren't you home yet?" Tsunade
looked at the moon hanging high in the sky, feeling a little confused.
"Tsunade-sister...Long time no see."
At this moment, a voice appeared from beside Tsunade.
Hearing this, Tsunade's movements on her hands froze, and then she looked towards
the place where the sound came from with a look of disbelief.
"Ah...Long time no see." Tsunade opened her mouth, with countless words in her
heart that she wanted to explain to He Feng, but when she came to her mouth, she
just said "Long time no see."
"Sister Tsunade, I saw Uchiha Madara." Hefeng knew that Tsunade's behavior was just
the calm before the storm, so he sat down next to Tsunade very honestly and said
something that Tsunade couldn't help but Ignored names.
As expected, Tsunade was even more surprised after hearing Uchiha Madara's name.
"Impossible, wasn't Uchiha Madara killed by Grandpa a long time ago..." In
Tsunade's impression, Uchiha Madara was defeated and killed by Grandpa when she was
just born.
Grandpa also blamed himself and felt guilty for this for a long time. Grandpa said
to her personally that Uchiha Madara died. How could something go wrong?
"No, Xiao Hefeng, you mean you've been with Uchiha Madara all this time?!" At this
moment, Tsunade couldn't care less about the entangled feelings for Hefeng in her
heart. She pulled Hefeng to her with worry. in front of him.
He used his own chakra to explore He Feng's body, trying to find out whether the
Uchiha Madara in He Feng's mouth had any restrictions on He Feng's seeds..
He Feng completely ignored Tsunade's movements of moving her hands up and down her
body, but told Tsunade the story he had made up unhurriedly:
"Yes, that person is indeed Madara. Grandpa Madara is very good to me. He did not
die in the previous battle with Grandpa Hashirama. Instead, he survived through
special means and awakened Grandpa Hashirama's Wood Release.
Grandpa Madara spent the rest of his life to understand everything about the ninja
world, to observe the situation of the ninja world, and to think about the future
of the ninja world. In these six months, Grandpa Madara taught me his insights for
the rest of his life, and hoped that I could Complete the dream he and Grandpa
Hashirama had accomplished.
Bringing true peace to the ninja world. "
"..."
He Feng told Tsunade a lot, and Tsunade was a little confused after hearing it, but
she completely believed what He Feng said, and Tsunade even had an inexplicable
guess.
Is it possible that the son of prophecy that Jiraiya is looking for is He Feng?
She reached out and pinched He Feng's delicate face, feeling both worried and
surprised.
The worry is that He Feng has a relationship with Uchiha Madara. Even if Uchiha
Madara treats He Feng well or not, he cannot deny the identity of Uchiha Madara as
a shura in the ninja world. In Tsunade's view, getting along with Uchiha Madara is
extremely dangerous. of.
The surprise was that even Uchiha Madara valued Hefeng's talent, and even did not
hesitate to train him as his successor. This made Tsunade feel proud that her
brother was indeed very promising.
Hefeng was held in Tsunade's arms, and he immediately felt the mountain-like
oppression.
"Sister Tsunade, do you think the one-country-one-village system created by Grandpa
Hashirama is really correct?" He Feng asked stiffly.
"Of course it is correct. Konoha Village is our home, and Konoha protects everyone
in the village from war." Tsunade said without thinking. Although she had disdained
the village in the original timeline, she had never She never gave up on the Hidden
Leaves Village founded by her great grandfather.
"But doesn't the one-country-one-village system extend the war between tribes to
villages?
During the Warring States Period, Senju and Uchiha were rivals fighting each other.
Now Konoha and other hidden villages are rivals fighting each other. The number of
killings they caused has not even decreased but has increased. "He Feng continued.
Tsunade nodded, unable to find anything to say to refute He Feng.
"Also, Grandpa Hashirama gave the tailed beasts to the other four ninja villages.
If Grandpa Hashirama didn't give away the tailed beasts, would the other four ninja
villages not dare to do so because they were afraid of the power of the nine tailed
beasts? Taking action against Konoha."
He Feng maintains a neutral attitude towards the matter of Hashirama sending tailed
beasts. After all, after Hashirama's death, one nine-tailed beast can cause Konoha
to lose a Kage. If all nine tailed beasts stay in Konoha and run rampant, , Konoha
will simply disappear.
After all, tailed beasts are just bigger pets in Hashirama's eyes, and it's okay to
give them to other ninja villages. Humans can't be defeated by three or two kittens
and puppies, but for other people, tailed beasts are just weapons of war, and often
It can determine the success or failure of a war.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
In Hefeng's view, even if Zhujian didn't want to keep all the tailed beasts, he
should have released them directly instead of packing them up and giving them away
to others.
However, He Feng felt relieved when he thought that Hashirama was the kind of
person who could kill someone with just one punch, yet kowtowed and begged the
other party not to start a war but for peace.
Tsunade didn't know what He Feng was thinking, but she understood what He Feng
said.
She was also shaken by Hashirama's decision.
"Yes, if there are nine Tailed Beast Jinchuriki in Konoha, there will only be one
big ninja village among the five major ninja villages in the ninja world." Tsunade
couldn't help but have this thought in her heart.
Tsunade shook her head violently. She felt that she was really drifting. Now Konoha
is still under siege, and she is still thinking about a great ninja village.
Tsunade asked: "Xiao Hefeng, has your Grandpa Madara told you how to solve the
current situation in the ninja world?"
He Feng nodded and said happily: "Of course I did, but now is not the time to
explain it to Sister Tsunade."
Upon hearing this, Tsunade immediately picked up He Feng in a princess-like manner.
"Xiao Hefeng, you haven't warmed Sister Tsunade's bed for half a year, so I'll
punish you by staying at my place tonight."
Hefeng didn't resist, and was just thrown on the bed by Tsunade. When he was
thinking about how to explain clearly to Tsunade, he felt the warmth in Tsunade's
arms again.
The two looked at each other, and for a moment even the air fell silent.
"I also like Sister Tsunade very much." He Feng spoke first to break the silence.
"!" At this moment, Tsunade felt an inexplicable desire hit Tianling, breaking
Tsunade's heart almost in an instant.
At the same time, Tsunade's strength, which had been stagnant for many years, had
unknowingly improved slightly.
【Unlock new features】
【The Succubus's Confidante】
[Click to view]
He Feng was stunned and subconsciously chose to view the system on the system page.
In the system page of this function of the system, Hefeng could only see Tsunade.
【Name: Tsunade】
[Strength: Shadow level (Shadow level)]
【Age: 34】
【Experience: 0】
[Ability: Medical Ninjutsu, Konoha Fluid Technique, Yin Seal, Psychic Technique...]
[Favorability: 100% (life and death)]
Through this panel, He Feng can check Tsunade's current information at will.
Although He Feng doesn't know what that experience is, the fact that it can be
listed separately by the system must mean that it is extraordinary.
thisThinking about this, He Feng suddenly felt Tsunade's dishonest little hands.
He sighed and continued: "Sister Tsunade, can you wait a few more years?"
He Feng's words were still very useful to Tsunade, and Tsunade regained her sanity
with the help of her own consciousness.
"...Go to sleep, Xiao Hefeng."

Chapter 64 Youthful Father and Son

The next morning, before Tsunade woke up, He Feng quietly left the Thousand Hands
Clan.
He has been deeply aware of the strength of his physique. A big factor in Tsunade's
ability to restrain him last night was because He Feng held a high position in
Tsunade's heart.
Tsunade could also listen to what He Feng said. Even if something happened, Tsunade
would be the first to think about He Feng.
But it’s okay once or twice, but if He Feng happens too much, he won’t be so
confident.
Yesterday, Hefeng heard Obito say that Metkai and his father, Metdai, were still in
the village and not at the Fire and Mist Battlefield, so Hefeng thought about going
to visit them.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

After all, he has a very good relationship with Kakashi and Kai, especially Kakashi
and Kai. The two of them had a strong relationship because they trained together
because of He Feng in the early years.
Therefore, He Feng naturally did not want to happen again when Matt Dai opened the
door to death because of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen.
As for whether it would be inappropriate to visit so early in the morning, it might
be inappropriate for other people, but it was completely different for the father
and son.
When He Feng arrived at the door of Metkai's house, he ran into the father and son
who were ready to go.
Both of them were wearing green tights, with heavy weights tied to their calves.
"Kai, Uncle Dai, long time no see." He Feng smiled and greeted the two of them.
The two of them also discovered He Feng. Kai ran towards He Feng with excitement on
his face and stretched out his hand to give He Feng a big hug.
In response, He Feng quickly dodged and avoided Metkai's death embrace.
"Kai, I have seen your youth, so there is no need to be so enthusiastic." He Feng
was a little scared. Although he had a good relationship with Metkai, he was not
good at dealing with people like Kai alone.
When he and Kai met before, there was Kakashi next to him. Once Metkai made any
move, Kakashi would be invited to compete, and Metkai would never refuse Kakashi's
invitation to compete. .
Although he lost more than he won, he still enjoyed it.
"He Feng, when you return to Konoha, have you completed Hokage-sama's super S-level
mission?" Metkai asked curiously.
Super S-level mission? When had he received such a mission? Why hasn't he heard of
it?
"That's right, my mission is over. I heard that Kai and Uncle Dai were still in the
village, so I came here to take a look. I didn't expect to meet him directly by
such a coincidence." He Feng smiled at Matt, who was not far away. Dai greeted.
Matt Dai also came up.
He first bowed deeply to He Feng under He Feng's surprised gaze.
"He Feng, thank you very much for your family's support to my family Kai. Without
your family's help, Kai would never be as good as he is now. If Kai and I are
needed in the future, please do not hesitate to ask me. Kai and I will definitely I
will do my best!”
Matt Dai said it sincerely. After all, he had only been a genin for so many years.
It was almost impossible to buy Kai a medicated bath for muscle recovery after
training.
Therefore, Matt Dai inherited this kindness from the bottom of his heart.
"Uncle Dai, Kai is a friend of Brother Kakashi and I. This is what we should do."
He Feng quickly helped Matt Dai up.
【Trigger critical strike! 】
【Matt wears favorability +5】
[Obtain Eight Gate Armor Formation Fragments X2]
【Acquire intermediate physical skills talent】
"Ah! It's really exciting for Kai to have friends like you and Kakashi! This is
Kai's youth!" Matt Dai's eyes sparkled with light, and Met Kai beside him was also
very excited.
"He Feng, my father and I are going to the Fire and Mist Battlefield soon! I will
also do my part to protect the village!"
"Kai, Senior Dai, please pay attention to safety."
He Feng briefly chatted with the two of them for a few more words before taking the
initiative to end the conversation and leave first.
He felt that if he didn't leave, the two of them could hold him and chat about
their youth for a whole day.
"A Fei, find a Bai Jue to help me keep an eye on Kai. If he or Uncle Dai are in
danger, Bai Jue can take action. They won't expose us." He Feng said casually as he
walked on the road, not caring what happened to A Fei. Are you by your side?
"Okay Hefeng, I understand." A Fei suddenly drilled a head out of one side of the
wall, and after saying that, he drilled back again.
He Feng smiled helplessly. Although he had told Ah Fei to go around Konoha by
himself before, Ah Fei had always been by He Feng's side in order to communicate
with He Feng as soon as possible.
After bidding farewell to Matt Dai and his son, He Feng walked towards Orochimaru's
experimental base.
In the past few months, he had not only taken care of the lonely old man at Uchiha
Madara's place.
Although Uchiha Madara does not have the scientific research talents of Orochimaru
and Senju Tobirama, he does not stop researching after opening the Rinnegan with
Hashirama cells.
After all, Uchiha Madara was able to cure Obito, who lost half of his body, through
Hashirama cells and White Zetsu.
Coupled with Bai Jue's help, He Feng's progress in researching Hashirama's cells
has surpassed Orochimaru's. This time He Feng went to the laboratory to confirm his
research during this period and make some arrangements. Easy to hand overTeacher
Orochimaru.
For He Feng, professional things still need to be done by professional people. Even
though He Feng has a tendency to catch up with Orochimaru in terms of scientific
research talent, He Feng does not think that he is better than Orochimaru.
On the contrary, the more scientific research talent increases, the more He Feng
knows what kind of genius Mr. Orochimaru is in this area.
Soon, Hefeng arrived at Orochimaru's laboratory.
On the surface, there are only some bottles and jars and various materials with
notes on them, which looks quite primitive.
But this is not the true face of Orochimaru's laboratory.
He Feng walked to a carpet and began to form seals.
"Sealing Technique·Resolution."
With the release of He Feng Ninjutsu, the stone tiles on the floor began to shake,
and a long corridor appeared.
Normally Orochimaru would not hide this place when he was there. After all,
Orochimaru had to spend 23 of the 24 hours in the laboratory.
Orochimaru is now at the Fire and Thunder Battlefield. It contains Orochimaru's
most important secret, and it naturally needs to be sealed.
Walking down the corridor, He Feng saw sophisticated experimental instruments one
after another.
The technology tree of the ninja world is askew. There are all kinds of high-tech
experimental equipment here, but no one has developed thermal weapons, the nemesis
of carbon-based organisms.
In addition to the high-tech experimental equipment here, there are also giant
culture media filled with nutrient solution.
In one of them, there is a female version of Orochimaru with her eyes closed.
This was not the first time He Feng had seen this physical being, but after what
happened with Sister Tsunade, He Feng felt an inexplicable shudder.
Shaking his head, He Feng shook his thoughts out of his head and turned to the
place where Zhujian's cells were stored.
"Let me see how far the gap between my cells and Hashirama's cells is now."
――――
I was watching the S13 finals today. The fight started at five o'clock and ended at
around seven o'clock. General Tiger was beheaded by Da Fei again.

Chapter 65 Paving the Way for Teacher Orochimaru

The cells accompanying He Feng and the cells between the pillars were dropped on
the same culture dish, and the two gradually came into contact as if they were
attracted to each other.
Through a professional microscope, He Feng could see that the chakras were merging
with each other. Although there was still a weak repulsive effect, it was harmless.
"That's enough. My compatibility with Zhujian's cells has reached the standard, and
I'm only one step away from awakening the Wood Escape." He Feng nodded with
satisfaction.
For He Feng, there are three known ways to possess Wood Escape.
First, he has been using genetic modification technology since he was a child, and
after a relatively long period of time, he has integrated the ability of wood
escape into his own genes.
This is also Yamato's method of obtaining Wood Release. This method is also the
most uncertain and difficult method.
The second is to replace part of his body with Bai Jue's body. Bai Jue has a strong
adaptability to everyone. In addition, He Feng's experience in studying pillar
cells over the years can also be used to obtain wood escape.
However, He Feng is not going to use this method unless it is necessary. After all,
the body is better to be original.
The third method is to use Hefeng's own cells and Zhujian cells for fusion culture,
customize an exclusive Hefeng's Wood Release Awakening Reagent, and inject the
adapted fusion cells into Hefeng's body through in vitro injection.
He Feng also prefers the third method. This method is very fault-tolerant. He Feng
can continue to improve before the success rate reaches the standard. Moreover, He
Feng does not intend to work alone behind closed doors, but intends to teach this
matter to others. Teacher Orochimaru.
If possible, He Feng wouldn't mind being a hands-off shopkeeper, waiting for
Orochimaru's research results and enjoying the results.
Moreover, Orochimaru, who has a successful experience in wood escape research, will
have a smoother future in scientific research.
"Yes, it's me as expected." He Feng felt a little proud, and then destroyed the
cells on the culture dish.
Although Bai Zetsu has almost become his personal assistant, there is still a Black
Zetsu hiding in the dark, and there will be a Hidan in the future.
He Feng has now begun to see the path to stability, and it is not that easy to take
advantage of He Feng.
He Feng also organized and sealed various information into scrolls so that they
could be carried around easily.
On the way out of the underground experimental base along the corridor, He Feng
heard two childish voices coming from the laboratory above.
"Yamato, we also need to clean that area. It's too high and I can't reach it.
Sweep the dust here, Orochimaru-sensei will definitely be proud of you. "
"Okay Anko, I'll be right away."
Anko stood at the door and pinched her waist, directing Yamato to clean like a
little devil, to which Yamato would not refute anything.
Although he knew that Hongdou was leaving all the work to him, he didn't really
care.
Whoever cleans Lord Orochimaru's laboratory is cleaning, not to mention Anko is
Lord Orochimaru's disciple.
At this time, Yamato had an inexplicable admiration for Orochimaru, so Anko, who
was Orochimaru's disciple, was put under a filter in Yamato's eyes.
"Oh, Yamato, you leaked it under the table. Look, there's still so much ash." Anko
walked into the laboratory, squatted on the ground and pointed at the blind spot
under the table.
"I'll come right away, Anko."
He Feng listened to the conversation between the two, and He Feng couldn't stand it
anymore. He pushed the floor above the corridor and walked up."Yeah! There's
someone!" Anko's eyes widened, and she immediately pulled Yamato away by his
clothes.
Although Anko often teases Yamato, this is how she treats Yamato as a friend. When
an unknown danger occurs, Anko will also think of pulling Yamato out instead of
running away by herself.
In other words, if Anko didn't even have this quality, Orochimaru would not accept
Anko as his disciple after He Feng.
"Little Hongdou, you don't even recognize me anymore." He Feng walked out from
under the stone slab and said expressionlessly.
Hefeng is three years older than Hongdou, and he is also Hongdou's senior brother,
so it makes sense to add a small character before the other person's name.
However, at this time, Hongdou's height was already equal to that of He Feng, and
there were faint signs of surpassing He Feng.
"Senior Brother Hefeng!" Hongdou was a little surprised. He stepped forward and
stretched out his hand to look at the heights of Hefeng and himself: "It's so
strange. How come Senior Brother Hefeng is as tall as me? Brother Kakashi is
obviously so much taller than me. .”
As she spoke, Hongdou stretched out her hand and gestured upward.
He Feng's entire face turned dark instantly. He discovered the problem of height
when he saw Obito.
His grandmother Obito was already much taller than him, but his height seemed to be
standing still, not necessarily growing two centimeters in half a year.
"Senior Brother Hefeng, I tell you that you must eat more, and you can also go to
the meatball shop in Chang Village. I grew up so fast because I often eat three-
color meatballs. Maybe if you eat more, you will be taller. You can catch up with
Kakashi-nii."
Hongdou didn't notice He Feng's expression at all, and continued to teach He Feng
the secret of growing taller.
Yamato on the side noticed He Feng's expression. He quietly approached Hong Dou
with small steps, pulled the corner of Hong Dou's clothes with his hand, and said
softly: "Hong Dou... talk less..."
"Eh? Say less? Why?" Hongdou is not only playful in nature, she is also very
generous and generous, completely unaware of the coming storm.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

As expected, Yamato didn't answer Anko this time. What answered Anko was He Feng's
fist that landed on her head.
"Little Hongdou, come and let Senior Brother Hefeng teach you the art of language.
At the same time, I will give you a taste of the power of fists for Teacher
Orochimaru."
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
"Hmm!" Hongdou covered her head and squatted on the ground, muttering: "Why is
Senior Brother Hefeng the same height as me, but his fists are so powerful? Yamato
didn't even feel my fists fall on Yamato's head."
At this moment, Hefeng felt that his punch just now was in vain. Hongdou had no
memory at all before it evolved into sweet potato.
"Little Hongdou, have you eaten too many meatballs recently? I think your face has
gained weight. If you get fatter, what will Teacher Orochimaru think of you?" He
Feng used his trump card and shouted at Hongdou. Soul torture.
The main reason why Anko in the original timeline can eat a lot of sweets every day
without gaining weight is the curse seal of the sky.
But now Orochimaru has not studied the idea of cursed seals for a short time, and
even if he studies cursed seals, Anko is not old enough to accommodate cursed
seals.
As for getting fat, He Feng was just talking about it casually. Hong Dou, who was
still a little girl, was just growing up. Plus, as a ninja, she had to train a
certain amount every day, so how could she gain weight so easily.
"Senior Brother Hefeng, don't talk nonsense. If you touch it with your hands, I'm
not fat at all." Hongdou stood up suddenly, grabbed Hefeng's hand and put it on her
face, trying to prove that she was not fat at all. fat.
Hefeng would not go along with the other party's wishes. He also wanted to teach
Hongdou a lesson so that the little girl Hongdou would understand the consequences
of making fun of his height.
Therefore, Hefeng turned to look at Yamato. He smiled and rubbed Yamato's head.
Even though Anko had been bullying Yamato, Yamato, who had the bloodstains of
Mudun, had already surpassed Anko in terms of strength.
In the original timeline, Anko's Chunin graduation age was twelve years old, while
Yamato was six years old.
This well illustrates the gap in strength between the two.
"Yamato, are you interested in joining me to support Teacher Orochimaru, and
perform well on the battlefield to win Teacher Orochimaru's praise?"

Chapter 66 Anko and Yamato

Orochimaru has always focused on hiding Yamato, let alone Danzo. Even Hiruzen
Sarutobi, who is the Hokage, does not know that a wood ninja was born under
Orochimaru.
The reason why He Feng wanted to take Yamato to the Fire and Thunder Battlefield
was because of his considerations.
Hiruzen Sarutobi's abdication after the Third War is inevitable, and who will
become the Fourth Hokage after Hiruzen Sarutobi abdicates is a question worth
considering.
Compared to Mr. Minato, Hefeng prefers Mr. Orochimaru or his sister Tsunade to be
the Hokage.
Fundamentally speaking, Namikaze Minato was destined to be suppressed by the
Sandaime when he became Hokage. After all, Namikaze Minato became famous in the
three wars, and neither his age nor experience was enough. Sarutobi Hiruzen could
use this as an excuse. Come teach and help Minato govern.
But Orochimaru and Tsunade are different. As three ninjas, they became famous in
the Second Ninja War. They also played a big role in the three wars. Both their
qualifications and achievements are enough. The two of them still have The identity
of a third-generation disciple.
It is no exaggeration to say that the roots are upright and the sprouts are red.
Coupled with He Feng's intervention, although Orochimaru's experiment involved
human experimentation, it was not fatal, except for Yamato.Hashirama cells have not
been tested on anyone.
Therefore, even if Orochimaru competes with Hokage this time, he will not be
criticized for human experimentation.
Not to mention Tsunade, as a direct descendant of the Senju clan and the Fifth
Hokage of the original timeline, her ability is beyond doubt.
Namikaze Minato is better off staying at home with his wife and raising children.
If Yamato can appear in the third battle, his identity as a Wood Release ninja will
immediately attract attention from all parties. Just a little inquiry will reveal
that Orochimaru has the technological strength to create Wood Release bloodstains,
which will undoubtedly improve Orochimaru A certain right to speak.
"Senior Hefeng! I'm interested! I want to contribute to Lord Orochimaru." Yamato
said excitedly.
Orochimaru is very charismatic. In the original timeline, he could make Kimimaro,
Yakushi Kabuto and others respect him from the bottom of their hearts. Yamato, who
has been following Orochimaru now, is no exception.
"I'm going too, Senior Brother He Feng! I'm also going to help Teacher Orochimaru!"
Hong Dou held He Feng's hand again and said coquettishly.
As two junior brothers, Hong Dou had no psychological burden at all for He Feng's
coquettishness, not to mention that the smell of He Feng's body was what Hong Dou
liked, and it smelled like three-color meatballs.
"You're too young, you can't do it." He Feng pressed his hand against Hong Dou's
head and said seriously.
Although the impact of Naoki's death on Orochimaru has been alleviated due to the
wind, it has not disappeared. For example, this time Orochimaru left Anko in
Konoha.
He Feng would not do anything he thought he could protect Hong Dou, so he would
just take Hong Dou, who was still a genin, to the battlefield.
Hearing what He Feng said, Hongdou was not happy, and immediately pointed at Yamato
and asked: "Then why is Yamato okay? He is obviously one year younger than me."
He Feng said bluntly: "Because Yamato is stronger than you, if it doesn't work, you
two can compete. Xiao Hongdou, if you can last ten rounds in Yamato's hands, I will
agree to take you with me."
Anko nodded, with a look of disdain on her face: "Humph! Bibi, I'm Orochimaru's
disciple. It's good if Yamato can last ten rounds in my hands."
Hefeng did not refute Hongdou, but said with a smile: "Then go to the training
ground, you can't use it here."
"Senior Brother Hefeng, we have agreed that if I win, you will take me to see Mr.
Orochimaru."
"Well, it's agreed that if you win, Yamato will stay in Konoha and you will support
Mr. Orochimaru."
Soon, Hefeng brought the two of them to Konoha's training ground.
There are many training grounds in Konoha, and He Feng deliberately found a
training ground that was relatively remote and without anyone around.
"Okay, this is fine, you can start." He Feng found a chair next to the training
ground and sat down, waving his hands to the two of them and said.
The two nodded, and Yamato's dull expression was still a bit excited. He let Anko
do it because he didn't think it mattered, but now if he loses to Anko, he will
stay in Konoha, and Yamato will naturally not hold back.
But before taking action, Yamato still looked at He Feng, with a questioning look
in his eyes.
He Feng nodded, his meaning was very clear. If you want to use Mu Dun, you can use
it. This thing is not a secret anyway.
After getting He Feng's instruction, Yamato looked at Anko again and made a sign of
opposition to Anko.
Anko was not too arrogant, and she also had a seal of opposition to Yamato.
"Latent Shadow Snake Hand!" Anko quickly formed a seal and used the ninjutsu taught
to her by Orochimaru.
I saw several two-meter-long venomous snakes released from Anko's hands, biting
Yamato.
Yamato did not hide his clumsiness, and used his best moves from the beginning.
"Wooden Escape·Wood Spindle Wall!"
The next second, a row of wooden pillars rose up from the ground. These wooden
pillars were bent into a semicircle and wrapped around Yamato, resisting Anko's
ninjutsu.
"What!" Hongdou was a little surprised. In her impression, Yamato's Wood Release
Ninjutsu was still a small, curved piece of wood. When did he become so powerful?
Anko began to move quickly, looking for the next opportunity to attack Yamato.
"Wood Release: Thorn Killing Technique." Yamato continued to form seals.
This time, two rattan-like pieces of wood appeared next to Hong Dou. These pieces
of wood immediately restrained Hong Dou.
"The battle is over." He Feng stood up from the chair, came to Hong Dou's side, and
looked at Hong Dou who was lying on the ground and tied with wooden bars.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
"How about it, little Hongdou, it seems that I didn't even hold on for two rounds,
not to mention ten rounds. You should understand why I didn't take you to the
battlefield this time."
Hongdou didn't speak, but looked at Hefeng and Yamato with red eyes. Her gaze
towards Yamato was particularly hostile, as if she was saying why you kept hiding
it from me, just to bully me like this now.
Yamato touched the back of his head, a little confused.
"Senior Brother Hefeng and Yamato are bullying people!" Hongdou's eyes became even
redder, and she saw tears welling up in her eyes.
Seeing this, He Feng slapped Yamato directly: "What are you doing standing there in
a daze? Unlock the ninjutsu."
"Ouch, I'll untie it right now." Yamato reacted and quickly formed a seal to take
back the wooden strips tied to Anko's body.
Hongdou also hurriedly stood up from the ground. This time she also realized her
shortcomings and had already made a plan to train herself.
As for continuing to beg Senior Brother Hefeng to take her to see Teacher
Orochimaru, Hongdou did not do it. She understood what it meant to be willing to
admit defeat.
"Yamato,You win this time, but you must not disgrace Orochimaru-sensei. I will
definitely win it back next time! "
"Little Anko, this is the ninjutsu note that Orochimaru-sensei gave me before. I am
giving it to you now. I hope you can learn the above things seriously. These are
Orochimaru-sensei's famous ninjutsu."
He Feng handed Hong Dou a note and comforted Hong Dou with a few words.
Seeing this, Hongdou quickly took the note and said quickly: "I understand, Senior
Brother Hefeng. Thank you, Senior Brother Hefeng. Goodbye, Senior Brother Hefeng."
After saying that, Hongdou disappeared in a flash.
She also found that her mouth was a little quick, and she was really afraid that
what she said would make Brother Hefeng angry, so she took the note back.
After Hong Dou left, He Feng looked at the small woods not far away.
There was a figure there, almost arriving at the training ground with He Feng and
others.
――――
I saw such a statement on the Internet.
One drop of semen and ten drops of blood, so why don’t vampires...
Then someone answered that succubi are high-level vampires.
I think this seems to be true.

Chapter 67 Fooling Weasel

Most people in the ninja world are precocious. There are children who go to the
battlefield at the age of five or six, and there are also civilians who get married
and have children at the age of thirteen or fourteen. People in the ninja world
have long been accustomed to this.
Although Itachi is only two years old, as the son of the Uchiha clan leader, he has
a lot of freedom.
As long as Itachi can complete the training tasks assigned to him by Fugaku, no one
will care what he does.
Itachi's own talent is also the leader of the Uchiha clan. Although the intensity
of the training plan arranged by Fugaku has exceeded his age, Itachi still
completed it.
Itachi, who was training, also had his own hobby, which was to continue practicing
with Brother Shisui at the training ground in Konoha, and Itachi would also ask
Shisui for a series of questions that he didn't understand and that Fugaku couldn't
answer for him.
Today, Uchiha Shisui did not come to the training ground because of his mission,
and Itachi came here by himself because of habit.
As soon as he arrived at the training ground, Itachi saw three figures in the
training ground where no one had come all year round.
One of the more good-looking girls was sitting lazily on a chair, while the other
two were standing in the training ground fighting.
Itachi did not step forward to disturb the other party, but quietly hid and kept
observing the three of them.
During the observation period, most of the young Weasel's eyes fell on He Feng.
He has never seen such a beautiful young lady.
Everyone likes beautiful things, and the Uchiha clan is famous for being rich in
handsome men and beautiful women. Even so, Itachi was immediately attracted to He
Feng.
Unconsciously, the battle between the two men in the training ground also ended.
Itachi discovered that the ninjutsu used by one of them was very similar to the
wood escape recorded in their Uchiha clan.
"It's been discovered." Itachi's eyes suddenly locked eyes with He Feng's, and his
heart tightened, and an emotion called nervousness actually appeared.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

However, as the son of the leader of the Uchiha clan, Itachi would not be so
nervous that he could not speak.
Itachi walked out of the woods. He had big dark eyes and a round face.
As a member of the Uchiha clan, Itachi looked extremely cute when he was young.
"It's one against seven." He Feng also recognized Weasel after seeing his little
face.
He Feng didn't have much fondness for Itachi, and he wouldn't mindlessly preach
about Weasel God or something like that based on Itachi's appearance.
In his opinion, Itachi is a bit too arrogant and self-centered. Everything he does
is what he thinks, and everything he does is also what he thinks is right.
After Shisui's death, Itachi stopped communicating with anyone. Like a stubborn
bull, he unswervingly followed the path he believed was right. In the end, Sasuke
was left alone to bear the annihilation of his family and the tragic death of his
parents to his most beloved brother. hands childhood.
In the end, he described everything he did as being for Uchiha to continue to exist
and for Sasuke to survive.
However, He Feng did not intend to bring his displeasure towards Weasel before his
reincarnation to this time.
To He Feng, the current Weasel is just a two-year-old child. He has not even
perfected his outlook on life and values. The current Weasel is like a piece of
jade. Which path he will take in the future will all depend on who carved it.
"Hello, seniors." Itachi maintained basic respect for the two of them. He
introduced himself: "My name is Uchiha Itachi, and I am a member of the Uchiha
clan."
The two people in front of him are both ninjas, and their strength must not be too
weak. One of them's ninjutsu is more like the wooden escape recorded in the book,
so Itachi's attitude is very well-behaved.
Of course, even if the two of them didn't have the strength, Itachi wouldn't be as
arrogant as other Uchiha, at most he would just ignore them.
"One against seven, my name is Hatake Hefeng."
"I am Yamato."
After seeing He Feng's attitude towards Itachi, Yamato also told him his name.
"Hefeng-senpai, Yamato-senpai." Itachi nodded to the two of them, and then showed a
puzzled expression, "Did Yamato-senpai use Wood Release just now? It was the Wood
Release of the First Hokage-sama."
Yamato did not answer Itachi, but looked at He Feng.
He Feng said: "Yes, Yamato is using Master Hashirama's Wood Release. Next, Yamato
will also use Wood Release on the battlefield to end other ninjas' invasion of our
Konoha."
The status of the Uchiha clan is very delicate.At that time, Konoha F4 needed the
help of the Uchiha clan and would not target the opponent too much, but it was
different after the war.
Danzo is very jealous of the Sharingan.
Now Danzo still has the eyes of his former teammate Uchiha Kagami in his eye
sockets.
Whether it’s because of Obito or something else, He Feng has plans to make good
friends with the Uchiha clan.
The Uchiha clan attaches great importance to love and justice. Once they truly gain
the friendship of the Uchiha clan, the other party will even go out of their way to
protect their friends.
And the Uchiha clan, like the Hyuga clan, has strategic significance on the
battlefield.
The Sharingan Ten of the Uchiha clan does not need a kaleidoscope to defeat the
tailed beasts. As long as the number of three magatama increases, the tailed beasts
will still be overwhelmed.
"Senior Hefeng and Yamato are also going to the battlefield? Brother Zhishui just
came down from the battlefield. He told me before that the battlefield is cruel,
war is evil, and I hate war." Itachi was a little depressed, and he thought about
it again The tribesmen who died because of the war.
He Feng reached out and rubbed Uchiha Itachi's hair, "War is indeed cruel and
sinful, but war is also romantic and sacred."
Hefeng showed a gentle face to Itachi, took Itachi's little hand and led him to the
chair and asked him to sit down.
Itachi was obedient, his cheeks slightly red.
"Sister smells so good." Such a thought appeared in Itachi's mind.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
Seeing that Weasel was a little confused, He Feng also started his own trick of
deception.
For Nagato, Hefeng wanted to end the war with war, and said that great unification
was the inevitable direction.
Another way to describe Weasel Hefeng.
Itachi, who was only four years old, began to think about the meaning of war after
witnessing World War III. He graduated from a ninja school at the age of seven and
could talk about peace with the long-famous Shisui on an equal footing. At the age
of eleven, he joined ANBU and was recognized by Kakashi.
Although all this shows that Itachi is a genius, Itachi is actually a weak and
stupid person.
To deal with such a person, He Feng only needs to give the opponent a logical
closed loop, and make this closed loop rational and righteous. Coupled with He
Feng's own charm value, He Feng can completely convince Itachi.
"Itachi, although you are very young, I can see that your mind is very mature.
You have to know that if our ninja world wants to develop and we humans want to
progress, war must exist.
Everything we have is what we have fought for. We compete with heaven and man. In
order to win the battle, we invented ninja tools and researched ninjutsu. We also
formed a village in the form of a large clan.
Once the fighting stops, our steps also stop. While we are enjoying ourselves while
others are still making progress, it is self-evident what is waiting for us. "
"..."
Hefeng held Itachi's hand and talked there. Itachi nodded as if he understood, and
didn't know how much he remembered.
Yamato on the side said nothing, just looked at the two of them, and an idea came
to his mind: "He Feng and Lord Orochimaru look more and more alike."
――――
The question arises, which one is He Feng's mouth dodge that is more powerful, or
Naruto's mouth dodge that is more powerful.

Chapter 68 Yuying Xiaonan

Itachi was still in a daze until he returned home. He felt that a lot of knowledge
had been drilled into his head that he could not understand now.
"Father, I..." Itachi pushed open Fugaku's study and saw Fugaku frowning in the
study.
"It's Itachi, what's the matter?" Fugaku raised his head, still very proud of his
son Fugaku.
"Father, I want to ask you a question." Itachi asked with some anxiety.
Ever since he was a child, whenever he asked his father a question, his father
would reject him for various reasons. This time Itachi also had too many ideas
implanted in his mind, so he tentatively asked.
Fugaku looked at his son at the door and was slightly startled, then rubbed his
temples again.
He is also worried about what happened in the clan. Because Uchiha's Sharingan
restrained the tailed beasts, Hokage asked the ninjas of the Uchiha clan to
disperse in small teams and support the remaining four battlefields.
There is actually no problem with this, and Fugaku doesn't think it is a bad thing.
After all, Konoha is also Uchiha's Konoha.
But the problem lies within the Uchiha. The hawkish old diehards like Setsuna
Uchiha simply don't agree with the Hokage's arrangement.
At that time, he said to Fugaku righteously: Uchiha is a thick hemp rope. If you
want to break the Uchiha into small teams, then break the hemp rope. Those people
in Konoha will backstab the Uchiha clan. This would destroy the Uchiha.
Fugaku didn't take these words seriously, but there were quite a few Yingpai clan
members who supported Setsuna's old man.
"Hey..." Fugaku sighed in his heart and said to Itachi: "Itachi, if you have any
questions, just tell me and I will see if I can answer it for you."
Weasel's eyes lit up, and he quickly repeated to Fugaku the theory of "If you don't
advance in battle, you will perish in peace" that He Feng told him.
Upon hearing this, Fugaku's eyes lit up, and all the doubts and entanglements in
his heart were cleared up.
"Yes, this is a very good point. Who told you these things, Itachi? You have to
thank them. Our Uchiha are not a petty family." Fugaku rubbed Itachi's hair with a
smile.
He already has an idea about the path Uchiha will take in the future.
"It's Senior He Feng." The figure of He Feng suddenly appeared in Itachi's mind,
and his face became a little rosy.
Since heHe had never seen He Feng since he was born, and as the son of a clan
leader, he had no interest in reading the reward orders posted on the underground
black market.
Although Itachi didn't know He Feng's identity, Fugaku, who was Minato's friend,
knew He Feng.
He Feng's identity can be said to be a member of the Hokage clan with good roots.
If he can be on good terms with He Feng, it will also reduce the pressure on their
Uchiha clan.
In addition, Fugaku also heard that He Feng opened the Sharingan of the Uchiha
clan. Although this kind of thing was hearsay, Fugaku asked Obito and got the exact
answer.
It is true that Hefeng and Obito are on good terms, but in Fugaku's view, Obito
belongs to the Setsuna faction, and their relationship with him, the clan leader,
can only be described as average.
If that's the case, Itachi can be considered a mistake this time.
"Itachi, what do you think if you were asked to become a disciple of He Feng?"
Fugaku said suddenly.
"Can I really do this? Father?" Itachi blinked, feeling a little unconfident for a
moment.
"Of course, but whether Hefeng can accept you depends on your performance, but I
believe in you."
"I will work hard, Father."
……
After Weasel left, He Feng also made the decision to go to the Fire and Thunder
Battlefield in seven days.
The seven days passed slowly.
The next day, Hefeng went to the Hokage Building and said hello to Sarutobi
Hiruzen. However, he did not explain too much about what he had done in the past
six months. He just said hello to Sarutobi Hiruzen like an ordinary ninja. Zhan
submitted an application to support the front line.
After receiving approval, He Feng left the Hokage Building.
In the past seven days, although Tsunade did not do anything extraordinary to He
Feng, Tsunade seemed to be addicted. She had to stick to He Feng in everything she
did. At night, she became Tsunade's pillow.
However, after Tsunade is included in the red face panel by the system, He Feng's
strength will also increase slightly in comparison with Tsunade.
I think this is the reason why Tsunade has been clinging to He Feng.
The seven days ended quickly, and Hefeng, Obito and the three of them were ready to
go to the Fire and Thunder battlefield.
Tsunade took Nohara Lin Shizune to the Fire Sand Battlefield.
Although there were faint signs of Sunagakure retreating, the other party saw other
ninja villages attacking Konoha and wanted to send tailed beasts to get a piece of
the pie.
The conflict between Iwagakure and Konoha on the battlefield was the smallest.
Iwagakure seemed to have been hiding and tucking in. When the war started, the
ninjas on both sides threw some kunai at each other and released some ninjutsu.
Therefore, Konoha's defense investment in the flaming rock battlefield is
relatively small. A small number of family ninjas who operate in small teams, such
as Inoshikacho and Hinata Aburame, were arranged to the flaming rock battlefield.
The Fire Mist Battlefield is not as big as the Fire and Thunder Battlefield, but it
is the most aggressive ninja village. In addition to the Seven Ninja Swordsmen,
even the fourth generation Mizukage Gotachibana Yagura has appeared on the
battlefield several times.
In this regard, Konoha had to send additional ninjas from the Uchiha clan and the
Hyuga clan to support.
Supporting Kirigakure this time were the Shunshen Shisui of the Uchiha clan and the
clan jounin of the Hyuga clan.
In this Ninja World War, apart from the four major Ninja villages besieging Konoha,
there is another thing that is concerning.
That is, the daimyo of the Country of Rain joined forces with the neighboring
daimyo of the Country of Birds and the Country of Grass to officially announce the
merger. From then on, there will no longer be the names of the Country of Birds and
the Country of Grass.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
Instead, it became the United Kingdom of Ninja World.
The ninja villages in the current United Kingdom of Ninja World have also reached a
merger. The ninjas of the Kusanagi Village were merged into the Amegakure Village.
The lord of the Grass Country Ghost Light City, Wuwei, was unwilling to be ruled by
others and was defeated by the first generation of Amegakure Village, Amekage Angel
Konan. in hand.
The remaining elders of the Kingdom of Grass surrendered to the Rain Shadow Angel
Xiaonan.
At this point, Amegakure Village is the only ninja village in the United Kingdom of
Ninja World.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

While collecting ninjas and supplies from Kusakure Village, Konan Amekage
discovered a mother and daughter from the Uzumaki clan, named Uzumaki Kana and
Uzumaki Kana.
In addition, the Box of Bliss in Kusakure Village, which is said to make all wishes
come true as long as it is opened, was also taken away and collected by Payne, the
real power behind the United Ninja Kingdom.
Although the United Ninja Kingdom was established, the address of Hidden Rain
Village remained unchanged. For Pain, the non-stop rain in the Country of Rain was
a good barrier.
In the central tower.
Xiaonan was wearing Yuying's royal robe, and her whole person exuded an aura that
was cold and kept away from strangers.
Next to her stood a mother and daughter. The mother and daughter were clinging to
each other, with grateful eyes mixed with caution.
After all, for her, it was nothing more than going from one hell to another.
Perhaps because it was too early, there were no irrecoverable bite marks on Uzumaki
Kana's arm.
"You two will be my ninjas in Yugakure from now on. You have absolute freedom in
Yugakure. No one can interfere with your freedom. This is God's iron law. Anyone
who violates God's law will be punished. God's punishment." Konan casually threw an
Amegakure forehead protector to Uzumaki Kana.
"Thank you, Mr. Rain Shadow! Thank you, Mr. Angel!" Kana caught the forehead
protector that Konan threw over and thanked him continuously.
"You don't need to thank me. There is someone else you really need to thank. You
will see it one day."
――――
Uzumaki Koso's birth date is Konoha 51, and his current date is Konoha 49.
Because of the butterfly effect, aromatic phosphorusIt makes sense to be born two
or three years earlier.
(￣ェ￣;)

Chapter 69 Destiny is a cycle

The Fire and Thunder Battlefield is located in the northeast of the Country of
Fire. It is relatively close to the Country of Iron, the country of samurai.
However, because the Country of Iron has always maintained a neutral attitude and
did not send anyone to participate in the war, neither Kumogakure nor Konoha have
any Iron Country. country’s idea.
However, as the snow gradually melted, the war between Konoha and Kumogakure
gradually came to an end.
Phew——
In the jungle, Kakashi held a short knife with lightning arcs beating on it. The
short knife ruthlessly cut the throat of the Kumogakure ninja.
"It's Konoha's white god of death, don't spread too thin."
After the other Kumogakure ninjas noticed Kakashi's figure, they quickly formed
seals to fight back.
Susu!
However, what awaits these people is a faster knife.
"Kakashi, your sword speed is already fast enough. All that's left is to keep
honing your skills. Thunder attribute chakra is your specialty. In addition to
integrating it into the short sword, you can also try to use it to strengthen
yourself. body of.
It’s almost like Kumogakure’s Thunder Release Chakra mode. "
Hatake Sakumo stood next to Kakashi and waved his sword, then put away the short
sword and taught Kakashi earnestly.
As the commander-in-chief of the Fire and Thunder Battlefield, Hatake Sakumo spends
most of his time in the command room overseeing the overall situation and rarely
has free time.
However, Hatake Sakumo was not a stubborn person. He was very optimistic about
Orochimaru's talent, so in order to win faster, he directly handed over the command
to Orochimaru.
And Hatake Sakumo himself took Kakashi to raid the supply line of Kumogakure
Village.
Now the two of them happened to meet Kumo Hidden's patrol team and took care of
them.
"I understand, Father, I will try my best." Kakashi nodded, his face under the mask
not changing due to the bloody battlefield.
At this moment, White Fang suddenly looked into the distance and saw a huge chakra
aggregate flying towards his direction.
"It's the Tailed Beast Tama! Kakashi, retreat quickly." Sakumo suddenly grabbed
Kakashi's arm, and wind attribute chakra appeared on Sakumo's feet, increasing his
mobility.
Boom! ! !
A huge explosion sounded, and a vacuum area appeared in the woods visited by Tailed
Beast Jade.
"Brother, run away." Kirabi released the state of complete tailed beast
transformation and looked at Yeyue aside and said.
"It doesn't matter, it's just a signal to Konoha. This war has been going on for
more than a year. Since other ninja villages have been hiding it, I, Kumogakure,
will take action first." Yeyue's face was very calm, but But a figure has already
appeared in his heart.
That man cut off his left arm. Although the loss of an arm did not have a big
impact on Yeyue's daily life, it was a shame for Yeyue.
The son of the dignified third-generation Raikage, the AB combination of Yunyin
Village, actually broke off his arm in front of a person and ran away.
When Hatake Sakumo and Kakashi returned to the Konoha camp, they also saw a figure
in the command room that made them think about it day and night.
"He Feng?" Kakashi asked with some uncertainty.
Although the other person has the same hair and back as his younger brother,
Kakashi is a little unsure about the answer in terms of height.
After all, he is now 1.55 meters tall, while the opponent looks only about 1.4
meters tall.
"Brother Kakashi, and dad, long time no see." He Feng turned around and looked at
the two of them with some emotion.
"It's been a long time indeed." Hatake Sakumo stepped forward and patted He Feng on
the shoulder happily, "My boy hasn't grown so big in half a year, and even my
father has kept some secrets from me."
He Feng was a little embarrassed. This was the reason why he didn't come here right
away.
He said he made it up to fool Kakashi and Obito. It was okay to add a peeping Black
Zetsu, but he would never be able to fool his father.
"You have lived up to your mother's bloodline. Even the Sharingan has awakened. Can
you turn it on and off at will? Let father see." Hatake Sakumo squatted on the
ground and rubbed Hefeng's long hair, whispering softly.
He said this for He Feng to hear, and also for everyone else present to hear.
After all, in addition to Orochimaru, Obito, Yamato, Kakashi and others, there were
other ninjas in the command room.
These people have all heard more or less about the Hatake family's youngest son
awakening the Sharingan. After all, the awakening of the Sharingan in a foreign
ninja is most suitable for after-dinner chat.
He Feng nodded, already understanding in his heart that this was his father Hatake
Sakumo's endorsement of him. If He Feng's Sharingan came from the maternal
bloodline, those Uchiha clan members would not be able to attack He Feng even if
they wanted to. .
"Three magatama!"
After seeing He Feng's Sharingan, Obito's eyes widened.
He was struck again by He Feng's talent.
Kakashi on the side was also thoughtful. Because he was afraid of being exposed,
Hatake Sakumo did not tell Kakashi the truth of the matter, so Kakashi also had the
idea of awakening the Sharingan in his mind.
That idiot Obito can become so much stronger by awakening the Sharingan. If I
awaken the Sharingan, can I protect He Feng?
Kakashi was not sure, but he planned to ask Lord Orochimaru when no one was around.
After all, the relationship between the Hatake family and Orochimaru is very close
because of He Feng.
Although Kakashi became a disciple of Namikaze Minato, he would occasionally ask
Orochimaru some questions.
"Yes, he is indeed my White Fang's son." White Fang nodded with satisfaction, and
thenChange to a serious expression.
"Kumogakure can't wait much longer. Kakashi and I were attacked by the Eight-Tails.
They have sent tailed beasts to join the battlefield." Hatake Sakumo told what
happened when he and Kakashi encountered the Eight-Tails just now. .
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
He is an agile ninja, not a human shield ninja like the Third Raikage, who has high
attack and high defense. Facing the tailed beast, he can only dodge.
"It's impossible that Kumogakure doesn't know that the Uchiha clan in Konoha
restrains the tailed beasts. If they still dare to send out the tailed beasts, it
means that they have no fear of the Uchiha clan." Orochimaru analyzed calmly.
"Is it possible that the Third Raikage also participated in the battle?" He Feng
stood aside and asked weakly, "At that time, Kumo Hidden's AB combination had been
defeated by me and Minato-sensei, even though Minato-sensei was not at the Fire and
Thunder battlefield... "
Nara Shikaku, who had been listening for a long time, nodded. As the real think
tank in this war, Nara Shikaku had all-round considerations on the battlefield.
He stood up, picked up the small flag and planted it on the sand table in the
center of the command room.
"That's right, since Kumo Hidden intends to gnaw us down in one go, he must be
prepared to attack with all his might.
In this case, Kumogakure will definitely attack with his entire army. In addition,
Kumogakure and Iwagakure have been grudges for a long time. Iwagakure may not
directly turn around and abandon Konoha to attack Kumogakure.
We can naturally take this issue into consideration for Kumogakure. Considering
that Iwagakure may sneak attack him, the Third Raikage will definitely drag
Iwagakure into the water. "
With that said, Nara Shikaku placed another small flag on the sand table.
"So, a place that is very important to Iwagakure and cannot be missed, and is not
far from our battlefield, is the place where Kumogakure chose for the decisive
battle of the three villages."
The sand table was placed a little high, and He Feng could only see it clearly by
standing on tiptoes.
But in the next second, He Feng was lifted up by Orochimaru.
He Feng was also able to clearly see the location marked by Nara Shikaku.
"Kannabi Bridge!"

Chapter 70 Help me become the second Immortal of Six Paths

Orochimaru did not continue to participate in the subsequent formulation of the
battle plan, but left the command room with He Feng and came to his temporary
research institute together.
There are not too advanced scientific research equipment here, but it does not have
much impact on Orochimaru. Even in this place, Orochimaru's scientific research
work still has no intention of stagnating.
After releasing a soundproof barrier, Orochimaru looked at He Feng. He licked his
lips, with a smile on his lips, and looked at He Feng with his eyes that seemed to
be able to see into people's hearts.
"He Feng, this half year has been wonderful."
He could see the growth in He Feng, whether it was the Sharingan of unknown origin
or the powerful chakra faintly emanating from He Feng.
Although Orochimaru didn't want to admit it, he felt that He Feng had surpassed him
in terms of strength.
"Teacher Orochimaru, I have been following Uchiha Madara for the past six months,
and I have witnessed a scene unknown to the ninja world." He Feng understood
Orochimaru's psychology very well, and let Orochimaru know with just one sentence.
Interest came.
I even forgot that I once said that I would give He Feng a good punishment.
"Oh? Uchiha Madara? In the history of Konoha, Uchiha Madara has been dead for
decades." Orochimaru was very curious. Senju Hashirama's cells were still full of
power after so many years after his death. As a ninja who was on par with Senju
Hashirama during the Warring States Period, Uchiha Madara must also have powerful
power within his body.
"That's right, but that was Madara's method of feigning death to escape. The Uchiha
clan has a secret technique called Izanagi, which can turn things that are
detrimental to oneself within a period of time into nothing at the cost of
blindness in one eye. It has happened, only choose what is beneficial to you and
turn it into reality.
Madara used such a secret technique to change the reality of his death and
survived. "
Orochimaru nodded repeatedly. He had never thought that the Uchiha clan had such a
secret technique: "It seems that my research on the Uchiha clan's Sharingan is not
sufficient. It is such a powerful eye."
Hefeng continued to narrate: "Before he activated Izanagi, Madara bit off a piece
of flesh and blood from Hashirama's body. After he survived, Madara transplanted
the piece of flesh into his own body."
Seeing that He Feng wanted to continue talking, Orochimaru stretched out his hand
to interrupt He Feng: "He Feng, we'll talk later, let me think about it first."
"Hashirama cells and Sharingan have a mutual restraint relationship. Sharingan can
very well restrain Hashirama's will in Hashirama cells to increase the success of
fusing Hashirama cells.
Uchiha Madara's Sharingan must be extremely powerful, which means that Uchiha
Madara is very likely to awaken Wood Release after this, but if he only awakens
Wood Release, it is impossible for Uchiha Madara to die after Senju Hashirama's
death. He has been shrinking from the world.
That is not the character that Shura in the ninja world should have, which means
there are other more important things that Uchiha Madara must hide..."
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Orochimaru frowned and continued: "The Sharingan of the Uchiha clan can continue to
evolve. The evolution of the Sharingan of ordinary Uchiha from one magatama to
three magatama is already the limit, but according to historical records, there are
still more than three magatama. With a more powerful Mangekyō Sharingan..."
Orochimaru raised his head and said with unusual confidence: "Hefeng, is Uchiha
Madara's Mangekyō Sharingan the same thing?"Evolved and opened more powerful eyes,
which allowed him to see the truth of the ninja world more clearly, but at this
time Uchiha Madara was old enough, so he continued to hide and wait When the
successor he recognized appears.
And you are the successor chosen by Madara Uchiha. Having awakened the Sharingan,
you are qualified to inherit his will. "
He Feng was very surprised. He just told a little unknown secret. Teacher
Orochimaru could infer so many things based on this secret alone, and he was very
close to the truth.
I can only say that he is worthy of being Teacher Orochimaru. This IQ alone is
beyond the reach of ordinary people.
"That's right, Master Orochimaru, I was chosen by Madara to be the successor of his
will. He taught me for half a year, hoping that I could inherit his will and bring
peace to the ninja world.
However, Mr. Orochimaru, there are still many secrets of the Sharingan. Users of
the Mangekyo Sharingan will gradually fall into blindness as their pupil power is
used. If they want to avoid blindness, they need to transplant the Mangekyo
Sharingan of their blood relatives, thus opening the door called The eyes of the
Eternal Mangekyō Sharingan.
During the final battle between Madara and Hashirama, it was the Eternal Mangekyō
Sharingan, and the eye he later opened was called the Samsara Eye, which was the
same eye as the Sage of Six Paths. "
"Teacher Orochimaru, I will tell you everything I know. Can you help me open the
Eye of Samsara and help me become the second Sage of Six Paths? In order to realize
the dream that no one has ever realized - for the ninja world. Bringing true
peace.”
Orochimaru smiled and put his hand on He Feng's hair, "Xiao He Feng, as a teacher,
you should help your students. I will spare no effort to support you."
"Well, thank you Orochimaru-sensei. This is all the information I have about using
Hashirama cells to open the wood escape blood stain. I will leave it to Orochimaru-
sensei."
"..."
――――
The development of things is proceeding steadily as analyzed by Nara Shikaku, and
the development of the story can never be separated from that key node.
Even with the influence of He Feng, Shenwubiqiao still cannot avoid the fate of
destruction, and may even suffer greater turmoil.
The Kumogakure ninjas were fighting with the Konoha ninjas while moving towards the
Kannabi Bridge.
Orochimaru on the Fire and Thunder battlefield also conveyed a series of
information to Namikaze Minato on the Fire and Thunder battlefield through the
psychic snake.
After seeing Nara Shikaku's battle plan, Namikaze Minato first discussed with Hyuga
Hizashi, the head of the Hyuga branch, and then determined the overall battle plan.
Yanyin Village.
Since the war started, Onoki has been commanding the battle remotely from Iwagakure
Village. Because it is a single-line operation, Onoki does not need to worry too
much.
After confirming that Konoha could not be taken for a while, Onoki had a different
thought in his heart.
As the Tsuchikage of Iwagakure Village, Onoki has a very high say in Iwagakure
Village except for dealing with Iwagakure's Jinchuriki. Under Onoki's orders, in
addition to part of the combat power of the Fire Rock Battlefield, Iwagakure
Village Another 10,000 living forces were gathered, preparing to quietly attack
Yunyin with a big wave.
But on the second day after the troops were assembled, Onoki received the news that
Kumogakure Village was moving towards the Fire Rock Battlefield and wanted to drag
their Iwagakure into the water.
As a Tsuchikage, Onoki naturally could not sit back and watch the ninjas fighting
outside being wiped out by Kumogakure and Konoha.
Therefore, Onoki could only lead 10,000 Iwagakure troops to go to the fire rock
battlefield in person.
At this point, the Tsuchikage known as the Two-Blade Ohnoki of Iwagakure Village
has officially come to an end.
In the current three battles, only Hiruzen Sarutobi is still in charge of the
Konoha Ninja Village.

Chapter 71 Mobilization before the war

Because the Third Raikage was worried about Onoki's sneak attack on his hometown,
he decided to choose the battlefield at Kannabi Bridge in the northwest of the Land
of Fire with one against two.
In this regard, both Konoha and Iwagakure maintain the same tacit understanding
without any timidity.
This will be a melee for the three parties, and this melee can directly determine
the direction of the Third Ninja War.
After all, neither Kirigakure nor Sunagakure's overall strength is too strong.
On the way to transfer the large forces, Konoha and Kumogakure also maintained the
most basic tacit understanding and did not break this short deadlock.
Time flies by, and a week has passed just like this on the road.
During this period, Hefeng also unified the origin of his Sharingan with
Orochimaru. If asked by outsiders, it was natural. If asked by acquaintances like
Kakashi, it was Orochimaru's research results, but it cannot be copied in a short
time.
It was also on this day that the Konoha ninja forces of the Fire Thunder
Battlefield and the Fire Rock Battlefield completed their merger.
The overall commander of the battlefield is still Hatake Sakumo, and the deputy
commanders are Namikaze Minato, Orochimaru, Nara Shikaku and others.
As the day of the three-party melee approaches, the battlefield becomes more
solemn.
Hatake Sakumo was fully armed, with a Konoha ninja forehead protector tied on his
forehead. He stood on a high platform built by Earth Release and said loudly:
"Everyone must be familiar with me, but I will still introduce myself. My name is
Hatake Sakumo, an elite Jonin of Konoha, the captain of the ANBU directly under the
Hokage, and the commander-in-chief of this army.
This is an invasion war launched by the other four major ninja villages against
Konoha. We are just trying to protect our home and our families. We are the party
with righteousness! So don't feel guilty because life is passing from our hands.
That is a necessary and necessary method to protect our beloved relatives, friends,
and brothers.! "
Hatake Sakumo's voice was sonorous and powerful, and with the blessing of chakra,
his voice could reach the ears of everyone present.
"I know you are worried about whether we will fail if the other party has the help
of the tailed beasts, but what I want to say is, but what I want to say is that we
are ninjas in Konoha, and our village has the reputation of being the largest
village in the ninja world. , this reputation is not given to us by other villages,
but by us punching it with our fists!"
While speaking, Hatake Sakumo pointed to the open space aside.
"We have the 'Sannin' Orochimaru."
Bang——
A burst of smoke rose, and Orochimaru with long black hair, golden eyes, and pale
skin appeared there.
"Psychic art!"
The next second, a huge snake appeared under Orochimaru's feet.
The big snake was nearly fifty meters long. The appearance of such a giant snake
undoubtedly did not increase the confidence of the ninjas present.
After all, the war has been going on for more than a year, and no matter how much
energy you have, it will be lost. If you don't mobilize in front of the station, it
is very likely that it will not be able to display its original strength.
"We also have Minato Namikaze, who is known as the 'Yellow Flash'. Minato Namikaze,
who inherited the second-generation Hokage-sama Flying Thunder God, has the
strength to stand up to the Kumogakure AB combination alone."
Namikaze Minato's appearance was more low-key than Orochimaru's. In just a blink of
an eye, Namikaze Minato appeared with his chest in his arms.
His smile is still so contagious, and it has already given the ninjas a little more
confidence even without doing anything.
But the next second, Namikaze Minato no longer kept a low profile.
"Psychic art!"
With the release of Namikaze Minato's psychic technique, a huge toad appeared at
the feet of Namikaze Minato.
This toad has a giant pipe in its mouth, a bandage around its waist, and a huge
dagger.
Gamabunta saw the seriousness of the occasion, so he just kept silent and smoked.
"After the 'Sannin' and 'Yellow Flash', we in Konoha have one rising star after
another. Everyone here will be familiar with the mention of Wooden. That is the
blood successor of our first Hokage-sama." Limit, known as the strongest ninjutsu
in the ninja world.
And just a few years ago, the 'Sannin' Orochimaru had already reproduced the first-
generation wooden escape with his powerful scientific research ability. "
Hatake Sakumo pointed to the empty space on the other side where no one was
standing.
Yamato came to the open space with a teleportation technique from behind the high
platform. Although the way he moved was not impressive enough, what he did next
made all the Konoha ninjas, including Nara Shikaku and others, shine in front of
them.
"Wood Release: The birth of the tree sea!" Yamato activated all the chakra in his
body and squandered his chakra in the open space.
After Yamato's chakra reached a critical point, it stopped, but this also made
Yamato gasp for breath.
But at this time, everyone present no longer cared whether Yamato was breathing or
not, but were attracted by Mu Dun.
"Great! It's Wood Release! It's the First Generation Master's Wood Release."
"If there is Mudun, we will definitely win next."
"The wood escape of the first generation of masters has not been lost. It is not a
wrong decision for our family to integrate into Konoha."
"Master Orochimaru is so powerful, he can even develop the wood escape of the first
generation master."
"Yes, I wonder if Orochimaru-sama can study how to regenerate a broken limb. My
brother's leg was broken and he had to withdraw from the battlefield."
The ninjas below began to talk about it, but the content of the discussion was all
positive.
Obviously, Yamato's Wood Release directly cleared away the haze in most people's
hearts.
Hatake Sakumo nodded and continued: "In addition to the blood stains of Mudun, our
new generation of Konoha also has many ninjas who are famous outside and are
praised and respected by other villages.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
They are: ‘Red-Eyed Demon’ Uchiha Obito, ‘White Death’ Kakashi Hatake and... ‘Blood
Dancer’ Hatake Hefeng...”
Hatake Sakumo also paused when he thought of the name Yunyin gave his youngest son,
although he did take care of He Feng as his daughter when he was a child.
As Hatake Sakumo finished speaking, Hefeng and Kakashi Obito appeared on Yamato's
side.
After He Feng appeared, he could see that his favorability suddenly increased.
Obviously, He Feng's lethality to others is no longer limited to the opposite sex,
and the scope is not small either.
At the same time, Hefeng also began to form seals.
"Psychic art!"
As He Feng completed the seal, a huge slug appeared next to He Feng. The size of
this slug was comparable to that of Toad Buntai.
At this moment, although the three ninjas had not gathered together, the psychic
beasts corresponding to the three ninjas had gathered first.
"Our purpose in this battle is to drive Kumogakure and Iwagakure out of the
territory of the Country of Fire. Brothers and sisters of Konoha, let them see the
bloody nature of our Konoha ninjas! Let them understand that we Konoha ninjas The
largest village in the world is not a sheep to be slaughtered, but a ferocious
tiger!
This battle must be won! "
As Hatake Sakumo's high-pitched voice fell, the Konoha ninjas below also responded
in unison.
"This battle must be won!"
"This battle must be won!"
"This battle must be won!"
Looking at such a magnificent side, both Kakashi and Obito felt a little excited.
For them, war has always been a small group battle, or a small team battle. There
has never been such a battlefield with tens of thousands of people.
……Iwagakure battlefield.
Ohnoki used the super light heavy rock technique to fly in the sky. His eyes swept
over the more than 10,000 Iwagakure ninjas present, and his heart was filled with
excitement.
Konoha is not afraid of going to war with four ninja villages at the same time, and
Iwagakure is not afraid of facing Konoha and Kumogakure at the same time.
"Boys! It's time to show our will of stone! Let those Kumogakure barbarians and
Konoha ninjas see the power of our Iwagakure Village!"
--------------------xxxx--------------------

……
Yunyin battlefield.
The Third Raikage Ai was shirtless, with nearly 10,000 ninjas standing behind him.
Excluding the children who did not participate in the war and some ninjas who
stayed behind, this was almost all the living force in his Hidden Cloud Village.
His expression was high and his voice was deafening.
"I want to go to war with that old man Onoki and the ninjas of Konoha! Who is for
it! Who is against it!"
"Agree!"
"Agree!"
"Agree!"
"Very good, you are worthy of being a warrior of my Yunyin Village! Kill with me!"
"kill!"
"kill!"
"kill!"

Chapter 72 What? The Scarlet Maiden is not a female ninja?

As the army marched, the three parties soon met at the Kannabi Bridge.
"Onoki, why don't you stay in your nursing home in Iwagakure Village and come to
participate in the war? Aren't you afraid of laughing your head off?" Ai, the third
generation Raikage, started to mock Onoki.
There was a conflict between Yanyin Village and Yunyin Village before the village
was first established. Over time, the conflict became more and more profound, until
now it has reached the point where it cannot be resolved.
"Kumogakure's barbarian, if you're good at talking, it's better to show him his
real skills." Onoki was flying in the sky. Although his expression was very relaxed
during the conversation, his body was already ready to form seals and release
ninjutsu.
Tactically, he can despise the enemy, but he will not really look down on the Third
Raikage of Kumogakure.
In terms of strength alone, the strength of the third-generation Raikage Ai has
surpassed that of the first two generations of Raikage, and he is well-deserved as
the strongest spear and strongest shield.
"The Third Raikage is still as brainless as ever." Orochimaru looked at the Third
Raikage and said with a smile.
"Oh, by the way, I seem to have a little gift here. Would you like the Third
Raikage to see it?" With that said, Orochimaru opened a scroll, and a severed arm
appeared in Orochimaru's hand.
This severed arm is clearly the left arm of Yeyue, the son of the Third Raikage.
"My arm!"
"Big brother's arm!"
Yeyue and Qilabi's eyes turned red at that time.
"Boy, do you think I will be angered by you so easily? It's useless to talk more.
Let's see what happens next!" The Third Raikage roared angrily, and blue lightning
suddenly appeared all over his body, and he rushed towards Onoki like a sharp
arrow.
If it were a melee, his first target would be Onoki. He also planned to resist
Iwagakure's troops on his own, so that Kumogakure and Konoha could fight for the
time being.
Otherwise, Ohnoki would only need to release Dust Release a few times while flying
in mid-air, and they and Kumogakure would suffer heavy losses.
"The art of Dust Escape and Original Realm Peeling!" Ohnoki clasped his hands
together and then opened them, and a transparent cone-shaped white barrier
appeared.
The next second, the cone turned into a beam and shot towards the third generation
Raikage Ai.
Although Ai is very confident in his strongest shield and even dares to resist
Tailed Beast Tamade, Ohnoki's dust escape is his rare weakness.
As the battle between Onoki and Ai started, Konoha was not idle either.
For a moment, the ninjutsu kunai was thrown from the Konoha ninja side as if it
cost nothing.
In a world where combat power is severely graded, wars generally follow the
unspoken rule of king versus king versus general.
Although the ninjas from the three parties cannot participate in shadow-level
battles, they can still engage in hand-to-hand combat with ninjas from other
villages.
The battlefield is like a huge meat grinder. Even jonins must be extra careful
here, otherwise they are likely to be stabbed to the core by kunai flying from
nowhere.
"He Feng, Kakashi, I'm here too!" Obito's three magatama eyes appeared, he nodded
to Kakashi and He Feng and then rushed into the battlefield.
The dynamic vision brought to Obito by the Sharingan allows Obito to prevent sneak
attacks very well. Obito holding a kunai can easily avoid the ninjutsu attacks of
enemy village ninjas and can also fight back.
With a series of flowing moves, Obito successfully killed a Chuunin of Kumogakure.
"He Feng, pay attention to safety." Kakashi knew that his current strength could
not interfere with the battle between his father Sakumo and his younger brother He
Feng.
Therefore, Kakashi decided to join the battlefield with Obito. Since he is a
teammate, he should protect his teammates' backs.
Seeing Obito and Kakashi both joining the battlefield, Yamato raised his foot to
join in, but was directly held back by He Feng.
"Yamato, you have almost used your chakra just now. Save your own life first before
thinking about helping others." Hefeng reminded Yamato and then came to Namikaze
Minato, Orochimaru and Hatake Sakumo.
"Teacher, father, the Third Raikage and the Third Tsuchikage are fighting. What
should we do next?" He Feng asked softly.
"Hefeng, you and Orochimaru are going to support Iwagakure Village, and Minato and
I are going to meet Yeyue and Kirabi." Hatake Sakumo's eyes were on Yeyue and
Kirabi.
He still remembered that He Feng complained to him before, saying that he was
bullied by Yunyin's AB team. He has never forgotten this grudge. Now he can
understand the strength of the two.(for more novels (145689)join:
https://discord.gg/SZxTKASsHq)Namikaze Minato nodded. He thought there was nothing
wrong with Sakumo-senpai's arrangement. If he could challenge the AB combination
alone, he would have the advantage of not being at a disadvantage. Counting Sakumo-
senpai, he would definitely not lose even if he won. .
He Feng had no intention of refusing to form a team with his teacher.
In this ninja world, Orochimaru is second in terms of life-saving ability, but no
one can be ranked first.
This is He Feng's confidence in Teacher Orochimaru.
"Tailed Beast Jade!" At this moment, a dark red tailed beast jade shot towards the
direction of He Feng and others.
The figure of Namikaze Minato suddenly disappeared, and when he disappeared, he
threw a sword of love in the direction of the Third Raikage Ai.
"The Flying Thunder God Guides Thunder!"
With the powerful maneuverability of Namikaze Minato and Raijin, the tailed beast
jade shot by the Eight-Tails turned and shot directly in the direction of the Third
Raikage Ai.
Ohnoki and Ai noticed the tailed beast jade at the same time.
They didn't care. It was easy to dodge the tailed beast jade.
But the landing point of the Tailed Beast Jade is also a large number of Iwagakure
and Kumogakure.
"Dust Release: The Original Realm Peeling Technique!" Onoki's Original Realm
Peeling Technique shot at the Tailed Beast Jade. The powerful Original Realm
Peeling Technique collided with the Tailed Beast Jade, constantly disintegrating
the Tailed Beast Jade into its atomic state.
After Onoki resolved the Tailed Beast Jade crisis, what came to him was the crisis
of the Third Raikage.
"You kid from Konoha!" Onoki gritted his teeth and dodged the Third Raikage's
attack, which was not easy either.
After realizing that his tailed beast jade did not have the expected effect and was
almost taken advantage of, Kirabi no longer released the tailed beast jade, but
changed into half-tailed beast mode to confront Namikaze Minato.
"My boy is being taken care of by you two." Hatake Sakumo looked at the two of them
with a soft smile in his hand, holding the White Fang dagger.
"Your son? Who is he? I don't have time to take care of your son." Yeyue has a more
explosive temper than his father, especially when facing ninjas from other
villages.
If it weren't for Hatake Sakumo's strength that Yeyue valued, he wouldn't even say
much to him.
"Haha, it's you Kumogakure who got the title of my boy. Wasn't it my boy who
chopped off your broken arm, and you forgot about it so quickly?" Hatake Sakumo
said in a calm tone the words that made Yeyue's liver split.
It can be seen from this that Kakashi's poisonous tongue is not born, but
inherited.
"What! The Scarlet Maiden is not a female ninja?!!"
Chapter 73 White Fang’s Knife
Both Yeyue and Qilabi were a little nervous when they heard that the gender of the
"Scarlet Dancer" was actually male.
(After all, Benzi Lei has 10,000 times the special attack on women)
The appearance and strength of the 'Blood Dancer' are too outstanding. Many times
when the two think of the Scarlet Dancer, their first impression is not the other's
strength, but the other's coquettish face stained with blood.
Winning victory from the 'Blood Dancer' again and defeating each other has become
the brothers' obsession. After all, the ultimate dream of men is to conquer those
unconquerable women.
But now you tell them that the "Blood Dancer" is actually a man. They have been
wishful thinking for a long time. It is not an exaggeration to say that they are
murderous and heart-wrenching.
Yeyue's temper was much more violent than that of his father, and he couldn't bear
it at that time.
"Thunder Escape Chakra Mode! Thunder Escape Armor!" Yeyue directly activated the
strongest power he currently has. At this moment, his hair stood on end, and the
thunder attribute chakra in his body entered an extremely active state. state.
Although he can't maximize his defense and attack power like the Third Raikage, he
can be as good as the Third Raikage in other aspects, especially his speed, which
is something he is proud of.
After being targeted by Yeyue, White Fang also became serious.
Both of them are well-deserved shadow-level powerhouses, and both are famous for
their speed.
"Dancing violently at the level of lightning!" At this moment, Yeyue seemed to have
turned into a bulldozer, rushing towards Hatake Sakumo at an extremely fast speed.
His fists were the most powerful weapons. Each punch had a huge impact on Hatake
Sakumo. It's all fatal.
Hatake Sakumo is no less impressive.
Although Konoha does not have Kumogakure's thunder escape chakra mode, the
principles of many ninjutsu lead to the same goal through different paths.
Hatake Sakumo also uses thunder attribute chakra to stimulate his cells and improve
his mobility. However, compared to Yezuki, Hatake Sakumo uses thunder attribute
chakra and also adds wind attribute, which makes Hatake Kisakumo's movements became
more elegant.
Hatake Sakumo could dodge every punch thrown by Ye Yue by a hair's breadth. At the
same time, he was also trying to slit Ye Yue's throat with the White Fang dagger.
However, Ye Yue, who was wrapped in the armor of lightning escape, could not break
through the defense with the White Fang Dagger in a short period of time.
After all, the reason why the White Fang Dagger is famous is mainly because of its
users, not how powerful the knife is.
In terms of strength alone, the White Fang Short Sword is completely inferior to
Orochimaru's Kusanagi Sword.
But for Hatake Sakumo, the strength of the saber is not important, only the
adaptability is.
After realizing that Konoha White Fang could not be defeated in a short period of
time, Yeyue also gave up on confronting White Fang head-on, and instead kept
feinting around White Fang to attract White Fang's attention.
"Thunder Flash!" Ye Yue suddenly used the Flash Technique a second before he
feinted to punch, and went around to the side of White Fang.
"Thunder Heavy Artillery!" At this moment, Yeyue's fist was swung out like a
cannonball.
"Earth Release: Earthflow Wall!" Hatake Sakumo formed a seal with one hand, and an
earth wall instantly rose under his feet.
Yeyue's fist also fell on the earth wall, shattering the wall composed of earth
escape.
"Wind flash!" The properties of the White Fang dagger in Hatake Sakumo's hand
changed in an instant, from surging thunder and lightning to a sharp hurricane.
Without considering killing, Hatake Sakumo swung the White Fang dagger at Yeyue's
other arm.
Yeyue also noticed White Fang's counterattack, and immediately gave up the pursuit
and retreated.
The confrontation between the two did not last for a minute, and there were many
fatal dangers in it.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

This is the first time Ye Yue has fought against Konoha White Fang, and it is also
the first time she has experienced what it means to be a warrior under the
prestigious reputation. White Fang's strength is completely worthy of his
reputation.
"Since I said I wanted to seek justice for my boy, I won't stop just like that."
Hatake Sakumo's expression was still calm and gentle, but his movements were
extremely smart.
After seeing White Fang rushing toward her again, Yeyue also rushed forward.
He has lived for so many years and still doesn’t know what fear is. Even if it is a
complete tailed beast, he will not be afraid, let alone a human being.
On the other side, Kirabi faced Namikaze Minato again.
In terms of combat power alone, Kirabi cannot compare to Namikaze Minato. Facing
Namikaze Minato's Flying Thunder God Technique, not to mention Kirabi, even Yeyue
can only take a beating.
Therefore, Kirabi had a headache. He was under so much pressure that he even lost
interest in doing an impromptu rap.
"Xiaoba, I'm going to use that trick."
"Bi, your body can't hold on for long."
"Ang, but it's okay."
After Kirabi confessed to Niu Gui in the spiritual space, he lay on the ground with
his hands on the ground.
The tailed beast coat condensed on his body, red chakra kept bubbling, and the
temperature of his body surface continued to rise.
As the number of tails on the tailed beast's coat increases, Kirabi's aura slowly
increases.
The complete tailed beast transformation is a living target for Namikaze Minato,
and he will naturally not be stupid enough to let himself become a living target
and be slaughtered.
Compared with the complete tailed beast transformation, half-tailed beast
transformation will not only greatly improve his abilities, but also give him an
almost instinctive intuition for fighting. This intuition is very useful when
facing speed-type ninjas. Although half-tailed beasts Transforming into a tailed
beast has the price of bringing him a lot of negative emotions, but now is not the
time to care about the price.
"The power of the tailed beast is indeed evil. If I don't want Kushina to become
like this, I can only win here." Namikaze Minato stared at Kirabi and said to
himself.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
He did not hope that one day Kushina would be like this to face the enemy, as that
would make his husband very useless.
"Flying Thunder Formation." Namikaze Minato threw a dozen swords of love, forming a
circle with Kirabi as the center.
After the tail of the tailed beast's coat reached Hachijo, he rushed towards
Namikaze Minato like a wild beast, and his elbows were covered with white bones
with spikes.
"Roar!" Kirabi roared like a wild beast, and small tailed beast jade gathered in
his mouth.
Obviously at this time, Kirabi had acted instinctively and even forgot that
Namikaze Minato had the ability to transfer the tailed beast jade.
As the enemy, Namikaze Minato would naturally not remind the other party, but
silently used the Flying Thunder God to guide the tailed beast jade and return it
to the opponent after the other party shot the tailed beast jade.
Boom——
The tailed beast jade exploded next to Kirabi, but the next second Kirabi, who was
intact, jumped out of the explosion site.
But there are a lot of white bones on his body for defense.
"Senjutsu Otama Rasengan!" Namikaze Minato had a large Rasengan condensed in his
hand, and the invisible Senjutsu chakra was gathered into the Otama Rasengan.
Namikaze Minato was unable to enter the sage mode instantly, so when Kirabi
condensed the tailed beast's coat just now, he did not stand still, but quietly
condensed the senjutsu chakra.
With the restraint relationship of immortal magic, every attack from Namikaze
Minato can cause trauma to Kirabi.
――――
("Honestly, I'm not good at magic... magic requires a lot of time to gather the
power of immortals, and it can't be maintained for a long time...")
This is Minato Namikaze's original words when he turned on Sage Mode, so Minato
Namikaze does not have the ability to turn on Sage Mode instantly.

Chapter 74 Battlefield, He Feng’s moment of becoming a god

The battle between king and general is still raging.
Hefeng and Orochimaru did not join the battle immediately. After all, Ohnoki and
Sandaimei were fighting passionately. It was nothing for them, master and
apprentice, to help.
Compared with the battle between the two shadows, He Feng and Orochimaru were more
concerned about the movements on the battlefield.
You must know that this is a three-party melee, and there is no undead person in a
war!
For example, the Lan Dun Ninja from Cloud Hidden Village and the Explosive Release
Bloodstained Ninja from Iwa Hidden Village are all participating in the battle
below!
"Teacher Orochimaru." He Feng glanced at Orochimaru.
Orochimaru had a smile on his face, and he also gave He Feng a meaningful smile in
return.
"Psychic art!" He Feng began to form seals, using his huge chakra to activate the
psychic art.
A slug larger than the previous summons was summoned.
"Master Huobi, I'm sorry to trouble you." He Feng said respectfully.
"Xiao Hefeng, this is what I should do." Huo Lai responded with a sweet voice.
Then, the live snakeThe huge body exploded directly, and countless small slugs were
split and fell on the bodies of ninjas wearing Konoha forehead protectors one after
another.
He Feng closed his eyes, and after releasing his own valve to communicate with
natural energy, he also entered immortal mode in seconds.
At this moment, Hefeng's medical ninjutsu was transmitted to the Konoha ninjas
present through nodes one after another made of slugs.
This is equivalent to a fully equipped wet nurse pumping out her own milk without
any restrictions when starting a group.
The already exhausted Konoha ninja's combat strength doubled under He Feng's
treatment.
"It's Lord He Feng! Lord He Feng is so strong, I feel like I'm full of power now!"
A Konoha ninja said excitedly.
"The bastards of Yunyin Village, with the blessing of Master Hefeng's power, I am
invincible! Look at how powerful my fire escape is!"
"For Konoha! For Lord Hefeng!"
"For Lord He Feng!"
At this moment, all the ninjas who had been blessed by He Feng's medical ninjutsu
sincerely thanked He Feng, and established a pure and flawless figure in their
hearts for He Feng, who could save lives and heal the wounded.
【Favorability +1 from XXX】
【Favorability +1 from so-and-so】
【Favorability +1 from ***】
For a time, Hefeng's favorability, which had bottomed out because of his purchase
of the Sharingan, ushered in the largest surge.
The image of He Feng in the hearts of Konoha ninjas was also deified at this
moment.
If you have to assign a winner to this war, then He Feng must be the biggest
winner.
He Feng's physique was perfectly suited to the task of saving lives and healing the
wounded with medical ninjutsu.
Some people were happy and some were sad. The people of Konoha were excited that
Hefeng's medical ninjutsu saved them from death. Iwagakure and Kumogakure began to
worry.
The person who was about to be killed by him one second was resurrected with full
health and almost killed himself the next second.
This sense of disparity made the people of Iwagakure and Kumogakure very angry.
At this moment, the people of Iwagakure and Kumogakure seemed to have silently
reached a tacit agreement, no longer taking action against each other, but focusing
on the Konoha ninjas.
This allowed the Konoha side, which was already on a winning trend, to be
suppressed again.
He Feng was not idle either, but he did not kill the enemy directly. Instead, he
kept using the Flying Thunder God technique to save Konoha ninjas who were about to
die at the hands of others.
Every time He Feng saves a Konoha ninja, he can receive a favorability critical hit
from the Konoha ninja. Although the reward is not much, in the face of the huge
base, it can add up to a lot.
After a period of time, Hefeng even vaguely felt that his Sharingan was going to
break through the boundaries of the three magatama and complete the evolution into
the Mangekyō Sharingan.
However, injuries are always inevitable on the battlefield. When Hefeng rescued
Konoha ninjas, he would inevitably be affected by ninjutsu, ninja tools or random
attacks, and be injured.
This time, the person He Feng rescued was a ninja from the Hyuga clan.
Its name is Hyuga Hizashi.
As a major clan of Konoha, it is impossible for the Hyuga clan not to participate
in the war when Konoha faces war, but as ninjas from the clan, it is impossible for
all ninjas to participate in the war, so most of the ninjas participating in the
war are ninjas from the Hyuga branch.
As the head of the branch clan, Hyuga Hizashi was naturally chosen as the deputy
commander of the Fire Rock Battlefield.
The ninja that Hyuga Hizashi faced was the Explosive Release Ninja Hunter from
Iwagakure Village. With the bloodstains of Explosive Release, he could very well
restrain the Hyuga clan's Byakugan's close acupuncture points.
Every time Hyuga Hizashi approaches the opponent, he will be attacked by the
opponent's explosive escape, which makes him miserable for a while.
Coupled with the unpredictable nature of the battlefield, Hyuga Hizashi with his
white eyes will naturally face sneak attacks from other ninjas.
Just now, a kunai flew from behind Hizashi, and the angle of its flight coincided
with the blind spot where Byakugan was blind.
Hizashi, who was pierced into the body by kunai, lost most of his fighting ability
at that time. Seeing that Kari was about to release ninjutsu for a last hit, He
Feng appeared next to Hizashi and used the Flying Thunder God Technique to bring
Hizashi with him. Walk.
After He Feng left, Orochimaru, who was lurking in the battlefield, held a straw
sword in his hand and stabbed into Kari's body with a silent knife, depriving the
blood-stained explosion ninja of his life, and he was extremely skilled. His body
was sealed and taken away.
"Chief Hizashi, please don't move and let me heal you. Your injuries are a bit
serious." He Fengjiao's beautiful face showed concern and distress for the ninjas
from the same village. This is a good way to win the favor of Hizashi. Sensitivity.
The Hyuga clan, as a group of descendants of Otsutsuki Hamura, is also an untapped
treasure for He Feng. However, because the Hyuga clan was too feudal, He Feng had
few opportunities to communicate with Hyuga ninjas.
This time, He Feng found an opportunity. The favorability of a branch family head
gave He Feng enough reason to visit the Hyuga clan.
Let He Feng enter the Hyuga clan's territory, just like a wolf entering the flock
of sheep. There is no need to worry about the old stubbornness of the Hyuga clan
coming to chase him away.
"Thank you... He... cough..." Hinata Hizashi spoke with difficulty. The penetrating
injury caused his internal organs to ooze blood, and his throat was also blocked by
blood, causing a violent cough.
While Hefeng was using the Palm Immortal Technique to heal Hizashi, he was chatting
with Hizashi to distract him.
"Chief Hizashi, saving lives and healing the wounded is what I should do on the
battlefield. Teacher Orochimaru and Sister Tsunade have taught me that the lives of
my companions always come first."
He Feng whisperedThe whisper was very clear in Hizashi's eyes.
At this moment, Hinata Hizashi's thoughts were flying far away.
It was so far away that he thought of the child in his wife's belly, but it was a
pity that he looked at it with a white eye and saw that it was a boy. It would have
been better if it was a girl.
He Feng has a high status, and marrying He Feng can escape the fate of separation.
Soon, most of Hinata Hizashi's wounds had healed. He Feng nodded to him and then
entered the battlefield again.
――――
The person in Shigu Forest is the Great Immortal Slug. The Great Immortal Slug has
a name, and his name is Living Slug.
When He Feng calls Great Immortal Slug, he will naturally call her by her name, not
her race.

Chapter 75 Divine Power

--------------------xxxx--------------------

Both Iwagakure and Kumogakure villages have tailed beasts. The second-tailed Yukito
of Kumohidden Village chose to stay in the village because he was still unable to
control the power of the tailed beast in his body.
Yanyin Village is different.
Both the four-tailed jinchuriki Lao Zi and the five-tailed jinchuriki Han are at
odds with the Tsuchikage Ohnoki.
Similarly, because they were jinchuriki and suffered a lot, the two of them didn't
like war very much. Lao Zi even said that his power would only be used to protect
Iwagakure Village from being invaded, not by Onoki. Lao Buxiu is used to attack
other ninja villages.
Han maintained a neutral attitude towards this, but he also chose to stay in the
village instead of joining Yanyin's 10,000-strong army.
However, as a person from Yanyin Village, Han did not walk alone like Lao Zi.
Instead, after thinking for a while, he chased after the Yanyin army that had left.
Just after Han arrived at the Kannabi Bridge battlefield, he saw the almost
defeated army of Iwagakure and Kumogakure.
However, due to the melee, he did not enter the complete tailed beast
transformation. Instead, he borrowed the chakra of the five-tailed King Mu, and a
tail belonging to King Mu appeared behind him.
In this way, the Iwagakure ninja can also notice him well.
Sure enough, the moment Han joined the battlefield, the ninjas in Iwagakure Village
seemed to be inspired, and their sagging morale increased.
"It's Master Han. Master Han is a famous steam ninja. Those people in Konoha are
finished."
"Those Konoha ninjas will only be cooked under Han-sama's steam!"
The sudden addition of a Jinchuuriki was of great help to the situation on the
battlefield. Whether it was a chuunin or a jounin, under the blood stains of Han's
boiling escape, the Konoha ninjas did not even have a chance to be treated, and
they died. under high temperatures.
Kakashi and Obito noticed Han's figure immediately.
The condition of the two has declined, but the chakra supply of the little slug can
keep the two of them alive.
"Thunder Flash!" Kakashi waved the short sword wrapped in lightning arcs and aimed
it at the neck under the red armor.
He was extremely fast and arrived at Han's side almost in the blink of an eye.
"Steam Armor!"
The next second, Han's armor changed, and a large amount of high-temperature steam
spurted out from the armor.
"Oops." Kakashi was sprayed directly into the steam because he couldn't dodge.
But Kakashi can be considered to be experienced. When he couldn't dodge, he had
already started to form seals to release the substitute technique.
"Boiling Escape: Unparalleled Strange Power!" Han clenched his fists, and a large
amount of steam appeared behind him to push him forward, rushing towards the
position of Kakashi's substitute at a speed that was almost invisible to the naked
eye.
With the blessing of Fei Dun, the power that Handan can burst out in an instant is
not inferior to Tsunade, so if he hits Kakashi with this punch, Kakashi can report
to the Pure Land.
Obito also realized this and immediately launched an attack on Han.
"Fire Release: The Art of Fire Dragon!"
Obito stood aside. Although others had no time to stand in front of Kakashi,
ninjutsu support was already in place.
As a B-level ninjutsu, the power of Hao Fire Dragon is not weak, but it is not
enough for Han.
As a Jinchuuriki, he has a recovery ability that is unmatched by ordinary people.
He can kill the enemy with the power of the Fire Dragon.
In fact, Han did the same thing.
Obito's Fire Dragon accurately landed on Han's body, and the high temperature of
the flames burned Han's skin. This caused Han to suffer a lot of damage in an
instant. Both the armor and the skin under the armor were burned by the flames.
With.
If this kind of injury were placed on an ordinary jounin, that jounin might no
longer have the ability to continue fighting.
But it was completely different for Han. The appearance of the tailed beast coat
helped Han heal his injuries.
Han's fist was only a hair's breadth away from Kakashi's head.
"Excellent Konoha ninja, go to hell."
Han's voice was devoid of any emotion. He had deprived many people of their lives
over the years, and he would also die at the hands of others in the future. This
was an inevitable reincarnation.
"No! No! No! Don't!" Obito's eyes widened. He absolutely could not accept what was
about to happen.
In his opinion, this was entirely his own fault. If he had released not the Fire
Dragon Jutsu, but other A-level or even S-level ninjutsu to stop that Jinchūriki,
the result would have been completely different.
But now, it seems that he is going to watch Kakashi die in front of his eyes.
"I will never accept this reality!" Suddenly, Obito felt a powerful force gathering
in his body, and his eyes were filled with endless pupil power, which evolved
towards the power he most desired.
Obito’s eyesBlood flowed out of his chest, staining his face red.
The three magatama spun wildly at this moment, and finally turned into a completely
different pattern.
"Kamimui!" Obito released his newly acquired pupil technique, creating a space
vortex in front of Kakashi that could not be resisted by defense.
Han realized this immediately, but it was too late. As he retreated, the power of
divine power had already covered half of Han's body.
In the end, Han could only survive the divine power with a broken arm.
After seeing that Kakashi was unharmed, Hefeng went to the battlefield again to
gain favorability points. His Kagura Eyes were always open on the battlefield in
order to effectively perceive the unpredictable enemy situation. Therefore, He had
already discovered the opponent as soon as Han came to the battlefield.
During this period of time, he has been hiding aside to support Obito and Kakashi.
The current situation is what He Feng is most happy to see. With Kakashi's life in
danger, Obito finally awakened his Mangekyō Sharingan.
He also relied on the power of the Mangekyō Sharingan to successfully save Kakashi.
"Kakashi, are you okay?" Obito quickly came to Kakashi's side and looked at Kakashi
with a worried look.
Kakashi still hasn't recovered, he was almost killed just now.
At this moment, Kakashi also saw the gap between himself and a shadow-level
powerhouse like the Jinchuuriki.
"Obito, your eyes have evolved again." Kakashi was happy for Obito from the bottom
of his heart.
"Well, Kakashi, I really saved you." Obito nodded and continued to Kakashi:
"Kakashi, leave it to me to show you the Uchiha clan. The Mangekyō Sharingan is
powerful.”
"I will never forgive you, be prepared to face Uchiha's wrath." Obito looked at Han
with a cold face. With his twin divine powers, he was indeed qualified to say this
to a Jinchuuriki.
"Uchiha brats are really troublesome." Although Han was a little worried about
Obito's ability to control his eyes, he was no weaker than Obito in terms of
momentum. "But you won't think that I broke one of my hair carelessly." You can
beat me."
As Han said this, the color of the tailed beast coat on his body deepened again,
and the number of tails began to increase.

Chapter 76 It’s up to me to cut off the queen

Han launched another attack on Obito, and Obito just stood there waiting for Han.
The moment Han's fist fell on Obito, Obito activated the Hollow.
Seeing his fist pass through the Uchiha's body in front of him without touching
anything, Han felt a little incredible.
Then, he attacked again.
As a result, he was unable to touch Obito's body in any way, whether it was Boiling
Style or Taijutsu.
And Obito's power to distort space has already made Han miserable. As long as he
relaxes for a moment, he will face a certain death situation.
Kakashi on the side was also surprised by the power of Obito's new ability. He felt
that if he continued to follow the steps like this, the gap between him and Obito
would only become wider and wider.
(What kind of Sasuke template is this?)
"Let me show you what is the ultimate power of the Uchiha clan." At this moment,
Obito's secondary attributes completely exploded, and with his dual divine power,
he felt that he was invincible.
"Susanohu." The light blue bones completely wrapped Obito. In Susanoo's initial
form, Obito could withstand some of Han's attacks even if he didn't turn on the
virtualization.
But the initial defense of Susano is not outstanding.
After Han discovered that he could hit Obito, he shattered the original Susanoo's
bones with a single blast of strange power blessed by Boiling Release.
Obito had no idea that his Susanoo could not even block Han's punch. The
competitive mentality unique to teenagers appeared in Obito's heart, and he used
more powerful eye power to drive the Susanoo.
This allowed Obito's Susanoo to enter the first form directly from the initial
form.
The skull-shaped light blue Susan appeared again, holding a long sword.
Obito manipulated Susana to launch an attack on Han regardless of the cost.
While Han dodged Susanoo's attack, he counterattacked Obito.
For Han, Susanoo is not a problem at all. He only needs to be a little serious to
break the Susanoo that Obito has condensed. But after breaking Susanoo, he has
nothing to do with Obito's Hollow. .
Therefore, Han decided to have a stalemate with Obito and try to consume the
opponent's chakra.
Kakashi stood aside. Although he did not participate in the battle, he was already
ready for a sneak attack.
His sword is very fast. If Han is not alert, it is possible to kill him with one
blow.
When Obito and Han were in a stalemate, He Feng also put down what he was doing and
came to the side again.
He was like an old woman, always paying attention to the two of them even during
the battle. If he could, He Feng really wanted to punch Obito in the head.
It is obvious that using Kamui can consume Han to death, but it is necessary to use
Susano who consumes more energy.
Hefeng does not deny the power of Susanoo. Uchiha Madara's 100-meter Susanoo can
press the tailed beast to the ground and play with it, and Senju Hashirama's Bokuto
can even hold the tailed beast in his hand.
But both Uchiha Madara and Senju Hashirama are already at the ceiling of the ninja
world's combat power, but now Obito has just opened his eyes.
Although he has a lot of pupil power, the use of the Mangekyō Sharingan is like
that of a fledgling child.
Using the first stage Susanoo to fight the jinchuriki is indeed similar to Danzo's
Kunai Thorned Susanoo.
As expected, Obito quickly shrank under He Feng's gaze, and SusanooThe chakra in
his body was almost exhausted.
"Good opportunity!" Han has a lot of experience. He can tell whether a ninja is
short of chakra just by his eyesight.
And now he has made a judgment on Obito's situation.
"Boiling Escape: Unparalleled Weird Power!" Han used his remaining left arm to
punch Obito again.
The next moment, Hefeng appeared in front of Obito again with the flying thunder
god on Obito's arm.
Obito looked at Hefeng with a joyful expression, just like a young child who
couldn't wait to share a good toy with his friends.
"Strange power fist!" He Feng didn't say much, but clenched his fist in immortal
mode and swung it out to meet Han's left fist.
Bang——
There was a muffled sound when the two fists collided.
Boom——
Then there was a scene of Han being knocked away by a huge force.
And Han himself lay motionless on the ground because of He Feng's fist.
"Obito, give him a genjutsu, and from now on you can capture the Five-Tails alive."
--------------------xxxx--------------------

He Feng patted Obito on the shoulder, and then disappeared again.

He is a busy man. This kind of war may be the last. If he wants to gain
favorability from now on, he will have to do it little by little.
He Feng would not be so crazy as to start a war just to gain favorability.
What? You said there will be a United Kingdom of Ninja World?
What is the relationship between the United Kingdom of Ninja Realm and He Feng? It
is clear that Nagato likes to go to other countries to carry rice.
"Okay!" Obito chuckled, walking leisurely in front of Han on the battlefield. Under
Han's murderous eyes, Obito threw a genjutsu at him.
Then, Obito stretched out his hand and placed it on Han's body.
After a vortex, Han lay quietly in Obito's different space.
Obviously Obito has never eaten a knife from another dimension, otherwise he would
never throw living things into another dimension again.
After Han was captured alive, the direction of the war was completely fixed.
The third Raikage Ai and the third Tsuchikage Onoki, who were still fighting
passionately, both noticed this scene.
The Raikage suddenly retreated, having given up fighting with Onoki, a fly that
only flew in the sky.
"Ohnoki, if I don't want to fight you, I'm going to fight Konoha!" Raikage said
sonorously and forcefully.
Ohnoki sneered, his heart already filled with real fire.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
"Ai, this battle is not a fight or a fight." Suddenly, Ohnoki shouted loudly:
"Konoha, I surrender in this battle and let your ninjas stop!"
Hearing Onoki's voice, both Iwagakure and Konoha ninjas were stunned, and then
waited for the next order from their superiors.
In the distance, Yeyue was finally defeated under the siege of Hatake Sakumo and
Namikaze Minato, and achieved the achievement of being captured alive.
On the side, Kirabi was lying on the spot covered with injuries and fell into a
coma.
He failed to resist the pressure. After defeating Kirabi, Namikaze Minato teamed up
with Hatake Sakumo to capture Yozuki.
After hearing Ohnoki's voice, Hatake Sakumo also said loudly: "We Konoha can accept
Iwagakure's surrender, but Iwagakure needs to block Kumogakure's troops for
Konoha!"
Ohnoki sneered, then looked at the Third Raikage Ai, and said loudly: "Jiro
Iwagakure! Although we were defeated by Konoha, we were not defeated by Kumogakure.
Follow me and besiege the Third Raikage!"
Although Onoki has always declared war on Konoha, such declarations of war are just
small fights. Once the situation is not good, he will immediately escape and
retreat. Therefore, although the hatred between Iwagakure and Konoha exists so far,
But not profoundly.
This is why the only top combat power in the Fire Rock Battlefield is Namikaze
Minato.
But Yanyin Village is different from Yunyin Village.
The two are feuding.
The ninjas of Iwagakure may not have strong fighting spirit when fighting Konoha
because it is a war of aggression, but they will definitely fight to fight
Kumogakure.
After receiving Ohnoki's order to besiege the Third Raikage, Huangtu Chitu and
others immediately tidied up the team and began to retreat to their own Tsuchikage.
The most important thing on the battlefield is the execution of orders and
prohibitions, so although some Iwagakure are reluctant, they still obey the
Tsuchikage's orders.
In this regard, the Third Raikage Ai also realized that something was wrong.
Kumogakure had completely fallen out with Iwagakure, but he did not intend to
continue fighting with Iwagakure, but issued a retreat order.
After all, if he does not withdraw, Kumogakure is likely to face a flanking attack
from both Konoha and Iwagakure.
"Yunyin, retreat for me! It's up to you to organize Tutai!
I'm here to wean you off! "

Chapter 77 The righteous siege from the Konoha Heavenly Group

"Konoha ninja, all retreat ten kilometers back, recuperate and wait for the next
order." Hatake Sakumo, as the commander-in-chief, also issued his own order.
After receiving the order from Hatake Sakumo, the various elite jounin in the
Konoha army began to reorganize the troops, and soon implemented Hatake Sakumo's
order into action.
After the Konoha ninja army retreated ten kilometers, the Kumo Hidden Village
troops also completed their assembly. However, they did not retreat as ordered by
the Third Raikage. Instead, they gathered behind the Third Raikage and planned to
follow the Iwagakure Village. Keep fighting.
The Third Raikage Ai did not intend to let Kumogakure's troops stay.
If the ninjas of Konoha betray their promise and attack with the Iwa ninja,
everyone in Kumogakure may die here. This is something he doesn't want to
see.Arrived.
"Tutai, where is Yeyue?" The Third Raikage stood in front of the army and asked the
tutai at the front.
Tudai was stunned for a moment, then hesitantly said: "Ye... Yeyue and Kirabi were
captured alive by Konoha White Fang and Yellow Flash."
The Third Raikage's eyes widened: "!"
"What?!!"
For a moment, the third generation Raikage Ai felt an invisible anger rushing
towards his heavenly spirit.
He raised his son as the fourth generation. Now you tell me that the future fourth
generation of Kumogakure Village was captured alive? Not only was one person
captured alive, not even the jinchūriki escaped!
"Tutai, retreat with the army! This is an order!" Although Sandaai was very angry,
he still issued the most rational order.
Everyone can mess up at this time, but he can't mess up.
As a Raikage, the Third Ai still has the awareness of Raikage.
"Yes!" Todai responded loudly. As a close confidant of the Third Raikage and the
think tank of Kumogakure Village, he had full command of the Kumogakure army.
"The whole army retreats! Don't let Lord Raikage be distracted. Our Lord Raikage
has the hardest shield and the sharpest spear. He is invincible!"
Soon, Kumogakure's large army withdrew from Iwagakure's sight.
Ohnoki was flying in the air and did not intercept it.
He has only one purpose, and that is to use the army to keep the Third Raikage at
Kannabi Bridge, which is the burial place of the Third Raikage!
"Ai, I didn't expect you made the right decision in the end." Ohnoki said sarcastic
words without hesitation in order to psychologically surpass Ai, the Third Raikage.
"Ohnoki, my spear is not blunt yet. I don't know if your old body can withstand
it."
At this moment, the Thunder Chakra mode of the Third Raikage Ai was fully
activated, and an invisible pressure filled the hearts of the Iwagakure ninjas.
This is the natural suppressive power of upper-level creatures over lower-level
creatures.
"I think everyone won't mind adding me."
At this moment, a hoarse voice appeared out of thin air.
The next second, Orochimaru's figure silently walked out of the Iwagakure troops,
and the disguise on his face disappeared like melted silicone.
"Orochimaru! Why did you come out of my Iwagakure army!" Ohnoki looked at
Orochimaru. Although he had a guess in his heart, it was not easy to fall out with
Orochimaru.
As a shadow of a village, he is not afraid of Orochimaru, but there are Konoha
troops behind Orochimaru.
"I'm not the only one." Orochimaru licked his lips.
The next moment, Hatake Sakumo, Namikaze Minato and Hefeng all appeared next to
Orochimaru using the teleportation technique.
The appearance of four shadow-level experts also added some variables to this
unequal battle.
"Onoki, let your Iwagakure troops withdraw as well. It will be enough for the four
of us to join in the siege of Ai." Hatake Sakumo said to Onoki in a commanding
tone.
Usually when he was in Konoha, Hatake Sakumo was gentle with others, but this did
not mean that Hatake Sakumo's character was gentle.
On the contrary, he has his own persistence, his own sharpness, and his own
arrogance.
And He Feng's enlightenment in the early years allowed Hatake Sakumo to channel
this sharpness and arrogance.
Although Hatake Sakumo doesn't change much at ordinary times, when facing the
enemy, Hatake Sakumo really adheres to the principle that as long as I am strong
enough, then I can do whatever I want.
Therefore, one Tsuchikage is not enough to make Hatake Sakumo give face to the
other party.
Onoki gritted his teeth, thinking that the juniors in Konoha were really rude.
"Loess, please retreat ten kilometers back and wait for my next order." Onoki fell
from the sky and said softly to his son.
"Okay." Huangtu nodded, and then directed Iwagakure Jōnin to pass on Onoki's
instructions.
Soon, Iwagakure's large army completed its retreat.
"I didn't expect that I could make you pay so much attention to me. This is
something the old man didn't expect." Ai smiled and acted very relaxed.
However, the Thunder Chakra mode he always turned on clearly showed that he was not
as relaxed as he seemed.
Everyone present was a ninja who had been famous for many years. Even the little
devil known as the Scarlet Dancer also mastered the flying thunder technique.
"Raikage, do you still remember what you did to Kushina?" Minato held the sword of
love in his hand, and he had murderous intent against the third generation of
Raikage in his heart.
"Kushina? Let me think about it." The Third Raikage looked at Namikaze Minato and
really started to think carefully.
After about half a minute, the Third Raikage continued: "I remember, the Kushina
you are talking about should be your Nine-Tails Jinchuuriki of Konoha. It is really
a pity. If Kushina had been killed back then, The calamity has hit me, Kumogakure,
and now the Uzumaki clan should have spread its branches in my country,
Kumogakure."
"you!"
Minato Namikaze was stopped by He Feng by grabbing the corner of his clothes, so he
didn't go up to fight with him.
"Ordinary people say that the Raikage is hot-tempered and not good at thinking.
Today's meeting has overturned ordinary people's opinions. The third generation
Raikage is somewhat sharp-tongued." Orochimaru licked his lips and mocked.
Ohnoki watched with great interest and had no intention of participating in this
'war of words'.
He Feng was still in immortal mode. He took a step forward. Although his voice was
very soft, it accurately reached the ears of everyone present.
"It's useless to talk more. I think the only way to make Raikage-sama shut his
mouth is to break his bones."
"Kid, I haven't settled the grudge between you and me yet! I'll take it from
youCome and have an operation! "Ai Zai recognized He Feng at the first sight and
knew that he was the real culprit who broke off Ye Yue's arm, so he had been
planning to avenge the broken arm.
"Hell Thrust - Two Pen Hands!" Ai accumulated unparalleled momentum and rushed
towards He Feng.
At this moment, his speed has exceeded the limit that Yeyue can reach.
This blow is worthy of attention for everyone present.
――――
Today is my classmate’s birthday, so I only have this chapter for now.
Invite some fake brothers.

Chapter 78 The Mortal Third Raikage

"He Feng, be careful!"
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Namikaze Minato has nerve reflex speed far beyond that of ordinary people, and he
was also the first person present to react to Ai's attack, besides He Feng.
The Rasengan in his hand was condensed almost instantly, and then he used the
teleportation technique towards where He Feng was standing.
"Thunder Flash!" Although Hatake Sakumo's reaction was not as good as Namikaze
Minato, it was not bad either. His thunder attribute chakra appeared on the White
Fang dagger, and his whole body rushed straight towards Ai like lightning.
"Haha..." Orochimaru didn't make any move. He could be said to know He Feng the
best among all the people present, and he also had a clear understanding of He
Feng's strength.
If there is anyone present who can fight against the Third Generation Ai alone,
then that candidate must be He Feng.
Therefore, he did not provide support, but stood aside and remained alert to
Ohnoki.
The reason why Hatake Sakumo asked Iwagakure to withdraw his troops instead of
joining the siege with Iwagakure was because he was on guard against a sneak attack
by Iwagakure.
As the person involved, He Feng took countermeasures as soon as Ai took the
initiative.
His sage mode can be maintained normally, and huge sage chakra gathers in his body.
The Yin seal taught by Tsunade was also opened by He Feng. Under the premise of the
immortal face makeup, the mark of the art of hundreds of heroes and creation and
regeneration also appeared on He Feng's face.
He clenched his fists and waved them out in response to Sandaimei's second hand.
Bang——
The attacks of the two collided. Sandai Ai's second sword did not penetrate He Feng
as he expected, and He Feng's strange power fist did not knock him away. The two
were in a stalemate for a moment.
It has to be said that the third generation Ai is the second strongest person He
Feng has seen besides Uchiha Madara. Even his father Hatake Sakumo, or teachers
Orochimaru and Namikaze Minato cannot defeat him in single combat. Enemy the
opponent.
"!"
What happened at this moment was so magical that everyone present stopped and
widened their eyes, even Orochimaru.
"Is He Feng already so strong..." Hatake Sakumo sighed with emotion. He felt that
he and He Feng hadn't seen each other for a long time, but He Feng's strength had
already reached this level.
This made Hatake Sakumo feel frustrated. It was obviously the old father who stood
in front of his younger son to protect him, and then gained his son's admiration.
Unexpectedly, it was the other way around.
Namikaze Minato is no exception.
He and He Feng chased Yunyin's AB combination together. He Feng now has grown
compared to that time, and the growth rate is extremely huge.
Onoki, who was still flying in the sky, rubbed his eyes and opened his mouth to
speak, but couldn't say a word for a long time.
At this moment, he felt that he was a little old and couldn't keep up with the
times.
"Hey...another Senju Hashirama of Konoha...Next, Iwagakure should consider how to
form an alliance with Konoha."
Ohnoki sometimes sees things very clearly, and He Feng's current strength is
extremely inconsistent with his age.
This also means that He Feng still has a high growth limit. If he continues to
grow, he will undoubtedly be Konoha's second Senju Hashirama Uchiha Madara.
He briefly considered teaming up with Sandai Ai to kill He Feng, but Ohnoki quickly
gave up.
After all, He Feng has grown up, and everyone in this era will be suppressed by He
Feng.
"Since we can't be enemies, let's turn enemies into friends." Ohnoki sighed, and
then leaned towards Ai's position.
But Orochimaru had different ideas from everyone else. He was completely shocked by
the scene of He Feng wrestling with the third generation Ai.
You must know that the height of the third generation Ai is a full 2.05 meters,
while the height of He Feng is only over 1.4 meters.
When the two of them stand together, they feel like a standard Beauty and the
Beast.
But now, this beauty in people's eyes is wrestling with the beast, and is evenly
matched.
"Immortal Technique: Big Jade Spiral Pill!" At this moment, a huge pill condensed
on Hefeng's left hand.
"This kid is so strong." Ai was shocked, and then gave up on wrestling with He Feng
and stepped back.
Seeing this, Hatake Sakumo and others quickly stepped forward and blocked Ai's
retreat.
"Sandaime Lei, if you want to run away, you have to ask me if I agree." Ohnoki said
to Sandaime Ai with a smile.
No matter what, the death of Ai, the Yunyin barbarian, is something that makes him
happy. As long as Ai dies, he might live for a few more years.
"Humph!" Ai Leng snorted. In fact, he also knew in his heart that there were only
two people present who mastered the art of Flying Thunder God. Apart from that,
whether it was Konoha White Fang, Sannin Orochimaru or the old immortal Ohnoki.
They all have shadow-level strength.
It is already impossible for him to leave, but his life is worth the sacrifice of
so many people.Hand, it’s not a loss.
The only thing Ai is worried about now is his son Yeyue and the eight-tailed
jinchuriki Rabbi. Todai's words just now are like a knife to him, inserted into the
heart of his old father.
"Konoha, how is Yeyue and Bi?" Ai maintained the thunder escape chakra mode, and
his voice was a little heavy.
"..." Hatake Sakumo and Namikaze Minato did not answer each other.
After all, the hatred of Yunyin Village is still recorded in their notebooks.
Ai didn't care, but continued: "I won't run away. I hope my death can alleviate the
hatred in your hearts. As long as it doesn't hurt Yeyue and Bi's lives, you can do
whatever you want. This battle is Yun The Hidden Village was defeated.”
At this moment, Ai seemed to have turned into the kind and violent thunder shadow.
Even in the face of death, what he was thinking about was not how to survive, but
the younger generations in the village.
"Okay." Hatake Sakumo was moved by Ai's words and assured Ai as the commander-in-
chief of Konoha's battlefield.
After receiving Hatake Sakumo's assurance, Ai immediately burst into laughter.
"Hahahahaha!!! That's good! That's good!
In this case, I won’t have any burden! "
After finishing speaking, Ai Quan's momentum rose again.
His hair stood up under the stimulation of the Thunder Chakra, and the blue
lightning arcs on his body gradually deepened in color until they turned into black
lightning.
These black thunders kept swimming around Ai's body, stimulating Ai's cells to
enter the most active state.
At this moment, Ai gave people the feeling that besides violence, there was also
deathly silence.
There is a secret technique in Kumogakure's book of seals, which is a technique
that the Raikages of all generations must master. The effect of this secret
technique is to unlock the body's restrictions on chakra, so that the thunder
escape chakra can be freely replenished in the body. Raging.
This secret technique allows the user to gather powerful power in a short period of
time, but after using it, there is only one way to die.
This technique was developed by the first Raikage to counter Senju Hashirama and
Uchiha Madara, but so far the third generation Ai is the only one to use it.
"Hahahahahaha!!! Come on, let me see the courage of the Konoha ninjas!
Ohnoki, you old fool, get out of here, or I will be the first one to operate on
you! "

Chapter 79 A true shadow

"Is this the magnanimity of a village's shadow?" Namikaze Minato sighed with
emotion. He saw the meaning of shadow in the third generation of Ai.
"Indeed, if you ignore the banditry that Kumogakure did, Ai is enough to gain
respect." Hatake Sakumo nodded. At this moment, he also recognized the third
generation of Ai's nindo.
Use your own life to protect the future of the children in the village.
"The corpse of the Third Raikage must be of great research value. I wonder if we
can find out the secrets about the Black Thunder Secret Technique." Orochimaru
licked his lips and looked at the Third Raikage with a hint of excitement in his
eyes.
But instead of fighting forward, he retreated.
In the final analysis, he is just a scientist. In terms of life-saving means, it is
not bad. But if he is asked to fight someone like the Third Raikage who has
obviously opened up the secret technique of Eight Gates Dungeon, Orochimaru is
obviously not that stupid.
Ohnoki felt a little uncomfortable. If he didn't participate in the battle, he
would probably offend the people of Konoha.
Now he doesn’t want to offend Konoha if you let him offend anyone.
But if he participated in the battle, Onoki would have no doubt that the barbarian
Sandaai would do anything to attack him.
In this case, it is very likely that his old life will be retained.
Onoki is not afraid of death. He is mainly worried about the people of Iwagakure
Village. After all, no one in Iwagakure Village is qualified to inherit the
position of Tsuchikage.
Hefeng seemed to see Onomu's confusion. He came under Onomu and waved his hand to
Onomu.
Ohnomu also noticed He Feng, so he fell from the sky.
"Mr. Tsuchikage, if you teach me your super light and heavy rock technique, the
hatred between Iwagakure and Konoha will be wiped out immediately, and you won't
have to participate in the next battle. How about it? Isn't it a good deal?"
He Feng has been eyeing the super light and heavy rock art for a long time. He is
very coveted for this kind of ninjutsu that can fly in the sky.
"Deal!" Ohnomu only thought for a second before agreeing to He Feng's proposal.
As for the art of super light and heavy rocks, it is a secret art in the village.
You can't just teach it to outsiders and just let it go to hell.
If Uchiha Madara wanted this kind of technique, let alone him, even the elders in
the village would have to hand it over.
Although He Feng does not have the strength of the God of Ninja World now, it does
not mean that he will not have it in the future.
An insignificant...a slightly important secret technique can win the favor of the
future God of the Ninja World. How can you make money from it?
And this little guy looks so kind, he must be a good boy.
Ohnoki handed the scroll of the Super Light Heavy Rock Technique to He Feng very
clearly.
"Thank you, Grandpa Onoki. If I have a chance in the future, I will go to Yanyin
Village to see you." He Feng took the scroll and even his mouth became sweet.
[Favorability from Onoki +1]
【Acquire earth attribute chakra affinity】
"Hey, if you have the chance to come to Iwagakure, grandpa will entertain you
personally." Ohnoki smiled happily, and his waist no longer hurt for a while.
After He Feng took the scroll, Onomu left the battlefield without looking back.
Although he had the intention to see what happened next, if he didn't leave at this
time and wanted to leave after a while, he would have to face Hatake. Sakumo.
He didn’t want to communicate with Hatake Sakumo.
He Feng willThe ninjutsu scroll was put away and returned to the front battlefield
again.
At this time, Ai was fighting against Hatake Sakumo and Namikaze Minato.
"Righteous thunder axe!" Ai jumped up high, and the black thunder and lightning
concentrated on Ai's footsteps and fell in the direction of Hatake Sakumo.
This move was so fast that even Hatake Sakumo couldn't completely avoid it.
Boom! ! !
At the critical moment, Namikaze Minato used the Flying Thunder God Technique to
teleport Hatake Sakumo away and avoid Ai's attack.
And he himself used the Flying Thunder God Technique to leave when Ai launched his
attack.
As time goes by, Ai's aura gradually weakens.
After noticing He Feng, Ai Jingping said: "Junior of Konoha, I have prepared this
attack for you. It is up to you to decide whether to block or hide."
While speaking, Ai raised his right hand.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"!" Ai's initially depressed momentum increased again.

"Hell Thrust! Four Pen Hands." Ai condensed a large amount of black thunder chakra
on the four fingers of his right hand, but he did not act, but continued to
accumulate power.
"Sanbon Kanshou!" Ai withdrew one finger, and the chakra on his remaining three
fingers increased again.
"Erben Guanshou!"
At this moment, countless black lightning arcs gathered from the index finger of
Ai's right hand, and the aura of destruction appeared in Ai's hand. This blow
seemed to destroy everything.
"He Feng!" Hatake Sakumo and others wanted to stop, but He Feng stopped them with
his eyes.
"Believe in Hefeng, he is very strong." Orochimaru stepped forward and comforted
Hatake Sakumo and Namikaze Minato.
But his heart was not as calm as he showed, "He Feng, after crossing a high
mountain, you will usher in a higher mountain. Teacher believes that you can become
the wind blowing to the ninja world."
And He Feng himself was also extremely serious. He entered the full state directly.
All the techniques accumulated by He Feng so far were activated by him. Even the
Orochimaru-ryu Substitution Technique was already activated.
"Strange power fist!"
"Hell Thrust - Ipponite!"
At this moment, the speed of the third generation Ai surpassed that of Shunshen,
and was not far behind the Flying Thunder God. Without even blinking, the third
generation of Ai appeared in front of He Feng with the force of destruction.
"..."
As if the expected wrestling did not happen, Sandaai just maintained his attacking
posture and stopped in front of He Feng. There was even a smile on his lips.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
But he himself was completely breathless. Looking around, he could only see the
cracks on the third generation Ai's body caused by the overloaded black thunder.
"The third generation of Leiying never thought of attacking He Feng from the
beginning to the end. He was using his most powerful blow to test He Feng's
courage.
Obviously, He Feng got his approval. Orochimaru analyzed with a somewhat regretful
tone.
This action of the Third Raikage before his death completely cut off Orochimaru's
idea of studying his body, and he gained Orochimaru's approval.
"Send the body of the Third Raikage back to Kumogakure. His choice deserves our
respect." Hatake Sakumo nodded. The other person was a real man and a real Kage.
"Well, leave it to me." Namikaze Minato nodded and used the sealing technique of
the Uzumaki clan to seal the body of the Third Raikage.
"He Feng, let's go home too, together with Kakashi." Hatake Sakumo rubbed He Feng's
hair, and his heart, which was originally tense because of the war, relaxed.
As long as the battlefield on their side is over, the Third Ninja War will also
come to an end.
The remaining Sunagakure Village and Kirigakure Village are not something to be
afraid of.
"Well, father, let's go home." He Feng took the initiative to hold Hatake Sakumo's
hand.
At this moment, his heart could be said to be in turmoil.
Because just now, an unexpected prompt appeared on his system panel.
【Trigger critical strike! 】
[Favorability from Ai +10]
【Acquire Thunder Chakra Mode (Black Thunder Secret Technique)】
――――
The third battle is coming to an end, and Sasuke and Naruto are about to appear.

Chapter 80 In the fire and mist battlefield, seven Ninja Swordsmen appeared!
While the ninjas were fighting on the Kannabi Bridge battlefield, other
battlefields in the Land of Fire were not peaceful either.
Fire and fog battlefield.
Because Kirigakure Village in the Country of Water is located in an island country,
it relies on importing many resources through waterways and is completely unable to
be self-sufficient.
As the Fourth Mizukage, Goju Yagura was not reconciled to the stagnant development
of Kirigakure Village, so he declared war on Konoha in Sunagakure Village and
Kumogakure Village, and then declared war on Konoha.
His purpose is also very simple. He does not want to take over the territory of the
Kingdom of Fire with Konoha, but it is enough to occupy the ruins of the Kingdom of
Whirlpool located next to the Kingdom of Fire.
If the Kirigakure Village directly occupied the ruins of Uzumaki Country, Konoha
would never allow it.
Therefore, Gotachibana Yagura declared war on Konoha. Kirigakure Village only needs
to benefit from the war with Konoha, and finally work with other ninja villages to
put pressure on Konoha. In this case, in order to avoid pressure from Kirigakure
Village, The Hokage, Sarutobi Hiruzen, could only agree to Goju Yagura's request.
At this time, in the eastern coastal position of the Kingdom of Fire, the ninjas
from both sides were also engaging in rounds of confrontations.
In a supply point in the Hidden Mist Village.
"Kai, let's retreat quickly. Kirigakure's support will be coming soon. We are
here."We made a sneak attack on Kirigakure's supply point for the first time. They
will definitely not let us go. "Ebisu was alert to the surrounding environment,
feeling full of uneasiness.
"Well, Kai, let's retreat." Shiranui Genma also agreed.
After this period of team formation, although Metkai dressed strangely and usually
shouted youthfully, his strength had been recognized by the two of them, so the
actions of the three of them were vaguely dominated by Metkai.
"Okay! Let's retreat!" Metkai buried the last detonating talisman and then said.
Just as the three were preparing to retreat, the Kirigakure ninjas who came to
support had already surrounded the three.
"Hey, you three brats really did something big. Our supplies almost blew you up
into the sky." Muuri Jinpachi, carrying the blasting sword and flying foam, looked
at Metkai and the others with a joking look on his face.
As Kirigakure's seven ninja swordsmen, all seven of them have the strength of
jounin. At this time, these three 'lucky' brats are surrounded, and they cannot
escape no matter what.
Therefore, whether it was Muri Jinpachi, the holder of the explosive sword and
flying foam, or the other six people, their hearts were relaxed.
I originally thought that the people who attacked the supply point were the Jonin
team, but I didn't expect that it was three brats.
"Shou, Xuanjian, I'm here to help you two break up, and then it's time for my youth
to bloom." Metkai's eyes were sharp, and there was no fear in his heart.
His father has always taught him this. The so-called Konoha ninja, the so-called
will of fire, is to wholeheartedly protect the homeland shared by everyone, and to
let one's youth bloom brilliantly when necessary.
"Kay!" Ebisu and Shiranui Genma sighed in their hearts, with no intention of
retreating.
The two of them are not people who are afraid of death. If they were afraid of
death, they would not come to the frontline battlefield. Therefore, it is
impossible for them to abandon their teammates.
"You kid, don't do any sensationalism before death. Just turn it into nourishment
for the beheading sword!" Loquat Juuzang is the iron-blooded jounin of Kirigakure
Village. He has no sympathy for the genin of the same village. , there will be no
mercy for the three of Metkay.
So in his mind he just wanted to finish the mission and return as soon as possible.
Loquat Juuzang stepped forward with a beheading sword in his hand, aimed at Metkai
who was standing in the front and swung his sword.
"Huh--" Metkai took a deep breath, and then opened the secret technique taught to
him by his father, Metday.
"Eight Gate Armor Formation! The third gate, the Shengmen Gate, open!" As the
Matkasheng Gate opened, green light emitted from his body, and his whole aura also
increased a lot.
But even so, he was still invincible against a senior jounin like Loquat Juzo.
At this moment, another man wearing green tights and a watermelon head appeared in
front of Metkay. His body had the same green light as Metkay.
"Konoha whirlwind!"
Matt Dai's powerful kick directly hit the surface of Loquat Juuzang's decapitating
sword, causing Loquat Juuzang to retreat continuously.
"Kai! You guys run away quickly, let me stop them and buy you time!" Matt Dai
stared at the seven Ninja Swordsmen in front of him, and his voice was extremely
calm.
"Are we escaping? But father, you are just a genin, and the other party is a
jounin, and there are seven members of Kirigakure's ninja sword. You, father, alone
cannot stop the other party!" Metkai said very worriedly.
"I have the Eight Gates of Death Armor Formation. I can completely stop the
opponent with that move."
"But......"
"This is self-restraint, and this is the moment when youth is blooming." Matt Dai
looked back and gave a thumbs up to Metkai with a smile.
Metkai was stunned on the spot, the Eight Gates of Death Armor Formation was a
power that could only be used when he was determined to protect his most important
things.
Metkai understood his father's consciousness and didn't say much. Instead, he
looked at Ebisu and Shiranui Genma and said, "Let's retreat first. Father will help
us stop the Seven Ninja Swordsmen."
Metkai's voice was full of certainty, and he was convinced from the bottom of his
heart.
"Yeah." The two nodded. There was no room for indecision at this time.
"Let's withdraw!"
Just as the three of Metkai were evacuating, the user of the Great Sword and
Samehada, Watermelon Mountain Fugu Oni, suddenly stepped forward and raised the
Great Sword Samehada to slash at Metkai.
Because Matt Dai had just knocked back Loquat Juuzang with one blow, the Watermelon
Mountain Puffer Ghost didn't have any intention of looking down upon him, and he
went all out to attack.
"Eight-door armor formation! The seventh door, the shocking door! Open!" After Matt
Dai opened the seventh door, his pupils had turned pure white, and the sweat
flowing out of his body was instantly absorbed by his body. The high temperature of
the table evaporates, producing blue steam.
At this moment, Matt Dai transformed into Konoha's blue beast.
"Konoha's powerful whirlwind!" As a user of the Konoha Steel Fist, Matt Dai's main
attack is powerful and heavy. His extremely fast speed allowed Matt Dai to appear
next to the Watermelon Mountain Pufferfish Ghost in an instant. The foot kicked up.
The Watermelon Mountain Pufferfish Ghost reacts very quickly. Although he is two
and a half meters tall, he is not bloated, but is very flexible.
After using his sword and Samehada to block Metadai's attack, the Watermelon
Mountain Puffer Demon immediately said loudly: "It's very difficult, let's go
together!"
"Okay! Let me hang him on the tree." Kurumi Kushimaru jumped down from the tree,
raised his long knife and needle high and pointed at Matt Dai.
"I'll blow him up to the sky!" Muuri Jinpachi laughed and raised his explosive
sword, Spray.
"How many times did we besiege a person like this last time?Preteen? What a
pleasure! "Tongcaoyebaiten is a very bold user of the blunt knife and Kabuto, and
he is also the only person present who has no hostility towards Matt Dai.

Chapter 81 The Door of Death! Matt Dai’s youthful bloom!

"I can't see what Kai will look like when he grows up, but as a father, the last
lesson I taught him was quite impressive." Matt Dai felt a little sad in his heart.
The only thing he was dissatisfied about at this time was that he couldn't see him
grow up. After Kai's death, he didn't have the chance to have a grandson again.
With this thought in mind, Mattei took on a posture unique to the Eight Door Dunjia
Formation. He put his right thumb against his chest.
"Eight Gates Dunjia Formation!
The eighth door!
Door of death!
open! "
With the complete liberation of the eight gates in Metadai's body, his whole body
is exuding red steam produced by the evaporation of blood in his body.
"Hiss——"
After activating the Eight Door Armor Formation, Matt Dai could feel that his whole
body was bearing an extremely high load of pressure. As long as he relaxed even a
little bit, he would be exposed to great flaws due to pain.
Therefore, Matt Dai must also concentrate on it.
"This is my youth! This is the color of my youth!" Matt Dai said loudly, and then
the whole figure disappeared in an instant.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

This is not ninjutsu or taijutsu, it is just pure speed.

The first person that Metkai targeted was Loquat Juzo who initially launched an
attack on Metkai.
Loquat Juuzang was holding a beheading sword. Before his nerves could react, Matt
Dai's powerful and heavy foot had already landed on his chest.
Click!
A crisp sound of cracking bones appeared in Loquat Juuzang's chest.
"Poof!" Loquat Juuzang also spat out a large mouthful of blood. His breath became
extremely weak, and he fell to the ground unable to get up again.
It was obvious that Matt Dai's kick just now broke all the ribs on his chest, and
those broken ribs were pierced into Loquat Juuzang's internal organs.
"What!" Seeing this scene in front of them, neither the Watermelon Mountain
Pufferfish Ghost nor the Tongcao Wild Bait Man had expected it at all.
They had considered that it would be a fierce battle, but they had not considered
that the people on their side could kill one person first without being able to
fight back.
"Who are you?! It's impossible for someone as powerful as you to be unknown!"
Xiguashan Pufferfish Ghost asked loudly.
In his opinion, his own strength is completely inferior to that of the opponent.
Even so, his Seven Ninja Swordsman still has a great reputation in the ninja world.
As the largest ninja village in the ninja world, and with such strength, it is
absolutely impossible for the opponent to remain unknown.
However, the response to the Watermelon Mountain Pufferfish Ghost was a period of
silence.
At this time, Matt Dai already felt that his consciousness was a little hazy, and
his actions at this time were all based on his own will.
"Yi Xiang..." Matt Dai appeared behind Kuritari Kushimaru again, raised his right
hand and swung it out violently.
"one foot."
After the punch was thrown, Matt Dai's right forearm bone cracked directly. This
was an injury that no matter how strong a medical ninja could heal.
As for Yu Xiang's first target, Kuritari Kushimaru was also blown away by the air
cannon caused by Yu Xiang, and after knocking down a big tree, he lay there unaware
of his life or death.
"Two legs!" Metkai reappeared behind the wild baitman, and punched again with his
right arm that was not completely useless.
The power of this punch was a bit stronger than the one hit by Luo Zeai and Kurisha
Kushiumaru. Before his body hit the big tree behind him, Tongcao Yebairen had
already lost consciousness.
"Three legs!" After Matt's right hand was disabled, he focused his attention on the
user of the double-knife Platinum who had been hiding in the distance and planning
to escape.
At the last moment of his life, Matt Dai's right foot landed on the opponent's
head.
Click!
Only the sound of skull cracking was heard, and the user of the double-knife
flounder died without even feeling any pain.
"Run! Run with all your strength!" The Watermelon Mountain Pufferfish Ghost
suddenly shouted loudly and ran in the opposite direction of Matt Dai. He didn't
even have the courage to look back, for fear of attracting Matt Dai's attention and
dying.
As one of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen, when had he ever lost his temper like this?
"Huh..." Matt Dai stood on the spot and did not pursue. At this moment, he only
felt that his eyelids were extremely heavy, and the fire in his heart was about to
go out.
"Kay..." Matt Dai opened his mouth, and a voice like a mosquito came out of Matt
Dai's mouth.
As Matt's eyes were closed tightly and his body fell backward, a hand stretched out
from the ground below to support Matt's head.
"You, come and merge with him." He came out from the side and pointed at Bai Jue,
who was only weaker than him.
That Bai Jue was still a little reluctant, and A Fei quickly said: "This is what He
Feng asked you to do, don't be ungrateful!"
The next second, the White Jue penetrated into Matt Dai's body like a spore.
Although Bai Jue does not have the ability to live and die like the Yin-Yang Escape
of the Six Paths, he can still give Matt Dai a glimmer of life that has been
completely burned by the Gate of Death.
If Matt Dai's heart stops beating, then Bai Jue will change his body to continue
beating. If his body cannot produce blood, then Bai Jue will control his body to
produce blood.
As a creation of the sacred tree, it is not an exaggeration to say that Bai Jue has
endless magical uses.
After all, half of Obito’s body was smashed in the original timeline.You can also
rely on Bai Zetsu to survive.
Although Matt's life was saved at this time, he did not wake up and was still in a
coma.
A Fei was also commanding the other White Zetsu at this time: "You, come and take
him with me. We will hand him over to Nagato."
"Leave it to Nagato? Do you want to make this human being a puppet?"
A Bai Jue asked with some confusion.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
Snapped--
A Fei slapped Bai Jue on the head: "What kind of puppet do you want to be? If Matt
Dai is made into a puppet, just wait for He Feng to throw you into the golem and
recast him!"
"A Fei, I don't want to be recast or be a puppet anymore." Bai Jue covered his
head. Although it didn't hurt, he still pretended to be in pain and said weakly.
Ah Fei nodded, resumed his carefree manner, and then used the Mayfly Technique to
get into the ground.
A Bai Jue wrapped up Matt Dai and also followed A Fei.
As the most special White Zetsu individual, after Uchiha Madara died and Black
Zetsu disappeared, the remaining White Zetsus were also vaguely dominated by A Fei.
……
The United Kingdom of Ninja Realm, in the Amegakure Village.
Xiaonan was sitting in the office of the central tower wearing a rain shadow royal
robe. Yahiko set up a small table next to her, and the pens in their hands were
waving on the paper like afterimages.
At this time, the United Ninja Kingdom was in dire straits and had almost nothing
except its territory.
Because those ninja villages were forcibly conquered by Pain, although they claimed
to surrender and join the kingdom, they were not very honest.
Therefore, there are many government affairs in Yuyin Village, which are too many
for Xiaonan to handle alone.
At this moment, A Fei and Bai Jue emerged from the wall of the central tower.
When they saw Ah Fei, Xiaonan and Yahiko also put down their pens and stood up with
excited faces.
A Fei pointed at Matt Dai who was lying motionless on the ground and said softly:
"This is what Feng asked me to give to you. Feng hopes that Nagato can use the
power of six paths to save his life."
"Teacher Feng has not forgotten me! I will tell the elders to let Nagato complete
the tasks assigned by Teacher Feng!" Xiaonan said with a happy face.
"Senior A Fei, I have many questions about the governance of the kingdom. I wonder
if I can ask Senior Feng for advice."
Konan is the Rain Shadow of Amegakure Village, and Yahiko is the acting king of the
United Ninja Kingdom. Therefore, he has no fewer things to do than Konan, and he is
also full of doubts about the next governance of the kingdom.
Ah Fei thought for a while and then said: "Let's do this. I will talk to Feng about
this. If he agrees, I can pass the message for you."
"Thank you, A Fei-senpai!" Xiaonan and Yahiko said in unison.
---
I considered letting Bai Jue save Matt Dai directly, but that would undoubtedly
tarnish Matt Dai’s youth.

Chapter 82 Three uncles, this is today’s meal

"What?! Minato, you mean you not only killed the Third Raikage on the battlefield!
You also captured Iwagakure's Five-Tailed Jinchuuriki, Kumogakure's Son of the
Third Raikage and the Eight-Tailed Jinchuuriki alive?!"
Sarutobi Hiruzen's eyes widened, he stood up from the chair, and the cigarette rod
fell out of his mouth.
Hiruzen Sarutobi was confident of Konoha's victory, and Konoha's foundation was
sufficient to support multi-front operations. However, the war with Iwagakure and
Kumogakure had yielded such great gains, something Sarutobi Hiruzen had never
experienced before. Contemplated.
"Lord Hokage, it was He Feng who killed the Third Raikage alone, and the rest of us
just stood by to help He Feng.
Moreover, He Feng captured the Five-Tailed Jinchuuriki alive. On the battlefield,
He Feng relied on the medical ninjutsu taught by Tsunade-sama to save many ninjas
who should have died.
The person who made the greatest contribution to this war was none other than He
Feng. "
Namikaze Minato wanted to cultivate He Feng, so he specifically mentioned what He
Feng had done on the battlefield in front of Sarutobi Hiruzen.
Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded, his heart filled with emotion.
The youngest son of the Sakumo family has completely grown up!
"But fortunately, that child is Orochimaru's disciple, and he is Tsunade's younger
brother, and his heart is full of the will of fire. He is a good child." Sarutobi
Hiruzen thought beautifully in his heart.
At the same time, he was also very glad that he did not leave He Feng to Danzo for
training. Otherwise, the way Danzo trained ninjas would only turn He Feng into an
emotionless killing machine.
Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded and said to Namikaze Minato: "Well, Minato, please help me
handle the government affairs. I'm going to see the prisoners of Iwagakure and
Kumogakure."
"Is this...is this appropriate? Hokage-sama." Namikaze Minato was very hesitant.
Things that need to be handled by the Hokage are undoubtedly the secrets of the
village.
"Of course it's appropriate. Old man, I'm getting older and I'm about to retire.
The Kage in the village has to be selected from juniors like Minato and you, so I
should familiarize myself with what the Hokage needs to do in advance.
If there's anything you don't know how to deal with, just stay and wait until the
old man comes back. "
Namikaze Minato nodded and said: "Okay, Hokage-sama, I will take care of it."
Namikaze Minato nodded. After Sarutobi Hiruzen left the office, he sat at his desk
and handled government affairs.
At this time, it was during the war. Although the war between Konoha and Iwagakure
Village and Kumogakure Village was temporarily over, the war with Sunagakure
Village and Kirigakure Village continued.
Therefore, most of what is waiting for Watergate to deal with is the general
arrangement of the war.
the other side.
In order to find a suitable place for the two jinchūriki and Yeyue to be detained,
the people of Konoha took great pains.
After all, the strength of the three of them lies inThere, if you find a random
place, you won't be able to lock the other party.
Finally, at the suggestion of Nara Shikaku, he found Uzumaki Kushina who was
staying in the village.
As a survivor of the Uzumaki clan and a former Uzumaki princess, Kushina has
inherited most of the sealing techniques of the Uzumaki clan.
"Kushina, please." Orochimaru licked his lips and said in a hoarse voice.
"Just leave it to me, okay." Kushina nodded and confidently walked to the Five-
Tails Jinchuuriki Han.
At this time, Han had already woken up, and the Jinchuriki's powerful recovery
ability had also allowed him to recover from his injuries, but Han did not resist.
After all, even if he resisted at this time, it would have no effect. On the
contrary, his treatment would definitely drop a lot, so Han just stood there
obediently, waiting for people from Konoha to come forward and use the sealing
technique on him.
In Kushina's body, the Nine-Tailed Nine Lama, who was lying in the spiritual space
with his eyes closed to rest, opened his eyes.
He could feel the auras of the Five-Tailed King Mu and the Eight-Tailed Gyuuki.
Through Kushina's eyes, Nine Lamas also saw their corresponding Jinchuuriki.
Nine Lama looked around the environment he was in for a week, and his resentment
towards Kushina became even more intense: "King Mu, Ushiki, your good days are over
if the ninjas of Konoha catch you."
As Kushina's Bagua seal and Four Elephants seal were simultaneously blessed on Han,
the connection between Han's spiritual space and King Mu was instantly separated by
the seal.
Originally, Han could mobilize King Mu's chakra at any time, but now the chakra he
could mobilize was limited, making communication even more difficult.
"As expected of Sister Kushina. In this case, you won't be afraid of Uncle Wuwei
causing trouble in Konoha." He Feng on the side praised Kushina.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Seeing this, Kushina did not immediately seal Yeyue and Kirabi, but stepped forward
and slapped He Feng hard.
"Little He Feng is getting cuter and cuter." Jushina inhaled the good smell of He
Feng before continuing to work.
The sealing of the three prisoners was quickly completed.
The three of them were also placed in the Thousand Hand Clan's land, which was
sparsely populated but large in area, and had several Anbu guarding it around the
clock.
"..." Although Yeyue and others did not resist violently, they did not say anything
after arriving in Konoha.
At this moment, Hiruzen Sarutobi also walked to the Senju clan, and Danzo Shimura
came with Hiruzen Sarutobi.
Danzo Shimura, as the commander-in-chief of the Fire Sand Battlefield, has returned
to Konoha after Sunagakure retreated and only maintained a small level of
harassment.
At this moment, I heard the information from the root ninja and had to show up.
He has the confidence to ask Yunyin's secret technique from Yeyue's mind, and
completely master the power of the Five-Tails and the Eight-Tails.
Yes, Danzo Shimura is here to ask for someone.
"Hokage-sama." Hatake Sakumo nodded to Sarutobi Hiruzen, then took a step back and
gave up his position to Sarutobi Hiruzen.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
After seeing the true nature of Naruto, Hatake Sakumo lost his previous respect for
Sarutobi Hiruzen, the Hokage.
After so many years, Sarutobi Hiruzen had already adapted to Hatake Sakumo's
attitude, and he didn't say anything more, but looked at Yeyue and others.
"Good! Very good! Very good!"
Sarutobi Hiruzen said hello three times in a row, and his inner excitement could
not be concealed at all.
This is something his teacher Senju Tobirama could not do even when he was the
Hokage!
And now let him complete it so easily!
How could this not make Sarutobi Hiruzen excited?
Shimura Danzo was more excited than Sarutobi Hiruzen.
He squeezed forward and shouted: "Hiruzhan! Give the three of them to me!"
Sarutobi Hiruzen turned to look at his old friend Shimura Danzo, and ignored what
Danzo said.
Sarutobi Hiruzen looked at Hatake Sakumo and asked, "Sakumo, are you planning to
place the three of them in the Senju clan?"
Hatake Sakumo nodded, "Yes, Hokage-sama, after all, the three of them have special
status, and the Senju clan is the best choice."
Danzo Shimura stood there awkwardly, and he continued: "Hiruzen! I said to hand the
three of them to my root! I will be responsible for it!"
"Well, Sakumo, you guys have done a good job, so let's arrange it in the Senju
clan, but the number of Anbu under guard will be doubled. The three of them will be
our bargaining chips in future negotiations with Iwagakure Kumogakure, and they
will be able to We added a lot of war reparations."
After saying that, Sarutobi Hiruzen looked at He Feng and others standing aside,
and said with a smile on his face: "He Feng, Kakashi, and Obito, you three little
guys did a good job! Continue Come on, the future of Konoha is yours!"
After saying that, Sarutobi Hiruzen directly forced Shimura Danzo, who was still
wanting to say something, to leave the scene.
Danzo is really an old fool! Not to mention that he himself disagreed with Danzo's
actions, even if he agreed, Hatake Sakumo and Orochimaru would not agree with
Danzo's peach-picking behavior.
There is no such thing as a good thing like being able to take most of the credit
without any effort.
"Hiruzen! Don't hold me back, I can leave on my own!"
After the two left, Hatake Sakumo, Orochimaru, Kushina and others looked at each
other and laughed in their hearts.
Through the influence of He Feng, Minato has long seen clearly that Naruto is
actually a politician. Kushina, as Minato Namikaze's pillow, naturally alsoNo
exceptions will be made.
Not to mention Orochimaru and Hatake Sakumo.
"Hefeng, the teacher will go back to the laboratory first. The teacher will give
you a surprise when we meet next time." Orochimaru looked at Obito and Kakashi and
continued: "Obito, if you have time, go to my place more often. , it is necessary
to study your Mangekyō Sharingan.
Of course, Kakashi can come to me if he is interested. "
"I will go, Orochimaru-sama." Obito nodded to Orochimaru.
Although he awakened the Mangekyo Sharingan and was very swollen and thought that
Kakashi was not worth mentioning, Obito still had the due respect for Orochimaru.
After all, the other person is He Feng's teacher. If you don't respect the other
person, what's the difference between disrespecting He Feng.
Kakashi also said: "I will go too, Lord Orochimaru."
"Goodbye, teacher." He Feng waved his hand to Orochimaru.
After Orochimaru left, Hatake Sakumo, Hefeng and others also left one after
another, leaving behind a group of ANBU who introduced the three of them into the
room prepared for them.
"Bi, daddy died in the battle." Yeyue sat in the corner, her expression full of
loneliness.
The blow to him of defeat was far less severe than the death of his father in
battle.
Although the Third Raikage looks majestic and looks irritable and rude, he really
takes care of the younger people in the village. Even if he meets the genin in the
village while walking on the road, those genin will greet the Third Raikage
enthusiastically, and the Third Raikage also Will respond enthusiastically.
As the son of the Third Raikage, Ai has enjoyed not only the pride of the other
party, but also the paternal love of the other party since he was a child.
"Brother, you still have me." Qilabi, a man who is 1.9 meters tall and nearly 2
meters tall, also comforted his brother.
"Damn it!!! I want it!!" Yeyue suddenly stood up, and then appeared in front of him
were several Anbu jounin holding kunai.
Yeyue is confident that even if his chakra is sealed, he can defeat the opponent.
After all, he is a taijutsu ninja. What is powerful is his own taijutsu. Chakra is
just the icing on the cake for him, but he has no confidence in taking Kirabi with
him. Escape from Konoha alive.
Therefore, after seeing the ANBU appear, Yeyue gritted her teeth and took a few
steps back and sat down again.
"Pfft!" Han on the side couldn't help laughing when he saw this scene.
Iwagakure and Kumogakure have been feuding for a long time. As the jinchūriki of
Iwagakure, the relationship between Han and Kumogakure is naturally unlikely to be
any better.
"!" When Kirabi saw Han laughing at his elder brother, he stood up and was about to
teach him a lesson.
"Hey! Konoha's ANBU, why don't you just ignore him when he's like this?" Han
shouted.
The ANBU naturally heard what Han said, but they didn't take it seriously.
They are only responsible for keeping an eye on whether the other party leaves
their sight and whether they have any intention of escaping.
Naturally, other things like internal fighting will be ignored.
"Brother! Red-skinned bastard~ Teach him a lesson~" Kirabi once again said to Yeyue
in his own unique rap style.
Hearing this, Yeyue also stood up again.
He was captured alive in Konoha, and his father died in the battle. He had long
been holding back anger in his heart. Before, he had nowhere to release it.
"Damn Iwagakure ninja!" Yeyue gritted her teeth and stood up, slowly walking
towards Han.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
Han did not retreat. You must know that he is a full two meters tall, which is
nearly 30 centimeters taller than Yeyue and Kirabi. He is not afraid of hand-to-
hand combat with people.
"Barbarian Yunyin! Come and see if your brains are all about muscles!" Han took the
lead and rushed towards the two of them.
For a moment, the three of them were fighting together with the most primitive
physical skills. You punched me and I punched you to the flesh. It was more
enjoyable to watch than the battle of ordinary ninjas.
……
Half a month passed in a flash.
During this half month, Sunagakure and Kirigakure also received news of the defeat
of Kumogakure and Iwagakure, and surrendered to Konoha one after another. After
discussion, the four parties decided to go to Konoha together in the spring of
Konoha 49 to discuss the content of compensation for the defeat. .
In the six months since arriving in Konoha, 49 years later, the three prisoners of
Konoha suffered.
Of course, in a sense, it is not suffering.
After all, the place where the other party stayed was from the Thousand Hands Clan,
so the environment couldn't be any worse. There were people delivering meals every
day.
Now for the three of them, what makes them most happy is the time to eat every day.

gone
With the sound of the door lock opening, a beautiful figure with long white hair
came into the room carrying food.
"Uncles, this is today's meal." Although He Feng has grown up, his voice will still
sound very neutral if he doesn't take the initiative to change it.
【Favorability +1 from Yeyue】
【Favorability +1 from Kirabi】
【Favorability +1 from Han】
With three points of favorability gained, He Feng personally handed the food to the
three of them.
Then, He Feng's hand lit up with green fluorescence again.
The three people also recovered from the injuries caused by the fight.
"I'm leaving now. I'll come back to see the three uncles tomorrow."
After He Feng left, Ye Yue also sighed with emotion: "Bi, it's still hard for me to
imagine that he will be the Blood Dancer of Konoha."
Kirabi nodded and agreed, "Me too."
Han said mercilessly: "Hmph! You two Kumogakure barbarians, please pay attention to
your image. If you make others angry, their fists will be harder than Tsunade's. If
they fall on youThe two Yunyin barbarians have suffered the same things as you. "
"What did you say?!!"
"Bi! Beat him!"
――――
Today is a big chapter of 4,000 words.

Chapter 83 God’s Reagent

Winter has arrived again, and all pedestrians in Konoha Village have put on winter
clothes to cope with the cold weather.
Some people have snowmen piled up in front of their homes, which looks very warm.
Hefeng walked on the streets of Konoha wearing a thickened women's winter coat.
A little girl of three or four years old waved to He Feng on the road and said
enthusiastically:
"Sister Hefeng! See if the snowman I made looks good!"
"Yangzi, how many times have I told you to call me Brother Hefeng."
"But Sister Hefeng is so good-looking, why do you call her brother?"
"Because your brother Hefeng is a boy!"
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Both of them are common people in Konoha, but He Feng has no airs about anyone and
is instead very friendly. It is not an exaggeration to say that He Feng has won the
favor of 95% of the villagers in Konoha.
He Feng walked up to the little girl with a smile, pinched the little girl's face
with his hands, and said softly: "You can call me brother or sister if you want."
Looking at He Feng's face so close to him, Yoko blushed a little.
Hefeng smiled and touched Yoko's hair, then left.
Along the way, everyone who saw He Feng greeted him warmly, without exception.
Soon, He Feng also arrived at the destination of his trip - Orochimaru's
laboratory.
With the information provided by He Feng, and after half a year of retreat
research, Orochimaru's research on the wood escape blood stains has already
produced preliminary results.
Following the corridor and wind in the laboratory, we arrived at the experimental
base below.
Orochimaru was wearing a white coat and was patiently teaching Anko to conduct some
basic scientific experiments.
Yamato stood aside and listened equally attentively.
"Teacher, I'm here." He Feng said while looking at the warm scene in front of him.
Orochimaru touched Anko's head: "Little Anko, have you remembered what the teacher
taught you? If you remember it, try it yourself. If you have anything you don't
understand, you can ask Yamato."
After saying that, Orochimaru came to He Feng and stretched out his hand to help He
Feng dust the snowflakes off his body.
"Come on Hefeng, the experiment on Mudun Bloodstain has already produced
preliminary results. I named it God's Reagent."
Orochimaru walked in front, explaining his research to He Feng in a hoarse voice.
"The Wood Release Bloodstain is the bloodstain mastered by the First Hokage Senju
Hashirama. Its power is so powerful that it is well deserved to be called the God
of the Ninja World.
It is extremely difficult to obtain the power of Wood Release. The reason why
Yamato was able to awaken Wood Release also had a lot of luck. I don’t hope that
Hefeng, your Wood Release Bloodstained Awakening, will need to use luck.
Therefore, I divided a concentrated God’s Reagent into four types: “God’s Reagent
No. Ⅰ”, “God’s Reagent No. 2”, “God’s Reagent No. Ⅲ” and “God’s Reagent No. 4”.
Hefeng you only need By injecting four types of reagents at a specific time
frequency, you can obtain blood stains comparable to those of the first Senju
Hashirama's Wood Release. "
With that said, Orochimaru used the sealing technique to open a safe, which
contained four dark green reagents.
Orochimaru took one out and led He Feng to a bed.
"This reagent has passed hundreds of simulated fusion experiments, and all of the
hundreds of experiments have been successful. The fusion of Zhujian's cells and
Hefeng's cells takes a certain amount of time, and this time is twenty-four hours.
Hefeng, get some sleep. In twenty-four hours you will be able to master the power
of Mudun Bloodstain. Roughly speaking, the power should be far stronger than
Yamato.
The next injection will be in half a year. "
After saying that, Orochimaru released the hypnotic illusion on He Feng.
He Feng did not resist and quickly fell into sleep.
Orochimaru gently rolled up He Feng's sleeves, and the sharp needle pierced He
Feng's skin. The liquid in the reagent flowed through He Feng's body along with He
Feng's venous blood.
After completing the injection of the reagent into He Feng, Orochimaru turned his
attention to his clone.
After the research on Hashirama cells was completed, Orochimaru had already
conducted experiments on the clones as soon as possible.
Orochimaru is much bolder in his experiments on clones. Even if the experiment
fails, it will not have any impact on him. Instead, he will absorb the lessons of
the failure to make the next experiment even better.
If nothing else goes wrong, after Hefeng completes the injection of four types of
divine reagents, Orochimaru can officially abandon his current body without any
blood stains.
Orochimaru is confident that as long as he completes his reincarnation, his
strength, which has not changed for many years, will be greatly improved.
I thought that Jiraiya would not be his opponent at that time.
Orochimaru's mood improved a lot when he thought that he could easily suppress
Jiraiya in the future.
"Senior Orochimaru! I'm coming!"
Just at this time, space fluctuations suddenly appeared on the side. Obito opened
the Mangekyō Sharingan and came to Orochimaru's laboratory through the power of
Kamui.
Even though Obito in this life has turned on the Mangekyō Sharingan, his kind and
innocent character has not changed.
Orochimaru looked at Obito and asked: "Obito, are you interested in participating
in the Wood Release Bloodstain experiment? I will awaken the Wood Release
Bloodstain for you."
At this moment, Orochimaru suddenlyThere was a sense of anticipation, and he was
looking forward to the scene when Senju Hashirama reappeared in the ninja world and
saw an Uchiha ninja using his wood escape.
"Really, Orochimaru-senpai? Can I?" Obito asked.
Orochimaru nodded and pointed to He Feng aside.
"He Feng is currently merging Zhujian's cells. When he wakes up tomorrow, he will
be able to use Wood Escape. By then, He Feng's strength will be greatly improved
again."
Hearing this, Obito also looked in the direction of He Feng, feeling a little
anxious in his heart.
He Feng's strength is getting stronger and stronger. Even if he has awakened the
Mangekyō Sharingan, the ultimate power of the Uchiha clan, he is no match for He
Feng.
How can I protect He Feng like this?
Being protected by He Feng is enough!
"Senior Orochimaru, I also want to awaken the Wood Release, please help me." Obito
bowed to Orochimaru.
Orochimaru licked his lips. Uchiha Obito's participation in the experiment can be
regarded as gaining experience for him. This wave can only be said to be a win-win
situation.
"Yeah, but compared to Awakening Wood Release, Obito, you should pay more attention
to the use of your eyes.
Obito, do you feel that your vision and pupil power have weakened now? "
Obito was stunned. After awakening the Mangekyou Sharingan, he was accustomed to
using his divine power to rush on the road. Now after Orochimaru said this, Obito
felt it carefully, and he really felt that his eye power was weakened.
This weakening is not a consumption of pupil power when using ninjutsu, but a
reduction of the upper limit.
This made Obito a little scared.
He couldn't imagine what he would do if his eyes were blind.
A blind Uchiha is a joke to Uchiha.
"I hope Orochimaru-sensei can save me!"

Chapter 84 Awakening Wood Release and Obtaining Ninjutsu

After so many years of getting along, Orochimaru seemed to Obito to be almost
omnipotent when it came to the boundaries of blood succession.
Therefore, when his Mangekyou Sharingan developed a problem with weakened vision,
Obito's first thought was not to ask the elders and chiefs of his clan, but to ask
Orochimaru for help.
But it’s not like Obito asked the wrong person.
If it were Orochimaru before, his research on the Sharingan was only superficial.
The most he came into contact with was the three Magatama Sharingan that Danzo had
taken from the dead.
But now Orochimaru has He Feng by his side, and He Feng has been with Uchiha Madara
for more than half a year.
Regarding the Sharingan, He Feng can’t just say whatever he wants.
In addition, He Feng can be sure that Orochimaru is in the same camp as him. Based
on the favorability that Orochimaru has contributed to He Feng, it is impossible to
harm him. He Feng also knows everything about Orochimaru and talks about it.
Information about the Mangekyō Sharingan, the Eternal Mangekyō Sharingan and even
the Samsara Eye were packaged by He Feng and handed over to Orochimaru.
After his horizons were broadened, Orochimaru no longer pursued short-term
longevity. What he pursued now was to build He Feng into a new Six Paths Sage.
However, Orochimaru currently has no idea how to use biotechnology to evolve the
Mangekyō Sharingan into the Eternal Mangekyō Sharingan.
"Obito, Hashirama's cells can effectively prevent the dissipation of the
kaleidoscope's pupil power. Let me take a sample for you first."
"Okay Orochimaru-senpai."
"..."
Soon, the time came to the next day.
Orochimaru, Obito, Kakashi, Anko, Yamato and even Tsunade stood beside He Feng,
waiting for He Feng to wake up.
"Orochimaru, the twenty-four hours you mentioned have passed. Why hasn't Xiao
Hefeng woke up yet?" Tsunade stared at the clock hanging on the wall intently. The
moment the twenty-four hours passed, Tsunade He asked aloud.
Orochimaru was speechless. He was very confident in his experiment, but he couldn't
find any reason to refute Tsunade, "Right away."
Sure enough, after Orochimaru finished speaking, He Feng, who was lying on the bed,
slowly opened his eyes.
He sat up and surrounded the figures surrounding him.
"I've made everyone worried," He Feng said softly.
"He Feng, how are you feeling?" Orochimaru took out a record book from somewhere.
"Well, it feels pretty good." He Feng nodded.
The next second, he stretched out his hand.
Only the branches of the tree were seen emerging from his hands, and He Feng used
chakra to control the growth of the branches.
These branches came to Tsunade, and a red rose appeared in front of her.
"Sister Tsunade, this flower is for you."
Tsunade happily took the rose made of wood from He Feng, feeling very happy in her
heart.
After realizing her feelings for He Feng, Tsunade no longer hid it, so everyone
around He Feng already knew what was going on between He Feng and Tsunade.
For a competitor with a stature like Tsunade, both Nohara Rin and Yuhi Kurenai felt
a little ashamed.
"He Feng, these are some wood escape ninjutsu. Try to master them on the way to the
training ground. The teacher wants to see what your current wood escape blood stain
level is so that you can adjust the content of the divine reagent in the future."
Orochimaru is still very rigorous in scientific research, especially when the
subject is He Feng. He cannot be careless at all.
Because Tsunade was present, Orochimaru couldn't directly talk about the purity of
Hashirama's cells in order to take Tsunade's mood into consideration.
"Okay, Teacher Orochimaru." He Feng took the Wood Release Ninjutsu handed over by
Orochimaru.
There are no techniques such as the wooden figure and wooden dragon between the
Thousand-Armed Pillars and the real Thousand-Armed Buddha Transformation on top.
Those onesThe Wood Release Ninjutsu has been recorded in the Sealed Book, and
cannot be seen without the consent of Sarutobi Hiruzen, even Orochimaru.
However, this scroll contains a record of the large-scale ninjutsu of the tree
world's descent. As a ninjutsu used by Senju Hashirama to clean up stray fish on
the battlefield, the wood style's descent emphasizes simplicity and ease.
There are two ways to form the seals of the Wooden Release. One is more complicated
than Yamato's Sea of Trees, with more than thirty seals.
By the time more than thirty seals were completed, the enemy had long since
disappeared.
The second type is to bring the tree world together with both hands.
However, the second type of releasing ninjutsu is far more cumbersome than the
first one. After all, sealing helps ninjas control the direction of chakra in the
body. After eliminating most of the steps of sealing, the steps that need to be
done in the body are It is also more complicated.
But this is nothing to He Feng, after all, He Feng’s talent lies here.
Soon, everyone arrived at Konoha's training ground.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Orochimaru's Hashirama Cell Experiment was not concealed in any way, and Yamato's
Wood Release had already been seen by Danzo Shimura and Hiruzen Sarutobi. If
Orochimaru hadn't protected Yamato, Yamato wouldn't be staying with Orochimaru now.
Around, but into the root or dark part.
Therefore, the news of Hefeng's awakening of Mudun this time is not a secret. Not
only the higher-ups in the village, but also many jounin know about it.
This time for the test, Hiruzen Sarutobi also sealed the training ground.
Therefore, when He Feng arrived at the training ground, He Feng's relatives and
friends such as Sarutobi Hiruzen, Shimura Danzo, Namikaze Minato, Hatake Sakumo,
etc. were already waiting here.
Even the three prisoners Han, Yeyue and Qilabi were brought over.
It can be said that these three people have all been defeated by He Feng, and they
have put down their hatred towards He Feng because of He Feng's charm.
"He Feng, try it boldly. This is the ninjutsu that Grandpa Hokage rewards you
with." Hiruzen Sarutobi walked to He Feng, took out a handwritten scroll and handed
it to He Feng.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
What is recorded above is the famous ninjutsu of the first Hokage Senju Hashirama.
Wood escape, the art of wooden people.
Of course, this is just a wooden technique.
But He Feng didn't care. Morning and evening were all his, and he wasn't in a
hurry.
"I understand, thank you Grandpa Hokage." He Feng smiled sweetly at Sarutobi
Hiruzen.
Regardless of what He Feng thinks about Sarutobi Hiruzen, on the surface, he has
never lost face to Sarutobi Hiruzen. This is why Sarutobi Hiruzen can always
support He Feng.
In his opinion, Hefeng was a well-established Hokage, and he was very likely to be
the fifth or sixth generation Hokage in the future.
After seeing Sarutobi Hiruzen step forward to increase Hefeng's favorability,
Shimura Danzo could not stand still.
He tried his best to put on a kind smile and stepped forward.
"He Feng, your Hokage grandfather has a gift for you, and I also have a gift for
you." Shimura Danzo's expression was very stiff. After all, he had been cold-faced
for decades, and he was suddenly asked to put on a smile. It's still hard for him
as an old man.
"Thank you, Grandpa Danzo!"
Hefeng took Danzo's scroll and was surprised when he opened it. The two ninjutsu
recorded on the scroll were the ultimate power mastered by Senju Hashirama.
"Immortal Technique, Wood Release, True Thousands of Hands" and "Buddha
Transformation on the Top"
He thought to himself: Danzo, this old dog, has indeed hidden something good.
――――
small theater.
Within the Thousand Hands Clan.
Yeyue looked at the locked door with a puzzled look.
"Strange, why no one brought us food today."
"Brother, is it because of him?"
Kirabi pointed at Han sitting cross-legged on the ground.
"Bi! Beat him!"

Chapter 85 The power of wood escape, advanced immortal body

Originally, Danzo was very fond of Wood Release Ninjutsu. Ever since he got the
training scrolls of these two Ninjutsu, he had imagined that one day he would
awaken the power of Wood Release and crush the Wood Release Ninjutsu alone like the
first Hokage Senju Hashirama. Showing the pictures of the other four major
countries.
But fantasy is beautiful, but reality is cruel after all.
After so many years, these wooden escape ninjutsu have only been used in Danzang's
case.
Therefore, giving these wood escape ninjutsu to He Feng did not make Danzo feel any
physical pain. Instead, he felt that he was sure to make a profit without losing
anything.
If he invests in He Feng now, he will be able to reap the rewards in the future.
As He Feng put away the ninjutsu scrolls of "True Thousand Hands" and "Buddha
Transformation on Top", he also planned to experiment to see how far the wood
escape bloodstains awakened in his body had reached.
"Immortal mode." Hefeng put his hands together, completed the communication with
natural energy in an instant, and successfully entered the immortal mode.
Then, He Feng's body slowly rose and actually flew out of thin air.
This is the earth escape and ultra-light heavy rock technique he obtained from
Onoki. It can greatly reduce one's own weight to achieve the purpose of flying in
the air.
It was obvious that He Feng had mastered this ninjutsu.
"Immortal Technique, Wood Release, Tree Realm Birth!" Because Hiruzen Sarutobi has
completed the isolation of the training ground, He Feng is not afraid of the impact
his technique will have on other people.
Therefore, when he takes action, he goes all out.
With the blessing of celestial beings, Hefeng's Wood Release far exceeded
Orochimaru's expectations, even after being injected with the lowest level of
divine reagents.Under the source of life transformed by the chakra of Hefeng
Xianjue, the entire training ground and the nearly fifty meters around the training
ground were uprooted by thick trees, creating a forest almost in an instant.
"Hide." As Sarutobi Hiruzen finished speaking, the people who stood aside and
watched Mu Dun's bloodstains quickly retreated back, avoiding He Feng's Shujie
Dang.
After all, this is an offensive ninjutsu, and they are not interested in testing
whether their bodies can withstand the power of Mu Dun.
"It shouldn't be. The first divine reagent only activated the Mudun bloodstains for
He Feng. If the purity of the reagent is not even as high as the content of
Hashirama cells in Yamato's body, why is it so powerful?"
Orochimaru was very puzzled.
When he estimated He Feng's wood escape power, he had already taken into account He
Feng's immortal mode and huge amount of chakra, but even if he took these into
account, it was still far from the power He Feng showed.
Orochimaru couldn't understand it at all.
He Feng flew in the air, crossed his arms and looked down with satisfaction. At
this time, he could feel a huge life energy from his body.
This has never happened before.
Although he does not have the combat power of Senju Hashirama at his peak now, he
is still far superior to ordinary ninjas.
With this in mind, He Feng opened his character panel again.
【Name: Qimu Hefeng】
【Sex: Male】
【Age: 11 years old】
【Race: Human (Succubus)】
[Item: 600 million taels, fragments of the Eight Gate Dunjia Formation (7/8)]
[Level: Super Shadow (Super Shadow)]
[Abilities: "Hatake Sword Technique", "Five Escape Mastery", "Illusion Mastery",
"Time and Space Ninjutsu Mastery", "Sealing Art Mastery", "Illusion Resistance",
"Moist Bone Forest Senjutsu", "Kagura Mind's Eye", "Psychic Technique" ""Yin Seal",
"The Art of Creating Hundreds of Living Heroes", "Advanced Immortal Body", "Three
Magatama Sharingan", "Wood Release", "Muji Healing"...]
Looking at his system panel, He Feng was very surprised.
Eleven-year-old Chaoying.
At his age, Senju Hashirama and Uchiha Madara were probably still competing to see
who could pee farther.
However, He Feng also noticed the advanced immortal body and Muyin Healing in his
ability column.
Especially the Muyin Healing, he was convinced that this was an ability that he had
never mastered before.
Obviously this is the increase brought about by the fusion of Hashirama cells.
Senju Hashirama's physical vitality is extremely abundant, and like a jinchuriki,
it can automatically recover from injuries without forming seals. This is one of
the factors that makes Uchiha Madara unable to defeat Senju Hashirama.
The damage caused in the last second will be restored the next second, so why
fight?
At this time, with the blessing of the art of creating and regenerating Baihao and
Muyin Healing, He Feng has a recovery ability that is not weaker than Senju
Hashirama.
It can be said that the life-saving ability has been strengthened again.
This also made He Feng feel more secure again.
After all, even if he is not afraid of people in the ninja world, he still needs to
be wary of the power of Otsutsuki outside the ninja world and similar to Hidan's
belief in the evil god.
He Feng used the power of wood to escape blood stains and combed the trees he made
to prevent them from becoming so ugly.
As for whether these trees should be retained or cleared, it is not something He
Feng needs to consider.
He slowly landed in front of Hatake Sakumo.
He Feng said in a cheerful tone: "Father, Brother Kakashi, and Obito, how about my
Wood Release Bloodstain?!"
Hatake Sakumo nodded, his heart full of pride: "Yes, you are indeed my son. You
have surpassed me in terms of strength."
Kakashi and Obito also expressed their praise for He Feng from the bottom of their
hearts.
For the two of them, they no longer have the luxury of becoming stronger to protect
He Feng. Their only goal now is not to be left too far behind by He Feng.
In that case, it would be too ugly if they were unable to participate in the
battles that He Feng could participate in in the future.
Therefore, Kakashi also began to learn the magic of Mount Myoki from his teacher
Minato Namikaze.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
He was not a fool. After communicating with Orochimaru and Hatake Sakumo, he
understood that his brother Hefeng's Sharingan could not be copied, and he did not
expect to rely on the Sharingan to become stronger.
Therefore, Kakashi set his sights on the Flying Thunder God Jutsu and the Sage
Mode.
Although both are very difficult to learn, Kakashi's talent is not bad. Coupled
with Namikaze Minato's step-by-step guidance, it is only a matter of time before he
gets started.
"Xiao Hefeng! You did a good job. If you want anything, just tell Grandpa Hokage,
and Grandpa will satisfy you." Hiruzen Sarutobi was in a great mood.
The fact that He Feng can use Wood Release means that Orochimaru has mastered the
experiment on Wood Release blood stains, and the success rate of this experiment is
more than 90%. Otherwise, Orochimaru would not be able to experiment on He Feng.
Sarutobi Hiruzen does not expect everyone in Konoha to master Wood Release, but it
is still possible for a few elite Jonin to master Wood Release.
Not only Sarutobi Hiruzen, but also Shimura Danzo also set his sights on Orochimaru
who was thinking hard.
He felt that his relationship with Orochimaru should be improved, at least the
cooperation between Orochimaru and the roots should not be cut off.
Let the other root ninjas who awaken the Wood Release stand back in advance. The
top priority is to let him awaken the Wood Release himself. Only in this way will
Danzo have a chance of winning in the competition with the Fourth Generation... and
the Fifth Generation Hokage.
Yes, at this time Danzo no longer wants to compete with the Fourth Hokage. Even he
can see that if Orochimaru wants to competeAs for the Yondaime Hokage, he is
already unrivaled simply by virtue of his feat of recreating the bloodstains of the
first generation Meiki.
If this is coupled with the achievements of Orochimaru and others in the Third
Ninja World War, Danzo really is not very impressive.
However, although Danzo temporarily recognized the reality, he still believed that
he was a strong candidate for the Fifth Hokage.
After all, no one was older than him at any time, and even He Feng was still
immature. He could win the vote on the grounds that He Feng was still young and not
qualified for the position of Hokage.
At this moment, the position of the Fifth Hokage seemed to be within easy reach in
Danzo's eyes.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Thinking of this, Danzo felt a lot better.

He came to Orochimaru, suppressed the excitement in his heart, and said with a
smile on his face: "Orochimaru, I have some cooperation with you to discuss, I hope
we can have a happy cooperation."
After saying that, Danzo left the scene with a smile.
After Danzo walked away, Orochimaru suddenly recalled.
"So that's it! That's it! What's truly powerful is not the Wood Release Bloodstain,
but the First Generation! It's the First Generation's power that makes the Wood
Release famous. Even if Yamato awakens the Wood Release, he is far from the power
of the First Generation.
The reason why He Feng is able to exert such power of Mu Dun is that in addition to
his own strength, there must be other factors that are similar or even the same as
the first generation! "
At this time, Orochimaru had already completely forgotten what Danzo said just now,
or perhaps he was so absorbed in thinking that he didn't even listen to Danzo's
words.
Orochimaru stepped forward and asked He Feng: "He Feng, after injecting the God's
reagent, did you feel that besides the wood escape blood stains, there was any
other power in your body.
The power of your Wood Release obviously exceeds my expectation. This cannot be
achieved with the first injection. "
Hefeng turned to look at Orochimaru and sighed in his heart: "As expected of
Teacher Orochimaru."
He nodded, then took out a kunai from the ninja bag on his waist, and then picked
up the kunai and swiped it across his arm under the eyes of everyone.
Kunai cut a wound on his arm that was deep enough to show the bone, and He Feng
grimaced in pain.
"Hiss—you're working too hard." He Feng kept his face straight so as not to show
any abnormality, and then withdrew the kunai.
In the middle of Hefeng taking back the kunai, the skin that had been scratched by
the kunai had returned to its original state, and not even a scar could be seen.
"This is Grandpa's Muji Cure!" Tsunade recognized what He Feng was trying to do at
first sight.
"In addition to the invincible Wood Release and the perfect Immortal Mode, Grandpa
also has the famous ability of Muyin Healing. This ability can help Grandpa recover
from injuries with strong vitality without forming seals.
The phenomenon that Xiao Hefeng showed just now is obviously consistent with the
Great Grandpa's Muji Cure.
But I estimate that in addition to the Wuyin cure, Xiao Hefeng's physical
constitution should not be much different from that of his great grandfather. "
After completing the analysis, Tsunade turned to look at He Feng, as if asking
whether what she said was right.
He Feng also nodded and responded: "Sister Tsunade is right, but in addition to
Muji healing, I also mastered a physique called the Immortal Human Body. I think
the Immortal Human Body is the important reason why my Wood Release is so powerful.
factor."
"I see, but this is the first time I have learned about the concept of the immortal
human body. It seems that the teacher's future experiments will still need your
help, He Feng."
"Teacher Orochimaru, if there is anything you need me to do, please tell me."
After Orochimaru solved his doubts, Tsunade also looked at Orochimaru and asked:
"Orochimaru, what is the approximate success rate of your Wood Release bloodstain
experiment? If it were me, would it be possible to awaken the Wood Release?"
For Tsunade, or the Senju clan, it has always been a pain for them to be unable to
awaken the Wood Release as a Senju clan. This is why the Senju clan members in the
original timeline will join Orochimaru one after another with an almost 100%
fatality rate. For the sake of intercolumn cell experiments.
They really want to awaken the bloodstains of the first-generation Mudun, and they
really want to restore the former glory of the Senju clan.
Now the opportunity to awaken the Wood Release is right in front of him, and even
Tsunade cannot completely ignore it.
Orochimaru looked at Tsunade and smiled: "Tsunade, just come to my laboratory for
details. The laboratory is rigorous. The awakening of Mudun Bloodstain is not
deliberately mass-produced, but needs to be combined with the cell characteristics
of each person. Conduct specialized experiments.
Therefore, everyone’s awakening of Wood Escape Bloodstain is equivalent to a brand
new experiment, and even I cannot guarantee the success rate. "
Orochimaru's voice was not meant to avoid others, so both Sarutobi Hiruzen and
Yozuki Kirabi could hear it clearly.
This is what Orochimaru said on purpose.
He doesn't want to be entangled with the old man in the future, so the more
difficult it is to reproduce Mu Dun's bloodstains, the purer he will be and the
more he can do what he wants to do.
What Orochimaru wants to do most now is undoubtedly to use biotechnology to help
Hefeng open the Mangekyō Sharingan and evolve the Mangekyō into the Eternal Eye.
Only in this way can Hefeng have the same eyes as the Six Paths Sage.
Tsunade nodded and continued to question Orochimaru. "Well, I understand. I will go
to your laboratory to discuss it with you in detail."
With the display of He Feng Mu Dun's blood stains over, the purpose of this trip
has been achieved.
Yeyue and the other three were brought back by ANBU. Hefeng said goodbye to Hatake
Sakumo and Kakashi., followed Tsunade back to the Senju clan.
Obito returned to the laboratory with Orochimaru.
Sarutobi Hiruzen did not leave. He stood there looking at the scene caused by He
Feng Mu Dun and did not speak for a long time.

Chapter 86 The sense of oppression from Konoha

Konoha year 49, spring.
The environment of the Country of Fire is very pleasant. This is when the snow
melts and everything revives.
At this time, the shadows of Sunagakure Village, Iwagakure Village, Kumogakure
Village and Kirigakure Village, as well as elected representatives from the
villages, gathered in the Konoha Ninja Village.
"The environment of the Land of Fire is always so good." Luo Sha looked at the gate
of Konoha and the tree trunks with branches sprouting faintly around it, and
couldn't help but sigh.
For them in the Kingdom of Wind, let alone snow, even water resources are scarce.
Most of the land in the Kingdom of Wind is covered with wind and sand, and it is
impossible to even grow crops. Therefore, the food in the Kingdom of Wind is
basically All rely on imports.
"Little Luo Sha, if you think the environment of the Fire Country is good, you can
grab it." Ohnoki said with a smile while flying in mid-air.
The two guards, Huangtu and Chitu, stood beside Ōnoki dutifully, protecting Ōnoki's
safety.
"You!" Luo Sha gritted his teeth. Onoki really didn't want to mention anything. He
came here to negotiate with Konoha. As a defeated country, what he needed to do was
to make the already barren Sand Hidden Village Pay less than argue with Ohnoki.
Of course, in terms of financial resources alone, Sunagakure Village is second only
to Konoha.
Luo Sha was also prepared for heavy bleeding, so his mood was not very beautiful.
And if Luo Sha is not in a beautiful mood, she will naturally not give Onomu face.
He hugged his chest and snorted coldly: "Hmph! Ohnoki, you should consider how much
it will cost to redeem the jinchuriki in the village. Even the jinchuriki can be
captured alive, and I don't know what you do as a Kage. .”
Hearing this, the acting Raikage Todai who was standing aside turned a bit dark.
The one who suffered the heaviest loss this time was none other than Kumogakure.
Not only did he lose the most respected third generation Raikage, but also the
future fourth generation. The Raikage and the Eight-Tails Jinchuuriki were both
captured alive by Konoha.
The price required to redeem Yeyue and Qilabi must be enough to cause Yunyin
Village to bleed a lot. This war can be said to have cost Yunyin Village all its
capital.
Goji Yagura looked at the closed door of Konoha without saying a word.
He has no interest in chatting with other people. He has only one purpose of this
trip.
That is to redeem the four ninja swords taken away from Konoha.
The guards beside Goju Yagura are two of the three remaining members of the Seven
Ninja Swordsmen.
Watermelon Mountain Puffer Ghost and Mu Li Jinpachi.
And they originally didn’t want to come to Konoha. After all, Matt Dai’s kicks were
deeply imprinted in their hearts. They were really afraid that a ninja like Matt
Dai would emerge in Konoha.
But in the village, they couldn't disobey Mizukage's orders. They had to be the
guards even if they didn't want to.
At this time, although there was no interference from Obito in Kirigakure Village,
it still maintained the policies of the Blood Mist.
After all, this policy was established by the Third Mizukage and continues to this
day.
"Who is it?!" The Konoha ninja who was guarding the door asked loudly when he saw
the arriving Kages.
"I am Mizukage from Kirigakure Village, and I came to Konoha to negotiate." Goji
Yagura was the first to speak.
The ninja was stunned when he heard the words. He thought that there was indeed an
order from above. On this day, shadows from various villages would come to Konoha
Village for talks, so he opened the door.
The three Kage and one acting Raikage led their respective guards into the Leaf
Village.
The ANBU in the village also moved towards the Kage's position immediately to
prevent the other party from suddenly doing evil in Konoha Village.
A powerful person may not necessarily be a shadow, but being a shadow of a village
must be powerful.
"Everyone, Hokage-sama has been waiting for you for a long time, please come with
me." Uchiha Shisui came to the front of the four shadows with a teleportation
technique. His expression was calm, and he did not have the awe of ordinary people
towards the shadows.
"Then I'll trouble you." Ohnoki said with a smile.
At this time, Ohnoki had already decided to form an alliance with Konoha, so he did
not embarrass Uchiha Shisui.
"It should be." Uchiha Shisui nodded, and then walked ahead to lead the way for a
few people.
Walking on the road, several people were able to see the environment of Konoha
clearly.
At this moment, a loud voice came from the distance!
"Run fifty laps around Konoha in one breath! If you can't finish it, walk around
Konoha a hundred times while standing on your head! This is my youth!" The figure
was wearing green tights and had watermelon-shaped thick eyebrows. Even if he was
running Sometimes you can also see the other party's shiny white teeth.
"It's him! He's still alive!" The Watermelon Mountain Puffer Ghost and Murashi
Jinpachi felt a sense of fear rushing straight into the sky.
The next second, the two turned around and ran away.
Goji Yagura had a dark face and held the two of them with his hands, preventing
them from completely losing face in Kirigakure Village.
"Kai, you're training again, come on!" Shisui stretched out his hand to say hello
to Metkai.
As a dovish Uchiha ninja who loves the village, Shisui's relationship with the
village ninjas is not bad, and his relationship with Metkai is even better.
After all, Metkai's efforts are visible to the naked eye. No one will dislike a
person who works hard wholeheartedly.
"Yes, Shisui! I'm restraining myself, so I won't talk to you anymore!" Matt Dai
responded to Shisui while running.
Shisui nodded and continued to walk in front to lead the way for the shadows.
At this moment, Luo Sha suddenly felt a gaze on the tree not far away.
"yesKonoha White Fang, what a sharp look. "The look White Fang gave him was very
oppressive. Even though they were far apart, Luo Sha had a premonition that he
would be killed in the next second.
He understood that this was Konoha trying to intimidate them.
Rumble——
At this time, there was another roar not far away.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
The next second, a wooden man thirty or forty meters high rose from the ground,
with a white-haired silhouette above the wooden man's head.
"This! This is Senju Hashirama's wooden figure!!!" Ohnoki, as the Third Tsuchikage,
experienced the period when Senju Hashirama and Uchiha Madara single-handedly
suppressed the ninja world, and also saw Senju Hashirama with his own eyes. The
demon-like power of Tehashirama and Uchiha Madara.
Therefore, he recognized the wooden man immediately after it appeared.
"Could it be that Senju Hashirama has been resurrected?" A thought appeared in
Onoki's mind, but he soon shook his head because he could see a figure above the
wooden figure.
"Sure enough, Konoha has risen." Onoki said with emotion.
"What kind of power is this!!!" Luo Sha, Dodai and Goju Yagura have never seen
Senju Hashirama, and their understanding of Mu Dun is only based on rumors, so this
is the first time they have seen Mu Dun. The power of people.
"It's almost as oppressive as the tailed beast. I didn't expect Konoha to have such
a powerful power." Dodai said with a surprised look on his face.
Under the power of Bokuto, he even doubted whether the tailed beast would be his
opponent.
"Everyone, Kage, we have arrived." At this time, Shisui also led a few people into
the Hokage building and stopped in front of a conference room. "I will not be able
to participate in the next thing."
After saying that, Shisui disappeared with a teleportation technique.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Several people looked at each other, and then Ohnoki pushed open the door of the
conference room and led his two red earth and loess guards into the conference room
first.
At this time, the conference room had already gathered high-level officials from
Konoha, as well as the heroes in the Three Wars.
Sarutobi Hiruzen sat in the main seat, and beside him sat the three elders Shimura
Danzo, Mito Kadenen and Koharu Koharu.
In addition, there were Konoha's elite jounin such as Nara Shikaku, Tsunade,
Namikaze Minato, and Uzumaki Kushina.
And Kushina's appearance here as the Nine-Tailed Jinchuuriki undoubtedly put a lot
of pressure on the Kage of each village.
As the strongest tailed beast, the Kyuubi's jinchuriki's combat prowess is
unquestionable.
"Everyone, since you are here, please take a seat." Hiruzen Sarutobi pointed at the
four remaining chairs present and said calmly.
At this moment, the Kage in each village felt the sense of oppression that only
belonged to Konoha.
This is a blow from the fundamental level.
――――
Today there are still two updates, but each update is a chapter of 3,000 words.
Starting from this month, a new update rule will be added.
Every 1000 for Love Power, one chapter will be added.
There is no upper limit.
Free small gifts, please use your little hands to order some. As long as the
quantity is enough, more will be added directly.
Gifts of the same price are also included in the extra rules.

Chapter 87 Troll Danzo

After the four of them sat down, Sarutobi Hiruzen did not continue to embarrass
each other.
After all, I came to Konoha to negotiate the terms of surrender. If I were really
pushed into a situation and just smashed the jar, wouldn't it be a big loss for
nothing?
After everyone finished sitting down, Nara Shikaku looked at Sarutobi Hiruzen, and
after receiving a nod from the other party, he spoke first:
"This Ninja World War is a war of aggression launched by Sunagakure, Iwagakure,
Kumogakure, and Kirigakure villages against Konoha. This war is unjust, immoral,
unethical, and heinous.
As the invaded party and the victor of this war, Konoha has reason, right and
necessity to demand compensation from the four parties of Sunagakure, Iwagakure,
Kumogakure and Kirigakure for this war in order to appease them. The Konoha ninja
who died because of this war. "
Nara Shikaku opened a book in front of him and glanced at the four shadows present
and the guards behind them.
He said in a deep voice:
"A total of 3,000 ninjas were dispatched in this battle between Konoha and
Sunagakure Village, and the number of ninjas killed in the battle was XXX.
A total of nearly 5,000 ninjas were dispatched in the battle between Konoha and
Cloud Hidden Village, of which XXX were killed due to the war. At the same time,
Cloud Hidden Village caused great harm to the hearts of our ninjas because of their
use of the Eight-Tails Jinchuuriki.
Konoha dispatched more than 2,000 ninjas to the Iwagakure and Kirigakure
battlefields respectively, among which the number of sacrifices was XXX...
Although Konoha Hidden Village won this battle, the losses to Konoha were extremely
heavy and irreparable. "
"Now, Konoha Hidden Village needs Sunagakure to compensate Konoha for a total of 10
billion taels, the right to use the one-tailed beast for fifty years, all the
secret skills of the puppet master and the puppet manufacturing process, and
Sunagakure can no longer initiate any wars. And accept the garrison of Konoha
ninjas."
Nara Shikaku looked at Rasa and slowly told Konoha's demand for compensation for
Sunagakure.
After Luo Sha heard Konoha's request for compensation, a chill rose up from his
back.
None of these conditions could be tolerated by Sunagakure.
If Sunagakure pays out 10 billion taels, it will completely offend the Daimyo of
the Country of Wind. After all, the Daimyo paid for this money.
Not to mention the right to use Yiwei, there is still the possibility of getting it
back in a year or two., if it takes fifty years, the jinchūriki will have been
replaced, how can they come back?
The puppet master's secret technique is the foundation of Sunagakure's heritage. If
the puppet master's secret technique is lost, his Kazekage will be finished.
Compared with the first three, the last one is not so difficult to accept, not to
initiate war and accept Konoha's garrison.
After hearing Konoha's compensation terms for Sunagakure, the shadows in the other
three villages all took a breath.
Especially Kumogakure’s agent Raikage Dodai.
They, Kumogakure, undoubtedly had the biggest grudge against Konoha and suffered
the heaviest losses in this war.
If he follows Konoha's compensation law, whether he can bring Yeyue and Kirabi back
to Kumogakure is a question.
Tutai frowned and pinched his eyebrows, thinking about what he should do next.
"Hokage, this is unreasonable!" Rasa ultimately did not agree to the conditions
proposed by Konoha. Whether it was for Sunagakure's future or for his Kazekage
position, Rasa would not agree to these conditions.
"Hmph! Rasa, do you want to start a war again? I don't mind leading the ninjas of
Konoha to teach you Sunagakure a lesson again." Danzo Shimura snorted and looked at
Rasa with an unkind expression.
As the commander-in-chief of the Fire Sand Battlefield, Danzo Shimura and Rasa can
be said to have fought against each other many times.
Luo Sha was very disdainful of Shimura Danzo. After all, the confrontation between
him and Shimura Danzo always resulted in more wins and less losses.
If it weren't for this moment, Luo Sha really wouldn't be afraid of Danzo.
"No matter what, it is impossible for me, Sunagakure, to agree to this condition!
If Konoha insists on this condition, prepare to fight Sunagakure to death!" Luosha
slammed the table and stood up.
The two guards behind him also made a gesture of being ready to take action at any
time.
"Rasa! It's you who failed this war! Since you want to continue the war, I'm here
to accompany you at any time!" Danzo stood up directly, his face as dark as could
be.
Sunagakure can't win when Konoha is one against four. If they are one-on-one with
Konoha, the end can be imagined.
"Okay Danzo, let's first listen to what conditions the Kazekage can accept, and
then we can consider whether we should agree or not." Sarutobi Hiruzen said with a
smile.
After Danzo played the bad guy, Sarutobi Hiruzen also started to play the red face.
With Sarutobi Hiruzen's comfort, Rasa's mood improved a lot. He sat back on the
chair, looked at Sarutobi Hiruzen and said slowly:
"Sunagakure will accept up to 5 billion taels in compensation, and the compensation
will be delivered for ten years. Sunagakure will pay 500 million taels in cash to
Konoha every year.
As for the right to use the tailed beasts, I, Sunagakure, will not agree to it
under any circumstances. The most we can accept is that when Konoha needs one tail,
jinchuriki will be sent to support it.
The puppet secret technique Sunagakure will also not be handed over. If Konoha
accepts it, Sunagakure can instead provide Konoha with other ninjutsu scrolls. "
"This..." Nara Shikaku was about to speak, but was directly interrupted by Danzo.
"This is impossible! Why don't you Sunagakure ask Konoha to compensate you? A total
of five billion taels will be paid in ten years! Are you using Konoha as a beggar
to send Konoha like this? !!
You still send jinchūriki to support Konoha when it needs it, but that one in your
village is not the weakest among the tailed beasts! There are so many people in
Konoha who can win the first one! It's as if Konoha really needs you Ichibi.
As for the secret technique of puppets, Konoha wants to think highly of you, the
dozen ninja clans in Konoha Hidden Village, Aburame's insect control skills,
Inuzuka's ninja dogs, Hinata's Byakugan, Uchiha's Sharingan, etc., you Do you
really think Konoha cares about your secret puppet technique?
Konoha gives you this opportunity to negotiate to give you face. If you don't take
the face well, then Konoha won't mind letting you see Konoha's skills!
But this time, we are not done yet. Sunagakure Village should be prepared to change
its name! "
At this moment, Danzo's combat effectiveness was extremely high, and with his sharp
tongue, he was able to spray Rasa until he was speechless.
For a time, even people like Namikaze Minato and Uzumaki Kushina, who didn't have a
very good impression of Danzo, looked at him with admiration.
Danzo’s mouth is really poisonous!
At the same time, in Kushina's mental space.
The Nine-Tailed Nine Lamas lay there, watching everything happening in the outside
world with interest. When Danzo said that the One-Tailed Beast was the most rubbish
of all the tailed beasts, the Nine-Tails also nodded. He was very satisfied with
this view. Agree.
In the view of Jiu Lama, the number of tails is a reflection of the level of
strength.
He has nine tails, so he is naturally the most powerful among the tailed beasts,
while Shukaku has only one tail, so he is undoubtedly the weakest.

Chapter 88 This is Shimura Danzo’s victory

"You!" Luo Sha pointed at Danzo, unable to hold back the second word for a long
time.
It was obvious that he had been offended by Danzo's words, and he even had a hint
of agreement with what Danzo said in his heart.
It seems that there is nothing wrong with what Danzo said...
Luo Sha scratched his head. He looked at Sarutobi Hiruzen and said slowly: "Hokage,
I need to discuss these conditions with the village elders and daimyo, so I can't
make a reply for the time being."
Sarutobi Hiruzen was already happy in his heart at this time, but he still
pretended to be calm and said: "Kazekage, this is what it should be, but I still
need Kazekage to give me a detailed explanation of how long this negotiation will
take. answer."
Luo Sha nodded and replied: "This is what it should be. I will do it in a month at
the latest."Give a reply. "
Seeing this, Nara Shikaku glanced at Shimura Danzo, and then continued:
"The five-tailed Jinchuuriki Han, the son of the Third Raikage, Yeyue, and the
eight-tailed Jinchuuriki, Rabbi, are still guests in our Konoha Senju Clan. In the
past six months, we in Konoha have also entertained the three of them responsibly.
I don't know. When will the shadow take away the three of them?
If the two shadows plan to take them away, don't forget to pay for the resources
that we, Konoha, have devoted to entertaining the three of them. "
Nara Shikaku did not directly mention the price that Iwagakure and Kumogakure had
to pay. After all, it was just for the two to pay a ransom. In addition to the
ransom, there was also a war compensation waiting for them.
Obviously Ohnoki also knew about this in his heart, so he was like Wang Zha as soon
as he opened his mouth.
"I, Iwagakure, will hand over the secret earth escape techniques except dust escape
to Konoha Hidden Village, including my super light and heavy rock technique. In
addition, I will also provide Han with all the secret techniques of earth escape in
Konoha in the past six months. I will pay for the expenses, and please ask the
Hokage to give me a list of the specific expenses."
Ohnoki's thought was simple. As long as his Iwagakure's secret technique, Dust
Release, was still there, other ninjutsu would not matter.
As for the super light and heavy rock technique, he had already given it to He
Feng, and it didn't matter if he gave it to Konoha at this time.
Sarutobi Hiruzen was very satisfied with the conditions proposed by Ohnoki. He
nodded: "In this case, Lord Tsuchikage, please take Han back. I think he has been
with us for half a year, and he must be homesick in his heart."
Tudai pondered for a moment, and then said: "We Kumogakure can hand over the secret
technique of thunder escape, including the thunder escape chakra mode, to Konoha,
and pay the expenses of Yeyue and Kirabi."
Sarutobi Hiruzen smiled and said: "Well, Raikage's proposal is also very sincere.
Raikage can bring Yeyue back to Kumogakure. As for Kirabi, I think he likes Konoha
more than Kumogakure. That's it. Let’s stay in Konoha for now.”
Sarutobi Hiruzen felt a little disdainful. He felt that the acting Raikage was
sending away beggars. He wanted to redeem the son of the Third Raikage and the
Eight-Tailed Jinchuuriki for such a small amount. How could this be possible!
Danzo Shimura stood up again, and he said unceremoniously: "Don't you Kumogakure
have the Six Paths Noble Phantasm? It is said to be the ninja tool left by the Six
Paths Sage. If you want to redeem the Eight-Tails Jinchuuriki, you can exchange it
for the Six Paths Noble Phantasm!"
Some useless ninja tools were exchanged for the Eight-Tails Jinchuuriki. I felt
like I was losing a lot! "
After Danzo said that he had suffered a huge loss, Dodai had a black line on his
face.
"If I remember correctly, Kumogakure seems to have five Six-Path Ninja Tools alone.
I don't need more. I only need three Six-Path Ninja Tools to exchange for an intact
Eight-Tails Jinchuuriki."
Hearing this, Tutai did not refute, but pondered for a while.
Before he came, he had a meeting with Kumo Gakure's elders, and he also guessed
that Konoha would be eyeing Kumo Gakure's Six Paths Ninja Tools, so before he came,
Kumo Gakure was already prepared to lose part of the Six Paths Ninja Tools.
Prepare.
Although three six-path ninja tools are very painful, they are not impossible to
consider.
"What Kirigakure said..." Nara Shikaku looked at Kirigakure, organized the words in
his mind and was about to speak, when he was interrupted again.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Goju Yagura took the initiative and said: "I, Kirigakure, lost four of my seven
Ninja Swordsmen in the hands of Konoha ninjas. This can only be blamed on their
lack of strength and nothing else. I, Kirigakure, am here just to redeem what I
have gained from Konoha." Those four ninja swords."
For Kirigakure Village, they attach great importance to the inheritance of the
Ninja Sword. The status of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen is only lower than that of
Mizukage in Kirigakure.
Therefore, for Gotachibana Yagura, the importance of the four ninja swords, the
double sword, the flat sword, the broken sword, the beheading sword, the long
sword, the sewing needle, and the dull sword, the kabutori, is far higher than
other things.
After hearing Goju Yagura's request, Sarutobi Hiruzen was also a little strange.
Kirigakure's seven ninja swords are very famous. If they were obtained by Konoha,
he, as the Hokage, would not know about them.
Thinking of this, Sarutobi Hiruzen suddenly looked at Danzo Shimura, as if asking
him if he did it.
Danzo Shimura was also stunned. He cursed Hiruzen Sarutobi in his mind and gave him
a look that had nothing to do with him.
After getting Danzo's explanation, Sarutobi Hiruzen looked at Goju Yagura and said
truthfully: "I, Konoha, have not obtained the ninja sword that Mizukage mentioned.
Mizukage can look for it again through other means. If we If Konoha has news about
the Ninja Sword, they will also inform the Mizukage."
Goji Yagura nodded when he heard the words, and did not doubt that Sarutobi Hiruzen
said this because he wanted to swallow the Ninja Sword for himself.
Although these ninja swords are powerful, they are not powerful enough for a
village of shadows to deceive him regardless of face.
After getting the four ninja swords that Konoha had not obtained, Gouju Yagura also
thought about who dared to pick up the leaks of their Kirigakure village.
Nara Shikaku sighed in his heart. As a negotiator, he had not said a few words in
total, and he would be interrupted as soon as he opened his mouth. However, he
still did not forget his responsibilities.
They also successively revealed Konoha's war compensation demands for Iwagakure,
Kumogakure and Kirigakure.
Every request from Konoha was like a lion's mouth. When facing Kumogakure, he even
set his sights on the other two Six Paths Ninja Tools.
It turns out that the local station wanted to refuse.
However, after seeing the Sword of Ninja Love placed by Namikaze Minato on the
table, Dodai could only say with tears that he also needed a month to return to the
village to discuss with the elders.
Compared to Sunagakure, who was the first to start the war, and Kumogakure, who was
the most vicious against Konoha, IwagakureThe compensation for the defeat of Hidden
and Kirigakure is relatively light, but the blood is also lost.
This 'Five Kage Talks' went very smoothly. After it was over, Hiruzen Sarutobi felt
much younger. Danzo Shimura also found his second favorite hobby besides becoming
Hokage.
He really likes the feeling when he doesn't need to think about anything and only
needs to use his mouth to output.
If possible, Danzo Shimura could spray the other four Ninja Villages speechless
with one mouth.
Chapter 89 Young Neji
Konoha 50 years.
The passage of time is always so silent.
At this time, a year had passed since the Five Shadows negotiated compensation in
Konoha.
During this period, Hefeng also completed the third injection of the divine
reagent.
This year He Feng also turned 13 years old.
I don’t know if it’s because children in the ninja world mature earlier, but
Kakashi and Obito’s height has reached 1.7 meters, which is a full 20 centimeters
taller.
He Feng stood beside the two of them, looking as lovable as a porcelain doll.
On this day, Hefeng came to the Hyuga clan as promised. He stood in front of the
gate of the Hyuga clan. When a Hyuga clan member saw someone coming, he took the
initiative to greet him.
"This is the Hyuga clan, you...what's the matter with you?" Perhaps because of He
Feng's appearance and temperament, this young boy from the Hyuga clan became a
little incoherent after seeing He Feng.
Hefeng smiled at the other party: "I'm here to see the leader of the Hizashi clan.
He should have told you."
Hearing this, the young man from the Hinata branch nodded, and then suddenly
realized: "You must be Senior Hefeng! The clan leader has already told me, I will
take you to see him right now!"
"Is this okay?" He Feng was hesitant to speak.
The Hyuuga boy also understood He Feng's concerns, and immediately explained: "It's
nothing, someone will take over for me, and the Zong family won't have the time to
take care of this matter."
He Feng could see that the Hyuga boy's eyes were a little dodgey when he mentioned
the Zong family.
Obviously, as a member of the Hyuga branch clan, he is often persecuted by the clan
clan.
Seeing the other party like this, He Feng thought of the descendants of Hamun on
the moon, where the branch family directly killed the entire clan.
Shaking his head, He Feng no longer thought about these things.
Soon, the Hinata boy brought He Feng to a house.
He said to He Feng: "Senior He Feng, please wait a moment, I will inform the clan
leader."
He Feng nodded and said: "Okay, you go and notify."
The Hyuga boy nodded and returned soon.
Also coming with him was Hinata Hizashi.
"He Feng, you're finally here." Hizashi was holding a little boy in his arms. At
this time, the little boy was staring at He Feng intently.
"Wow~wow~wow~" The little boy stretched out his hands towards He Feng and screamed.
"This is my son Ningci. It seems that he likes you very much." Hinata Hizashi
smiled and handed Ningci to Hefeng.
He Feng took it lightly.
"Wow~wow~" Ningci, who was in He Feng's arms, stretched out his little hands to He
Feng, and pinched He Feng's face with his small hands.
He Feng wasn't upset either. Ningji looked so cute at this moment, like a bigger
figure.
"Ningci is very cute." He Feng said with a smile.
He maintains a lot of affection for this young man who not only maintains a
pessimistic fatalism, but also dares to fight against a sad fate.
Therefore, when I saw Ningji at this time, I felt emotional in my heart.
"Yes, Neji will be a genius, a genius more powerful than me." Hinata Hizashi stood
aside, looking at Ningji in He Feng's arms with a gentle look on his face.
At this time, Ningji was only a year old and could only make a sound.
But Hyuga Hizashi already believed in his heart that Neji was a genius.
Similarly, Hizashi also felt sad for Neji's future fate.
Because his eldest sister-in-law was pregnant at this time, and Neji needed to
carve the Caged Bird Curse Seal on his forehead when his eldest brother, the eldest
son of the clan, turned three.
This is a fate that no one in the branch family can escape, but Hyuga Hizashi is
unwilling to let his son face such a fate in the future.
Therefore, Hinata Hizashi placed his hopes on He Feng.
At this time, Hefeng's teacher Orochimaru was participating in the election of the
Fourth Hokage. Compared with Minato Namikaze, Danzo Shimura and Fugaku Uchiha who
were also participating in the election, Orochimaru had the highest success rate in
the election.
As a disciple of Orochimaru, He Feng's status is naturally rising. Coupled with He
Feng's strength, if Ningci can worship He Feng as his teacher, the elders of the
clan will not be able to force Ningci to engrave the seal as long as He Feng is not
willing. It's a caged bird.
However, Hinata Hizashi was not in a hurry. After all, becoming a disciple still
depends more on He Feng's intention, not just what he thinks.
"I think so too. Ningci's future will definitely be exciting." Hefeng smiled and
handed Ningci back to Hyuga Hizashi.
It’s not a problem for me to hold someone else’s son all the time.
"He Feng, please stay and have a meal. Your sister-in-law's cooking is quite good."
Hizashi invited He Feng.
He wanted He Feng to accept Ning Ci as his disciple, and the most important thing
was to have a good relationship with He Feng.
And he was very confident in his wife's craftsmanship. If He Feng liked it, he
would invite He Feng to his home for a meal every now and then. Over time, He Feng
and Ning Ci became familiar with each other.Now that he has learned about the
relationship between the Hyuga clan and the branch family, He Feng will naturally
not sit idly by with his kindness.
Hinata Hizashi still felt a little guilty. After all, He Feng was his savior, and
his purpose of inviting He Feng to his home for dinner was not pure from the
beginning.
It was as if he was taking advantage of He Feng's kindness to find a way out for
his children.
He Feng was not clear about Hinata Hizashi's inner thoughts, but he could clearly
see the favorability +1 prompts that appeared above Hinata Hizashi's head from time
to time.
This made He Feng feel good.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
Although with his current strength, he is no longer inferior to the enhancement
brought by these two points of favorability, but mosquito legs are also meat.
Moreover, the accumulation of favorability can be exchanged for special items in
the system mall, which is what Hefeng currently needs.
If the favorability is enough, Hefeng can even get a new ten-tails from the system.
"Then I'm sorry." He Feng nodded and did not refuse Hizashi's invitation.
He didn't eat when he came out, but it was time for dinner.
The fact is just as Hinata Hizashi said, his wife's cooking skills are indeed
outstanding. Although it is just an ordinary family banquet, He Feng is very happy
to eat it.
During this period, Hizashi's wife would put vegetables in He Feng's bowl from time
to time, looking at He Feng with tender and incomprehensible eyes.
He Feng knew that this was because his constitution was causing trouble again, but
He Feng had already adapted to this kind of thing, and he didn't pay too much
attention to it.
After all, his physique is a passive skill, and it cannot be turned off just by
turning it off.
All in all, Hefeng was very satisfied with this meal, and the people in the
separation family were also very enthusiastic.
Of course, people from the Zong family are no exception. Although those people from
the Zong family are arrogant, they still have the proper etiquette for the 'little
beauty' He Feng.
――――
The additional update rules are still valid, this is today’s normal update.
Ah Shuang came to report how many updates he currently owes.
Since yesterday, A Shuang has received a total of gifts worth 572.74 gift points.
Currently 5 chapters are owed.

Chapter 90 Jonin Promotion Mission

The top floor of the Hokage Building.
Five Six Paths Ninja Tools were neatly placed in front of Sarutobi Hiruzen.
After these ninja tools were paid to Konoha by Kumogakure, they were kept by
Hiruzen Sarutobi and never taken out. Danzo Shimura didn't bother to ask for them
anymore after asking for them from Hiruzen Sarutobi several times to no avail.
After all, with Sarutobi Hiruzen's character, if it is really possible for him to
get the Six Paths Ninja Tool, he can get it even if it doesn't work the first time.
If he didn't ask for it the second time, it meant that Hiruzen never thought of
handing him the ninja tool.
This is the tacit understanding that Shimura Danzo and Sarutobi Hiruzen have
developed over the years.
Now, Sarutobi Hiruzen looked at the three people in front of him, Hefeng, Kakashi
and Obito, with a kind expression.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Rather than leaving the Six Paths Ninja Tool here to eat ashes, it would be better
to hand it over to other people in the village.
Although Sarutobi Hiruzen sometimes does some stupid things for his little power as
Hokage, in the final analysis, he still cares about Konoha and hopes that Konoha
will become better.
His will of fire told him that the children in the village are the future of the
village.
"He Feng, Kakashi and Obito, you three are considered to be the best at your age.
Today, Grandpa Hokage will give you such an opportunity.
You can take any of the five six-path ninja tools in front of you and use them at
will. As for which one you take, it all depends on your ideas. Grandpa Hokage will
not interfere. "
Sarutobi Hiruzen smiled and stroked his beard.
Hearing this, the three of them did not come forward, but looked at each other in
tacit understanding.
Obito took the lead and said: "I already have divine power. These ninja tools are
of no use to me. It's better for Kakashi to take them."
He Feng also said: "I am no longer strong enough to use these ninja tools. I also
think it is better for Brother Kakashi to take these ninja tools."
Kakashi looked at the two people who were so condescending and shook his head: "I
don't need it either. I have already mastered some of the requirements for Flying
Thunder God. I will be able to master Flying Thunder God in some time. I also need
to learn the magic of immortality. I came here to get these ninja tools to eat
ashes at my place."
Looking at the three people who were so humble, Sarutobi Hiruzen was also stunned,
and then he laughed and said: "Old man, I didn't think well.
Well, Grandpa Hokage keeps these ninja tools for you...oh no, for the village.
Anyone who needs to use them can apply to the village. How about this? "
Hearing what Sarutobi Hiruzen said, the three of them nodded in unison.
He Feng said: "This is the best thing to say, Grandpa Hokage. It is better for a
village to control this kind of ninja tool than for an individual to control it."
Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded, and then changed the topic: "You three little guys are not
weak now, but your ninja level is still Konoha Chuunin.
After three battles and one battle, your merits are enough to be promoted to Jonin.
I have prepared the S-level task assessment for you three little guys. As long as
you successfully complete the task, you can officially become a Konoha Jonin. "
Hearing that he could become a Jonin, Obito's eyes immediately lit up and he asked
excitedly: "Grandpa Hokage, what is the S-level assessment? I can't wait to become
a Jonin!"
Kakashi's performanceBetter than Obito, but the expectation in his eyes had given
him away.
Hefeng was much calmer than the two of them, or it could be said that he wanted to
be an unknown Konoha genin more than a Konoha jounin.
After all, it is well known that the most powerful people in Konoha are the Konoha
genin.
While the jounin was still forming ninjutsu, the Konoha genin were already on the
Gundam.
Also, with He Feng's current strength, he could kill almost everyone in a village
with just one shot of his hands. A mere jounin title was indeed unattractive.
Sarutobi Hiruzen said slowly: "The content of the assessment is very simple, that
is, the three of you will sneak into and investigate the United Ninja Kingdom that
has appeared in recent years!"
"The United Kingdom of the Ninja World?" Obito and Kakashi were both a little
confused. When did such a country appear in the Ninja World? Why did they have no
impression of it at all.
Hefeng was a little surprised. Xiaonan and the others were being targeted. It
seemed that their pace was getting bigger and bigger now.
In the past two years, Hefeng has been in correspondence with Xiaonan Yahiko and
others. Xiaonan and Yahiko will also ask Hefeng some questions about the governance
of Yuyin Village and the United Kingdom of Ninja World in their letters.
If you study these issues in detail, He Feng actually doesn't understand much, but
from a macro level, He Feng has a lot in his mind.
After all, he came from the mysterious Eastern Kingdom before his reincarnation.
Therefore, Yahiko has some red shadows in the governance of the United Ninja
Kingdom.
The influence of the red system in the ninja world is like the tailed beast jade
falling to the ground, it is extremely explosive.
Over the past few years, although the United Kingdom of Ninja World has been
undergoing internal rectification, its red shadow has begun to reflect around it.
For countries such as the Land of Earth, the Land of Wind, and the Land of Fire,
which are adjacent to the United Ninja Kingdom, ordinary civilians on the borders
are all attracted to the United Ninja World.
However, the civilians of the three major countries are still in a wait-and-see
state, while the civilians of small countries such as the Country of Sichuan have
already emigrated as long as they can.
The reason is also very simple. They can't eat in the Kingdom of Kawa, but they can
eat in the United Ninja Kingdom under the leadership of King Yahiko!
And there is also a rain shadow in the United Ninja Kingdom. The Rain Shadow Angel
Konan can protect all the people of the United Ninja Kingdom.
If anyone dares to offend the United Kingdom of Ninja World, there will be divine
punishment waiting for those who offend.
This is all talked about by the people of the United Kingdom of Ninja World.
"Yes, during the Third Ninja War, the leader of the United Ninja Kingdom, or king
according to them, conquered the three countries of Birds, Grass and Rain at an
extremely fast speed. country, and persuaded the daimyo of the three countries to
unite.
When was the United Kingdom of Ninja World officially established?
Today, the United Ninja Kingdom has exposed some of their ambitions. Some civilians
on the border of the Land of Fire have been bewitched and joined the United Ninja
Kingdom. "
Kakashi suddenly understood and said: "So our next task is to investigate the
details of the United Kingdom of Ninja World and confirm whether the other party
has evil intentions towards our country of fire. Is that so, Hokage-sama?"
Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded and said, "That's right! This is your next mission.
This is a long-term mission. After all, there are many things that you need to
investigate. However, if you complete this mission, you will officially become a
Jounin of Konoha. "

Chapter 91 Orochimaru’s Reincarnation

Hefeng and others did not go directly to the United Kingdom of Ninja Realm, but
stayed in Konoha for a while.
The reason is also very simple.
At this time, the election of the Fourth Hokage of Konoha is very close.
The four of them, Namikaze Minato, Orochimaru, Shimura Danzo and Uchiha Fugaku, are
preparing for the Hokage election.
Although Shimura Danzo thought in his heart that he could not win the Hokage
election, there was still a feeling of luck in his heart.
Just like Uchiha Fugaku, as a member of the Uchiha clan, he didn't know that he
couldn't become the fourth generation Hokage.
But whether it was pressure from the village or the Uchiha clan, Fugaku was forced
to participate in the Hokage election beyond his capabilities.
However, in Fugaku's view, as long as Shimura Danzo does not win this election,
whether Orochimaru or Namikaze Minato becomes the Fourth Hokage, it will be a good
start for the Uchiha clan.
Therefore, Uchiha Fugaku was very open-minded and just went through the motions to
show it to the hawk elders of the clan.
On the other side, Namikaze Minato and Orochimaru were more willing to let nature
take its course when it came to Hokage's election. Although both of them had a
desire for the position of Hokage, they did not have Danzo's almost pathological
desire.
For the two of them, it doesn't matter who becomes Hokage. The reason why they run
for Hokage is also an explanation of their childhood dreams.
After all, both Namikaze Minato and Orochimaru had their dreams of becoming Hokage
when they were young.
It’s just that in his early years, Orochimaru focused more on the research of
ninjutsu and life due to the blows during World War II.
The day before the Hokage election, He Feng received news from Orochimaru and came
to Orochimaru's laboratory.
At this time, Orochimaru was wearing a loose yukata, sitting on a chair and staring
intently at the kimono woman in front of him who was just like him.
After so many years of training, he finally completed the training of his
artificial reincarnation.
Now heIt can be said that the reincarnated body has all the functions of the human
body except that it has no soul.
Even women’s own ability to nurture life is no exception.
He stood up and gently stroked the reincarnated body's tender face with his palms.
"What a majestic vitality, what a powerful body." Orochimaru murmured softly. At
this moment, he once again felt the greatness of scientific research.
Creation of life, a domain that belongs exclusively to God, is accomplished in His
hands.
"Sbarasi~~" Orochimaru stuck out his tongue and licked his lips, feeling extremely
excited.
At this time, He Feng also walked down from above along the passage.
"Teacher Orochimaru, are you ready?" He Feng came to Orochimaru's side, looked at
the reincarnation coming out of the nutrient solution in front of him, and said
softly.
Orochimaru nodded and said, "Yes, the teacher plans to participate in the Hokage
election like this. What do you think?"
"It doesn't matter what the teacher looks like. The teacher's spirit and talent are
the most important. What everyone in Konoha admires is also the teacher's ability."
Orochimaru chuckled and gently rubbed He Feng's hair.
"Teacher's research on the reincarnation of immortal corpses has always been
limited to theory. This time it is both reincarnation and an experiment. It is up
to you, He Feng, to record the data for the teacher."
Orochimaru's seal formation speed is not fast, but he mobilizes the chakra in his
body meticulously and precisely.
After completing the seal, Orochimaru placed his hands on the reincarnated body's
head and pressed his thumbs against the reincarnated body's temples.
"Reincarnation without corpse."
The next second, the ability of the immortal corpse to be reincarnated was
activated.
Originally, this ninjutsu was to achieve the purpose of reincarnation by
transferring one's own spirit into the body of another person and seizing the other
person's body.
Because it is another person's body, even if the reincarnated person does not
resist at all, the reincarnation of the corpse will also have an impact on
Orochimaru's own soul. This is why Orochimaru's soul strength in the original
timeline is getting weaker and weaker.
And the strength of the soul intuitively affects one's resistance to illusions.
But this time it’s completely different.
First of all, this reincarnation was cloned and cultured based entirely on
Orochimaru's genetic fragments. Therefore, it is not an exaggeration to say that
the compatibility between the reincarnation and Orochimaru is 100%.
In addition, the reincarnated body itself has no soul. Orochimaru does not need to
interact with the souls of the two when he is reincarnated, and it will not affect
the strength of Orochimaru's own soul.
Therefore, for Orochimaru, the implementation of the Fuzo Reincarnation this time
is completely changing from one body to another, and it can be said that there is
no difficulty at all.
Soon, Orochimaru completed the transfer of his soul.
His original body fell down directly because it had no soul.
He Feng quickly stepped forward to support him.
"Is this the new body?" Orochimaru opened his eyes, and her voice had completely
transformed into a female voice.
At the same time, even though they were far apart, Orochimaru smelled the special
smell emanating from He Feng.
This was a smell she had never smelled in a male body before.
"The female body is really magical." Orochimaru regarded it as a unique ability of
the female body and did not pay too much attention to it.
"Teacher, congratulations on your completion of reincarnation." He Feng placed
Orochimaru's original body on the chair, and then said to Orochimaru.
Orochimaru smiled and said: "This is just the first step in the teacher's plan.
Hefeng, can you tell the teacher in detail about the Otsutsuki clan mentioned by
Uchiha Madara? "
Hefeng was stunned. The Otsutsuki clan had only mentioned it casually before. He
said that the name of the Sage of Six Paths was Otsutsuki Hagoromo, but he didn't
expect that his teacher would remember it.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
"Teacher, don't you make preparations for tomorrow's voting?" He Feng asked.
Orochimaru shook his head, then pointed to his head and said: "All the preparations
made by the teacher are here."
--------------------xxxx--------------------

He Feng nodded, and then said slowly: "There are other worlds outside the Ninja
World, and those worlds are just like our Ninja World, and Otsutsuki is the most
powerful clan in many other worlds.
They regard the world like our ninja world as a nursery, and each of us is a lamb
to be slaughtered in the eyes of the Otsutsuki clan. They rely on the power of the
sacred tree, the Ten-Tails, to be active in many worlds and harvest them... "
He Feng slowly explained the history of the Otsutsuki clan to Orochimaru. According
to He Feng's description, even the weakest Otsutsuki clan was stronger than what He
Feng was showing now. These words undoubtedly dismayed Orochimaru. Maru felt a
sense of urgency.
Of course, in addition to the sense of urgency, Orochimaru also coveted the genes
of the Otsutsuki clan.
He believed in He Feng from beginning to end, believing that even the Otsutsuki
clan would not be able to stop He Feng in the future.
Orochimaru smiled knowingly: "Hefeng, teacher will be by your side to support you
from beginning to end. Just feel free to do whatever you want to do, Konoha will
also be your biggest help."
――――
I can’t stand it anymore. I can’t stand it anymore!
From sitting on the chair at 12 noon until now.
Currently, there are still three chapters left to be updated.
Keep up the good work tomorrow!
You can send some love tips to Ah Shuang to remind you of the update.
The rule for adding more updates is that one update will be added for every 100
gifts worth.Chapter 92 Hokage Campaign (1)
"Kushina, which of these two pieces of clothing should I wear?" Namikaze Minato
asked his wife, holding a piece of clothing in one hand.
Kushina's belly was already showing her pregnancy at this time, and she found
another piece of clothing from the closet for Minato with a gentle look on her
face.
"Minato, let's wear this one. This one is more formal."
While Kushina was arranging Minato's clothes, she also said: "Minato, before this,
I have always believed that becoming Hokage is your dream, and it is also my dream,
and I firmly support you in running for Hokage.
But now I want to say yes, no matter whether you succeed in this election or not, I
will continue to support you, and our son also supports you like me. "
Namikaze Minato gently caressed Kushina's abdomen and said softly: "Kushina, I
understand what you want to say. Orochimaru-senpai and I are running for Hokage
just to put an end to our dreams. Can we become Hokage?" It doesn't matter to me.
I believe that if Orochimaru-senpai becomes Hokage, he will definitely lead Konoha
to become stronger. "
Kushina nodded. After having a child, she hoped that Minato could spend more time
with her instead of sitting in the Hokage building to deal with official duties.
At this moment, the door of Minato's house was opened, and a tall man wearing
wooden clogs walked in.
Jiraiya looked at Namikaze Minato, who was wearing formal clothes, and said,
"Minato, Kushina, how are the preparations? It's time for us to set off."
He has been traveling around the ninja world. During the Third Ninja War, Jiraiya
happened to be in the Bear Country, so he directly assisted in the battle there.
After the war, Jiraiya continued to collect materials and search for the Son of
Prophecy.
The reason why he returned to Konoha was because he heard the news that Namikaze
Minato and Orochimaru were running for the Fourth Hokage.
After all, one of the two is his close friend and the other is his disciple. If he
doesn't come back even for the two to run for the Fourth Hokage, it would be too
inappropriate.
Namikaze Minato nodded and said, "Get ready, Mr. Jiraiya, let's go."
Jiraiya smiled and said, "In the blink of an eye, Minato, you have grown so big
that you are about to run for Hokage."
Jiraiya has been running around all his life. In the early years, he came to Mount
Myoboku by accident. He learned the sage mode from the toads in Mount Myoboku, and
was able to meet the big toad sage, also known as Toadmaru, and learned from the
other party's mouth. He learned about the prophecy about the future of the ninja
world and firmly believed in it.
In order to find the son of the prophecy, Jiraiya successively accepted four
people, Nagato, Konan, Yahiko and Namikaze Minato as his disciples. However,
Gamamaru's prophecy prevented Jiraiya from staying in one place for a long time.
Therefore, even if Jiraiya has different feelings for Tsunade, they have been
hidden by him.
"But I didn't expect that guy Orochimaru would also run for Hokage. Minato, as my
apprentice, you can't lose to that guy."
Jiraiya was very surprised that Orochimaru could participate in the Hokage
election. Based on his understanding of Orochimaru, how could the position of
Hokage interest him.
Minato smiled and said: "There are many people who support Orochimaru-senpai. Even
Tsunade-senpai supports Orochimaru-senpai to become Hokage, so I may have
disappointed Mr. Jiraiya."
Jiraiya patted Namikaze Minato on the shoulder, "Minato, the teacher will not be
disappointed in you. You are my most proud disciple."
"..."
at the same time.
He Feng woke up from Tsunade's arms early, and he gently tried to get out.
"Hmm~ don't move, I haven't slept enough~" Tsunade closed her eyes and
subconsciously hugged He Feng, then adjusted her position and went to sleep.
"Sister Tsunade, today is the Hokage election between Orochimaru-sensei and Minato-
sensei. Wake up." He Feng had no choice but to wake up Tsunade.
Tsunade still had no intention of getting up. She muttered: "The Hokage election is
just an election. What does it mean to be a broken Hokage?"
He Feng was ashamed.
There is indeed nothing wrong with what Tsunade said. As the granddaughter of the
first Hokage Senju Hashirama and related to the current daimyo of the Fire Country,
she really does not care about the position of Hokage. Otherwise, as long as she
wants to be that Hokage, There's nothing wrong with Orochimaru and Minato.
"The daimyo will also come to this election. Sister Tsunade, it's better to be
there. When the time comes, sister Tsunade and the daimyo will have a few words to
ask for more funding for Konoha, right?"
Hearing this, Tsunade sat up suddenly. She looked at He Feng resentfully, stretched
out her hand and poked He Feng on the forehead.
"You, Orochimaru hasn't even become Hokage yet, and you're already benefiting her."
Tsunade complained unceremoniously about He Feng's behavior.
"Hehe~" He Feng rubbed the place where Tsunade had poked just now and smiled
sheepishly.
Tsunade did not lie down and continue sleeping. Instead, she got up with He Feng,
washed up, and changed into a set of relatively formal clothes.
Regardless of whether she likes this Hokage or not, the position of Hokage is
sacred in the hearts of most people in Konoha, and the fire country's daimyo will
personally participate in the Hokage election.
There is no harm in being relatively formal.
As for Hefeng, after he got up, Nohara Lin and Shizune who lived in other houses
gathered around him.
The He Feng at night belongs to Tsunade-sama, but the He Feng during the day is for
everyone.
Without asking for anything else, even if they stay by He Feng's side and do
nothing, as long as they can smell the smell emanating from He Feng's body, it is
enough for the two of them.Be in a good mood all day long.
He Feng also likes to stay with the two of them. At this time, only peers like
Zhiyin and Lin can make He Feng have the illusion that I am not that short after
all.
Soon, several people were ready and officially set off towards the central square
of Konoha.
It has the largest open space in Konoha and can accommodate many people, so it was
also chosen as the venue for the Hokage campaign.
In the past few days, both civilians and ninjas in Konoha are discussing the Hokage
election.
In their eyes, it doesn't matter who becomes Hokage, it's not their turn to be
Hokage anyway.
Nohara Lin stood next to He Feng and asked: "He Feng, do you think it is Lord
Orochimaru who can become Hokage, or senior Minato?"
He Feng turned to look at Nohara Lin, "Lin, why didn't you count Danzo-sama and
Fugaku-sama? They obviously also participated in the Hokage campaign."
Nohara Lin's big eyes blinked and she said in surprise: "Huh? I thought only
Orochimaru-sama and Minato-senpai were running for Hokage."
Shizune and Tsunade on the side couldn't hold back and laughed.
"Pfft~"
"It seems that Danzo Old Dog and Fugaku didn't do a good job in canvassing votes."
Tsunade sighed.

Chapter 93 Hokage Campaign (2)

The land of the Uchiha clan.
After Uchiha Fugaku decided to participate in the election of the Fourth Hokage,
the entire Uchiha clan, whether hawks or doves, fell into an atmosphere of choosing
who would be the Hokage.
The hawks are radical. They believe that the position of the Fourth Hokage belongs
to their clan leader, Uchiha Fugaku.
The dove faction is more conservative and believes that it is a bit conservative
for the Uchiha clan to only serve as the fourth generation Hokage. It is best that
the fifth generation Hokage position also belongs to their Uchiha clan.
In short, the Uchiha clan's desire for Naruto's position at the center of Konoha's
power has not been achieved overnight.
Senju and Uchiha are one of the two elders who founded the village of Konoha. The
Senju clan has already produced two Hokages, and the other Hokages are all
disciples of Senju Tobirama. There is no doubt that they are part of the Senju
faction.
And the Uchiha clan has been repeatedly marginalized by Konoha, which makes the
ninjas of the Uchiha clan feel very aggrieved. Obviously they are also ninjas of
Konoha, why do the people of Konoha, whether they are civilians or ninjas, feel
like seeing savage beasts when they see them? generally.
And this is also the source of the conflict between Uchiha and Konoha.
If possible, the Uchiha clan would not consider the coup. After all, if they really
wanted to rebel against Konoha, they would have left Konoha with Uchiha Madara
instead of betraying the clan leader at that time. Uchiha Madara.
This day is also the official date for the Hokage election.
In the early morning, before Fugaku could get up, Uchiha Setsuna, the elder of the
hawk sect, arrived at Fugaku's house early.
Knock knock——
Because Uchiha Mikoto is pregnant again, Fugaku has to be busy taking care of
Mikoto every day. Taking care of others is much more tiring than going into battle
to kill enemies, so Fugaku sleeps a little heavier.
With Uchiha Setsuna's knock on the door, Fugaku who was sleeping in the room had
not yet woken up, but Itachi woke up.
Itachi, wearing pajamas and still a little confused, opened the door and saw the
appearance of the person coming.
"Elder Setsuna, what's the matter?"
Itachi, who was only three years old, was still very cute, but Setsuna Uchiha had
no intention of talking to a three-year-old child.
Uchiha Setsuna asked: "Itachi, today is the Hokage election. Is Fugaku not awake
yet?"
Itachi nodded and said: "Well, father was busy very late yesterday and was still
sleeping.
Elder Setsuna, do you need me to call father? "
"Itachi, help me wake up Fugaku. I have something to talk to him about."
Itachi bowed his head obediently and responded: "Okay."
Uchiha Setsuna didn't wait for long, Fugaku came to him fully dressed.
"Elder Setsuna, if you have anything to say, please go outside and talk." Fugaku
extended his hand to indicate.
Uchiha shook his head for a moment, "No, Fugaku, I'll just say a few words and then
I'll leave."
Setsuna Uchiha's expression was a little excited, and Fugaku couldn't refute this
elder who was so old that he didn't know when he would die, so he nodded in
agreement.
"Fugaku, it has been fifty years since Konoha established the village. I have been
following the Madara clan leader since before Konoha was established. At that time,
the Madara clan clan leader just wanted a position as Hokage to display his
ambitions, but there was no one from the Senju clan to backstab him. Lost from the
election.
In the past fifty years, you are the second Uchiha tribesman to participate in the
Hokage election besides the Madara clan leader. You must not give up easily.
The position of Hokage is no longer just your Hokage, it is also the Hokage of
Uchiha, and it is the obsession of all Uchiha people.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"Back then, I felt sorry for the Madara clan leader and did not follow him away. If
I died like this, the Madara clan clan leader would not forgive me. Do you
understand my heart, Fugaku..."
Uchiha Setsuna said a lot of things in one breath. When he finished saying these
words, he seemed to be much younger. This was what he had been holding back in his
heart, and he took this opportunity to say it out.
Fugaku was also a little surprised. When he was born, Uchiha Madara had already
lost to Senju Hashirama, so Fugaku's impression of Uchiha Madara only remained in
history and rumors.
Now that Uchiha Setsuna said this, he also had a deeper understanding of this elder
who usually fought with Konoha whenever he said something disagreeable..
If this old man wasn't so radical and stubborn, he would be pretty good.
At least better than the elders of the Hyuga clan.
"I know Elder Setsuna, and I have tried my best for the position of Hokage. Whether
I can be elected or not depends on God's will."
"..."
the other side.
In Orochimaru's laboratory.
Even though twelve o'clock was the date of the Hokage election, she still did her
research unhurriedly.
In his opinion, the importance of the position of Hokage is completely inferior to
the research she has done.
"Obito-kun, you can lie down. If nothing else happens, you will be able to obtain
Wood Release after injecting this reagent, and the power of Wood Release's blood
stains will also effectively alleviate the consumption of your Sharingan eye
power."
At this time, Orochimaru was wearing a purple gown, and his temperament was full of
softness. Even his voice and smile had lost the gloom of the past, and instead had
a bit more maternal glory.
Obito lay on the experimental bed under the guidance of Orochimaru. Orochimaru
personally rolled up Obito's sleeves. There was also the mark of the Flying Thunder
God left by He Feng on Obito's arm.
"Lord Orochimaru, I still have a question. If nothing happens, I will get the Wood
Release Bloodstain. What if there is an accident?"
Orochimaru smiled, "As long as I'm here, there will be no surprises."
After hearing this, Obito closed his eyes with peace of mind. When he was not on
guard against Orochimaru, Orochimaru easily used genjutsu to hypnotize Obito.
"Teacher Orochimaru! It's time for the Hokage election!" At this time, Anko, whose
figure had slowly grown, hurriedly ran down the passage above.
"Slow down..." Orochimaru wanted to remind Anko, but unexpectedly Anko had already
fallen to the ground one step ahead of Orochimaru.
 Snapped--
Hongdou covered her red forehead and murmured: "It hurts."
But soon, Anko reacted. She quickly came to Orochimaru, pulled Orochimaru's sleeve
and said: "Ah, Orochimaru-sensei! Stop doing experiments. It's time to change
clothes and participate in the Hokage election." , this is your Hokage campaign!"
Orochimaru's hand touched Anko's forehead, and a green light flashed away.
"Eh? It doesn't hurt anymore! Orochimaru-sensei, you can also do medical ninjutsu!"
Orochimaru smiled and nodded, and asked: "Anko, where is Yamato? Why don't you see
him following you?"
"Yamato is behind, Orochimaru-sensei! Don't worry about Yamato anymore, you haven't
changed your clothes yet!"
"Teacher, just wear this. Anko, do you think that if teacher wears this, he will
lose the election for Hokage?"
"Of course not! Orochimaru-sensei can become Hokage even without wearing any
clothes!" Anko said without thinking.
At this moment, the speed of her mouth was far faster than the speed of her brain's
thinking.
When Orochimaru heard this, he gave Anko a hard blow, making Anko's forehead turn
red again.
"Ah! It hurts so much!"

Chapter 94 Hokage Campaign (3)

The Hokage Building.
At this time, Shimura Danzo and Sarutobi Hiruzen were sitting opposite each other
in the Hokage's office, with a cup of hot tea in front of them.
Sarutobi Hiruzen put down his cigarette rod, picked up the hot tea on the table and
took a sip.
"Danzo, you should know that you can't succeed in the election, why are you wasting
your efforts."
After so many years, Sarutobi Hiruzen already knew clearly about Shimura Danzo's
little thoughts, and also understood Danzo's unwillingness to not obtain the
position of Hokage, but Danzo should have understood it a long time ago.
The position of Hokage is reserved for young people. Even if the new Hokage is
elected, it will be selected among the younger generation, so how will Danzo get
his turn.
And even if Danzo gets his wish and becomes the Hokage, how many years will he be
able to be?
It would be better to go home and take care of the elderly and take care of the
children.
Danzo also showed a wry smile, and he said slowly: "Hiruzhan, I have been one step
behind you all my life. I have long been relieved to be one step behind you in
ninjutsu training, but I have been slowing you down in the matter of breaking up
the queen for the teacher." I can't let go of one step!
At that time, I also thought about ending my marriage for my teacher, but why did I
let you say it first? If I was the one who said that at that time, would the
position of Hokage belong to me?
Hiruzen, I am not willing to give in. "
After Sarutobi Hiruzen became the Hokage, the conversation between the two was no
longer as pure as before, and their actions began to move closer to power.
However, for some reason in the past few years, Danzo suddenly felt that he had
gone too far. Although he still coveted the position of Hokage, he was a little
more rational.
This is also the reason why Danzo can sit across from Sarutobi Hiruzen at this time
and have a heart-to-heart talk with Sarutobi Hiruzen.
"Hey." Sarutobi Hiruzen looked at Danzo's expression and sighed. The two have known
each other for more than forty years, and it is not an exaggeration to say that
they are the closest friends. After seeing Danzo's gesture, he also Somewhat sad.
After thinking again and again, Sarutobi Hiruzen said: "Danzo, regarding this
election of the Fourth Hokage, everything is open and transparent. I will not
interfere. As for whether you can succeed in the election, I don't know."
Hearing this, Shimura Danzo suddenly raised his head, "Ang, Hiruzen, thank you very
much. Then I should also prepare for the Hokage election at noon."
After Shimura Danzo left, Sarutobi Hiruzen called over the ANBU ninja.
He drank all the tea in the cup in one gulp, then picked up the cigarette rod, lit
it and put it in his mouth. After taking a long puff of cigarette, Sarutobi Hiruzen
slowly spoke and asked:
"What are the preparations at the central square? The daimyo should have arrived in
Konoha by now."
The ANBU nodded and spoke concisely.: "Get ready, Hokage-sama, the daimyo has
arrived in Konoha and will be arriving at the Hokage Building soon."
Sarutobi Hiruzen stood up from his chair, came to the window of the office, and
looked outside, "Help me clear the table, thank you."
The ANBU very skillfully cleared up the messy desktop for Sarutobi Hiruzen, and at
the same time said: "This is what I should do, Hokage-sama."
Sarutobi Hiruzen shook his head and said: "No, as a Konoha ninja and an ANBU, there
is nothing you should do except protect Konoha. This is just something I left to
you, so I want to Thank you."
When the ANBU heard this, he also smiled and said: "Hokage-sama has many things to
deal with every day, and I am happy to share your worries."
Sarutobi Hiruzen didn't reply, he just stood in front of the window and scanned
Konoha.
This is the Konoha he loves, and the Konoha he must protect no matter what.
Today, he will complete the handover ceremony of Hokage as the third generation
Hokage.
"..."
Time passed slowly, and the central square of Konoha was surrounded by civilians
and ninjas who came to watch the Hokage campaign.
Most of these ninjas are ninjas from wealthy clans.
"Look, that group of people all have Uchiha fans on their clothes. Are they ninjas
from the Uchiha clan?"
"Yes, if I remember correctly, that is the emblem of the Uchiha clan. These Uchiha
clan members are so arrogant, and their expressions are so disturbing."
"Hey! You said it so loudly that you don't want your life. If the Uchiha clan hears
it, be careful that those Uchiha people from the Konoha Police Department will
arrest you and put you in jail."
"Yes, yes, my mouth really deserves a slap, it really deserves a slap."
Because of the existence of the Konoha Police Department, the civilians of Konoha
are more disgusted and afraid of the Uchiha clan.
After all, the Uchiha clan has its own pride. The police department rarely deals
with major matters, but more with small matters such as neighborhood disputes in
Konoha Village.
Anyone who has worked at the grassroots level knows that the more trivial matters
like this are, the more difficult they are to deal with and the easier it is to
offend people.
However, the Uchiha clan is not afraid of offending others. Over time, the
reputation of the Uchiha clan in Konoha Village has plummeted.
In addition to the Uchiha clan, there were also Hinata, Nara, Yamanaka, Akimichi,
Aburame, Sarutobi, Shimura and other ninja clans who were younger than the Uchiha
clan.
It is precisely these many ninja clans that have created the combat power of the
largest village in the Konoha ninja world.
Compared to the Uchiha clan, some of these ninja clans have little reputation in
the village, while others have a very good reputation.
Among them, the Nara and Akimichi clans have the best reputation.
The former accounts for 90% of Konoha's medicinal materials business, and it is
natural for someone to get sick without medicinal materials.
The latter has an extremely authoritative position in the barbecue industry. It is
no exaggeration to say that 80% of the people in Konoha Village have eaten
Akimichi's barbecue, and 80% of the people who have eaten Akimichi's barbecue, 100%
I will eat there a second time.
As time passed slowly, the Hokage, the Daimyo and Tsunade all appeared on the high
platform built in the square, with a chair behind them.
"It's Hokage-sama!"
"The Sandaime Hokage is here!"
"There is also the Daimyo-sama! The Daimyo-sama is here too!"
"That person must be Tsunade-sama! Tsunade-sama can actually sit with the Hokage
and Daimyo-sama, you are indeed Tsunade-sama!"
"Tsunade-sama is the Senju Princess of Konoha, and the daimyo is related to the
Senju clan."
The moment the three people appeared, most of the civilians in the square were a
little excited.
Although they live in Konoha, they rarely see the Hokage, and the daimyo has no
chance to see him.
Therefore, after seeing the two people appearing at the same time, these civilians
who were watching the excitement were so excited.
"Lord Daimyo, it seems that everyone in Konoha is very excited to see you."
Sarutobi Hiruzen said with a smile.
The daimyo on the side also laughed. Although he was used to hearing all kinds of
flattery, the same words were said differently by different people.
As Hokage, Hiruzen Sarutobi is theoretically in the same class as the daimyo.
The former is the leader of the largest violent organization in the Fire Country,
and the latter is in charge of the wealth and power of the Fire Country.
"Hahaha, I am also very excited to participate in the election of the Fourth
Hokage."
――――
This is the normal third update today, and the next one is the extra update owed by
Ashuang.

Chapter 95 Hokage Campaign (4)

"This Hokage election uses an electoral system. Every Konoha citizen, whether a
ninja or a civilian, has the right to vote. You can cast your vote for the
candidate you support for the Fourth Hokage.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

All votes will be put into the central box by ANBU. All votes will be open and
transparent. The deadline is 6pm today.
Next, I said no more and handed the screen to the four Hokage candidates. "
As Sarutobi Hiruzen finished speaking, Orochimaru, Namikaze Minato, Shimura Danzo
and Uchiha Fugaku instantly appeared on the high platform in ninja style.
And he himself sat on the chair behind the high platform with the daimyo and
Tsunade.
There are parasols set up on the side, and fruits and drinks are placed for
consumption.
After Orochimaru and others came to the high platform, someone told them about the
four people's achievements in order, andContribution to Konoha.
Contributions such as Namikaze Minato's ability to capture the Eight-Tailed
Jinchuuriki alive and Orochimaru's ability to bring the bloodstains of Wood Release
to Konoha will all be mentioned, making those present more intuitively aware of who
has done more for Konoha.
Although Sarutobi Hiruzen said that everyone in Konoha can participate in voting
for the Hokage election, only a few civilians actually voted, and the more people
who voted were ninjas from the major ninja clans.
And whoever can get more supporters from the ninja clan will be more likely to win
the position of Hokage.
After the four people introduced their achievements for Konoha, the remaining time
was left for the four people to give speeches and canvass votes.
However, Orochimaru was not very keen on giving speeches to canvass votes. She
silently took a step back and gave up her position to Namikaze Minato.
Namikaze Minato glanced at Orochimaru, and after getting the other party's signal,
he started his speech.
He said loudly:
"My name is Namikaze Minato, and I am a Konoha ninja from a civilian family. Ever
since I entered the ninja school, I have determined to become the Hokage of Konoha.
At that time, I hoped to lead Konoha with my own strength. Ye moves toward a more
prosperous future...
I worked tirelessly for this. When I grew up, I met my mentor in life. He was
Jiraiya, one of the three ninjas of Konoha. My mentor taught me what the way of
ninja is. , what is strong perseverance...
As long as there are flying wooden leaves, fire will continue to grow. This fire
will continue to illuminate the village and make new leaves sprout, I have always
believed so.
……”
Namikaze Minato stood on the high platform and talked eloquently, from his birth to
apprenticeship, from apprenticeship to his own ninja and understanding, and from
understanding to the will of fire.
Obviously Namikaze Minato was not unprepared.
Below, Uzumaki Kushina waved her fist excitedly, and she celebrated as quietly as
possible: "Yes Minato, that's it!"
Jiraiya on the side nodded subconsciously, but his eyes always fell on Orochimaru.
He has never seen Orochimaru since he returned to Konoha, and he has no idea what
happened to Orochimaru.
"That guy Orochimaru turned into a woman." Jiraiya was extremely sure of
Orochimaru's gender at this moment.
This is all due to the countless experiences he has gained from being a master.
Jiraiya can identify a woman's three-dimensional height, weight and other factors
just by relying on his eyesight.
But the more this happened, the more outrageous he felt.
Jiraiya was completely unable to accept the fact that his best friend Orochimaru
had physically turned into a woman.
The speech canvassing above continued, but the speaker was changed from Namikaze
Minato to Uchiha Fugaku.
Uchiha Fugaku's voice is much lower than that of Namikaze Minato, which has a lot
to do with their origins.
As a civilian ninja, Namikaze Minato is naturally more likely to gain the favor of
others than Uchiha Fugaku, who is an Uchiha clan member.
On this basis, not to mention that Namikaze Minato's image itself is tolerant,
kind-hearted, and sunny.
Uchiha Fugaku and Shimura Danzo cannot compare with Namikaze Minato in terms of
appearance alone.
"..."
Soon, the speeches of Uchiha Fugaku and Shimura Danzo ended, and everyone present
focused their attention on Orochimaru.
Orochimaru was not good at dealing with this kind of scene. It happened that
Orochimaru saw He Feng below, and an idea immediately came to her mind.
She had said a few years ago that she would punish He Feng for leaving without
saying goodbye. As for the content of the punishment, she had never thought about
it, so she put it aside. But this time Orochimaru had thought about it.
"Ahem, I believe you are also very curious about me. Obviously the Sannin
Orochimaru in the story is a male, why is the person standing in front of you now a
female? There are many stories in this. I can't explain it clearly in a few words,
so I will Disciple He Feng will tell you.
As for who He Feng is, I believe everyone in Konoha is familiar with it. I believe
everyone is more willing to listen to He Feng than to listen to me telling stories.
"
As expected, after hearing that He Feng was Orochimaru's disciple, the civilians
and some ninjas who were originally a little uninterested became interested.
They all looked forward to it.
Obviously, Hefeng has done a good job in harvesting favorability points over the
years.
Hefeng was also a little helpless. At Orochimaru's signal, he came to the high
platform with a teleportation technique.
His good looks and impeccable temperament immediately won the favor of everyone
present, and his favorable impression of Orochimaru doubled.
The daimyo behind also noticed He Feng. He pointed at He Feng's figure and asked
Tsunade, "Xiao Tsunade, who is this ninja?"
Tsunade smiled knowingly, "Uncle Gantian, Hefeng is my younger brother and the
biggest contributor to Konoha's victory in the Third Ninja War."
The daimyo nodded and did not study He Feng's life experience in detail.
After Hefeng came on stage, he glanced at Orochimaru with a resentful look, but
Orochimaru smiled back.
He said calmly: "As Teacher Orochimaru said, her original gender was male, but at
this time she became female from the inside out.
This is mainly due to Teacher Orochimaru's human cloning technology. Teacher
Orochimaru can clone human body gene fragments.
With this technology, the first beneficiaries are the disabled and wounded people
in Konoha. Through the combination of limb cloning and medical ninjutsu, it is
possible to regenerate severed limbs. "
At this moment, He Feng’s simple words fell on the crowd likeThunder broke out from
the ground, making everyone's eyes brighten.
The number of ninjas who retired due to injuries on the battlefield was much higher
than the number of ninjas who died. A large number of these injured ninjas had
missing limbs and were completely away from the ninja career.
With the amputated limb regeneration technology that He Feng mentioned, their
future is no longer gloomy and has new possibilities.
He Feng continued to say a lot of good things for Orochimaru. After He Feng's
actions, Orochimaru's position as Hokage was also guaranteed.

Chapter 96 Naruto Orochimaru

After everyone has finished their speeches and canvassing votes, the voting phase
officially begins.
Everyone can come forward to vote by register.
And Hefeng was the first to step forward and cast his vote for Orochimaru.
Namikaze Minato is a good Hokage, but he is not a good husband or father. This time
He Feng hopes that he will be a good husband and not be bound by the Hokage's
responsibilities.
In the blink of an eye, the time came to six o'clock in the evening.
The campaign lasted for six hours in total, and Sarutobi Hiruzen and Tsunade sat
there chatting with the daimyo for six hours.
In fact, the Daimyo of the Land of Fire is not a drunkard. These six hours of
sitting have no impact on the Daimyo. Later, Tsunade was a little tired of
chatting. Instead, the Daimyo asked Tsunade as an elder. Parents are short-sighted.
After learning that Tsunade had someone he liked, the Daimyo also said that he
would give them a big red envelope when they get married in the future.
As for more detailed questions, such as who the person she likes is, Tsunade did
not tell the daimyo.
When the voting closed, Hiruzen Sarutobi stood up from his chair and came to the
box containing the ballots.
"Next, I will be the one to vote, while Tsunade-nin will record and the daimyo will
supervise." Hiruzen Sarutobi opened the box and took out a note.
"Namikaze Minato."
Tsunade took out a black pen and drew a stroke in front of Namikaze Minato's name
on the big white board.
The daimyo sat on the chair with great interest and watched and supervised.
"Orochimaru."
"Namikaze Minato."
"Orochimaru."
"Shimura Danzo."
"Uchiha Fugaku."
Sarutobi Hiruzen kept reading the name written on the note. On the large whiteboard
beside him, there were orthographic characters appearing one after another behind
the corresponding names.
Orochimaru and Namikaze Minato were able to ride on top of each other.
Danzo also had a lot of votes, at least he was able to win over Uchiha Fugaku, but
compared to Orochimaru and Namikaze Minato, it was still a bit unsatisfactory.
And later on, Orochimaru's vote also widened the gap with Namikaze Minato.
After all, the regeneration of severed limbs proposed by He Feng was too
exaggerated, which would be extremely tempting to anyone.
Even if it was just for the regeneration of severed limbs, they would vote for
Orochimaru.
Soon, only the last note was left in the box in front of Sarutobi Hiruzen, and the
gap on the whiteboard behind him was already obvious.
"Uchiha Fugaku."
With the addition of Uchiha Fugaku's name, this Hokage campaign has officially come
to an end.
"This Hokage campaign is officially over. Orochimaru has successfully campaigned to
become the Fourth Hokage. The official Hokage handover ceremony will begin in a
week." Hiruzen Sarutobi conveyed his voice clearly to everyone present through
chakra blessing. people.
After receiving the news that the Hokage election was over, the Konoha villagers
who were watching the excitement also returned to their homes one after another.
After watching the excitement all afternoon, I felt hungry and went home for
dinner.
"Daimyo, please stay in Konoha for these seven days. I will show you the
characteristics of Konoha."
"This will trouble the Hokage."
……
After the Hokage election ended, Jiraiya came to Namikaze Minato immediately and
wanted to comfort Minato who failed in the election.
Minato stretched out his hand to stop Jiraiya. He said calmly: "Teacher Jiraiya, I
am not that fragile. The purpose of senior Orochimaru and I is to contribute our
strength to Konoha. Who will be the Hokage for Konoha?" It’s all good.”
Hearing this, Jiraiya also laughed and said: "I am too worried.
As everyone is here today, how about I treat you to a barbecue. "
Jiraiya said to the people around him.
Everyone present was very familiar with each other and got along very well. Jiraiya
rarely returned to Konoha, so naturally he would not miss such an opportunity to
get together.
"Jiraiya, I didn't expect you to be so generous now." Tsunade couldn't help but
praise when he heard that Jiraiya wanted to treat him.
"Haha, it's not easy for us and the children to get together. It doesn't matter if
I bleed once." Jiraiya is very open-minded. Money is just a string of numbers to
him. If you have it, it will be beneficial. Some, if not, save some.
If he hesitates because of money issues, that's not his character.
With a smile on his face, Orochimaru looked at Jiraiya and asked, "Jiraiya, have
you found your prophesied son?"
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"In my opinion, Minato is the son of prophecy who brought peace to the ninja world,
or maybe each of us is the son of prophecy, but what we do is different."
Jiraiya did not respond directly to Orochimaru. After all, even he himself did not
know whether he had found the son of prophecy mentioned by the great toad immortal.
At first he thought Nagato, who had immortal eyes, was the son of prophecy, and
later he believed that Namikaze Minato, who was born as a commoner but was
extremely talented, was the child of prophecy.
But he couldn't be sure, so Jiraiya did not choose to stop, but continued to be a
prodigal son in the ninja world, looking for the unknown son of the prophecy.
He will not stay long when he returns to the village this time. He will leave only
after Orochimaru officially becomes the Fourth Hokage.
"Haha." Orochimaru smiled and did not refute Jiraiya.
"But then again, why did Orochimaru behave like a man and turned around to become a
woman? You are becoming more and more perverted."
Jiraiya is completely unable to understand Orochimaru's behavior. In his opinion,
being a man is ten thousand times happier than being a woman, in every sense of the
word.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
"I'm just trying to change perspectives in my constant pursuit of the truth. Skin
is not important to me." Orochimaru shook her head. She didn't think it was such a
perversion to become a woman.
"But speaking of perverts, Jiraiya, you are the real pervert, right? I remember you
were almost punched to death by Tsunade before." Orochimaru said venomously.
Obviously, Orochimaru, who has been a genius since he was a child, has always
suppressed Jiraiya. Even today, he has to suppress Jiraiya even if he is chatting.
Jiraiya glanced at Tsunade and found that Tsunade was holding He Feng's hand and
talking and laughing with He Feng. There were two little girls following He Feng
inseparably.
Seeing that Tsunade didn't notice him, Jiraiya lowered his voice and said to
Orochimaru: "What I call drawing material, do you understand drawing material? How
can an artist be described as a pervert?"
Orochimaru was speechless. She just hoped that Jiraiya would not use it on her in
the future, otherwise she might beat Jiraiya half to death like Tsunade did.
Jiraiya seemed to have telepathy with Orochimaru, and glanced at Orochimaru with
disdain: "I won't take materials from you! My choices are all girls with excellent
figures, not you... .”
With that said, Jiraiya was about to criticize Orochimaru's shortcomings, but after
careful observation, he found that Orochimaru's body was indeed not bad.
Jiraiya shook his head violently. At this time, he happened to arrive at the
entrance of the Akimichi clan's barbecue restaurant. He walked directly in and said
to the boss of the Akimichi clan: "Boss, come to the largest box. There are many of
us."

Chapter 97 Xiao Hefeng, don’t think too much

Seven days passed by in a flash, and it was also the day when Sarutobi Hiruzen and
Orochimaru officially handed over to the Fourth Hokage.
The Hokage handover ceremony was more lively than the election ceremony. The fact
that the Sannin Orochimaru became the Fourth Hokage and that Orochimaru mastered
the technology of regenerating severed limbs was also a topic that the entire
village talked about.
On this day, Orochimaru rarely wore formal clothes instead of the coat he wore when
doing experiments.
On top of the Hokage Building, stood Sarutobi Hiruzen, the Fire Country Daimyo and
Orochimaru.
As the Third Hokage, Sarutobi Hiruzen spoke first, telling the people below who
came to watch the ceremony about Konoha's hardships for so many years and how
difficult it was to win the Third Ninja War. When Sarutobi Hiruzen fell in love
deeply, I even squeezed out a few tears.
For him, relinquishing the position of Sandaime Hokage is a relief, but it is also
a kind of reluctance.
After all, he has been in this position for more than twenty years and has long had
feelings.
But even if Sarutobi Hiruzen tried his best, he could only tell the Hokage's
location.
"Orochimaru, from today on, you are the Fourth Hokage of Konoha, please remember.
It is not that becoming Hokage will lead to everyone's approval, but that one can
become Hokage only after getting everyone's approval. The position of Hokage is
jointly elected by everyone in Konoha. Since you accept this identity, you must
serve everyone in Konoha. Do something beneficial. "
While Sarutobi Hiruzen explained the Hokage's responsibilities to Orochimaru
earnestly, he put on Orochimaru the Yondaime God's robe and Hokage hat that were
made within seven days.
At this moment, looking at Orochimaru wearing the Hokage's robe and the Hokage's
hat, Hiruzen Sarutobi had a lot of thoughts in his mind.
Orochimaru was the disciple he had watched grow up, and he was also the one he was
most proud of among his three disciples.
"Teacher, I must live up to the reputation of the Hokage." Orochimaru nodded to
Sarutobi Hiruzen, and then looked down the Hokage building.

）
As the handover between the two generations of Hokage ended, the Konoha ninjas and
civilians who came to watch the ceremony below the Hokage Building all applauded.
"..."
On the day Orochimaru became the Fourth Hokage, Konoha's craftsmen started building
Hokage Rock according to Orochimaru's image at that time.
And he himself, after becoming Hokage, did not go to the Hokage's office to work,
but once again plunged into his laboratory.
Various Hokage government affairs were handed over to Nara Shikaku by Orochimaru.
If there is anyone in Konoha whose brain Orochimaru trusts the most, then it must
be Nara Shikaku, the current leader of the Nara clan.
After the Hokage handover ceremony, Hefeng, Kakashi and Obito planned to officially
go to the United Kingdom of Ninja World the next day to carry out their Jonin
promotion mission.
That night.
In the hot springs of the Thousand Hands Clan.
At this time, Tsunade was sitting on the edge of the hot spring, her little feet as
tender as white jade were soaked in the hot spring, and she was only wearing a bath
towel around her body.
He Feng was soaking in the hot spring, his big watery eyes exposed above the water.
Although he and TsunadeHowever, sleeping in the same bed every night, logically
speaking, He Feng should have adapted to it long ago. However, He Feng's physique
did not allow him to say that he would adapt to the relationship between men and
women.
For Tsunade, every time she comes into contact with He Feng is a process of
enduring the temptation and tempering her will.
The same is true for He Feng. The succubus itself is a more chaotic existence than
the dragons. As the shame of the succubus, He Feng has always firmly maintained his
bottom line and has not allowed himself to be controlled by his physique. Fallen.
But Tsunade became more and more bold in teasing He Feng.
Today, He Feng was forced to take a bath in the hot spring on the grounds that He
Feng had to go on a long-term mission and could not meet again for a short time.
Although Hefeng had the strength to say no to Tsunade's tough behavior, how could
he have the heart to reject his sister Tsunade.
In this way, the two of them have maintained this awkward posture for half an hour.
Plop——
At this moment, a sound of water splashing came from behind He Feng.
He Feng's heart tightened. He was nervous about unknown things, but also looked
forward to unknown things happening.
However, the hug He Feng expected did not happen. Tsunade just sat on the edge of
the hot spring, picked up the drink on the side and drank heavily.
He Feng lowered his head and glanced at the steaming hot spring, then turned around
silently.
He whispered softly: "Tsunade-sister..."
Tsunade raised her wine glass to He Feng, her open-mindedness clearly revealed. She
smiled and said: "Little He Feng, don't think too much~"
"..."
The next day.
Under Tsunade's reluctant gaze, He Feng resolutely got out of her arms.
At the same time, He Feng was still mumbling: "Don't think too much about it.
Sister Tsunade is just pretending in the end."
In fact, the rain and wind did not happen, but the wind and rain did not escape.
"He Feng, come back safely." Tsunade sat up from the bed and said gently.
Hefeng nodded and said, "Don't worry, Sister Tsunade, don't you know my strength
yet?"
Soon, Hefeng Kakashi and Obito completed their gathering at the gate of Konoha.
But what surprised He Feng was that the three of them were not the only ones
gathered, Jiraiya also joined them.
"I heard from the old man that your three Jonin promotion tasks are to investigate
the United Kingdom of Ninja World. It just so happens that my next goal is also
there. I, Jiraiya, the Toad Sage of Mount Myoboku, will accompany you three little
guys. Guys just have fun.”
Jiraiya pinched his waist and laughed.
This is not the first time he has investigated the United Kingdom of Ninja World,
but every time before he returned without success and could not find any useful
information at all.
Every time Jiraiya catches any clue about the leader of the United Ninja Kingdom,
he will be led away by all the inexplicable coincidences. If he wants to continue
the investigation, he will have to start from scratch.
His sixth sense was very good. During the investigation, he vaguely felt that there
was a sense of crisis in the United Ninja World. Therefore, when he heard that the
Jonin promotion mission of He Feng and the others was to investigate the United
Ninja World, Jiraiya decided to follow him. The three of them went together to
ensure their safety and there would be no accidents.
After all, the relationship between the three He Feng and him is not bad.
From a teacher-student perspective, the three of them were students of Namikaze
Minato.
From the perspective of master and apprentice, Kakashi is his disciple and the new
generation successor of Miaomu Mountain.
In terms of relationship, He Feng is the apprentice of his close friend Orochimaru,
and Orochimaru's apprentice is his apprentice.
Obito's words...are Jiraiya's personal appreciation for his innocent heart.
In short, Jiraiya simply didn't trust the three of them to investigate the United
Ninja Kingdom, even though the three of them were not weak.

Chapter 98 Teacher Dai

The United Kingdom of Ninja World.
The original Daming Mansion of the Kingdom of Rain is now the palace of the King of
the United Kingdom.
This is said to be a palace of a kingdom, but it is actually not wealthy. Even
after Yahiko replaced the daimyo, he sold most of the daimyo's property and used it
for post-war reconstruction within the kingdom and basic protection for the
civilians.
In front of the desk, Yahiko held a pen in his hand and kept writing on a piece of
paper. There was a pile of letters neatly placed beside him.
This is the letter written by Senior Feng. The letter at the top begins with the
sixteen-character policy of emancipating the mind, ensuring people's livelihood,
directing production, and patiently uniting the people.
Yahiko followed all policies regarding the United Kingdom of Ninja World in
accordance with this sixteen-character policy, and the results were not what Yahiko
expected.
The reputation of the United Ninja Kingdom is getting better and better, and more
and more people are willing to leave their homes to join the United Kingdom.
At this moment, a figure of 1.77 meters tall, wearing a black windbreaker
embroidered with red clouds and a 'zero' ring appeared behind Yahiko.
Without turning around, Yahiko asked, "Penn, what happened again?"
Tendo Payne, who was created from the corpse of Sanshouyu Hanzo, said coldly:
"Jiraiya-sensei is here again."
Yahiko sighed helplessly: "Jiraiya-sensei still doesn't give up, obviously we just
want to develop peacefully now.
Should I say that Jiraiya-sensei is worthy of being a great ninja? How arrogant. "
"Penn, just continue to guide Teacher Jiraiya as we were arranged before. If
necessary, you can take action to ensure the safety of the people of our kingdom."
Although Yahiko was only 17 years old at this time, his experience from childhood
to adulthood made him extremely mature. In addition, he had been exposed to Hefeng
in the past few years and had learned from himThe red thoughts made Yahiko more
sophisticated in his thinking.
When he saw that Payne did not leave as before, Yahiko put down the pen in his hand
with some doubts and turned his head to look at him.
The moment Yahiko turned his head, Nagato controlled Tiandao and said: "Teacher
Jiraiya is accompanied by three Konoha ninjas, and those ninjas are relatively
young.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

There is a person among them whose temperament is very similar to Senior Feng, and
I am a little unsure. "
"!" After hearing the words "Senior Feng", Yahiko's eyes widened and he stood up
from the chair.
"Nagato, are you telling the truth? That person's temperament really looks like
Senior Feng?!" After exchanging letters in the past few years, Yahiko has already
regarded He Feng as his mentor of truth, and he has deep feelings for He Feng in
his heart. The respect is not weaker than Xiao Nan's love for He Feng.
Therefore, after hearing the news about Senior Youfeng, he was so surprised that he
subconsciously changed the name of Tiandao from Pain to Nagato.
Payne nodded and said: "Although I don't know what Senior Feng looks like, I am
very impressed by Senior Feng's temperament. I can't go wrong."
After receiving Nagato's affirmative answer, Yahiko paced back and forth excitedly,
muttering to himself: "Yes, Senior Feng called himself Uchiha Feng, and the Uchiha
clan happened to appear in Konoha, and Teacher Jiraiya was Uchiha Feng." Ye Ninja.
By the way, Nagato, what does Feng-senpai look like? Isn't it very majestic? "
Although He Feng is much shorter than Ya Yan, He Feng often used the airs of his
seniors during the time they spent together with Ya Yan and others. Coupled with He
Feng's educational words when exchanging letters, it was easy to Let Yayan recall
He Feng's tone when he educated him.
Therefore, He Feng's image in Yahiko's eyes is majestic from beginning to end.
"..." When Nagato heard this, he didn't know how to reply for a moment.
Is Senior Feng majestic?
He obviously feels that Senior Feng is quite cute...
Nagato's body shook his head violently, shaking off the strange thoughts in his
heart.
"Let's go see Konan first. Let's talk to Konan about this first." Nagato's body
walked out of the palace.
"Well, let's talk to Xiaonan first. If Senior Feng comes to see us, she will be
very happy."
……
Yuyin Village.
"One, two, one, one, two, one, one, two, one! Follow my footsteps and run! Don't
stop, hold on! Long live youth!" Matt Dai's melodious voice came from the streets
of Yuyin Village.
"Yes, Teacher Dai!" Several crisp and childish voices sounded from behind Matt Dai,
and the children in Yuyin Village were gritting their teeth to keep up with Matt
Dai.
Not everyone in this world is suitable to be a ninja. There are also people who
have low talent for ninjutsu or are born unable to learn ninjutsu. There are such
children in Konoha and also in Amegakure Village.
With the power of Nagato's Six Paths and the fusion with Bai Zetsu, Matt Dai was
successfully revived after using the Death Gate.
It's just that the meridians in his body have become extremely fragile, and he
can't even open the first door of the Eight Gates Dunjia.
However, Matt Dai did not give up. Instead, in order to repay Yuyin Village for
saving his life, he began to lead some children in Yuyin Village who were unwilling
to be ordinary to exercise.
As a blessing in disguise, although Matedai lost the possibility of using the Eight
Gate Dunjia again, with the fusion of Bai Jue, Matedai also gained the power of the
Wooden Armor.
After running for about half an hour, Matt Dai stopped in his tracks.
He looked back at the children who were following him with gritted teeth.
Although Matt Dai slowed down the pace, these children were still young after all,
and they were already out of breath and unable to continue exercising.
"Okay, that's it for today's physical training. Remember to relax after training to
avoid being out of shape the next day." Matt Dai used his own experience to warn
the children.
At this moment, a plump and beautiful woman wearing a kimono appeared behind the
training team.
She said to the crowd: "Fragrant phosphorus."
Among the crowd, a child with red hair and the smallest body suddenly turned his
head, and then ran quickly in the direction of Uzumaki Kana.
"Mother!"
Kaoru was held in Uzumaki Kana's arms.
"Our little ninja, is it hard to train?" Uzumaki Kana scratched her little nose
with her hand and asked softly.
Xiang Ling raised her little hands and said excitedly: "Of course it's not hard, I
want to be a ninja like Sister Angel to protect my mother!"
Uzumaki Kana was very pleased. She came to Matt Dai with her arms in her arms,
bowed slightly and said, "Our family has trouble with Teacher Dai."
Matt Dai had never been treated like this in all his decades of life. He
immediately took two steps back in embarrassment and said repeatedly: "I have no
choice but to do it. I am just repaying Yuyin Village for treating me by taking the
children of Yuyin Village to exercise." His life-saving grace is nothing."
Uzumaki Kana smiled and continued: "Teacher Dai, Master Yukage has something to do
and I hope you can go there."

Chapter 99 Xiaonan’s thoughts

The central tower, in Yuyin's office.
Uzumaki Kana was standing quietly next to Konan Amegakure's desk, holding Kaoru in
her arms.
Xiang Phosphorus is neither noisy nor fussy, and her quiet look is really cute,
just like a porcelain doll.
Xiao Nan wears a royal robe and wears a ring with a 'white' mark on the middle
finger of her right hand.
"Mr. Dai,I'm mainly asking you about some things this time. I won't ask you about
Konoha's secrets. You don't need to worry too much. "
At this time, Matt Dai was more embarrassed than worried. He just stood there
stiffly, not knowing what to say for a while.
Dai spent the first half of his life completing tasks as a genin, and even the
people he met socially were not big shots.
Although the ordinary Dai admires the Hokage, he has almost no dialogue with
Sarutobi Hiruzen, who is the Hokage.
For Matt Dai, Hefeng's father, Hatake Sakumo, was already the highest-status person
he had known in so many years.
Now, Yu Ying from Yuyin Village is officially calling him Mr. Dai, which makes him
very flattered.
Of course, Xiaonan's attitude towards Matt Dai was naturally due to He Feng. After
all, Bai Jue A Fei personally sent Matt Dai to Yuyin and named him as someone who
needed Nagato's treatment.
This time, when Xiaonan called Matt Dai over, she mainly wanted to ask Matt Dai for
news about Teacher Feng. After all, the other person was the person Teacher Feng
wanted to save, and his relationship with Teacher Feng should be good.
"Mr. Dai, do you know an Uchiha ninja who is about this tall, very gentle, has a
reassuring temperament and is powerful." Xiao Nan roughly gestured He Feng's height
and mentioned He Feng's height. The Uchiha identity made up by the wind.
Matt Dai was stunned. How could he know any ninja from the Uchiha clan?
He shook his head and said with certainty: "Lord Amekage, I don't know the ninjas
of the Uchiha clan, and in my impression there is no Uchiha ninja that meets the
conditions you have proposed."
Xiaonan was stunned, that shouldn't be the case. Teacher Feng has an inexplicable
attraction to people even if he wears a mask. How could he be an unknown member?
And she has often observed Matt Dai's behavior in the past few years, and she is
very sure that Matt Dai is not the kind of person who can lie.
In other words, in Matt Dai's eyes, there is really no Uchiha clan in Konoha that
Teacher Zefeng matches.
Could it be that Teacher Feng is not actually from Konoha? Or maybe Teacher Feng
hid his Uchiha identity?
Xiaonan was making guesses in her mind.
She continued to ask: "What about the others? Is there any person that Senior Dai
knows who meets the conditions I mentioned."
Xiao Nan gestured at He Feng's approximate height again.
Dai did not reply to Xiao Nan immediately this time, but carefully recalled whether
there was anyone who matched the conditions Xiao Nan said.
"Well... he is not tall, has a gentle and reassuring temperament... and is also
very powerful." Matt Dai tried very hard to recall whether he knew such a person,
but he felt like his head was burning and he couldn't think about it. Find out who
meets this requirement.
Therefore, Matt Dai could only speak politely: "Lord Yuying, I don't seem to have
the conditions you mentioned among the people I know, but there are people who meet
some of them."
Hearing this, Xiao Nan, who was originally a little depressed, suddenly became
energetic and asked, "Mr. Dai, who is he?"
Matt Dai has been in Yuyin for several years, and he also knows Yu Ying Xiaonan's
character. Although she is usually very calm and composed, and her clothes give
people an air of being incompatible with me, but Matt Dai knows that Xiao Nan is
actually a good person.
"It's my son Metkai's friend, Hatake Hefeng."
After Matt Dai said this, he stood there quietly and watched Xiaonan's reaction.
If Xiaonan shows any reaction with hatred, he will risk his life to return to the
village and tell He Feng about it.
Matt Dai's nindo is to protect, and he also uses his actions to interpret his
nindo.
And Xiaonan's reaction also made Matt Dai breathe a sigh of relief.
I saw Xiao Nan's face full of excitement, but there was no trace of the usual
aloofness on her face.
"Hatake Hefeng...Uchiha Feng...Teacher Feng, since you don't come to me, then I can
only find you." Xiaonan's feelings for Hefeng can be said to be deeply involved,
and Hefeng Although she said she would come find her one day, she obviously
couldn't wait any longer.
"Mr. Dai, this matter is very useful to me. From now on, Yugakure will be Mr. Dai's
second home. The door of Yugakure will always be open to Mr. Dai. If Mr. Dai wants
to return to Konoha, I will also arrange for someone to take you there." Send it
back.”
Hearing this, Mattdale shook his head repeatedly, "I can't help it, Lord Yu Ying,
my life has been used to save my boy. This life was saved by Yu Yin, and I also
like Yu Yin's little boy very much." Guys, I’m honored to be a teacher to those
little guys.”
Xiaonan nodded, "In that case, I won't say anything more, but Mr. Dai, please do
not refuse the position of teacher at the Amegakure Ninja School."
"Lord Yuying, this is what I should do."
At this moment, a man with orange hair and a relatively delicate appearance
suddenly appeared in Yuying's office.
Seeing the figure of the visitor, there was no need for Xiaonan to speak, Uzumaki
Kana said first: "Mr. Dai, let me lead you to go through the entry procedures.
After all, Ninja School teachers are organized, and you can get your salary early
if you join the job one day earlier. One day’s wages.”
As Uzumaki Kana took Matt Dai away.
Xiaonan slowly said: "Penn, what happened?"
Beast Dao Payne did not reply, but formed a seal with his hands and then slapped it
on the ground.
"The art of channeling."
With the use of the psychic technique, Nagato and Yahiko walked out.
"Nagato, Yahiko! Why are you here?" Xiaonan was even more surprised, Yu Yin was
hiding in herThe leaders are prospering, so the two of them focus more on the
entire kingdom itself.
Therefore, the two of them will not come to Yuyin to look for her unless necessary.
"Jiraiya-sensei has come to the kingdom again, and this time he is accompanied by
three Konoha ninjas." Nagato spoke first.
"Senior Feng is very likely to be among those three. This time Senior Feng comes to
see us, I think it is necessary to tell you Xiaonan." Yahiko added.
The next second, Yahiko wanted to say something, but she saw that the angel wings
behind Xiaonan had spread out. She hurriedly said: "Teacher Feng is here, what are
you two waiting for? Come with me to see him!"

Chapter 100 Insights

Yahiko and Nagato had already expected Konan's reaction, so they weren't too
surprised.
Yahiko said: "Senior Feng did not ask A Fei to inform us, but came to the kingdom
with others, so I guess that Senior Feng does not want others to know his
relationship with us."
Nagato continued: "And this time, what Teacher Jiraiya and others did along the way
was not to explore the truth of the kingdom, but to go to one place after another
to see the current situation of the people of the kingdom."
Yahiko nodded, "According to Teacher Feng, the unification of the ninja world
cannot be accomplished overnight. What we need is to allow everyone in the kingdom,
both civilians and ninjas, to live a good life.
As long as the civilians of those big countries can see the lives of civilians in
our kingdom and create a comparison, the resistance to our next unification war
will be much smaller. "
Xiaonan suddenly realized and said: "So Teacher Feng is here to see how we are
doing and whether we have allowed the people of the kingdom to live a good life
under his guidance.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

If we do well, we don’t need to go to Teacher Feng. Teacher Feng will come back to
see us. "
"Yes, that's probably what it means." Nagato and Yahiko still agree with this point
of view.
"Then what are you two waiting for? Just do whatever you need to do."
"..."
……
On the other side, in an unknown small village in the Kingdom of Sichuan.
The three of Jiraiya were visiting an old lady's house. After the old lady noticed
the Konoha forehead protectors worn by He Feng and others, she originally planned
to report it to the village chief, but after seeing He Feng's lovely After the
cheek.
The old lady's whole heart melted, and she didn't have the slightest intention to
report it.
She directly and enthusiastically brought the four Hefeng people to her home and
cooked a meal for them with her own hands.
While eating the curry rice made by the old lady, Jiraiya and others also asked:
"Auntie, your village is quite rich, and you are so generous even in entertaining
guests like us."
The old lady laughed awkwardly and ignored Jiraiya.
He Feng raised his rice bowl and ate all the food in it. He gave a thumbs up to his
aunt: "The rice cooked by grandma is really delicious. Can you give me another
bowl?"
"Okay, children will grow taller if they eat more." The old lady took the rice bowl
handed over by He Feng with a smile, made a bowl of rice for him, and sat down next
to He Feng.
She stared at He Feng's face and said with some regret: "Old lady, my son,
daughter-in-law, and granddaughter all died in the war a few years ago. I am the
only one left in the family. Seeing the child, you make the old lady think a
little. They are.”
Hearing this, Jiraiya stopped picking up the rice.
The war a few years ago was not the Third Ninja War. Although the Third War was not
initiated by Konoha, Konoha was also a victim.
But compared with Konoha, the ordinary people in these small countries and villages
are the real victims.
The wheels of war rolled over them mercilessly, causing countless casualties.
Kakashi and Obito are also a little lonely. Although they have seen the cruelty of
war and their hands are stained with blood, sometimes the real cruelty is hidden in
those few words.
"Grandma." He Feng said softly.
"Hey!" After the old lady heard this voice, tears flowed out uncontrollably, and
she completely let down her guard against He Feng and others.
She said slowly: "I know you are the ninjas of Konoha Hidden Village. Konoha, a
year ago I thought Konoha was the happiest place. People born there will never
suffer accidents.
But things are different now. Even in a small village like ours, the king has not
given up on us. With the ninjas sent by the king to help, and with the help of the
ninjas in the fields in the village, we can do the original work in one day.
Something that can only be accomplished in a month.
The grain harvest has also been greatly improved.
In addition to the ninja masters, there are also gentlemen who come to teach the
young people in the village how to read and write. I have been waiting for this
kind of good life for more than fifty years, but my son and the others did not
wait. "
The old lady's age was not in vain. She had long seen that these ninjas from Konoha
had something to ask her.
And she, an ordinary commoner, had nothing to worry about. All she could think
about was what happened in the village.
After hearing what the old lady said, Jiraiya fell into deep thought.
What the old lady talked about was something that he had not investigated at all in
his previous investigations. This was also the first time that he truly understood
the lives of ordinary people in the United Ninja Kingdom.
Jiraiya has traveled to almost all countries in the ninja world, so he naturally
knows how important what the old lady said is.
Let ninjas help civilians with farming,This is a path that no one has imagined and
tried since the Warring States Period.
This is a leap from 0 to 1.
咚——
咚——
咚——
At this moment, a drum sound came from a distance.
Before Jiraiya could ask, the old lady took the initiative to explain: "This is the
sound of the start of the lecture hall. The three sounds of the drum mean that the
gentleman who came to the village is about to start giving lectures. The children
in the village must go and listen." , the words of an adult are not mandatory.”
"Let's help the aunt clear the table and clean the room by the way, and then go and
listen to this gentleman's class." Jiraiya saw that everyone had finished eating,
so he said.
The four people moved very quickly, cleaning the house extremely neatly.
The old lady felt warm in her heart when she looked at such a clean house.
She said to the four of them: "I know you are all good people. Not all ninjas are
bad people. Next time you come to the village, come visit me and I will cook for
you."
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
"Grandma, I'll come to see you next time." He Feng waved to the old lady.
"Grandma, so are we. We will also come to see you." Obito also waved his hand. He
has a natural affinity for older people.
"I will come too." Kakashi nodded, although he said very few words but was very
sincere.
Not long after walking, Jiraiya led Hefeng and the other three to the place where
the drums were sounding.
This is an open-air space. There is a podium in the middle of the space. A young
man who looks about thirty years old is standing in front of the podium. There are
rows and rows of small chairs in front of him.
Because the village is not that big, not all the children are sitting on those
small chairs, there are also some young people in the village.
When He Feng and others arrived, the lecture had not yet begun.
Therefore, after putting away their forehead protectors, the four of them picked a
chair and sat down in an orderly manner.
Although He Feng and the other four were strangers, the people in the village did
not have any hostility toward them. Instead, they looked seriously at the gentleman
standing behind the podium.
The other party was not even a ninja, just an ordinary person, but standing next to
him was a ninja wearing an Amegakure ninja forehead protector.
If Hefeng judged based on the amount of chakra, the opponent probably only had the
amount of chakra of a nasty chuunin.
As everyone on the other side finished sitting down, the gentleman took out a
handwritten booklet.
"Do you still remember the sixteen-character development policy of our kingdom?"
"Remember!" A child who didn't look very big raised his hand and said loudly.
"Jingtai, may I ask what the sixteen characters are."
"It is to emancipate the mind, protect people's livelihood, direct production and
endure the people in one!"

Chapter 101 Jiraiya’s shock

After hearing the sixteen-word policy, Jiraiya felt like he was hit hard, and he
felt like he was trying to catch something, but he didn't know exactly what he was
trying to catch.
At this moment, Jiraiya just wanted to sit here and listen to what this gentleman
had to say. As for investigating the United Ninja Kingdom, it was no longer so
important.
"A few days ago we talked about emancipating the mind and protecting people's
livelihood.
In this class, I will tell you what it means to lead production. "
The gentleman on the podium flipped the manuscript in his hand back and said
slowly:
"The King has said that material productivity is the final decisive force and the
most fundamental driving force for the development of human society.
"As for the leadership of production, we, as subjects, must unswervingly follow the
footsteps of His Majesty the King, implement the policies set by His Majesty the
King, make decisions, and implement decisions..."
The gentleman talked a lot, and Jiraiya became more and more fascinated as he
listened.
Although Kakashi and Obito can understand some, they can only understand some.
He Feng is completely different. He Feng is very familiar with what the gentleman
on the podium said.
Isn’t this the letter he sent to Yahiko!
The big principles he used to fool Yahiko when he was free were really summarized
and sorted out by him, and he delved into new things.
At this moment, Hefeng was very happy that he had saved Yahiko and chose Yahiko to
lead the United Ninja Kingdom instead of Nagato.
Yahiko seems to be born to do these things. He can rely on his passion to develop
the Akatsuki organization to a point where even Hanzo, the demigod of the ninja
world, would be afraid.
This is enough to prove Yahiko's ability.
The village where He Feng is now is just a very inconspicuous small village in the
country of Yuanchuan. It is the kind of village that even wandering ninjas would
dislike at a glance.
Under the leadership of Yahiko's policies, such villages began to glow with
vitality.
He Feng was very satisfied.
According to such a development process, within two years the Akatsuki organization
will no longer be dormant and can show its fangs to the ninja world.
At that time, the general trend will be upon the Akatsuki organization.
It’s just that Hei Baojie doesn’t know where to hide and is thinking about bad
things, which makes He Feng a little worried.
After all, if the sixth child really wanted to hide, even He Feng wouldn't be able
to find him.
Of course, it is not impossible if Hei Zetsu hides all the time. With Orochimaru as
his backing, He Feng is not afraid of competing with Hei Zetsu to survive longer.
"Today's class will end here for the time being. When students go back, they can
also think and summarize what was taught in today's class. If they have any ideas,
they can communicate with me the next day.
If the idea is good, I can do it tooReporting to the superiors, if it can be
conveyed to the ears of the King, it will truly benefit thousands of people. "
咚——
咚——
咚——
The chuunin picked up the drum stick and beat the big drum three times.
The muffled sound of the drums spread throughout the village.
As the get out of class ended, the villagers also went home and worked.
The children began to play together.
As civilians, they originally needed to help their families with farming, but with
the help of the ninja-sama, the productivity of the villagers was liberated, and
the children in the village no longer needed help.
"Jiraiya-sama." The chuunin appeared next to Jiraiya, bowed to Jiraiya, and said
softly.
Jiraiya was stunned for a moment, then squinted his eyes and looked at the other
person. After confirming that he had never seen the other person before, he asked
aloud: "Who are you? I should have never seen you before."
The chuunin was not surprised. He said calmly: "Jiraiya-sama, the name of the three
ninjas is known to everyone in the ninja world, and I am just a small role.
Jiraiya-sama doesn't know that I am very important." normal.
My name is Furumi Nisei, and I am just an ordinary chuunin in Amegakure Village. "
Jiraiya frowned and asked, "Did you come to me for something? Or is it that I, as a
Konoha ninja, cannot listen to what you are talking about."
At this time, the lecturer also came over. He grabbed Furumi Hitoshi who was about
to speak, and then said with a smile: "Of course not. Hello, Jiraiya-sama. My name
is Nishishikai Tou." .
--------------------xxxx--------------------

The king's heart cares for everyone in the ninja world. The king's ideas should be
spread throughout the ninja world, which will bring new changes to the ninja world.
"
With that said, the gentleman directly handed his manuscript to Jiraiya.
"Sannin-sama, I know that you have great doubts about the King's policies, so I
will give this item to you so that you can better understand the greatness of the
King.
He really works hard for everyone in the ninja world wholeheartedly. "
Jiraiya took the manuscript handed over to him and asked, "Can you tell me about
your king?"
Nishi Aoi Kaito smiled, his eyes full of respect and enthusiasm as he responded:
"Of course, King Yahiko's achievements are worth remembering by all of us."
"!!!"
Jiraiya's eyes widened, as if he heard something incredible.
"Who did you say your king was?!" Jiraiya had no idea that the person he wanted to
find was his disciple Yahiko.
"Jiraiya-sama, although you are a Sannin, please don't speak rudely to King Yahiko.
Otherwise, even if you risk your life, you will have to argue with Jiraiya-sama."
Having said this, both Nishi Aoi Kaito and Furumi Nisei looked at Jiraiya with
hostility, as if they were ready to fight Jiraiya at any time.
Even with their strength, they couldn't even touch Jiraiya.
Jiraiya did not expect that the other party had such a fanatical belief in Yahiko,
so he also changed his tone, "I think you have misunderstood. The reason why I was
shocked is because Yahiko is my disciple."
Upon hearing this, the two of them did not show the clarity Jiraiya expected, but
still looked at him warily.
Nishi Qinghai Dou said: "Jiraiya-sama, this joke is not funny. If King Yahiko is
your disciple, why don't you know the news about King Yahiko?"
Furumi Nisei nodded and took out a kunai from his ninja bag.
That is to say, at the moment when Furumi Nisei took out the kunai, Kakashi and
Obito instantly appeared behind the two of them, holding the short sword and kunai
at their necks respectively.
The friendliness of Kakashi and Obito is towards their companions. In the eyes of
their enemies, the two of them are absolute gods of death.
"Kakashi-nii, Obito, they are not enemies." Hefeng stopped the two of them,
"Teacher Orochimaru told me that Jiraiya-senpai had three apprentices in the
Amegakure Village. , one of them should be King Yahiko as they call him."

Chapter 102 So beautiful

After hearing He Feng's words, Kakashi and Obito looked at each other, and then put
down their weapons.
It is not surprising that the two reacted this way. After all, the other party had
already become overly emotional and raised his weapon.
Ninjas are all about high offense and low defense. Even a ninja like Kakashi with
the strength of an elite jounin may be killed by a sneak attack by a genin holding
a kunai without defense.
Not everyone is Senju Hashirama, who has the ability to heal without seals and is
almost impossible to kill even in war.
"Now can you tell me about your King Yahiko? You should know that I don't mean any
harm." Jiraiya sighed and said to the civilian named Nishi Aoi Kaito.
To be honest, Jiraiya felt that his attitude was polite enough. Even if he was
trying to find out information, he would ask it out from the other person's mouth
personally instead of letting Obito, an Uchiha, pry it out with a genjutsu.
Xiqing Haidou also realized the gap between the two sides and stopped resisting.
Of course, his faith would not allow him to betray his king. Therefore, Nishiqing
Kaito used some almost well-known information to prevaricate Jiraiya on the grounds
that he was just an ordinary person and could not access more information.After
Jiraiya realized that he could not obtain more information from the other party, he
decided to take He Feng and the other three to Yuyin Village to explore.
Hefeng did not choose to refuse. For him, this mission was just a trip. When he got
tired of it, he would return to Konoha and become a Jonin.
The place where the four of them are located is not far from the territory of the
original Rain Kingdom. If they travel at the pace of a ninja, they can reach the
territory of the Original Rain Kingdom in less than three days.
The people's livelihood here is better than that in the country of Harakawa.
Jiraiya did not take Hefeng and others to Yuyin Village, but to the capital of the
United Kingdom of Ninja Realm.
Here, the sounds of hawking on the street are endless, and everyone has a bright
smile on their face. From time to time, you can see a busy ninja wearing a forehead
protector from Yuyin Village.
As the capital of the kingdom, the people's livelihood here is worthy of
recognition, and the brilliance in everyone's eyes is also worthy of recognition.
He Feng nodded, and he kept observing the whole way.
Although he thinks that he is just an ordinary person, he still has the duty to
inject some fresh vitality into the stagnant water of the ninja world.
After all, He Feng can live for many years. He can't waste all these years on
different women. He must do something meaningful to him.
And for him who was reincarnated from that blue planet, the most meaningful thing
he thought was to convey the red thought that could sweep the ninja world.
Everyone in the ninja world is the Davari clan in each other's eyes.
Jiraiya pointed to a plaque not far away and whispered to the three of them:
"Hefeng Kakashi Obito, you three will conduct your own investigation here. We will
meet there at six o'clock tonight."
"Okay, Jiraiya-senpai." The three of them nodded at the same time, and then looked
along Jiraiya's fingers.
I saw the plaque that Jiraiya was pointing to written with three big characters
"Tianquan Soup"
Obviously, this is a hot spring hotel.
In the ninja world, except for areas like the Land of Wind, almost every slightly
larger town will have a hot spring hotel.
People here are also very keen on bathing in hot springs.
After Jiraiya left, Kakashi and Obito looked at He Feng with great understanding.
"Let's split up and act separately. If we encounter danger, we can make noise as a
signal, so we can provide support." He Feng looked at the two of them and already
made plans to split up.
Jiraiya has something to do alone, and he also has something to do.
Only Kakashi and Obito looked confused and took this mission seriously.
Of course, He Feng did not want to alienate the two of them, but his plan was
currently unstable and was still in the planning stage.
Although he knew that even if he told the two of his plans in full, they would come
to help him without hesitation, but there were some things that the fewer people
knew about, the better.
"That's good. With more people, we have greater strength. If we can find out the
secrets of this kingdom earlier, our mission can be completed earlier." Kakashi
nodded, approving He Feng's proposal.
"Well, my Kamui can also hide myself and penetrate buildings. This makes it easier
for me to investigate intelligence. Kakashi must be my biggest contributor this
time." Obito said confidently. said.
He and Kakashi have always maintained a state of competition, and no one knows what
they are fighting for.
All I know is that the two of them enjoyed it endlessly.
After the three of them separated, He Feng went straight to the original Daming
Mansion.
It is no longer called Damingfu, but the palace of the United Ninja Realm, where
King Yahiko lives.
A Fei often sent letters to Nagato, so He Feng already knew the information there.
Along the way, He Feng did not hide anything, so He Feng's information soon reached
the hands of Ya Yan who was in the palace.
After the ninja who sent the information left, Yahiko said silently: "Nagato, have
you figured out how to communicate with Jiraiya-sensei?"
Nagato's voice contained no emotion, "Our path is the truth, and red thought is the
only way to bring permanent peace to the ninja world. For this reason, we do not
hesitate to become enemies of the five major countries. Even Teacher Jiraiya cannot
stop it." Our footsteps.”
Having said this, Nagato obviously paused, as if he was thinking about something.
"If necessary, I will defeat Mr. Jiraiya and leave it to Senior Feng to make the
decision."
Yahiko nodded and said, "That's good. Teacher Jiraiya will be left to you, Nagato."
"I will ask Pain to meet Jiraiya-sensei."
"Then let me go and see Senior Feng first. I think Senior Feng still has many ideas
about the path we need to take next, which were not clearly stated in the letter."
"..."
After Changmen left the palace, He Feng arrived here.
Because of the order given by Yahiko, He Feng did not encounter any obstacles on
his way here.
Yahiko also arrived at the gate early and prepared to greet Senior Feng.
At this moment, Yahiko was filled with anxiety. He really hoped that what he had
done would be recognized by Senior Feng, but he was also afraid that if he did
something bad that would cause Senior Feng to be dissatisfied.
Although he has learned the true identity of Senior Feng from various
intelligences, it is not enough to change his admiration for Senior Feng.
In other words, Yayan's respect for He Feng never stemmed from He Feng's identity
and appearance, but from He Feng's behavior and philosophy.
"Ya Yan, long time no see." He Feng looked at Ya Yan who was stunned on the spot
and smiled.Say hello.
"So...so beautiful..."

Chapter 103 Payne Six Paths VS Toad Immortal

After parting ways with He Feng and others, Jiraiya's first goal was not to
investigate information about Yahiko.
Instead, he went to the largest women's bath in the capital.
How could he not collect some delicious materials for his new novel when he came
here?
With this thought, Jiraiya almost used the ninja's concealment skills to the
extreme, so that even passing ninjas could not find him.
He just sneaked over the outermost wall from the roof and came to the outer wall of
the female soup.
"Hehe...hehehe, we will definitely be able to get good materials here." Jiraiya
seemed to have thought of something interesting, and he laughed unconsciously.
Just as he was about to use kunai to drill a small hole in the board, he suddenly
felt an inexplicable crisis envelope him, as if he would die in the next second if
he didn't avoid it.
Jiraiya has a shadow-level strength, so he will naturally not ignore such things as
premonitions.
He quickly backed away with his kunai in hand.
Phew——
Phew——
Phew——
I saw three black rods inserted firmly into the position where Jiraiya was just
now.
"Who?! He's not coming out yet!!" Jiraiya looked warily at the location where the
black sticks were attacking. Just three black sticks could give him the feeling of
life and death crisis. The person who attacked him must not be strong enough. Will
be weak.
Swish——
A figure flashed across the roof not far away.
Jiraiya has very good eyesight and accurately captured this afterimage.
He quickly followed up with steps.
After Jiraiya left, a middle-aged aunt wearing a bath towel and holding a wooden
basin walked out of the hot spring aggressively and came to where Jiraiya was
standing just now.
She looked around and found no one, so she could only return: "Damn thief, if you
dare to peek at me taking a shower, don't let me catch you."
--------------------xxxx--------------------

On the other side, Jiraiya followed Payne's footsteps, and the two soon left the
borders of the capital and came to an uninhabited wasteland on the outskirts.
"Who are you?! What's the relationship between you and Yahiko?!" Jiraiya looked at
the other party with a vigilant expression, his whole person in a posture ready to
enter the battle at any time.
"Jiraiya-sensei, long time no see." Tiandao turned around and stared at Jiraiya
with a pair of samsara eyes expressionlessly. The pressure from the samsara eyes
made Jiraiya's heart tighten.
"Hanzo?!" Jiraiya's mind became even more confused. Why did Hanzo have Nagato's
eyes? Why did Hanzo call him Jiraiya-sensei.
What on earth is going on?
"Are you Hanzo or Nagato? Why do you have Nagato's eyes?"
"Haha." Tiandao laughed disdainfully, "What's the difference between Hanzo and
Nagato?"
At this time, the other five Pain also came out from other directions, surrounding
Jiraiya in the middle.
Hell said: "Compared to Hanzo, Nagato is called this."
Renjian said: "We would rather Mr. Jiraiya call us."
Shura said: "Penn."
The beast said: "We are gods."
The hungry ghost said: "He is the god of the United Ninja Kingdom."
As the emotionless voice of Pain's Six Paths reached Jiraiya's ears, Tiandao also
raised his hand and said solemnly:
"Penn will bring changes to the ninja world, and changes must be accompanied by
pain and sacrifice."
"What Pain?! What pain and sacrifice? I want to know what you did to Nagato?!"
Jiraiya was a little anxious but also wary.
If there was only one person with the same eyes as Nagato, he would doubt whether
the other person had taken away Nagato's eyes.
If all six people have the same eyes as Nagato, then the probability of being eye-
catching is infinitely small.
After all, the legendary Eye of the Immortal cannot be copied six times.
"Jiraiya-sensei, recognize the reality.
All things are guided by heaven. "
With the activation of the Vientiane Heavenly Gravity, Jiraiya immediately felt an
inexplicable and powerful gravitational force envelope him.
He flew uncontrollably towards the direction of Heaven.
As a veteran Kage-level powerhouse, Jiraiya would naturally not fall for such an
easy trick.
While flying in the air, Jiraiya bit his finger at an extremely fast speed.
"Psychic art!"
Bang——
With a burst of smoke, a huge purple toad appeared at Jiraiya's feet, resisting the
gravitational pull of all things.
"Although I am useless, I will try my best." Takeru held a huge iron steel fork in
one hand and a shield similar to a bowl in the other.
"The art of channeling." Zhu Shengdao quickly formed a seal.
Several large splinter dogs appeared and besieged Toad Jian.
Because he was in an open space, Shura Dao in the distance was not idle. He
separated his wrist from his arm, pulled out a string of missiles from the cut in
his arm, and then aimed at Jiraiya who was standing on Toad Ken's head. Shoot
rockets.
Along with this weapon that did not belong to the ninja world, Jiraiya did not take
it lightly.
He responded quickly.
"Fire Release: Fire Bomb!" Under Jiraiya's Fire Release Ninjutsu, the group of
rockets detonated in mid-air.
Seeing this, Jiraiya also knew that he had to show some real skills, otherwise he
would very likely fall into trouble here.
"Toadjian, it’s up to you. "Jiraiya said to Toad Takeru who kept poking at the
split dog with a steel fork at his feet.
"Although I am very clumsy." Toad Ken said very modestly, and at the same time, the
steel fork in his hand could explode a Split Dog every time.
It is also the characteristic of splitting dogs into two that puts more and more
pressure on Toadjian.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
Jiraiya moved very quickly. He used blood to draw the most basic sage facial makeup
on his face almost in an instant. Then he clasped his hands together and closed his
eyes to start communicating the sage chakra.
At this time, the pressure Jiraiya faced was not too great, so he did not have the
idea of channeling the two immortals Fukasaku and Shima.
But soon, with Toma Takeru's scream, Jiraiya realized the seriousness of the
matter.
"Jiraiya, I can't hold on much longer."
The steel fork in Toad Jian's hand suddenly pierced a split dog biting his leg, and
he endured the pain.
There are already many bite marks on his body.
"Toad Ken, thank you." At this moment, Jiraiya successfully entered the sage mode,
"Toad Ken, you go back first."
Toad Takeru nodded. He really could not continue to fight with Jiraiya, so he
released the psychic technique.
After Toad Takeru turned into smoke and disappeared, Jiraiya formed the seal again.
"The art of channeling."
This time, two toads the size of kettles appeared on Jiraiya's shoulders.
"Two sages, please." Jiraiya had a sage face at this time, but compared to the
perfect sage mode like Hashirama Hefeng, his sage mode would give him some
characteristics of a toad.
"Little Jiraiya, leave it to us." The two immortals Fukasaku and Shima obviously
knew about the Rinnegan, so when they saw that the opponent Jiraiya faced had the
Rinnegan, they directly took out all their own strength.
"Water slash!"

Chapter 104 Nagato appears, choose Mr. Jiraiya!

The moment Fukasaku Sennin released Water Slash, Hungry Ghost Path appeared
directly at the front.
Easily absorbed all of Fukasaku Sennin's water slashing ninjutsu.
At this moment, except for the heavenly and hellish realms, all the other Pains
rushed towards Jiraiya.
With the hell realm as a guarantee, Nagato is not afraid of damage to the other six
realms of Pain.
Jiraiya, who has the blessing of senjutsu, is naturally not afraid of the collision
of taijutsu. With the blessing of senjutsu and taijutsu such as frog kumite and
frog knocking, even if he is singled out against Pain's four paths, Jiraiya will
still be able to defeat him in taijutsu. Still not falling behind.
Bang——
Seizing the opportunity, Jiraiya sent the beast way back to Tiandao with one kick.
Under Jiraiya's feet, the beast lay directly on the ground and lost the ability to
continue fighting.
The Hell Dao on the side silently took a step forward and began to form seals.
A King of Hell appeared behind the hell realm. The King of Hell stretched out his
purple tongue and rolled the animal realm into his mouth. He chewed it and spit it
out again.
The spitted animal path directly returned to its original intact state.
This scene was seen by Shima Sennin on Jiraiya's shoulder.
"Little Jiraiya uses oil, and the father uses wind escape. We have to kill the
person behind him first, otherwise they will keep resurrecting."
Under Shima Sennin's arrangement, Jiraiya clasped his hands together and leaned
back.
The two immortals Fukasaku and Shima also gave birth to strong power in their
mouths.
"Senjutsu Goemon!" With the blessing of oil, fire, wind and huge Senjutsu chakra,
Goemon's power is extremely powerful, and it is undoubtedly a super S-level mixed
ninjutsu.
Facing this powerful ninjutsu with equally huge coverage, Hungry Ghost Road did not
retreat, but opened his hands to form a huge white barrier in front of him.
Absorb all the mixed ninjutsu of Goemon.
"Didn't it work?" Jiraiya looked warily at the location covered by the ninjutsu
just now.
As the smoke dissipated, the intact Six Paths of Pain appeared again.
"That's not good." Jiraiya muttered, thinking about what he would do next.
"Little Jiraiya, do you want to retreat?" Shima Sennin said softly.
If Jiraiya chooses to retreat, she can use the counter-channeling technique to
channel Jiraiya to Miaomu Mountain.
"No, I still don't understand many things clearly, and there are still teenagers
here that I brought out. I can't ignore their safety." Jiraiya shook his head and
rejected Shima Sennin's proposal to retreat.
"There's really nothing I can do, my dad is going to use that trick."
"Well, let's use that trick."
Fukasaku and Shima Sage made preparations. Jiraiya also kicked off his clogs twice.
While absorbing more senjutsu chakra, the toad characteristics on his body became
more obvious.
"Immortal Technique: Super Large Jade Rasengan!" In an instant, Jiraiya appeared on
Shura Dao's head, and a huge Rasengan was condensed in his hand.
Hungry Ghost Road stretched out his hands in front of Jilai's Rasengan with an
expressionless expression.
The balls made of chakra were quickly absorbed by the hungry ghost path.
"Immortal magic, magic, toad singing!" As the illusions of the two immortals
Fukasaku and Shima were activated, one after another special sound waves were born
and emitted from their throats.
After hearing this sound, Pain Liudao felt a little dazed in front of his eyes, and
then returned to normal again.
Each of the six paths uses their most powerful attackTechnique to attack Jiraiya.
And Jiraiya gradually fell into a disadvantage in their attacks.
And these are all illusions constructed by the two Toad Immortals.
In reality, with the continuous activation of Toad's Sing, Payne's Six Paths also
invariably froze in place, unable to move.
"It's going to be over now." Jiraiya sighed, and then used his psychic medium to
draw out the scroll of ninja tools, and took out the unique stone sword of Mt.
Miaomu, intending to kill the six people in front of him.

）
At this moment, bursts of applause came from not far away.
Jiraiya heard the sound and walked away, his eyes full of vigilance.
"Nagato!"
After seeing the appearance of the person clearly, Jiraiya finally understood the
cause and effect.
Are all these six people with the same eyes as Nagato’s puppets? ! !
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"Should I say that I am truly worthy of being Jiraiya-sensei? With just a moment of
inattention, I can defeat the Six Paths of Pain in a short time." Nagato walked up
to Jiraiya.
"Ahem—" At this time, the two immortals Fukasaku and Shima on Jiraiya's shoulders
also coughed.
Toad singing will cause great burden on their voices.
"Nagato, what happened to you?! Why did Yahiko become the king of the United Ninja
Kingdom, and where is Konan? Why did you attack me." Jiraiya had countless
questions in his mind that he wanted to ask himself. This disciple has been
somewhat introverted since he was a child.
"Didn't Mr. Jiraiya see what happened? Our Akatsuki organization has always been
committed to using words to make people in the ninja world understand each other in
order to achieve the purpose of peace." Nagato pointed at Tiandao who was standing
there.
"Hanzo?" Jiraiya had a guess in his mind.
"Yes, Hanzo attacked the Akatsuki organization, and Yahiko and Konan died in that
attack. This made me understand something. People can never understand each other.
Only by allowing a person to feel pain, experience pain, accept pain, and
understand pain, then that person will understand what true peace is.
In extreme pain, I broke away from the shackles of mortals and evolved into a god.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
And with the Eye of God, I can let everyone in the ninja world experience this
pain, and then true peace will follow. "
Nagato said expressionlessly, if Senior Feng hadn't appeared, this would have been
his future ending.
Every time he thought of this, Nagato's gratitude to Senior Feng grew even more.
Hearing Nagato say such words, Jiraiya shook his head violently: "No, this is
wrong! Such a concept is absolutely wrong! Pain will only breed greater pain, and
hatred will also spread more hatred. , peace should not come this way."
Jiraiya couldn't agree with what Nagato said at all.
Nagato also nodded: "Yes, that adult told me the same thing. He saved Yahiko and
Konan from Hanzo, and guided us onto the real path, a path that can truly lead us."
The path for the ninja world to enter the Great Harmony."
As he spoke, Nagato's body slowly flew up.
"Teacher Jiraiya, the birth of the United Ninja Kingdom is the most correct thing
in thousands of years. We are leading the ninja world towards a major change that
has never been seen in thousands of years. In this change, there will be no more
countries. Disputes between villages.
All people are the king's subjects, and under the king's rule, all people have
equal status.
Ninjas are no longer above the common people, and gods are no longer in the sky.
All people should enjoy eternal peace. "
"Choose, Teacher Jiraiya.
Join us and lead the ninja world with us...
Still being driven into gravel under the wheel of change. "

Chapter 105 Suzaku of Dawn

At this moment, Jiraiya suddenly felt a sense of powerlessness. This feeling of
powerlessness was like standing on a rough coast, and a wave of 100 meters had
risen in the sea and was hitting him where he was.
Under the power of nature, human beings seem so small.
Jiraiya is not afraid of death. If he were, he would have escaped long ago when
Pain's Six Paths besieged him.
What Jiraiya is afraid of is that his death will be worthless.
His whole life was spent searching for the illusory son of prophecy.
At this time, the person standing in front of him and asking him to make a choice
was the son of the prophecy that he initially thought.
Jiraiya said in a hoarse voice: "Nagato, I only have one question."
Nagato nodded. He had no intention of attacking Teacher Jiraiya until Teacher
Jiraiya made it clear that he refused.
"Jiraiya-sensei, tell me."
"As for the sixteen-character policy, it was Yahiko who proposed it, or it was the
one you mentioned as an adult who proposed it."
"It's that sir." Nagato said calmly.
Before Senior Feng clearly wanted to reveal his identity in the ninja world, he
would not take any action to expose Senior Feng, so he also changed the title of
Senior Feng to that adult.
That is to say, He Feng didn't know about this, otherwise He Feng would definitely
be dumbfounded.
I was just bored and wanted to be different in the ninja world. When did I become
the mastermind behind the scenes?
Along the way, Jiraiya had been studying the sixteen-character policy for a long
time, and his heart was full of admiration for the person who wrote the sixteen-
character policy.meaning. He also wanted to have a good communication with the
other party.
Therefore, after hearing what Nagato said, a glimmer of hope arose in his heart.
Perhaps he could see the adult he was talking about through Nagato.
Nowadays, Nagato's strength has far surpassed him. Jiraiya is extremely curious
about this person in the ninja world who can make Nagato so respectful.
"I choose to join." As Jiraiya finished speaking, Nagato raised his hand and threw
a small object to Jiraiya.
Jiraiya quickly caught it.
It was a ring with the word ‘Zhu’ on it.
"Jiraiya-sensei, the Akatsuki organization welcomes you. The position of Akatsuki
Suzaku is yours. If Jiraiya-sensei wants to get in touch with the Akatsuki
organization in the future, he can use that ring."
While Jiraiya looked at the 'Zhu' ring up and down, Nagato also talked about their
organization.
Because He Feng intervened this time, Akatsuki was not a rebel ninja organization,
but a unit directly under the rain shadow of Yuyin Village, with the same nature as
the ANBU of each village.
This can be seen from what Nagato wears on his head. There are no scratches on the
four vertical lines on his forehead.
Therefore, even if Jiraiya joins the Akatsuki organization, there is no need to
carve scratches on his forehead protector.
"There are also uniforms from the Akatsuki organization, Jiraiya-sensei, please
accept them as well." Nagato took the uniform that fit Jiraiya's body shape from
the animal path and handed it over.
He continued: "I know that Mr. Jiraiya walks around the ninja world all year round
and does not usually return to Konoha Hidden Village. It happens that the Akatsuki
organization is in the stage of recruiting troops, and the Akatsuki organization
adopts the form of two teams, so the Jiraiya-sensei, please form a team with me."
Because the Akatsuki organization is affiliated with the Uekage, Konan, the Uekage,
has become the apparent leader of the Akatsuki organization, while Nagato is
responsible for the combat power within the Akatsuki organization.
Jiraiya just took over the uniform in a daze, then with the help of Pain's Six
Paths, he put on the ring and changed into his robe.
Jiraiya's personality is also relatively casual, so he quickly adapted to the
change in status, "Nagato, when can I meet the adult you mentioned."
Nagato was silent for a while, and then said: "I will tell the adult. If the adult
doesn't agree, even I can't do anything."
Jiraiya also fell silent, and for a while the master and the disciple were frozen
in place.
After a long time, Jiraiya finally asked: "So what are we going to do next? I mean
what is the purpose of the Akatsuki organization."
The purpose of the Akatsuki organization is to collect tailed beasts, sweep the
ninja world with crushing power, and unify the ninja world.
Nagato repeated the purpose of the Akatsuki organization in his mind, but he did
not say this to Jiraiya.
Because he understood that the reason why Jiraiya joined the Akatsuki organization
had nothing to do with his coercion. The main reason came from the sixteen words of
Feng-senpai, and Teacher Jiraiya's temperament was completely inconsistent at this
time. Will agree with the philosophy of Akatsuki Organization.
"The Akatsuki organization is a secret combat force under Umei Konan, just like an
ANBU organization. The Akatsuki organization is divided into elite members and
ordinary members. Each elite member has a corresponding ring, and there are ten in
total.
There are already four of them.
They are me, Konan, Yahiko, and Jiraiya-sensei.
The corresponding rings are ‘zero’, ‘white’, ‘empty’ and ‘zhu’.
As for the purpose of the Akatsuki organization, currently it is just to accumulate
strength as much as possible to protect the territory of the United Ninja Kingdom
from infringement. "
When Nagato said this, Jiraiya showed an expression of sudden realization.
"I should have known this a long time ago, I should have known it when I saw Hanzo
being made a puppet by you.
Yahiko became the king, Nagato became the god in the hearts of the people in the
kingdom, and Konan became the shadow of Amegakure Village. "
After hearing Jiraiya's words, Nagato nodded, which was regarded as recognition of
Jiraiya's explanation.
"Jiraiya-sensei, come with me to meet Konan. I believe you will be pleasantly
surprised." While Nagato was speaking, Pain's Six Paths had disappeared from sight.
In this life, because Nagato is in good health and has not been nourished by the
outside demons, there is no loss of chakra or vitality in his body, so the range of
control over Pain's Six Paths has also increased.
Jiraiya was a little hesitant. He had agreed to meet up with He Feng and the other
three at six o'clock tonight.
Nagato Jiraiya began to monitor Jiraiya after he arrived at the boundary of the
kingdom's capital. Therefore, he also knew the agreement between Jiraiya and Feng-
senpai and others, so he said: "Jiraiya-sensei, there is no need to worry, I will
Payne was asked to leave a message for those three people."
"That's good."
Jiraiya nodded. Now that he has joined Nagato's camp, he is no longer afraid that
Nagato will attack He Feng and the others.
Afterwards, Nagato led the way and led Jiraiya towards the direction of Yuyin
Village.
On the other side, Obito and Kakashi also encountered trouble.
In front of them was a tall man wearing a treason forehead protector and a mask
with sutures all over his body.
"Let me take a look.
The second generation White Fang, the White God of Death, has a reward of thirty
million taels.
The Uchiha clan, the holder of the Three Magatama Sharingan, the red-eyed devil,
has a bounty of 35 million taels.
very good. "

Chapter 106 Encounter with Kakuzu

Time goes back a little bit.
After Kakashi and Obito separated from He Feng, they each explored in one
direction.
The places Kakashi explored were various teahouses, casinos and other places with a
large flow of people and frequent information.square.
Unlike Kakashi, Obito chose to find another way.
After obtaining the power of Wood Release from Orochimaru, Obito found that by
simply using Hollow and not using ninjutsu like Susanoo, the consumption of his
pupil power was almost negligible.
Therefore, even in daily activities, Obito will habitually use blur to rush on his
way.
When detecting intelligence, virtualization has almost become Obito's passive
skill.
The penetrating ability of virtual blur often brings some different experiences to
Obito.
Including but not limited to seeing a certain woman who everyone said was a good
family stealing men, an old man who is nearly fifty years old actually likes young
ninjas and other outrageous things.
At this time, Kamui brought Obito to a deeply hidden place.
A gold exchange center located in the capital of the United Kingdom of Ninja Realm!
--------------------xxxx--------------------

After discovering a place like this, Obito would naturally not be able to go in
alone, but would have to go back and search for it.
However, Obito only found Kakashi, so he decided to take Kakashi with him to the
gold exchange place to find out what was going on.
It was in the money exchange that Kakashi and Obito saw the rebellious nin from
Takigakure Village.
With a smile on his face, Kakuzu took out the roster he carried with him.
There are bounties on it for all the famous ninjas in the ninja world, and the
bounties range from hundreds of thousands to hundreds of millions.
After some searching, Kakuzu found the reward order he needed.
"Let me take a look.
The second generation White Fang, the White God of Death, has a reward of thirty
million taels.
The Uchiha clan, the holder of the Three Magatama Sharingan, the red-eyed devil,
has a bounty of 35 million taels.
Great, it’s another bit of extra money. "
Jiaodu grinned and was ready to capture the two of them on the spot.
As for the strength of the two of them, they are not worried.
As a living fossil in the ninja world, Kakuzu was of the same era as the first
Hokage Senju Hashirama, and had experience fighting against them. In his opinion,
it was not easy to deal with two brats.
As for the rumored sanctions from God in the United Ninja Kingdom, Kakuzu also
didn't take it to heart.
In his eyes, only money is worthy of his attention, and everything else is just
floating clouds.
At this moment, Obito and Kakashi also looked at each other, and they nodded in
tacit agreement.
Kakashi pulled out the dagger from behind, and countless powerful thunder and
lightning wrapped around Kakashi's body, and even the dagger in his hand was filled
with arcs of electricity.
This is Kumogakure’s thunder escape chakra mode!
After Kumogakure failed in the third battle, this secret technique was also used as
compensation for the defeat by Kumogakure, and was paid to Konoha together.
And Kakashi relied on his military exploits in three battles to easily redeem the
Thunder Escape Chakra Mode and the matching Thunder Escape Armor Secret Technique.
With the blessing of the Thunder Chakra Mode, Kakashi's speed and defense have been
greatly improved.
Kakuzu has not lived in vain for so many years, and he can naturally recognize
Kakashi's current state, the Thunder Release Chakra Mode, which is Kumogakure's
secret technique.
Obito also showed his three-magatama Sharingan, holding a kunai in his hand and
looking at Kakuzu eagerly.
At this time, Obito was wondering whether to crush Kakuzu's heart with a divine
power, or to use Hollow to touch Kakuzu's back and give him a hard blow.
After some judgment, Kakuzu focused most of his attention on Kakashi. Although a
ninja with three Magatama Sharingan eyes deserves attention, it is compared with
the second-generation White Fang who uses the secret technique of thunder escape
chakra. , it is not so worthy of attention.
After all, Kakuzu is not a ninja who has never killed the three Magatama Sharingan,
so his evaluation is just like that.
"Earth Resentment Yu!" Kakuzu would never let anyone go, so he immediately
activated his Earth Resentment Yu secret technique with all his strength.
"Fire Escape, head hard!"
"Wind Escape·Wind Pressure!"
At this moment, two masks of different colors appeared on Kakuzu's shoulders.
Without him to form seals, the two masks opened their mouths and released two
ninjutsu with different attributes at the two of them.
And his body quickly formed seals at this time.
"Earth Escape·Earth Spear!"
At this moment, rock spikes suddenly appeared on the ground. These spikes, together
with fire escape and wind escape ninjutsu, attacked the two of them.
Kakashi relied on his extremely fast movement speed to avoid Kakuzu's attack in a
small space.
Obito turned on the virtualization and faced the fire escape and quietly touched
Kakuzu's side.
"Look, Grandpa Obito will give you a big one!" Obito suddenly appeared behind
Kakuzu, and in an instant, he lifted the hollow and stabbed the kunai in his hand
at the position of Kakuzu's heart.
Under Obito's virtualization, even ordinary kunai can have a great impact.
"!" Kakuzu's pupils shrank suddenly, and his water attribute heart was destroyed,
which meant that he had lost one life!
He suddenly retreated in the other direction, trying to avoid Obito's next attack.
"Thunder Flash!" However, Kakashi was already prepared. In just a moment, Kakashi's
short sword pierced into Kakuzu's body, and stabbed out from the back, and Kakashi
held it in his hand again. .
The blood on the short sword was also evaporated due to the power of Thunder
Release.
At this moment, a monster with a blue mask and a body composed of black lines
suddenly appeared from Kakuzu's back.
After the monster appeared, the mask on its face shattered, and then Kakuzu stood
up again.
In just a short moment, Kakuzu has lost two hearts, although Kakuzu himselfBecause
of his carelessness and failure to estimate the opponent's correct combat strength,
Kakuzu had to pay attention to the two of them.
There are three hearts left, namely wind, fire and thunder.
At this moment, after Obito turned on the virtualization, the Sharingan also
changed from the three magatama to the kaleidoscope.
Kakuzu naturally knew about the Mangekyou Sharingan, so at this moment he already
had the idea of retreating.
Although the reward of 65 million is very high, you still have to live to get it.
However, Kakashi and Obito did not intend to let Kakuzu go just like that.
"This is it! There is such a place in the royal capital!"
"Hurry up, don't let the people inside escape!"
"That's right! Don't let anyone inside, arrest them all!"
At this moment, there was a loud noise outside. It was obvious that the ninjas from
the capital had discovered this deeply hidden gold exchange.
Kakuzu glanced at the two of them warily, and then rushed towards the exit.
"Who are you? Stop! Don't move!"
"Ah! Monster! There is a monster!"
"Quick! Let's subdue him together! There are many of us!"
Soon, a battle broke out between the ninjas of Kakuzu and Wangdu.
Obito looked at Kakashi, "Kakashi, let's retreat too."
Kakashi nodded, and then put his hand on Obito's shoulder.
The next second, a whirlpool appeared at Obito's right eye, and the two of them
quickly disappeared.

Chapter 107 Obito, I’m going to kill you

In the king's palace.
He Feng and Ya Yan sat opposite each other.
Hefeng was like a teacher, tirelessly telling Miyan his own ideas. In the letter,
Hefeng only told Miyan what his ideal was and what a true utopia looked like.
Hefeng saw a lot along the way. In the initial stage, Yahiko realized this ideal
almost perfectly, but this was only the initial stage.
After all, at this time, everything in the United Kingdom of Ninja World is waiting
for improvement. Civilians will support Yahiko as long as they can have a hot meal.
Ninjas will also support Yahiko as long as they can no longer participate in wars
and enjoy a peaceful life.
But this will not last long, after all, a person's desires are endless.
In this regard, Hefeng combined the experience of his previous life and refined the
language of some famous works, and told them to Yayan.
After receiving further transmission of ideas from He Feng, Ya Yan was astonished,
and some of the headaches he had with governance were solved.
After all, with his few words, letting ninjas go to small places to help civilians
farm is okay for a short time, but if it takes a long time, some people will be
unwilling.
I, the great ninja, actually asked me to use ninjutsu to help those civilians farm?
What an international joke!
At this time, even Yahiko didn't know how to solve it. After all, he couldn't put
kunai on someone's neck and let them do things.
At this time, the "Das Kapital" proposed by Senior Feng inspired him very much.
The great unity of the ninja world is an ideal after all. Apart from releasing an
illusion that covers the entire ninja world and putting everyone in the ninja world
under the illusion he has formulated, it is absolutely impossible to achieve it.
But he can achieve lasting peace.
At this moment, Yahiko's future path becomes clearer.
He stood up from the tatami and bowed deeply to He Feng.
"Senior Feng! Thank you very much for teaching me!"
He Feng chuckled and did not stop Ya Yan. After all, the favorability score on Ya
Yan's head was buzzing non-stop, and He Feng was extremely satisfied.
"Yahiko, you don't have to thank me so much. Everything I asked you to do also has
my purpose." He Feng said softly: "The current comprehensive strength of the Ninja
World is too weak. I hope you can lead the United Ninja World to become stronger. ,
in order to put pressure on the other five major countries.
Only under tremendous pressure will the five major countries have more motivation
to become stronger. "
Yahiko is a little confused, why should the five major countries become stronger?
Isn't their goal the same ninja world?
Yahiko always asked questions when he didn't understand something. He immediately
asked: "Senior Feng, why do you want the five major countries to become stronger?
Wouldn't it be better for us to sweep across the five major countries with the
force of thunder and unify each other directly with force?"
He Feng smiled and said, "In this case, it is another problem faced by the ninja
world."
"Yahiko, do you know that moon in the sky?"
"Know."
"Then let me say that the moon in the sky was actually made by ninjutsu. What do
you think, Yahiko?"
Yahiko's eyes widened, "Can ninjutsu still do that? Even Nagato can't create a
moon!"
"Yes, even Nagato can't do it, but there is a race. Almost everyone in their race
has the ability to create the moon, and that race is the enemy of our entire ninja
world, so Yahiko, you still think I want you to improve Is the decision about the
strength of the five major powers wrong?”
Yahiko shook his head and suddenly realized, "I understand, Senior Feng, don't
worry, I can definitely do it well!"
Hefeng was very pleased. He liked people like Yayan who could listen to what he
said and felt comfortable communicating with him.
At this point, He Feng was already planning to leave. After all, he was just here
to take a stroll and take a look, and even if he had to stay, he would stay with
Xiao Nan.
What’s the point of staying here with Yahiko.
Yes, it's not just Xiao Nan who is thinking about He Feng, He Feng also misses Xiao
Nan a little.
The succubus's physique made He Feng's already passionate heart become even more
philanthropic.
Similarly, the succubus physique is also stimulating He Feng’sDesire, if He Feng
had been with Tsunade for a long time, he didn't know if he could still resist it.
Therefore, Hefeng thought of the docile and lovely Xiaonan.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Hefeng can get a completely different experience in Xiaonan.

"Senior Feng, I have another question!" Yayan said loudly to He Feng who was
walking away.
He Feng turned around and looked at Ya Yan with some confusion.
Yahiko asked: "Senior Feng, are you a boy or a girl?"
He Feng: "???"
The expression on He Feng's face was very exciting. At this moment, he wanted to
ask Ya Yan why Ya Yan could ask such a question from his mouth. Isn't it obvious
whether he is a boy or a girl?
Why can't you see this?
However, in order to prevent Yayan from misunderstanding and from having
inappropriate thoughts about him, Hefeng still explained.
"male."
After saying that, He Feng didn't leave on foot. He directly found the coordinates
of the Flying Thunder God on Obito and left with a Flying Thunder God technique.
Looking at the place where Senior Feng had disappeared, Yahiko had an inexplicable
idea in his mind.
He always felt that Senior Feng seemed to have run away.
And Hefeng himself, after 'escaping' from Yahiko's sight, appeared directly in the
sky above Obito.
Looking at He Feng who suddenly appeared at the side, both Obito and Kakashi were
stunned: "!!!"
The two of them were maintaining an extremely ambiguous posture at this time. He
Feng felt that if he had been a step too late, the two of them would have kissed.
At this moment, Hefeng thought of Sasuke who took away Naruto's first kiss.
"What are you doing?" He Feng suppressed his laughter and said in a calm tone as
much as possible.
The two of them separated in an instant, and then pretended to be calm, sorting out
the messy clothes.
For a moment, a pin drop could be heard in the room.
Obito was the first to break the silence. He looked at Kakashi and gritted his
teeth and said:
"Bastard Kakashi said that I only know how to hide under the enemy's butt with a
kunai and stab the enemy in the back. When fighting, I'm just like Old Six and not
like a man at all. He also said that he would teach me the Hatake family's secret
taijutsu to kill the enemy for a thousand years." , saying that it would only take
me a thousand years to kill the enemy in the future.
It’s not like I don’t know what the Millennium Killing is? Even Kakashi was stabbed
by Uncle Sakumo with that move. As an Uchiha, I don't know what kind of technique
to learn! "
He Feng's head tilted, and he felt that he had heard something terrible.
How come Kakashi-nii didn't know when his father used Thousand Years of Killing to
educate him?
Hearing this, Kakashi's eyes turned red. He directly pulled out the short sword on
his back, activated the Thunder Chakra mode without reservation, and rushed towards
Obito again.
"Obito! How dare you say that! Let's fight to the death!"
Obito didn't even look at Kakashi and directly turned on the virtualization.
He continued to say to He Feng: "He Feng, you must not know, I will tell you..."
"Obito, if you keep talking, I will definitely kill you!"

Chapter 108 Black Zetsu appears and bewitches Kisame

Until the end, Obito did not tell He Feng any other secrets between him and
Kakashi.
After all, Kakashi's eyes at that time fully told Obito one thing, that is, he
cannot be in a virtual state forever.
Although the excitement is nice to watch, if Kakashi and Obito really become
enemies because of something, this is what He Feng doesn't want to see.
Kakashi and Obito didn't want to cause too much trouble in front of He Feng, so
they stopped fighting.
"Have you seen Senior Jiraiya?" He Feng asked the two of them.
At this time, the location of the three people was exactly the gathering place
mentioned by Jiraiya.
Kakashi and Obito shook their heads, "We didn't see Mr. Jiraiya either. Did he
encounter any danger there?"
He Feng thought for a while, then inadvertently raised his head and looked at the
ceiling.
A hand reached out from the ceiling and made an OK gesture to He Feng.
After getting A Fei's reminder, He Feng waved his hands to the two of them, "Senior
Jiraiya is not in any danger. We don't need to worry too much. You must know that
senior Jiraiya's strength is not bad at all. In the ninja world, he can There are
not many people who can beat Jiraiya-senpai."
Obito suddenly said: "Oh, by the way, Kakashi and I met a rebellious nin from the
Takigakure village at the gold exchange a few hours ago. That person couldn't be
killed. I had clearly pierced his chest with a kunai. His heart was broken, but he
acted like a normal person."
Kakashi also followed up and said: "Yes, I am very sure that my short sword hit his
vital part, but he did not die. He did not forcefully escape until the ninja troops
here came to round us up."
He Feng was stunned for a moment and secretly rejoiced in his heart.
Fortunately, fortunately, considering the current strength of Obito and Kakashi, it
is impossible for Kakuzu to beat them no matter what.
Although Kakuzu has Kage-level strength, most of his Kage-level strength is
reflected in his immortality.
Belongs to the weak category among Kage-level ninjas.
In head-on combat, he couldn't even defeat Hiruzen Sarutobi.
But what makes Kakuzu strong is never his strength, but his ability to manage
money.
In Hefeng's plan, Jiaodu was the finance minister of the Xiao organization.
"The person you are talking about should be the rebel Ninja Kakuzu of Takigakure
Village. It is said that he is of the same generation as the First Hokage and has a
record of surviving against the First Hokage."
Hearing He Feng's explanation, Obito waved his hand disdainfully, "Just him?
Although he didn't survive after being stabbed in the heart.It's a bit weird to
die, but I can easily take care of him on my own. "
He Feng smiled helplessly. Ever since Obito turned on the kaleidoscope, it had
become more and more floating.
This is normal. Uchiha who is not sick in his mind cannot turn on the kaleidoscope.
Just like his Sharingan, it is impossible to expect to activate the kaleidoscope
with violent emotional fluctuations. He can only slowly cultivate it through mental
power. God knows when he will be able to cultivate the kaleidoscope.
"We don't know what Jiraiya-senpai has done. Our mission this time is to
investigate the United Ninja Kingdom. I think we have almost completed the
investigation.
Next, we will go back to Konoha after one last visit to Amegakure Village. Judging
by the time, Minato-sensei and Kushina-san's child will be born soon. We can't miss
this. "
Obito and Kakashi agreed very much with He Feng's words.
The three of them have very good relationships with Namikaze Minato and Kushina.
In addition to being Kakashi's mentor, Minato Namikaze is also Kakashi's teacher, a
teacher who truly teaches and imparts Kakashi's various ninjutsu without
reservation.
In addition, his master's wife Kushina is a Kyuubi Jinchuuriki, so it will be very
dangerous during childbirth. He doesn't want anything to happen to his master's
wife because of the Kyuubi.
"Then let's set off for Yuyin Village early tomorrow morning."
"..."
……
Just as Hefeng and others were heading to Yuyin Village.
Another corner of the ninja world, in Kirigakure Village.
Each of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen has a very high status in Kirigakure, and this
status brings them a detached mentality.
The most typical representative among them is the Watermelon Mountain Pufferfish
Ghost.
From the perspective of the Watermelon Mountain Puffer Demon, as one of the Seven
Ninja Swordsmen of Kirigakure, no matter what he does, he always believes that what
he does is right and beneficial to Kirigakure Village.
Even if it means betraying information about Kirigakure Village.
It was at this moment that a man with long dark blue hair, a face and skin color
similar to that of a shark, and golden pupils with sharp teeth appeared behind the
Watermelon Mountain Pufferfish Ghost.
He has extremely strong ninja qualities, and his strength has already surpassed
that of his boss, the Watermelon Mountain Puffer Ghost.
But out of loyalty to Kirigakure Village and his identity as a ninja, he has been
carrying out his duties meticulously.
And not long ago, he obeyed the orders of the Watermelon Mountain Puffer Ghost and
killed his teammates without hesitation for the sake of the village's intelligence.
"You guys have also betrayed the village and your own beliefs." Kisame Inikisaki
murmured softly.
After Kisame Kisame finished speaking, the pupils of the Suikoyama Fugu Ghost
shrank suddenly, and he grabbed the big sword Samehada on his back and started to
slash behind him.
"Same muscle is for cutting, not chopping." Kisame's voice was calm. He casually
pulled up the iron pillar next to him and stabbed it out the moment the Watermelon
Mountain Fugu Demon turned around.
"Poof!" Watermelon Mountain Pufferfish Ghost spit out blood, "Kisame!"
He shouted sternly and waved his sword, Samehada, again.
Kisame relied on his superb combat skills to dodge the opponent's attack again, and
casually pulled out another iron pillar, holding the iron chain on it and swinging
it up.
After a fight, Kisame Kisaki pierced the last iron pillar into the head of the
Watermelon Mountain Puffer Demon.
"Boss, everyone who leaks information should die. This is what you said.
Also, always remember what you said, don't take your subordinates lightly.
"Kakigaki Kisame casually picked up the broadsword Samehada on the side, picked up
the bandage wrapped around Samehada from the ground, and wrapped it up
meticulously.
At the same time, Kisame was also thinking about the meaning of his existence.
"This world is really false. Ninjas are always faced with killing and being killed.
As a Kirigakure ninja, I have to attack my own companions. Who am I?
Even I myself have been a false existence from beginning to end.
So is this village real, and is this world real?
So where should I go and how can I feel at ease? "
Kisame Mikigaki carried Samehada behind his back, lowered his head and looked at
his blood-stained hands, the thoughts in his heart had begun to waver.
He was wondering whether he should leave this false village and go to the ninja
world to find the meaning of his existence.
"Hahaha... Since you can't find the truth, let me give you the truth.
Since you feel the pain, let me free you from the pain. "

Chapter 109 My name is Madara Uchiha

"Who is it?!!" Kisame Mikigaki stretched out his hand to grab the sword Samehada on
his back, and looked at the direction of the sound with a wary expression.
Facing the dried persimmon Kisame noodles, a man wearing a tight-fitting combat
uniform with red laminated armor and an unruly face walked out.
The man used a pair of three magatama Sharingan eyes to examine the dried persimmon
Kisame.
"My name is Uchiha Madara." 'Uchiha Madara' hugged his chest and looked at Kisame
Kisaki calmly.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"You have been acting to deal with your companions before. From today on, you will
act as my companion."
When Kisame Inikisaki listened to what the other party said, he had 10,000 doubts
in his heart.
The biggest doubt lies in Uchiha Madara himself. After all, in his opinion, Uchiha
Madara is already dead.
"Uchiha Madara has been dead for a long time. Who are you? You seem to trust me,
but I have never seen you." Kisame looked at 'Uchiha Madara', trying to see
something about him that was similar to that person.A flaw that is different from
Shura in the legendary shinobi world.
But whether it was his aura, tone or demeanor, although he had never seen Uchiha
Madara, the person in front of him gave him the feeling that this was the Shura
from the ninja world.
Of course, it’s not surprising that Kisame Kisaki couldn’t see it.
After all, Hei Jue has been planning for this day for a long time.
When Uchiha Madara was about to die, he had already begun to avoid Madara and He
Feng as much as possible to prevent Madara from seeing the flaws he had exposed,
and at the last moment he forcibly broke out with He Feng to seal himself.
As for the Sharingan collected by Uchiha Madara, all were taken away by Black Zetsu
at the moment of Uchiha Madara's death.
Although Hei Jue didn't know why Bai Jue no longer listened to him, with the
experience accumulated over the years, Hei Jue still successfully took over the
body of a White Jue.
And the transformation technique that Bai Jue is proficient in can completely fake
the real thing.
Therefore, Black Zetsu successfully played Uchiha Madara with the help of Sharingan
and White Zetsu.
"Haha, everyone in the world knows that I am dead, but they don't know my real
plan. As for my identity, it is up to you to believe it or not." Black Zetsu did
not explain. After all, with Uchiha Madara's arrogance, he would not explain
anything to others.
He has been with Uchiha Madara for decades, and he knows Uchiha Madara very well.
No one in this world knows Uchiha Madara better than him, not even Uchiha Madara
himself.
"The Eye of the Moon Project can bring true peace to the ninja world and allow
everyone to live in reality." Uchiha Madara spoke calmly, explaining the purpose
and all the details of the Eye of the Moon Project to Kisame Inikikaki.
"It sounds like the same false plan." Kisame smiled at 'Uchiha Madara', "But it's
not bad. When everyone is in a falsehood, then it is not a kind of reality.
I have joined you, what do you need me to do? "
'Madara Uchiha' said: "Go to the Rain Hidden Village, undercover the Akatsuki
organization, and monitor Akatsuki Zero Nagato for me. Nagato has the eyes of the
Sage of Six Paths. He will be the key to opening the Eye of the Moon plan."
Kisame Kisaki nodded and said, "Okay, I will monitor the other party for you."
It was at this time that an ANBU came to the Pufferfish Demon's base in Xigua
Mountain.
The ANBU glanced at the Watermelon Mountain Fugu Demon lying on the ground, and
then at the Inari Kakisame Kisame holding the sword Samehada, smiled bitterly in
his heart, and then slowly said:
"Lord Mizukage has an order to order the Watermelon Mountain Puffer Demon to go to
Amegakure Village to retrieve the four lost ninja swords for Kirigakure.
It turns out that the Suikoyama Fugu Oni Ninja Sword, Samehada, has been taken
away, and the identity of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen is passed on to his
subordinate, Gansaki Kisame.
Kisame Kisaki took over from the Watermelon Mountain Pufferfish to carry out the
Mizukage-sama's order and went to Amegakure to take back the Ninja Sword. "
After announcing the mission, the ANBU left the base without looking back.
Kirigakure Village has adopted the blood mist policy since the Third Mizukage. The
blood mist policy was further promoted in the hands of the Fourth Mizukage. If the
subordinates of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen have the strength to kill the Seven Ninja
Swordsmen, they can directly take over. Inherit the ninja sword.
Now that Kisame Kisaki has killed the Watermelon Mountain Fugu Oni, he has
naturally become the new user of the Great Sword Samehada.
"Haha." Kisame Mikigaki sneered, and after turning around and not seeing Madara
Uchiha, he also walked away from here.
……
Yuyin Village.
Nagato and Jiraiya returned to the Rain Hidden Village together.
Because Jiraiya joined the Akatsuki organization, this made Nagato very happy,
although Jiraiya did not agree with the philosophy of the Akatsuki organization
from the bottom of his heart.
But Jiraiya is his mentor after all. Without Jiraiya's teachings, it is unknown
whether he, Konan or Yahiko, could survive the Second Ninja War alive.
Although his eyes are powerful, they must be able to use them.
"Nagato, I didn't expect that Amegakure Village has changed so much." Jiraiya was
walking on the streets of Amegakure Village, and he could even feel the respect in
the eyes of the villagers of Amegakure Village.
That was not respect for his status as a Sannin, but respect for the black red
cloud robe he wore.
"One, two, one! One, two, one! Grit your teeth and keep up. Don't fall behind. If
you fall behind, you will train for ten more laps!"
At this time, Jiraiya suddenly heard a familiar voice from around the corner.
He always felt that he had heard this voice somewhere, but he couldn't figure it
out.
After all, Jiraiya was not familiar with Matt Dai. The main reason why he was
impressed by Matt Dai was that as a genin, Matt Dai single-handedly killed four
people with seven ninja swords. His record was too loud. It was so loud that even
Jiraiya was surprised.
As Matt Dai's figure appeared from a corner, both Jiraiya and Matt Dai froze in
place.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
Jiraiya was stunned because in Konoha's system, Matt Dai had been marked for
sacrifice, and now that Matt Dai appeared in front of him was the same as
resurrecting from the dead.
This is especially true for Matt Dai. You must know that the identity of Jiraiya
Sannin may not be very well-known among the new generation. Even if they know it,
they will only know one Orochimaru.
But in the eyes of Matt Dai's generation, Jiraiya was like thunder, and the
reputation of the Sannin was known to everyone.
And he, an ordinary Konoha genin, usually doesn't even have a chance to talk to the
three ninjas.
Now, Jiraiya's expression clearly shows that he knows him, not to mention that the
other person is wearing the uniform of the Akatsuki organization, which is
undoubtedly subverting Matt Dai's cognition.
"Matt Dai? Why are you here? Are you not...?" Jiraiya asked with some
confusion."Jiraiya-sama, I...you..." Matt Dai hesitated, then pointed at the
Akatsuki uniform on Jiraiya's body.
The two of them couldn't say a word for a while.
After all, nothing is more embarrassing than this.
Two Konoha ninjas met in other villages. One of them got a position as a ninja
teacher in another village, and the other got a position similar to an ANBU in
another village.
――――
The Blood Mist Policy is a policy proposed and implemented by the Third Mizukage.
During the Third World War, before the Kannabi Bridge incident occurred,
Kirigakure's ninjas called themselves Blood Mist Ninjas.
Gotachibana Yagura himself agreed with the blood mist policy, but Gotachibana
Yagura would not be so dazed as to massacre the blood step clan. It was Obito who
used Sharingan to control Gotachibana Yagura before he made the decision to
massacre the blood step ninja clan. action.

Chapter 110 Am I really a succubus?

"Matt Dai, I still have some things to do here. I'll come and talk to you in detail
later." Jiraiya thought about it for a while and decided to go see Konan first. As
for Matt Dai, he is here now. Well, I can't run away again.
Judging from the other party's behavior and expression, it is very likely that Matt
Dai was in Amegakure Village after killing the Seven Ninja Swordsmen.
"Okay Lord Jiraiya, I also have something to ask you." Matt Dai had an instinctive
respect for Jiraiya. After all, the gap in status between the two was too huge
before.
Jiraiya shook his head, "Just call me Jiraiya. Forget about the word "sir." After
all, you are older than me.
I saw that kid Kai when I returned to Konoha. He was very good and very talented. "
After hearing the news about Metkai from Jiraiya, Metaka was also very excited. He
bent down and bowed deeply to Jiraiya.
"Jiraiya, thank you very much for telling me the news about Kai."
"That kid Kai misses you too. If you have a chance, come back to Konoha and take a
look." Jiraiya patted Matt Dai on the shoulder, and then followed Nagato to where
Konan was.
Soon, the two arrived at their destination.
Amegakure Village is different from Konoha. Although it is in a stage of
development, there are not many government affairs. With the help of Uzumaki Kana,
the secretary, Xiaonan has completed the government affairs early.
She was standing in front of the window, overlooking the environment of Yuyin
Village.
At first, she was very nervous when she accepted the position of Yuying. However,
after she had been a Yuying for a few years, she became accustomed to the identity
of Yuying.
Every time when overlooking Yuyin Village, in addition to the sense of glory,
Xiaonan also has the famous emotion of longing rising in her heart.
She missed Teacher Feng a little, she really wanted to meet him, she really wanted
to hold Teacher Feng in her arms, she really wanted to...
"Xonan, Mr. Jiraiya is here, please make preparations." At this time, Tiandao's
voice sounded from behind Xiaonan.
Konan turned around, and Tiandao briefly described to Konan how he absorbed
Jiraiya-sensei into the Akatsuki organization.
After listening, Xiaonan nodded and asked, "I know, but have you thought about how
to arrange Jiraiya-sensei?"
Tiandao replied: "I plan to let Mr. Jiraiya and Pain work together in the ninja
world to find candidates with the strength to join the Akatsuki organization. After
all, the beginning of the plan is the time to test the combat power of the Akatsuki
organization.
Teacher Jiraiya will be here soon. "
After Tiandao finished speaking, he left Yuying's office directly.
In a matter of seconds, Jiraiya and Nagato opened the office door and walked in.
"Konan..." Jiraiya spoke softly, with a little uncertainty in his tone.
The changes in Xiao Nan at this moment were so great that he even dared not
recognize her.
"Jiraiya-sensei, long time no see." Konan's voice was cold, and the temperament
brought by Kage's identity often gave people a condescending feeling.
"Ang, Xiaonan, I have worked hard for you all these years." Jiraiya said with some
distress.
He wondered if he had left in too much of a hurry.
In Jiraiya's impression, Konan was still the little girl wearing a frog uniform,
following behind him and folding paper cranes for him.
"There is nothing hard, everything is for Amegakure and for the ideal of peace in
the ninja world." Xiaonan said calmly.
If it was before the Hanzo incident, she would have been extremely excited when she
saw Teacher Jiraiya, but now Xiaonan's heart has been overwhelmingly occupied by He
Feng.
Whether it is the emotion between men and women or the emotion between teachers and
students.
In this regard, it can only be said that He Feng, the succubus, is really guilty of
shame.
Jiraiya looked at Konan's cold look and felt even more sorry for Konan's
experiences over the years.
"Xonan, I will stay in Yuyin Village for a while. If you need anything, just tell
the teacher." Jiraiya sighed, planning to heal his two disciples bit by bit.
After all, in Jiraiya's view, although Konan and Nagato both have a yearning for
peace in their hearts, their obsessions are deeper.
He hoped that after his intervention, the two people's mood would improve.
It's just a pity that Yahiko was too far away and he didn't see Yahiko.
"Well, then I'll trouble you, Jiraiya-sensei." Konan nodded, then stretched out his
hand.
A piece of paper flew out of Xiao Nan's hand and automatically folded into the
shape of a butterfly in the sky.
The piece of paper flew out along the office door.
Soon, Uzumaki Kana's figure followed Butterfly into the office.
------------------xxxx--------------------

"Uzumaki clan?" Jiraiya noticed Uzumaki Kana's red hair at first glance.
"It seems that Nagato has been looking for his own clan for so many years." Jiraiya
was thinking in his mind. Konoha once went to support the Uzumaki clan when they
were suddenly attacked. However, when Konoha came to the country of Uzumaki, The
Uzumaki clan has been exterminated.
Nagato seemed to see Jiraiya's doubts and simply explained: "Uzumaki Kana was
rescued by the Akatsuki organization from Kusugakure Village."
Konan looked at Uzumaki Kana and said, "Kana, please take Jiraiya-sensei to find a
suitable house."
"Okay, Lord Amekage." Uzumaki Kana nodded to Konan, then looked at Jiraiya and
stretched out her hand to guide Jiraiya, "Jiraiya-sama, please go this way."
Jiraiya nodded and did not stay.
Anyway, there is plenty of time next, not just this moment, and he also wants to
talk to Matt Dai.
According to the intelligence, Matt Dai opened the last gate of death in the Eight
Gate Dunjia Formation at that time, and then he had the strength to kill four of
the Seven Ninja Swordsmen.
But the fate after the death door is opened is almost certain. He is really
confused and can only ask the person involved.
After Jiraiya left, Nagato said: "Senior Feng is heading to the Hidden Rain Village
with his teammates. If nothing else happens, he should arrive tomorrow."
Hearing this, Xiaonan's eyes lit up and she felt extremely excited.
"Teacher Feng is finally coming to see me!"
……
The next day.
【Favorability +1 from Xiaonan】
【Favorability +1 from Xiaonan】
【Favorability +1 from Xiaonan】
He Feng looked at the favorability prompts popping up in front of his eyes and felt
confused.
What happened? Why did Xiaonan's favorability suddenly jump out? This kind of
situation has not happened before, but it has never been so exaggerated.
You know, before this, this situation only happened when Tsunade contributed
favorability points to He Feng.
Thinking of this, He Feng couldn't help but feel a chill down his back.
No way, no way.
Konan won't evolve into Tsunade-san, right?
In various senses, He Feng still wants to control Xiao Nan rather than being
manipulated by Xiao Nan.
"Forget it, it's a blessing or a curse. I can't avoid it. I have to show some
dignity." He Feng muttered in a low voice.
"He Feng, what are you talking about?" Obito, who was walking in front, suddenly
turned around.
"No, it's nothing." He Feng shook his head, feeling guilty for some reason.
"Am I really a succubus?" He Feng had such an idea in his mind for no reason.

Chapter 111 Xiaonan’s thoughts, [Experience: 1]

The Rain Hidden Village is different from other Ninja Villages. Since Hanzo ruled
the Rain Hidden Village, the Rain Hidden Village has adopted an extremely strict
border policy. Everyone who wants to come to the Rain Hidden Village must go
through strict review.
Now, although Yuyin Village has been taken over by Xiaonan, its border policy is
still strictly enforced.
After all, compared to other villages, Yuyin Village pays more attention to the
development of ninja talents. Yuyin Village is also the village with the highest
popularity rate of ninjas.
In addition, Yuyin Village has a developed industrial base, which makes Yuyin
Village like an iron barrel during wartime, almost impossible to be invaded.
And Hefeng and others were outside Yuyin Village at this time, struggling with how
to enter Yuyin Village.
After all, the three of them were out on a mission and had no valid reason to
enter.
"If you ask me, I can just use my divine power to take everyone in. With my divine
power, there are places in the ninja world that we can't go to." Obito waved his
hand, not taking Amegakure Village seriously at all.
Kakashi nodded, agreeing with Obito's opinion. It was obvious that he also
recognized the convenience of Kamui.
Although he looked down on Obito's dog's sneaky behavior when using the
virtualization, he would not let him look down on the power of the gods and the
strength of the virtualization.
Kakashi is confident that if there is no Hollow, ten Obitos would not be enough for
him to defeat.
At this time, it was raining in the Rain Hidden Village, with sparse raindrops in
the sky, and Nagato was also in the Rain Hidden Village. For Nagato, the Chakra
consumed by the Rain Tiger Freedom Technique may not be as much as his. Natural
recovery is more common.
Therefore, he had no doubt that if they went in according to Obito's method, they
would be discovered by Nagato in minutes.
At this time, in the sky not far away, paper cranes faced the drizzle in the sky,
flapped their wings made of paper, and began to circle around He Feng's head.
Hefeng knew that Xiaonan had discovered that he was here and was sending an
invitation to him.
But obviously you can’t bring your brother and Obito with you when meeting Xiaonan.
Just like he couldn't let them see the scene of him warming Tsunade's bed.
"Eh? These origami can actually fly on their own, and they're still in the rain!"
Obito looked at the paper crane hovering above He Feng's head, feeling a little
confused.
"This should be a secret technique." Kakashi made a judgment.
He Feng did not answer, but began to think in his heart.
He is now facing a choice.
Should I sneak into the Hidden Rain Village secretly with my brother and Obito, or
should I go find Konan by myself?
He Feng hesitated.
He hesitated for less than a second.
"Obito, just use your Kamui to take Kakashi-nii to Amegakure Village. There should
be surprises waiting for you two in Amegakure Village. I suddenly have something to
deal with here...
Well, that’s what happened during the half year I lived with Grandpa Madara. Now I
want toGo take care of it, it's urgent. "
After hearing what He Feng said was urgent, Kakashi and Obito immediately patted
their chests and expressed that they could help.
But He Feng shook his head, "Either I fight someone, it's a female ninja."
"Aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaable,
kunoichi, it's okay." Obito said with a look that I understand, "With He Feng's
charm, what else can happen with kunoichi? I really can't get involved in this kind
of thing."
Kakashi didn't speak, just nodded while crossing his chest.
He also thinks so. His younger brother's charm is unparalleled.
After parting ways with Kakashi and Obito, the paper crane above He Feng began to
fly in one direction.
He Feng took a step forward and followed.
at the same time.
Xiaonan had already left Yuyin's office.
She was currently in the room where He Feng lived at the beginning.
The place was kept spotless. Xiao Nan lay on the bed and buried his face on the
pillow He Feng had rested on.
"Teacher Feng, I miss you so much." Xiaonan closed her eyes, and He Feng seemed to
appear in her eyes.
As for the paper cranes that lead He Feng, they are completely the spells that
Xiaonan released a long time ago, and they are just executing the program that
Xiaonan and Nagato set together.
When Hefeng's chakra is detected within the Yuyin Village, Zhihe will activate the
automatic path-finding mode, first come to the location of the chakra source, and
bring it to the initiator of the technique.
At this moment, Hefeng looked at Xiaonan, who was hugging the pillow and saying I
miss you so much, and felt as if a hammer had hit her heart.
"Xiao Nan." He Feng said softly.
After hearing He Feng's voice, Xiao Nan reacted suddenly, and then turned his head
to look in He Feng's direction.
"Teacher Feng!" Xiaonan had never seen He Feng's appearance before, but at this
moment she was sure that the person in front of her was the Teacher Feng whom he
longed for.
At this moment, Xiaonan no longer had the reserve and coldness in her heart that
she should have as a shadow, as a white tiger of the dawn, and as an angel of the
rain.
Ignoring her somewhat messy clothes, she rushed forward and held He Feng in her
arms.
"Teacher Feng, I miss you so much. I miss you so much." Xiaonan's voice was a
little sob, mixed with endless longing.
Since Xiaonan was rescued by He Feng, He Feng's figure has been deeply engraved in
her heart, and her obsession with He Feng has grown day by day.
"Okay, I'm already here." He Feng reached out and patted Xiao Nan's back,
comforting him softly. "If Xiaonan misses me in the future, you can tell me at any
time and I will come to see you as soon as possible."
It has to be said that He Feng's words still have great power.
With his comfort, Xiao Nan quickly recovered.
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
Xiao Nan finally let go of He Feng after her mood returned to calm.
She stared at He Feng affectionately, her golden pupils filled with love and
longing that could no longer be suppressed.
She whispered: "Teacher Feng, you have become taller."
He Feng nodded happily.
He was happy to hear this.
Xiaonan continued: "Teacher Feng has also become stronger."
He Feng continued to nod. He had indeed become a lot stronger, and the fundamental
gap between him and almost all the ninjas in the world had widened.
Xiaonan shook her lips, and the lip nails at the bottom of her lips added an extra
layer of temptation to this move.
"Teacher Feng, it's so hard for me to endure."
He Feng nodded subconsciously, but he quickly realized what he wanted to do. Just
when he was about to ask Xiao Nan what he wanted to do, his mouth was blocked by
something soft and delicate.
Hefeng's brain immediately went blank, and his intelligent brain began to go
offline.
At this moment, Hefeng's succubus physique began to show its power. A pure energy
was born from the two bodies and spread to each other through the connection,
increasing the potential and strength of the two.
At this moment, He Feng finally seized the opportunity to escape from the title of
succubus shame.
At this moment, He Feng chose to accept his fate.
I don’t know why, but his strength is completely useless in this kind of matter.
Even with super shadow strength, he can only be at the mercy of others.
【The Succubus's Confidante has been included】
[Click to view]
【Name: Xiaonan】
--------------------xxxx--------------------

[Strength: Shadow level (Shadow level)]

【Age: 18】
【Experience: 1】
[Ability: Shiki Secret Technique, Sealing Technique...]
[Favorability: 100 (live and die together)]

Chapter 112 He Feng’s helplessness

Early the next morning.
"Teacher Feng..." Xiaonan put her hands on Hefeng weakly, and her voice was
extremely weak, as if she had been absorbed by Yang Qi.
Of course, it was not that He Feng, the little succubus, used his ability to
collect yin and replenish yang, but that He Feng's overall strength was too strong.
Although he could only passively fall into the disadvantage at the beginning, as
time went by, As time went by, Xiaonan's strength gradually gave out, and it was
time for Hefeng to stand up.
Xiao Nan's performance at this time was naturally inseparable from He Feng's
explosion in the second half of the night.
She is completely tired!
"Ang, I'm here." He Feng said softly.
Compared with Xiaonan, he is in full swing at this time, his waist no longer hurts,
his legs are no longer sore, and his smart IQ has once again occupied the high
ground.
After this battle, He Feng couldn't help but feelShe lamented that her previous
years had been in vain.
"Teacher Feng..." Xiaonan turned over with great effort and sat up again, biting
her lip without saying a word.
Hefeng looked at Xiaonan's eyes filled with primitive desires, and his IQ that had
just occupied the high ground dropped again.
He's a succubus, and this is serious business.
This is what He Feng told himself.
That is to say, He Feng does not write books. Otherwise, based on Xiao Nan's
original work, he should be able to write a famous book called "Xiao Nan's
Development Diary".
"..."
The third day.
The succubus physique brought not only short-term happiness to He Feng and Xiao
Nan, but also an increase in strength. The two of them were like a community, while
improving their strength, they would also feed each other back to restore the
weaker ones. physical strength.
This is why Xiaonan, as an ordinary person, is so powerful in combat and can fight
fiercely for two days and two nights.
However, two days and two nights had passed, and He Feng also planned to take a
break for the time being.
It’s not that he can’t do it anymore, it’s that he can’t leave Kakashi and Obito
alone for two days.
That would be too irresponsible.
Just when He Feng was about to get up, dress and leave, Xiaonan reached out and
held He Feng's hand.
"Teacher Feng..." Xiao Nan still didn't continue speaking, just looking at He Feng
eagerly.
At this moment, He Feng suddenly thought of an old joke from before his
reincarnation.
A hundred times, a hundred times.
"Hey, I really can't do anything about you." He Feng looked at Xiao Nan, sighed and
said helplessly.
Kakashi and Obito can't die anyway, and no one in the ninja world can keep them
here, so let's leave it alone.
"..."
The fourth day.
【The Succubus's Confidante】
[Tsunade (click to view) Konan (click to view)]
【Name: Xiaonan】
[Strength: Shadow Level (Shadow Level +)]
【Age: 18】
【Experience: 99】
[Ability: Shiki Secret Technique, Sealing Technique, Ninjutsu Mastery, Illusion
Resistance, Explosive Talisman Production...]
[Favorability: 100 (live and die together)]
It’s just one time away.
He Feng opened his mouth, not knowing what to say.
He has hardly stopped in the past three days!
Xiao Nan's reaction once made He Feng doubt one thing, that is, who is the
succubus.
"Teacher Feng..." Xiaonan licked her lips and looked at He Feng reluctantly, as if
He Feng would never come back once he left her.
"The last time." He Feng closed his eyes and then lay down straight.
Even if he works hard, he should rest.
"Hehe." Xiao Nan looked at He Feng and smiled.
……
In Yuyin Village.
Xiaonan had already told Nagato before that he was going to wait for Hefeng at the
Akatsuki organization's old base. There was no need to worry if he didn't come back
in a short time, so Nagato didn't pay too much attention to it, and instead made
arrangements for him very considerately. Completed the barrier.
In case anyone disturbs the two of them.
And during the four days when Xiao Nan and He Feng disappeared.
A series of things also happened in Yuyin Village.
On the first day, when Jiraiya and Matt Dai were drinking and chatting in the
tavern, Kakashi and Obito suddenly appeared behind them.
"Jiraiya-senpai! And Uncle Dai? Why are you here?" Kakashi's eyes widened. He
couldn't believe that he actually saw these two people in Amegakure Village.
"Haha..." Jiraiya scratched his head and laughed awkwardly, feeling a little
annoyed at the same time.
Why is my luck the same as when Tsunade was gambling? This is too shameful!
"It's Kakashi. How is Gai now? Is he depressed because of my death?" Matt Dai is
more understanding than Jiraiya. After all, he has died once. Although when facing
a big shot, Still a little bit unable to let go.
But when facing Kakashi and Obito, two good friends of his son, he was still very
calm.
Kakashi replied without even thinking: "Kaichi's strength has improved very quickly
now. I believe it won't be long before Kai can complete the Jonin promotion task
and upgrade his level to Jonin."
Matt Dai showed a pleased smile, "Well, Kai's youth will definitely be more
dazzling than mine."
"Didn't you just ask me why I appeared here? Everyone is here now, so I just told
you.
In fact, I don’t know why I appeared here. At that time, my memory only stayed at
the scene of the seven swordsmen escaping in panic after the death door was opened.
I didn’t know anything else.
But you should be able to see something like this. "
With that said, Matt Dai took off his shirt directly.
I saw that Matt Dai's body was covered with dense cracks, and the new flesh and
blood that grew out of these cracks was an abnormal pure white color.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
At the position of Matt's heart, there is a pattern of the intersection of yin and
yang.
"This?" Jiraiya fell into thinking.
"This is it!" Kakashi and Obito both widened their eyes.
For no other reason than that they had seen this situation before in Orochimaru's
laboratory.
Those Mudun experimental subjects in Orochimaru's experiments all had this kind of
skin color.
(Orochimaru has He Feng’s unconditional trust and support, so it’s normal to
experiment with a few White Zetsus, right?)
"Oh? Do you two little guys know something?" Jiraiya saw the shock of the two of
them, so he guessed that they must know something in their hearts.Domat wears this
situation.
Kakashi nodded and said: "Obito and I have seen creatures with the same skin color
as Uncle Dai's wound in the Hokage-sama's laboratory, but those creatures have
mastered the power of wood escape. Part of Hokage-sama's wood escape experiment The
results come from those organisms.”
"Lord Hokage...you mean that guy Orochimaru?!" Jiraiya was shocked.
An extremely outrageous truth appeared in his mind, so outrageous that he could not
even imagine it.
Could it be that Orochimaru is the lord in the long gate?
It's not surprising that Jiraiya has such an idea. The main reason is that
Orochimaru has changed so much over the years that Jiraiya can't believe it at all.
That guy actually turned into a woman completely, that guy actually ran for Hokage,
that guy actually became so easy to talk to!
"It's Hokage-sama." Kakashi nodded. He didn't think there was anything he couldn't
say.
Matt Dai's heart was not at peace either. He raised his hand and said slowly: "This
should be the Wood Release you are talking about Kakashi."
Only branches were seen growing out of Maitdai's hands. With the supply of
Maitdai's chakra, those seemingly fragile branches also had powerful destructive
power.

Chapter 113 Kakashi’s Ultimate Fantasy

"This is Wood Release!" Jiraiya stood up from his chair, his voice loud enough to
make other people in the tavern look at him.
However, after seeing the Akatsuki uniform on Jiraiya and the ring on Jiraiya's
right index finger, those people tacitly withdrew their gaze, as if they had never
seen this scene before.
"Jiraiya-senpai, they seem to be very afraid of you, they don't even dare to look
over here." Obito complained.
Matt Dai then said: "Jiraiya joined the Akatsuki organization and became one of the
ten pillars of the Akatsuki organization. The status of the pillars of the Akatsuki
organization in the Hidden Rain Village is equivalent to that of the ninja clan
leader of Konoha Village, or even higher than that. Respectable.
Therefore, those people were not afraid of Jiraiya, but respected him. "
Jiraiya also didn't expect that his clothes and ring would have such a status in
Yuyin Village.
He had never fought against Nagato at that time, and only joined the Akatsuki
organization after being threatened by Nagato.
"Akatsuki Organization? What is that?" Obito and Kakashi asked in confusion.
"The Akatsuki Organization is the official organization of the United Ninja
Kingdom, and the ten pillars of the Akatsuki Organization are also the
representatives with the highest combat power of the United Ninja Kingdom. Each of
them has the combat power to fight the Five Kages alone.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Jiraiya is Akatsuki's Suzaku.

And I am Akatsuki Zero Type. "
Tiandao's figure appeared behind the four people, his voice calm.
After hearing the sound, Kakashi found that the entire tavern had been empty since
unknown time.
"Hatake Kakashi, Uchiha Obito, Ame Hidden Village welcomes you." Tiandao's attitude
towards Kakashi and Obito is not bad.
After all, the two of them had a close relationship with He Feng, and one of them
was He Feng's elder brother. With Nagato's respect for He Feng, it was naturally
impossible for him to do anything disrespectful to He Feng.
"Penn, they are just children and have nothing to do with this matter." Jiraiya
stood in front of Kakashi and Obito, fearing that the other party would threaten
them.
Matt Day was a little at a loss. He stayed in Yuyin Village for several years.
Although he didn't learn any confidential information during this period, Xiaonan
did not avoid Matt Day specifically, such as meeting Payne.
Therefore, in Matt Day's view, Payne is not as cold as he appears. In his heart, he
is as kind and gentle as Yuying.
"Jiraiya, I have no intention of taking action in Yuyin Village, and I also have no
intention of taking action against these two. You don't have to be so nervous."
Because of other people's reasons, Nagato needed to maintain Pain's dignity, so he
did not call Jiraiya a teacher.
Jiraiya also knew this, so instead of calling Nagato by his name, he called Nagato
Pain.
"Hatake Kakashi, Uchiha Obito, what do you think of the Akatsuki organization?"
Tiandao looked at the two and asked.
The pair of reincarnation eyes still exude pressure invisibly.
However, Kakashi and Obito are not ordinary ninjas, and will not be frightened by
the Rinnegan.
"The Akatsuki organization sounds pretty cool!" Obito made his own evaluation.
His understanding of the Akatsuki organization was only a few words from Pain and
the reaction of everyone in the Hidden Rain Village to Jiraiya, so he could only
make this evaluation.
"Emmmm, if each of the ten pillars of the Akatsuki organization has the ability to
fight against the Five Shadows alone, as you said, then the Akatsuki organization
should be the most powerful ninja organization currently."
Kakashi also made his own judgment. After all, there were only a few ninjas at the
level of the Five Shadows in a village.
There are ten members in an Akatsuki organization, so there is no need to say who
is strong or weak.
Pain nodded, "Then have you ever thought about joining the Akatsuki organization
like Jiraiya and becoming one of the Ten Pillars?"
Pain extended an invitation to Kakashi and Obito.
There is no doubt about the combat power of the two. Kakashi has not yet reached
its peak and is still some distance away from the shadow-level combat power.
However, this does not prevent Kakashi's potential from being a genuine shadow-
level.
If Obito joins the Akatsuki organization, he has no burden at all. Once the
Mangekyou Sharingan is opened, with his virtualization and divine power, he is not
afraid of anyone in the ninja world.
You know, Obito now has two divine powers!
"join indawn? ! Obito's eyes widened, and then he waved his hand to Pain, "If you
don't add me, I will be the Hokage in the future!" Wouldn't joining the Akatsuki
organization require me to betray Konoha? I won't do it. "
Kakashi nodded similarly. His home is in Konoha, and his family is also in Konoha.
He has no thoughts of betraying and joining other organizations.
Pain wasn't angry, he just smiled, "If you say so, Jiraiya can be considered a
traitor to Konoha. Matt Dai also teaches and educates people in my Yugakure. Could
it be that Matt Dai also betrayed Konoha?" Ye?"
Hearing this, Kakashi and Obito were silent.
It is possible for anyone to betray Konoha, but it is absolutely impossible for
Jiraiya and Matt Dai to betray Konoha.
Both of them are ninjas who regard nindo as more important than life.
Seeing Kakashi and Obito's hesitation, Payne continued: "Joining the Akatsuki
organization will not impose any restrictions on you. It's just that if the
Akatsuki organization has a task in the future, you will need to complete it. This
task will not pose any threat. The situation in Konoha Hidden Village emerged.
How about this? "
"Then what are the benefits of joining the Akatsuki organization? We can't keep
letting Kakashi and I work for nothing for you." Obito asked again.
Jiraiya on the side felt helpless when he saw that the two of them had obviously
taken the bait.
But he didn’t intend to stop the two of them.
If the Akatsuki organization is all composed of its own people, then it is
impossible to say whether it is the Akatsuki organization of Amegakure, the
Akatsuki organization of the United Ninja Kingdom, or the Akatsuki organization of
Konoha.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
"Of course there are benefits. If you two join the Akatsuki organization, you will
be directly appointed as the new Ten Pillars. If you encounter any enemies that
cannot be solved, you can communicate through the communication equipment of the
Akatsuki organization. Within the organization, Members have the obligation to help
each other.
In addition, joining the Akatsuki organization will also provide various rewards in
terms of money, ninjutsu, secret techniques, etc., as well as rewards for
completing tasks.
Completing a task assigned by the Akatsuki organization is definitely much more
rewarding than completing a Konoha task.
As for more hidden benefits, it cannot be explained in a few words.
In short, joining the Akatsuki organization has only advantages and no
disadvantages. "
At this moment, Nagato felt that he and Yahiko were similar. This was the second
time that he had suddenly...convinced others, including Feng-senpai's brother.
It’s a bit exciting just thinking about it.
Nagato's mind was very active, and he didn't show any depth at all.
In this life, he is not bitter and hateful, but he also yearns for peace in his
heart, so he should be more positive as a whole.
It’s just that Payne’s external performance needs to look like he is bitter and
resentful.
"I'm joining!" Obito convinced himself that the Akatsuki organization sounded very
good, and he also wanted to become stronger in the Akatsuki organization.
When Kakashi saw Obito joining, he made a decision in his heart: "I will join too."
His thoughts were similar to Obito's, but Kakashi thought more about him finally
acting like an older brother.
At least I joined an organization that looked very powerful.
He had already imagined in his mind that one day when He Feng was at a loss when
faced with an unsolvable problem, he waved his hand and called over Shi Zhu from
the Xiao organization. After supporting them together, He Feng said to him with
stars in his eyes:
"Ni-chan, you damn dog."

Chapter 114 The First Mission

"This is the ring and windbreaker of the Akatsuki organization." Payne took out the
scroll he carried with him and summoned two rings from it, as well as a black-and-
red cloud windbreaker similar in size to Kakashi and Obito.
The two took the ring handed over by Payne.
The ring in Kakashi’s hand has the code name ‘Ao’ on it.
The ring in Obito's hand has the mark of 'Xuan'.
"When you encounter something, you only need to transfer chakra into the ring, and
other people holding the ring can feel it and get in touch."
In this way, Kakashi and Obito successfully joined the Akatsuki organization
without He Feng's knowledge and with Nagato's coaxing and deceiving tactics.
Replaced the positions of Deidara and Black Zetsu in the original timeline.
After Payne successfully invited Kakashi and Obito, he left the tavern.
After the Akatsuki organization successfully invited Kakashi and Obito to join,
there are already six people in the position of ten pillars.
Both the Akatsuki Organization and the United Ninja Kingdom are facing a financial
crisis.
The assets left by the former daimyo of the three small countries were almost
burned by Yahiko.
Therefore, the Xiao organization urgently needs someone who knows how to make money
and has the ability to make money to join.
According to accurate information, there is indeed a person named Kakuzu in the
ninja world who is very talented in making money. Kakuzu appeared in Kingdom Kokuto
some time ago.
The next day, after Nagato further confirmed the location of Kakuzu, he transferred
chakra to the ring in his hand.
At the same time, Yahiko, Konan, Jiraiya, Kakashi and Obito all received the
prompt.
However, Xiaonan took off the ring and threw it aside, and then devoted herself to
business again, without any intention of paying any attention to it.
Yahiko first asked the people around him to retreat, then sat cross-legged on the
ground and transferred chakra into the ring.
After those chakras were transmitted into the ring, they were converted into
'missing waves' and transmitted to Nagato.
Jiraiya and others were also taught how to use the ring by Nagato, so there was no
confusion.
Soon, five phantoms with colorful bright patterns appeared in a cave. On the other
side of the cave was a huge demon statue.
Jiraiya and the other three noticed it immediatelyEven if they are thousands of
miles apart from the heretic demon, even if it is just a projection of their
consciousness, they can still feel the power emanating from the heretic demon.
"Yahiko, is that you?" Jiraiya looked at one of the illusions and asked with some
uncertainty.
The fantasy nodded, "Jiraiya-sensei, it's me."
Nagato did not give Jiraiya a chance to continue reminiscing, but said: "The
operation organized by Akatsuki consists of two people as a team, Kakashi and
Obito, and now there is a task for you two."
"At the location of
Kakashi and Obito looked at each other. They had no idea that they would join the
Akatsuki organization one day and get a mission the next day.
At this moment, the two of them felt like they had been deceived.
However, both of them are action people and immediately nodded and accepted the
task.
"Okay, but we need information from Kakuzu." Kakashi said first.
"Intelligence about Kakuzu will be sent to your residence by the Akatsuki
organization's logistics members. After successfully recruiting Kakuzu, the reward
will be delivered in the same form."
Soon, this brief slide communication came to an end.
Withdrawing his consciousness, Kakashi and Obito looked at each other.
Obito asked first, "If we do the mission of the Akatsuki organization, what if
Hefeng can't find us after handling the matter?"
Kakashi thought for a moment and then replied: "He Feng can locate the location
through the flying thunder god on your arm, Obito. There will be no problem of not
being able to find us, and we can't rely on He Feng for everything.
I also have to act like an older brother.
People who can be valued by the Akatsuki organization should not be bad in
strength. We may have a tough battle this time. "
While Kakashi and Obito were chatting, the logistics staff of the Akatsuki
organization also came to the room where the two were staying with an information
scroll.
"Master Qinglong, Master Xuanwu, this is the information scroll about this
operation. I wish you good luck in martial arts." The logistics staff placed the
palm of their right hand on the heart and saluted respectfully to the two of them.
Then, before Kakashi and Obito could reply, the man left directly.
The two of them were a little confused.
"This should be the salute gesture of the Akatsuki organization." Kakashi made a
judgment.
Obito opened the scroll impatiently.
There is a portrait of Kakuzu on the scroll, and below the portrait there is some
intelligence analysis of Kakuzu.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

[Name: Kakuzu]
[Sex: Male]
[Approximate strength judgment: Shadow level]
[General character analysis: It is said that Kakuzu is a ninja of the same era as
the first Hokage Senju Hashirama. It has been more than eighty years since Kakuzu
mastered the secret technique of Takigakure Village, and has a special Means to
prolong life, known as 'the person who lives as long as heaven and earth'
Kakuzu possesses five attributes of chakra, and has extremely strong individual
combat capabilities. The specific ability position of the Earth Resentment Yu
Secret Technique is speculated to be related to Kakuzu's extremely long lifespan.
Kakuzu's true value lies in his powerful ability to amass money and his reliable
intelligence analysis. Kakuzu has accumulated wealth that rivals other countries
over the years, and he is fully capable of serving as the financial manager of the
Akatsuki organization. ]
[The target is currently located approximately at: (map mark)]
Looking at the information on the scroll, Kakashi and Obito were both stunned.
Just because the two brothers have already met Kakuzu himself, and have defeated
each other with their strength.
"Is this horn really that strong?" Obito asked with some uncertainty.
"There should be. After all, for an organization as big as Akatsuki, the
information cannot be wrong." Kakashi was also a little unsure.
Hearing this, Obito was a little sad.
"I didn't expect that we have become so strong. That is a shadow-level combat
power, which means that our strength is almost the same as that of the Five
Shadows."
For Obito, it seems that a while ago he was still studying in the ninja school, and
as time passed, he already had a combat power that was recognized as a Kage level.
"Yes, but we are still far away. After I return to Konoha and give birth, I will go
to Mt. Myoboku to completely master the sage mode!"
"Then I will also go to see Lord Hokage. I want to learn the sage mode of Ryūchi
Cave. Lord Hokage should agree and guide me into Ryūchi Cave."
The relationship between Obito and Orochimaru is relatively good, after all, he has
been Orochimaru's test subject for so many years.
"Let's set out as soon as possible. After successfully recruiting Kakuzu, we will
return to Konoha with He Feng, and by the way, tell that guy Kai that Senior Dai is
still alive." Kakashi opened the door and took out the A map showing the
approximate location of Kakuto.
"Well, it's just Kakuto, not worth mentioning."
Chapter 115 Dried persimmon Kisame delivered to your door
Kakuzu is very powerful, but he can't beat the combination of Obito and Kakashi.
Facing the two of them, Kakuzu's defeat was only a matter of time.
On the third day of Hefeng and Xiaonan's romance, Yuyin Village also welcomed
several uninvited guests.
Kisame Kisaki stood outside Amegakure Village with his sword and Samehada on his
back.
Behind him were four Kirigakure Anbu, all of whom had the strength of jounin.
"The order issued by Mizukage-sama is to sneak into and recapture the four ninja
swords that appeared in Amegakure Village, and the four of you were once one of the
successors of those four ninja swords.
I believe that if you take back the Ninja Sword, thenThe four ninja swords will be
inherited by you smoothly, and the positions of the seven ninja swords belong to
the four of you. "
Kisame Kisaki looked at the tall towers standing in the Ame Hidden Village and
grinned.
On the surface, he is here to regain the ninja sword for Kirigakure Village, but
secretly he has another mission, which is to join the Akatsuki organization and
work undercover for Uchiha Madara's Eye of the Moon plan.
And these four Kirigakure Anbu were just victims of Inikigaki Kisame's plan.
"You don't need to tell me that I will do the same. The double swords and flounder
must be mine." The person who spoke had white hair and jagged fangs.
"Gui Deng Hangyue, I hope you keep your word and won't compete with me for the
beheading sword."
"Hmph! It's just a small village, but it dares to occupy the ninja sword of the
Blood Mist Ninja in my Kirigakure Village. I don't know how high the world is."
"Hurry up and complete this mission. I can't wait to have my own ninja sword."
Listening to the heroic words expressed by the four teammates, Inikisaki Kisame
laughed disdainfully in his heart.
The ninjas of Kirigakure are always immersed in the illusion of their own world,
always living in arrogant fantasies and unable to see the reality.
Inikigaki Kisame had information from Black Zetsu, so naturally he would not think
that Amegakure Village was just an ordinary little shinobi village.
"Let's go. This mission to retake the ninja sword is very likely to involve a
battle. We must fight quickly and never be reluctant to fight." Kisame Mikigaki
walked at the front, after he entered the boundaries of Amegakure Village.
Nagato, who had closed his eyes to rest in the central tower, opened his eyes
directly.
"The ninjas from Kirigakure Village are here to get the four ninja swords, right?"
Nagato whispered softly, while controlling Pain to form a circle around the five
people.
Under Yuhu's art of freedom, everyone who steps into Yuyin Village is under his
surveillance. It is impossible to sneak into Yuyin Village silently.
Of course, Nagato didn’t just let Payne play the Six Paths, he also asked Payne to
call Jiraiya.
And under the watchful eye of Nagato, Inikisaki Kisame and others successfully
sneaked into a high tower in Amegakure Village.
"The ninjas of Kirigakure have entered the Hidden Rain Village without
authorization. Are you ready to accept God's judgment?" Zhu Shengdao walked out of
a shadow and looked at Mikigaki Kisame and others with a proud expression.
"It's the enemy!" Before Kisame Kisaki could react, the Kirigakure ANBU took the
first step to form seals and move their hands.
As ninjas who were killed from the Blood Mist Policy in Kirigakure Village, they
knew one thing very well.
Only dead enemies are good enemies, and there is no need to talk nonsense with dead
people.
"Ninjutsu: Kirigakure no Jutsu!" The four people formed seals at the same time,
releasing the Kirigakure ninja's most famous ninjutsu.
In an instant, countless mist filled the airtight tower. For a time, the visible
distance inside the tower was less than one meter.
"Kirigakure Silent Killing Technique!" Four ANBU ninjas appeared silently behind
the beast, each holding a kunai in their hands, and then launched an attack on the
beast together.
At this moment, Zhu Shengdao jumped directly into the air.
"Psychic art!"
A mist appeared in the sky again. As the mist dissipated, six figures fell to the
ground.
Each of these six people was wearing a black red cloud windbreaker, and their eyes
were extremely calm.
"Do you want to solve them all?" Jiraiya looked at Tiandao and asked.
As a ninja who has been famous for many years, Jiraiya's hands are stained with
quite a lot of blood. In addition, these people are Kirigakure's ninjas, so Jiraiya
naturally doesn't have any pressure to do anything.
"Well, let's solve them all." Tiandao nodded, and then appeared at the exit of the
tower, blocking the opponent's retreat.
The Hungry Ghost Dao stretched out his hands.
A transparent barrier rose, and the mist floating in the air was absorbed by it
until it disappeared.
After the fog dissipated, Kisame was proud to see the appearance of the person
coming.
"Is that the Rinnegan Eye that Madara Uchiha talks about? There is actually
Jiraiya, the Sannin of Konoha, in the Akatsuki organization. It should be said that
it is worthy of being an organization that Madara Uchiha values." Kisame Mikigaki
muttered in his heart.
At the same time, he also held the sword Samehada on his back.
He heard all the solutions that the other party said. Kisame was not so arrogant
that he looked down on the Sannin and Pain who had the Samsara Eye.
However, compared to Kisame, Kirigakure's four Anbu were somewhat unable to see the
situation clearly.
As jounin born in the blood mist, they always have a blind confidence in
themselves, just like the second brother and the boss.
"Fire Release: Fire Dragon Flame Bullet!" Three giant dragons made of flames
spurted out from Jiraiya's mouth and attacked the Kirigakure ninja.
"Psychic art!" Zhu Shengdao once again released his psychic art and summoned
several invisible chameleons.
The two puppets of Human World and Shura Dao stepped forward to attack the
Kirigakure ninja.
"Haha..." Kisame Kisame sneered and faced Tiandao who was standing at the door.
"Interesting." Tiandao looked at Gansaki Kisame with interest.
He can sense the chakra contained in Kisame's body.
That amount of chakra has surpassed Jiraiya and is on par with him.
A ninja with this kind of chakra content is enough to attract Nagato's attention.
"Ninjas of Kirigakure, please state your name." Tiandao said coldly.
"The Seven Ninja Swordsmen, the Great Sword and Samehada user Gansaki Kisame!"
Kisame held Samehada in his hand and made an attack stance.
"You can call me Payne, and there are only two choices you face next.
1. Try your best to show your strength and get my approval before I kill you.I will
allow you to join the Akatsuki organization.
Second, try your best to hold on and try to see if you can escape from my hands
alive. "
Tiandao's expression was full of arrogance, as if killing a seven-man Ninja
Swordsman was nothing to him.
"Should I say that he is worthy of being a god of the United Ninja Kingdom? He is
so arrogant." Kisame still had that cynical tone, even though the person he was
facing was the most powerful Tendo among Pain's Six Paths.
"Sameki-Saki Slash!" Kisame waved his sword, Samehada, towards Tiandao. At the same
time, the spikes on Samehada broke through the bandage and were revealed.
Tiandao just stood there and raised his right hand towards Kisame.
"Shenluo Tianzheng."

Chapter 116: Sexual transformation Obito? no! no!

Invisible repulsive force erupted from Tiandao's body, knocking away Kisame who
stepped forward and the Samehada in his hand.
"!" Kisame tried to adjust his posture in the air, and then fell down awkwardly.
The powerful repulsive force of Tiandao is like a dump truck, so the consequences
of being hit by a dump truck will not be much better.
"Ahem." Kisame coughed twice but did not step forward rashly.
"Water Release: Explosive Water Wave!" Kisame jumped into the sky, and a large
amount of chakra gathered at his throat.
The next second, a large amount of water enough to form a lake was spit out from
Kisame's mouth, and the water level in the tower surrounded by walls began to rise
rapidly.
"Water Release: Five Food Sharks!" Kisame formed the seal again, and five shark-
shaped water bombs were created by him, biting towards Tiandao.
Tiandao's expression remained calm, and the water level in the tower also dropped
rapidly at the same time.
Obviously, this is the power of the Hungry Ghost Path.
Kisame looked to the side and saw that the four Kirigakure Anbu who had taken back
the ninja sword with him had all been killed.
Jiraiya and the other five Pain have surrounded him.
Facing Tiandao Kisame, it is impossible to win in a short time, let alone facing
Pain Six Paths and Jiraiya at the same time.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Looking at the inevitable losing situation in front of him, Inikisaki Kisame

laughed dryly, then put Samehada on the ground and raised his hands.
"I wonder if it's still too late for me to leave Kirigakure and join the Akatsuki
organization?"
Kisame grinned, not feeling any guilt at all for betraying his own village.
And Nagato doesn't care whether Kisame rebels against Ninja or not. Anyway, the
Ninja Village system will be overthrown in the future.
"This is your ring and uniform." Tiandao threw Kisame the 'nan' ring that
represented Akatsuki Nanto, and at the same time looked at Jiraiya aside.
"Kissame, Jiraiya, you two will form a team together from now on."
"Haha." Kisame smiled dryly, and at the same time took off his forehead protector,
took out a kunai and made a scratch on Kirigakure's forehead protector, which
represented rebellion.
"..." Jiraiya looked at Kisame's behavior and didn't care.
In fact, from the moment he replaced his Konoha forehead protector with the 'oil'
forehead protector representing Mt. Myoboku, Jiraiya put the peace of the entire
ninja world before Konoha.
……
The time has come to the fourth day.
Inikisaki Kisame's undercover plan went very smoothly. He didn't even need to take
the initiative to do anything. Just by virtue of his outfit, he integrated well
into the Amegakure Village.
From time to time, he also inquired about some simple information from the non-
staff and logistics personnel of the Akatsuki organization.
Nagato naturally knew about this, but he didn't think there was anything wrong with
it. He just thought it was Kisame who wanted to integrate into Kirigakure Village
as soon as possible.
Kakashi and Obito also successfully returned to Yuyin Village.
Obito opened his virtual space in front of Nagato, and released all the horns that
contained only one heart and were on the verge of death.
Neither of them is the kind of person who is very eloquent, especially Kakashi who
speaks almost subconsciously with a sense of ridicule.
Under such circumstances, it is naturally impossible for Kakuzu to surrender.
The two of them were too lazy to talk nonsense. Anyway, they just needed to take
Kakuzu back.
Therefore, a war is about to break out.
Kakuzu's dying counterattack was so violent that it almost capsized Kakashi's boat
in the gutter. However, Obito's Hollow was still so abnormal. He completely
withstood Kakuzu's attack and sent the kunai into one of Kakuzu's few in the heart.
However, although the battle is very difficult and dangerous, the growth of Kakashi
and Obito is very big. After all, the two are still in a period of rapid growth.
During this period, in addition to their height, the two of them have grown very
quickly.
The strength also changes over time.
As for what to do with the dying horn.
You must know that Nagato has learned medical ninjutsu. After briefly treating
Kakuzu through the way of heaven, Kakuzu also woke up.
Under the despotic power of Pain's Six Paths and the fear of dying, Kakuzu agreed
to join Akatsuki.
At the same time, Kakuzu also received the 'North' ring that belonged to him, and
his title was Akatsuki Beidou.
At this moment, there are already eight of the ten most powerful pillars in Xiao.
Only the 'Three' Ring and the 'Jade' Ring have yet to find suitable candidates.
"It's okay to let me manage Xiao's financial issues, but one thing is that any
issues related to financial expenses need to be discussed with me and I agree,
otherwise you should kill me.
Let me watch my hard-earned money being squandered by you unscrupulously. That
would be worse than killing me. "
Kakuzu only has one heart at this time, but when faced with principled issues
related to money, he is still so stubborn.stubborn.
After all, money is the meaning of the rest of his life for Kakuzu. Only countless
money can bring him a real sense of security.
Tiandao looked at Kakuzu, but did not reply immediately, as if he was thinking
about whether to agree to the conditions proposed by Kakuzu.
It was at this moment that two figures came here.
After seeing the person coming, Kakashi and Obito, who were originally a little
bored, widened their eyes at the same time.
Jiraiya was no exception. He rubbed his eyes. No matter what, he never thought that
He Feng and Xiao Nan could be together.
The moment He Feng appeared, Kakashi and Obito surrounded him.
"He Feng, I haven't seen you for three days, why have you changed so much!" Kakashi
was very confused.
It was obvious that He Feng's external appearance had not changed at all, but he
could clearly feel that He Feng had become different.
"Wow, Hefeng, you have become so charming. If I were a woman, I would definitely
marry you." Obito said something to clear Kakashi's doubts.
After the development of Hefeng, the amplification effect brought by the succubus's
physique has been fully stimulated. Both men and women will be deeply attracted by
his charm the first time they see him.
The good impression towards He Feng in my heart will also increase infinitely.
The greater the gap in strength between the two, the more powerful this influence
will be.
Except for Kakashi, whose strength is still stuck as an elite Jonin, the others
present are all genuine Kage-level people. Therefore, there will not be too blind
an effect, and it will only inadvertently increase the favorability of He Feng.
"Obito, what nonsense are you talking about!" Kakashi was shocked in his heart.
Regarding the changes in Hefeng, it was obvious that what Obito said was more
shocking to Kakashi.
You must know that the current Hokage, Orochimaru, has successfully transformed
from a male to a female. He is really afraid that Obito will also imitate the
Hokage and do one-handed sex transformation.
Based on Kakashi's understanding of the Yondaime Hokage, if Obito really brought
this matter up, the Yondaime Hokage would never refuse, but would work very
diligently to help Obito complete the sexual transformation.
If Obito turns into a woman, Kakashi can't imagine how he will look directly at him
in the future!
"No! Absolutely not!" Kakashi shook his head violently. He even felt that the
appearance of such thoughts in his mind was a kind of pollution to his mind.

Chapter 117 He Feng is so cute, just like Qian

"Hefeng, Xiaonan, why are you together?" Jiraiya stepped forward and asked with
some confusion.
He Feng did not speak, but Xiaonan took the initiative to hold He Feng's hand.
"Jiraiya-sensei, Feng and I are lovers. Isn't it normal for us to be together?"
At this moment, Jiraiya's mind is still a little confused. Konan, a shadow from the
Hidden Rain Village, is a couple with a Konoha chuunin?
This actually doesn’t matter. What matters is when did you two meet?
In Jiraiya's heart, there was no such thing as two people whose relationship was so
different that they were not a good match.
As a Toad Sage who has been famous for a long time and often travels to the popular
places in the ninja world, his vision will not be limited.
"I mean when did you meet?" Jiraiya adjusted his language, looked at He Feng and
asked.
He Feng didn't hide it, and confessed directly: "We met Grandpa Ban during the time
we spent together before."
This time Jiraiya was even more confused.
Grandpa Madara?
Does He Feng still have his grandfather alive? There seems to be no one in the
ninja world who can be called Grandpa Madara.
Is it Uchiha Madara?
That’s even more impossible, Uchiha Madara is already dead.
Jiraiya is now one of the top two, and he knows so little about He Feng that Uchiha
Madara did not die in the battle with the first Hokage, but survived until the
third war, and He Feng was in Uchiha Madara Stayed with me for half a year.
He didn't know about this kind of thing that was almost semi-public to the people
around He Feng.
"He Feng, is the Grandpa Madara you are talking about Uchiha Madara?" Jiraiya asked
with some uncertainty.
He Feng nodded.
"Grandpa Madara is Uchiha Madara."
Hearing this, everyone present except Kakashi and Obito were a little frightened.
About Uchiha Madara, Hefeng didn't even tell Xiaonan, so no wonder Nagato and
others were surprised.
And Kisame Kisaki had thousands of thoughts in his heart.
If nothing else, the Uchiha Madara mentioned by these people is the one he saw and
asked him to go undercover in the Akatsuki organization.
But with He Feng’s relationship, does Uchiha Madara really need to be an undercover
agent by himself?
At this moment, Mikigaki Kisame became more suspicious and wary of Uchiha Madara.
"Ahem." Tiandao coughed lightly, attracting everyone's attention.
"Amekage Konan is also the White Tiger of Akatsuki and the leader of the Akatsuki
organization." Nagato has a deep understanding of his position, so he will ask
Yahiko and Konan what they mean when it comes to matters that require decision-
making.
On this occasion, Nagato is more inclined to let Konan lead instead of Payne.
"Kakuzu, the leader of your question will give you an answer."
Hearing this, Kakuzu looked at Xiaonan and repeated the request he had just made.
As for Hefeng, although Hefeng attracts Jiaodu, he still can't compare with money
in Jiaodu's eyes.
"Yes, Akatsuki's financial issues will be solely responsible for Kakuzu." Xiaonan
nodded, his voice was cold and he didn't seem to care much.
In Xiaonan's view, Kakuzu's request was more of a matter of face. If she wanted to
use the money, there was no need to notify Kakuzu.
In fact, in the originalXiaonan also did this in the timeline, otherwise she would
have collected the 600 billion detonating talismans by herself.
At this moment, He Feng silently raised his hand.
After Xiao Nan saw He Feng raising his hand, her original cold expression instantly
turned into gentleness. She looked at He Feng softly and asked, "Feng, what's the
matter?"
Hefeng nodded and did not refute Xiaonan's title.
I saw him pretending to channel a scroll, and then put chakra into the scroll.
Bang——
The next second, a burst of smoke suddenly appeared.
The originally empty conference room was filled with silver coins one after
another.
"This is two billion yuan. I donated it to the Xiao organization free of charge.
Since you, Kakudu, are the financial manager of the Xiao organization, I will leave
it to you for safekeeping." He Feng said very proudly.
After the three battles, silver coins to him were just a series of numbers placed
in the system interface.
He is not interested in money.
And Kakuzu is very interested in money.
After seeing the two billion silver taels filled with silver, Jiao Du's small dark
green eyes widened. There was something wrong with the expression he looked at He
Feng, and even his breathing began to quicken.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

He retracted his previous judgment, He Feng was indeed cute, just like Qian.
At this moment, Kakuzu ignored everyone's gazes, picked up a pile of silver taels
unusually calmly, and counted them one by one.
Jiaodu's speed was so fast that He Feng didn't even doubt whether Jiaodu could
count the money in this room alone.
After Hefeng took out the two billion, it was Kakashi's turn to be dumbfounded.
When did He Feng become so rich? How can my younger brother accumulate so much
wealth while becoming stronger? This is unscientific!
Hefeng seemed to see Kakashi's doubts and continued: "This is the inheritance that
Grandpa Madara gave me. I can use it at will."
Hearing this, Kakashi suddenly realized.
And the dried persimmon Kisame on the side accurately captured the key words.
Inheritance?
Could it be that Uchiha Madara is dead? Then who was the one he saw?
He was very sure that the man had the Sharingan of the Uchiha clan, and just
standing there gave him a very powerful feeling.
"Is Uchiha Madara dead?" Kisame asked his question.
Hearing this, Obito looked at Inikisaki Kisame with an expression that looked like
he was a fool.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
Kisame also realized that there was something wrong with what he said, so he added,
"It's not surprising that a strong man like Madara Uchiha faked his death to
escape."
He Feng didn't know why Kisame Kisame suddenly asked such a question, but when he
thought that Kisame in the original timeline was bewitched by Obito's Eye of the
Moon plan, He Feng had a guess.
Could it be that the old Yin Coin from Hei Jue is up to something?
"I personally buried Grandpa Ban." He Feng said calmly, "In order to prevent
Grandpa Ban's body from being used by interested parties, I also used the sealing
technique to seal it."
At this moment, Kisame had already made a judgment in his mind about the identity
of Uchiha Madara.
"Sure enough, the world will always be so false." While Kisame murmured in his
heart, he also did not have high expectations for his future in the Akatsuki
organization.
With Kisame silent, Kakuzu counting money, Pain and Jiraiya deep in thought, this
small gathering of Akatsuki organization members also came to an end.
After the meeting, Xiaonan brought Hefeng and others to Yuying's office.
As for Jiraiya, after saying hello to Hefeng and others, he had already set off to
Yahiko's place.
As Jiraiya’s teammate, Inigaki Kisame also went to the capital of the United Ninja
Kingdom.
For a long time to come, the two of them will be there to help Yahiko share the
pressure.
The moment he arrived at Yu Yin's office, He Feng felt a look with obvious
aggression.
"Kana, what are you doing?" Xiaonan said at the right time.
Uzumaki Kana also recovered at this moment.
After recovering, Uzumaki Kana was a little ashamed. She didn't understand why she
had such evil thoughts about a child.
"I'm sorry, Master Yukage, I'm going to take care of Xianglan first." Uzumaki Kana
lowered her head and left Yukage's office in a somewhat embarrassed manner.

Chapter 118 Return

"Who was that just now?" He Feng glanced at Uzumaki Kana's back and asked.
"Kana is a member of the Uzumaki tribe who was rescued by Nagato from the Grass
Hidden Village. At that time, she and her daughter were imprisoned by the Grass
Hidden Village. Without Nagato, the fate of their mother and daughter might not
have been much better."
For Uzumaki Kana, Konan took special care of her because she was of the same race
as Nagato and suffered some misfortunes, but because she valued Uzumaki Kana's
ability.
After all, Uzumaki Kana is not very talented in terms of ninja literacy.
In other words, Uzumaki Kana is more suitable to become a full-time housewife than
to become a ninja.
He Feng nodded and did not dwell too much on this issue.
"Xonan, I'm going back to Konoha. If you miss me, you can use origami to tell me."
Before he set off, Kushina, the Nine-Tailed Jinchuuriki, was already pregnant and
was only a few months away from giving birth.
Although Obito has not turned black, there is a high probability that things like
the Night of the Nine-Tails will not happen, but He Feng does not want to bet on
whether that old scumbag Black Zetsu will cause trouble behind the scenes..
"Well, I will miss you." Xiao Nan nodded. This time she did not keep He Feng
willfully.
Of course, this also has something to do with getting along with He Feng these
days.
While the desires in her heart were satisfied, her own potential was also
significantly improved. What Xiaonan has to do next is to turn her potential into
strength.
If there is another reason...
Xiao Nan thought of the Flying Thunder God's mark on the inner thigh of her thigh.
As long as she used origami to convey her thoughts to He Feng, relying on He Feng's
chakra, she could still fly the God of Thunder over a long distance.
"Brother Kakashi, Obito, let's go." Hefeng turned his head and said to the two
people standing at the door waiting.
Hearing this, Kakashi and Obito agreed.
In this way, the three of them embarked on the journey back.
On the way, Kakashi couldn't hold back the doubts in his heart and asked He Feng:
"He Feng, have you known about the Xiao organization for a long time?"
Kakashi originally planned to join the Akatsuki organization himself and then
pretend to be the big one in front of his younger brother. Unexpectedly, he failed
to pretend to be the big one, and instead fell short of He Feng.
My younger brother’s girlfriend is actually Akatsuki’s boss!
He Feng nodded. Now that Kakashi and Obito have joined the Akatsuki organization,
he will no longer hide it from them.
So, Hefeng told him and Uchiha Madara's plan and the current progress.
After hearing what He Feng said, both Kakashi and Obito were shocked.
They had no idea that He Feng, who was usually harmless to humans and animals,
would have such a goal.
Such a goal is not an exaggeration to say that it is the enemy of the entire ninja
world!
At this moment, both of them felt excited.
"He Feng, whatever you want to do, just do it! Kakashi and I will support you
unconditionally!" Obito looked excited.
As a member of the Uchiha clan, Obito has this kind of madness hidden in his bones.
For him, being an enemy of the ninja world is not something out of the question.
"Kakashi, what's your attitude? You should say something." Obito reached out and
poked Kakashi again, expressing his dissatisfaction with Kakashi's complete lack of
expression.
Kakashi was stunned for a moment, then looked at Obito with a speechless
expression.
"If I don't help my brother, should I help others?"
Hearing this, Obito laughed awkwardly, "That's right."
He Feng was not surprised by the two people's reactions, but the feeling in his
heart did not diminish because he already knew the result.
Hefeng kept this gratitude in his heart. If anything good happened in the future,
he would think of Kakashi-nii and Obito immediately.
……
at the same time.
Konoha Hidden Village, within the roots.
Although Danzo failed in his bid to become the Fourth Hokage, he was not
discouraged.
And because he had some conflicts with Orochimaru in the early years, and because
he was afraid that Orochimaru would reduce his own funds, Danzo also made certain
concessions and compromises to Orochimaru, the fourth generation Hokage.
When facing Orochimaru, Danzo completely lost his original style of slamming the
door and leaving after a disagreement.
After all, Orochimaru would not coddle him like Sarutobi Hiruzen did.
If Orochimaru, the Hokage, is in a hurry, he will be banned at all.
At this time, a female ninja was kneeling on one knee in front of Danzo.
This kunoichi has a gentle face and wears round black-framed glasses.
"Nonou, I remember I said that serving the Roots is your only way out. Now you have
to withdraw from the Roots for some inexplicable reasons, which makes it very
difficult for me." Danzo said coldly.
Once you come to Genbu, you will be a ninja of Genbu for the rest of your life.
Even if you die, you will die serving Genbu.
But Nonoyu withdrew from the roots because he had to concentrate on taking care of
the children in the orphanage, which made Danzo feel that his majesty was
challenged.
Although Danzo has a good temper when facing Orochimaru, Hefeng and others, this
does not mean that Danzo is a good-tempered person.
On the contrary, Danzo can be said to be extremely suspicious, insidious, cunning,
and ruthless at the same time. There are very few people in Konoha who can really
suppress him.
"Of course, I'm not a bad person. If you really want to withdraw from the roots,
it's not impossible." Danzo changed the subject and raised a meaningful smile at
the corner of his mouth.
"Is it true, Danzo-sama!" Yakushi Nonoyu did not see Danzo's thoughts. After
hearing that she could escape from the roots, she looked at Danzo excitedly.
At this time, Danzo was the biggest benefactor in her heart.
"Of course it's true, but...
Since you have withdrawn from Root, then I, Root, are no longer obliged to provide
funds for your orphanage. After all, Root’s funds are not very sufficient. "
Danzo said softly, his tone seemed helpless.
Hearing these words, pharmacist No Naiyu was like a bolt from the blue.
The reason why the Konoha Orphanage has been able to be established to this day is
largely due to the fund supply at the root. Otherwise, with just the little reward
she received from doing tasks, she would not be able to meet even the most basic
meals for the children in the orphanage.
As the director of the orphanage, she naturally could not just watch the orphanage
decline.
"Danzo-sama!" Pharmacist Nonoyu looked at Danzo anxiously.
"Don't worry, I have a task here. If you accept it, the fund supply to the
orphanage will continue while you are performing this task. How about it? What are
your intentions?"
As he spoke, Danzo took out a scroll from behind his back, and he turned the
scrollPass it to the pharmacist Nonoyu.
"I accept, Danzo-sama." Yakushi Nonou took the scroll from Danzo's hand without
thinking.
After opening the scroll, a mission named [Iwagakure Long-term Undercover Plan]
came into view.

--------------------xxxx--------------------

Chapter 119 Pride

After the Hefeng trio returned to Konoha, they first wrote down the mission in
writing and made a complete mission report before arriving at the Hokage's office.
After all, this is a Jonin promotion mission involving three people, and the
necessary procedures still need to be followed.
After arriving at the office, He Feng did not see Orochimaru. Instead, he saw Nara
Shikaku with a tired look on his face.
At this moment, Nara Shikaku was sitting at his desk, lazily reviewing various
documents, and yawning from time to time.
"Uncle Lujiu, why are you here? Where is Teacher Orochimaru?" He Feng asked aloud.
Hearing someone speak, Nara Shikaku raised his head.
"It's He Feng. Lord Hokage is busy doing experiments in the laboratory. If you want
to find her, you can go to the laboratory to find her." Nara Shikaku said
helplessly.
Orochimaru, the Hokage, is completely a hands-off shopkeeper!
Since she became Hokage and sat in the office for a day, she has never been here
again!
I spend the whole day either in the laboratory or in the laboratory, with
absolutely nothing else to do!
In this regard, Nara Shikaku had no choice.
The work is here. If no one does it, it will keep piling up. What will happen if
the Hokage doesn't do it?
he came!
He Feng shook his head and handed the mission report to Nara Shikaku.
"It's okay if Orochimaru-sensei isn't here. Uncle Shikaku, this is the entire
process of our Jonin promotion mission and the information we found."
Nara Shikaku took the information from He Feng, read it carefully and said:
"Well, your resume is enough for you to be promoted to Special Jounin, but Special
Jounin is different from Jounin, and He Feng and you three are a little special. If
you handle special matters...
Just in these few days, I will inform Lord Hokage about this matter. With Lord
Hokage's approval, I think the three of you will be changed to jounin soon in
Konoha's ninja system. "
Obviously, Nara Shikaku is extremely familiar with the process of ninja promotion.
In addition, there are not many ninjas in a village, and every jounin is the elite
of the elite in the village.
The strength of Hefeng and the other three people fully meets this standard, so the
jounin promotion is more of a procedural necessity.
Just like Naruto who has reached the combat power of Chaokage, he still needs to
take the chunin exam again.
"Then I'll trouble Uncle Lu Jiu."
"Sorry, Uncle Shikaku."
After expressing their gratitude to Nara Shikaku, the three people left the Hokage
Building.
at the same time.
Within the Thousand Hands Clan.
There was a Ninjutsu scroll placed in front of Tsunade, and she was performing the
most basic seals according to the contents on the Ninjutsu scroll.
"Wooden Release." Under Tsunade's deliberate control, intricate branches emerged
from the ground and grew into a large, twisting tree with a wild growth attitude.
"Grandpa, I can also use the Wood Release." Tsunade looked excitedly at the big
tree that was born by releasing the Wood Release, and her heart was filled with
emotion.
The obsession of almost every Senju ninja to escape the bloodstains of wood. Now
that this obsession has finally been achieved with her, Tsunade is extremely happy
in her heart.
"Shizune! Lin! Go buy some wine for me. I won't come back unless I'm drunk
tonight!" Tsunade waved her hand and gave the task to the two disciples on the
side.
"Okay, Tsunade-sama." Shizune and Lin both nodded, then looked at each other, and
left the Senju clan and walked towards the izakaya.
"..."
Namikaze Minato's house.
"Minato, I want to eat strawberries!" Kushina sat on the bed, with various fruits
placed next to her.
"Wait a minute, I'll be here soon." Namikaze Minato's voice came from the kitchen.
Soon, Namikaze Minato came to Kushina wearing an apron and holding a plate of
strawberries in his hand.
Kushina didn't move, her big watery eyes just stared at Minato.
Kushina said: "Feed me."
Namikaze Minato picked up the strawberry with the green leaves removed and fed it
to Kushina's mouth.
While Kushina was eating the strawberries that Namikaze Minato fed into her mouth,
she said to Minato: "Minato, look at the days and Mikoto's second baby will be born
soon. I don't know if it will be a boy or a girl."
Minato also smiled and said: "If it's a boy, then we will be good brothers with our
little Naruto for life. If it is a girl, let our little Naruto get it back."
Kushina made an angry expression and knocked Minato on the head: "How do you know
our baby must be a boy, what if it is a girl."
"It doesn't matter if she's a girl. I like girls. If she's a girl, I hope she can
have as beautiful red hair as her mother."
"Hate!"
"..."
The land of the Uchiha clan.
Uchiha is undoubtedly the largest clan in Konoha Hidden Village, and the various
facilities within the clan are very complete.
It can be said that if the children of the Uchiha clan want to, they can not go to
the ninja school, but study in the academy within the clan.
At this time, Uchiha Mikoto's due date was very close. For Uchiha Mikoto's safety,
Uchiha Fugaku deliberately gave birth to her.She was placed in a hospital in the
clan area and was taken care of by elderly people with rich experience in
delivering babies in the Uchiha clan.
"Father, how is mother? Will I have a brother soon?" Itachi looked at his father,
with a bit of anticipation mixed with anxiety.
Itachi has always wanted to have a younger brother, and now this dream is finally
coming true.
Fugaku nodded and said with a gentle expression: "That's right Itachi, you have to
set an example for your younger brother. You are my pride, and your younger brother
will also be my pride in the future."
After Orochimaru succeeded the Fourth Hokage, Uchiha Fugaku could clearly feel that
the hostility towards Uchiha in the village was much less, and it was not so easy
for Danzo Shimura to target the Uchiha clan.
Therefore, although the hawks in the clan are still radical, they no longer talk
about coups, but how to make Uchiha's situation better.
After the pressure on his body was reduced, Fugaku also had more time to be close
to Itachi. He was extremely proud of his eldest son.
In his opinion, Itachi's talent has surpassed him, and he will definitely gain
strength beyond him in the future. If there are enough opportunities, it may not be
impossible to unlock the ultimate power of the Uchiha clan - the Mangekyō
Sharingan.
"Don't worry, father, I will definitely set a good example for my brother!" Itachi
said with firm eyes.
Fugaku touched Itachi's hair happily, "Let's go see your mother."
"..."
The land of the Hyuga clan.
Hinata has a branch family and a clan. Although the branch family and the clan are
in the same Hyuga clan area, they are not in the same place.
At this time, the two clan leaders, Hyuga Hizashi and Hyuga Hizashi, and the two
brothers were gathering together.
"Brother, I want Ningci to become He Feng's teacher."

Chapter 120 The Shyness of a Girl

On the night he returned to Konoha, Hefeng did not go to the Senju clan to find
Tsunade, but returned home with Kakashi.
Hefeng knew what stage he was currently in. If he warmed Sister Tsunade's bed, he
would be executed on the spot in a matter of minutes.
It wasn't that He Feng objected to close contact with Tsunade, but he needed to
rest.
The battle with Xiao Nan lasted for three days and three nights. Let alone the
succubus, even the machine needed to be recharged for such a long time.
However, because of Xiao's incident, the father and son also sat together and
talked after a long absence.
When Hatake Sakumo learned that one of his two sons had joined the Akatsuki
organization, and the other was in a boyfriend-girlfriend relationship with the
Akatsuki leader, his mentality was actually a bit explosive.
Hatake Sakumo has his own bushido spirit in his heart. Although he is a little
cold-hearted after seeing the high-level officials of Konoha, he is still firmly
committed to the Konoha sect.
Of course, Hatake Sakumo is not stubborn. He is still very open-minded when faced
with what happened to his two sons.
For example, He Feng had ambiguous relationships with many members of the opposite
sex, including Tsunade, who was more than twenty years older than him. Even so,
Hatake Sakumo had no intention of interfering too much.
"If this is your choice, then as your father, I will not interfere too much. I also
hope that you two can unswervingly follow your own path."
Hatake Sakumo's tone was gentle and his expression was calm.
He stood up, stretched out his hand and patted the brothers' shoulders, "The future
of Konoha and the future of the ninja world belongs to you, but I'm not too old to
move yet. If you need me for anything, just tell me." , my shoulders can still
carry some things.
Good night, sleep well. "
Kakashi and He Feng looked at each other and said in unison: "Good night, father."
Then the two brothers returned to their own rooms.
……
Early the next morning, before He Feng woke up, a figure with short brown hair and
a pair of large dark brown pupils crept into He Feng's room.
The figure looked at He Feng's lovely sleeping face, and the suppressed emotions in
his heart rose again.
"He Feng is so cute. I really want to kiss her. If no one sees it, it'll be fine."
Nohara Lin subconsciously thought in her heart, "I've kissed that guy Hong, so I
can do it too."
Gudong~
Nohara Lin swallowed a sip of saliva and slowly explored He Feng's tender face.
Boo~
At the first touch, Nohara Lin's whole face and earlobes turned red. She didn't
expect that she could succeed so easily.
It was at this time that He Feng woke up on the bed.
Opening his eyes, He Feng saw Nohara Lin, who was standing beside the bed, somewhat
at a loss.
"Lin, why are you here?" He Feng sat up and said lazily.
At this time, he was still a little sleepy, and his long white hair was draped
somewhat messily on his shoulders, adding to He Feng's charm.
When Nohara Lin saw this scene, her already restless heart became even more
agitated. For a moment, the little deer hidden in her heart started to bump around
as if she had been drugged.
"I...Tsunade...Tsunade-sama came to He Feng and said that she had something to
discuss." Nohara Lin said stuttering.
After saying that, she didn't wait for He Feng to reply, and walked out with her
red-hot head lowered.
There was no way, He Feng's charm was so high now that Nohara Lin didn't know how
to get along with He Feng normally.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

He Feng touched his head, feeling a little confused.

"A Fei, what happened just now? Lin seems so familiar." He Feng asked out of thin
air.
The next second, a vortex appeared on the floor.A frivolous voice came from his
head.
"Ah, that little girl just kissed He Feng secretly. Obviously I have never kissed
her."
He Feng looked at Ah Fei with a dark look on his face, "A Fei, be careful I throw
you into a demon and recast you."
"Hey, I seem to have said a bit too much." A Fei reached out to cover his mouth,
and then went straight back into the earth.
He Feng didn't really want to argue with Ah Fei. After all, Ah Fei was of great use
to him in every aspect.
He Feng simply packed up his clothes and left home.
Since Sister Tsunade wants to see him for something, he naturally has to go.
Soon, He Feng arrived in the Thousand Hands Clan.
After arriving at the Thousand Hands Clan's land, He Feng saw that the original
open space was filled with crooked trees.
He Feng could guess whose masterpiece this was without even thinking.
At this time, the Thousand Hands Clan was very lively.
Except for Tsunade, Orochimaru, who is the Hokage, and Namikaze Minato are all
here.
Orochimaru said: "Minato, the location of Kushina's birth should be in the Senju
clan. It is far away from Konoha and has a vast area and sparse population. If any
accident occurs, it will be easy to deal with."
As the Hokage, Orochimaru would leave the usual government affairs to Nara Shikaku,
but when it came to some important matters, Orochimaru was still very concerned.
And this year, the most important thing for Konoha is the production problem of
Kushina, the Jinchuriki of the Nine Tails.
When a female Jinchuuriki is giving birth, it is often the time when the
suppressive power against the tailed beast is the weakest. If an accident occurs at
this time, in addition to killing two people, the tailed beast will also escape
from trouble.
A tailed beast appeared in the village, which was a huge blow to any village.
Tsunade nodded and said: "Minato, you don't have to worry too much, Orochimaru and
I will also be there to deliver Kushina, there will be no problem."
After hearing what the two said, Minato was very grateful. With the help of Hokage
and Tsunade, he believed that even if Kyuubi caused trouble, there would be no
problem.
"On behalf of Kushina, I would like to thank Hokage-sama and Tsunade-sama for their
help."
Facing Minato's thanks, the two of them said it was nothing.
At this moment, Hefeng also walked through the grove created by Tsunade and arrived
here.
"Sister Tsunade, Teacher Orochimaru, and Brother Minato, you are all here." He Feng
greeted the three of them.
"Hehehe -" Orochimaru chuckled, "If Hefeng is here, there is no need to worry about
Kushina's safety. Hefeng's strength has reached the level of the first generation."
He Feng did not refute Orochimaru's words. To be fair, in terms of strength alone,
the gap between him and the Senju Hashira was infinitely close to zero.
The only thing that may limit his strength is his age.
After all, in addition to refining and developing it every day, the amount of
chakra itself will also gradually increase with age.
"He Feng, you're here." Tsunade's already good mood became even better after seeing
He Feng. She directly took He Feng's hand and pulled He Feng to her side.
"If He Feng comes to help, then there is really no need to worry." Minato also
recognized He Feng's strength. In his opinion, even the Kyuubi might not be able to
defeat the wooden man's technique that He Feng unleashed. .

Chapter 121 The changes in Hongyan and Zhisui

In this way, a series of arrangements regarding Kushina's production location and
defense forces were confirmed.
Minato also stopped staying and continued to go home to take care of Kushina.
"Teacher Orochimaru, I want to go to Ryūchi Cave." He Feng said to Orochimaru.
"Huh?" Orochimaru was stunned, stopped leaving and looked back at He Feng.
Originally, Orochimaru planned to take He Feng to Ryūchi Cave and let He Feng learn
Ryūchi Cave Immortal Technique from White Snake Immortal. However, Orochimaru gave
up when He Feng learned the Immortal Technique from Slug Immortal in Shigu Forest.
This idea.
After all, in Orochimaru's view, it is extremely difficult to master the power of
senjutsu. Even he does not have the talent to learn senjutsu. Therefore, if
ordinary people can master the senjutsu of one of the three major immortal lands,
they are already complete.
"Senjutsu Chakra is the product of the balance between natural energy and chakra.
No matter what kind of senjutsu it is, all it has to do is absorb the natural
abilities that are always present in the air.
The celestial arts of the three great celestial beings obviously absorb the same
natural ability, but their external manifestations are completely different.
Therefore, I judge that the magic of the three great immortal lands was not
originally meant for human beings to practice. "
He Feng will never feel that his strength is enough. He has been thinking about
integrating the magic of the three immortal lands for a long time.
At this time, the Third Ninja War has just ended, and the five major countries are
in a honeymoon period, and there will be no war in the short term.
The United Ninja Kingdom is also in a period of rapid development, and will not
initiate a war in the short term.
Therefore, He Feng plans to use this free time to improve his strength as much as
possible to cope with future changes.
"If possible, I would like to learn the magic of the three major immortal lands and
develop magic that is unique to us humans. In this way, it should be much easier
for other people to learn the magic of immortality, also because of the issue of
compatibility. The power will always increase."
After listening to He Feng's explanation, Orochimaru's eyes also lit up.
At this moment, he had already decided on his next research direction.
Just like Tsunade's Yin Seal, can he research another mark and use that mark to
give people the power to enter sage mode?
"whenOf course, Obito-kun has already made a request to me to learn Ryūchi Cave
Immortal Technique. Hefeng and you have just returned to Konoha. Please rest for a
few days. I will take you and Obito-kun to Ryūchi Cave after a while. Orochimaru
chuckled.
He suddenly thought of the three snake ladies in Longdi Cave. Although those three
appeared to be gentle on the outside, they were not economical lamps.
Every year, some people enter the Longdi Cave by mistake, and what awaits those
people is the test from the Three Snakes.
This test cannot be refused, and the price of failure is naturally entering the
stomachs of the three Snake Queens.
Orochimaru was already looking forward to the scene when the three snake ladies met
He Feng.
I think it will be interesting.
"Okay Orochimaru, you'd better go to your experiment quickly!" Seeing that
Orochimaru had something to say, Tsunade interrupted Orochimaru impatiently.
Really, this Orochimaru has no eyesight at all!
Orochimaru smiled and then left the Senju clan.
Before leaving, Orochimaru also took away Tsunade's apprentice Shizune, saying that
he needed Shizune to cooperate with Orochimaru for experiments.
As for the real reason, maybe Orochimaru himself knows it.
After Orochimaru left, Tsunade didn't hesitate at all and directly picked up Hefeng
like a princess.
She looked at He Feng with a gentle expression, but what she said made He Feng's
heart skip a beat.
"Xiao Hefeng, do you have someone else?"
"Damn it!!! Who betrayed me!" He Feng cursed in his heart, and then looked at
Tsunade with watery eyes, trying to inspire Tsunade's tenderness.
Although he has Muji healing and creative regeneration, this does not mean that He
Feng wants to test whether Tsunade's fist is strong or not.
"As expected, I can smell the scent of other women." Tsunade sighed, a little
depressed.
After seeing He Feng, Tsunade noticed the changes in He Feng at the first glance.
It was a transformation from the inside out, as if she had grown up overnight.
After thinking about it, Tsunade could only wonder if He Feng had found someone
else behind her back.
Of course, Tsunade couldn't get angry when she was angry. Her whole body and mind
had been captured by He Feng, so how could she be angry because of this.
She was just a little disappointed. She was disappointed that she and He Feng had
been together for so many years and that they had tried their best to stick to each
other every day.
In the end, the things he held on to were stolen by other women.
"Sister Tsunade, I'm sorry." He Feng's voice was very unconfident.
He also knows what Sister Tsunade has paid for him.
"Hmph, just apologizing is useless." Tsunade snorted coldly.
"Then let me take a shower first?" He Feng's voice was very soft, so soft that if
you didn't listen carefully, you wouldn't be able to hear what He Feng said.
However, Tsunade had already focused her attention on He Feng. After hearing He
Feng's words, Tsunade immediately said excitedly:
"Okay, let me wash it for you!"
"..."
Hefeng was held in Tsunade's arms like a princess, with his whole face buried in
Tsunade's chest, not daring to look at Tsunade's expression.
At this time, his abstract physique came into play again, and his ability to resist
when facing Tsunade dropped by one hundred percent.
In this regard, He Feng was very helpless.
He could only comfort himself in his heart. A temporary victory is not a victory.
Whoever persists to the end is the real victory!
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
With a murmur, He Feng opened his system again.
【The Succubus's Confidante】
【Name: Tsunade】
[Strength: Shadow level (Shadow level)]
【Age: 34】
【Experience: 1】
[Ability: Medical Ninjutsu, Konoha Fluid Technique, Yin Seal, Psychic Technique...]
[Favorability: 100% (life and death)]
"Sin, sin." He Feng sighed in his heart.
……
"Itachi, when faced with many things, we can't just listen to other people's
descriptions, we also have to make our own judgments.
Whenever you do something, you must think twice before you act. "
Uchiha Shisui walked in front, transmitting his ideas to Itachi behind him.
"We, the Uchiha clan, are the most emotional clan, and we are also the clan that
needs to stick to our hearts the most. We must have our own scale in our hearts,
and we must weigh it again and again after making a decision."
"I understand Brother Zhisui." Itachi took his own steps and followed Zhisui's.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Ga——
Ga——
Ga——
At this time, crows' cries came from the sky.
Uchiha Shisui stopped and stretched out his hand towards the sky.
A crow as black as ink fell into the hands of Uchiha Shisui.
"Quack, quack—" the crow made a hoarse cry at Shisui.
Shisui nodded at this, "Well, I understand, thank you for your hard work."
"Itachi, there is a bandit trouble ahead. I need you to make a judgment. Your
judgment will directly affect my approach to dealing with that bandit trouble."
"Okay, Brother Zhisui, I will definitely think twice before I act." Itachi nodded
seriously.
"Yeah." Shisui responded softly and took out a pamphlet from his pocket.
While reading the contents of the pamphlet, he hurried towards the area where the
bandit was involved.
"I really want to meet the person who wrote this book. His ideas will definitely
bring peace to the ninja world."Shisui murmured softly.

Chapter 122 Red Sand Scorpion

The Kingdom of Wind, in a certain village.
"An ordinary jounin who lives in seclusion, his quality is relatively poor."
The person who spoke was a young man with red hair and a handsome appearance.
In front of him, there was a middle-aged man lying. The man's internal organs had
been hollowed out and mechanically modified.
"The so-called art is something that can be preserved and passed down for a long
time. This is an eternal beauty.
"Unknown Mr. Jounin, I believe that under my art, your soul will also be saved." "
While the boy was talking to himself, his fingers moved rapidly in the air like
playing a piano.
A variety of tools, connected by chakra lines, are used to transform the human body
in an orderly manner.
He is constantly accumulating experience, so that one day he can complete this
eternal ultimate art on himself!
As time passed, a smile appeared on the corner of the young man's mouth.
"At this moment, it has become art!"
As soon as he finished speaking, the young man waved his hand, and the chakra lines
extending from his ten fingers were detached from the tool, and then connected to
the human puppet he created.
Under his control, the human puppet showed power beyond its lifetime.
"The Scorpion of Red Sand, a genius boy from Hidden Sand Village, is also an S-
class rebellious ninja from Hidden Sand Village."
At this moment, the door of the small house where Xie was located was opened, and
two figures wearing black and red cloud windbreakers appeared in front of Xie.
"Who is it?" After hearing someone call out his name, Xie directly controlled the
newly developed human puppet and turned around to look.
"!"
At the first glance, Scorpion noticed the reincarnation eyes in Payne's eyes. Even
though he was not proficient in sensory ninjutsu, he could still feel the invisible
pressure from those eyes.
"The White Tiger of Dawn, Xiaonan."
"Akatsuki Type Zero, Pain."
Xiaonan and Payne introduced themselves first.
After learning about the existence of Xie from Bai Jue, Xiao Nan decided to go to
recruit this talented young man in person.
For Teacher Feng’s plan and for the peace of the ninja world, Xiaonan can be said
to be fully motivated.
"Xiao? Never heard of it." Xie shook his head and continued: "I don't want a
conflict to break out here, so you'd better not provoke me."
Xiaonan didn't find it strange when facing Scorpion's reaction. After all, both the
United Ninja Kingdom and the Akatsuki Organization are currently in the stage of
hiding their capabilities and biding their time. When the power is accumulated, the
Akatsuki Organization will completely show its fangs and attack the five major
countries and all the five major nations. Harvest the tailed beast you hold.
Xiao Nan said with a cold expression: "Scorpion of Red Sand, you only have two
choices now.
Join Akatsuki or die at Akatsuki's hands. "
After realizing that the other party was evil and could not make peace with it, Xie
immediately launched an attack on Xiaonan.
As a person who can successfully assassinate the Third Kazekage, what Scorpion
lacks most is decisiveness.
"Puppet manipulation and poison needle scattering."
Under Scorpion's control, the human puppet it created opened its mouth directly,
and high-density poisonous needles were shot out of its mouth.
"The Secret Technique of Shiki-Multiple Paper Shurikens." Konan stretched out a
hand to Scorpion.
Countless pieces of paper floated out from her outstretched hand, automatically
folding into a shuriken in the air.
The paper shuriken, which was stronger than the poisonous needle barrage, was
released by Konan, directly forcing Scorpion to retreat.
"Puppet manipulation technique, self-destruction!" Xie was very decisive. After
realizing that the poisonous needle could not kill the person in front of him, he
directly detonated the technique he had left in the puppet.
The production of a puppet cannot be completed overnight. Many functions need to be
constantly updated and added. Therefore, the biggest function of this newly made
human puppet is to self-destruct to give him a chance to retreat.
Yes, Scorpion is already planning to retreat.
How to accurately judge the enemy's strength is a necessary homework for every
ninja. As a senior ninja, it is impossible for Scorpion not to know this truth.
He couldn't take down that female ninja alone in a short time, let alone a more
terrifying male ninja behind him.
"What's going on with Xiao? Why are you targeting me?" Xie immediately took out a
scroll after leaving the cabin.
"Fei Liuhu·Summon!"
A burst of smoke flickered, and Fei Liuhu, who was in the open state, was summoned
by Scorpion.
Fei Liuhu, as a puppet on all fours, is not slower than him.
Therefore, Xie immediately entered the Feiliu Amber.
"Ninja Technique: Sand Clone!"
The next second, an identical Fei Liuhu was summoned by Scorpion.
And Xie himself also immediately controlled Fei Liuhu to leave at an extremely fast
speed.
Inside the house.
Xiaonan used Paper Release to gather a wall in front of her, successfully blocking
the explosion damage from the human puppet.
Xiaonan did not catch up immediately, but turned to Payne and said: "Payne, don't
let him run away."
Tiandao nodded and said: "The other five have already intercepted him on his way to
escape. Let's end it as soon as possible. It's not appropriate for Xiao to be
exposed like this."
The outside world.
Xie Xie looked at the five people surrounding him. While he was shocked, he also
understood that he might be in trouble today.
"What kind of organization is Xiao?" Xie thought in his heart.
At the same time, Xiaonan also waved his wings made of paper and looked down at Fei
Liuhu below.
"God's Style Paper Dance!" Xiao Nan waved his wings, and countless papers shot out
from the wings and turned into shurikens in the air.
Those shurikens that fell on Fei Liuhubody, causing considerable damage to the
puppet.
Of course, Xiaonan also held back, not using all his strength.
If she attacks with all her strength, Fei Liuhu will be scrapped.
This time she was recruiting Scorpion, an S-class rebellious nin, for Akatsuki,
rather than trying to make enemies with him.
Therefore, it is natural to stop there.
Of course, if Scorpion refused to join Akatsuki, Xiaonan would have no choice but
to silence him in order to prevent Akatsuki from being exposed so early.
"Scorpion of Red Sand, join Akatsuki, and Akatsuki will support your research. Only
in this way will you have the opportunity to complete your eternal art, instead of
taking your puppet to report to the Pure Land." Xiaonan said condescendingly.
Hearing what Xiaonan said, Xie no longer resisted.
After all, what Xiaonan said didn't make sense, and he absolutely couldn't accept
his own death.
This is not because he is greedy for life and afraid of death, but because Scorpio
has not yet completed the true art.
"I'll join." Xie's voice came through Fei Liuhu.
Xiaonan didn't say anything, just looked at each other.
After a while, Scorpion himself came out of Fei Liuhu.
His face was still so childish, but it was a little pale because of what happened
in a short period of time.
"This is your ring and the uniform of the Akatsuki organization.
Next, come back to Xiao with us. You will spend the next period of time in Xiao's
base. You must also understand Xiao's goals, understand Xiao's ideas, and even be
loyal to Xiao's beliefs. "
Chapter 123 Sasuke and Naruko
Konoha Year 51, July.
It is midsummer at this time, and the Fire Country has the best geographical
location. Even in summer, it is not too hot.
But in this midsummer, Uchiha Fugaku's heart was very hot.
"Mikoto, be sure nothing happens.
No, Mikoto will be fine. "
At the door of the delivery room in the Uchiha clan, Uchiha Fugaku was pacing back
and forth. He looked worried and felt a little nervous.
"Father, mother and brother will be fine." Itachi on the side clenched his fists,
his palms also sweating a lot.
At this time, screams of pain were still heard in the delivery room. Although she
had already given birth to a child, this would not make Mikoto's second childbirth
easy.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

On the contrary, as time passed, Mikoto's strength was gradually exhausted.

"Madam! Try your best! Try your best again at the end!"
"ah--"
With Uchiha Mikoto's exhausted roar, the baby's cry appeared in the delivery room.
"Madam, it's a boy." The midwife excitedly held the baby in her hands to Uchiha
Mikoto.
Looking at the baby's tender face, Mikoto also smiled. She weakly stretched out her
hand and touched the baby's face.
"Little Sasuke, you must also grow up healthy and happy."
As if he heard Mikoto's words, the newly born Sasuke stopped crying and burst into
laughter.
(This is normal, isn’t it (laughing))
"..."
October of the 51st year of Konoha.
With the end of summer, the ninja world officially entered autumn, and the air
gradually became cooler.
Within the Thousand Hands Clan.
As Kushina's belly gradually grew bigger, for Kushina's safety, Minato also brought
Kushina directly to the Senju clan.
The area is sparsely populated and there are many vacant houses. There is no
shortage of places for Minato and his family to live.
And this day was also the date that Tsunade judged Kushina was due to give birth.
Not only Tsunade Orochimaru, but also the retired third generation Sarutobi
Hiruzen, and Sarutobi Hiruzen's wife Sarutobi Biwako also came here.
After all, it is the production of Jinchuuriki. This is not only a big deal for the
Minato family, but also for Konoha.
"I said, I am also very strong, okay? There is no need for such a big battle."
Kushina sat back on the bed and waved her hands indifferently.
She had never been a weakling, and she had no intention of being protected by
anyone other than Minato.
In Kushina's view, let alone giving birth, even if she is old and unable to walk,
Kyuubi still can't make waves.
"Kushina, everyone is also concerned about you." Minato sat on the edge of the bed,
smiling and holding Kushina's hand.
"I know." Kushina pouted and did not refute Minato.
"Sister Kushina, brother Minato, have you named the child?" He Feng stood aside and
asked softly.
Naruto's original fate was very tragic, and everyone who met him expressed
sympathy, but this time it was up to him.
Naturally, what happened on the original timeline will not happen again.
Naruto should have a warm childhood, Minato will be a good husband and father, and
Kushina will also be a good wife and mother.
"Of course, if it's a boy, call him Naruto, Uzumaki Naruto.
If it’s a girl, let’s call her Naruko, Uzumaki Naruko! "
Hearing the words "Wuzima KI Na Lu Tuo" from Kushina's mouth, He Feng was also
looking forward to it.
As for Naruko, Hefeng didn't take it seriously. After all, in his memory, Naruko
only appeared during Naruto's seduction technique.
"Uzumaki?" Sarutobi Hiruzen was stunned and looked at Minato with some confusion.
Namikaze Minato smiled and explained: "Well, Uzumaki Naruto, Naruto will inherit
the legacy of the Uzumaki clan and carry forward the Uzumaki clan just like
Kushina. This is a decision jointly made by Kushina and I."
"Ah! It hurts! It hurts!" At this time, Kushina suddenly cried out in pain, holding
her stomach.This was a heartbreaking pain that Kushina had never experienced
before.
This kind of pain is more painful than any injury she has suffered in more than
twenty years as a ninja.
"Ah, Minato, I don't want to give birth." Kushina cried out in pain and actually
talked nonsense.
Minato also quickly comforted: "Kushina, believe in Hokage and Tsunade-sama."
At this time, Sarutobi Biwako also said: "Next we are going to deliver Kushina, you
men, get out!"
Saying that, Sarutobi Biwako kicked people out one after another.
When Sarutobi Biwako walked up to Orochimaru, she was about to open her mouth and
say, Orochimaru, why are you staying here? Then she remembered that Orochimaru was
now a woman, so she could only hold back the words.
However, Sarutobi Biwa Lake drove away all the males except He Feng.
He Feng glanced at the other party helplessly, and then left on his own initiative.
"Don't I look like a boy?" He Feng had such a doubt in his heart.
But when he saw his soft white hair, he sighed, "It doesn't really look like him."
In the room, Tsunade, Orochimaru and Sarutobi Biwako did not panic. After all, the
three of them were more experienced than the other.
Sarutobi Biwako is over fifty years old, has two sons, and is also a ninja himself.
Just retired.
Although Tsunade had no experience in this area, it was also her first time
delivering a baby.
But who makes her a medical ninja, and the medical ninja with the strongest medical
ninjutsu in the ninja world.
Not to mention Orochimaru.
She also has no experience in delivering babies, but Orochimaru has experience in
dissection and has various research data on the female body in his mind.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
It can be said that no one in the ninja world understands biotechnology and the
female body better than her!
Therefore, under the methodical operation of the three people, Kushina's pain was
alleviated a lot by the medical ninjutsu.
"Kushina, it's a girl." Tsunade held the newly born Naruko in her hands, wrapped
her in swaddling clothes and placed her next to Kushina.
The little guy had golden hair when he was just born, and there were three fox-like
beards on his cheeks.
"Naruko, mother is here." Kushina gently touched Naruko with her hand and showed a
knowing smile.
In the mental space, Nine Lama looked at the scene in front of him, feeling that
the seal on Kushina's body was unprecedentedly weak. He immediately snorted coldly,
and the chakra that controlled him began to riot.
Those nine lamas will never be slaves!
Whenever there is a chance, Jiulama will struggle, even if he can't get out, he
still has to torment damn Kushina!
And this damn brat better keep crying!
Damn it!
When Kyuubi vented his chakra, Kushina's body also spilled out the extremely evil
chakra of Kyuubi.
After these chakras emerged from Kushina's body, they probed towards Naruko.
Kushina tried her best to control it, but she was too weak after just giving birth
and had almost no control over the Nine-Tails chakra.
At this moment, Orochimaru stepped forward and placed his hand on Kushina's
abdomen.
With a stream of pure Wood Release Chakra and a small part of Senjutsu Chakra,
Orochimaru was transmitted into Kushina's body.
The nine-tailed chakra that was originally restless stopped immediately.
Kyuubi was also like a blow to the head, recalling the scene when he was pinched by
one hand of the Thousand-Armed Buddha.
"Damn Senju Hashirama! Even if you die, you won't let me live in peace!"
"And damn Uchiha Madara!"
Kyuubi cursed angrily and lay down again.
Since he could no longer affect Kushina, he was too lazy to do anything.

Chapter 124 Destined Friendship

Konoha Year 52, winter.
"Sister Feng, Sister Feng, wait for me." Naruko spoke in a milky voice. At only one
year old, she was following He Feng on her short legs.
At this time, it had been one year and two months since Naruko was born. Under the
careful care of Kushina and Minato, Naruko's growth was extremely smooth.
And she herself has also shown great talent. Whether she is talking or walking, she
is much faster than her peers.
After Naruko was born, Hefeng would often visit Kushina and Minato. With Hefeng's
own affinity, he gained Naruko's dependence on them.
But the only thing that made He Feng uncomfortable was that Naruko always followed
him and called him Sister Feng.
With the cute Naruko taking the lead in shouting this, those children who were born
in Konoha in recent years subconsciously mistook He Feng for a girl, and actually
called him Sister Feng in the same way!
After going back and forth, if it weren't for the long-term companionship of
Tsunade and Xiaonan, as well as the good impressions of Yuhi Kurenoharalin and
others, Hefeng would really doubt whether he was a boy.
"Naruko, you can wait for me if you want me to, but you can't call me sister, you
have to call me brother!" Hefeng turned around, knelt down and said seriously to
Naruko.
Naruko blinked her big blue eyes and looked at He Feng with an extremely cute
expression.
"Okay, I understand." Naruko nodded.
Hefeng happily put his hand on Naruko's head and rubbed Naruko's blond hair.
"Sister Feng, I want to eat meatballs."
The next second, Naruko pointed to the meatball shop not far away and said to He
Feng.
He Feng stood up and covered his forehead with his hands.
"I knew it. "
Although He Feng felt speechless at Naruko's name, he was not angry with a child
who was in his early one year old.
"Let's go, Brother Feng will take you to buy meatballs to eat." He Feng took
Naruko's little hand and walked towards the meatball shop.
As soon as he entered the meatball shop, He Feng said directly: "Boss, please have
two servings of three-color meatballs!"
When the shopkeeper saw the people coming, he also smiled and packed two portions
of three-color meatballs for He Feng, and he added one more to each portion.
"Here are your meatballs." The boss handed the bag containing the three-color
meatballs to He Feng.
After He Feng took the meatballs, the door of the meatball shop was opened again.
Walking towards them were two boys with black hair and black eyes. The age gap
between them was not that big.
One of them had two tear troughs on his cheeks at a young age.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"Sasuke, you're here anyway." After seeing the person coming, Naruko walked over
happily and pinched Sasuke's little face with her hands.
After Naruko could talk and walk, Kushina and Minato took her to the Uchiha clan,
so Naruko and Sasuke naturally knew each other.
The fate between the two seemed to be destined. When they first met, Naruko showed
a far greater closeness to Sasuke than ordinary people.
The last time Naruko was so close to someone she met for the first time was He
Feng.
Compared to Naruko, Sasuke was a little more shy. After meeting Naruko for the
first time, he was so frightened by Naruko's actions that he hid behind Itachi,
only daring to stick out his little head and look at the other person secretly.
"Damn it! Don't pinch my face! Only Ni-chan can touch my face!" Sasuke reached out
to interrupt Naruko, but after seeing Naruko's smile, he put down his hand and just
took a step back. He hid behind Itachi again.
After hiding, Sasuke said faintly: "I want to eat meatballs, Ni-chan come and buy
them with me."
(In the setting of the original work, Sasuke clearly stated that he hates sweets
and natto, both of which Itachi likes to eat. In addition, the incident of the
night of genocide had already happened.
Therefore, Ashuang judged that what Sasuke hated was not these two foods but Uchiha
Itachi at that time. )
Itachi smiled and rubbed Sasuke's head, then looked at He Feng.
"Senior Feng." Weasel respected He Feng very much.
Although Itachi was only five years old at this time and had not even graduated
from the ninja school, Itachi was very familiar with the things in the village and
the ninja world. In addition, Fugaku intended to let He Feng take Itachi as his
disciple, so he He is very familiar with He Feng's life story.
The more you understand, the more you are surprised, the more you admire, the more
you respect.
"Well, long time no see." He Feng smiled and nodded.
Although Itachi at this time had seen the cruelty of war and the conflicts between
the village and his clan, he was far less lonely than in the original world line.
He Feng didn't know what caused this sign, but it was something he was happy to
see.
"Boss, two portions of three-color meatballs." Itachi nodded to He Feng before
looking at the store.
The store owner obviously knew Uchiha Itachi, and he quickly made and packaged the
meatballs for Itachi.
After leaving the meatball shop, Hefeng looked at Itachi and Sasuke and asked,
"Itachi, have you eaten? Do you want to eat something?"
Itachi shook his head and said: "There is no Senior Feng. If you can, this is my
honor."
Looking at Weasel's serious expression, He Feng didn't know what to say.
Weasel's performance was so formal that He Feng felt a little embarrassed.
"Weasel, there's no need to be so formal. Just get along with me with a normal
heart. I don't know how to eat people." He Feng said with a smile.
Seeing this, Naruko on the side also said: "That's right, Brother Itachi, Sister
Feng is so gentle and smells good. She's not scary at all."
Hearing this, Before Itachi could say anything, Sasuke, who was holding Itachi's
hand, couldn't listen anymore.
"Damn it Naruko, Ni-chan is my Ni-chan! You are not allowed to call him that!"
Sasuke looked at Naruko with fierce eyes, and he no longer hid behind Itachi, as if
you dare to steal my Ni-chan, I will fight you.
Seeing this, Naruko stuck out her tongue at Sasuke.
"Idiot Sasuke." Naruko hid behind He Feng in a dignified manner, and while pulling
on the corner of He Feng's clothes, she pointed at Sasuke and said, "Sister Feng,
Sasuke bullies me, help me teach him a lesson! "
Seeing this, both He Feng and Uchiha Itachi laughed.
It was obviously the second time the two met, but they looked like happy enemies.
"It seems that Naruko and Sasuke will be very good friends." He Feng said with a
smile.
"Yeah, that's great." Itachi also laughed from the bottom of his heart.
However, Naruko and Sasuke turned their heads proudly and said at the same time:
"Who wants to be good friends with this stinky guy!"
"Who wants to be good friends with this familiar guy?"
"you!"
"you!"
"Sister Feng, look at him!"
"Nissan, look at her!"
In this way, with Naruko and Sasuke constantly bickering, the four of them came to
Ichiraku Ramen.
Sitting at the table in Ichiraku Ramen.
Calamus came over with the menu.
She blushed slightly and handed the menu to He Feng.
"Calamus, long time no see." He Feng smiled and greeted Calamus.
"Well... long time no see..."
Under He Feng's gaze, Calamus's face turned red.Ergen, finally couldn't bear it
anymore and ran away directly towards the kitchen.
Seeing this, Uncle Yile also laughed helplessly.

Chapter 125 The Curse Seal of Heaven

Konoha 53 years.
This year, He Feng was sixteen years old.
This year was also the second year that Orochimaru succeeded the Fourth Hokage.
In the past two years, Konoha has undergone tremendous changes.
The first is the change in Konoha Hospital.
Because Orochimaru's biotechnology has improved again, he can now clone the
designated organs he wants by cultivating a portion of cells.
Therefore, the first to benefit are those in Konoha who were seriously injured due
to the war and lost their status as ninjas.
Under the personal guidance of Hokage Orochimaru, the man with broken arms and legs
stood up again, and once again obtained the qualification to form seals.
People whose organs were removed due to various reasons and whose physical
functions declined significantly have also been cured and gradually returned to
their original levels.
The more this happens, the more ninjas and civilians in Konohagakure support
Orochimaru, the Hokage.
And because Orochimaru himself is the Hokage, he mainly funds his own research as
he pleases. In addition, the technology he researched has even benefited the great
names of the Fire Country.
The daimyo's financial support for Konoha has also been greatly increased.
Of course, Orochimaru has not been completely immersed in biotechnology in the past
two years.
His own research also never stopped.
In the laboratory that has been expanded.
Anko, Yamato and Obito were standing neatly in front of Orochimaru.
He Feng stood beside Orochimaru.
"Hahaha." Orochimaru looked at the three of them and smiled, "The research on the
Curse Seal of Heaven has reached the final experimental stage. The three of you
represent ordinary people, Wooden Ninjas, and Uchiha's Wooden Ninjas respectively.
individual.
Next, I will inject the Heavenly Curse Seal into each of you. He Feng will be
responsible for recording the magical chakra in the three of you. "
Hefeng nodded and said, "Okay, Teacher Orochimaru."
After He Feng finished speaking, he had already entered immortal mode.
Not only that, He Feng even closed his eyes and opened Kagura's Heart Eye after
signaling to Orochimaru.
As a perfect comprehender of Shigulin Immortal Technique, Hefeng, coupled with his
strong affinity for natural energy, his understanding of Immortal Technique Chakra
is no weaker than Orochimaru's.
Therefore, He Feng was invited by Orochimaru to participate in this research.
In the original timeline, the Curse Seal of Heaven developed by Orochimaru because
of Jugo, although it can increase the strength of the ninja itself, will cause
powerful erosion to the user. There is no doubt that it is a double-edged sword
with advantages and disadvantages.
But this time it was completely different. This time Orochimaru's research on the
Curse Seal of the Sky was completely based on He Feng's own perfect immortal model.
After studying He Feng's body fluids and cells, he successfully developed a
Heaven's Curse Seal that is different from the original timeline.
Orochimaru didn't give Anko time to react. After receiving He Feng's signal, he
directly put his hand on the back of Anko's neck.
"Hiss——"
After a burst of stinging pain, a black curse mark like three magatama was engraved
on the back of Anko's neck.
Under He Feng's observation, the natural energy surrounding Hong Dou became
significantly more active, and a small part of the active natural energy
involuntarily converged on the Heavenly Curse Seal on the back of Hong Dou's neck.
Obviously, this is the curse seal of heaven storing natural energy.
Next, Orochimaru engraved the Heavenly Curse Seal on Yamato and Uchiha Obito
respectively.
Compared with Anko, the natural energy around Yamato and Obito is obviously more
active. Also because of each person's physical condition, the total amount of
natural energy that can be stored in the Curse Seal of the Sky will also be
different.
He Feng skillfully wrote out the changes that had happened to the three of them,
and then handed them to Orochimaru.
Orochimaru took the experimental report, nodded and said slowly to the three of
them:
"The Heaven's Curse Seal gives you more possibilities to master the Immortal Mode.
If the possibility of the three of you mastering the Immortal Mode before you
obtained the Heaven's Curse Seal was 1, then the possibility of you mastering the
Immortal Mode now is 1. It will be 10.
In addition, after forming the corresponding seal, you can also briefly mobilize
the natural power stored in the Heavenly Curse Seal to directly enter the immortal
mode.
However, this will cause damage to the Heaven's Curse Seal, thereby reducing the
durability of the Heaven's Curse Seal on you. In this case, the Heaven's Curse Seal
will also lose its effectiveness one day. Therefore, I hope that the three of you
will not encounter a real crisis. Do not use the power of the Heavenly Curse Seal
until the situation arises. "
Hearing Orochimaru's warning, the three of them nodded in unison.
"Okay, now we can proceed with the next experiment." Orochimaru casually placed the
experiment report on the table beside him and turned to look at He Feng.
"He Feng, it's time to open your Sharingan."
He Feng's Sharingan is not a secret. The Uchiha clan also knows that He Feng has
the Sharingan. However, due to the pressure from Orochimaru, Tsunade, Minato,
Hatake Sakumo and others, coupled with He Feng's Feng's relationship with the
Uchiha clan, the Uchiha clan did not attack him.
In a sense, it can be regarded as recognizing the rationality of Hefeng Sharingan.
It's just that the current three-magatama Sharingan can't keep up with He Feng's
improvement in strength, and He Feng won't use it unless necessary.
As for when the three magatama sharingan will evolve into the kaleidoscope wind, it
is not known.He said, but for a short time He Feng had no expectations at all,
after all, he didn't feel anything at all.
If the evolution of the Sharingan is compared to pouring water into a water tank,
and a severe emotional stimulus is to suddenly pour a large bucket of water over
it, and the Sharingan can evolve the moment the water is full.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
And He Feng currently feels that his three-magatama tank is only half full.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

After opening the Sharingan, He Feng could clearly feel the improvement of his
dynamic vision and the improvement of his mental resistance.
However, this kind of improvement is not enough for He Feng, whose strength has
reached super shadow.
It's like adding one to one and adding one to one hundred.
The sum is exactly the same, the former gets a full double improvement, while the
latter only gets a 1% improvement.
This is the current situation in which He Feng opens his Sharingan.
"Not bad." Orochimaru was very satisfied, and then led He Feng to a safe.
After some sealing, the seal on the safe was opened. Orochimaru entered another
password, and the safe was opened.
Orochimaru took out a small box, opened it, and saw dark purple unknown reagents.
"This is a scientific reagent I created based on the principles of magic and
Narakumi no Jutsu.
Its name is Nightmare Potion. In addition to improving mental strength, nightmare
potions can also cause serious side effects to the user. As for the side effects,
they awaken the biggest fear in the user's heart. "
"Because taking the same medicine can cause drug resistance, I specially prepared
ten for you, Hefeng. I'm looking forward to your kaleidoscope."
Orochimaru placed the box containing ten nightmare potions on the table and
gestured to He Feng.
――――
Book friends who see this, if you have any ideas about He Feng’s Mangekyō Sharingan
ability, you can put them forward in the comment area.
Ah Shuang's brain is a bit stupid and she really can't think of any good abilities.
I’m hereby asking for help.

Chapter 126 Fear in Dreams

He Feng naturally trusts Orochimaru unconditionally. Since Orochimaru can take out
the nightmare potion in front of him, it means that Orochimaru is confident and is
not using He Feng as a guinea pig for testing.
"Then let me try it first, Teacher Orochimaru." He Feng took out a nightmare potion
from the box on the table.
Orochimaru gestured: "Just take it orally."
He Feng nodded, and then under everyone's gaze, he opened the nightmare potion,
raised his head, and drank it in one gulp.
There is no peculiar smell in the entrance of the Nightmare Potion, which is no
different from drinking water.
And He Feng felt dizzy a second after drinking the nightmare potion.
Orochimaru also stepped forward and stretched out his hand to support He Feng, and
then placed He Feng on the experimental bed beside him like a princess.
"What, Obito-kun, do you want one too?" Orochimaru picked up a nightmare potion and
shook it.
Obito shook his head violently, "I...I'll forget it, I won't compete with He Feng
for this."
He has already activated the Mangekyō Sharingan, and he doesn't want to experience
that feeling again.
Even today, Obito still has a deep impression of the almost collapse of emotion
when he opened his eyes.
"Hehehe——"
"..."
――――――
"Have you heard? It seems that White Fang gave up a very important mission for
Konoha because of his teammates! The failure of that mission seems to bring
particularly serious losses to Konoha!"
"I've heard it, I've heard it. Let me tell you, I also heard that White Fang could
have completed that task, but in the end he gave up because he was too timid to
complete it!"
"Tsk, why didn't White Fang die? He actually caused us Konoha to suffer such losses
out of thin air!"
Several Konoha civilians were sitting in the tavern. After a few glasses of soju,
they all became intoxicated and talked about things that they would never come into
contact with in their lives.
On the side, there was a soft-looking young man who was listening to the
conversation between the three of them in a daze.
"Hmm~ What's wrong with me? I feel dizzy." He Feng covered his head with one hand.
He had no idea what was happening to him. He just felt dizzy and dizzy.
"That's right! Father wants me to buy him wine!" Suddenly, He Feng remembered the
purpose of his trip.
He walked up to the bar with his calves. He handed the banknotes in his hand to the
boss and said in a cute and childish voice: "Boss, I want a pound of soju!"
"..."
After coming out of the tavern, He Feng held a bottle of soju in one hand and
jumped towards his home.
"Hey, I will graduate from the ninja school soon. My father will be very happy."
"I wonder what reward my father will give me. Will it be my father's short sword?
White Fang is so handsome. I have wanted it for a long time."
"..."
Back home, He Feng walked in without knocking.
The room was extremely dark, with no lights on even at night.
An ominous premonition arose in Hefeng's heart.
He said with some fear in his childish voice: "Father? Are you at home?
Father? anyone there?
Moxi Moxi~ Is anyone at home? "
Hefeng shouted while touching the light switch.
After not getting any response, HeThe wind continued to go inside, and what greeted
He Feng was still empty silence.
He Feng felt uneasy in his heart, and a conversation appeared in his ears.
"Why doesn't White Fang die? He actually made us Konoha suffer such losses out of
thin air!"
He Feng shook his head violently, and ran towards his father's room in a panic. The
shochu in his hand fell to the ground because of his panic, and the kettle was also
broken.
"No! No! No!"
He Feng stumbled to Bai Ya's room. He skillfully opened the door and reached for
the switch next to the door.
As the light was turned on, a figure with white hair knelt on the ground. The
ground was covered with bright red blood and some internal organs.
And the short knife that He Feng wanted was inserted into Hatake Sakumo's abdomen,
and the blood and internal organs on the ground were caused by seppuku.
"!!!"
"No!"
"don't want!"
"don't want!"
"don't want!"
He Feng's eyes widened, and the extreme pain enveloped him, causing him to faint in
an instant.
――――――
What came into view was a red figure that covered the sky and sun. The figure bared
its fangs and had nine tails waving in the air behind it.
"Roar!!"
A huge roar came from Kyuubi's mouth. At the moment of breaking away from the seal,
Kyuubi did not escape immediately, but set his sights on his jinchuriki Kushina.
At this time, Uzumaki Kushina had just finished giving birth and was in a very bad
state. It was a good time for him to take revenge.
"Tailed Beast Jade!" Kyuubi opened his mouth wide, and a large amount of chakra
gathered from Kyuubi's mouth. After reaching a certain critical value, the chakra
sphere composed of yin and yang attributes was ejected.
The figure of Namikaze Minato suddenly flashed next to Kushina.
"Hefeng, take your sister Kushina and go first. I'll stop you here!" Minato said to
the back without looking back, and at the same time he stretched out his hand
towards the tailed beast jade.
"Okay, Brother Minato." He Feng was a little dizzy, but he didn't have time to
realize it before he stepped forward to pick up Kushina and leave.
At this moment, a mysterious man wearing a whirlpool mask appeared next to Kushina.
Before He Feng could speak, the mysterious man took out a kunai and stabbed Kushina
in the heart.
My dear, there will be more after this chapter. Please click on the next page to
continue reading. There will be more exciting chapters later!
"No! Don't!" Hefeng stretched out his hand towards the mysterious man to stop him
from doing what he did next, but his body couldn't use any strength. He could only
witness Kushina's death in the hands of the mysterious man with his eyes wide open.
.
It was at this moment that the second, third and fourth tailed beast jade fell, and
the Nine Tails began to vent its power on the land of Konoha as if it had not been
consumed.
Fires and explosions filled the sky, and Konoha seemed to turn into hell for a
moment.
"Roar!!" Kyuubi roared again, and he suddenly stepped forward and threw Minato to
the ground. He held Minato down with one paw, and then opened his mouth full of
fangs towards Minato who was at the bottom.
"Stop! Stop!"
He Feng looked at the scene in front of him, and his heart was filled with negative
emotions.
It was at this moment that the masked man burst into laughter.
"Ho ho ho, so, all this is caused by lack of strength."
As soon as he finished speaking, the masked man took off his mask, revealing his
true face.
He Feng's eyes suddenly widened with an expression of disbelief, "Obito, it's you!"
"He Feng, are you ready to face death?"
――――――
"Orochimaru, even if it costs me my life, I will stop you!"
"Sarutobi-sensei, the rotten Konoha leaves should be turned into nutrients. Let me
turn you into Konoha's nutrients with my own hands."
――――――
"Go straight forward, never break your promise, and never give up at any time."
"Jiraiya's Heroic Story, I'm thinking about going back to this."
"The final chapter, the frog in the well will eventually be scattered into the
sea..."

Chapter 127 He Feng’s Kaleidoscope

--------------------xxxx--------------------

"He Feng, why are you crying?"

"Brother He Feng..."
"Senior He Feng, are you okay?"
Obito, Anko and Yamato gathered around He Feng with concern, their expressions full
of worry.
Orochimaru stepped forward and gently wiped away Hefeng's tears with his hands, his
words full of tenderness: "It must be a very painful dream, everyone is here."
He Feng looked at the four people in front of him, and the negative emotions in his
heart could not dissipate for a long time.
The effect of the nightmare potion was so powerful that even though he knew it and
his mental strength was far beyond ordinary people, he was completely unaware that
the pictures were fictional.
One painful scene after another was played in front of him like a revolving door,
but he participated in it as if he was there and could not make any impact.
In the dream, all his strength was stripped away, and that feeling of powerlessness
was what frightened He Feng the most.
"Teacher Orochimaru." He Feng opened his blood-red eyes and looked at Orochimaru.
In Hefeng's eyes, three magatama were spinning continuously, and finally gathered
into the Mangekyō Sharingan, which was like a windmill and a sickle.
This is similar to Shisui's kaleidoscope image, both of which are powers that
strengthen the spiritual level.
"I can feel the extremely powerful power in my eyes." He Feng got down from the
bed.Then he looked at Obito aside.
He remembered Obito's face in the dream just now.
It was precisely because of the appearance of Obito in the dream that Hefeng had a
stronger desire to restrain the power of the gods. Therefore, it also gave birth to
his Mangekyou Sharingan ability.
"Obito, come with me to test the power of the kaleidoscope. It will also allow Mr.
Orochimaru to obtain some experimental data."
"Eh? Okay then." Obito was stunned for a moment, then nodded.
At this time, Orochimaru also said aloud: "The laboratory is not a place for
competition. If you want to compete, you should go to the training ground."
He Feng nodded, "Then go to the training ground."
Soon, Orochimaru led He Feng and others to a training ground in Konoha.
During this period, many people also came after hearing the news.
Among them were the Uchiha Fugaku family, the Minato family, and even the two
brothers Hizashi and Hizashi, who brought their sons and daughters from each
family.
After Fugaku learned that Obito, the kaleidoscope genius in his clan, was going to
compete with Hatake Hefeng, he made a prompt decision and brought his two sons
over.
His idea is very simple, that is, let Itachi and Sasuke see the world and see what
real geniuses look like.
Minato is different.
After hearing the news, Minato just mentioned it briefly, but couldn't resist
Naruko and wanted to watch Sister Feng fight, so Minato, with no other choice, led
Kushina and Naruko and dragged their family over.
Of course, the reason why the news spread so quickly must be the credit of Danzo,
the root leader.
Danzo is cold-blooded and careless in other aspects, but it is completely different
with He Feng. Danzo doesn't know why, he just thinks highly of He Feng.
Just like that, the training ground was filled with people at an incredible speed.
In the training ground, He Feng and Obito stood opposite each other.
Orochimaru, the Fourth Hokage, directly acted as the referee and stood between the
two.
"Form the Seal of Opposition." Orochimaru said while retreating to the outside.
The moment He Feng and Obito formed the seal, they directly attacked each other.
"Divine power!"
Obito had no intention of holding back, and immediately opened the Mangekyou
Sharingan, and directed a strike of divine power in the direction of He Feng.
And He Feng was not inferior. He directly locked the coordinates of the Flying
Thunder God on Obito's arm, and appeared in Obito the next second.
"It hurts!" He Feng kicked out fiercely in the air in the direction of Obito.
"Virtualization." Obito quickly entered the virtual state and dodged this attack.
He didn't dare to resist He Feng's attack, it would kill someone.
Hefeng stepped back and distanced himself from Obito.
And He Feng himself also opened his Sharingan at this moment.
One magatama, two magatama, three magatama, and even a kaleidoscope.
The evolution process of the Sharingan was completely unfolded in He Feng's eyes.
"Muhua is smiling!" He Feng's eyes focused on Obito.
In an instant, countless cherry blossoms were falling in the sky.
"This is it!" Uchiha Fugaku's eyes widened. He knew that Hefeng had a Sharingan,
but he did not expect that Hefeng's Sharingan would also evolve into a
kaleidoscope.
"Can cherry blossoms absorb chakra?" Orochimaru stretched out his hand to catch the
falling cherry blossoms in the sky. He could feel part of his chakra being absorbed
by the cherry blossoms, but the magnitude was not large and harmless.
This may also be because He Feng did not target her.
After Obito himself came into contact with the cherry blossoms falling in the sky,
he felt that a large part of his chakra disappeared out of thin air.
"Not good!" Obito suddenly realized that this was He Feng's kaleidoscope ability.
He immediately turned on the virtualization and hid in his divine power space.
However, Obito, who was in the Kamui space, discovered something that killed him!
Those damn cherry blossoms are actually floating in his divine power space!
As for the outside world, after those cherry blossoms floated down, they gathered
around He Feng and wrapped it into a cocoon.
After Obito realized that hiding was useless, he immediately launched an attack on
He Feng.
"Fire Release: The Art of Fire Ball!" Obito quickly formed a seal, and a huge fire
ball spit out from his mouth.
"It's amazing." Sasuke's eyes widened. He had never seen other techniques, so he
couldn't tell the difference, but he knew the powerful fire ball technique very
well.
And Obito's fire ball directly wrapped the cocoon made of cherry blossoms.
Obito was not excited about this at all. He knew that He Feng would never accept
his attack for no reason.
"!" At this moment, Obito also began to retreat, and at the same time activated the
Mangekyou Sharingan again.
"Susanohu!"
Sky-blue Susanoo appeared all around Obito.
At first, there were only arms and ribs, but as the eye power filled up, Susanoo
took on the shape of a skull.
Soon, meridians and flesh appeared on the skull-shaped Susanoo.
Obito's Susanoo has completely entered his second form.
However, the frightening feeling that made Obito not disappear. In order not to
make himself too embarrassed in front of so many people, especially Kakashi, and
with Orochimaru's guarantee, Obito gritted his teeth and urged again. He activated
his Mangekyō Sharingan.
At this moment, the Karastengu's armor and mask covered Susanoo.
It was at this time that Obito's frightened feeling disappeared.
And the cherry cocoon burned by Fire Release also fell off.
He Feng's figure walked from itout.
He has a completely feminine face, with long silver-white hair that reaches to his
waist. His height of 1.8 meters is in sharp contrast to the previous height of 1.5
meters. There seems to be the most beautiful things in the world hidden between his
frown and his smile.
"So beautiful." Everyone present, whether of the same or opposite sex, had this
thought in their hearts.

Chapter 128 Grass Sword and Budu Yuhun

The Mangekyō Sharingan gave Hefeng the ability to temporarily transform, which made
up for his long-standing obsession with height.
This change brought He Feng not only an increase in height and strength, but also
He Feng's own charming ability that could be called a bug.
It can be said that He Fengfeng at this moment can charm all living beings in the
Ninja world with just a smile.
As long as He Feng thought about it, those who were charmed by him would no longer
have the heart to resist when facing him.
After completing the transformation, He Feng still relied on his powerful physical
skills.
When facing Obito, Hefeng didn't even need to turn on the immortal mode at all.
After all, that would be too bullying.
The next second He Feng appeared, his figure came to Obito's azure Susan.
He clenched his fists tightly and swung them out towards Obito's Susan.
"Boom!!"
A loud noise was heard, and cracks appeared on the armor of Susanoo's Hantengu.
Obito controlled Susanoo and stretched out his hand, holding two shurikens in
Susanoo's hands.
"Divine Shuriken!" Two shurikens were thrown by Obito's Susana.
The process of rotating in the air causes distortion of space.
"Susanohu!" He Feng mainly tested the ability of the kaleidoscope this time, so he
directly chose to activate the ultimate power of the kaleidoscope.
The next moment, cherry-pink Susanoo appeared around He Feng.
After seeing the color of his Susana, He Feng admitted that he had broken his
defense for a moment.
But soon, He Feng successfully convinced himself on the grounds that the pinker the
color, the more painful it would be to hit someone.
He Feng is far stronger than Obito in terms of chakra, eye power and mental power.
His Susanoo also completed his growth in a short period of time.
From bones to flesh and blood, and then to armor, the lower body and legs grow, and
the body size increases again.
Hefeng's Susanoo has successfully entered the fourth stage. He only needs to wait
for Hefeng's Sharingan to evolve again before his Susanoo can evolve into a
complete form.
Hefeng's fourth-stage Susan is eighty meters tall. Although it is not as tall as
the complete Susanu God, it is crushing compared to Obito's third-stage Susan.
In the hands of his cherry-pink Susan, he held two sacred weapons.
They are the Kusanagi Sword, which represents the ability to cut through
everything, and the Budou Yuhun, which can cause damage to the soul.
Originally, He Feng no longer used his double swords to defend against enemies due
to his rapid growth in strength. He did not expect that he would use the double
sword style again after he activated Susana.
The training ground where the two are located is located in the back mountain of
Konoha. It is the largest training ground in Konoha, so it is particularly empty.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Even though Susan was nearly 100 meters tall, it didn't seem crowded.
He Feng controlled Susanoo and launched an attack on Obito.
He first waved the straw sword in his right hand.
After this magical weapon that could cut everything came into contact with Obito's
Susan, there was only a moment's pause before it completed the cut.
And Obito fell from the air because he could no longer sustain Susana with this
blow.
After all, Konohana Xiaoye in He Feng's left eye has always been on, and the
absorption of Obito's chakra has never stopped.
The next second, Sakura-pink Susan waved the Budo Tamashii in his left hand, and
this artifact that could harvest souls just stayed next to Obito's neck.
"Surrendered...surrendered." Obito stuttered a little. He was thinking about when
he had offended He Feng. He felt that He Feng was targeting him.
After Obito surrendered, Hefeng canceled Susanoo, and the whole person slowly
floated down from the air relying on the super light heavy rock jutsu.
As the wind fell to the ground, the cherry blossom rain in the sky also stopped.
And without the supply of Muhua Xiaoye's chakra, He Feng's entire body shrank
visibly.
In just a few seconds, he changed from a long-legged lady of 1.8 meters to a cute
little potato of 1.5 meters.
This change made He Feng's mood, which had improved for a while, become worse
again.
The friendly match between Hefeng and Obito ended like this. With the abilities he
currently possesses, he still has the sage mode and the wood escape ninjutsu that
is not weaker than the kaleidoscope yet to be used.
Otherwise, He Feng could easily take down Obito with just a Susanata Buddha.
At this time, Orochimaru and others also came over.
Before Orochimaru could speak, Naruko opened her hands and ran toward He Feng on
her short legs.
She directly hugged He Feng's legs and said with a sweet voice: "Sister Feng, you
looked so good just now, I want to marry you in the future."
He Feng looked at Minato and Kushina with a somewhat stiff expression on his face,
and found that the couple had no intention of correcting Naruko. Instead, they were
covering their mouths and laughing.
He Feng picked up Naruko, and after reacting, he also didn't take Naruko's words to
heart.
Naruko is only a year old now, and it will be at least fourteen or five years
before she grows up. At that time, how could she still remember what she said now.
Then Hefeng pinched Naruko's cheek and said with a smile: "But thatI already have a
wife by then, what should I do? "
Naruko said without any surprise, "Then I will be Sister Feng's little wife!"
After hearing this, Minato on the side couldn't hold himself any longer, and
quickly took Naruko back from He Feng's arms, and then handed her to Kushina to
hold.
Kushina also whispered: "You little girl really talks about everything. Let's see
how I deal with you when I get home."
After seeing Naruko's shocking operation, Sasuke hugged his chest and pretended to
be cold: "It's so childish. It's not like me at all. I've already started learning
to extract chakra from Ni-chan."
This chapter is not finished yet, please click on the next page to continue reading
the exciting content!
Obito watched Sasuke's reaction, quietly leaned into He Feng's ear, and signaled:
"He Feng, do you think little Sasuke looks like that guy Kakashi when he was a
child?"
The corners of He Feng's mouth twitched. Obito was so brave. He was not afraid of
being heard by Brother Kakashi when he said this.
Sure enough, Kakashi's hearing was as good as ever. He came over menacingly, drew
out his short sword and put it on Obito's shoulder, "Obito, believe it or not, I
will chop you down."
He Feng couldn't help but cover his forehead with laughter.
Why were there so many living treasures around him? As expected, it was Sister
Tsunade's arms and Konan's warm bed that made him miss the most.
After the sparring session between He Feng and Obito ended, the onlookers also left
the training ground after greeting He Feng and others.
After they were almost gone, Orochimaru asked:
"He Feng, can you tell me in detail the abilities represented by your two eyes?
Just like Obito's left eye's ability is divine power, and his right eye's ability
is virtualization."
He Feng nodded, he had nothing to hide from Teacher Orochimaru.
"The ability that resides in my left eye is called Konohana Smile. The specific
effect is to summon a rain of cherry blossoms wherever I can see it. Anyone who
comes into contact with the cherry blossoms can absorb my chakra.
This absorption has a maximum value and a minimum value, which I can control, so it
will not have a big impact on my own people.
I can also transform through the chakra I absorb, thus improving my overall
abilities. "
Orochimaru took out a book and recorded all He Feng's data in this book.
"What about the right eye?"

Chapter 129 He Feng! This is so cool!

"My right eye is called Tian Tian Nu Ming. Its ability is very general, and it is
not biased towards fighting.
As for the specific ability, it should be to strengthen the charm that I exude, and
to release illusions on people who are affected by the charm that I exude. This
illusion will not be expressed on the surface, but is hidden in the heart of the
person who is affected by the spell.
As time goes by, people who practice this technique will gradually develop a good
impression of me and even turn into admiration for me. "
If He Feng's left eye represents the obsession and most fearful thing in his heart,
then He Feng's right eye ability comes entirely from his physique.
With the combination of Tiantian's female destiny and succubus's physique, He Feng
can be said to be truly loved by everything.
Not to mention 100%, at least 99.99% of the people in the ninja world will not have
any ill intentions towards him.
As for the 0.01%, it is probably only Duan who has Lord Evil God in his head.
And Orochimaru was also shocked when he heard the pupil surgery of He Feng's right
eye.
Hefeng's perfect eye technique, is this the ultimate power of the Uchiha clan?
No wonder Danzo loves the Sharingan of the Uchiha clan so much. It’s hard not to be
intoxicated by this kind of power.
Orochimaru smiled and shook his head. She was interested in the Sharingan of the
Uchiha clan, but this interest was not enough to support his unreasonable thoughts
about Uchiha.
As for being afraid of the power of Hefeng Kaleidoscope?
That’s even more impossible!
Orochimaru was very sure that her thoughts had not been distorted. She was
extremely certain of her beliefs from the beginning.
She wants to be a beacon, to protect, guide and support He Feng.
Then he watched He Feng change with his own eyes and influence the entire ninja
world.
As for whether He Feng will bring long-term peace to the ninja world in the end, or
whether it will bring greater chaos, she doesn't care.
Orochimaru stretched out his hand and rubbed He Feng's long hair, and said softly:
"He Feng, the teacher has to continue his research. Your kaleidoscope ability is
very strong, but the power of the kaleidoscope will eventually be exhausted. The
teacher will find it for you. The road to the eternal kaleidoscope, until then it
is better to use your kaleidoscope less than necessary."
Hefeng nodded and said: "Teacher Orochimaru, Obito and I want to go to Ryūchi
Cave."
Obito on the side also said quickly: "That's right, that guy Kakashi is going to
Miaomu Mountain every day to learn the magic there. He Feng has also learned the
magic of Shigu Forest. I am the only one left in Class 7. No more magical skills.
It just so happens that I have the Heavenly Curse Seal given by Hokage-sama, so I
also want to try whether I can learn the Sage Mode. "
Orochimaru did not refuse the two requests, or perhaps she had always had this
idea, but she never had the chance to say it out.
"Okay, you guys will make some adjustments today. Come to the lab to see me at
eight o'clock tomorrow morning, and I will take you to Longdi Cave.
But whether I can learn the immortal mode from Longdi Cave is beyond my control.
After all, even I have not learned the immortal mode. "
Orochimaru couldn't help but laugh at himself when he spoke.
In the early years, she had the same idea as Obito. After seeing how Jiraiya had
improved himself by learning the sage mode, he also found Ryūchi Cave and signed a
psychic contract with the big snake in Ryūchi Cave.After the contract, he also
expressed his desire to learn immortality to Immortal White Snake.
But in the end, learning the magic of immortality ended in failure.
"Okay Teacher Orochimaru, Obito and I will go find you early tomorrow morning."
Orochimaru nodded in agreement, and then left alone, heading towards his
laboratory.
The two little guys, Anko and Yamato, also followed up with Orochimaru.
Unlike Hefeng, the two of them had many places to stay besides Orochimaru's
laboratory.
As a civilian ninja, Anko's ninja talent is not very good. Apart from studying with
Orochimaru to engage in scientific research, she has nothing else she is good at.
Not to mention Yamato, Orochimaru is the sky in Yamato's heart.
It can be said that Yamato's belief in Orochimaru is not weaker than that guy
Kimimaro.
"Huh?" He Feng was suddenly startled.
With his own influence, Orochimaru-sensei will not defect to Konoha, and villages
like Sound Ninja Village will not appear again.
The fate of ninjas like Xiangshi Xianglan, Jugo Suigetsu Kimimaro will not change.
Xiang Ling is okay. She currently lives in Yuyin Village and is very comfortable.
But Kimimaro and Jugo are different.
One of these two people is facing the rampage of immortal transformation, and the
other is feared by his own clan and has been locked in a dungeon.
"Hey." He Feng sighed. He felt that he was too kind-hearted.
"A Fei, ask Bai Jue to help me find someone, a person named Zhongwu, who is born
with the ability to absorb natural energy.
The other person is named Kaguya Kimimaro. He is a ninja from Kaguya's clan in
Kirigakure Village. He is now almost five years old. When the former found him, he
told him that there was a place that could cure his troubles, and then brought him
to Teacher Orochimaru. good.
If the latter finds it, tell me and I will bring it back in person. "
He Feng just said to the air in front of Obito.
The next second, a vortex head emerged from the ground.
"Good He Feng, but if I finish this, He Feng, can you let me possess you for a
while? I want to use your body to poop." A Fei continued to talk dirty.
He Feng directly raised his foot and stepped on A Fei.
However, A Fei was very fast and did not give He Feng a chance.
Obito was dumbfounded when he saw this scene. He pointed at He Feng and then at the
place where A Fei disappeared just now.
Obito asked doubtfully: "He Feng, have you always done things like this? This is...
this is..."
Hefeng tilted his head and looked at Obito, "What's wrong? Is there any problem?"
Obito shook his head violently and said loudly: "This is too cool! Is that person
called Fei? Can I talk to him? And White Zetsu, are those White Zetsu the Hokage-
sama's wood escape experiments? body.
Doesn't this mean that there are many, many White Zetsus? If every White Zetsu can
escape, wouldn't there be no secrets in the ninja world in the eyes of White
Zetsus? "
He Feng just looked at Obito, and then nodded, "That's right, Obito is really
powerful. You can guess it right."
【Favorability +1 from Obito】
--------------------xxxx--------------------

For the first time in a long time, Obito showed some favorability to He Feng.
When a person has contributed too much to his favorability, it becomes difficult to
gain more favorability.
Just like Xiaonan.
He Feng raised Xiao Nan's experience to 200 points, and then he gained some
favorability from Xiao Nan.
The same is true for Tsunade. After Tsunade's experience reached 100, she gained a
little favorability for He Feng, but compared to He Feng's current strength, this
favorability was nothing.
"If Obito wants, I can let a White Zetsu follow Obito all the time."
"He Feng! This is so cool!"

Chapter 130 Trip to Longdi Cave

Ōtsutsuki Kaguya used the sacred tree to create many White Zetsu armies. With a
huge base, these White Zetsus would inevitably give birth to some powerful
individuals.
In addition to Fei, who has a whirlpool face, there are also some White Zetsu
beings who have reached the level of Jonin.
After Obito asked He Feng for help, He Feng arranged for a special Bai Jue like Ah
Fei to follow him.
With Hefeng's current charm, coupled with Bai Zetsu's own plant attributes, his
lethality against Bai Zetsu is 100%. Even if these Bai Zetsu betray Otsutsuki
Kaguya, they will not betray him.
And Kakashi also went to Mt. Myoboku immediately after the separation.
He has initially mastered the art of Flying Thunder God, and all that remains is to
train day after day.
As for the Immortal Mode, he also had a glimpse of it, but it would take some time
to master it.
Hefeng did not go to Tsunade that night, but made a long-distance teleportation
through the Flying Thunder God on Xiaonan's thigh.
That night, it rained cherry blossoms in Yuyin Village.
In that state, He Feng changed from his previous weakness and directly gained the
upper hand, using his high attack speed and high attack speed to kill Xiao Nan.
This was also Xiaonan's fastest defeat in this period. Hefeng was extremely
satisfied with his kaleidoscope ability.
He felt that he could no longer do without Muhua Xiaoye's ability. At the same
time, the urgency to evolve the kaleidoscope into the Eternal Eye appeared in
Hefeng's heart.
He has always been a late-stage hero, and after a wretched development in the early
stage, he unexpectedly wins in the late stage.
But after experiencing the feeling of exerting force in the early stage, He Feng
has fallen deeply in love with this feeling.
The next day.
Obito left the door early, and after helping himAfter the old lady crossed the
street, he hurriedly came to Orochimaru's laboratory.
It is impossible to be late. Obito is not the kind of person who is late.
After seeing that the time was five minutes away from eight o'clock and He Feng
hadn't arrived yet, Obito looked excited.
He defeated He Feng again.
As the hands of the clock reached eight o'clock, He Feng's figure appeared next to
Obito.
I have to say that the Mark of the Flying Thunder God on Obito is really useful.
Considering the total amount of He Feng's chakra, the distance of transmission is
no longer a problem.
Orochimaru looked at the two people who had gathered and put down the culture
bottle he just picked up.
In the culture bottle, there is also a pair of intact three-magatama Sharingan.
This is the result of Orochimaru's deal with Uchiha Fugaku as Hokage.
The Uchiha clan will provide Orochimaru with three magatama sharingan eyes for his
research, and Orochimaru will share the results of the research with the Uchiha
clan.
As for how much to share, it is not up to the Uchiha clan to decide.
However, Orochimaru did not intend to treat them badly. No matter how much the
power of the Uchiha clan increased, it would not be able to threaten his Hokage
position.
This is his confidence in himself, and it is also his confidence in He Feng.
"I have already made an agreement with the White Snake Immortal. I will take you to
the entrance of Longdi Cave. The subsequent trials will depend on your luck.
But I can give you two a piece of advice. Longdi Cave is the place that values
strength the most among the three immortal lands. "
With that said, Orochimaru began to form seals.
"The art of channeling."
Along with a cloud of smoke, a small white snake appeared in the laboratory.
"Channel us to Ryūchi Cave." Orochimaru said calmly.
The little white snake nodded, and then canceled the psychic technique.
After the little white snake disappeared, Orochimaru put his two hands on Hefeng
Obito's shoulders.
The next second, smoke came out of the three people.
What comes into view is a three-story temple. There is a plaque above the temple
door.
The three characters "Longdi Cave" are written on the plaque.
"I will send you here." Orochimaru smiled, then took a step back and actively
canceled the reverse psychic technique.
After Orochimaru disappeared, Obito looked around.
Longdi Cave is surrounded by towering rock walls, and there are some snake caves in
some places. Those ordinary small snakes will wander around the snake caves.
Even without entering Longdi Cave, you can clearly feel that this place is filled
with more intense natural power than ordinary places.
It is obvious that the three immortal lands have their own unique geographical
advantages.
"Let's go in." He Feng nodded to Obito, then walked ahead and opened the temple
door.
The two stepped into the gate one after the other.
After entering the gate, He Feng could clearly feel that he had passed through a
barrier.
Obviously, this is also the reason why the three great immortal lands are not easy
to find.
After passing through the barrier, He Feng saw a luxurious castle-like decoration,
with strings of gourd chandeliers shining softly above.
Under the gourd chandelier, twelve graceful and scantily clad dancers were dancing.
The dances performed by these dancers seem to be specially designed to enchant
others. Every move they make will reveal some parts that make people's blood boil.
In the middle, there are long tables decorated with gold. These long tables are
filled with all kinds of delicacies, and the aroma of the food seems to be wafting
in the air.
And on the front seat, sat a flower-like woman with long green hair and a golden
crown.
This woman is gorgeously dressed. On top of her pale skin are golden elongated
pupils, red eye shadow extending to the wings of her nose, and her red lips with
red lipstick maintain a smile.
She stretched out her palms as beautiful as white jade and pointed at the
delicacies on the table, and said softly:
"Two officers, welcome to Longdi Cave.
In order to welcome the two officials, the concubine specially prepared this table
of delicacies to warm them up. After enjoying the delicacies, these dancers can
also serve the two officials to rest.
This is the long-standing way of hospitality in Longdi Cave. "
Tian Xin Shen Ji looked at He Feng and Obito with eyes full of smiles.
Everyone who comes to Longdi Cave to learn immortal arts will be tested by Shen Ji.
As for the difficulty of the trial, it is completely determined by Shen Ji.
If Amada Shinshinhime is a little full, she will naturally not make it too
difficult for the tester, and may let her go by doing something simple.
But if Tian Xinji didn't eat that day, she would naturally try her best to keep the
tester in order to fill her stomach.
As the goddess guarding the Longdi Cave, she naturally has the best appetite.
And the feeling Hefeng gave her made her eager to eat it.
Of course, this eating is in the physical sense. After all, Tian Xinji's body is a
big snake, and she does not value physical reproduction but her appetite.
As for Obito, it was the dessert prepared by Tianxin Shenji for herself.

Chapter 131 Fists are big

Although Hefeng didn't know how Tian Xin Shen Ji wanted to eat him, he could tell
that Tian Xin Shen Ji had bad intentions.
In other words, He Feng actually knew about the trials in Longdi Cave.
Whoever is fooled will not be fooled.
However, before He Feng could speak, Obito beside him became unhappy.
The moment Obito heard Tian Shinji's words, he feltI couldn't bear it anymore.
He felt that this person was treating him as a fool, Uchiha Obito. One second he
was looking like jagged rocks and scary and gloomy, but the next second he was
looking like a maihime delicacy?
You are not the type to fool people like you, right?
If he hadn't worried that this was a cave, opening the Susanoo might cause it to
collapse, and since he was here to learn senjutsu, Obito just opened the Susanoo
and flattened the place.
"What? Is it because the food I prepared for the two officials is not to your
liking?" Tian Xin Shenji asked with some confusion.
At the same time, the dancers also stopped their movements. At Tianxinjinji's
signal, the dancers stepped forward one after another, trying to use their
tenderness to provoke Obito, while picking up the food on the table and wanting to
throw it in. Feed two people.
At this moment, both He Feng and Obito couldn't stand the feeling of their IQ being
pressed to the ground and being rubbed.
In just a moment, a ring of bones and an arm appeared around the two of them.
The cherry pink and light blue fists were aimed at Tian Xinji and the dancing girls
respectively.
The dancers screamed and fell to the ground after being knocked away by Obito's
Susan.
The originally beautiful body disappeared, replaced by large snakes rolling
painfully on the ground.
And Tian Xin Shenji didn't even have a chance to react, so she was grabbed by He
Feng's Susan arm, and she couldn't escape even if she wanted to.
"Don't use such low-level methods next time. The only people you can deceive are
fools." He Feng sighed, a pair of Mangekyo Sharingan staring into Tian Xinji's
eyes.
Unknown to everyone, Tian Tian Nu Ming's ability was activated by him. Tian Xin
Shenji only felt a trance in front of her eyes before she recovered.
"Damn it!" She gritted her teeth, transformed into a big snake again, and got
directly out of Susan's fist.
Then, she flew into the sky again and returned to her human form.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

But this time Tian Xinji did not use that sweet image, but showed her fangs and
blue tongue.
"You two have passed the first trial. If you are afraid of Longdi Cave, you can
leave right away. I will not stop you.
If you want to learn magic, just keep going. "
After saying that, Tian Xin Shen Ji shut her mouth, looking like she was too lazy
to continue talking to He Feng and Obito.
As for avenging those Snake Princesses who died at Obito's hands?
Don't be kidding, she is not a fool. Even if they really start fighting, she will
not be the opponent of those two Uchiha. Let's leave these two Uchiha to other
Kamiki and White Snake Sage.
Besides, there were a lot of big snakes and dragons that transformed into dancing
girls in the cave. If she was really hungry, she would even use those big snakes to
satisfy her appetite.
In Tian Xin Shen Ji's view, she is an immortal, and she is no longer the same
species as those ordinary big snakes. In addition, snakes have the habit of
cannibalism.
Therefore, in Tian Xin Shenji's opinion, those big snakes are dead and have no
relationship at all.
Of course, she would not admit that he had a slight affection for the shorter boy.
After leaving the area that Tian Xin Shen Ji was responsible for, He Feng and Obito
walked for a long distance.
Along the way, the two of them often saw big snakes entangled together for no
apparent reason. This was also one of the characteristics of Longdi Cave.
In addition to those snakes with little intelligence, He Feng also saw big snakes
that were as big as ten thousand snakes.
However, those big snakes hid honestly after seeing He Feng and Obito's Sharingan,
and did not have the courage to step forward to taste whether He Feng was
delicious.
As the two of them gradually deepened, a goddess who was the same height as He
Feng, had long dark black hair and wore a golden crown appeared in front of He Feng
and Obito.
"Trialists, welcome to Longdi Cave. I can see you here. I believe that you two have
passed the trial of Tian Xin Shenji.
You can call me Ichikishima-hime, one of the snake girls in charge of this trial. "
Ichikishimahime was floating in the air, putting her hands behind her head and said
casually:
"Well, how about we play a game of chess. As long as you can beat me, I will let
you pass." Ichikishimahime, as the goddess in charge of the intellectual test in
Ryūchi Cave, is good at many things.
Of course, there is no way to only put together a puzzle.
That's for coaxing children.
After all, with his status as Boruto at that time, how could Ryūchidō really attack
him? It would be enough to just pose a little childish problem.
However, the current Hefeng Obito is far less famous than the later generations of
Naruto, so naturally he will not receive preferential treatment from Ryūchi Cave.
"Emmmm" He Feng pondered for a moment, then turned to look at Obito.
He asked: "Obito, can you play shogi? It's the kind of shogi with jade and flying
cars."
Obito shook his head and replied without any hesitation: "If you don't know how to
play, He Feng, can you not do it either?"
He Feng first looked at Obito and nodded in response, "Yeah."
Then, Hefeng looked at Ichikijima Hime, who was floating in the sky with a
contented look on her face, "Change to one that allows us to pass easily, or I will
beat you up."
Obviously, Hefeng remembered Orochimaru's warning.
In a place like Longdi Cave, it is natural to speak with your fists, and everything
else is empty.
Just like this test, if he wanted to, he could play a game of chess with
Ichikishima-hime, but if he didn't want to, there was nothing Ichikijima-hime could
do against him.
Hearing what He Feng said, Obito was also veryHe quickly remembered Orochimaru's
warning.
So he showed his Mangekyou Sharingan again, and the first stage of Susanoo was
directly mobilized by him.
"That's right! Let us pass the trial, or we will beat you down!" Obito pointed at
Ichikishimahime and said with a vicious expression.
In cooperation with his exposed Susana, Ichikijima Hime was really frightened.
But she was not scared after living for a thousand years. As the elder of Ryuji
Cave second only to the White Snake Sennin, Ichikishima Hime also had her own self-
confidence.
The next second, the magical chakra in her body was mobilized.
Ichikishima Hime didn't need to seal, she opened her mouth.
"Immortal Technique: White Geki no Jutsu!" Several long red dragons shot out from
Ichikishimahime's mouth.
These red light dragons all hold a black ball in their hands, and they are
constantly rotating around the black cylinder.
Because Obito was not sure about the power of senjutsu, he directly canceled
Susanoo, and then turned on the virtualization to avoid it.
"Human, you have successfully angered an immortal!" Ichikishimahime said in a smart
voice.

Chapter 132 I am a genius of the Uchiha clan

Facing the angry Ichikijima Hime, Uchiha Obito also showed a solemn expression.
Although he is arrogant, he is not without brains.
He came here to learn Ryūchi Cave Immortal Technique, and Ichikijima Hime herself
was already a Immortal who had lived for a thousand years.
After thousands of years of practice, let alone a big snake, even a lump of wood
can live for a thousand years.
"Immortal Technique: Inorganic Reincarnation!" Ichikishimahime floated in the air
and waved in the direction of Obito.
The next second, the rock walls everywhere turned into sharp cones and launched an
attack on Obito.
At the same time, three more boulders protruded from the ground, and then slowly
began to shape.
Soon, three stone giants appeared in front of Obito.
These stone giants looked very bulky, but the next second they appeared directly in
front of Obito, and at the same time they waved their fists at Obito.
Obito avoided these attacks one by one through virtualization.
At the same time, Obito also tried to fight back against those stone giants, but
when he demolished one stone giant, there would be a second and third stone giant
created by Ichikijima Hime through inorganic reincarnation, and they would attack
Obito again. Launch a siege.
After all, Obito's virtualization has its limit. After five minutes, Obito exited
the virtual state.
"Susanohu!"
Obito's Susanoo evolved directly to the second stage as soon as he appeared, using
Susanoo's powerful defense to block the first wave of the stone giant's attack.
After realizing that there was no point in fighting these stone men, Obito set his
sights on Ichikishima Hime in the sky.
"The one standing in front of you! But the greatest genius of the Uchiha clan,
Uchiha Obito!" Obito roared, and the Kamui shuriken was thrown from his Susanoo.
At this time, Hefeng also looked at Obito and said, "Obito, this is for you first."
With that said, He Feng took out a weapon from the storage scroll and threw it
over.
Obito turned his head, and there was a gap in Susana's hard armor. The weapon
entered the sequel through the gap and was held in Obito's hand.
"This is it!" Obito's eyes widened. It's not like he doesn't know anything about
children. As the biggest genius in Uchiha, both Uchiha Setsuna and Uchiha Fugaku
have personally transmitted ideas to Obito and taught him at the same time. The
unknown history of the Earth Uchiha clan.
The weapon he held in his hand was the weapon lost by the Uchiha clan...or taken
away by Uchiha Madara, the Uchiha Dan.
Obito weighed the Uchiha fan twice and couldn't put it down.
"Immortal magic, inorganic dragon transformation!" Ichikishimahime launched another
attack on Obito.
In an instant, all the stone giants turned into long red dragons out of thin air
under the control of Ichikishima Hime.
In the next second, these long red dragons all transformed into the appearance of
the Immortal Technique and the White Power Technique.
It can be said that if Obito is hit by this move, he will be disabled even if he
does not die.
And Obito weighed the Uchiha fan, with a smile on his lips.
After using the recovered virtual blur to dodge the 90% white dragon, Obito waved
the fan in his hand at the last white dragon.
After the Uchiha Uchiha Uchiha Uchiha Uchiha collided with the White Geki Choryu,
there was no explosion as expected by Ichikishima Hime. Instead, after a fight, the
White Geki Choryuu was beaten back.
"It's really useful." Obito grinned and planned to continue to interact with
Ichikijima Hime.
Hefeng on the side also quietly opened the Mangekyo Sharingan at the same time, and
activated the power of Tenden's Life towards Ichikijima Hime.
As long as Ichikishima-hime fails to discover and remove Tenden's ability as time
goes by, there will be only one end.
That is He Feng’s frame.
As for the airs, it is not enough for outsiders.
Facing the white dragon that came back from the counterattack, Ichikijima Hime
didn't care. Just when she was about to take the next step, she saw the white
dragon suddenly dissipated.
"Okay, Ichikijima-hime, these two are guests of the White Snake Sennin, so there is
no need to continue to use force." Totsuji-hime put her hands in front of her and
said in a calm tone.
"Who are you? Be careful, Grandpa Obito will beat you up too!" Obito doesn't
tolerate his opponent. As long as He Feng is there to back him up, he would not
even dare to touch the White Snake Sage.
Seeing someone coming out to start a fight, Hefeng waved his hand at Obito, and
then Obito gave up.
"We are here to ask Immortal White Snake for magic." He FengArriving in front of
Tuanjin Ji, she levitated through the art of super light and heavy rock and looked
straight at her.
Tuanjinji nodded, "White Snake Immortal has already told me that I am taking you
two to see White Snake Immortal." Tuanjinji still maintained a smile.
"Lead the way." He Feng stretched out his hand and motioned for Tuan Jin Ji to walk
ahead.
Although the Snake Girl in Longdi Cave looked pretty after her transformation, she
always turned into a snake face. He Feng didn't want to be bitten when he walked in
front.
Tuanjin Ji was not upset and just walked in front to lead the way for He Feng.
And Hefeng also calmly rewarded Tuanjinji with a divine destiny.
He Feng's eyes were a little sore after activating the illusion of Tian Tian Nu's
life many times in a short period of time.
"Hmph." Ichikijima looked at He Feng's back and snorted with some disappointment,
although she didn't know why she was disappointed.
On the way, He Feng asked: "Teacher Orochimaru told us that if we want to practice
immortal arts in Ryūchi Cave, we need to pass a test. We did not pass the test, so
why did the White Snake Immortal ask you to lead the way.
Or should we say that what happened along the way was the third trial. "
Hearing this, Obito also became vigilant. He thought He Feng was right.
Tuanjinji smiled and shook her head, "The trial is prepared for ordinary people who
lack qualifications and hope to learn the true tradition of Longdi Cave. The two of
you are extremely powerful and have a naturally beloved physique, so you will
naturally be treated differently. "
Hearing this, Obito relaxed his guard and nodded in agreement. What this person
said made sense.
He Feng shook his head, "So, why don't you come and guide me and Obito during the
first trial? Wouldn't that be faster?"
"You!" Obito's eyes widened, and he pointed at Totsuhime with his fist in his hand.
"Haha." Tuanjin Ji smiled, "It's not good for the little guy to be too suspicious.
If you really have so many doubts, why not ask the White Snake Immortal yourself."
As she spoke, Tuanjinji waved her hand, and a temple suddenly appeared.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Tuanjin Ji pushed open the door of the temple with her own hands, and saw a throne
carved with cloud waves in the center of the temple.
And on the throne sits a big snake.
This big snake has orange hair and yellow eyes, a green cat's eye stone on its
chest, a purple ribbon on its forehead, a horn-shaped ornament in front of the
ribbon, and a red luminous pearl on its head.
The most eye-catching thing was the pipe in the mouth of the big snake. He Feng
could even see the white smoke floating on the pipe.
I don’t know what kind of cigarette the White Snake Immortal smokes.
"Tanjinji, you can go down now."

Chapter 133 Immortal mode? Succubus mode!

"Yes, Immortal White Snake." Tuan Jinji bowed to Immortal White Snake, and then
silently retreated.
After Tuanjin Ji retreated, the door of the temple was suddenly closed tightly.
Obito looked warily at the White Snake Sage at the front.
"Little Uchiha, I didn't expect that after a thousand years, I would have a
descendant of that guy here." White Snake Sage looked at Uchiha Obito and sighed.
He Feng keenly captured the key words in the White Snake Immortal's words, but he
had no intention of getting to the bottom of it.
After all, there is no need for him to ask what Immortal White Snake wants to say
about this kind of thing. If he doesn't want to say anything, even if he asks, he
won't be able to get anything out of it.
However, Obito obviously did not think as much as Hefeng did. He immediately asked:
"White Snake Sage, is the guy you are talking about the ancestor of my Uchiha
clan?"
White Snake Sage didn't expect Obito to ask so straightforwardly, but she didn't
pay too much attention.
"Yes, that guy is indeed the ancestor of your Uchiha clan, but his surname is not
Uchiha. If you want to call him, you should call him Indra."
"Is it Uchiha Indra?"
"No, it's Indra Otsutsuki."
In fact, Indra did not inherit the surname of Hagoromo, but White Snake Sage did
not care about this. As the master of Ryuji Cave, one of the three great immortal
lands that transcended the ninja world, she was not afraid of Hagoromo.
After hearing the surname Otsutsuki, Obito suddenly turned his head and looked at
He Feng.
He Feng also nodded helplessly.
He felt that the White Snake Immortal was deceiving fools, but he could not refute
anything.
After seeing Obito's reaction, White Snake Sage also became interested: "Oh? Little
guy, you seem to know the surname Otsutsuki. Can you tell me where you got it?"
At this time, He Feng interrupted Obito who was about to continue speaking, "I told
him. I wonder if Obito and I, the White Snake Sage, can learn Ryūchi Cave Immortal
Technique?"
The White Snake Immortal can be said to have matured with age, so he can naturally
see the purpose of He Feng's move.
She has an eccentric personality and can be said to do things completely as she
pleases.
After seeing He Feng's unbridled behavior, she originally planned to teach the two
of them a lesson, but for some reason this idea only appeared in her mind for a
moment and she changed her mind.
"Of course, but are you ready? My magical skills in Longdi Cave are not so easy to
learn."
He Feng and Obito nodded.
Seeing this, the White Snake Immortal jumped up from the stone chair and bit Hefeng
Daitu on his neck one after another.
The huge celestial chakra was injected into the two bodies by the White Snake
Immortal through this mouthful.
Seeing this, He Feng quickly sat down cross-legged and concentrated on
adjusting.The balance of natural energy, spiritual energy and chakra in your own
body.
Obito also followed He Feng's example and sat down, and then adjusted his chakra
according to the method He Feng taught him previously.
However, Obito's control over chakra is obviously not as strong as Hefeng's. If it
weren't for the Curse Seal of Heaven assisting Obito, the balance of the three
energies in his body would have been broken countless times.
The White Snake Immortal who returned to his seat just stared at the two of them
practicing, wondering what he was thinking in his heart.
The celestial arts of Yongjidong are different from those of Mount Miaomu and
Shigulin. The celestial arts of Mount Miaomu will acquire the toad nature after
completion of practice. The external manifestation of the toad nature will also
change as one becomes more proficient in the sage mode. .
The higher the proficiency, the weaker the toad nature of one's appearance.
In Shigulin, the Immortal mode is more represented by the complex Immortal facial
makeup, and it will not cause the cultivator to have a "slug-like" change.
As for Longdi Cave, its immortal mode is completely aimed at transforming into a
dragon.
As one becomes more proficient in the Longdi Cave Immortal Technique, the
manifestation of one's own snake transformation will become more conspicuous.
In the original timeline, after Kabuto Yakushi mastered Ryūchidō Sage Mode, he
claimed that he had successfully transformed into a dragon, but he still maintained
the eyes and crawling posture of a snake, only having an extra pair of dragon horns
compared to a snake.
Obito's talent for Ryūchidō Sage Mode is obviously not as good as Yakushi Kabuto's,
even though he has the support of the Curse Seal of the Sky.
Two days passed in a blink of an eye, and Immortal White Snake just stared at the
two of them for two days.
As Hefeng gradually became more proficient in the Longdi Cave Immortal Technique,
some changes also appeared on his body.
"It's weird, it's weird, I have never seen such a strange change." At this time,
the White Snake Immortal had transformed from a white snake into an old lady.
She stood next to He Feng, walking around He Feng in circles, constantly looking at
He Feng.
The more she looked, the more confused she became.
Is this boy really practicing the magic from her Longdi Cave?
Why are the changes happening to his body getting further and further away from the
transformation into a dragon? It is obvious that the magical chakra has been
condensed in his body.
Thinking of this, White Snake Sage looked at Uchiha Obito on the side again.
Although Uchiha Obito's mastery of Ryūchi Cave Immortal Technique is not as good as
He Feng's, he is still improving in an orderly manner.
At this time, there were already signs of dragon transformation on his body.
White scales appeared on Obito's arms, shoulders and cheeks, and two small
protrusions appeared on his forehead, which were unformed dragon horns.
Because Obito closed his eyes, it was impossible to tell whether his eyes had
changed.
"I have lived for so many years, and this is the first time I have seen such a
strange change."
With that said, the White Snake Immortal grabbed the little tail that was wagging
behind He Feng.
There is a cherry pink heart at the end of this little tail.
This made the White Snake Immortal puzzled.
Holding the tail in his hand, the love at the end actually poked at the White Snake
Immortal.
After being poked by the tip of the love, the White Snake Immortal retreated
quickly as if he was electrocuted.
"Weird, so weird!" White Snake Immortal sighed.
He Feng's changes didn't stop there. A pair of fleshy wings grew out of his back,
and a goat-like horn grew out of his forehead.
As time passed slowly, He Feng and Obito also woke up one after another.
After the two woke up, they immediately noticed the changes in each other.
"Obito! You've grown horns!"
"He Feng! You have a tail!!"
The two said in unison.
The next second, Immortal White Snake directly used magic to condense a water
mirror in front of the two of them.
Through the water mirror, the two were able to see their own changes.
"Vocal!" Before Obito could speak, He Feng was dumbfounded.
Under He Feng's deliberate control, the tail behind him first swayed from side to
side. He Feng touched it with his hand again and found that the touch was very
obvious.
The next second, He Feng controlled the tip of his tail and poked Obito.
"!" The moment he was poked by the tail, Obito jumped up suddenly, and his whole
face turned red.
A bad premonition arose in Hefeng's heart.
――――――
Everyone may wish to speak enthusiastically and guess what is wrong.

Chapter 134 Obito’s Conviction

He Feng's eyes were very sharp and he noticed Obito's reaction immediately.
Combined with his understanding of his identity, he quickly deduced Obito's current
state.
At this moment, He Feng felt that he was going further and further down the road of
succubus and could no longer turn back.
Originally, he only had the charm ability of a succubus, but now he can even easily
arouse a person's lust.
Now it was better, he became walking directly.
"He...He Feng..." Obito looked at He Feng awkwardly. He bent over and grabbed the
corners of his clothes with both hands, not knowing what to do.
He Feng sighed and turned to look at Immortal White Snake.
"White Snake Immortal, I wonder if there are snake ladies in Longdi Cave other than
the Three Snake Queens who can transform." He Feng asked directly.
White Snake Sage looked at Obito with a half-smile, "Of course, but..."
"Please help my friend find two snake girls. He is from the Uchiha clan and is very
rich." Hefeng pointed at the fan in Obito's hand, "That is the weapon of the former
Uchiha clan leader Uchiha Madara. He But Uchiha Madara’s successor.”
Hearing this, Immortal White Snake was also stunned.
She still has an impression of Uchiha Madara, the inheritor of Indra Chakra,
QianThe one closest to his ancestor Indra.
"No trouble, this is also good for Longdi Cave." White Snake Immortal clapped his
hands.
At this time, the door of the temple opened, and Tianxin Princess, Ichikijima
Princess and Tsunjin Princess stood respectfully outside.
After the three of them saw He Feng, their eyes were full of passion, but He Feng
turned a blind eye to it.
He is devoted to Tsunade Konan!
"White Snake Immortal." The three of them bowed to the White Snake Immortal.
The White Snake Immortal nodded, and then informed Tian Xin Shen Ji and the others
to take He Feng Obito to rest, and informed the other party of Obito's needs.
In this way, Obito and Hefeng were taken by the three goddesses to the residence
specially prepared for those who passed the test in Ryudi Cave.
After He Feng and others left, the White Snake Immortal activated his magical
chakra to suppress the inexplicable impulse in his body.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

the other side.

He Feng righteously rejected the invitation of the three Snake Girls to eat chicken
together, while Obito was taken away by the Snake Lady in Longdi Cave to talk
alone.
I believe that Obito has the buff given by He Feng, and he will still have the
upper hand even if he is one against two.
On this day, someone in Class 7 once again broke away from the boy's body. Now the
only person in Class 7 who still maintains his boy's body is Kakashi.
……
Miaomu Mountain.
Kakashi was sitting cross-legged and meditating by the toad oil lake, and his body
was drizzled with toad oil.
"Sneeze!" Kakashi sneezed suddenly.
The next second, his whole body began to transform into a toad at a speed visible
to the naked eye, and the parts that had transformed into a toad showed signs of
petrification.
Bang——
A crisp sound came from the back of Kakashi's head.
"Concentrate, don't think about what is there and what is not!" Fukasaku held the
iron rod and looked at Kakashi with a serious face.
At this time, Kakashi's upper body was naked. Because he needed to shower with toad
oil, he was also forced to take off the mask that was almost welded to his face. If
Kakashi's appearance as a child was almost the same as He Feng's .
So even if the two of them stand together now, they will only be thought of as
twins, not twins.
Kakashi's body and face were already covered with bruises.
This was all caused by Fukasaku Sennin's blows with a stick.
If you want to learn magic well, you have to endure hardship.
Namikaze Minato was knocked on no less often than him.
Of course, that means Kakashi doesn’t know what Obito is doing at this time,
otherwise he would drag Obito to death no matter what.
Perhaps because he transformed into a dragon in Ryūchidō Sage Mode, Obito didn't
find the Snake Lady curious, but rather enjoyed it.
"Fukasaku Sage, how long do you think it will take for me to master senjutsu? Am I
not very talented?" Kakashi was a little disappointed.
He has been studying at Miaomu Mountain for a long time. If he really has the
talent to learn immortal arts, he should have learned it long ago.
Hearing Kakashi's question, Fukasaku nodded, "Yes, your boy is the most talented
student I have ever seen."
Of course, what Fukasaku said does not include those scholars who have turned into
stone.
Those people were not qualified to let him teach in person.
In addition, in Fukasaku Sennin's view, little Jiraiya's talent is not as good as
Kakashi's, but he obviously will not tell this matter.
Although Fukasaku's words hit Kakashi a little, they didn't make him give up.
After all, Kakashi has a friend like Metkai.
He knows better than anyone that talent doesn’t mean he doesn’t work hard enough to
make this sentence come true.
At this time, Fukasaku changed the topic, "Of course, you are also the most
perseverant student I have ever seen. I believe that it won't be long before you
can master the magic of immortality."
Kakashi nodded sharply and said: "Yes, I will not give up. If Kai and Obito know
that I give up halfway, they will definitely laugh to death."
With that said, Kakashi once again tried to absorb natural energy.
Eye shadow began to appear in the corners of his eyes, and his pupils became like
frog eyes.
Kakashi's body began to gradually appear "frog-like" characteristics, and this
characteristic became calmer, and there was no impossible phenomenon.
Fukasaku Sennin held the iron rod and nodded.
As time passed, the changes in Kakashi began to become unstable.
Bang——
What greeted Kakashi was Fukasaku's iron rod.
At this moment, a cloud of smoke suddenly appeared in the square next to Toad Oil
Lake.
As the smoke dissipated, Jiraiya appeared there wearing a black windbreaker
embroidered with red clouds, black nail polish and a Suzaku ring.
"It's little Jiraiya, why are you here?" Fukasaku Sage looked at the figure in the
square and asked doubtfully.
Jiraiya also saw Kakashi and Fukasaku Sage.
"Boss, I came here mainly to ask the Great Toad Sage about something." Jiraiya said
respectfully to Fukasaku Sage.
As the teacher who taught him celestial arts, Jiraiya has always been very
respectful to the two great sages, Fukasaku and Shima.
"That's it." Fukasaku heard the words and glanced at the sun in the sky.
"It's about time. The kid's mother has already finished cooking. Little Kakashi
doesn't need to train for now. Let's go eat first. After dinner, I'll take little
Jiraiya and you to see the old man."
Kakashi stood up and nodded to Jiraiya.
Jiraiya looked at Kakashi's bruised nose and face, and recalled the time when he
was learning senjutsu.Soon, Jiraiya and Kakashi finished the entire insect feast
prepared by Shima Sennin. The delicacy of the toad was a complete test of will for
the two of them.
After eating, Fukasaku took Jiraiya to the place where the Great Toad Sage was.
"Little Jiraiya, please wait a moment while I go to see if the old man is awake."

Chapter 135 Prophecy

Pushing open the door, what you see is the big toad immortal sitting on a tall
chair.
As a toad that has survived for thousands of years, although the Great Toad
Immortal looks very old, his strength has long been transcendent.
When he was young, he and the two brothers Hamura Hagoromo fought against Otsutsuki
Kaguya.
Thousands of years ago, he was able to participate in six-level battles. Today, a
thousand years later, his strength is self-evident.
The moment Fukasaku opened the door and entered the main hall, the Great Toad Sage
lazily opened his eyes.
Although he saw Fukasaku's appearance clearly, he still asked, "Who is coming?"
Fukasaku already knew the character of the Great Toad Sage, so he got right to the
point: "Old Master, little Jiraiya is here too."
After hearing this, Fukasaku was greeted by a long silence.
Fukasaku looked up and saw the great toad sage already snoring.
This is falling asleep again!
Fukasaku didn't know what to do for a while, whether it was better to wake him up
or not.
At this moment, there was a cursing voice coming from outside the door.
Shima walked in front, followed by Jiraiya who looked helpless.
"Dementic old man! Stop falling asleep." Shima's tone was very bad.
Fukasaku on the side quickly stretched out his hand to pull Shima.
"Old lady, how can you say that the old lady is a demented old man!"
Seeing that the couple was about to quarrel, the big toad fairy sitting above
opened his eyes.
He said calmly: "Don't quarrel, don't quarrel, there must be harmony between
husband and wife."
Hearing this, Shima and Fukasaku stopped.
However, the next words of the Great Toad Immortal directly raised the blood
pressure of the three people present.
"Who is this? Why isn't it a toad?" The Great Toad Sage looked at Jiraiya and said
word by word.
Jiraiya sighed and responded helplessly: "Big Toad Sage, I am Jiraiya."
"Hey, it's little Jiraiya. What's the matter with you coming to see me?" The Great
Toad Sage asked again.
Jiraiya said quickly: "I have something to ask the Great Toad Sage. This matter may
have a long history."
The Great Toad Sage is old and likes to pretend to be confused when he has nothing
to do. Jiraiya is really afraid that the other person will fall asleep in the next
second.
The Great Toad Immortal nodded and said, "Well, you tell me."
Jiraiya did not express his doubts immediately, but used the medium of psychic to
channel a picture.
He unfolded the scroll towards the Great Toad Sage, "I would like to ask about the
origin of this demon. I always feel that this is not something that should exist in
the ninja world."
The Great Toad Sage looked at the scroll unfolded by Jiraiya and felt a little
shocked.
Heretic Golem, why did this thing appear in the ninja world?
Wasn't it sealed on the moon by Hagoromo? He still remembered that the descendants
of Hamura were guarding the heretic demons on the moon.
But soon, the Great Toad Sage adjusted himself. He still said as the old god: "This
is indeed not something that should be in the ninja world, or he has another
identity."
After his guess was verified, Jiraiya did not breathe a sigh of relief, but instead
had more doubts in his heart.
The Great Toad Sage said that this does not belong to the ninja world, so how did
Nagato obtain this demon statue.
While Jiraiya was thinking, the Great Toad Sage continued: "It's called the Heretic
Golem, and it is the body of the Ten Tails. When all nine tailed beasts are sealed
into the Heretic Golem, it has the power to destroy the world. The capable Ten-
Tails will reappear in the ninja world.
The birth of the Ten-Tails is for destruction. When the Ten-Tails appears in the
Ninja World, the Ninja World will usher in destruction. Only the Son of Prophecy
has the ability to defeat the Ten-Tails and save the Ninja World. "
The short words of the Great Toad Sage not only brought a powerful impact to
Jiraiya, but also to the two Sages Fukasaku and Shima.
This is an area they have never been exposed to.
Jiraiya asked again: "Big Toad Sage, may I ask if the nine beasts laughing with the
green-eyed boy are the nine tailed beasts."
Originally, Jiraiya had not thought about this. After all, no one would think that
tailed beasts could play with humans. There was an irreconcilable contradiction
between the two.
Even if a Jinchuuriki gains recognition from the tailed beasts and becomes a
perfect Jinchuuriki, it is still a single individual and does not have
universality.
This time the Great Toad Immortal did not answer Jiraiya, but closed his eyes.
Seeing this, Shima was about to wake up the Great Toad Sento when Fukasaku stopped
him.
"The elder is prophesying, let's wait." Fukasaku advised.
Shima nodded and just stood there waiting for the Great Toad Sage to wake up.
About an hour passed before the giant toad fairy slowly opened his eyes.
--------------------xxxx--------------------
He looked at Jiraiya again, the child he had chosen.
His voice was intermittent and sounded a little weak, as if he had lost a lot of
strength because of the prophecy.
"The ninja world will face the intertwining of light and darkness.
War and peace are only a matter of thought.
There will no longer be any boundaries between life and death. "
With the end of the three-sentence prophecy, the snoring sound of the Great Toad
Immortal came slowly.
Jiraiya,The three of them, Fukasaku Shima, looked at each other, and for a moment
they didn’t know what to say.
Fortunately for Fukasaku and Shima, Myoboku Mountain, as one of the three great
immortal lands, did not participate in the turmoil in the Ninja world at all. Even
if the Ninja world was wiped out, it had nothing to do with Myoboku Mountain.
But Jiraiya is different. He has been fighting for the peace of the ninja world and
for finding the son of prophecy all his life.
But now a new prophecy made by the Great Toad Immortal made him feel a little
depressed.
"Hey." Jiraiya sighed. It was clear that the son of the prophecy had not been found
yet, so he ushered in a new prophecy.
Except for the second prophecy, Jiraiya can be said to have no clue as to the other
two prophecies about how many Riddlers there are.
The war that can appear in the prediction of the Great Toad Sage can be said to be
the Great Ninja War.
In one thought, it might be the opportunity for the Ninja World War to happen. As
for whose thought it was, Jiraiya didn't know, and he had no way to prevent it.
"Boss, big sister, I have something to do elsewhere, so I'll leave first. Kakashi,
I'm sorry to bother you." Jiraiya bowed slightly to Fukasaku and Shima, then lifted
the counter-spiritual technique and left Mt. Myoboku. .
After Jiraiya left, Fukasaku and Shima looked at each other, and both could see the
helplessness in the other's eyes.
The two of them felt a little sorry for little Jiraiya.
Over the years, in the eyes of Fukasaku and Shima, Jiraiya is both a younger
brother and a child.
"The ninja world is becoming more and more turbulent. I hope little Jiraiya will be
fine too." Fukasaku sighed.
Shima pinched his waist, "Whoever dares to touch little Jiraiya will also have to
see if our Miaomu Mountain agrees!"
"..."

Chapter 136 Xiao Di and Danzo’s Ambition

In Yanyin Village.
Following a violent explosion, Deidara poked his head out from behind a stone wall
and looked at his masterpiece with satisfaction.
In front is a house that has been reduced to ruins.
Of course, no one lives in this house.
Although Deidara loved the art of explosions, he was not so crazy as to use bombs
against the villagers of Iwagakure.
"Sure enough, explosions are art, huh." Deidara said to himself.
At this moment, Onoki's roar came from the air.
"Deidara! You're starting to study your useless explosion again. I've told you so
many times that there is no future in explosion escape. As long as you learn dust
escape from me, the position of the Godaime Tsuchikage will be yours. .”
Ohnoki came to Deidara's side, his eyes filled with anger and indifference.
As the most talented child in the village, Deidara was very happy to accept him as
his disciple, hoping that Deidara could one day inherit his dust release so that
the ultimate ninjutsu of dust release would not be lost.
But Deidara didn't have the slightest interest in Dust Release. He just studied
various bombs every day, blowing up a house today and a toilet the next. People in
the village had complained to him, the Tsuchikage, more than once.
"Old man, I won't allow you to insult my art like this!" Deidara raised his head
and said with a rebellious look.
Deidara was only four years old and could use his talent to develop explosive clay.
He believed that one day his art could definitely surpass the old man's dust
escape.
This is also the reason why Deidara disdains learning dust escape from Ohnoki.
"You! You! You!" Ohnoki covered his heart with one hand and pointed at Deidara with
one hand, and for a moment he didn't know what to say.
"Brother Deidara, I'm here to play with you!" At this moment, a small figure ran
over while waving to Deidara.
"Ah, grandpa, why are you here too?" Kurotsuchi looked at Ohnoki with an arrogant
voice and asked.
Kurotsuchi, who was only three years old, didn't understand so many twists and
turns. She only knew that she came to play with Deidarago, and then met her
favorite grandpa on the way.
"It's Kurotsuchi. Grandpa is here talking to you, Brother Deidara. You go somewhere
else to play first." Onoki felt a little better after seeing the cute Kurotsuchi.
However, the talent shown by Kurotsuchi was in Onoki. It seems that it can only be
regarded as average.
It is not an exaggeration to say that it is better than the best, but more than the
worst.
At the same time, he was also happy in his heart.
According to Hatake Hefeng's growth trajectory, in the next few decades, all the
younger generations in the ninja world will make him unable to hold up his head. In
this case, the ninja world will also usher in a relatively long period of peace. .
He doesn’t ask for much, he just hopes that Yanyin Village can develop steadily
during this period.
"Oh, then I'll come and play with Deidarago later." Kurotsuchi still listened to
Ohnoki's words, and after Ohnoki spoke, he left without looking back.
After Kurotsuchi left, Ohnoki forcibly pulled Deidara away.
Putting aside the question of whether to learn Chendun or not, the top priority is
to get Deidara to stop playing with his explosive clay, otherwise there are several
houses in Iwagakure Village that he can blow up.
Not long after Onoki left, a yellow-haired woman wearing black-rimmed glasses
walked out of a stone house.
The yellow-haired woman came to a secret corner with a calm expression, hid an
envelope, and at the same time took out a brand new letter from the place where the
envelope was hidden.
After receiving the letter, she couldn't wait to open it. She looked at the photo
she took out of the envelope and caressed it with her palms.
"Kabuto...has grown so big, he has changed so fast."
……
On the other side, it has been some years since the Third Ninja War ended and peace
has continued.
After all, Danzo Shimura couldn't take any more leisure.
His heart told him that he couldn't go on like this. After tasting the victory of
the Third Ninja War,After the sweetness it brought, Danzo was already hooked on
this feeling.
He believes that Konoha's development is too slow and completely inconsistent with
his psychological expectations.
Of course, if Danzo were asked to declare war on the other four powers on behalf of
Konoha, Danzo would not do that. After all, even he did not want to bear such a
scapegoat.
That is completely thankless.
This time Shimura Danzo did not have an in-depth cooperation with Orochimaru, so he
also did not have the opportunity to get the wood escape transformation.
In addition, Orochimaru is already the Fourth Hokage of Konoha, and it is even more
difficult for Danzo to force Orochimaru to transform him into a Wood Release, so
that he can gain the power of the Wood Release.
If Danzo wants to continue to improve his strength, he can only turn his attention
to another thing, and that is becoming a tailed beast jinchūriki!
There are nine tailed beasts in total. In addition to the nine tails of Konoha and
the seven tailed beasts from the other four major ninja villages, there is also one
tailed beast that does not belong to the five major ninja villages.
Therefore, Takiyin Village came into Danzo's sight.
The country of Taki is geographically adjacent to Konoha. With Konoha's power of
winning three wars, no one would dare to say no even if a war was launched against
a small village like Takigakure.
But Danzo is a mature man after all, and the moment he coveted Nanao, he had all
the plans in mind.
"Aburame Ryoma, Yamafuze, the two of you will lead a small team of root ninjas to
Takigakure Village to explore the truth behind the theft of Konoha's property and
track down the culprit of the theft of Konoha's secrets.
You have been with me for so long, you should know what to do. "
The two nodded and said in unison: "Lord Danzo, leave it to us."
As a root ninja, Danzo's will is their will. Whatever Danzo decides, that is the
direction their sword points.
Having followed Danzo all year round, I naturally got a taste of the Dark Ninja
style.
……
In the Country of Fields, in a small village.
"Little bird, little bird, do you think that if I had not spoken out, my mother
would not have been killed by the people in the village, and in this case, my hands
would not be contaminated with such sin."
Chonggo, who was only five years old, was sitting among the ruins. He looked with
clear eyes at the bird that was resting on his blood-stained palm.
"Chirp, chirp—" the bird made a clear cry to Zhongwu.
"That's it, but I obviously killed everyone in the village." Zhongwu looked
surprisingly calm, but the next second he laughed ferociously again.
The little bird that landed on his hand also sensed something and flapped its wings
and flew away.
"Hahahahaha!!! It feels so good to kill! Those bastards with human faces and animal
hearts deserve to be killed. I won't be relieved even if I kill them a hundred
times!" Chongwu looked crazy, and his body was covered with dense curse marks.
"Moxi Moxi, I want to ask a question, can you tell me what defecation is?"
――――
The information did not mention where Chongwu came from, only that Chongwu was a
man called ‘Libra’ by the villagers.
Since it is a fan, it is natural to expand and supplement the character's
background to a certain extent, so the setting of Zhongwu here is only Ashuang's
original work.

Chapter 137 The Secret of Konoha Ninjutsu and the Three Great Men
Chongwu himself has a second personality. Although he is usually honest and caring,
when he is in his second personality, he can be said to be completely disowning his
relatives and wanting to kill anyone he sees.
Even the Baiyueguang Kimimaro of the original timeline Jūgo relied on his own
strong strength to defeat the second personality Jūgo, and that was the touching
story of being saved by Kimimaro.
If Kimimaro does not have the strength to defeat Jugo, the only fate waiting for
him is to be torn into pieces by the second personality Jugo.
"Who! Who is it! Get out of here and I'm going to kill you!" After hearing the
sounds around him, the murderous intention in Zhongwu's heart reached its peak.
What was also associated with this was the change in his body shape.
Chonggo's entire body entered a state of cursed sealing. His body began to deform,
and a hard shell and an engine made of flesh and blood appeared behind him.
"I feel like you have become hard now. Can you still feel the urge to relieve
yourself with a body like this?" A Fei's head emerged from the ground. He appeared
at Zhongwu's feet, stretched out his hand and touched Zhongwu's calf and said
exaggeratedly.
"Go die, die, die!!!" After seeing A Fei, Zhong Wu's expression became crazy, and
he punched A Fei's head.
For a moment, the shadow of Chonggo's fist was like a gust of wind and rain, and it
didn't stop until the ground beneath his feet cracked.
"Hahahaha! Die! Die this time!" Chonggo laughed like an orgasm.
However, before Zhongwu stopped laughing, a huge wooden man appeared next to
Zhongwu.
"Let you also taste the power of fists." A Fei stood on top of the wooden man,
controlling the wooden man to use the same posture to return what Zhonggo had just
done.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Although the wooden man was tall, he was not bulky. By the time Chongwu tried to
avoid it, it was already too late.
Forced by instinct, Zhonggo could only merge his hands, using the ability of
sealing to make his hands as thick and hard as shields.
At this time, Zhongwu was only five years old, but his height was already about the
same as He Feng.
Ah Fei also had no intention of killing Zhongwu. After all, the task assigned to
him by Hefeng was to bring Zhongwu to Orochimaru, not to bring Zhongwu's body to
Orochimaru."Wooden Release: Wooden Prison Technique!" A Fei clapped his hands, and
when the wooden man stopped punching, he directly controlled the wooden pillars
growing from the ground to tie Zhongwu tightly.
"Let me go! I'm going to kill you! Let me go, let me go!" Zhongwu shouted loudly,
but Ah Fei ignored him. Instead, he circled around Zhongwu with interest, and
finally stopped behind Zhongwu.
"Well..." A Fei squatted down, stretched out his hand to poke Jugo, and then he put
his hands together again, making movements that were the secrets of Konoha
Taijutsu.
At this time, Zhongwu also came to his senses. His second personality was just a
little bloodthirsty, but it was not without brains.
He knew exactly what Ah Fei was going to do.
"What are you going to do?! I'm warning you! Don't do this, or I will definitely
kill you! I will definitely kill you!" After realizing what A Fei was going to do,
Zhongwu roared harder.
"The Secret of Konoha's Secret Turning Technique: Thousand-Year Kill!" Fei imitated
Hatake Sakumo's movements from his memory, and accurately hit Juugo's weakness with
a Thousand-Year Kill.
"!!!" Chongwu, who was only five years old, experienced pain that he should not
have experienced at his age.
At this time, he had returned to his calm personality, but his eyes seemed to have
lost their luster, and he had lost hope for his future life.
Seeing this, Ah Fei also realized that he might have used a little too much force.
He used a tone he learned from a novel, and comforted: "Young man, your future is
more than this. How can people be affected by small setbacks?" defeat."
A Fei's long tone gave people the feeling that he had experienced something big,
and Zhong Wu's dull eyes actually had a glimmer of light.
"Life has a lot of meaning, and there are also a lot of things we need to pursue."
The luster in Chongwu’s eyes became brighter again.
"For example, the convenience of convenience is my lifelong pursuit. I am willing
to fight for the rest of my life to pursue the convenience that I have never
known!" A Fei said that he was a little moved.
However, after hearing the two words "Bianyi" and the weakness that he still felt
like burning, the light in Zhongwu's eyes disappeared again.
"I'm tired, it's better to destroy it." Chongwu thought to himself.
Seeing Zhong Wu lose his desire for life again, A Fei finally remembered what He
Feng told him.
"Your name is Chongwu, right? An adult has noticed your troubles. He said there is
a place that can solve your confusion and prevent you from being affected by the
murderous intention. I can take you there if you want."
"Are you serious? Is there really a place where I can contain my murderous
intention?"
"That's right, come with me, I'll take you there." A Fei waved his hand, and the
wooden pillar that tied Zhong Wu retracted into the earth.
Without any support, Jonggo stumbled and lay on the ground as if he had collapsed.
"It hurts..." He had a look of pain on his face.
"There's really nothing we can do about you." Ah Fei waved his hand again, and a
White Zetsu emerged from the ground, and then attached itself to Zhong Wu's body at
Ah Fei's signal.
This time, Jugo experienced the speed of the White Zetsu underground train.
……
Yunyin Village.
After Yeyue was redeemed by Tutai, she relied on her own strength and the
reputation she had accumulated before to become Kumogakure's fourth generation
Raikage.
Kirabi dived into the Thunder Canyon without looking back and began a new round of
special training that lasted for several years.
The Third Raikage has always given him support, and part of the reason why he was
able to have a heart-to-heart relationship with Ushiuki came from the Third
Raikage.
Therefore, the death of the Third Raikage also hit him hard.
Of course, Kirabi also has an unknown purpose for this special training, which is
to defeat the bloody dancer in Konoha and bring her back to Kumogakure.
The Fourth Raikage Ai also had the same idea as Kirabi. During the half year he
stayed in Konoha, the most profound impression in Ai's mind was that the Scarlet
Maiden gently treated his injuries.
That scene was deeply engraved in Ai's heart. Ai knew the true gender of the
Scarlet Dancer, but he didn't care about it.
"I want to continue to get stronger! Become stronger than dad!" Yeyue growled while
doing handstands and push-ups with weights on one hand.
at the same time.
A training room outside Iwagakure Village.
Han, who was nearly 2.3 meters tall, kept beating the two nearly 2-meter dummies in
front of him with his remaining fists.
On the heads of these two dummies, there are portraits of the fourth generation
Raikage Ai and Kirabi!
"Damn it! Damn it! Damn it! Damn it!"

Chapter 138 Demonic solution

His eyes returned to Longdi Cave.
After He Feng came to the residence arranged for him in Longdi Cave and drove away
the snake lady who wanted to stay and warm the bed, He Feng began to study his own
changes.
Just now, he had just tried out the abilities of his tail, but he had already made
Obito lose his most precious virginity.
He Feng sat on the stone bed, closed his eyes and felt the natural energy running
in his body.
"The Immortal Mode of Shigulin stimulates the cell activity of the human body,
allowing the user to gain more powerful chakra and healing abilities.
Then Longdi Cave should use the violent natural energy to make a positive change in
its own form. This process of change is called "transformation into a dragon". "
He Feng thought about his changes in his heart.
He intends to integrate the immortal arts of the three major immortal lands and
finally develop his own immortal arts.
Hefeng recalled the changes in Obito. His immortal mode was successful, but he was
only in the process of transforming into a dragon, rather than completing the
process of transforming into a dragon.
But he himself is completely different.
Although this isIt was the first time Hefeng came into contact with Longdi Cave
Immortal Technique, but he knew extremely well that his transformation was not a
'dragon transformation', but a further succubus transformation.
It can also be said that his changes are not universal.
While thinking, Hefeng canceled the maintenance of the immortal mode in Longdi
Cave, and the succubus characteristics on his body also changed back to their
original appearance as the immortal mode was cancelled.
The next second, He Feng turned on the Immortal Mode of Shigu Forest again.
This time, the fairy face that He Feng expected did not appear. What appeared was
still the tail with a cherry pink heart, a pair of flesh wings and goat-like horns.
But this time, He Feng's white and tender skin also had some other colors.
The bright rose pattern spread upward from He Feng's forearm until it stopped on
his cheek.
He Feng used Water Escape to condense a water mirror in front of him. After seeing
his changes clearly through the water mirror, He Feng suddenly understood
something.
He opened his system panel.
【Name: Qimu Hefeng】
【Sex: Male】
[Age: 16 years old]
【Race: Human (Succubus)】
[Items: Silver Liang [expandable], Eight Gate Armor Formation Fragments (7/8)]
[Level: Super Shadow (Super Shadow)]
[Abilities: "Hatake Sword Technique", "Five Escape Mastery", "Illusion Mastery",
"Time and Space Ninjutsu Mastery", "Sealing Art Mastery", "Illusion Resistance",
"Kagura Mind's Eye", "Psychic Art", "Yin Seal", "Creation" "The Art of Living One
Hundred Heroes", "Advanced Immortal Body", "Mangekyo Sharingan", "Wood Release",
"Muji Healing"...]
[Note: The individual "He Feng" is in the process of becoming a succubus, and the
current progress is 76.8%
When the succubus transformation process reaches 100%, the individual "He Feng"
race will completely transform from "human" to "succubus" and gain the exclusive
ability of succubus.
At the same time, the system will open the sub-module.
The sub-module is "Many children, many blessings"]
He Feng looked at the notes on the system. Even though he had thousands of words in
his heart, he didn't know what to express.
More children, more blessings?
This is pain that he should not have to endure at his age.
He still has a great cause that he has not yet completed!
Suddenly, Hefeng thought of his old father who slept in the rocking chair at home,
often went out to fish in the river, and occasionally taught Kakashi the secrets of
Taijutsu.
"That's right, I don't have time to raise children. If I don't have a father...oh
no, it should be the father."
Hefeng made a decision in his heart. When he has a child in the future, he will
leave it to his old father, Hatake Sakumo, just in time to let him experience what
it means to have a family.
At the same time, He Feng also noticed the disappearance of Immortal Earth Magic in
the ability column.
This also means that the immortal modes of Shigu Forest and Longdi Cave controlled
by He Feng are not recognized by the system.
In other words, the immortal models in these two places have transformed under the
influence of He Feng's constitution.
He Feng calls it [Devil’s solution]
After all, succubi are also considered a type of devil.
The next day.
Obito slowly woke up in the warm embrace of the two snake ladies.
After a night of madness, Obito is still in a state of confusion until now.
"Ah~ Sir, you're awake~" At this time, a voice that made his bones tingle came from
Obito's ears again.
Along with the sound, there was also the feeling of someone's life being
manipulated.
Obito quickly ducked back.
He took another look at the appearance of the two snake ladies.
If the two of them can be selected, their appearance will naturally not be bad.
"Gudong--" Obito swallowed. He covered his eyes with one hand and pushed the two
snake girls away with the other.
"Well... let me stay by myself for a while, thank you." Obito said in as gentle a
tone as possible.
He no longer knew how to treat these two snake ladies.
Although Obito is careless about some things in daily life, when it comes to things
like men and women, he is a completely blank slate.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

"Okay, Master Obito." The two snake ladies picked up their clothes and put them on,
then respectfully left the room where Obito was staying.
Obito himself also rested on the stone bed for half an hour before putting on his
clothes and leaving the room.
"Excuse me, do you know where He Feng went? I went to where he was and couldn't
find him." Obito came to Tonjinji and asked politely.
At this time, he was no longer as arrogant as when he first came to Longdi Cave.
According to Obito's idea, Ryūchi Cave is now his natal home. If anyone makes
trouble in his natal home, he will be the first to disagree!
"If you are looking for Hefeng, he should be at Chiya now. Just walk straight over
there and you can see him." Tuanjinji stretched out her hand to point Obito in a
direction.
"Thank you." Obito nodded to Totsuhime, then opened his legs and ran in the
direction that Totsuhime pointed.
He needed to ask He Feng why he was in that situation yesterday.
Could it be said that after practicing the immortal skills of Longdi Cave, he would
become like that? Then wouldn't He Feng be the same as himself last night?
Soon, Obito saw the cherry blossoms falling all over the sky and the sounds of
fighting.
Looking in the direction where the sound came from, Obito saw a scene that he would
never forget.
I saw a 'woman' who was about 1.8 meters tall, with an extremely hot figure, two
wings on her back, two horns on her head, and an alluring face, smiling wildly.
Under the feet of the ‘woman’, there is also aThe red one-eyed snake has a reverse
scale that should have grown on a dragon.
The 'woman' made a neutral yet charming voice and slowly said to the big snake at
her feet: "Xinya, become my psychic beast. Only your strength in Longdi Cave
satisfies me."
The big snake known as Xin Ya was extremely irritable. He roared angrily: "Don't
even think about it. Do you think I am a loser like Wan She? As long as I am fed, I
will be driven by others! The person who wants to contract with me, Xin Ya, has not
been born yet!"

Chapter 139 Pull out the scales and collect the fangs
Xin Ya's character is extremely irritable. He suppresses the other big snakes in
Longdi Cave with his powerful strength. Any big snake that comes close to Xin Ya
will be beaten up by it.
Xin Ya's temper was such that even the White Snake Immortal could not control him.
As time went by, no one dared to touch his bad luck.
It’s not that Immortal White Snake is inferior to Xin Ya in strength, but she
doesn’t bother to deal with such trivial matters. As long as Xin Ya doesn’t commit
any crime, she won’t do anything to him.
Therefore, when He Feng came to his door again, Xin Ya felt that his majesty had
been challenged. Xin Ya took the lead in attacking without He Feng opening his
mouth.
But compared with He Feng's power, even Xin Ya, the 'strongest combat power' in
Longdi Cave, was still a bit underwhelming.
After realizing that Xin Ya would not surrender due to fists and kicks, He Feng
turned his attention to the reverse scale behind Xin Ya.
According to He Feng's understanding, the reverse scale is not so much Xin Ya's
weakness as it is Xin Ya's real way to open up.
As long as these inverse scales are pulled off, the rebellious snake will become
docile.
"Well... you just need to use a little force to pull it out." He Feng stepped on
Xin Ya's body and reached Ni Lin's position, then reached out with his hand.
After Xin Ya himself noticed He Feng's actions, he also cursed angrily: "Damn it!
What are you going to do?! I'm going to eat you!"
He Feng completely ignored this. After holding the edge of Ni Lian with both hands,
he began to exert force.
He Feng is proficient in the wood escape ninjutsu, and has the blessing of an
immortal body and strange strength, which allows him to pull out the reverse scale
with just brute force.
With Ni Lin's separation from the body, Xin Ya felt like he was missing something.
He Feng jumped off Xin Ya, still holding the piece of reverse scale in his hand.
He came to the front of Xin Ya, looked into Xin Ya's eyes and asked the original
question again: "Are you willing to sign a psychic contract with me? From now on,
you will be my exclusive psychic beast."
Hearing this, Xin Ya showed disdain in his eyes, and he said with disdain: "Who
among the mere humans would sign a psychic contract with you."
He Feng: "???"
Isn’t it easy to pull out the reverse scales? Or is this Xin Ya's skin so tough
that he can't even be beaten?
Before He Feng could speak, he heard Xin Ya continue to be arrogant: "When it comes
to signing a psychic contract, it's only a human being signing it with me!"
He Feng was stunned for a moment, and then felt a little funny.
I thought what was going on, and this is a arrogant snake.
However, He Feng did not intend to indulge Xin Ya's temper. He was not a dog
licker, and the attribute of tsundere had long been outdated.
"The destiny of Tiantian female."
As He Feng's right eye kaleidoscope ability was activated, he took out Orochimaru's
Ryūchi Cave Contract Scroll and signed his name on it, and Xin Ya also used his own
chakra to mark after He Feng's name. .
In this case, when Hefeng wants to communicate with the big snake in the psychic
dragon cave, the psychic signal will be directed to Chiya.
After signing the contract, He Feng ignored Chi Ya's resentful eyes and looked at
Obito who was watching the battle.
"Obito, do you want to find a psychic beast of your own?" He Feng asked.
Obito shook his head and said: "I don't need it. My fighting method is not suitable
for psychic beasts to participate."
Obito is very clear about his position. He is just the sixth man who works behind
the scenes and can be as hidden as possible.
The large psychic beast completely conflicts with his fighting style.
Obito asked again: "Hefeng, before you, just last night, you had this ability in
me...is that the ability that comes with the immortal mode?"
His tone was a little shy, and it was obvious that Obito was still a little shy
about the battle that happened last night.
However, in the field that Obito set foot on for the first time, Hefeng had already
become a master in it, and he didn't have Obito's shyness at all.
He Feng said: "I am trying to integrate the immortal models of the three holy
places, and finally create an immortal technique that belongs to human beings. The
one last night was just a semi-finished product.
But Obito, don’t think that you have mastered senjutsu just because you have
successfully entered sage mode. If senjutsu was so easy to learn, it wouldn’t be so
rare. "
The reason why Obito can enter the sage mode is not only related to his own talent
and Orochimaru's curse seal, but also the natural energy injected into him by the
White Snake Sage.
If the current Obito absorbs and matches the relationship between natural energy,
spiritual energy and chakra, the benefits and rewards are completely
disproportionate.
It is possible that the senjutsu chakra that took a day to condense was used up
after releasing two senjutsu.
Obito nodded and acknowledged He Feng's words.
"He Feng, should we return to the village now?"
"That's right, once I let the Messenger Snake and Teacher Orochimaru know, he will
send us back to the village."
"..."
――――
Hidden Mist Village.
After Inigaki Kisame killed the Suikoyama Fugu Oni and defected with his sword and
Samehada, only two of the Seven Ninja Swordsmen in Kirigakure Village were left.
respectivelyThey are Black Hoe Raiga who possesses Thunder Sword and Fang, and
Murashi Jinpachi, the wielder of Explosive Sword and Spray Fang.
Therefore, the status of the two in Kirigakure Village has also been slightly
improved.
However, the improvement in status did not make the two of them happy. Instead, it
made their lives in Kirigakure Village even more enjoyable.
"Black Hoe Jounin! Wuli Jounin! The other five ninja swords are in the Amegakure
Village. This is an indisputable fact! And you told me that I can't get it. I want
to ask whether it's you who can't get it or you. But we don’t dare to take it
because of our current status!”
Goji Yagura looked at the two of them with an angry look.
After the third battle, because he was not strong enough to protect Kirigakure, he
successfully got out of the car with the support of Genshi and became the
jinchūriki of Sanbi Isozu.
In order to become the perfect Jinchuuriki, he tried to talk to the tailed beasts
all the time.
After successfully having a heart-to-heart relationship with the three-tailed
Isozu, he naturally became the perfect jinchūriki. At the same time, he was also
affected by the negative emotions of the tailed beast, and his temper became
increasingly violent.
Although Goji Yagura's every move is for the development of the village, he has
forgotten what the development of the village is for.
Although Goju Yagura in this life did not implement the bloody system of
annihilating the Kirigakure Bloodstained Family, the fate of those ninjas under
high pressure was equally unpleasant.
Among the many bloodstained families in Kirigakure Village, there is already an
example of the demise of the ninja clan.
That ninja clan is called the Minazuki clan.
"..." As a period of time passed, Zhiju lost his position and slipped the items on
the desk, and then waved his hands angrily: "You two, go away, I don't want to see
you again."
The two of them did not refute, but when they left Mizukage's office, they had a
different thought in their minds.
"We can't stay here in Kirigakure anymore. How about we just sneak away with a
ninja sword like Kisame did? At worst, it's better to be a rebel nin than to be
here in Kirigakure."

Chapter 140 Kaguya Clan

Konoha, Orochimaru's experimental base.
"Sbarasi, what a perfect transformation, this is simply the body of a born
immortal.
He Feng, do you know that in this state, the energy contained in your body is
something that even a tailed beast can't look down upon? You are like a natural
fighting machine.
Even the life-burning black thunder mode of the Third Raikage cannot defeat you
now. Except for the unknown Otsutsuki, I don't even know who else in the ninja
world can be your opponent. "
Orochimaru stood in front of the instrument for checking body data, looking at the
data in the instrument feverishly.
This ability, which He Feng calls ‘Devil’s Solution’, is definitely superior to the
Immortal Mode!
Orochimaru can't wait to see the scene after He Feng perfects the 'Demon Solution'.
He Feng shrugged. He wanted to say that he was not invincible yet, at least he
couldn't handle the green-skinned, watermelon-headed Ye Kai.
"Teacher Orochimaru, has that guy A Fei come to see you?" He Feng asked while
getting dressed.
During the physical examination, Orochimaru took off He Feng's clothes until only
one piece was left, on the grounds that the data might not be accurate through his
clothes.
He Feng is also a scientific researcher, and he knows in his heart that Orochimaru
is talking nonsense, and Orochimaru also knows that He Feng knows that she is
talking nonsense.
Thus, a frank physical examination ended with the two of them understanding each
other tacitly.
While Orochimaru was adjusting the instrument to prepare for the next inspection,
he replied, "Jugo's physique is very interesting. The Curse Seal of Heaven can help
him store a certain amount of natural energy. This will delay to a certain extent
the time it takes for his body to accumulate full natural energy and enter a
violent state." .
But it’s better to block than to open up. I’m looking for ways to take advantage of
Chongwu’s special physique. "
"Teacher Orochimaru, since you already have the Heaven's Curse Seal, why not try to
study the Earth's Curse Seal. It would be interesting to see the Heaven and Earth
Curse Seal complement each other."
Hearing He Feng's words, Orochimaru nodded in realization, "That's true, He Feng,
you have thought of a good idea.
Also, Obito, you can come and check. "
Hearing this, Obito was about to take off his shirt and pants. After all, the
Hokage said that clothes would hinder the inspection of data.
But before Obito could take off his shirt, Orochimaru reached out and interrupted
him: "No need to take it off, just come up and check."
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Obito's hand in taking off his clothes stopped, and he pouted and said, "Oh."
He Feng patted Obito on the back in a funny way: "Obito, listen carefully to
Teacher Orochimaru's arrangements. I'll leave as soon as I have something else to
do."
After hearing what He Feng said, Obito nodded obediently: "I understand He Feng."
Although he did not mean to disrespect Lord Hokage, in Obito's heart, Hefeng's
priority was higher than Orochimaru's.
Hefeng looked at Orochimaru again: "Teacher Orochimaru, I am going to Kirigakure
this trip. That guy from Goju Yagura is a little out of his mind. I may bring back
some blood successor ninjas.
Teacher Orochimaru can prepare a place for them to live. Those people will be the
mainstay of Konoha in the future. "
Orochimaru smiled and nodded: "I understand, just do it if you have any ideas, the
teacher will always be your support."
"..."
――――
"Damn it! That guy from Goju Yagura actually dares to point fingers at us. Without
our Kaguya clan, there would be no Kirigakure Village!"
"That's right, I, the Kaguya clan, are obviously the founders of Kirigakure
Village, but we were sent to such a remote place by the damn Goju Yagura.places,
even Kirigakure Village wouldn’t let us in! What’s the point! "
"If you ask me, it's time for the Mizukage Goju Yagura to be replaced. Look at what
he did when he was in power. Not only did he lose to Konoha in three battles, he
couldn't even save the ninja sword of our Kirigakure Village. !”
"Damn it! Otherwise, we go directly to attack Kirigakure Village and kill that guy
Goju Yagura. Anyone can be a Mizukage, why can't I, the Kaguya clan!"
"It's done! You go and inform the other tribesmen, I'll take that little beast
Kimimaro with me, and we'll set out to fuck the Mizukage now!"
As the most bloodthirsty and aggressive clan in the ninja world, the Kaguya clan's
treatment in Kirigakure Village is even more difficult than that of Uchiha in
Konoha Hidden Village.
At least Uchiha can still stay in Konoha, but the Kaguya clan has long been
expelled from Kirigakure by the second generation Mizukage because of their fierce
fighting spirit.
But now, the Kaguya clan finally couldn't stand their treatment and planned to set
the table with Mizukage.
After all the Kaguya clan members heard that they were going to flip the table with
Mizukage, they dropped what they were doing without even thinking about it.
Soon, dozens of members of the Kaguya clan completed their gathering. Due to his
serious illness and physical weakness, Kimimaro could only follow the group even
after being taken out of the dungeon.
Although Kimimaro has a talent that makes the Kaguya clan fearful, he has not been
well trained and can only act as a human shield in battle.
"Tribesmen! Let's set off to attack Gouju Yagura. It's our clan's turn to be the
Mizukage!" At the front, the leader of the Kaguya clan raised the bone spear in his
hand and spoke coldly!
"Oh oh oh oh!!!" The tribesmen behind him cheered loudly.
Just like that, the entire Kaguya clan began to run towards Kirigakure Village.
In the Mizukage office, Goji Yagura looked at the information sent to him by the
ANBU, clenched his fists and knocked on the table, making a muffled sound.
Goji Yagura said angrily: "Damn the Kaguya clan, they have already been kicked out
of Kirigakure and they are still not honest.
If you want to take my life or sit in my position, then you have to see if you have
the ability! "
He stood up, feeling the pressure of a tailed beast overflowing from his body.
"Bring the ANBU from Kirigakure Village and the Black Hoe Thunder Toothless Murri
Jinpachi, I want Kaguya to exterminate the clan!"
"yes!"
Outside Kirigakure Village.
Goju Yagura stood at the front with his arms folded and his face expressionless.
Behind him were the two remaining ninja sword holders in Kirigakure Village, as
well as many ANBU ninjas who had reached the level of jounin and elite jounin. .
After seeing the figures of the Kaguya clan, Gouju Yagura sneered.
A large amount of chakra burst out from his body, and his body changed. In just a
moment, Gotachibana Yagura completed the complete tailed beast transformation.
The huge body of the three-tailed Isofu occupied the sight of all the Kaguya clan
members.
The next second, Isofu opened his big mouth, and a huge amount of chakra began to
condense into a high-density energy sphere, spinning at high speed.
"Tailed Beast Jade!"
"Children of the Kaguya clan! The mere Tailed Beast Jade cannot defeat our corpse
veins, use your strength to block it!" the leader of the Kaguya clan shouted
loudly.
I saw him pulling out a spine from behind and slashing at the oncoming Tailed Beast
Jade.
Those members of the Kaguya clan were also inspired by their clan leader and
launched an attack on the Tailed Beast Jade.
"Absolutely." From a distance, He Feng witnessed the entire process, and he admired
from the bottom of his heart.

Chapter 141 You are all important to me

Boom——
As the tailed beast jade exploded, the Kaguya clan was also seriously injured.
As the head of the Kaguya clan who faced the Tailed Beast Jade directly, he was
blown into pieces that were all over the sky, and he couldn't even put them
together completely.
"Kill!" Goju Yagura's voice came from Isofu's mouth.
After receiving the order, the ANBU also stepped forward together and launched an
attack on the survivors.
"Is this the truth about the annihilation of the Huiye clan?" In the distance, He
Feng shook his head and stopped paying attention to the Huiye clan members who died
from the butcher's knife.
He didn't see Kimimaro in that group of people just now. It seems that Kimimaro's
illness prevented him from keeping up with the large army of the Kaguya clan. How
could those red-eyed Kaguya clan members still be there? I care about Kimimaro.
He Feng was very fast. He followed the direction in which the Kaguya clan came. It
didn't take long for him to notice a little guy leaning against a tree and
breathing heavily.
"There was an explosion. Was it caused by the clan members..." Kimimaro stood up
with difficulty and looked towards the place where the explosion sound occurred in
the distance.
After looking at it for half a minute, Kimimaro withdrew his gaze and walked
towards the opposite place where the explosion occurred.
He is not needed by his tribe...
Kimimaro walked for a while and suddenly saw a bright white flower in a corner.
He was amazed by the beautiful appearance of the white flowers.
Kimimaro squatted carefully next to the white flowers, his voice was very weak:
"Obviously no one will see it, so why is it open in a place like this? What is the
meaning of a life that is not needed?"
Kimimaro seemed to be talking to himself, but also seemed to be asking questions.
However, how could a little flower answer his words.
"Are you even going to ignore me..." Kimimaro seemed to have thought of something,
and an angry expression appeared on his young face.
He took out a bone knife and was about to chop off the white flower that amazed
him.
At this moment, He Feng silently fell from the tree and appeared behind Kimima Lu.
He said to Kimima Lu in a calm and friendly voice:
"There is no human lifeIt's meaningless. When you destroy this little flower, you
are also destroying your own future.
Living does not necessarily have to be meaningful. Living itself is meaningless,
but as long as you live, you will eventually find something meaningful.
Just like you discovered the flower, and I discovered you. "
With that said, Hefeng walked forward, imitating Orochimaru's appearance in his
memory, showing a loving expression and reaching out to touch Kimimaro's little
face.
"Since you can't find the meaning of life, just follow me, stay by my side, and let
me give you the meaning of existence."
Kimimaro froze on the spot, his cheeks turning red from He Feng's touch.
All the confusion in his eyes disappeared, replaced by firm eyes.
At this moment, He Feng was engraved in Junmaru's heart like a god. Whether it was
He Feng's words, He Feng's gentle actions, or He Feng's already endearing face,
they all made this person who had never been needed Children find the meaning of
their existence.
He Feng said in a soft voice: "My name is He Feng, Qimu He Feng, what's yours?"
Junmaru said a little shyly: "Junimaru, can I call you Lord Hefeng?"
Hefeng smiled and stroked Kimimaro's white hair, "Of course, no one can bully you
from now on."
Junma Lu nodded fiercely and followed He Feng obediently.
"A Fei, have you found the child I was talking about?" He Feng looked at the white
flower beside him and asked helplessly.
The next second, a pure white figure with a swirling face burst out of the ground.
On top of the pure white figure's head, there was a hundred flowers.
"Qiang Qiang~" Ah Fei made an exaggerated movement, then stretched out his hand to
pluck the flowers from the top of his head and handed them to Kimimaro who was
confused.
Kimima Lu did not take the flowers, but turned to look at He Feng.
He Feng smiled and said: "Take it, his name is A Fei. If you have anything, you can
tell A Fei."
After He Feng spoke, Junmaru obediently took the flowers from A Fei and said
softly: "Thank you..."
After being thanked, Ah Fei let out a burst of excited laughter and actually
circled around He Feng.
There was a black line on He Feng's face, and he had the urge to beat A Fei
violently.
However, Ah Fei was quite reliable. After seeing He Feng's clenched fists, he
stopped suddenly and said quickly: "The child has been found. The Shuiwuyue clan
was the first to be exterminated by Kirigakure. Among the Bloodstained Clan, Kaguya
can only be ranked second."
He Feng ignored A Fei's addition and continued: "Then lead the way."
Kimimaro doesn't care about Kaguya's annihilation of the clan. He has no feelings
for Kaguya's clan. Now Kimimaro is completely focused on Lord Hefeng.
With Ah Fei leading the way, He Feng quickly found Bai in a mountain forest in the
Kingdom of Water.
Because Bai used Ice Escape to kill villagers in the village, he had no choice but
to take shelter in the mountains and forests to avoid being killed by angry
ordinary people.
At this time, Bai had been hungry for a long time. He was struggling to pick fruits
from the trees and planned to use them to satisfy his hunger.
Since he has not systematically learned ninjutsu, Bai cannot use chakra to climb
trees, and can only climb up bit by bit in the most primitive way.
However, due to his four-year-old age, he would often slide down due to physical
strength after climbing up a little.
While slipping, the white skin will also be scratched due to the roughness of the
bark.
However, with Bai's amazing perseverance, he finally picked the bright fruit from a
tree that was not too tall.
This chapter is not over yet, please click on the next page to continue reading!
"If you want, you can try this. It should be more delicious than the poisonous
fruit in your hand." He Feng repeated his old trick and quietly appeared next to
Bai again.
When he heard someone behind him, Bai took a step back in fear and raised his hands
to protect himself.
But after seeing He Feng's face, Bai slowly put down his hand. He was a little
unsure and said, "Sister Angel...are you here to take me away?"
Hefeng had lived for such a long time and was already immune to the word "sister".
He just smiled and opened Bai's little hand, put the food he prepared for him in
it, and took away the white star. poisonous fruit.
"Eat, you won't be hungry after eating." He Feng smiled and touched Bai's black
hair, and continued: "But if you eat my food, you will be mine, and you will stay
with me forever. kind."
Hearing this, Bai didn't hesitate at all. He ate all the food in his hands in three
strokes, and then looked at He Feng expectantly.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Obviously, what He Feng said was exactly what Bai longed for.
After experiencing his mother's death at the hands of his father, and then killing
his father and other villagers, Bai was confused about his life. He desperately
longed for someone to give his life a meaning.
And the appearance of He Feng happened to give Bai that meaning of existence.
Bai looked at He Feng timidly, because He Feng's angelic appearance made him feel a
little scared, "My name is Bai, please...please give me some advice."
He Feng clapped his hands and led Kimima Lu to Bai. He said solemnly: "Very good,
Kimima Lu, you are older than Bai. In addition to protecting me from now on, you
must also protect Bai. Remember. "
Junmaru nodded and affirmed: "Lord He Feng, I rememberLiving! I will risk my life
to protect Bai from harm. "
Hefeng poked Kimimaro's forehead with his hand, "Don't talk about risking your
life. You two are very important to me, so you must cherish your life."

Chapter 142 Sarutobi Hiruzen’s Introspection

After finding Kimima Lu and Bai Hou, He Feng's goal of this trip was 90%
accomplished.
As for the remaining ten percent, it is to take away as many potential stocks of
Kirigakure Village as possible under circumstances.
After all, He Feng learned from Orochimaru. Orochimaru is now the Fourth Hokage in
Konoha. Naturally, he cannot wear the title of a trafficker in the ninja world.
In this case, He Feng can only take action.
In addition, the Ninja Alliance Kingdom managed by Yahiko will one day declare war
on the five major countries. Konoha has the existence of Hefeng, and to some extent
it is already on the same side as the Ninja Alliance.
But the other four major countries are different. In the face of the crisis of
national annihilation, they will not resist without resistance.
On the way back to Konoha, Hefeng didn't meet any more orphans worthy of his
attention. It seems that there were only a few like Kimimaro and Shiro.
The Hokage's office.
Orochimaru sat in the office for the first time in a long time, correcting some
documents related to the future development of Konoha with the help of Nara
Shikaku.
Putting down the pen in his hand, Orochimaru raised his head to look at the person
coming.
"Old man, what's the matter?" Orochimaru looked at Sarutobi Hiruzen in front of him
with a half-smile.
After retiring from the position of Hokage and going home to retire, after several
years of cultivation, Hiruzen Sarutobi's mental temperament has obviously improved
a lot, and he even looks younger.
At the same time, after these few years, Sarutobi Hiruzen often reflected on
himself, thinking about what he did right and what he did wrong during his reign.
Today, Sarutobi Hiruzen came to Orochimaru to make up for the mistakes he had made
before.
"Orochimaru, old man, I have a lot of free time every day now. Apart from fishing
and drinking tea, I don't seem to have much else to do all day long." Sarutobi
Hiruzen puffed on the pipe in his hand and said with a smile.
"You also know that once people get older, they start to think about more things,
and it is easier to feel lonely.
Old man, I feel very lonely right now. I think the elders of Konoha have also
reached the age of retirement. Shikaku, Minato and Fugaku are good. Orochimaru,
what do you think? "
That's right, after a long period of introspection, Sarutobi Hiruzen suddenly
discovered that several of his old friends had unknowingly become Konoha's
'borers', constantly lying on the big tree of Konoha. Draw nutrients from above.
This is not in line with the will of fire in Sarutobi Hiruzen's heart.
In his opinion, what the older generation really needs to do is to burn themselves
to illuminate others, rather than burning others to illuminate themselves.
Orochimaru was also stunned after hearing what Sarutobi Hiruzen said. There was a
hint of surprise in her eyes when she looked at Sarutobi Hiruzen.
Obviously, Sarutobi Hiruzen's move completely subverted Orochimaru's understanding
of him.
After all, in the early days of Hiruzen Sarutobi's reign as the third generation,
it was okay to say that at that time he was worthy of the name of a ninja hero.
However, in the middle and late stages of his reign, the ninja hero became a ninja
bear.
In addition, Sarutobi Hiruzen actually proposed that Uchiha Fugaku become an elder,
which Orochimaru did not expect.
After Orochimaru became the fourth generation, he directly changed the village's
original policy of suppressing the Uchiha clan. This also made the Uchiha people
more favorable to Orochimaru, the Hokage, and gave up the idea of a coup to seize
the Hokage's power.
After all, they are all from the same village. If Uchiha had a way out, how could
he want to attack the village?
"I understand, this matter will be implemented. Is there anything else Mr. Sarutobi
can do?"
Sarutobi Hiruzen chuckled and didn't pay too much attention to the change of
Orochimaru's names. "There is one more thing. That guy Danzo has a big plan. If my
guess is correct, Danzo This guy should be eyeing the Jinchuuriki of Takigakure
Village, the Ninja ninjas have already entered the territory of Taki Country."
Orochimaru smiled and nodded, "Well, by recovering the tailed beasts from small
countries and enhancing Konoha's military strength, Elder Danzo has changed his
focus from internal conflicts to external wars. Yes, there has been a change.
Don't worry, Mr. Sarutobi, I have my own arrangements for this matter. "
"That's good."
"..."
Soon after Sarutobi Hiruzen left, Hefeng led Kimimaro and Shiro to the Hokage's
office.
At first, he wanted to ask Nara Shikaku to register the two of them in Konoha so
that they could have an upright identity. However, after seeing Orochimaru in the
office, Hefeng's idea naturally changed.
"Teacher Orochimaru, Kimimaro and Shiro are the children I brought back. They are
five and four years old this year. You can think of a better arrangement." He Feng
put his hands on their shoulders and introduced to Orochimaru. .
Orochimaru stepped forward, and after looking at them, she said: "Well...the two
little guys are a little malnourished, but their ninja literacy is relatively good,
but Kimimaro seems to have some problems with his body.
Okay, you two little guys stay with me for the time being, and I'll nurse you back
to health. "
At this time, Orochimaru did not realize how difficult Kimimaro's blood-stained
disease was. After all, for her, except for Kimimaro's blood-stained disease, there
were no diseases in the ninja world that she could not cure.
Hefeng nodded and agreed: "Then I'll bother you, Teacher Orochimaru. Kimimaro and
Shiro are both good, and Anko, that little girl, asked Teacher Orochimaru to keep
an eye on her.". "
Orochimaru chuckled, and an image of Anko pinching her waist and preaching to the
two of them like a big sister appeared in his mind. That was indeed something Anko
could do.
After hearing He Feng's arrangements, Kimima Lu and Bai also stood there obediently
and did not say anything that they would follow Lord He Feng all the time.
Faced with their own will and He Feng's will, the two chose the latter without
hesitation.
At this time, Orochimaru suddenly thought of something, and she glanced at Nara
Shikaku, who was standing there like a transparent person.
After Nara Shikaku noticed Orochimaru's eyes, he also looked helpless. He scratched
his head and said, "Hey, my gas seems to be turned off. This is not good! Hokage-
sama, I need to take a leave to go home and turn off the gas." "
Orochimaru waved his hand, "Really, such a small thing will be forgotten. I will
give you a day off and spend time with your family at home."
In this way, Nara Shikaku left the Hokage's office very consciously.
Orochimaru glanced at Kimimaro and Shiro, and then began to form seals.
"Ninja Technique·Silent Barrier."
After the barrier was released, Orochimaru said slowly: "Danzo has set his sights
on Nanao Shigeaki, He Feng, what are your plans.
Should we start the plan now, or should we wait a few years for Naruko, Sasuke and
the others to grow up? "
He Feng rubbed Bai's hair and said calmly: "Danzo is a little anxious, but with his
roots and his strength, it's not that easy to take down Longyin Village, so let
Xiao go and contain us first. A Danzo elder.
Also let him see what his own strength is, so that he can recognize the reality
clearly. "

Chapter 143 Shisui and Hidan

If there is a ranking of people He Feng trusts in the ninja world, apart from
Tsunade Konan, who has a record in the beauty list, Orochimaru is one of the people
He Feng trusts the most.
For his biological father Hatake Sakumo, Hefeng still has something to hide, but
for Orochimaru, apart from the fact that Hefeng is a reincarnated person, has a
system to assist him, and is a succubus, almost everything else is related to him.
Orochimaru had communicated.
Therefore, Orochimaru knew about He Feng's plan to unify the ninja world, the
identity of the person behind the Akatsuki organization, the fate of Asura and
Indra's reincarnation, and the Otsutsuki of the Tenwai clan, and also personally
participated in the formulation of the plan. among.
There is no doubt that Orochimaru is the person who understands He Feng best, and
his understanding is definitely higher than that of Tsunade Konan who sleeps with
He Feng every day.
After all, Orochimaru could calculate data such as length and durability with just
a pen.
In fact, He Feng himself is also very puzzled. His own charm is almost to the point
where as long as he is a normal person of the opposite sex, he will remember him
for life after just one look. However, Orochimaru seems to be immune to this, and
his tolerance is definitely several times that of Tsunade. .
If it were Tsunade, He Feng would have turned into a arrogant person.
What? Why do you think He Feng is a shelf?
Of course it was Tsunade who prevented He Feng from using the kaleidoscope.
Without Konohana Xiaoye, it would be a fate to be just a show-off.
In addition, Tsunade has more experience and has more information. She will stop
every time when He Feng is about to rebel against his army, causing He Feng's
mentality to explode every time.
At this time, Tsunade would hug He Feng and coax her with a smile, and He Feng also
had a short memory. As long as he found face with Xiaonan, he would lose the newly
found face with Tsunade.
Suddenly, Orochimaru suddenly suggested: "Hefeng, Naruko and Sasuke are three years
old this year, and they will go to ninja school in a few years. In order to prevent
Naruko and Sasuke from being neglected during their time at ninja school, I plan to
let you, Hefeng, lead their class, how about that."
Orochimaru thought very simply. As the chakra reincarnations of Asura and Indra,
the improvement of their strength is inevitable. The only thing that affects them
is the time factor, and she obviously does not have that much time to educate them.
.
Others will not realize the importance of Naruko and Sasuke. If they want the
unification plan and the counterattack on Otsutsuki to proceed, Hefeng will be the
best teacher for them.
It just so happens that the two of them also have a good impression of He Feng. If
He Feng shapes his outlook on life, Naruko and Sasuke will become He Feng's
assistants very well.
Hefeng thought about it for a while, and felt that Orochimaru's arrangement was
right, so he nodded and agreed.
In this way, Orochimaru chatted with He Feng about some things, and then returned
to the laboratory with Kimimaro and Shiro.
As for the documents in the Hokage's office, who will approve them?
Anyway, it’s not her turn, so let Lu Jiu work overtime tomorrow.
――――
the other side.
After Uchiha Shisui came into contact with the development policy of the United
Ninja Kingdom by chance, he has never forgotten it.
In his opinion, the person who proposed these policies must be a man of great
wisdom and kindness.
If people like that pass on their knowledge, they will definitely be able to change
the situation in the ninja world one day.
Therefore, in order to find the person who formulated those policies, Uchiha Shisui
asked the Hokage to perform a long-term mission.
Orochimaru naturally gave Shisui a pass without even thinking about it.
Shisui did not rush to the capital of the Ninja Alliance to find the policy maker.
Instead, he carefully observed the territory of the Ninja Alliance.
Shisui has always been good at thinking, but he has always been restricted by the
relationship between the clan and the village.
Now that Shisui has jumped out of the circle of a clan and a village, what he sees
and hears is naturally different.
And the development of people's livelihood in the Ninja Alliance made Shisui see a
new possibility..
He reached out and touched his eyes, and said to himself: "With these eyes, what
can I achieve?"
(Touch your eyes, not your eyeballs)
Shisui's Kaleidoscope has been opened in the three battles, but it has always been
hidden in his heart.
It was at this moment that bursts of screams came from the small village in front
of Zhisui.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Seeing this, Shisui quickened his pace and walked towards the place where the
screams came from.
"Hahahahaha! Pleasure! So joyful! This is simply the most exciting thing!
Go and meet the evil god in the abyss of blood and darkness! Bringing supreme
pleasure to Lord Evil God! "
As a burst of wild laughter reached Zhisui's ears, he also witnessed the extremely
bloody scene.
The ground of the village was full of corpses that had been cut into two sections
and pieces of internal organs leaked out. In the center of the corpse stood a man
with a gray slicked back hair. The man was laughing wildly and licking the blood
flowing from the March Scythe in his hand. .
And under the man's feet, there was a corner of a cowhide book.
On the paper that was not stained by blood, Shisui saw the word "Liberation".
At this moment, Shisui's pupils shrank suddenly, and even though he was used to war
and killing, he couldn't help but fall into anger.
"Eh? Is there anyone else here? Hahahahaha, I want to sacrifice you to the evil
god!" Hidan noticed Shisui beside him, and he showed a cruel smile.
He raised the bloody March Sickle and stepped on the word 'liberation' that was not
stained by blood, "Death! Die! Die! Die!"
With that said, Hidan rushed towards Shisui.
His fight was haphazard, but he didn't care.
As long as one drop of blood, as long as there is one drop of blood, he can
sacrifice the opponent to the evil god.
Shisui, on the other hand, is extremely rich in both combat experience and combat
awareness, so naturally he will not be hurt by the opponent without knowing the
opponent's intelligence.
"Go to hell!" Hidan came to Shisui and waved the March Scythe in his hand.
Shisui used the teleportation technique to distance himself from Hidan.
In the blink of an eye, Shisui completed the seal.
"Fire Release: High Fireball Technique!" A large amount of chakra condensed at
Shisui's throat, and a huge fireball was spit out.
Hidan had no intention of evading this, he just raised the March Sickle in his hand
to block.
The Go fireball landed on Hidan and exploded.
"Is this a ninja?" Shisui frowned and did not step forward. He noticed the Tangyin
Village forehead protector hanging in front of the other person's neck. A ninja,
even a genin, should not be killed so easily.
"Hey, hey, hey! You know how painful it is! Damn it!" After the smoke dispersed,
Hidan slapped the burning parts of his body and cursed Shisui angrily.
His clothes and trousers had been burned completely by the fireball technique.
But for this loyal believer of the evil god religion, running naked is nothing.
"!" Shisui's eyes widened, and he continued to attack Hidan without any hesitation.
"Fire Release: The Art of Fire Dragon!"
"Fire Release: Phoenix Immortal Fire Technique!"
"Fire Release: Impatiens Flower Claws Red!"

Chapter 144 The Three Stages of Akatsuki, Uchiha Shisui!

Shisui's Fire Release Ninjutsu is extremely accomplished. The Fire Release Ninjutsu
he can release in just a few breaths is beyond the reach of ordinary people.
Although Hidan is not good at thinking and has trouble using his brain, he can
still rely on instinct to distinguish some battle situations.
He did not flinch and allowed Shisui's fire escape ninjutsu to fall on him.
"Hey!" Hidan smiled cruelly and came to Shisui, waving the bloody March Sickle in
his hand.
At the same time, there were still flames burning on his body, but due to the
powerful effect of his immortal body, the fire escape burning on his body could
only bring some pain to Hidan.
Shisui's expression condensed, his dark pupils began to rotate, and the three
magatama gradually emerged.
Relying on his extremely skilled teleportation, Shisui was not hurt by Hidan.
Looking at Shisui who was avoiding him, Hidan spat out bloody saliva, feeling very
dissatisfied with Shisui who was like a loach.
When he didn't get the opponent's blood, Hidan was like a big sandbag.
"Genjutsu: Sharingan." Shisui's eyes condensed, and the powerful illusion was
activated by him.
"!" At the moment he was hit by Shisui Genjutsu, Hidan's whole body felt like a
heavy blow, and then his body stiffened and fell to the ground unable to move.
While gaining immortality, Hidan naturally also has insurmountable weaknesses.
And the genjutsu that attacks from the spiritual level is something Hidan is not
good at dealing with.
Shisui happens to be a master of genjutsu, and he also possesses another god who
possesses the strongest genjutsu in the ninja world.
It can be said that Shisui restrained Hidan in all aspects. It would be impossible
for Hidan to defeat Shisui head-on.
"You must be carrying a lot of sins." Shisui sighed as he looked at Hidan lying
motionless on the ground, then pulled out the short sword he carried and stepped
forward.
Zhishui said with a cold expression: "Let me end you right now, and your sins will
be slowly washed away in the pure land."
After seeing what Hidan had done, he no longer had any favorable impressions of
Hidan. In his opinion, Hidan only deserved to go to hell and was not even worthy of
atonement.
With that said, Shisui raised his dagger to Hidan's neck and chopped it down
without hesitation.
锵——
At this time, a metal soundThere was a collision sound, and Shisui's dropped dagger
was directly deflected by a black rod.
"Uchiha Shisui, I have been observing you for a long time. This person is still
useful to me and cannot be killed by you." A calm voice appeared from behind
Zhisui.
In the blink of an eye, Shisui used the teleportation technique to distance
himself.
In front of him, there were three figures. All three figures were wearing black red
cloud windbreakers and their hands were smeared with black nail polish.
The man who spoke was wearing a forehead protector that he had never seen before.
The word "forbearance" was engraved on the forehead protector.
The man who blocked his attack was wearing a breathing mask, and his eyes were eyes
he had never seen before. Those eyes gave him a very dangerous feeling.
"Jiraiya-sama, why did you..." Shisui looked at the third person. He was extremely
convinced that the person was Jiraiya, the three ninjas of Konoha, but he could not
imagine that the three ninjas in the village had betrayed him. village.
"Shisui, this matter is a long story, but I can assure you that I did not betray
the village." Jiraiya said calmly.
After such a long period of observation, he had his own judgment about the Akatsuki
organization and the Ninja Alliance. In order to be able to stop the prophecy of
the Great Toad Sage after it happened, Jiraiya needed the power of the Akatsuki
organization.
"This man killed people from a whole village. The smell of blood on his body was
very strong. He must have attacked more than one village." Shisui looked at Jiraiya
and pointed at Hidan who was lying on the ground.
Hidan was hit by his genjutsu, and he had to lie down for a while to recover before
anyone could help him decode the seal.
"Introduce yourself, you can call me Yahiko, but compared to Yahiko, I also have
the status of the king of the Ninja Alliance. I think you may be very interested."
Yahiko did not answer Shisui immediately, but said own identity.
He came here to communicate, and even to attract Shisui for his ideals, and
revealing his identity can lower the other party's vigilance very well.
Obviously, after hearing Yahiko's identity, Shisui showed a shocked expression and
began to think at the same time.
This is the territory of the Ninja Alliance. It is impossible for the other party
to let a murderer cause chaos in his country. He was just lucky to meet this
murderer, but the other party came specifically for this.
Before Shisui could speak, Yahiko said again: "The traitorous ninja you defeated is
named Hidan. He is a believer in a cult in the Country of Yu. He gained immortality
through a certain ritual of belief in the evil god. the power of."
At this time, Tiandao came to Hidan's side, stretched out his hand and put it on
Hidan's body. The next second, the genjutsu Shisui had exerted on Hidan was
released.
The first time Hidan was released from the genjutsu, he cursed loudly at everyone
present. He just couldn't move, not that he couldn't hear or see.
"Damn it! I will sacrifice you all to the evil god!"
However, Tiandao was not used to Hidan. He looked at Hidan with murderous eyes,
"Shut up, I know you can't be killed, but if you say another word, I will cut you
into pieces." The corpses are sealed somewhere in the ninja world."
After being threatened by Tiandao, Hidan immediately became honest.
Obviously, Tiandao said what he was most afraid of.
"How about it." Yahiko showed his sunny smile to Shisui.
It can be said that if Yahiko was born in Konoha, Minato would not be the only
little sun in Konoha.
As for He Feng, he is the group's favorite, so naturally he cannot be compared with
him.
Zhisui nodded, initially agreeing with this method of handling, but he still had
doubts in his heart.
I saw Zhisui taking out a small booklet from his arms, "Excuse me, was this book
written by you?" Zhisui used the honorific title for Yahiko.
If this book is written by Yahiko, then Yahiko should be respected by him.
Yahiko did not answer Shisui immediately, but thought about it for a while.
The content of the book is the knowledge that Senior Feng taught him. He just
summarized it and implemented it, but in a sense, it can be regarded as written by
him.
Yayan thought of the fact that He Feng was unwilling to reveal his identity, and
nodded in agreement.
"Well, it was written by me, but the book you are holding is from a few years ago."
Yahiko reached into Windbreaker's arms and took out a brand new encapsulated book.
If the former is a manuscript, then what Yahiko took out is a completed book that
has been bound.
"This is for you. There are more supplementary instructions in it. If you like it,
I will give it to you."
Shisui took the book flattered and stored it carefully.
"Uchiha Shisui, do you want to join us, join the Akatsuki organization, and
contribute your share to the peace of the ninja world." Yahiko extended his hand to
Shisui and extended an invitation.

Chapter 145 Brave Lin, the new beauty

Hefeng didn't know that Shisui and Hidan met by chance and joined the Akatsuki
organization. For the Ninja Alliance and the Akatsuki organization, Hefeng has
always been only responsible for guiding the general direction. As for the details,
Hefeng will not ask at all. , leaving full power to Yahiko and others to perform
freely.
Of course, He Feng is not idle.
He is also facing life and death matters.
A second ago, he was still sleeping soundly in your Senju Clan, dreaming of the
sweet dream of conquering Tsunade.
The next second, he opened his eyes and saw the scene that made his heart stop.
He saw Nohara Lin sitting on top of him in a W position, her eyes flushed and her
bare hands placed on He Feng's cheek.
On the side, Tsunade was sleeping soundly with a heroic and unrestrained posture..
After all, fighting consumes physical strength. After a lot of physical strength is
consumed, Tsunade will naturally die if she sleeps.
"Lin..." He Feng was about to speak, but Lin covered his mouth with her hand.
Lin's face was now red to her ears.
--------------------xxxx--------------------

Obviously she knew what she was doing.

Lin's personality is very gentle and calm, and she is willing to sacrifice and
sacrifice. Even if she faces casualties on the battlefield, she will not show any
signs of cowardice.
But when it came to her feelings for He Feng, Lin felt that she was too cowardly.
She had always liked him and been watching He Feng, but she just didn't dare to
really express her feelings.
Slowly, Lin saw that He Feng was possessed by Teacher Tsunade.
Her heart has been tortured, and every night, Lin often thinks about how great it
would be if the person beside He Feng was herself.
Today, Lin finally made a decision, no matter what the outcome, she must be brave
once!
This time, she will be one step ahead of Yuhi Kurenai!
Of course, Hefeng didn't know Lin's thoughts, otherwise he would have couldn't help
complaining: "Auntie, if you want to, just say no. Why do you have to risk your
life with me?"
Even He Feng couldn't help but praise him for stealing a man next to the tigress.
"He Feng, I..." Nohara Lin's voice was extremely soft. She didn't know what was
wrong with herself. She just felt that she was getting weirder and weirder.
As Lin's clothes fell off one by one, He Feng finally sighed: "Hey... what a sin."
As soon as the words fell, He Feng and Lin's figures disappeared.
This is He Feng using the Flying Thunder God technique to lead Lin to move
positions.
Although Tsunade was very kind to him and he liked Tsunade very much, He Feng
really didn't dare to bet on whether Tsunade's strange power punch was strong or
not.
What's more, Tsunade has mastered Wood Release now, and after He Feng's long-term
hard work, Tsunade's strength has been infinitely close to that of Chaokage. If
comparison is necessary, Tsunade's current strength is stronger than that of the
Third Raikage at his peak. of.
After He Feng and Lin disappeared, Tsunade suddenly opened her eyes.
"Xiao Lin, I didn't expect that you who are usually so shy would be quite brave at
this time." Tsunade smiled, then put on her clothes one by one and came to the
yard.
"It's time to give the young lovers some space to get along." Tsunade said to
herself, and then began to form seals. After some exchanges with the slugs, Tsunade
was brought to the wet bone forest by reverse spiritualism.
She will try to master the immortal mode again to reach the level of Grandpa.
After Tsunade left, Shizune also walked out of the corner. She opened the door to
Tsunade's room with some embarrassment and lay down on the big bed between Tsunade
and He Feng.
Shizune sniffed the lingering smell on the bed and murmured softly: "It's really
mine. Both Tsunade-sama and Xiaolin are so cunning. Obviously I also like He Feng's
words."
On the other side, He Feng took Lin to the mountain cemetery.
Although this place has been abandoned, Bai Jue has been cleaning the room where He
Feng once stayed.
"He Feng, can you kiss me?" Nohara Lin put her hands around the back of He Feng's
neck, and the love in her eyes seemed to overflow.
"Yes." He Feng nodded, then kissed him with his eyes closed.
At the same time, a romantic rain of cherry blossoms fell across the mountain
cemetery.
And as their lips touched, He Feng's body began to change.
Not only did he activate Muhua Xiaoye, he also entered the succubus state.
【The Succubus's Confidante has been included】
[Click to view]
【Name: Nohara Lin】
[Strength: Jōnin (Jōnin)]
【Age: 16】
【Experience: 1】
[Ability: medical ninjutsu, strange power, Yin seal, psychic...]
[Favorability: 100% (life and death)]
Lin smiled, an extremely satisfied smile.
If possible, she hopes that time can be suspended at this moment, so that she can
enjoy this wonderful time forever.
"..."
He Feng's ability is very domineering, especially after the succubus transformation
process was officially started, his improvement in the other half's strength was
extremely significant.
As Lin's experience points slowly increased, her strength almost changed day by
day.
If we have to make a comparison between before and after, then Nohara Rin’s chakra
was ten before this, then Nohara Rin’s chakra after that was one hundred.
Of course, this is also related to Lin's own strength.
Five days passed by in a flash.
In Konoha Village, neither Hatake Sakumo nor Orochimaru paid much attention to the
disappearance of He Feng.
After all, He Feng has to come here once a month, and he will naturally come back
after a week.
On this day, He Feng and Nohara Lin appeared on the streets of Konoha.
Lin's complexion was extremely full, and her whole person looked radiant, and He
Feng, who was being held by her side, was equally good.
As soon as He Feng's image appears, he will be the focus of everyone's attention.
If you meet someone bold and unrestrained, you might confess your love directly to
He Feng.
Therefore, Hefeng will not appear on Konoha Street unless necessary.
"Lin, go home and tell your uncle and aunt that you are safe. I'll leave first if I
have something else to do." He Feng let go of Lin's hand, and after a brief
explanation, he went directlyBy flying Thor left the streets.
After seeing He Feng disappear, some aunts sighed helplessly.
"What a beautiful little girl. If only she wasn't a ninja-sama, then my brat might
still be worthy of her."
She didn't think there was anything wrong with He Feng leaving Lin. She nodded,
still feeling sweet in her heart.
However, Lin did not go home to visit her parents as He Feng said, but walked in
another direction.
"I haven't seen Hong for a long time. I don't know what she is doing."

--------------------xxxx--------------------

for more novels (48300) join: https://discord.gg/SZxTKASsHqfor more novels

(49295)join: https://discord.gg/SZxTKASsHq